Wordfast Wiki - User contributions [en]

CountTerms

2024-01-17T09:03:00Z

Remiandre: /* countTerms */

[[Wordfast Anywhere TMs and glossaries API#cmds|Return to command list]]

= countTerms =
'''countTerms''' (string '''key''', int '''cmd''')

Count the number of entries of all the glossaries.

=== Parameters ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|'''key'''
|string
|a valid API Key, generated by making a share at www.freetm.com
|-
|'''cmd'''
|int
|command number is 502
|}

=== Returned value ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|connections
|array
|Detail of Terms count for each connection
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|'''id'''
|int
|connection ID
|-
|glos
|array
|Term counts
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|'''gloid'''
|int
|glossary ID
|-
|'''privateCount'''
|int
|private TU count
|-
|'''publicCount'''
|int
|public TU count
|-
|'''count'''
|int
|sum of private and public count
|}
|-
|'''error'''
|string
|error messages
|}
|}

=== Request example ===
==== json post with javascript ====
var data = {};
data["key"] = "example@key";
data["cmd"] = 502;
var xhr = new XMLHttpRequest();
xhr.open("POST", "anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api", true);
xhr.setRequestHeader("Content-Type", "application/json;charset=UTF-8");
xhr.send(JSON.stringify(data));

==== post ====
<form action="anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api" method="post">
<input type="text" id="key" name="key" value="example@key"/>
<input type="text" id="cmd" name="cmd" value="502"/>
<input type="submit" value="Submit">
</form>

==== get ====
anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api?key=example@key&cmd=502

=== Response example ===
==== json ====
{

"connections": [{
"id": 1
,"glos": [{
"gloid":1, "privateCount":0, "publicCount":0, "count":0
}
,{...}
]
,"error": ""
}
,{...}
]
}
without white space (new line, carriage return or tabulation).

==== text ====
id:1 '''LF'''
gloid:1 '''tab''' privateCount:0 '''tab''' publicCount:0 '''tab''' count:0 '''LF'''
error: '''LF'''

'''LF''' is a Line feed (new line \u000A) 
'''tab''' is a tabulation (\u0009)

=== Remarks ===
Timeout is 10 seconds

CountTus

2024-01-17T09:02:08Z

Remiandre: /* countTus */

[[Wordfast Anywhere TMs and glossaries API#cmds|Return to command list]]

= countTus =
'''countTus''' (string '''key''', int '''cmd''')

Count the number of Translation Units of all the TMs.

=== Parameters ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|'''key'''
|string
|a valid API Key, generated by making a share at www.freetm.com
|-
|'''cmd'''
|int
|command number is 501
|}

=== Returned value ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|connections
|array
|Detail of TUs count for each connection
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|'''id'''
|int
|connection ID
|-
|'''tms'''
|array
|TUs counts
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|'''tmid'''
|int
|TM ID
|-
|'''privateCount'''
|int
|private TU count
|-
|'''publicCount'''
|int
|public TU count
|-
|'''count'''
|int
|sum of private and public count
|}
|-
|'''error'''
|string
|error messages
|}
|}

=== Request example ===
==== json post with javascript ====
var data = {};
data["key"] = "example@key";
data["cmd"] = 501;
var xhr = new XMLHttpRequest();
xhr.open("POST", "anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api", true);
xhr.setRequestHeader("Content-Type", "application/json;charset=UTF-8");
xhr.send(JSON.stringify(data));

==== post ====
<form action="anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api" method="post">
<input type="text" id="key" name="key" value="example@key"/>
<input type="text" id="cmd" name="cmd" value="501"/>
<input type="submit" value="Submit">
</form>

==== get ====
anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api?key=example@key&cmd=501

=== Response example ===
==== json ====
{

"connections": [{
"id": 1
,"tms": [{
"tmid":1, "privateCount":0, "publicCount":0, "count":0
}
,{...}
]
,"error": ""
}
,{...}
]
}
without white space (new line, carriage return or tabulation).

==== text ====
id:1 '''LF'''
tmid:1 '''tab''' privateCount:0 '''tab''' publicCount:0 '''tab''' count:0 '''LF'''
error: '''LF'''

'''LF''' is a Line feed (new line \u000A) 
'''tab''' is a tabulation (\u0009)

=== Remarks ===
Timeout is 10 seconds

DeleteTerm

2024-01-17T09:01:20Z

Remiandre: /* DeleteTerm */

[[Wordfast Anywhere TMs and glossaries API#cmds|Return to command list]]

= DeleteTerm =
'''deleteTerm''' (string '''key''', int '''cmd''', int '''gloId''', string '''termId''')

Delete a terminology entry in the given glossary.

=== Parameters ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|'''key'''
|string
|a valid API Key, generated by making a share at www.freetm.com
|-
|'''cmd'''
|int
|command number is 53
|-
|'''gloId'''
|int
|glossary ID
|-
|'''termId'''
|string
|term ID coming from the last recent search. CAUTION, a search must done before deleting to get a valid termId.
|}

=== Returned value ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|'''success'''
|boolean
|result of the command (true or false)
|-
|'''error'''
|string
|error message
|}

=== Request example ===
==== json post with javascript ====
var data = {};
data["key"] = "example@key";
data["cmd"] = 53;
data["gloId"] = 1;
data["termId"] = "88474b70-5f70-11e4-aad0-5c539f6f39a2";
var xhr = new XMLHttpRequest();
xhr.open("POST", "anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api", true);
xhr.setRequestHeader("Content-Type", "application/json;charset=UTF-8");
xhr.send(JSON.stringify(data));

==== post ====
<form action="anywhere.wordfast.com./wfa/api" method="post">
Key: <input type="text" id="key" name="key" value="example@key"/>
Command: <input type="text" id="cmd" name="cmd" value="53"/>
Glo Id: <input type="text" id="gloId" name="gloId"/>
Term Id: <input type="text" id="termId" name="termId"/>
<input type="submit" value="Submit">
</form>

==== get ====
anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api?key=example@key&cmd=53&gloId=1&termId=88474b70-5f70-11e4-aad0-5c539f6f39a2

=== Response example ===
==== json ====
{
"success": true
,"error": ""
}

without white space (new line, carriage return or tabulation).

==== text ====
true
true or an error message

=== Remarks ===

DeleteTu

2024-01-17T09:00:30Z

Remiandre: /* DeleteTu */

[[Wordfast Anywhere TMs and glossaries API#cmds|Return to command list]]

= DeleteTu =
'''deleteTu''' (string '''key''', int '''cmd''', int '''tmId''', string '''tuId''')

Delete a Translation Unit from the given Translation Memory.

=== Parameters ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|'''key'''
|string
|a valid API Key, generated by making a share at www.freetm.com
|-
|'''cmd'''
|int
|command number is 9
|-
|'''tmId'''
|int
|Translation Memory ID
|-
|'''tuId'''
|string
|TU ID coming from the last recent search. CAUTION, a search must done before deleting to get a valid tuId.
|}

=== Returned value ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|'''success'''
|boolean
|result of the command (true or false)
|-
|'''error'''
|string
|error message
|}

=== Request example ===
==== json post with javascript ====
var data = {};
data["key"] = "example@key";
data["cmd"] = 9;
data["tmId"] = 1;
data["tuId"] = "88474b70-5f70-11e4-aad0-5c539f6f39a2";
var xhr = new XMLHttpRequest();
xhr.open("POST", "anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api", true);
xhr.setRequestHeader("Content-Type", "application/json;charset=UTF-8");
xhr.send(JSON.stringify(data));

==== post ====
<form action="anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api" method="post">
Key: <input type="text" id="key" name="key" value="example@key"/>
Command: <input type="text" id="cmd" name="cmd" value="9"/>
TM Id: <input type="text" id="tmId" name="tmId"/>
TU Id: <input type="text" id="tuId" name="tuId"/>
<input type="submit" value="Submit">
</form>

==== get ====
anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api?key=example@key&cmd=9&tmId=1&tuId=88474b70-5f70-11e4-aad0-5c539f6f39a2

=== Response example ===
==== json ====
{
"success": true
,"error": ""
}

without white space (new line, carriage return or tabulation).

==== text ====
true
true or an error message

=== Remarks ===

AddTerm

2024-01-17T08:59:41Z

Remiandre: /* addTerm */

[[Wordfast Anywhere TMs and glossaries API#cmds|Return to command list]]

= addTerm =
'''addTerm''' (string '''key''', int '''cmd''', string '''source''', string '''target''', string comment, string F1, string F2, string F3, boolean doNotAddDuplicate)

Add a term to the available glossaries in write mode. The number of glossaries in write mode is currently limited to one.

=== Parameters ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|'''key''' string
|string
|a valid API Key, generated by making a share at www.freetm.com
|-
|'''cmd'''
|int
|command number is 52
|-
|'''source'''
|string
|source segment
|-
|'''target'''
|string
|target segment
|-
|comment
|string
|optional - additional information on 3rd field
|-
|F1
|string
|'''optional''' - additional information on 4th field
|-
|F2
|string
|'''optional''' - additional information on 5th field
|-
|F3
|string
|optional - additional information on 6th field
|-
|doNotAddDuplicate
|boolean
|'''optional''' - Do not add an existing term. Default value is false.
|}

=== Returned value ===
==== glos ====
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|array
|Add result detail for each glossary
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|'''gloid'''
|int
|glossary ID
|-
|'''success'''
|boolean
|result of the command (true or false)
|-
|'''error'''
|string
|error message
|}
|}

=== Request example ===
==== json post with javascript ====
var data = {};
data["key"] = "example@key";
data["cmd"] = 52;
data["source"] = "fox";
data["target"] = "renard";
data["comment"] = "";
data["F1"] = "";
data["F2"] = "";
data["F3"] = "";
data["doNotAddDuplicate"] = false;
var xhr = new XMLHttpRequest();
xhr.open("POST", "anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api", true);
xhr.setRequestHeader("Content-Type", "application/json;charset=UTF-8");
xhr.send(JSON.stringify(data));

==== post ====
<form action="anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api" method="post">
Key: <input type="text" id="key" name="key" value="example@key"/>
Command: <input type="text" id="cmd" name="cmd" value="52"/>
Source: <textarea id="source" name="source" style="width: 500px; height: 60px;"/textarea>
Target: <textarea id="target" name="target" style="width: 500px; height: 60px;"/textarea>
Comment (optional): <input type="text" id="comment" name="comment" value="" class="optional"/>
F1 (optional): <input type="text" id="F1" name="F1" value="" class="optional"/>
F2 (optional): <input type="text" id="F2" name="F2" value="" class="optional"/>
F3 (optional): <input type="text" id="F3" name="F3" value="" class="optional"/>
doNotAddDuplicate(optional): <input type="text" id="doNotAddDuplicate" name="doNotAddDuplicate" value="0" class="optional"/>
<input type="submit" value="Submit">
</form>

==== get ====
anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api?key=example@key&cmd=52&source=xxx&target=yyy&doNotAddDuplicate=0

=== Response example ===
==== json ====
{
"glos": [{
"gloid":1
,"success": true
,"error": ""
}
,{
"gloid":2
,"success": false
,"error": "glossary is not opened"
}
,{...}
]
}

without white space (new line, carriage return or tabulation).

==== text ====
1 : true'''LF'''
2 : glossary is not opened'''LF'''

'''LF''' is a Line feed (new line \u000A)

=== Remarks ===
When the command is used with the "do not duplicate" option or within a batch, the priority is automatically decreased.

AddTu

2024-01-17T08:58:47Z

Remiandre: /* addTu */

[[Wordfast Anywhere TMs and glossaries API#cmds|Return to command list]]

= addTu =

'''addTu''' (string '''key''', int '''cmd''', string '''source''', string '''target''', boolean '''forceAttributes''', String tuDate, String userId, String attribute1, String attribute2, String attribute3, String attribute4, boolean doNotAddDuplicate)

Add a Translation Unit to the available Translation Memories in write mode. The number of TMs in write mode in currently limited to one.

=== Parameters ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|'''key'''
|string
|a valid API Key, generated by making a share at www.freetm.com
|-
|'''cmd'''
|int
|command number is 10
|-
|'''source'''
|string
|source segment
|-
|'''target'''
|string
|target segment
|-
|'''forceAttributes'''
|boolean
|The value of the remaining fields of a TU: the date, userID and attributes are set automatically. If you want to set your own values, forceAttributes should be set to true. Default value is false.
|-
|tuDate
|string
|'''optional''' - The date of creation of the TU. The default value is the date and time of the add. If you want to keep the date of an existing TU, you should set first forceAttribute parameter to true and respect the format: yyyyMMdd~hhmmss
|-
|userId
|string
|'''optional''' - The ID of the creator of the TU. The default value is an automatic ID generated by Wordfast Anywhere. If you want to set your own ID or keep the ID of an existing TU, you should set first forceAttributes parameter to true.
|-
|attribute1
|string
|'''optional''' - The first attribute. The default value is the value set on Wordfast Anywhere for the selected TM. If you want to set your own value or keep the value of an existing TU, you should set first forceAttributes parameter to true. If forceAttributes parameter is set to true, the default value is an empty string.
|-
|attribute2
|string
|'''optional''' - The second attribute. The default value is the value set on Wordfast Anywhere for the selected TM. If you want to set your own value or keep the value of an existing TU, you should set first forceAttributes parameter to true. If forceAttributes parameter is set to true, the default value is an empty string.
|-
|attribute3
|string
|'''optional''' - The third attribute. The default value is the value set on Wordfast Anywhere for the selected TM. If you want to set your own value or keep the value of an existing TU, you should set first forceAttributes parameter to true. If forceAttributes parameter is set to true, the default value is an empty string.
|-
|attribute4
|string
|'''optional''' - The forth attribute. The default value is the value set on Wordfast Anywhere for the selected TM. If you want to set your own value or keep the value of an existing TU, you should set first forceAttributes parameter to true. If forceAttributes parameter is set to true, the default value is an empty string.
|-
|doNotAddDuplicate
|boolean
|'''optional''' - If doNotAddDuplicate parameter is set to true, when you want to add a TU that is already existing in the TM, nothing is done. The default value is false because the TM server is asked to make a control of duplicate. if doNotAddDuplicate is set to true, a lower priority is applied to the command.
|}

=== Returned value ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|tms
|array
|Add result detail for each TM
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|'''tmid'''
|int
|TM ID
|-
|'''success'''
|boolean
|result of the command (true or false)
|-
|'''error'''
|string
|error message
|}
|}

=== Request example ===
==== json post with javascript ====
var data = {};
data["key"] = "example@key";
data["cmd"] = 10;
data["source"] = "The brown fox is jumping over the lazy dog.";
data["target"] = "Le renard brun saute par dessus le chien paresseux.";
data["forceAttributes"] = false;
data["doNotAddDuplicate"] = false;
var xhr = new XMLHttpRequest();
xhr.open("POST", "anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api", true);
xhr.setRequestHeader("Content-Type", "application/json;charset=UTF-8");
xhr.send(JSON.stringify(data));

==== post ====

<form action="anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api" method="post">
Key: <input type="text" id="key" name="key" value="example@key"/>
Command: <input type="text" id="cmd" name="cmd" value="10"/>
Source: <textarea id="source" name="source" style="width: 500px; height: 60px;"></textarea>
Target: <textarea id="target" name="target" style="width: 500px; height: 60px;"></textarea>
forceAttributes: <input type="text" id="forceAttributes" name="forceAttributes" value="0"/>
doNotAddDuplicate: <input type="text" id="doNotAddDuplicate" name="doNotAddDuplicate" value="0"/>
<input type="submit" value="Submit">
</form>

==== get ====

anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api?key=example@key&cmd=10&source=xxx&target=yyy&forceAttributes=0&doNotAddDuplicate=0

=== Response example ===
==== json ====
{

"tms": [{
"tmid":1
,"success": true
,"error": ""
}
,{
"tmid":2
,"success": false
,"error": "TM must be reorganized"
}
,{...}
]
}

without white space (new line, carriage return or tabulation).

==== text ====

1 : true'''LF''' 
2 : TM must be reorganized'''LF'''

'''LF''' is a Line feed (new line \u000A)

=== Remarks ===

When the command is used with the "do not duplicate" option or within a batch, the priority is automatically decreased.

SearchTuExt

2024-01-17T08:57:32Z

Remiandre: /* searchTuExt */

[[Wordfast Anywhere TMs and glossaries API#cmds|Return to command list]]

= searchTuExt =
'''searchTuExt''' (string '''key''', int '''cmd''', string '''query''', int pageOffset, int pageLength, boolean caseSensitive, boolean matchWholeWords, boolean onlyPublicTus, string creationUser, string dateFilter, string attr1, string attr2, string attr3, string attr4)

Search a word or phrase in the Translation Memory with Lucene-compatible format and with extended parameters and return a list of Translation Units containing this word or phrase. The matches are not scored.

=== Parameters ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|'''key'''
|string
|a valid API Key, generated by making a share at www.freetm.com
|-
|'''cmd'''
|int
|command number is 66
|-
|'''query'''
|string
|word or phrase in Lucene-compatible string format:
The query consists of keywords (or groups of keywords) surrounded by wildcards (+) (-), (*), which refine the search.
A group of keywords is framed in quotation marks "".
The symbols (+), (-) in front of a keyword (or group) indicate that the keyword must (+) or should not (-) appear.
(*) when placed at the end of keyword this symbol indicates that all the terms with identical root accepted.
Examples: +token -token* +"phrase token" -"phrase* token*"
|-
|pageOffset
|int
|'''optional''' search options - Page offset from 0 to 32767 default is 0.
|-
|pageLength
|int
|'''optional''' search options - Page length from 0 to 32767 default is 250.
|-
|caseSensitive
|boolean
|'''optional''' search options - Case sensitive - default value is false
|-
|matchWholeWords
|boolean
|'''optional''' search options - Match whole words - default value is false
|-
|onlyPublicTus
|boolean
|'''optional''' filter conditions - Only public Translation units - default value is false
|-
|creationUser
|string
|'''optional''' filter conditions - Filter on TU user ID like "Foobar" - default value an empty string
|-
|dateFilter
|string
|'''optional''' filter conditions - Filter on TU date, the format is [20131111~102010:20131111~101010] []-included true, {}-included false - default value an empty string
|-
|attr1
|string
|'''optional''' filter conditions - Filter on the value of TU attribute 1 - default value an empty string
|-
|attr2
|string
|'''optional''' filter conditions - Filter on the value of TU attribute 2 - default value an empty string
|-
|attr3
|string
|'''optional''' filter conditions - Filter on the value of TU attribute 3 - default value an empty string
|-
|attr4
|string
|'''optional''' filter conditions - Filter on the value of TU attribute 4 - default value an empty string
|}

=== Returned value ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|tus
|array
|TU details
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|'''tmId'''
|int
|Translation Memory ID
|-
|'''tuId'''
|string
|Translation Unit ID
|-
|'''date'''
|string
|
|-
|'''userId'''
|string
|user ID
|-
|'''srcLang'''
|string
|source language
|-
|'''source'''
|string
|source segment
|-
|'''trgLang'''
|string
|target language
|-
|'''target'''
|string
|target segment
|-
|'''attribute1'''
|string
|first attribute
|-
|'''attribute2'''
|string
|second attribute
|-
|'''attribute3'''
|string
|third attribute
|-
|'''attribute4'''
|string
|fourth attribute
|}
|}

=== Request example ===
==== json post with javascript ====
var data = {};
data["key"] = "example@key";
data["cmd"] = 66;
data["query"] = "+\"brown fox\"";
data["pageOffset"] = 0;
data["pageLength"] = 250;
data["caseSensitive"] = false;
data["matchWholeWords"] = false;
data["onlyPublicTus"] = false;
data["creationUser"] = "Foobar";
data["dateFilter"] = "";
data["attr1"] = "";
data["attr2"] = "";
data["attr3"] = "";
data["attr4"] = "";
var xhr = new XMLHttpRequest();
xhr.open("POST", "anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api", true);
xhr.setRequestHeader("Content-Type", "application/json;charset=UTF-8");
xhr.send(JSON.stringify(data));

==== post ====
<form action="anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api" method="post">
<input type="text" id="key" name="key" value="example@key"/>
<input type="text" id="cmd" name="cmd" value="15"/>
<textarea id="segment" name="query" style="width: 500px; height: 60px;">+"brown fox"</textarea>
<input type="text" id="pageOffset" name="pageOffset" value="0"/>
<input type="text" id="pageLength" name="pageLength" value="250"/>
<input type="text" id="caseSensitive" name="caseSensitive" value="0"/>
<input type="text" id="matchWholeWords" name="matchWholeWords" value="0"/>
<input type="text" id="onlyPublicTus" name="onlyPublicTus" value="0"/>
<input type="text" id="creationUser" name="creationUser" value="Foobar"/>
<input type="text" id="dateFilter" name="dateFilter" value=""/>
<input type="text" id="attr1" name="attr1" value=""/>
<input type="text" id="attr2" name="attr2" value=""/>
<input type="text" id="attr3" name="attr3" value=""/>
<input type="text" id="attr4" name="attr4" value=""/>
<input type="submit" value="Submit">
</form>

==== get ====
anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api?key=example@key&cmd=66&query=+"brown fox"&pageOffset=0&pageLength=50&caseSensitive=0&matchWholeWords=0
&onlyPublicTus=0&creationUser=Foobar&dateFilter=&attr1=&attr2=&attr3=&attr4=

=== Response example ===
==== json ====
{ "tus": [ {
"tmId": 1
,"tuId": "81444b70-5f70-11e4-aad0-5c514f6f39a2"
,"date": "0140725~174345"
,"userId": "DGfMDw"
,"usageCount": 0
,"srcLang": "EN"
,"source": "The brown fox is jumping over the lazy dog"
,"trgLang": "FR"
,"target": "Le renard brun saute par dessus le chien paresseux"
,"attribute1": ""
,"attribute2": ""
,"attribute3": ""
,"attribute4": ""
}
,{...}
]
}
without white space (new line, carriage return or tabulation).

==== text ====
1 '''tab''' 81444b70-5f70-11e4-aad0-5c514f6f39a2 '''tab''' 0140725~174345 '''tab''' DGfMDw '''tab''' 0 '''tab''' EN '''tab''' The brown fox is jumping over the lazy dog. '''tab''' FR '''tab''' Le renard brun saute par dessus le chien paresseux. '''tab''' '''tab''' '''tab''' LF

'''LF''' is Line Feed (\u000A) 
'''tab''' is a tabulation (\u0009)

return 000 is nothing is found

=== Remarks ===
The following operators can be used in the filter expressions: "=", "<", ">", "<=", ">=", "<>", "Э", "Є","!=", "!<", "!>", "!Э",!Є"

SearchTu

2024-01-17T08:56:13Z

Remiandre: /* searchTu */

[[Wordfast Anywhere TMs and glossaries API#cmds|Return to command list]]

= searchTu =
'''searchTu''' (string '''key''', int '''cmd''', string '''query''')

Search a word or phrase in the Translation Memory and return a list of Translation Units containing this word or phrase. It is a concordance search and the command duration is more long than the searchSegment command and may return lots of matches. The matches are not scored.

=== Parameters ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|'''key'''
|string
|a valid API Key, generated by making a share at www.freetm.com
|-
|'''cmd'''
|int
|command number is 15
|-
|'''query'''
|string
|word or phrase
|}

=== Returned value ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|tus
|array
|TU details
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|'''tmId'''
|int
|Translation Memory ID
|-
|'''tuId'''
|string
|Translation Unit ID
|-
|'''date'''
|string
|
|-
|'''userId'''
|string
|user ID
|-
|'''srcLang'''
|string
|source language
|-
|'''source'''
|string
|source segment
|-
|'''trgLang'''
|string
|target language
|-
|'''target'''
|string
|target segment
|-
|'''attribute1'''
|string
|first attribute
|-
|'''attribute2'''
|string
|second attribute
|-
|'''attribute3'''
|string
|third attribute
|-
|'''attribute4'''
|string
|fourth attribute
|}
|}

=== Request example ===
==== json post with javascript ====
var data = {};
data["key"] = "example@key";
data["cmd"] = 15;
data["query"] = "brown fox";
var xhr = new XMLHttpRequest();
xhr.open("POST", "anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api", true);
xhr.setRequestHeader("Content-Type", "application/json;charset=UTF-8");
xhr.send(JSON.stringify(data));

==== post ====
<form action="anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api" method="post">
Key: <input type="text" id="key" name="key" value="example@key"/>
Command: <input type="text" id="cmd" name="cmd" value="15"/>
query: <textarea id="segment" name="query" style="width: 500px; height: 60px;">brown fox</textarea>
<input type="submit" value="Submit">
</form>

==== get ====
anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api?key=example@key&cmd=15&segment=brown%20fox

=== Response example ===
==== json ====
{ "tus": [ {
"tmId": 1
,"tuId": "81444b70-5f70-11e4-aad0-5c514f6f39a2"
,"date": "0140725~174345"
,"userId": "DGfMDw"
,"usageCount": 0
,"srcLang": "EN"
,"source": "The brown fox is jumping over the lazy dog"
,"trgLang": "FR"
,"target": "Le renard brun saute par dessus le chien paresseux"
,"attribute1": ""
,"attribute2": ""
,"attribute3": ""
,"attribute4": ""
}
,{...}
]
}
without white space (new line, carriage return or tabulation).

==== text ====
1 '''tab''' 81444b70-5f70-11e4-aad0-5c514f6f39a2 '''tab''' 0140725~174345 '''tab''' DGfMDw '''tab''' 0 '''tab''' EN '''tab''' The brown fox is jumping over the lazy dog. '''tab''' FR '''tab''' Le renard brun saute par dessus le chien paresseux. '''tab''' '''tab''' '''tab''' '''LF'''
'''LF''' is Line Feed (\u000A) 
'''tab''' is a tabulation (\u0009)

return 000 is nothing is found

=== Remarks ===

SearchTerm

2024-01-17T08:54:52Z

Remiandre: /* searchTerm */

[[Wordfast Anywhere TMs and glossaries API#cmds|Return to command list]]

= searchTerm =
'''searchTerm''' (string '''key''', int '''cmd''', string '''query''')

Search terms from a segment or search a simple term or phrase in the glossary and return the list of found terms.

=== Parameters ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|'''key'''
|string
|a valid API Key, generated by making a share at www.freetm.com
|-
|'''cmd'''
|int
|command number is 51
|-
|'''query'''
|string
|term, phrase or source sentence to search in the glossary
|}

=== Returned value ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|terms
|array
|Term details
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|'''gloId'''
|int
|glossary ID
|-
|'''termId'''
|string
|term ID - mandatory for deleteTerm command.
|-
|'''source'''
|string
|source term
|-
|'''target'''
|string
|target term
|-
|'''comment'''
|string
|first attribute
|-
|'''F1'''
|string
|second attribute
|-
|'''F2'''
|string
|third attribute
|-
|'''F3'''
|string
|fourth attribute
|}
|}

=== Request example ===
==== json post with javascript ====
var data = {};
data["key"] = "example@key";
data["cmd"] = 51;
data["query"] = "The brown fox is jumping over the lazy dog";
var xhr = new XMLHttpRequest();
xhr.open("POST", "anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api", true);
xhr.setRequestHeader("Content-Type", "application/json;charset=UTF-8");
xhr.send(JSON.stringify(data));

==== post ====
<form action="anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api" method="post">
Key: <input type="text" id="key" name="key" value="example@key"/>
Command: <input type="text" id="cmd" name="cmd" value="51"/>
Query: <textarea id="query" name="query" style="width: 500px; height: 60px;"></textarea>
<input type="submit" value="Submit">
</form>

==== get ====
anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api?key=example@key&cmd=51&query=the%20brown%20fox%20is%20jumping%20over%20the%lazy%dog

=== Response example ===
==== json ====
{ "terms": [{
"gloId": 1
,"termId": "88474b70-5f70-11e4-aad0-5c539f6f39a2"
,"source": "fox"
,"target": "renard"
,"comment": ""
,"F1": ""
,"F2": ""
,"F3": ""
}
,{...}
]
}
without white space (new line, carriage return or tabulation).

==== text ====
1 '''tab''' 88474b70-5f70-11e4-aad0-5c539f6f39a2 '''tab''' fox '''tab''' renard '''tab''' '''tab''' '''tab''' '''tab''' '''LF'''
'''LF''' is Line Feed (\u000A)
'''tab''' is a tabulation (\u0009)

=== Remarks ===

SearchSegment

2024-01-17T08:53:20Z

Remiandre: /* searchSegment */

[[Wordfast Anywhere TMs and glossaries API#cmds|Return to command list]]

= searchSegment =
'''searchSegment''' (string '''key''', int '''cmd''', string '''segment''', int fuzzyThreshold, int timeout, boolean untranslatable, int penaltyCase, double penaltyTag, double penaltyNonLiteral, int penaltyAlign, int penaltyMT, int penaltyPublic, int penaltyPrivate, int penaltyMultiTrans, int penaltyAttribute, boolean custom1, boolean custom2, boolean custom3, boolean custom4)

Search a segment in the TM and return the list of found Translation Units in the Translation Memory, and if the '''joinTmGlo''' parameter of the Connect command is true, return also the list of terms found in the associated glossary.

=== Parameters ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|-
|'''key'''
|string
|a valid API Key, generated by making a share at www.freetm.com
|-
|'''cmd'''
|int
|command number is 5
|-
|'''segment'''
|string
|source sentence to search in the TM
|-
|fuzzyThreshold
|int
|'''optional''' - percentage of similarity - default value is 70
|-
|timeout
|int
|'''optional''' - search timeout - default value is 5000 ms
|-
|untranslatable
|boolean
|'''optional''' - do not search small segment assumed untranslatable (return a build TU with an empty TM)- default value is false
|-
|penaltyCase
|int
|'''optional''' - case penalty - default value is 1
|-
|penaltyTag
|double
|'''optional''' - tag penalty - default value is 0.5 with sum of occurrences limited between 1 and 10
|-
|penaltyNonLiteral
|double
|'''optional''' - non literal penalty - default value is 0.5 with sum of occurrences limited between 1 and 10
|-
|penaltyAlign
|int
|'''optional''' - alignment penalty - default value is 3
|-
|penaltyMT
|int
|optional - Machine Translation penalty - default value is 15
|-
|penaltyPublic
|int
|'''optional''' - penalty for public TU - default value is 0
|-
|penaltyPrivate
|int
|optional - penalty for private TU - default value is 0
|-
|penaltyMultiTrans
|int
|optional - penalty for multiple full match translation - default value is 0
|-
|penaltyAttribute
|int
|'''optional''' - penalty for TU not having required attribute (custom1, 2, 3 or 4) - default value is 0
|-
|custom1
|boolean
|optional - check custom1 attribute - default value is false
|-
|custom2
|boolean
|'''optional''' - check custom2 attribute - default value is false
|-
|custom3
|boolean
|optional - check custom3 attribute - default value is false
|-
|custom4
|boolean
|'''optional''' - check custom4 attribute - default value is false
|}

=== Returned value ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|-
|'''tus'''
|array
|TU details
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|-
|'''tmId'''
|int
|Translation Memory ID
|-
|'''tuId'''
|string
|Translation Unit ID - mandatory for deleteTu command
|-
|'''score'''
|string
|search score
|-
|'''date'''
|string
|
|-
|'''userId'''
|string
|user ID
|-
|'''srcLang'''
|string
|source language
|-
|'''source'''
|string
|source segment
|-
|'''trgLang'''
|string
|target language
|-
|'''target'''
|string
|target segment
|-
|'''attribute1'''
|string
|first attribute
|-
|'''attribute2'''
|string
|second attribute
|-
|'''attribute3'''
|string
|third attribute
|-
|'''attribute4'''
|string
|fourth attribute
|}
|-
|terms
|array
|'''optional''' - Term details if the '''joinTmGlo''' parameter of the Connect command is true
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|-
|'''gloId'''
|int
|glossary ID
|-
|'''termId'''
|string
|term ID - mandatory for deleteTerm command.
|-
|'''source'''
|string
|source term
|-
|'''target'''
|string
|target term
|-
|'''comment'''
|string
|first attribute
|-
|'''F1'''
|string
|second attribute
|-
|'''F2'''
|string
|third attribute
|-
|'''F3'''
|string
|fourth attribute
|}
|}

=== Request example ===
==== json post with javascript ====
var data = {};
data["key"] = "example@key";
data["cmd"] = 5;
data["segment"] = "The brown fox is jumping over the lazy dog";
data["fuzzyThreshold"] = 70;
data["searchTimeout"] = 5000;
data["untranslatable"] = false;
data["penaltyCase"] = 1;
data["penaltyTag"] = 0.5;
data["penaltyNonLiteral"] = 0.5;
data["penaltyAlign"] = 3;
data["penaltyMT"] = 15;
data["penaltyPublic"] = 0;
data["penaltyPrivate"] = 0;
data["penaltyMultiTrans"] = 0;
data["penaltyAttribute"] = 1;
data["custom1"] = false;
data["custom2"] = false;
data["custom3"] = false;
data["custom4"] = false;
var xhr = new XMLHttpRequest();
xhr.open("POST", "anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api", true);
xhr.setRequestHeader("Content-Type", "application/json;charset=UTF-8");
xhr.send(JSON.stringify(data));

==== post ====
<form action="anywhere.wordfast./wfa/api" method="post">
Key: <input type="text" id="key" name="key" value="example@key"/>
Command: <input type="text" id="cmd" name="cmd" value="5"/>
Segment: <textarea id="segment" name="segment" style="width: 500px; height: 60px;"/textarea>
Fuzzy Threshold (optional): <input type="text" id="fuzzyThreshold" name="fuzzyThreshold" value="70" class="optional"/>
Timeout (optional): <input type="text" id="searchTimeout" name="searchTimeout" value="5000" class="optional"/>
Untranslatable (optional): <input type="checkbox" id="untranslatable" name="untranslatable" checked class="optional"/>
Penalty Case (optional): <input type="text" id="penaltyCase" name="penaltyCase" value="1" class="optional"/>
Penalty Tag (optional): <input type="text" id="penaltyTag" name="penaltyTag" value="0.5" class="optional"/>
Penalty Non Literal (optional): <input type="text" id="penaltyNonLiteral" name="penaltyNonLiteral" value="0.5" class="optional"/>
Penalty Align (optional): <input type="text" id="penaltyAlign" name="penaltyAlign" value="3" class="optional"/>
Penalty MT (optional): <input type="text" id="penaltyMT" name="penaltyMT" value="15" class="optional"/>
Penalty Public (optional): <input type="text" id="penaltyPublic" name="penaltyPublic" value="0" class="optional"/>
Penalty Private (optional): <input type="text" id="penaltyPrivate" name="penaltyPrivate" value="0" class="optional"/>
Penalty MultiTrans (optional): <input type="text" id="penaltyMultiTrans" name="penaltyMultiTrans" value="0" class="optional"/>
Penalty Attribute (optional): <input type="text" id="penaltyAttribute" name="penaltyAttribute" value="0" class="optional"/>
Custom1 (optional): <input type="checkbox" id="custom1" name="custom1" class="optional"/>
Custom2 (optional): <input type="checkbox" id="custom2" name="custom2" class="optional"/>
Custom3 (optional): <input type="checkbox" id="custom3" name="custom3" class="optional"/>
Custom4 (optional): <input type="checkbox" id="custom4" name="custom4" class="optional"/>
<input type="submit" value="Submit">
</form>

==== get ====
anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api?key=example@key&cmd=5&segment=the%20brown%20fox%20is%20jumping%20over%20the%lazy%dog

=== Response example ===
==== json ====
{ "tus": [ {
"tmId": 1
,"tuId": "81444b70-5f70-11e4-aad0-5c514f6f39a2"
,"score": 100
,"date": "0140725~174345"
,"userId": "DGfMDw"
,"usageCount": 0
,"srcLang": "EN"
,"source": "The brown fox is jumping over the lazy dog"
,"trgLang": "FR"
,"target": "Le renard brun saute par dessus le chien paresseux"
,"attribute1": ""
,"attribute2": ""
,"attribute3": ""
,"attribute4": ""
}
,{...}
]
,"terms": [{
"gloId": 1
,"termId": "88474b70-5f70-11e4-aad0-5c539f6f39a2"
,"source": "fox"
,"target": "renard"
,"comment": ""
,"F1": ""
,"F2": ""
,"F3": ""
}
,{...}
]
}
without white space (new line, carriage return or tabulation).

==== text ====
1 '''tab''' 81444b70-5f70-11e4-aad0-5c514f6f39a2 '''tab''' 100 '''tab''' 0140725~174345 '''tab''' DGfMDw '''tab''' 0 '''tab''' EN '''tab''' The brown fox is jumping over the lazy dog. '''tab'''
FR '''tab''' Le renard brun saute par dessus le chien paresseux. '''tab''' '''tab''' '''tab''' '''LF'''
'''CR'''
1 '''tab''' 88474b70-5f70-11e4-aad0-5c539f6f39a2 '''tab''' fox '''tab''' renard ''''tab''' '''tab''' '''tab''' '''tab''' '''LF'''

'''LF''' is Line Feed (\u000A) 
'''CR''' is Carriage Return (\u000D) 
'''tab''' is a tabulation (\u0009)

return 000 is nothing is found

=== Remarks ===

Disconnect

2024-01-17T08:39:54Z

Remiandre: /* disconnect */

[[Wordfast Anywhere TMs and glossaries API#cmds|Return to command list]]

= disconnect =
'''disconnect''' (string '''key''', int '''cmd''')

Disconnect all the TMs and glossaries.

=== Parameters ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|-
|'''key'''
|string
|a valid API Key, generated by making a share at www.freetm.com

|-
|'''cmd'''
|int
|command number is 25
|}

=== Returned value ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|-
|connections
|array
|Disconnect error by connection if any
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|-
|'''id'''
|int
|connection ID
|-
|'''success'''
|Boolean
|result of the command (true or false)
|-
|'''error'''
|string
|error message
|}
|}

=== Request example ===
==== json post with javascript ====
var data = {};
data["key"] = "example@key";
data["cmd"] = 25;
var xhr = new XMLHttpRequest();
xhr.open("POST", "anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api", true);
xhr.setRequestHeader("Content-Type", "application/json;charset=UTF-8");
xhr.send(JSON.stringify(data));

==== post ====
<form action="anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api" method="post">
<input type="text" id="key" name="key" value="example@key"/>
<input type="text" id="cmd" name="cmd" value="25"/>
<input type="submit" value="Submit">
</form>

==== get ====
anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api?key=example@key&cmd=25

=== Response example ===
==== json ====
{
"connections": [
{
"id": 1
,"success": true
,"error": ""
}
,{
"id": 2
,"success": false
,"error": "unknown error"
}
,{...}
]
}
without white space (new line, carriage return or tabulation).

==== text ====
1 : true '''LF'''
2 : unknown error '''LF'''
LF is a Line feed (new line \u000A)

=== Remarks ===
Timeout is 30 seconds

Wordfast Anywhere TMs and glossaries API

2024-01-17T08:38:23Z

Remiandre: /* Terms and conditions */

== Terms and conditions ==

Wordfast Anywhere API is REST and all methods are accessed via: https://anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api.
 First of all you need to register to the free online Wordfast Anywhere application at http://anywhere.wordfast.com
 The API will allow to connect any external application to Wordfast Anywhere TMs and glossaries.
 A key is required for all the commands of the API.
 The API key is generated by making a share of TMs and glossaries in Wordfast Anywhere.
 The API usage is free but the number of keys is limited to 5.

Go to '''Wordfast Anywhere''' menu => '''Setup TM&Glo'''. Open the sharing dialog by Clicking on the '''Manage Sharing''' button => '''Add''' button for '''My shares to application'''.

== Data formats ==
=== Passing Request Data ===
Request data is passed to the API by POSTing JSON objects to the API endpoints with the appropriate parameters. The documentation for each API call will contain more detail on the parameters accepted by the call.

As an alternative, you can also use HTTP POST parameters and even use the HTTP GET method, but usage of the GET method is discouraged.

=== Output Formats ===
We support 2 output formats: json (default) and text. The response data for each call will the be encoded in the specified format.

== API calls ==
==== Command list: ====

*[[connect]]
*[[disconnect]]
*[[searchSegment]]
*[[searchTerm]]
*[[searchTu]]
*[[searchTuExt]]
*[[addTu]]
*[[addTerm]]
*[[deleteTu]]
*[[deleteTerm]]
*[[countTus]]
*[[countTerms]]

== Test the API calls ==
https://anywhere.wordfast.com/testapi.html

Connect

2024-01-17T08:37:20Z

Remiandre: /* connect */

[[Wordfast Anywhere TMs and glossaries API#cmds|Return to command list]]

= connect =
'''connect''' (string '''key''', int '''cmd''')
 Connect to the TMs and glossaries.

=== Parameters ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"

|-
|'''key'''
|string
|a valid API Key, generated by making a share at www.freetm.com

|-
|'''cmd'''
|int
|command number is 22

|}

=== Returned value ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|-
|connections
|array
|connection details
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|-
|id
|int
|connection ID
|-
|type
|string
|connection type
|-
|wkgid
|string
|workgroup ID
|-
|userId
|string
|user ID
|-
|tms
|array
|TM detail
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|tmid
|int
|TM ID
|-
|srcLang
|string
|source language
|-
|trgLang
|string
|target language
|-
|name
|string
|assigned or symbolic name
|-
|readonly
|boolean
|read/write status
|}
|-
|glos
|array
|glossary detail
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|gloid
|int
|glossary ID
|-
|srcLang
|string
|source language
|-
|trgLang
|string
|target language
|-
|name
|string
|assigned or symbolic name
|-
|readonly
|boolean
|read/write status
|}
|-
|error
|string
|error during connection

|}
|}

=== Request example ===
==== json post with javascript ====

var data = {};
data["key"] = "example@key";
data["cmd"] = 22;
ar xhr = new XMLHttpRequest();
xhr.open("POST", "anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api", true);
xhr.setRequestHeader("Content-Type", "application/json;charset=UTF-8");
xhr.send(JSON.stringify(data));

==== post ====
<form action="anywhere.wordfast/wfa/api" method="post">
Key:<input type="text" id="key" name="key" value="example@key"/>
Cmd:<input type="text" id="cmd" name="cmd" value="22"/>
<input type="submit" value="Submit">
</form>

==== get ====
anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api?key=example@key&cmd=22

=== Response example ===
==== json ====
{

"connections": [{
"id": 1
,"type": "WFA"
,"wkgid": "#TC4=XNTd6"
,"userId": "g7PWd4"
,"tms": [{
"tmid":1, "srcLang":"DE-DE", "trglang":"EN-US", "name":"cat", "readonly":"false"
}
,{...}
]
,"glos": [{
"gloid":1, "srcLang":"DE-DE", "trglang":"EN-US", "name":"cat", "readonly":"false"
}
,{...}
]
,"error": ""
}
,{...}
]
}
without white space (new line, carriage return or tabulation).

==== text ====
id:1 '''LF'''
type:WFA '''LF'''
wkgid:#TC4=XNTd6 '''LF'''
userId: g7PWd4 '''LF'''
tmid:1 '''tab''' srcLang:DE-DE '''tab''' trglang:EN-US '''tab''' name:cat '''tab''' readonly:false '''LF'''
gloid:2 '''tab''' srcLang:DE-DE '''tab''' trglang:EN-US '''tab''' name:cat '''tab''' readonly:false '''LF'''
error: '''LF'''

LF is a Line feed (new line \u000A)
tab is a tabulation (\u0009)

=== Remarks ===
Timeout is 30 seconds
 TM types are WFA (hosted by Wordfast TM server having only private TUs), SPE (A specific TM hosted by someone else and may contain public and private TUs), VLTM (Very Large TM Server hosted by Wordfast having a limited number of TMs containing only public TUs)
 Glossary types are WFA, SPE, IATE.

Connect

2024-01-17T08:13:32Z

Remiandre: /* post */

[[Wordfast Anywhere TMs and glossaries API#cmds|Return to command list]]

= connect =
'''connect''' (string '''key''', int '''cmd''')
 Connect to the TMs and glossaries.

=== Parameters ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"

|-
|'''key'''
|string
|a valid API Key, generated by making a share at www.freetm.com

|-
|'''cmd'''
|int
|command number is 22

|}

=== Returned value ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|-
|connections
|array
|connection details
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|-
|id
|int
|connection ID
|-
|type
|string
|connection type
|-
|wkgid
|string
|workgroup ID
|-
|userId
|string
|user ID
|-
|tms
|array
|TM detail
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|tmid
|int
|TM ID
|-
|srcLang
|string
|source language
|-
|trgLang
|string
|target language
|-
|name
|string
|assigned or symbolic name
|-
|readonly
|boolean
|read/write status
|}
|-
|glos
|array
|glossary detail
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|gloid
|int
|glossary ID
|-
|srcLang
|string
|source language
|-
|trgLang
|string
|target language
|-
|name
|string
|assigned or symbolic name
|-
|readonly
|boolean
|read/write status
|}
|-
|error
|string
|error during connection

|}
|}

=== Request example ===
==== json post with javascript ====

var data = {};
data["key"] = "example@key";
data["cmd"] = 22;
data["joinTmGloInOneConnection"] = false; //optional
ar xhr = new XMLHttpRequest();
xhr.open("POST", "www.freetm.com/wfa/api", true);
xhr.setRequestHeader("Content-Type", "application/json;charset=UTF-8");
xhr.send(JSON.stringify(data));

==== post ====
<form action="anywhere.wordfast/wfa/api" method="post">
Key:<input type="text" id="key" name="key" value="example@key"/>
Cmd:<input type="text" id="cmd" name="cmd" value="22"/>
<input type="submit" value="Submit">
</form>

==== get ====
www.freetm.com/wfa/api?key=example@key&cmd=22

=== Response example ===
==== json ====
{

"connections": [{
"id": 1
,"type": "WFA"
,"wkgid": "#TC4=XNTd6"
,"userId": "g7PWd4"
,"tms": [{
"tmid":1, "srcLang":"DE-DE", "trglang":"EN-US", "name":"cat", "readonly":"false"
}
,{...}
]
,"glos": [{
"gloid":1, "srcLang":"DE-DE", "trglang":"EN-US", "name":"cat", "readonly":"false"
}
,{...}
]
,"error": ""
}
,{...}
]
}
without white space (new line, carriage return or tabulation).

==== text ====
id:1 '''LF'''
type:WFA '''LF'''
wkgid:#TC4=XNTd6 '''LF'''
userId: g7PWd4 '''LF'''
tmid:1 '''tab''' srcLang:DE-DE '''tab''' trglang:EN-US '''tab''' name:cat '''tab''' readonly:false '''LF'''
gloid:2 '''tab''' srcLang:DE-DE '''tab''' trglang:EN-US '''tab''' name:cat '''tab''' readonly:false '''LF'''
error: '''LF'''

LF is a Line feed (new line \u000A)
tab is a tabulation (\u0009)

=== Remarks ===
Timeout is 30 seconds
 TM types are WFA (hosted by Wordfast TM server having only private TUs), SPE (A specific TM hosted by someone else and may contain public and private TUs), VLTM (Very Large TM Server hosted by Wordfast having a limited number of TMs containing only public TUs)
 Glossary types are WFA, SPE and TMGR (A specific type imported as a read-only WFA type)

Connect

2024-01-17T08:01:19Z

Remiandre: /* Parameters */

[[Wordfast Anywhere TMs and glossaries API#cmds|Return to command list]]

= connect =
'''connect''' (string '''key''', int '''cmd''')
 Connect to the TMs and glossaries.

=== Parameters ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"

|-
|'''key'''
|string
|a valid API Key, generated by making a share at www.freetm.com

|-
|'''cmd'''
|int
|command number is 22

|}

=== Returned value ===
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|-
|connections
|array
|connection details
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|-
|id
|int
|connection ID
|-
|type
|string
|connection type
|-
|wkgid
|string
|workgroup ID
|-
|userId
|string
|user ID
|-
|tms
|array
|TM detail
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|tmid
|int
|TM ID
|-
|srcLang
|string
|source language
|-
|trgLang
|string
|target language
|-
|name
|string
|assigned or symbolic name
|-
|readonly
|boolean
|read/write status
|}
|-
|glos
|array
|glossary detail
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"
|gloid
|int
|glossary ID
|-
|srcLang
|string
|source language
|-
|trgLang
|string
|target language
|-
|name
|string
|assigned or symbolic name
|-
|readonly
|boolean
|read/write status
|}
|-
|error
|string
|error during connection

|}
|}

=== Request example ===
==== json post with javascript ====

var data = {};
data["key"] = "example@key";
data["cmd"] = 22;
data["joinTmGloInOneConnection"] = false; //optional
ar xhr = new XMLHttpRequest();
xhr.open("POST", "www.freetm.com/wfa/api", true);
xhr.setRequestHeader("Content-Type", "application/json;charset=UTF-8");
xhr.send(JSON.stringify(data));

==== post ====
<form action="www.freetm/wfa/api" method="post">
Key:<input type="text" id="key" name="key" value="example@key"/>
Cmd:<input type="text" id="cmd" name="cmd" value="22"/>
Join TmGlo Connections (optional)<input type="checkbox" id="joinTmGloInOneConnection" name="joinTmGloInOneConnection"/>
<input type="submit" value="Submit">
</form>

==== get ====
www.freetm.com/wfa/api?key=example@key&cmd=22

=== Response example ===
==== json ====
{

"connections": [{
"id": 1
,"type": "WFA"
,"wkgid": "#TC4=XNTd6"
,"userId": "g7PWd4"
,"tms": [{
"tmid":1, "srcLang":"DE-DE", "trglang":"EN-US", "name":"cat", "readonly":"false"
}
,{...}
]
,"glos": [{
"gloid":1, "srcLang":"DE-DE", "trglang":"EN-US", "name":"cat", "readonly":"false"
}
,{...}
]
,"error": ""
}
,{...}
]
}
without white space (new line, carriage return or tabulation).

==== text ====
id:1 '''LF'''
type:WFA '''LF'''
wkgid:#TC4=XNTd6 '''LF'''
userId: g7PWd4 '''LF'''
tmid:1 '''tab''' srcLang:DE-DE '''tab''' trglang:EN-US '''tab''' name:cat '''tab''' readonly:false '''LF'''
gloid:2 '''tab''' srcLang:DE-DE '''tab''' trglang:EN-US '''tab''' name:cat '''tab''' readonly:false '''LF'''
error: '''LF'''

LF is a Line feed (new line \u000A)
tab is a tabulation (\u0009)

=== Remarks ===
Timeout is 30 seconds
 TM types are WFA (hosted by Wordfast TM server having only private TUs), SPE (A specific TM hosted by someone else and may contain public and private TUs), VLTM (Very Large TM Server hosted by Wordfast having a limited number of TMs containing only public TUs)
 Glossary types are WFA, SPE and TMGR (A specific type imported as a read-only WFA type)

Wordfast Anywhere TMs and glossaries API

2024-01-17T07:59:28Z

Remiandre: /* Terms and conditions */

== Terms and conditions ==

Wordfast Anywhere API is REST and all methods are accessed via: https://anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api.
 First of all you need to register to the free online Wordfast Anywhere application at http://anywhere.wordfast.com
 The API will allow to connect any external application to Wordfast Anywhere TMs and glossaries.
 A key is required for all the commands of the API.
 The API key is generated by making a share of TMs and glossaries in Wordfast Anywhere.
 The API usage is free but the number of keys is limited to 5.

Go to '''Wordfast Anywhere''' menu => '''Setup TM&Glo'''. Open the sharing dialog by Clicking on the '''Advanced Sharing''' button => '''Add''' button for '''My shares to application'''.

== Data formats ==
=== Passing Request Data ===
Request data is passed to the API by POSTing JSON objects to the API endpoints with the appropriate parameters. The documentation for each API call will contain more detail on the parameters accepted by the call.

As an alternative, you can also use HTTP POST parameters and even use the HTTP GET method, but usage of the GET method is discouraged.

=== Output Formats ===
We support 2 output formats: json (default) and text. The response data for each call will the be encoded in the specified format.

== API calls ==
==== Command list: ====

*[[connect]]
*[[disconnect]]
*[[searchSegment]]
*[[searchTerm]]
*[[searchTu]]
*[[searchTuExt]]
*[[addTu]]
*[[addTerm]]
*[[deleteTu]]
*[[deleteTerm]]
*[[countTus]]
*[[countTerms]]

== Test the API calls ==
https://anywhere.wordfast.com/testapi.html

Wordfast Anywhere TMs and glossaries API

2024-01-17T07:50:49Z

Remiandre:

== Terms and conditions ==

Wordfast Anywhere API is REST and all methods are accessed via: https://anywhere.wordfast.com/wfa/api.
 First of all you need to register to the free online Wordfast Anywhere application at http://anywhere.wordfast.com
 The API will allow to connect any external application to Wordfast Anywhere TMs and glossaries.
 A key is required for all the commands of the API.
 The API key is generated by making a share of TMs and glossaries in Wordfast Anywhere.
 The API usage is free but the number of keys is limited to 5.

Go to '''File''' menu => '''TMs and glossaries'''. Open the sharing dialog by Clicking on the '''Sharing''' button => '''Add''' button for '''My shares to application'''.

== Data formats ==
=== Passing Request Data ===
Request data is passed to the API by POSTing JSON objects to the API endpoints with the appropriate parameters. The documentation for each API call will contain more detail on the parameters accepted by the call.

As an alternative, you can also use HTTP POST parameters and even use the HTTP GET method, but usage of the GET method is discouraged.

=== Output Formats ===
We support 2 output formats: json (default) and text. The response data for each call will the be encoded in the specified format.

== API calls ==
==== Command list: ====

*[[connect]]
*[[disconnect]]
*[[searchSegment]]
*[[searchTerm]]
*[[searchTu]]
*[[searchTuExt]]
*[[addTu]]
*[[addTerm]]
*[[deleteTu]]
*[[deleteTerm]]
*[[countTus]]
*[[countTerms]]

== Test the API calls ==
https://anywhere.wordfast.com/testapi.html

Wordfast Anywhere Release Notes

2023-10-03T11:16:44Z

Remiandre:

{{Languages}}
[[Category:Wordfast Anywhere]] 

{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 7.0''''' 2023/10/03
|
* '''UI style redisigned'''
* '''Button display''': Buttons are displayed when they can be used, when project is opened, when document is opened, when segment is opened.
* '''New features''': Jump to provisional segments on translation menu, Download a project backup (.zip), Copy project skeleton on project menu.
* '''New possible shortcuts''': Global TM&glos dialog, Upload document, Jump to empty segments, Jump to provisional segments, Decrease target height.
* '''Button moves''': Insert char, Case changer from Edit menu to Translation menu; Copy and Delete TU from TM&Glos menu to the TM panel result row; Delete history for all segments from statistics dialog to Edit menu; Delete history for one segment when viewed in the TM panel row.
* '''Button merge''': File Info and Statistics into Statistics on File menu
* '''Dialogs improvement''': Setup; User profile; Linguist management; Upload and download => all the steps gathered with a summary; Document share on standard project => All the steps gathered with a summary, guests entered in the linguist management are suggested by languages.
* '''Advanced project''': Workflow shares improved; Possibility to move back to the previous task; PO template improved => Supports pictures, groups PO emails by linguist and PM when sending; Assigning job to linguist improved , can show WFA training badge also visible in user profile.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.4''''' 2023/07/01
|
* '''Free version''': Wordfast Anywhere has a new free version if your credit has expired including the 1 month trial at 1$. This version has a monthly limit of 15000 words.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.3''''' 2023/01/01
|
* '''Paid version''': Wordfast Anywhere becomes a subscription-based service. the logging is done at https://www.wordfast.com/myaccount

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.2''''' 2021/09/03
|
* '''Purchase Order''': On Advanced projects, a Purchase Order is used when document is shared with linguist. The Purchase Order template can be build on the user profile.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.1''''' 2021/08/13
|
* '''Multiple documents selection''': Available for extracting unique and frequent segments.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.0''''' 2021/07/17
|
* '''Project Management''': Project has been introduced with a standard mode for translator working alone as before and the advanced project for project managers working with several linguists.
* '''Languages pairs and documents''': The project contains languages pairs that contains documents. The list of documents is therefore sorted by language pairs.
* '''TMs and glossaries''': A global TM and Glossaries setup dialog is now located on '''''wordfast anywhere''''' menu and used only for management (create, add, upload, merge, edit, download, delete... ), no more for assignment. Assigning TMs and/or glossaries is done when setting up a language pair in the project setup. It can also be done, as before, for a selected document using the '''''TMs and glossaries''''' [[File:Preferences16round.png]] button in the '''''File''''' menu.
* '''Menus and buttons''': The '''''Help''''' menu and the '''''AutoAligner''''' [[File:WF_Update16.png]] buttons have been moved to the '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' menu. The '''''Upload''''' [[File:Add_File_To_Project16.png]] and '''''Delete''''' [[File:Remove16.png]] buttons of the '''''File''''' menu have been moved and integrated in the project panel. Project files (*.glp) are now managed with the '''''Import''''' [[File:pm_import_project_16.png]] and '''''Export''''' [[File:pm_export_project_16.png]] buttons in the '''''Project''''' menu. The global behavior has been improved showing menus and buttons in context.
* '''Multiple documents selection''': Multiple documents selection with checkboxes is now possible for Download, Analysis, Pre-translation and TMs and/or glossaries assignment.
*'''Close segment option''': Add a new close option '''''Close Retain''''' [[File:Close_retain.png]] in the '''''Translation''''' menu. On closing segment, target is retained but not saved in database.
*'''Jump empty segment''': Only open segments with empty target. The button is a toggle [[File:Jump_green.png]] [[File:Jump_red.png]] that can be stopped at any time.
*''' Find & Replace''': Add a new feature in the '''''Find & Replace''''' tool for unbreakable space and other special character. See the More checkbox.
*'''Merge Bilingual''': The '''''Merge Bilingual''''' [[File:Mergetms16.png]] button has been improved and simplified. Old related features have been moved to a new TM tool '''''Upload TM from bilingual document'''''.
*'''Number replacement''': There are new space characters for date and number conversion in Pandora's box #8 '''''Configure Auto-suggest'''''.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.14''''' 2020/09/05
|
* '''Machine Translation''': Added the Intento MT engines portal.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.13''''' 2020/08/01
|
* '''Machine Translation''': Improvement of MT engines management now found on a special tab in the Setup dialog.
* '''Machine Translation''': 3 possibilities of customized engines. ModernMT added in a preselection option.
* '''DeepL''': Added the formality setting.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.12''''' 2020/06/20
|
* '''DeepL''': Add new languages ZH, JA for source and target and Brazilian Portuguese for target only.
* '''MT''': Add MT usage and score in the configuration

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.11''''' 2019/11/16
|
* '''Untranslatable''': Untranslatable Segments (not having letters) are copied to target and next segment is opened. The feature is active by default but can be disable in the Setup, see Pandora 's box #18.
This feature will have a configuration in a second step to define more cases of untranslatable segments.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.10''''' 2019/09/18
|
* '''Split segment''': The Shrink feature has been improved, it is now possible to cut with the cursor and it is working with character languages like Chinese.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.9''''' 2019/06/05
|
* '''Upload''': Possibility to choose a TM and glossary other than the current one when uploading a document. Possibility to upload a TM or glossary from an URL location.
* '''Download''': Possibility to use advanced filters for document and TM. It can be used for downloading a clean TM or a clean set of TUs for training a MT engine.
*'''TM search''': The windows has been improve by adding new parameters for filtering the search.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.8''''' 2019/03/04
|
* '''Document sharing''': It has been improved to share TM and glossary at the same time and more than one document.
* '''One Drive''': Like Google Drive and Dropbox, you can now use Microsoft One Drive.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.7''''' 2019/01/26
|
* '''Kantan MT''': kantan provides a confidential and customized Machine Translation service that learns from your translations. See [https://www.kantanmt.com/ www.kantanmt.com]
* '''Sanitaze TM and bilingual document''': Translation memory and document can be sanitize through the advance filtering dialog. See the new download list box for TM and the download option '''filtered Bilingual''' for document. This cleaning can be useful for preparing a file for MT training.
* '''TM to bilingual''': A TM can be downloaded as a bilingual TXLF document. See the new option in the existing export format list box after Excel.
* '''XML and MQXLIFF''' formats are now available. For XML there is a new tab in the configure filters configuration to import an extraction rules file.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.6''''' 2018/12/22
|
* '''Custom MT''': You can add a new MT engine by configuring it.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.5''''' 2018/12/08
|
* '''TM download filter''': A TM can be downloaded filtering on date, user ID or attributes. See TM download option beside format.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.4''''' 2018/11/26
|
* '''Package''': You can upload and download a project file from and to Wordfast Pro 5. This package is a compressed file containing selected documents, translation memories and glossaries. For Upload just select a *.glp file and for download choose the new package option.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.3''''' 2018/09/20
|
* '''XLIF''': The editor is now mainly based on XLIF. Some formatting bold, italic and underline are displayed with their opening and closing tags. The expand/merge functionality for segments has been improved. Globally this version tightens compatibility with Wordfast Pro 5.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.2''''' 2018/04/06
|
* '''TM edition''': Improve TM edition by adding a new tags deletion button in edit tab, adding a new button ''add TU'' in TMs and glossaries tab and allowing offline download.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.1''''' 2018/03/24
|
* '''MT languages''': Added DeepL to the list of MT engines.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.0''''' 2018/03/01
|
* '''New login pages''': More simple, more secure, more mobile friendly.
* '''Multilingual UI''': The version comes with French and Spanish but is ready to be translated to other languages with a collaborative translation page accessible through your profile.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.23''''' 2017/11/08
|
* '''MyMemory TM import''': Contribute your TM to MyMemory or import it private. See the MyMemory choice in the download options.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.22''''' 2017/10/28
|
* '''MT languages''': Update new available languages for Microsoft, Google and Yandex.
* '''MyMemory MT and TM''': When setting MyMemory MT, you can also lookup a MyMemory TM by giving the key.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.21''''' 2017/09/23
|
* '''Internal fuzzy matches''': Internal fuzzy matches can be added to the analysis. It need to be enabled in the Pandora's box #17 in the Setup.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.20''''' 2017/08/25
|
* '''Extract unique segments''': The Extract frequents tool has been improved adding also the extraction of uniques segments. Go to '''''File''''' tab and use the '''''Extract Frequents''''' button.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.19''''' 2017/05/16
|
* '''Notes Report''': You can download a report with segments having a note. Go to '''''File''''' tab and use the '''''Download''''' button, there is a choice for notes. Provisional segments and revisions can be added to the report.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.18''''' 2017/04/29
|
* TM and Glossaries setup now available from '''''File''''' tab and '''''TM & Glossaries''''' tab with same functionality. Settings can now be done even when no file is selected or opened.
* '''Document Share Beta''': New features have been added to document share. A document can now be shared between several users allowing multiple editors to be working at the same time in the document due to a reservation system when opening the document. Check the [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_Manual Wordfast Anywhere Manual] for more information.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.17''''' 2017/03/31
|
* '''TM edition''': For TM under 100.000 lines, a document extracted from the TM can be opened in the document Panel. because the TM is associated with this document, updating this document update also the TM. The feature '''''Edit a TM''''' is a choice in the TM tools button.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.16''''' 2017/03/21
|
* '''New Aligner''': When clicking on the aligner button, You will find the option Wordfast Aligner (copy-paste document text).

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.15''''' 2016/12/17
|
* '''Yandex.Translate''': New MT engine which need a key but has a free amount of 1,000,000 characters a month.
* '''Microsoft Translator''' remaining bugs solved.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.14''''' 2016/12/10
|
* '''Microsoft Translator''': We prepare the configuration to accept the key generated on the new Azure portal.
* '''Machine translation''': We improve the management of an engine failure. It can be disabled without going to the Setup and the engine can recover by itself as soon as it is avaiable again.
* Glossary paging for Wordfast Anywhere glossaries. You can now visualize all the terms of a standard WFA glossary and even update them.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.13''''' 2016/11/26
|
* '''Offline mode''': Give the possibility to work for a while when there is some Internet or server issue. The segments are save locally and then save automatically to the server when the connection or server is back online. This feature is not working when FireFox is in private navigation mode.
* '''Double click''': A new configuration is possible to use double click to open, close or close and open by clicking on the segment or the segment source or just the number. See Pandora's box #10.
* Add a management of unwanted sessions break with automatic recovery and a warning if it is abnormally frequent.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.12''''' 2016/10/22
|
* '''Unit convertion''': This new feature is also in a beta state and will help users when translating a text that contains measures (Metric or Imperial). Possible conversions will be added to the auto-suggest list. Enabled by default in '''''Pandora's Box #8'''''
* Double click toggle to open/close a segment.
* Glossary paging for remote TMGR glossary.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.11''''' 2016/09/24
|
* Glossary improvements and changes : The attributes can be displayed in the glossary panel when clicking on the term. Highlighted terms in the source segment have different background colors for different glossaries. Glossaries are sorted after download.
* New privilege when sharing a TM to allow guests to see the email of other guests.
* New feature for MT to enable it on already translated file. See the "Enable MT for review" check box in the MT configuration. It is useful for a bilingual file when source segments are copied to the target.
* Lots of small improvements like TBX file upload and download, showing tag content in the status bar and in a popup if clicking on the status bar, some new FAQ articles.
* Many bugs fixed with MyMemory operation, adding a remote glossary with a given URL, glossary counts, Auto-suggest, Google and Dropbox access and more.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.10''''' 2016/06/25
|
* 4 more new '''''Insert char''''' buttons are now available in the '''''Edit''''' tab. Go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button for customizing them in the '''''Pandora's Box''''' tab #5. 4 more shortcuts has been created to match them: '''''Shift+Ctrl+1''''' until '''''Shift+Ctrl+7'''''. It can be customized in the '''''Shortcuts''''' tab. click on the '''''Restore default shortcuts''''' to add them all.
* 1 new '''''Delete targets''''' button also in the '''''Edit''''' tab to empty all targets from the document. Please use it sparingly.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.9.0''''' 2016/06/14
|
* The segment tool bar has been implemented back. Go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button. It can be enabled in the '''''General''''' tab and customized in the '''''Pandora's Box''''' tab #17
* Concordance matches are now sorted by date.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.8.0''''' 2016/05/25
|
* Glossaries can now be downloaded to TBX format.
* Spellcheck dictionaries have been updated and new languages have been added.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.7.0''''' 2016/05/12
|
* '''Voice Speech''' feature has been added. This new feature is in a beta state and only available for Chrome on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mic.png]] '''''Web Speech Beta''''' button and will allow users to dictate the text of the target segment when a segment is opened. For more information check '''''Help''''' tab => [[File:Wikipedia16w.jpg]] '''''Manual''''' button.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] '''''Document Layout''''' can now be mapped to a shortcut. No key combination has been assigned, you need to set in on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button.
* Text selection to add terms to the glossary has been improved. Now several words can be selected on both source and target to add them to the glossary using the shortcut (default, ''Ctrl+Alt+T'').
* Notification warning has been made more visible, now a red text will be shown on the top bar next to the tabs names. Remember notifications are shown on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab and should be removed after reading.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.6.0''''' 2016/03/26
|
* The small '''Share''' button in the '''TMs and glossaries management''' dialog has been improved and simplified. The big '''Manage sharing''' button is kept for advanced sharing.
* New option for a confidential document share which do not allow download. See '''File''' tab => '''Share''' button.
* A document can be opened in WFP4 online even if it is already opened in Wordfast Anywhere.
* The '''Find & Replace''' tool in '''Edit''' tab can now find and replace on the source segment.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.5.0''''' 2016/02/20
|
* New IATE glossaries, build from the IATE dowload at http://iate.europa.eu/.
* The status bar has been improve again adding the glossary information.
* A document can be shared in read only. When a document is shared in the normal way, the guest can work and the owner can see the document in read-only. If the document is shared in read-only, the owner can work and the guest see the document in read-only.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.4.0''''' 2015/11/28
|
* New MT engine '''MyMemory'''. It offers 1000 words per day. No key needed.
* New target character counter in a new cell of the status bar.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.3.0''''' 2015/10/28
|
* New '''Tools''' button to reverse and assemble TMs and glossaries.
* Improvement of the statistics report to show words and characters percentages.
* Possibility to download multiple TXML files.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.2.0''''' 2015/10/21
|
'''Custom tab''' 
* You can customized the last tab to have your own buttons used for translation in one place.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.1.1''''' 2015/10/06
|
'''UI improvement of 4.1.0''' 
* The tabs can be opened either with the click or with the mouseover. Go to the Setup to configure.
* Improvement of the Analysis and pre-translate process.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.1.0''''' 2015/10/03
|
'''UI improvement of 4.0.0''' 
* The tabs are opened with the mouseover
* We added an auto-hide buttons mode. it is not set by default. if you want to try go to '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Setup''' button => tick '''Auto-Hide buttons'''
* The outline status (open/close) is now saved even after a logout.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.0.0''''' 2015/09/26
|
'''New User Interface''' 
All commands are re-ordered in a new top panel. 8 new tabs containing buttons.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.7.1''''' 2015/08/02
|
'''Assembling of TMs or glossaries''' 
You can assemble several TMs or glossaries of the same language pair and download them as one file. In a second step, you can upload that new TM or glossary and remove the old ones.
 In the TMs and glossaries dialog, selected first the TMs or glossaries by checking them in the active column then click on the assemble button.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.7.0''''' 2015/07/25
|
'''Tilde Terminology service''' 
A new type of glossary has been implement giving access to Tilde Terminology service. In the glossary setup click on the add button then choose Tilde Terminology service.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.6.0''''' 2015/05/23
|
'''Machine translation''' 
Add Iconic MT engine for patent translation. See the detail in the MT dialog how to use it. 
'''TM usage''' 
Some improvement with the read-only mode and a new icon has been addded to the status bar on bottom right. 
'''Segment tool bar''' 
You can now configure the buttons you want to keep on the bar.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.5.0''''' 2015/05/09
|
'''Auto-propagate''' 
Add a button on the segment toolbar after the provisional button to propagate the target on all the same source in the document.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.4.0''''' 2015/04/25
|
'''Cloud storage''' 
Dropbox has been implemented as a new storage for upload and download of files. 
'''MT''' 
Improvement of configuration dialog. 
'''Auto-suggest''' 
Add chunks of MT and an improvement to trigger the auto-suggest. 
'''TM rules''' 
Add the option: Do not overwrite existing TU

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.3.3''''' 2015/03/14
|
'''Cloud storage''' 
Google drive has been implemented as a new storage for upload and download of files.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.3.0''''' 2015/03/03
|
'''New welcome page''' 
Wordfast Anywhere start new. Security has been strengthened with a more attractive welcome page.
 You can reset your password even if your login is not a valid email by using the security question.
 The security question and answer can be set in your profile.

|-
|}

Wordfast Anywhere Release Notes

2023-10-03T11:15:45Z

Remiandre:

{{Languages}}
[[Category:Wordfast Anywhere]] 

{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 7.0''''' 2023/09/16
|
* '''UI style redisigned'''
* '''Button display''': Buttons are displayed when they can be used, when project is opened, when document is opened, when segment is opened.
* '''New features''': Jump to provisional segments on translation menu, Download a project backup (.zip), Copy project skeleton on project menu.
* '''New possible shortcuts''': Global TM&glos dialog, Upload document, Jump to empty segments, Jump to provisional segments, Decrease target height.
* '''Button moves''': Insert char, Case changer from Edit menu to Translation menu; Copy and Delete TU from TM&Glos menu to the TM panel result row; Delete history for all segments from statistics dialog to Edit menu; Delete history for one segment when viewed in the TM panel row.
* '''Button merge''': File Info and Statistics into Statistics on File menu
* '''Dialogs improvement''': Setup; User profile; Linguist management; Upload and download => all the steps gathered with a summary; Document share on standard project => All the steps gathered with a summary, guests entered in the linguist management are suggested by languages.
* '''Advanced project''': Workflow shares improved; Possibility to move back to the previous task; PO template improved => Supports pictures, groups PO emails by linguist and PM when sending; Assigning job to linguist improved , can show WFA training badge also visible in user profile.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.4''''' 2023/07/01
|
* '''Free version''': Wordfast Anywhere has a new free version if your credit has expired including the 1 month trial at 1$. This version has a monthly limit of 15000 words.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.3''''' 2023/01/01
|
* '''Paid version''': Wordfast Anywhere becomes a subscription-based service. the logging is done at https://www.wordfast.com/myaccount

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.2''''' 2021/09/03
|
* '''Purchase Order''': On Advanced projects, a Purchase Order is used when document is shared with linguist. The Purchase Order template can be build on the user profile.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.1''''' 2021/08/13
|
* '''Multiple documents selection''': Available for extracting unique and frequent segments.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.0''''' 2021/07/17
|
* '''Project Management''': Project has been introduced with a standard mode for translator working alone as before and the advanced project for project managers working with several linguists.
* '''Languages pairs and documents''': The project contains languages pairs that contains documents. The list of documents is therefore sorted by language pairs.
* '''TMs and glossaries''': A global TM and Glossaries setup dialog is now located on '''''wordfast anywhere''''' menu and used only for management (create, add, upload, merge, edit, download, delete... ), no more for assignment. Assigning TMs and/or glossaries is done when setting up a language pair in the project setup. It can also be done, as before, for a selected document using the '''''TMs and glossaries''''' [[File:Preferences16round.png]] button in the '''''File''''' menu.
* '''Menus and buttons''': The '''''Help''''' menu and the '''''AutoAligner''''' [[File:WF_Update16.png]] buttons have been moved to the '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' menu. The '''''Upload''''' [[File:Add_File_To_Project16.png]] and '''''Delete''''' [[File:Remove16.png]] buttons of the '''''File''''' menu have been moved and integrated in the project panel. Project files (*.glp) are now managed with the '''''Import''''' [[File:pm_import_project_16.png]] and '''''Export''''' [[File:pm_export_project_16.png]] buttons in the '''''Project''''' menu. The global behavior has been improved showing menus and buttons in context.
* '''Multiple documents selection''': Multiple documents selection with checkboxes is now possible for Download, Analysis, Pre-translation and TMs and/or glossaries assignment.
*'''Close segment option''': Add a new close option '''''Close Retain''''' [[File:Close_retain.png]] in the '''''Translation''''' menu. On closing segment, target is retained but not saved in database.
*'''Jump empty segment''': Only open segments with empty target. The button is a toggle [[File:Jump_green.png]] [[File:Jump_red.png]] that can be stopped at any time.
*''' Find & Replace''': Add a new feature in the '''''Find & Replace''''' tool for unbreakable space and other special character. See the More checkbox.
*'''Merge Bilingual''': The '''''Merge Bilingual''''' [[File:Mergetms16.png]] button has been improved and simplified. Old related features have been moved to a new TM tool '''''Upload TM from bilingual document'''''.
*'''Number replacement''': There are new space characters for date and number conversion in Pandora's box #8 '''''Configure Auto-suggest'''''.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.14''''' 2020/09/05
|
* '''Machine Translation''': Added the Intento MT engines portal.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.13''''' 2020/08/01
|
* '''Machine Translation''': Improvement of MT engines management now found on a special tab in the Setup dialog.
* '''Machine Translation''': 3 possibilities of customized engines. ModernMT added in a preselection option.
* '''DeepL''': Added the formality setting.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.12''''' 2020/06/20
|
* '''DeepL''': Add new languages ZH, JA for source and target and Brazilian Portuguese for target only.
* '''MT''': Add MT usage and score in the configuration

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.11''''' 2019/11/16
|
* '''Untranslatable''': Untranslatable Segments (not having letters) are copied to target and next segment is opened. The feature is active by default but can be disable in the Setup, see Pandora 's box #18.
This feature will have a configuration in a second step to define more cases of untranslatable segments.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.10''''' 2019/09/18
|
* '''Split segment''': The Shrink feature has been improved, it is now possible to cut with the cursor and it is working with character languages like Chinese.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.9''''' 2019/06/05
|
* '''Upload''': Possibility to choose a TM and glossary other than the current one when uploading a document. Possibility to upload a TM or glossary from an URL location.
* '''Download''': Possibility to use advanced filters for document and TM. It can be used for downloading a clean TM or a clean set of TUs for training a MT engine.
*'''TM search''': The windows has been improve by adding new parameters for filtering the search.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.8''''' 2019/03/04
|
* '''Document sharing''': It has been improved to share TM and glossary at the same time and more than one document.
* '''One Drive''': Like Google Drive and Dropbox, you can now use Microsoft One Drive.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.7''''' 2019/01/26
|
* '''Kantan MT''': kantan provides a confidential and customized Machine Translation service that learns from your translations. See [https://www.kantanmt.com/ www.kantanmt.com]
* '''Sanitaze TM and bilingual document''': Translation memory and document can be sanitize through the advance filtering dialog. See the new download list box for TM and the download option '''filtered Bilingual''' for document. This cleaning can be useful for preparing a file for MT training.
* '''TM to bilingual''': A TM can be downloaded as a bilingual TXLF document. See the new option in the existing export format list box after Excel.
* '''XML and MQXLIFF''' formats are now available. For XML there is a new tab in the configure filters configuration to import an extraction rules file.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.6''''' 2018/12/22
|
* '''Custom MT''': You can add a new MT engine by configuring it.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.5''''' 2018/12/08
|
* '''TM download filter''': A TM can be downloaded filtering on date, user ID or attributes. See TM download option beside format.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.4''''' 2018/11/26
|
* '''Package''': You can upload and download a project file from and to Wordfast Pro 5. This package is a compressed file containing selected documents, translation memories and glossaries. For Upload just select a *.glp file and for download choose the new package option.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.3''''' 2018/09/20
|
* '''XLIF''': The editor is now mainly based on XLIF. Some formatting bold, italic and underline are displayed with their opening and closing tags. The expand/merge functionality for segments has been improved. Globally this version tightens compatibility with Wordfast Pro 5.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.2''''' 2018/04/06
|
* '''TM edition''': Improve TM edition by adding a new tags deletion button in edit tab, adding a new button ''add TU'' in TMs and glossaries tab and allowing offline download.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.1''''' 2018/03/24
|
* '''MT languages''': Added DeepL to the list of MT engines.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.0''''' 2018/03/01
|
* '''New login pages''': More simple, more secure, more mobile friendly.
* '''Multilingual UI''': The version comes with French and Spanish but is ready to be translated to other languages with a collaborative translation page accessible through your profile.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.23''''' 2017/11/08
|
* '''MyMemory TM import''': Contribute your TM to MyMemory or import it private. See the MyMemory choice in the download options.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.22''''' 2017/10/28
|
* '''MT languages''': Update new available languages for Microsoft, Google and Yandex.
* '''MyMemory MT and TM''': When setting MyMemory MT, you can also lookup a MyMemory TM by giving the key.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.21''''' 2017/09/23
|
* '''Internal fuzzy matches''': Internal fuzzy matches can be added to the analysis. It need to be enabled in the Pandora's box #17 in the Setup.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.20''''' 2017/08/25
|
* '''Extract unique segments''': The Extract frequents tool has been improved adding also the extraction of uniques segments. Go to '''''File''''' tab and use the '''''Extract Frequents''''' button.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.19''''' 2017/05/16
|
* '''Notes Report''': You can download a report with segments having a note. Go to '''''File''''' tab and use the '''''Download''''' button, there is a choice for notes. Provisional segments and revisions can be added to the report.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.18''''' 2017/04/29
|
* TM and Glossaries setup now available from '''''File''''' tab and '''''TM & Glossaries''''' tab with same functionality. Settings can now be done even when no file is selected or opened.
* '''Document Share Beta''': New features have been added to document share. A document can now be shared between several users allowing multiple editors to be working at the same time in the document due to a reservation system when opening the document. Check the [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_Manual Wordfast Anywhere Manual] for more information.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.17''''' 2017/03/31
|
* '''TM edition''': For TM under 100.000 lines, a document extracted from the TM can be opened in the document Panel. because the TM is associated with this document, updating this document update also the TM. The feature '''''Edit a TM''''' is a choice in the TM tools button.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.16''''' 2017/03/21
|
* '''New Aligner''': When clicking on the aligner button, You will find the option Wordfast Aligner (copy-paste document text).

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.15''''' 2016/12/17
|
* '''Yandex.Translate''': New MT engine which need a key but has a free amount of 1,000,000 characters a month.
* '''Microsoft Translator''' remaining bugs solved.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.14''''' 2016/12/10
|
* '''Microsoft Translator''': We prepare the configuration to accept the key generated on the new Azure portal.
* '''Machine translation''': We improve the management of an engine failure. It can be disabled without going to the Setup and the engine can recover by itself as soon as it is avaiable again.
* Glossary paging for Wordfast Anywhere glossaries. You can now visualize all the terms of a standard WFA glossary and even update them.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.13''''' 2016/11/26
|
* '''Offline mode''': Give the possibility to work for a while when there is some Internet or server issue. The segments are save locally and then save automatically to the server when the connection or server is back online. This feature is not working when FireFox is in private navigation mode.
* '''Double click''': A new configuration is possible to use double click to open, close or close and open by clicking on the segment or the segment source or just the number. See Pandora's box #10.
* Add a management of unwanted sessions break with automatic recovery and a warning if it is abnormally frequent.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.12''''' 2016/10/22
|
* '''Unit convertion''': This new feature is also in a beta state and will help users when translating a text that contains measures (Metric or Imperial). Possible conversions will be added to the auto-suggest list. Enabled by default in '''''Pandora's Box #8'''''
* Double click toggle to open/close a segment.
* Glossary paging for remote TMGR glossary.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.11''''' 2016/09/24
|
* Glossary improvements and changes : The attributes can be displayed in the glossary panel when clicking on the term. Highlighted terms in the source segment have different background colors for different glossaries. Glossaries are sorted after download.
* New privilege when sharing a TM to allow guests to see the email of other guests.
* New feature for MT to enable it on already translated file. See the "Enable MT for review" check box in the MT configuration. It is useful for a bilingual file when source segments are copied to the target.
* Lots of small improvements like TBX file upload and download, showing tag content in the status bar and in a popup if clicking on the status bar, some new FAQ articles.
* Many bugs fixed with MyMemory operation, adding a remote glossary with a given URL, glossary counts, Auto-suggest, Google and Dropbox access and more.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.10''''' 2016/06/25
|
* 4 more new '''''Insert char''''' buttons are now available in the '''''Edit''''' tab. Go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button for customizing them in the '''''Pandora's Box''''' tab #5. 4 more shortcuts has been created to match them: '''''Shift+Ctrl+1''''' until '''''Shift+Ctrl+7'''''. It can be customized in the '''''Shortcuts''''' tab. click on the '''''Restore default shortcuts''''' to add them all.
* 1 new '''''Delete targets''''' button also in the '''''Edit''''' tab to empty all targets from the document. Please use it sparingly.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.9.0''''' 2016/06/14
|
* The segment tool bar has been implemented back. Go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button. It can be enabled in the '''''General''''' tab and customized in the '''''Pandora's Box''''' tab #17
* Concordance matches are now sorted by date.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.8.0''''' 2016/05/25
|
* Glossaries can now be downloaded to TBX format.
* Spellcheck dictionaries have been updated and new languages have been added.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.7.0''''' 2016/05/12
|
* '''Voice Speech''' feature has been added. This new feature is in a beta state and only available for Chrome on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mic.png]] '''''Web Speech Beta''''' button and will allow users to dictate the text of the target segment when a segment is opened. For more information check '''''Help''''' tab => [[File:Wikipedia16w.jpg]] '''''Manual''''' button.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] '''''Document Layout''''' can now be mapped to a shortcut. No key combination has been assigned, you need to set in on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button.
* Text selection to add terms to the glossary has been improved. Now several words can be selected on both source and target to add them to the glossary using the shortcut (default, ''Ctrl+Alt+T'').
* Notification warning has been made more visible, now a red text will be shown on the top bar next to the tabs names. Remember notifications are shown on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab and should be removed after reading.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.6.0''''' 2016/03/26
|
* The small '''Share''' button in the '''TMs and glossaries management''' dialog has been improved and simplified. The big '''Manage sharing''' button is kept for advanced sharing.
* New option for a confidential document share which do not allow download. See '''File''' tab => '''Share''' button.
* A document can be opened in WFP4 online even if it is already opened in Wordfast Anywhere.
* The '''Find & Replace''' tool in '''Edit''' tab can now find and replace on the source segment.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.5.0''''' 2016/02/20
|
* New IATE glossaries, build from the IATE dowload at http://iate.europa.eu/.
* The status bar has been improve again adding the glossary information.
* A document can be shared in read only. When a document is shared in the normal way, the guest can work and the owner can see the document in read-only. If the document is shared in read-only, the owner can work and the guest see the document in read-only.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.4.0''''' 2015/11/28
|
* New MT engine '''MyMemory'''. It offers 1000 words per day. No key needed.
* New target character counter in a new cell of the status bar.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.3.0''''' 2015/10/28
|
* New '''Tools''' button to reverse and assemble TMs and glossaries.
* Improvement of the statistics report to show words and characters percentages.
* Possibility to download multiple TXML files.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.2.0''''' 2015/10/21
|
'''Custom tab''' 
* You can customized the last tab to have your own buttons used for translation in one place.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.1.1''''' 2015/10/06
|
'''UI improvement of 4.1.0''' 
* The tabs can be opened either with the click or with the mouseover. Go to the Setup to configure.
* Improvement of the Analysis and pre-translate process.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.1.0''''' 2015/10/03
|
'''UI improvement of 4.0.0''' 
* The tabs are opened with the mouseover
* We added an auto-hide buttons mode. it is not set by default. if you want to try go to '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Setup''' button => tick '''Auto-Hide buttons'''
* The outline status (open/close) is now saved even after a logout.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.0.0''''' 2015/09/26
|
'''New User Interface''' 
All commands are re-ordered in a new top panel. 8 new tabs containing buttons.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.7.1''''' 2015/08/02
|
'''Assembling of TMs or glossaries''' 
You can assemble several TMs or glossaries of the same language pair and download them as one file. In a second step, you can upload that new TM or glossary and remove the old ones.
 In the TMs and glossaries dialog, selected first the TMs or glossaries by checking them in the active column then click on the assemble button.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.7.0''''' 2015/07/25
|
'''Tilde Terminology service''' 
A new type of glossary has been implement giving access to Tilde Terminology service. In the glossary setup click on the add button then choose Tilde Terminology service.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.6.0''''' 2015/05/23
|
'''Machine translation''' 
Add Iconic MT engine for patent translation. See the detail in the MT dialog how to use it. 
'''TM usage''' 
Some improvement with the read-only mode and a new icon has been addded to the status bar on bottom right. 
'''Segment tool bar''' 
You can now configure the buttons you want to keep on the bar.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.5.0''''' 2015/05/09
|
'''Auto-propagate''' 
Add a button on the segment toolbar after the provisional button to propagate the target on all the same source in the document.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.4.0''''' 2015/04/25
|
'''Cloud storage''' 
Dropbox has been implemented as a new storage for upload and download of files. 
'''MT''' 
Improvement of configuration dialog. 
'''Auto-suggest''' 
Add chunks of MT and an improvement to trigger the auto-suggest. 
'''TM rules''' 
Add the option: Do not overwrite existing TU

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.3.3''''' 2015/03/14
|
'''Cloud storage''' 
Google drive has been implemented as a new storage for upload and download of files.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.3.0''''' 2015/03/03
|
'''New welcome page''' 
Wordfast Anywhere start new. Security has been strengthened with a more attractive welcome page.
 You can reset your password even if your login is not a valid email by using the security question.
 The security question and answer can be set in your profile.

|-
|}

Wordfast Anywhere Release Notes

2023-09-17T18:10:16Z

Remiandre:

{{Languages}}
[[Category:Wordfast Anywhere]] 

{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.4''''' 2023/07/01
|
* '''Free version''': Wordfast Anywhere has a new free version if your credit has expired including the 1 month trial at 1$. This version has a monthly limit of 15000 words.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.3''''' 2023/01/01
|
* '''Paid version''': Wordfast Anywhere becomes a subscription-based service. the logging is done at https://www.wordfast.com/myaccount

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.2''''' 2021/09/03
|
* '''Purchase Order''': On Advanced projects, a Purchase Order is used when document is shared with linguist. The Purchase Order template can be build on the user profile.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.1''''' 2021/08/13
|
* '''Multiple documents selection''': Available for extracting unique and frequent segments.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.0''''' 2021/07/17
|
* '''Project Management''': Project has been introduced with a standard mode for translator working alone as before and the advanced project for project managers working with several linguists.
* '''Languages pairs and documents''': The project contains languages pairs that contains documents. The list of documents is therefore sorted by language pairs.
* '''TMs and glossaries''': A global TM and Glossaries setup dialog is now located on '''''wordfast anywhere''''' menu and used only for management (create, add, upload, merge, edit, download, delete... ), no more for assignment. Assigning TMs and/or glossaries is done when setting up a language pair in the project setup. It can also be done, as before, for a selected document using the '''''TMs and glossaries''''' [[File:Preferences16round.png]] button in the '''''File''''' menu.
* '''Menus and buttons''': The '''''Help''''' menu and the '''''AutoAligner''''' [[File:WF_Update16.png]] buttons have been moved to the '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' menu. The '''''Upload''''' [[File:Add_File_To_Project16.png]] and '''''Delete''''' [[File:Remove16.png]] buttons of the '''''File''''' menu have been moved and integrated in the project panel. Project files (*.glp) are now managed with the '''''Import''''' [[File:pm_import_project_16.png]] and '''''Export''''' [[File:pm_export_project_16.png]] buttons in the '''''Project''''' menu. The global behavior has been improved showing menus and buttons in context.
* '''Multiple documents selection''': Multiple documents selection with checkboxes is now possible for Download, Analysis, Pre-translation and TMs and/or glossaries assignment.
*'''Close segment option''': Add a new close option '''''Close Retain''''' [[File:Close_retain.png]] in the '''''Translation''''' menu. On closing segment, target is retained but not saved in database.
*'''Jump empty segment''': Only open segments with empty target. The button is a toggle [[File:Jump_green.png]] [[File:Jump_red.png]] that can be stopped at any time.
*''' Find & Replace''': Add a new feature in the '''''Find & Replace''''' tool for unbreakable space and other special character. See the More checkbox.
*'''Merge Bilingual''': The '''''Merge Bilingual''''' [[File:Mergetms16.png]] button has been improved and simplified. Old related features have been moved to a new TM tool '''''Upload TM from bilingual document'''''.
*'''Number replacement''': There are new space characters for date and number conversion in Pandora's box #8 '''''Configure Auto-suggest'''''.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.14''''' 2020/09/05
|
* '''Machine Translation''': Added the Intento MT engines portal.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.13''''' 2020/08/01
|
* '''Machine Translation''': Improvement of MT engines management now found on a special tab in the Setup dialog.
* '''Machine Translation''': 3 possibilities of customized engines. ModernMT added in a preselection option.
* '''DeepL''': Added the formality setting.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.12''''' 2020/06/20
|
* '''DeepL''': Add new languages ZH, JA for source and target and Brazilian Portuguese for target only.
* '''MT''': Add MT usage and score in the configuration

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.11''''' 2019/11/16
|
* '''Untranslatable''': Untranslatable Segments (not having letters) are copied to target and next segment is opened. The feature is active by default but can be disable in the Setup, see Pandora 's box #18.
This feature will have a configuration in a second step to define more cases of untranslatable segments.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.10''''' 2019/09/18
|
* '''Split segment''': The Shrink feature has been improved, it is now possible to cut with the cursor and it is working with character languages like Chinese.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.9''''' 2019/06/05
|
* '''Upload''': Possibility to choose a TM and glossary other than the current one when uploading a document. Possibility to upload a TM or glossary from an URL location.
* '''Download''': Possibility to use advanced filters for document and TM. It can be used for downloading a clean TM or a clean set of TUs for training a MT engine.
*'''TM search''': The windows has been improve by adding new parameters for filtering the search.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.8''''' 2019/03/04
|
* '''Document sharing''': It has been improved to share TM and glossary at the same time and more than one document.
* '''One Drive''': Like Google Drive and Dropbox, you can now use Microsoft One Drive.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.7''''' 2019/01/26
|
* '''Kantan MT''': kantan provides a confidential and customized Machine Translation service that learns from your translations. See [https://www.kantanmt.com/ www.kantanmt.com]
* '''Sanitaze TM and bilingual document''': Translation memory and document can be sanitize through the advance filtering dialog. See the new download list box for TM and the download option '''filtered Bilingual''' for document. This cleaning can be useful for preparing a file for MT training.
* '''TM to bilingual''': A TM can be downloaded as a bilingual TXLF document. See the new option in the existing export format list box after Excel.
* '''XML and MQXLIFF''' formats are now available. For XML there is a new tab in the configure filters configuration to import an extraction rules file.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.6''''' 2018/12/22
|
* '''Custom MT''': You can add a new MT engine by configuring it.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.5''''' 2018/12/08
|
* '''TM download filter''': A TM can be downloaded filtering on date, user ID or attributes. See TM download option beside format.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.4''''' 2018/11/26
|
* '''Package''': You can upload and download a project file from and to Wordfast Pro 5. This package is a compressed file containing selected documents, translation memories and glossaries. For Upload just select a *.glp file and for download choose the new package option.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.3''''' 2018/09/20
|
* '''XLIF''': The editor is now mainly based on XLIF. Some formatting bold, italic and underline are displayed with their opening and closing tags. The expand/merge functionality for segments has been improved. Globally this version tightens compatibility with Wordfast Pro 5.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.2''''' 2018/04/06
|
* '''TM edition''': Improve TM edition by adding a new tags deletion button in edit tab, adding a new button ''add TU'' in TMs and glossaries tab and allowing offline download.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.1''''' 2018/03/24
|
* '''MT languages''': Added DeepL to the list of MT engines.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.0''''' 2018/03/01
|
* '''New login pages''': More simple, more secure, more mobile friendly.
* '''Multilingual UI''': The version comes with French and Spanish but is ready to be translated to other languages with a collaborative translation page accessible through your profile.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.23''''' 2017/11/08
|
* '''MyMemory TM import''': Contribute your TM to MyMemory or import it private. See the MyMemory choice in the download options.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.22''''' 2017/10/28
|
* '''MT languages''': Update new available languages for Microsoft, Google and Yandex.
* '''MyMemory MT and TM''': When setting MyMemory MT, you can also lookup a MyMemory TM by giving the key.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.21''''' 2017/09/23
|
* '''Internal fuzzy matches''': Internal fuzzy matches can be added to the analysis. It need to be enabled in the Pandora's box #17 in the Setup.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.20''''' 2017/08/25
|
* '''Extract unique segments''': The Extract frequents tool has been improved adding also the extraction of uniques segments. Go to '''''File''''' tab and use the '''''Extract Frequents''''' button.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.19''''' 2017/05/16
|
* '''Notes Report''': You can download a report with segments having a note. Go to '''''File''''' tab and use the '''''Download''''' button, there is a choice for notes. Provisional segments and revisions can be added to the report.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.18''''' 2017/04/29
|
* TM and Glossaries setup now available from '''''File''''' tab and '''''TM & Glossaries''''' tab with same functionality. Settings can now be done even when no file is selected or opened.
* '''Document Share Beta''': New features have been added to document share. A document can now be shared between several users allowing multiple editors to be working at the same time in the document due to a reservation system when opening the document. Check the [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_Manual Wordfast Anywhere Manual] for more information.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.17''''' 2017/03/31
|
* '''TM edition''': For TM under 100.000 lines, a document extracted from the TM can be opened in the document Panel. because the TM is associated with this document, updating this document update also the TM. The feature '''''Edit a TM''''' is a choice in the TM tools button.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.16''''' 2017/03/21
|
* '''New Aligner''': When clicking on the aligner button, You will find the option Wordfast Aligner (copy-paste document text).

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.15''''' 2016/12/17
|
* '''Yandex.Translate''': New MT engine which need a key but has a free amount of 1,000,000 characters a month.
* '''Microsoft Translator''' remaining bugs solved.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.14''''' 2016/12/10
|
* '''Microsoft Translator''': We prepare the configuration to accept the key generated on the new Azure portal.
* '''Machine translation''': We improve the management of an engine failure. It can be disabled without going to the Setup and the engine can recover by itself as soon as it is avaiable again.
* Glossary paging for Wordfast Anywhere glossaries. You can now visualize all the terms of a standard WFA glossary and even update them.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.13''''' 2016/11/26
|
* '''Offline mode''': Give the possibility to work for a while when there is some Internet or server issue. The segments are save locally and then save automatically to the server when the connection or server is back online. This feature is not working when FireFox is in private navigation mode.
* '''Double click''': A new configuration is possible to use double click to open, close or close and open by clicking on the segment or the segment source or just the number. See Pandora's box #10.
* Add a management of unwanted sessions break with automatic recovery and a warning if it is abnormally frequent.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.12''''' 2016/10/22
|
* '''Unit convertion''': This new feature is also in a beta state and will help users when translating a text that contains measures (Metric or Imperial). Possible conversions will be added to the auto-suggest list. Enabled by default in '''''Pandora's Box #8'''''
* Double click toggle to open/close a segment.
* Glossary paging for remote TMGR glossary.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.11''''' 2016/09/24
|
* Glossary improvements and changes : The attributes can be displayed in the glossary panel when clicking on the term. Highlighted terms in the source segment have different background colors for different glossaries. Glossaries are sorted after download.
* New privilege when sharing a TM to allow guests to see the email of other guests.
* New feature for MT to enable it on already translated file. See the "Enable MT for review" check box in the MT configuration. It is useful for a bilingual file when source segments are copied to the target.
* Lots of small improvements like TBX file upload and download, showing tag content in the status bar and in a popup if clicking on the status bar, some new FAQ articles.
* Many bugs fixed with MyMemory operation, adding a remote glossary with a given URL, glossary counts, Auto-suggest, Google and Dropbox access and more.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.10''''' 2016/06/25
|
* 4 more new '''''Insert char''''' buttons are now available in the '''''Edit''''' tab. Go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button for customizing them in the '''''Pandora's Box''''' tab #5. 4 more shortcuts has been created to match them: '''''Shift+Ctrl+1''''' until '''''Shift+Ctrl+7'''''. It can be customized in the '''''Shortcuts''''' tab. click on the '''''Restore default shortcuts''''' to add them all.
* 1 new '''''Delete targets''''' button also in the '''''Edit''''' tab to empty all targets from the document. Please use it sparingly.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.9.0''''' 2016/06/14
|
* The segment tool bar has been implemented back. Go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button. It can be enabled in the '''''General''''' tab and customized in the '''''Pandora's Box''''' tab #17
* Concordance matches are now sorted by date.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.8.0''''' 2016/05/25
|
* Glossaries can now be downloaded to TBX format.
* Spellcheck dictionaries have been updated and new languages have been added.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.7.0''''' 2016/05/12
|
* '''Voice Speech''' feature has been added. This new feature is in a beta state and only available for Chrome on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mic.png]] '''''Web Speech Beta''''' button and will allow users to dictate the text of the target segment when a segment is opened. For more information check '''''Help''''' tab => [[File:Wikipedia16w.jpg]] '''''Manual''''' button.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] '''''Document Layout''''' can now be mapped to a shortcut. No key combination has been assigned, you need to set in on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button.
* Text selection to add terms to the glossary has been improved. Now several words can be selected on both source and target to add them to the glossary using the shortcut (default, ''Ctrl+Alt+T'').
* Notification warning has been made more visible, now a red text will be shown on the top bar next to the tabs names. Remember notifications are shown on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab and should be removed after reading.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.6.0''''' 2016/03/26
|
* The small '''Share''' button in the '''TMs and glossaries management''' dialog has been improved and simplified. The big '''Manage sharing''' button is kept for advanced sharing.
* New option for a confidential document share which do not allow download. See '''File''' tab => '''Share''' button.
* A document can be opened in WFP4 online even if it is already opened in Wordfast Anywhere.
* The '''Find & Replace''' tool in '''Edit''' tab can now find and replace on the source segment.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.5.0''''' 2016/02/20
|
* New IATE glossaries, build from the IATE dowload at http://iate.europa.eu/.
* The status bar has been improve again adding the glossary information.
* A document can be shared in read only. When a document is shared in the normal way, the guest can work and the owner can see the document in read-only. If the document is shared in read-only, the owner can work and the guest see the document in read-only.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.4.0''''' 2015/11/28
|
* New MT engine '''MyMemory'''. It offers 1000 words per day. No key needed.
* New target character counter in a new cell of the status bar.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.3.0''''' 2015/10/28
|
* New '''Tools''' button to reverse and assemble TMs and glossaries.
* Improvement of the statistics report to show words and characters percentages.
* Possibility to download multiple TXML files.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.2.0''''' 2015/10/21
|
'''Custom tab''' 
* You can customized the last tab to have your own buttons used for translation in one place.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.1.1''''' 2015/10/06
|
'''UI improvement of 4.1.0''' 
* The tabs can be opened either with the click or with the mouseover. Go to the Setup to configure.
* Improvement of the Analysis and pre-translate process.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.1.0''''' 2015/10/03
|
'''UI improvement of 4.0.0''' 
* The tabs are opened with the mouseover
* We added an auto-hide buttons mode. it is not set by default. if you want to try go to '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Setup''' button => tick '''Auto-Hide buttons'''
* The outline status (open/close) is now saved even after a logout.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.0.0''''' 2015/09/26
|
'''New User Interface''' 
All commands are re-ordered in a new top panel. 8 new tabs containing buttons.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.7.1''''' 2015/08/02
|
'''Assembling of TMs or glossaries''' 
You can assemble several TMs or glossaries of the same language pair and download them as one file. In a second step, you can upload that new TM or glossary and remove the old ones.
 In the TMs and glossaries dialog, selected first the TMs or glossaries by checking them in the active column then click on the assemble button.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.7.0''''' 2015/07/25
|
'''Tilde Terminology service''' 
A new type of glossary has been implement giving access to Tilde Terminology service. In the glossary setup click on the add button then choose Tilde Terminology service.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.6.0''''' 2015/05/23
|
'''Machine translation''' 
Add Iconic MT engine for patent translation. See the detail in the MT dialog how to use it. 
'''TM usage''' 
Some improvement with the read-only mode and a new icon has been addded to the status bar on bottom right. 
'''Segment tool bar''' 
You can now configure the buttons you want to keep on the bar.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.5.0''''' 2015/05/09
|
'''Auto-propagate''' 
Add a button on the segment toolbar after the provisional button to propagate the target on all the same source in the document.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.4.0''''' 2015/04/25
|
'''Cloud storage''' 
Dropbox has been implemented as a new storage for upload and download of files. 
'''MT''' 
Improvement of configuration dialog. 
'''Auto-suggest''' 
Add chunks of MT and an improvement to trigger the auto-suggest. 
'''TM rules''' 
Add the option: Do not overwrite existing TU

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.3.3''''' 2015/03/14
|
'''Cloud storage''' 
Google drive has been implemented as a new storage for upload and download of files.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.3.0''''' 2015/03/03
|
'''New welcome page''' 
Wordfast Anywhere start new. Security has been strengthened with a more attractive welcome page.
 You can reset your password even if your login is not a valid email by using the security question.
 The security question and answer can be set in your profile.

|-
|}

Wordfast Anywhere Release Notes

2023-09-16T05:36:52Z

Remiandre:

{{Languages}}
[[Category:Wordfast Anywhere]] 

{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 7.0''''' 2023/09/16
|
* '''UI style redisigned'''
* '''Button display''': Buttons are displayed when they can be used, when project is opened, when document is opened, when segment is opened.
* '''New features''': Jump to provisional segments on translation menu, Download a project backup (.zip), Copy project skeleton on project menu.
* '''New possible shortcuts''': Global TM&glos dialog, Upload document, Jump to empty segments, Jump to provisional segments, Decrease target height.
* '''Button moves''': Insert char, Case changer from Edit menu to Translation menu; Copy and Delete TU from TM&Glos menu to the TM panel result row; Delete history for all segments from statistics dialog to Edit menu; Delete history for one segment when viewed in the TM panel row.
* '''Button merge''': File Info and Statistics into Statistics on File menu
* '''Dialogs improvement''': Setup; User profile; Linguist management; Upload and download => all the steps gathered with a summary; Document share on standard project => All the steps gathered with a summary, guests entered in the linguist management are suggested by languages.
* '''Advanced project''': Workflow shares improved; Possibility to move back to the previous task; PO template improved => Supports pictures, groups PO emails by linguist and PM when sending; Assigning job to linguist improved , can show WFA training badge also visible in user profile.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.4''''' 2023/07/01
|
* '''Free version''': Wordfast Anywhere has a new free version if your credit has expired including the 1 month trial at 1$. This version has a monthly limit of 15000 words.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.3''''' 2023/01/01
|
* '''Paid version''': Wordfast Anywhere becomes a subscription-based service. the logging is done at https://www.wordfast.com/myaccount

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.2''''' 2021/09/03
|
* '''Purchase Order''': On Advanced projects, a Purchase Order is used when document is shared with linguist. The Purchase Order template can be build on the user profile.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.1''''' 2021/08/13
|
* '''Multiple documents selection''': Available for extracting unique and frequent segments.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.0''''' 2021/07/17
|
* '''Project Management''': Project has been introduced with a standard mode for translator working alone as before and the advanced project for project managers working with several linguists.
* '''Languages pairs and documents''': The project contains languages pairs that contains documents. The list of documents is therefore sorted by language pairs.
* '''TMs and glossaries''': A global TM and Glossaries setup dialog is now located on '''''wordfast anywhere''''' menu and used only for management (create, add, upload, merge, edit, download, delete... ), no more for assignment. Assigning TMs and/or glossaries is done when setting up a language pair in the project setup. It can also be done, as before, for a selected document using the '''''TMs and glossaries''''' [[File:Preferences16round.png]] button in the '''''File''''' menu.
* '''Menus and buttons''': The '''''Help''''' menu and the '''''AutoAligner''''' [[File:WF_Update16.png]] buttons have been moved to the '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' menu. The '''''Upload''''' [[File:Add_File_To_Project16.png]] and '''''Delete''''' [[File:Remove16.png]] buttons of the '''''File''''' menu have been moved and integrated in the project panel. Project files (*.glp) are now managed with the '''''Import''''' [[File:pm_import_project_16.png]] and '''''Export''''' [[File:pm_export_project_16.png]] buttons in the '''''Project''''' menu. The global behavior has been improved showing menus and buttons in context.
* '''Multiple documents selection''': Multiple documents selection with checkboxes is now possible for Download, Analysis, Pre-translation and TMs and/or glossaries assignment.
*'''Close segment option''': Add a new close option '''''Close Retain''''' [[File:Close_retain.png]] in the '''''Translation''''' menu. On closing segment, target is retained but not saved in database.
*'''Jump empty segment''': Only open segments with empty target. The button is a toggle [[File:Jump_green.png]] [[File:Jump_red.png]] that can be stopped at any time.
*''' Find & Replace''': Add a new feature in the '''''Find & Replace''''' tool for unbreakable space and other special character. See the More checkbox.
*'''Merge Bilingual''': The '''''Merge Bilingual''''' [[File:Mergetms16.png]] button has been improved and simplified. Old related features have been moved to a new TM tool '''''Upload TM from bilingual document'''''.
*'''Number replacement''': There are new space characters for date and number conversion in Pandora's box #8 '''''Configure Auto-suggest'''''.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.14''''' 2020/09/05
|
* '''Machine Translation''': Added the Intento MT engines portal.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.13''''' 2020/08/01
|
* '''Machine Translation''': Improvement of MT engines management now found on a special tab in the Setup dialog.
* '''Machine Translation''': 3 possibilities of customized engines. ModernMT added in a preselection option.
* '''DeepL''': Added the formality setting.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.12''''' 2020/06/20
|
* '''DeepL''': Add new languages ZH, JA for source and target and Brazilian Portuguese for target only.
* '''MT''': Add MT usage and score in the configuration

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.11''''' 2019/11/16
|
* '''Untranslatable''': Untranslatable Segments (not having letters) are copied to target and next segment is opened. The feature is active by default but can be disable in the Setup, see Pandora 's box #18.
This feature will have a configuration in a second step to define more cases of untranslatable segments.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.10''''' 2019/09/18
|
* '''Split segment''': The Shrink feature has been improved, it is now possible to cut with the cursor and it is working with character languages like Chinese.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.9''''' 2019/06/05
|
* '''Upload''': Possibility to choose a TM and glossary other than the current one when uploading a document. Possibility to upload a TM or glossary from an URL location.
* '''Download''': Possibility to use advanced filters for document and TM. It can be used for downloading a clean TM or a clean set of TUs for training a MT engine.
*'''TM search''': The windows has been improve by adding new parameters for filtering the search.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.8''''' 2019/03/04
|
* '''Document sharing''': It has been improved to share TM and glossary at the same time and more than one document.
* '''One Drive''': Like Google Drive and Dropbox, you can now use Microsoft One Drive.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.7''''' 2019/01/26
|
* '''Kantan MT''': kantan provides a confidential and customized Machine Translation service that learns from your translations. See [https://www.kantanmt.com/ www.kantanmt.com]
* '''Sanitaze TM and bilingual document''': Translation memory and document can be sanitize through the advance filtering dialog. See the new download list box for TM and the download option '''filtered Bilingual''' for document. This cleaning can be useful for preparing a file for MT training.
* '''TM to bilingual''': A TM can be downloaded as a bilingual TXLF document. See the new option in the existing export format list box after Excel.
* '''XML and MQXLIFF''' formats are now available. For XML there is a new tab in the configure filters configuration to import an extraction rules file.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.6''''' 2018/12/22
|
* '''Custom MT''': You can add a new MT engine by configuring it.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.5''''' 2018/12/08
|
* '''TM download filter''': A TM can be downloaded filtering on date, user ID or attributes. See TM download option beside format.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.4''''' 2018/11/26
|
* '''Package''': You can upload and download a project file from and to Wordfast Pro 5. This package is a compressed file containing selected documents, translation memories and glossaries. For Upload just select a *.glp file and for download choose the new package option.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.3''''' 2018/09/20
|
* '''XLIF''': The editor is now mainly based on XLIF. Some formatting bold, italic and underline are displayed with their opening and closing tags. The expand/merge functionality for segments has been improved. Globally this version tightens compatibility with Wordfast Pro 5.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.2''''' 2018/04/06
|
* '''TM edition''': Improve TM edition by adding a new tags deletion button in edit tab, adding a new button ''add TU'' in TMs and glossaries tab and allowing offline download.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.1''''' 2018/03/24
|
* '''MT languages''': Added DeepL to the list of MT engines.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.0''''' 2018/03/01
|
* '''New login pages''': More simple, more secure, more mobile friendly.
* '''Multilingual UI''': The version comes with French and Spanish but is ready to be translated to other languages with a collaborative translation page accessible through your profile.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.23''''' 2017/11/08
|
* '''MyMemory TM import''': Contribute your TM to MyMemory or import it private. See the MyMemory choice in the download options.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.22''''' 2017/10/28
|
* '''MT languages''': Update new available languages for Microsoft, Google and Yandex.
* '''MyMemory MT and TM''': When setting MyMemory MT, you can also lookup a MyMemory TM by giving the key.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.21''''' 2017/09/23
|
* '''Internal fuzzy matches''': Internal fuzzy matches can be added to the analysis. It need to be enabled in the Pandora's box #17 in the Setup.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.20''''' 2017/08/25
|
* '''Extract unique segments''': The Extract frequents tool has been improved adding also the extraction of uniques segments. Go to '''''File''''' tab and use the '''''Extract Frequents''''' button.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.19''''' 2017/05/16
|
* '''Notes Report''': You can download a report with segments having a note. Go to '''''File''''' tab and use the '''''Download''''' button, there is a choice for notes. Provisional segments and revisions can be added to the report.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.18''''' 2017/04/29
|
* TM and Glossaries setup now available from '''''File''''' tab and '''''TM & Glossaries''''' tab with same functionality. Settings can now be done even when no file is selected or opened.
* '''Document Share Beta''': New features have been added to document share. A document can now be shared between several users allowing multiple editors to be working at the same time in the document due to a reservation system when opening the document. Check the [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_Manual Wordfast Anywhere Manual] for more information.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.17''''' 2017/03/31
|
* '''TM edition''': For TM under 100.000 lines, a document extracted from the TM can be opened in the document Panel. because the TM is associated with this document, updating this document update also the TM. The feature '''''Edit a TM''''' is a choice in the TM tools button.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.16''''' 2017/03/21
|
* '''New Aligner''': When clicking on the aligner button, You will find the option Wordfast Aligner (copy-paste document text).

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.15''''' 2016/12/17
|
* '''Yandex.Translate''': New MT engine which need a key but has a free amount of 1,000,000 characters a month.
* '''Microsoft Translator''' remaining bugs solved.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.14''''' 2016/12/10
|
* '''Microsoft Translator''': We prepare the configuration to accept the key generated on the new Azure portal.
* '''Machine translation''': We improve the management of an engine failure. It can be disabled without going to the Setup and the engine can recover by itself as soon as it is avaiable again.
* Glossary paging for Wordfast Anywhere glossaries. You can now visualize all the terms of a standard WFA glossary and even update them.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.13''''' 2016/11/26
|
* '''Offline mode''': Give the possibility to work for a while when there is some Internet or server issue. The segments are save locally and then save automatically to the server when the connection or server is back online. This feature is not working when FireFox is in private navigation mode.
* '''Double click''': A new configuration is possible to use double click to open, close or close and open by clicking on the segment or the segment source or just the number. See Pandora's box #10.
* Add a management of unwanted sessions break with automatic recovery and a warning if it is abnormally frequent.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.12''''' 2016/10/22
|
* '''Unit convertion''': This new feature is also in a beta state and will help users when translating a text that contains measures (Metric or Imperial). Possible conversions will be added to the auto-suggest list. Enabled by default in '''''Pandora's Box #8'''''
* Double click toggle to open/close a segment.
* Glossary paging for remote TMGR glossary.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.11''''' 2016/09/24
|
* Glossary improvements and changes : The attributes can be displayed in the glossary panel when clicking on the term. Highlighted terms in the source segment have different background colors for different glossaries. Glossaries are sorted after download.
* New privilege when sharing a TM to allow guests to see the email of other guests.
* New feature for MT to enable it on already translated file. See the "Enable MT for review" check box in the MT configuration. It is useful for a bilingual file when source segments are copied to the target.
* Lots of small improvements like TBX file upload and download, showing tag content in the status bar and in a popup if clicking on the status bar, some new FAQ articles.
* Many bugs fixed with MyMemory operation, adding a remote glossary with a given URL, glossary counts, Auto-suggest, Google and Dropbox access and more.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.10''''' 2016/06/25
|
* 4 more new '''''Insert char''''' buttons are now available in the '''''Edit''''' tab. Go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button for customizing them in the '''''Pandora's Box''''' tab #5. 4 more shortcuts has been created to match them: '''''Shift+Ctrl+1''''' until '''''Shift+Ctrl+7'''''. It can be customized in the '''''Shortcuts''''' tab. click on the '''''Restore default shortcuts''''' to add them all.
* 1 new '''''Delete targets''''' button also in the '''''Edit''''' tab to empty all targets from the document. Please use it sparingly.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.9.0''''' 2016/06/14
|
* The segment tool bar has been implemented back. Go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button. It can be enabled in the '''''General''''' tab and customized in the '''''Pandora's Box''''' tab #17
* Concordance matches are now sorted by date.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.8.0''''' 2016/05/25
|
* Glossaries can now be downloaded to TBX format.
* Spellcheck dictionaries have been updated and new languages have been added.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.7.0''''' 2016/05/12
|
* '''Voice Speech''' feature has been added. This new feature is in a beta state and only available for Chrome on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mic.png]] '''''Web Speech Beta''''' button and will allow users to dictate the text of the target segment when a segment is opened. For more information check '''''Help''''' tab => [[File:Wikipedia16w.jpg]] '''''Manual''''' button.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] '''''Document Layout''''' can now be mapped to a shortcut. No key combination has been assigned, you need to set in on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button.
* Text selection to add terms to the glossary has been improved. Now several words can be selected on both source and target to add them to the glossary using the shortcut (default, ''Ctrl+Alt+T'').
* Notification warning has been made more visible, now a red text will be shown on the top bar next to the tabs names. Remember notifications are shown on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab and should be removed after reading.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.6.0''''' 2016/03/26
|
* The small '''Share''' button in the '''TMs and glossaries management''' dialog has been improved and simplified. The big '''Manage sharing''' button is kept for advanced sharing.
* New option for a confidential document share which do not allow download. See '''File''' tab => '''Share''' button.
* A document can be opened in WFP4 online even if it is already opened in Wordfast Anywhere.
* The '''Find & Replace''' tool in '''Edit''' tab can now find and replace on the source segment.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.5.0''''' 2016/02/20
|
* New IATE glossaries, build from the IATE dowload at http://iate.europa.eu/.
* The status bar has been improve again adding the glossary information.
* A document can be shared in read only. When a document is shared in the normal way, the guest can work and the owner can see the document in read-only. If the document is shared in read-only, the owner can work and the guest see the document in read-only.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.4.0''''' 2015/11/28
|
* New MT engine '''MyMemory'''. It offers 1000 words per day. No key needed.
* New target character counter in a new cell of the status bar.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.3.0''''' 2015/10/28
|
* New '''Tools''' button to reverse and assemble TMs and glossaries.
* Improvement of the statistics report to show words and characters percentages.
* Possibility to download multiple TXML files.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.2.0''''' 2015/10/21
|
'''Custom tab''' 
* You can customized the last tab to have your own buttons used for translation in one place.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.1.1''''' 2015/10/06
|
'''UI improvement of 4.1.0''' 
* The tabs can be opened either with the click or with the mouseover. Go to the Setup to configure.
* Improvement of the Analysis and pre-translate process.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.1.0''''' 2015/10/03
|
'''UI improvement of 4.0.0''' 
* The tabs are opened with the mouseover
* We added an auto-hide buttons mode. it is not set by default. if you want to try go to '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Setup''' button => tick '''Auto-Hide buttons'''
* The outline status (open/close) is now saved even after a logout.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.0.0''''' 2015/09/26
|
'''New User Interface''' 
All commands are re-ordered in a new top panel. 8 new tabs containing buttons.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.7.1''''' 2015/08/02
|
'''Assembling of TMs or glossaries''' 
You can assemble several TMs or glossaries of the same language pair and download them as one file. In a second step, you can upload that new TM or glossary and remove the old ones.
 In the TMs and glossaries dialog, selected first the TMs or glossaries by checking them in the active column then click on the assemble button.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.7.0''''' 2015/07/25
|
'''Tilde Terminology service''' 
A new type of glossary has been implement giving access to Tilde Terminology service. In the glossary setup click on the add button then choose Tilde Terminology service.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.6.0''''' 2015/05/23
|
'''Machine translation''' 
Add Iconic MT engine for patent translation. See the detail in the MT dialog how to use it. 
'''TM usage''' 
Some improvement with the read-only mode and a new icon has been addded to the status bar on bottom right. 
'''Segment tool bar''' 
You can now configure the buttons you want to keep on the bar.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.5.0''''' 2015/05/09
|
'''Auto-propagate''' 
Add a button on the segment toolbar after the provisional button to propagate the target on all the same source in the document.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.4.0''''' 2015/04/25
|
'''Cloud storage''' 
Dropbox has been implemented as a new storage for upload and download of files. 
'''MT''' 
Improvement of configuration dialog. 
'''Auto-suggest''' 
Add chunks of MT and an improvement to trigger the auto-suggest. 
'''TM rules''' 
Add the option: Do not overwrite existing TU

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.3.3''''' 2015/03/14
|
'''Cloud storage''' 
Google drive has been implemented as a new storage for upload and download of files.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.3.0''''' 2015/03/03
|
'''New welcome page''' 
Wordfast Anywhere start new. Security has been strengthened with a more attractive welcome page.
 You can reset your password even if your login is not a valid email by using the security question.
 The security question and answer can be set in your profile.

|-
|}

Wordfast Anywhere Release Notes

2023-06-30T10:17:23Z

Remiandre:

{{Languages}}
[[Category:Wordfast Anywhere]] 

{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.4''''' 2023/07/01
|
* '''Free version''': Wordfast Anywhere has a new free version if your credit has expired including the 1 month trial at 1$. This version has a monthly limit of 15000 words.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.3''''' 2023/01/01
|
* '''Paid version''': Wordfast Anywhere becomes a subscription-based service. the logging is done at https://www.wordfast.com/myaccount

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.2''''' 2021/09/03
|
* '''Purchase Order''': On Advanced projects, a Purchase Order is used when document is shared with linguist. The Purchase Order template can be build on the user profile.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.1''''' 2021/08/13
|
* '''Multiple documents selection''': Available for extracting unique and frequent segments.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.0''''' 2021/07/17
|
* '''Project Management''': Project has been introduced with a standard mode for translator working alone as before and the advanced project for project managers working with several linguists.
* '''Languages pairs and documents''': The project contains languages pairs that contains documents. The list of documents is therefore sorted by language pairs.
* '''TMs and glossaries''': A global TM and Glossaries setup dialog is now located on '''''wordfast anywhere''''' menu and used only for management (create, add, upload, merge, edit, download, delete... ), no more for assignment. Assigning TMs and/or glossaries is done when setting up a language pair in the project setup. It can also be done, as before, for a selected document using the '''''TMs and glossaries''''' [[File:Preferences16round.png]] button in the '''''File''''' menu.
* '''Menus and buttons''': The '''''Help''''' menu and the '''''AutoAligner''''' [[File:WF_Update16.png]] buttons have been moved to the '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' menu. The '''''Upload''''' [[File:Add_File_To_Project16.png]] and '''''Delete''''' [[File:Remove16.png]] buttons of the '''''File''''' menu have been moved and integrated in the project panel. Project files (*.glp) are now managed with the '''''Import''''' [[File:pm_import_project_16.png]] and '''''Export''''' [[File:pm_export_project_16.png]] buttons in the '''''Project''''' menu. The global behavior has been improved showing menus and buttons in context.
* '''Multiple documents selection''': Multiple documents selection with checkboxes is now possible for Download, Analysis, Pre-translation and TMs and/or glossaries assignment.
*'''Close segment option''': Add a new close option '''''Close Retain''''' [[File:Close_retain.png]] in the '''''Translation''''' menu. On closing segment, target is retained but not saved in database.
*'''Jump empty segment''': Only open segments with empty target. The button is a toggle [[File:Jump_green.png]] [[File:Jump_red.png]] that can be stopped at any time.
*''' Find & Replace''': Add a new feature in the '''''Find & Replace''''' tool for unbreakable space and other special character. See the More checkbox.
*'''Merge Bilingual''': The '''''Merge Bilingual''''' [[File:Mergetms16.png]] button has been improved and simplified. Old related features have been moved to a new TM tool '''''Upload TM from bilingual document'''''.
*'''Number replacement''': There are new space characters for date and number conversion in Pandora's box #8 '''''Configure Auto-suggest'''''.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.14''''' 2020/09/05
|
* '''Machine Translation''': Added the Intento MT engines portal.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.13''''' 2020/08/01
|
* '''Machine Translation''': Improvement of MT engines management now found on a special tab in the Setup dialog.
* '''Machine Translation''': 3 possibilities of customized engines. ModernMT added in a preselection option.
* '''DeepL''': Added the formality setting.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.12''''' 2020/06/20
|
* '''DeepL''': Add new languages ZH, JA for source and target and Brazilian Portuguese for target only.
* '''MT''': Add MT usage and score in the configuration

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.11''''' 2019/11/16
|
* '''Untranslatable''': Untranslatable Segments (not having letters) are copied to target and next segment is opened. The feature is active by default but can be disable in the Setup, see Pandora 's box #18.
This feature will have a configuration in a second step to define more cases of untranslatable segments.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.10''''' 2019/09/18
|
* '''Split segment''': The Shrink feature has been improved, it is now possible to cut with the cursor and it is working with character languages like Chinese.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.9''''' 2019/06/05
|
* '''Upload''': Possibility to choose a TM and glossary other than the current one when uploading a document. Possibility to upload a TM or glossary from an URL location.
* '''Download''': Possibility to use advanced filters for document and TM. It can be used for downloading a clean TM or a clean set of TUs for training a MT engine.
*'''TM search''': The windows has been improve by adding new parameters for filtering the search.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.8''''' 2019/03/04
|
* '''Document sharing''': It has been improved to share TM and glossary at the same time and more than one document.
* '''One Drive''': Like Google Drive and Dropbox, you can now use Microsoft One Drive.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.7''''' 2019/01/26
|
* '''Kantan MT''': kantan provides a confidential and customized Machine Translation service that learns from your translations. See [https://www.kantanmt.com/ www.kantanmt.com]
* '''Sanitaze TM and bilingual document''': Translation memory and document can be sanitize through the advance filtering dialog. See the new download list box for TM and the download option '''filtered Bilingual''' for document. This cleaning can be useful for preparing a file for MT training.
* '''TM to bilingual''': A TM can be downloaded as a bilingual TXLF document. See the new option in the existing export format list box after Excel.
* '''XML and MQXLIFF''' formats are now available. For XML there is a new tab in the configure filters configuration to import an extraction rules file.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.6''''' 2018/12/22
|
* '''Custom MT''': You can add a new MT engine by configuring it.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.5''''' 2018/12/08
|
* '''TM download filter''': A TM can be downloaded filtering on date, user ID or attributes. See TM download option beside format.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.4''''' 2018/11/26
|
* '''Package''': You can upload and download a project file from and to Wordfast Pro 5. This package is a compressed file containing selected documents, translation memories and glossaries. For Upload just select a *.glp file and for download choose the new package option.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.3''''' 2018/09/20
|
* '''XLIF''': The editor is now mainly based on XLIF. Some formatting bold, italic and underline are displayed with their opening and closing tags. The expand/merge functionality for segments has been improved. Globally this version tightens compatibility with Wordfast Pro 5.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.2''''' 2018/04/06
|
* '''TM edition''': Improve TM edition by adding a new tags deletion button in edit tab, adding a new button ''add TU'' in TMs and glossaries tab and allowing offline download.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.1''''' 2018/03/24
|
* '''MT languages''': Added DeepL to the list of MT engines.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.0''''' 2018/03/01
|
* '''New login pages''': More simple, more secure, more mobile friendly.
* '''Multilingual UI''': The version comes with French and Spanish but is ready to be translated to other languages with a collaborative translation page accessible through your profile.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.23''''' 2017/11/08
|
* '''MyMemory TM import''': Contribute your TM to MyMemory or import it private. See the MyMemory choice in the download options.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.22''''' 2017/10/28
|
* '''MT languages''': Update new available languages for Microsoft, Google and Yandex.
* '''MyMemory MT and TM''': When setting MyMemory MT, you can also lookup a MyMemory TM by giving the key.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.21''''' 2017/09/23
|
* '''Internal fuzzy matches''': Internal fuzzy matches can be added to the analysis. It need to be enabled in the Pandora's box #17 in the Setup.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.20''''' 2017/08/25
|
* '''Extract unique segments''': The Extract frequents tool has been improved adding also the extraction of uniques segments. Go to '''''File''''' tab and use the '''''Extract Frequents''''' button.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.19''''' 2017/05/16
|
* '''Notes Report''': You can download a report with segments having a note. Go to '''''File''''' tab and use the '''''Download''''' button, there is a choice for notes. Provisional segments and revisions can be added to the report.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.18''''' 2017/04/29
|
* TM and Glossaries setup now available from '''''File''''' tab and '''''TM & Glossaries''''' tab with same functionality. Settings can now be done even when no file is selected or opened.
* '''Document Share Beta''': New features have been added to document share. A document can now be shared between several users allowing multiple editors to be working at the same time in the document due to a reservation system when opening the document. Check the [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_Manual Wordfast Anywhere Manual] for more information.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.17''''' 2017/03/31
|
* '''TM edition''': For TM under 100.000 lines, a document extracted from the TM can be opened in the document Panel. because the TM is associated with this document, updating this document update also the TM. The feature '''''Edit a TM''''' is a choice in the TM tools button.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.16''''' 2017/03/21
|
* '''New Aligner''': When clicking on the aligner button, You will find the option Wordfast Aligner (copy-paste document text).

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.15''''' 2016/12/17
|
* '''Yandex.Translate''': New MT engine which need a key but has a free amount of 1,000,000 characters a month.
* '''Microsoft Translator''' remaining bugs solved.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.14''''' 2016/12/10
|
* '''Microsoft Translator''': We prepare the configuration to accept the key generated on the new Azure portal.
* '''Machine translation''': We improve the management of an engine failure. It can be disabled without going to the Setup and the engine can recover by itself as soon as it is avaiable again.
* Glossary paging for Wordfast Anywhere glossaries. You can now visualize all the terms of a standard WFA glossary and even update them.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.13''''' 2016/11/26
|
* '''Offline mode''': Give the possibility to work for a while when there is some Internet or server issue. The segments are save locally and then save automatically to the server when the connection or server is back online. This feature is not working when FireFox is in private navigation mode.
* '''Double click''': A new configuration is possible to use double click to open, close or close and open by clicking on the segment or the segment source or just the number. See Pandora's box #10.
* Add a management of unwanted sessions break with automatic recovery and a warning if it is abnormally frequent.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.12''''' 2016/10/22
|
* '''Unit convertion''': This new feature is also in a beta state and will help users when translating a text that contains measures (Metric or Imperial). Possible conversions will be added to the auto-suggest list. Enabled by default in '''''Pandora's Box #8'''''
* Double click toggle to open/close a segment.
* Glossary paging for remote TMGR glossary.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.11''''' 2016/09/24
|
* Glossary improvements and changes : The attributes can be displayed in the glossary panel when clicking on the term. Highlighted terms in the source segment have different background colors for different glossaries. Glossaries are sorted after download.
* New privilege when sharing a TM to allow guests to see the email of other guests.
* New feature for MT to enable it on already translated file. See the "Enable MT for review" check box in the MT configuration. It is useful for a bilingual file when source segments are copied to the target.
* Lots of small improvements like TBX file upload and download, showing tag content in the status bar and in a popup if clicking on the status bar, some new FAQ articles.
* Many bugs fixed with MyMemory operation, adding a remote glossary with a given URL, glossary counts, Auto-suggest, Google and Dropbox access and more.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.10''''' 2016/06/25
|
* 4 more new '''''Insert char''''' buttons are now available in the '''''Edit''''' tab. Go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button for customizing them in the '''''Pandora's Box''''' tab #5. 4 more shortcuts has been created to match them: '''''Shift+Ctrl+1''''' until '''''Shift+Ctrl+7'''''. It can be customized in the '''''Shortcuts''''' tab. click on the '''''Restore default shortcuts''''' to add them all.
* 1 new '''''Delete targets''''' button also in the '''''Edit''''' tab to empty all targets from the document. Please use it sparingly.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.9.0''''' 2016/06/14
|
* The segment tool bar has been implemented back. Go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button. It can be enabled in the '''''General''''' tab and customized in the '''''Pandora's Box''''' tab #17
* Concordance matches are now sorted by date.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.8.0''''' 2016/05/25
|
* Glossaries can now be downloaded to TBX format.
* Spellcheck dictionaries have been updated and new languages have been added.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.7.0''''' 2016/05/12
|
* '''Voice Speech''' feature has been added. This new feature is in a beta state and only available for Chrome on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mic.png]] '''''Web Speech Beta''''' button and will allow users to dictate the text of the target segment when a segment is opened. For more information check '''''Help''''' tab => [[File:Wikipedia16w.jpg]] '''''Manual''''' button.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] '''''Document Layout''''' can now be mapped to a shortcut. No key combination has been assigned, you need to set in on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button.
* Text selection to add terms to the glossary has been improved. Now several words can be selected on both source and target to add them to the glossary using the shortcut (default, ''Ctrl+Alt+T'').
* Notification warning has been made more visible, now a red text will be shown on the top bar next to the tabs names. Remember notifications are shown on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab and should be removed after reading.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.6.0''''' 2016/03/26
|
* The small '''Share''' button in the '''TMs and glossaries management''' dialog has been improved and simplified. The big '''Manage sharing''' button is kept for advanced sharing.
* New option for a confidential document share which do not allow download. See '''File''' tab => '''Share''' button.
* A document can be opened in WFP4 online even if it is already opened in Wordfast Anywhere.
* The '''Find & Replace''' tool in '''Edit''' tab can now find and replace on the source segment.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.5.0''''' 2016/02/20
|
* New IATE glossaries, build from the IATE dowload at http://iate.europa.eu/.
* The status bar has been improve again adding the glossary information.
* A document can be shared in read only. When a document is shared in the normal way, the guest can work and the owner can see the document in read-only. If the document is shared in read-only, the owner can work and the guest see the document in read-only.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.4.0''''' 2015/11/28
|
* New MT engine '''MyMemory'''. It offers 1000 words per day. No key needed.
* New target character counter in a new cell of the status bar.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.3.0''''' 2015/10/28
|
* New '''Tools''' button to reverse and assemble TMs and glossaries.
* Improvement of the statistics report to show words and characters percentages.
* Possibility to download multiple TXML files.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.2.0''''' 2015/10/21
|
'''Custom tab''' 
* You can customized the last tab to have your own buttons used for translation in one place.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.1.1''''' 2015/10/06
|
'''UI improvement of 4.1.0''' 
* The tabs can be opened either with the click or with the mouseover. Go to the Setup to configure.
* Improvement of the Analysis and pre-translate process.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.1.0''''' 2015/10/03
|
'''UI improvement of 4.0.0''' 
* The tabs are opened with the mouseover
* We added an auto-hide buttons mode. it is not set by default. if you want to try go to '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Setup''' button => tick '''Auto-Hide buttons'''
* The outline status (open/close) is now saved even after a logout.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.0.0''''' 2015/09/26
|
'''New User Interface''' 
All commands are re-ordered in a new top panel. 8 new tabs containing buttons.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.7.1''''' 2015/08/02
|
'''Assembling of TMs or glossaries''' 
You can assemble several TMs or glossaries of the same language pair and download them as one file. In a second step, you can upload that new TM or glossary and remove the old ones.
 In the TMs and glossaries dialog, selected first the TMs or glossaries by checking them in the active column then click on the assemble button.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.7.0''''' 2015/07/25
|
'''Tilde Terminology service''' 
A new type of glossary has been implement giving access to Tilde Terminology service. In the glossary setup click on the add button then choose Tilde Terminology service.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.6.0''''' 2015/05/23
|
'''Machine translation''' 
Add Iconic MT engine for patent translation. See the detail in the MT dialog how to use it. 
'''TM usage''' 
Some improvement with the read-only mode and a new icon has been addded to the status bar on bottom right. 
'''Segment tool bar''' 
You can now configure the buttons you want to keep on the bar.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.5.0''''' 2015/05/09
|
'''Auto-propagate''' 
Add a button on the segment toolbar after the provisional button to propagate the target on all the same source in the document.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.4.0''''' 2015/04/25
|
'''Cloud storage''' 
Dropbox has been implemented as a new storage for upload and download of files. 
'''MT''' 
Improvement of configuration dialog. 
'''Auto-suggest''' 
Add chunks of MT and an improvement to trigger the auto-suggest. 
'''TM rules''' 
Add the option: Do not overwrite existing TU

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.3.3''''' 2015/03/14
|
'''Cloud storage''' 
Google drive has been implemented as a new storage for upload and download of files.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.3.0''''' 2015/03/03
|
'''New welcome page''' 
Wordfast Anywhere start new. Security has been strengthened with a more attractive welcome page.
 You can reset your password even if your login is not a valid email by using the security question.
 The security question and answer can be set in your profile.

|-
|}

Wordfast Anywhere Release Notes

2023-06-30T10:08:23Z

Remiandre:

{{Languages}}
[[Category:Wordfast Anywhere]] 

{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.4''''' 2023/07/01
|
* '''Free version''': Wordfast Anywhere has a new free version if a subscription is not renewed including the 1 month trial at 1$. This version has a monthly limit of 15000 words.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.3''''' 2023/01/01
|
* '''Paid version''': Wordfast Anywhere becomes a subscription-based service. the logging is done at https://www.wordfast.com/myaccount

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.2''''' 2021/09/03
|
* '''Purchase Order''': On Advanced projects, a Purchase Order is used when document is shared with linguist. The Purchase Order template can be build on the user profile.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.1''''' 2021/08/13
|
* '''Multiple documents selection''': Available for extracting unique and frequent segments.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.0''''' 2021/07/17
|
* '''Project Management''': Project has been introduced with a standard mode for translator working alone as before and the advanced project for project managers working with several linguists.
* '''Languages pairs and documents''': The project contains languages pairs that contains documents. The list of documents is therefore sorted by language pairs.
* '''TMs and glossaries''': A global TM and Glossaries setup dialog is now located on '''''wordfast anywhere''''' menu and used only for management (create, add, upload, merge, edit, download, delete... ), no more for assignment. Assigning TMs and/or glossaries is done when setting up a language pair in the project setup. It can also be done, as before, for a selected document using the '''''TMs and glossaries''''' [[File:Preferences16round.png]] button in the '''''File''''' menu.
* '''Menus and buttons''': The '''''Help''''' menu and the '''''AutoAligner''''' [[File:WF_Update16.png]] buttons have been moved to the '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' menu. The '''''Upload''''' [[File:Add_File_To_Project16.png]] and '''''Delete''''' [[File:Remove16.png]] buttons of the '''''File''''' menu have been moved and integrated in the project panel. Project files (*.glp) are now managed with the '''''Import''''' [[File:pm_import_project_16.png]] and '''''Export''''' [[File:pm_export_project_16.png]] buttons in the '''''Project''''' menu. The global behavior has been improved showing menus and buttons in context.
* '''Multiple documents selection''': Multiple documents selection with checkboxes is now possible for Download, Analysis, Pre-translation and TMs and/or glossaries assignment.
*'''Close segment option''': Add a new close option '''''Close Retain''''' [[File:Close_retain.png]] in the '''''Translation''''' menu. On closing segment, target is retained but not saved in database.
*'''Jump empty segment''': Only open segments with empty target. The button is a toggle [[File:Jump_green.png]] [[File:Jump_red.png]] that can be stopped at any time.
*''' Find & Replace''': Add a new feature in the '''''Find & Replace''''' tool for unbreakable space and other special character. See the More checkbox.
*'''Merge Bilingual''': The '''''Merge Bilingual''''' [[File:Mergetms16.png]] button has been improved and simplified. Old related features have been moved to a new TM tool '''''Upload TM from bilingual document'''''.
*'''Number replacement''': There are new space characters for date and number conversion in Pandora's box #8 '''''Configure Auto-suggest'''''.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.14''''' 2020/09/05
|
* '''Machine Translation''': Added the Intento MT engines portal.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.13''''' 2020/08/01
|
* '''Machine Translation''': Improvement of MT engines management now found on a special tab in the Setup dialog.
* '''Machine Translation''': 3 possibilities of customized engines. ModernMT added in a preselection option.
* '''DeepL''': Added the formality setting.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.12''''' 2020/06/20
|
* '''DeepL''': Add new languages ZH, JA for source and target and Brazilian Portuguese for target only.
* '''MT''': Add MT usage and score in the configuration

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.11''''' 2019/11/16
|
* '''Untranslatable''': Untranslatable Segments (not having letters) are copied to target and next segment is opened. The feature is active by default but can be disable in the Setup, see Pandora 's box #18.
This feature will have a configuration in a second step to define more cases of untranslatable segments.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.10''''' 2019/09/18
|
* '''Split segment''': The Shrink feature has been improved, it is now possible to cut with the cursor and it is working with character languages like Chinese.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.9''''' 2019/06/05
|
* '''Upload''': Possibility to choose a TM and glossary other than the current one when uploading a document. Possibility to upload a TM or glossary from an URL location.
* '''Download''': Possibility to use advanced filters for document and TM. It can be used for downloading a clean TM or a clean set of TUs for training a MT engine.
*'''TM search''': The windows has been improve by adding new parameters for filtering the search.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.8''''' 2019/03/04
|
* '''Document sharing''': It has been improved to share TM and glossary at the same time and more than one document.
* '''One Drive''': Like Google Drive and Dropbox, you can now use Microsoft One Drive.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.7''''' 2019/01/26
|
* '''Kantan MT''': kantan provides a confidential and customized Machine Translation service that learns from your translations. See [https://www.kantanmt.com/ www.kantanmt.com]
* '''Sanitaze TM and bilingual document''': Translation memory and document can be sanitize through the advance filtering dialog. See the new download list box for TM and the download option '''filtered Bilingual''' for document. This cleaning can be useful for preparing a file for MT training.
* '''TM to bilingual''': A TM can be downloaded as a bilingual TXLF document. See the new option in the existing export format list box after Excel.
* '''XML and MQXLIFF''' formats are now available. For XML there is a new tab in the configure filters configuration to import an extraction rules file.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.6''''' 2018/12/22
|
* '''Custom MT''': You can add a new MT engine by configuring it.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.5''''' 2018/12/08
|
* '''TM download filter''': A TM can be downloaded filtering on date, user ID or attributes. See TM download option beside format.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.4''''' 2018/11/26
|
* '''Package''': You can upload and download a project file from and to Wordfast Pro 5. This package is a compressed file containing selected documents, translation memories and glossaries. For Upload just select a *.glp file and for download choose the new package option.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.3''''' 2018/09/20
|
* '''XLIF''': The editor is now mainly based on XLIF. Some formatting bold, italic and underline are displayed with their opening and closing tags. The expand/merge functionality for segments has been improved. Globally this version tightens compatibility with Wordfast Pro 5.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.2''''' 2018/04/06
|
* '''TM edition''': Improve TM edition by adding a new tags deletion button in edit tab, adding a new button ''add TU'' in TMs and glossaries tab and allowing offline download.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.1''''' 2018/03/24
|
* '''MT languages''': Added DeepL to the list of MT engines.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.0''''' 2018/03/01
|
* '''New login pages''': More simple, more secure, more mobile friendly.
* '''Multilingual UI''': The version comes with French and Spanish but is ready to be translated to other languages with a collaborative translation page accessible through your profile.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.23''''' 2017/11/08
|
* '''MyMemory TM import''': Contribute your TM to MyMemory or import it private. See the MyMemory choice in the download options.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.22''''' 2017/10/28
|
* '''MT languages''': Update new available languages for Microsoft, Google and Yandex.
* '''MyMemory MT and TM''': When setting MyMemory MT, you can also lookup a MyMemory TM by giving the key.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.21''''' 2017/09/23
|
* '''Internal fuzzy matches''': Internal fuzzy matches can be added to the analysis. It need to be enabled in the Pandora's box #17 in the Setup.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.20''''' 2017/08/25
|
* '''Extract unique segments''': The Extract frequents tool has been improved adding also the extraction of uniques segments. Go to '''''File''''' tab and use the '''''Extract Frequents''''' button.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.19''''' 2017/05/16
|
* '''Notes Report''': You can download a report with segments having a note. Go to '''''File''''' tab and use the '''''Download''''' button, there is a choice for notes. Provisional segments and revisions can be added to the report.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.18''''' 2017/04/29
|
* TM and Glossaries setup now available from '''''File''''' tab and '''''TM & Glossaries''''' tab with same functionality. Settings can now be done even when no file is selected or opened.
* '''Document Share Beta''': New features have been added to document share. A document can now be shared between several users allowing multiple editors to be working at the same time in the document due to a reservation system when opening the document. Check the [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_Manual Wordfast Anywhere Manual] for more information.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.17''''' 2017/03/31
|
* '''TM edition''': For TM under 100.000 lines, a document extracted from the TM can be opened in the document Panel. because the TM is associated with this document, updating this document update also the TM. The feature '''''Edit a TM''''' is a choice in the TM tools button.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.16''''' 2017/03/21
|
* '''New Aligner''': When clicking on the aligner button, You will find the option Wordfast Aligner (copy-paste document text).

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.15''''' 2016/12/17
|
* '''Yandex.Translate''': New MT engine which need a key but has a free amount of 1,000,000 characters a month.
* '''Microsoft Translator''' remaining bugs solved.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.14''''' 2016/12/10
|
* '''Microsoft Translator''': We prepare the configuration to accept the key generated on the new Azure portal.
* '''Machine translation''': We improve the management of an engine failure. It can be disabled without going to the Setup and the engine can recover by itself as soon as it is avaiable again.
* Glossary paging for Wordfast Anywhere glossaries. You can now visualize all the terms of a standard WFA glossary and even update them.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.13''''' 2016/11/26
|
* '''Offline mode''': Give the possibility to work for a while when there is some Internet or server issue. The segments are save locally and then save automatically to the server when the connection or server is back online. This feature is not working when FireFox is in private navigation mode.
* '''Double click''': A new configuration is possible to use double click to open, close or close and open by clicking on the segment or the segment source or just the number. See Pandora's box #10.
* Add a management of unwanted sessions break with automatic recovery and a warning if it is abnormally frequent.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.12''''' 2016/10/22
|
* '''Unit convertion''': This new feature is also in a beta state and will help users when translating a text that contains measures (Metric or Imperial). Possible conversions will be added to the auto-suggest list. Enabled by default in '''''Pandora's Box #8'''''
* Double click toggle to open/close a segment.
* Glossary paging for remote TMGR glossary.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.11''''' 2016/09/24
|
* Glossary improvements and changes : The attributes can be displayed in the glossary panel when clicking on the term. Highlighted terms in the source segment have different background colors for different glossaries. Glossaries are sorted after download.
* New privilege when sharing a TM to allow guests to see the email of other guests.
* New feature for MT to enable it on already translated file. See the "Enable MT for review" check box in the MT configuration. It is useful for a bilingual file when source segments are copied to the target.
* Lots of small improvements like TBX file upload and download, showing tag content in the status bar and in a popup if clicking on the status bar, some new FAQ articles.
* Many bugs fixed with MyMemory operation, adding a remote glossary with a given URL, glossary counts, Auto-suggest, Google and Dropbox access and more.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.10''''' 2016/06/25
|
* 4 more new '''''Insert char''''' buttons are now available in the '''''Edit''''' tab. Go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button for customizing them in the '''''Pandora's Box''''' tab #5. 4 more shortcuts has been created to match them: '''''Shift+Ctrl+1''''' until '''''Shift+Ctrl+7'''''. It can be customized in the '''''Shortcuts''''' tab. click on the '''''Restore default shortcuts''''' to add them all.
* 1 new '''''Delete targets''''' button also in the '''''Edit''''' tab to empty all targets from the document. Please use it sparingly.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.9.0''''' 2016/06/14
|
* The segment tool bar has been implemented back. Go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button. It can be enabled in the '''''General''''' tab and customized in the '''''Pandora's Box''''' tab #17
* Concordance matches are now sorted by date.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.8.0''''' 2016/05/25
|
* Glossaries can now be downloaded to TBX format.
* Spellcheck dictionaries have been updated and new languages have been added.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.7.0''''' 2016/05/12
|
* '''Voice Speech''' feature has been added. This new feature is in a beta state and only available for Chrome on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mic.png]] '''''Web Speech Beta''''' button and will allow users to dictate the text of the target segment when a segment is opened. For more information check '''''Help''''' tab => [[File:Wikipedia16w.jpg]] '''''Manual''''' button.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] '''''Document Layout''''' can now be mapped to a shortcut. No key combination has been assigned, you need to set in on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button.
* Text selection to add terms to the glossary has been improved. Now several words can be selected on both source and target to add them to the glossary using the shortcut (default, ''Ctrl+Alt+T'').
* Notification warning has been made more visible, now a red text will be shown on the top bar next to the tabs names. Remember notifications are shown on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab and should be removed after reading.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.6.0''''' 2016/03/26
|
* The small '''Share''' button in the '''TMs and glossaries management''' dialog has been improved and simplified. The big '''Manage sharing''' button is kept for advanced sharing.
* New option for a confidential document share which do not allow download. See '''File''' tab => '''Share''' button.
* A document can be opened in WFP4 online even if it is already opened in Wordfast Anywhere.
* The '''Find & Replace''' tool in '''Edit''' tab can now find and replace on the source segment.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.5.0''''' 2016/02/20
|
* New IATE glossaries, build from the IATE dowload at http://iate.europa.eu/.
* The status bar has been improve again adding the glossary information.
* A document can be shared in read only. When a document is shared in the normal way, the guest can work and the owner can see the document in read-only. If the document is shared in read-only, the owner can work and the guest see the document in read-only.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.4.0''''' 2015/11/28
|
* New MT engine '''MyMemory'''. It offers 1000 words per day. No key needed.
* New target character counter in a new cell of the status bar.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.3.0''''' 2015/10/28
|
* New '''Tools''' button to reverse and assemble TMs and glossaries.
* Improvement of the statistics report to show words and characters percentages.
* Possibility to download multiple TXML files.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.2.0''''' 2015/10/21
|
'''Custom tab''' 
* You can customized the last tab to have your own buttons used for translation in one place.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.1.1''''' 2015/10/06
|
'''UI improvement of 4.1.0''' 
* The tabs can be opened either with the click or with the mouseover. Go to the Setup to configure.
* Improvement of the Analysis and pre-translate process.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.1.0''''' 2015/10/03
|
'''UI improvement of 4.0.0''' 
* The tabs are opened with the mouseover
* We added an auto-hide buttons mode. it is not set by default. if you want to try go to '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Setup''' button => tick '''Auto-Hide buttons'''
* The outline status (open/close) is now saved even after a logout.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.0.0''''' 2015/09/26
|
'''New User Interface''' 
All commands are re-ordered in a new top panel. 8 new tabs containing buttons.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.7.1''''' 2015/08/02
|
'''Assembling of TMs or glossaries''' 
You can assemble several TMs or glossaries of the same language pair and download them as one file. In a second step, you can upload that new TM or glossary and remove the old ones.
 In the TMs and glossaries dialog, selected first the TMs or glossaries by checking them in the active column then click on the assemble button.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.7.0''''' 2015/07/25
|
'''Tilde Terminology service''' 
A new type of glossary has been implement giving access to Tilde Terminology service. In the glossary setup click on the add button then choose Tilde Terminology service.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.6.0''''' 2015/05/23
|
'''Machine translation''' 
Add Iconic MT engine for patent translation. See the detail in the MT dialog how to use it. 
'''TM usage''' 
Some improvement with the read-only mode and a new icon has been addded to the status bar on bottom right. 
'''Segment tool bar''' 
You can now configure the buttons you want to keep on the bar.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.5.0''''' 2015/05/09
|
'''Auto-propagate''' 
Add a button on the segment toolbar after the provisional button to propagate the target on all the same source in the document.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.4.0''''' 2015/04/25
|
'''Cloud storage''' 
Dropbox has been implemented as a new storage for upload and download of files. 
'''MT''' 
Improvement of configuration dialog. 
'''Auto-suggest''' 
Add chunks of MT and an improvement to trigger the auto-suggest. 
'''TM rules''' 
Add the option: Do not overwrite existing TU

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.3.3''''' 2015/03/14
|
'''Cloud storage''' 
Google drive has been implemented as a new storage for upload and download of files.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.3.0''''' 2015/03/03
|
'''New welcome page''' 
Wordfast Anywhere start new. Security has been strengthened with a more attractive welcome page.
 You can reset your password even if your login is not a valid email by using the security question.
 The security question and answer can be set in your profile.

|-
|}

Wordfast Anywhere Release Notes

2023-06-30T08:04:02Z

Remiandre:

{{Languages}}
[[Category:Wordfast Anywhere]] 

{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.4''''' 2023/07/01
|
* '''Free version''': Wordfast Anywhere has a new free version if a subscription is not renewed including the the 1 month trial at 1$. This version has a monthly limit of 15000 words.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.3''''' 2023/01/01
|
* '''Paid version''': Wordfast Anywhere becomes a subscription-based service. the logging is done at https://www.wordfast.com/myaccount

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.2''''' 2021/09/03
|
* '''Purchase Order''': On Advanced projects, a Purchase Order is used when document is shared with linguist. The Purchase Order template can be build on the user profile.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.1''''' 2021/08/13
|
* '''Multiple documents selection''': Available for extracting unique and frequent segments.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.0''''' 2021/07/17
|
* '''Project Management''': Project has been introduced with a standard mode for translator working alone as before and the advanced project for project managers working with several linguists.
* '''Languages pairs and documents''': The project contains languages pairs that contains documents. The list of documents is therefore sorted by language pairs.
* '''TMs and glossaries''': A global TM and Glossaries setup dialog is now located on '''''wordfast anywhere''''' menu and used only for management (create, add, upload, merge, edit, download, delete... ), no more for assignment. Assigning TMs and/or glossaries is done when setting up a language pair in the project setup. It can also be done, as before, for a selected document using the '''''TMs and glossaries''''' [[File:Preferences16round.png]] button in the '''''File''''' menu.
* '''Menus and buttons''': The '''''Help''''' menu and the '''''AutoAligner''''' [[File:WF_Update16.png]] buttons have been moved to the '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' menu. The '''''Upload''''' [[File:Add_File_To_Project16.png]] and '''''Delete''''' [[File:Remove16.png]] buttons of the '''''File''''' menu have been moved and integrated in the project panel. Project files (*.glp) are now managed with the '''''Import''''' [[File:pm_import_project_16.png]] and '''''Export''''' [[File:pm_export_project_16.png]] buttons in the '''''Project''''' menu. The global behavior has been improved showing menus and buttons in context.
* '''Multiple documents selection''': Multiple documents selection with checkboxes is now possible for Download, Analysis, Pre-translation and TMs and/or glossaries assignment.
*'''Close segment option''': Add a new close option '''''Close Retain''''' [[File:Close_retain.png]] in the '''''Translation''''' menu. On closing segment, target is retained but not saved in database.
*'''Jump empty segment''': Only open segments with empty target. The button is a toggle [[File:Jump_green.png]] [[File:Jump_red.png]] that can be stopped at any time.
*''' Find & Replace''': Add a new feature in the '''''Find & Replace''''' tool for unbreakable space and other special character. See the More checkbox.
*'''Merge Bilingual''': The '''''Merge Bilingual''''' [[File:Mergetms16.png]] button has been improved and simplified. Old related features have been moved to a new TM tool '''''Upload TM from bilingual document'''''.
*'''Number replacement''': There are new space characters for date and number conversion in Pandora's box #8 '''''Configure Auto-suggest'''''.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.14''''' 2020/09/05
|
* '''Machine Translation''': Added the Intento MT engines portal.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.13''''' 2020/08/01
|
* '''Machine Translation''': Improvement of MT engines management now found on a special tab in the Setup dialog.
* '''Machine Translation''': 3 possibilities of customized engines. ModernMT added in a preselection option.
* '''DeepL''': Added the formality setting.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.12''''' 2020/06/20
|
* '''DeepL''': Add new languages ZH, JA for source and target and Brazilian Portuguese for target only.
* '''MT''': Add MT usage and score in the configuration

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.11''''' 2019/11/16
|
* '''Untranslatable''': Untranslatable Segments (not having letters) are copied to target and next segment is opened. The feature is active by default but can be disable in the Setup, see Pandora 's box #18.
This feature will have a configuration in a second step to define more cases of untranslatable segments.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.10''''' 2019/09/18
|
* '''Split segment''': The Shrink feature has been improved, it is now possible to cut with the cursor and it is working with character languages like Chinese.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.9''''' 2019/06/05
|
* '''Upload''': Possibility to choose a TM and glossary other than the current one when uploading a document. Possibility to upload a TM or glossary from an URL location.
* '''Download''': Possibility to use advanced filters for document and TM. It can be used for downloading a clean TM or a clean set of TUs for training a MT engine.
*'''TM search''': The windows has been improve by adding new parameters for filtering the search.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.8''''' 2019/03/04
|
* '''Document sharing''': It has been improved to share TM and glossary at the same time and more than one document.
* '''One Drive''': Like Google Drive and Dropbox, you can now use Microsoft One Drive.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.7''''' 2019/01/26
|
* '''Kantan MT''': kantan provides a confidential and customized Machine Translation service that learns from your translations. See [https://www.kantanmt.com/ www.kantanmt.com]
* '''Sanitaze TM and bilingual document''': Translation memory and document can be sanitize through the advance filtering dialog. See the new download list box for TM and the download option '''filtered Bilingual''' for document. This cleaning can be useful for preparing a file for MT training.
* '''TM to bilingual''': A TM can be downloaded as a bilingual TXLF document. See the new option in the existing export format list box after Excel.
* '''XML and MQXLIFF''' formats are now available. For XML there is a new tab in the configure filters configuration to import an extraction rules file.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.6''''' 2018/12/22
|
* '''Custom MT''': You can add a new MT engine by configuring it.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.5''''' 2018/12/08
|
* '''TM download filter''': A TM can be downloaded filtering on date, user ID or attributes. See TM download option beside format.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.4''''' 2018/11/26
|
* '''Package''': You can upload and download a project file from and to Wordfast Pro 5. This package is a compressed file containing selected documents, translation memories and glossaries. For Upload just select a *.glp file and for download choose the new package option.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.3''''' 2018/09/20
|
* '''XLIF''': The editor is now mainly based on XLIF. Some formatting bold, italic and underline are displayed with their opening and closing tags. The expand/merge functionality for segments has been improved. Globally this version tightens compatibility with Wordfast Pro 5.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.2''''' 2018/04/06
|
* '''TM edition''': Improve TM edition by adding a new tags deletion button in edit tab, adding a new button ''add TU'' in TMs and glossaries tab and allowing offline download.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.1''''' 2018/03/24
|
* '''MT languages''': Added DeepL to the list of MT engines.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.0''''' 2018/03/01
|
* '''New login pages''': More simple, more secure, more mobile friendly.
* '''Multilingual UI''': The version comes with French and Spanish but is ready to be translated to other languages with a collaborative translation page accessible through your profile.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.23''''' 2017/11/08
|
* '''MyMemory TM import''': Contribute your TM to MyMemory or import it private. See the MyMemory choice in the download options.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.22''''' 2017/10/28
|
* '''MT languages''': Update new available languages for Microsoft, Google and Yandex.
* '''MyMemory MT and TM''': When setting MyMemory MT, you can also lookup a MyMemory TM by giving the key.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.21''''' 2017/09/23
|
* '''Internal fuzzy matches''': Internal fuzzy matches can be added to the analysis. It need to be enabled in the Pandora's box #17 in the Setup.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.20''''' 2017/08/25
|
* '''Extract unique segments''': The Extract frequents tool has been improved adding also the extraction of uniques segments. Go to '''''File''''' tab and use the '''''Extract Frequents''''' button.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.19''''' 2017/05/16
|
* '''Notes Report''': You can download a report with segments having a note. Go to '''''File''''' tab and use the '''''Download''''' button, there is a choice for notes. Provisional segments and revisions can be added to the report.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.18''''' 2017/04/29
|
* TM and Glossaries setup now available from '''''File''''' tab and '''''TM & Glossaries''''' tab with same functionality. Settings can now be done even when no file is selected or opened.
* '''Document Share Beta''': New features have been added to document share. A document can now be shared between several users allowing multiple editors to be working at the same time in the document due to a reservation system when opening the document. Check the [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_Manual Wordfast Anywhere Manual] for more information.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.17''''' 2017/03/31
|
* '''TM edition''': For TM under 100.000 lines, a document extracted from the TM can be opened in the document Panel. because the TM is associated with this document, updating this document update also the TM. The feature '''''Edit a TM''''' is a choice in the TM tools button.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.16''''' 2017/03/21
|
* '''New Aligner''': When clicking on the aligner button, You will find the option Wordfast Aligner (copy-paste document text).

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.15''''' 2016/12/17
|
* '''Yandex.Translate''': New MT engine which need a key but has a free amount of 1,000,000 characters a month.
* '''Microsoft Translator''' remaining bugs solved.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.14''''' 2016/12/10
|
* '''Microsoft Translator''': We prepare the configuration to accept the key generated on the new Azure portal.
* '''Machine translation''': We improve the management of an engine failure. It can be disabled without going to the Setup and the engine can recover by itself as soon as it is avaiable again.
* Glossary paging for Wordfast Anywhere glossaries. You can now visualize all the terms of a standard WFA glossary and even update them.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.13''''' 2016/11/26
|
* '''Offline mode''': Give the possibility to work for a while when there is some Internet or server issue. The segments are save locally and then save automatically to the server when the connection or server is back online. This feature is not working when FireFox is in private navigation mode.
* '''Double click''': A new configuration is possible to use double click to open, close or close and open by clicking on the segment or the segment source or just the number. See Pandora's box #10.
* Add a management of unwanted sessions break with automatic recovery and a warning if it is abnormally frequent.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.12''''' 2016/10/22
|
* '''Unit convertion''': This new feature is also in a beta state and will help users when translating a text that contains measures (Metric or Imperial). Possible conversions will be added to the auto-suggest list. Enabled by default in '''''Pandora's Box #8'''''
* Double click toggle to open/close a segment.
* Glossary paging for remote TMGR glossary.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.11''''' 2016/09/24
|
* Glossary improvements and changes : The attributes can be displayed in the glossary panel when clicking on the term. Highlighted terms in the source segment have different background colors for different glossaries. Glossaries are sorted after download.
* New privilege when sharing a TM to allow guests to see the email of other guests.
* New feature for MT to enable it on already translated file. See the "Enable MT for review" check box in the MT configuration. It is useful for a bilingual file when source segments are copied to the target.
* Lots of small improvements like TBX file upload and download, showing tag content in the status bar and in a popup if clicking on the status bar, some new FAQ articles.
* Many bugs fixed with MyMemory operation, adding a remote glossary with a given URL, glossary counts, Auto-suggest, Google and Dropbox access and more.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.10''''' 2016/06/25
|
* 4 more new '''''Insert char''''' buttons are now available in the '''''Edit''''' tab. Go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button for customizing them in the '''''Pandora's Box''''' tab #5. 4 more shortcuts has been created to match them: '''''Shift+Ctrl+1''''' until '''''Shift+Ctrl+7'''''. It can be customized in the '''''Shortcuts''''' tab. click on the '''''Restore default shortcuts''''' to add them all.
* 1 new '''''Delete targets''''' button also in the '''''Edit''''' tab to empty all targets from the document. Please use it sparingly.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.9.0''''' 2016/06/14
|
* The segment tool bar has been implemented back. Go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button. It can be enabled in the '''''General''''' tab and customized in the '''''Pandora's Box''''' tab #17
* Concordance matches are now sorted by date.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.8.0''''' 2016/05/25
|
* Glossaries can now be downloaded to TBX format.
* Spellcheck dictionaries have been updated and new languages have been added.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.7.0''''' 2016/05/12
|
* '''Voice Speech''' feature has been added. This new feature is in a beta state and only available for Chrome on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mic.png]] '''''Web Speech Beta''''' button and will allow users to dictate the text of the target segment when a segment is opened. For more information check '''''Help''''' tab => [[File:Wikipedia16w.jpg]] '''''Manual''''' button.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] '''''Document Layout''''' can now be mapped to a shortcut. No key combination has been assigned, you need to set in on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button.
* Text selection to add terms to the glossary has been improved. Now several words can be selected on both source and target to add them to the glossary using the shortcut (default, ''Ctrl+Alt+T'').
* Notification warning has been made more visible, now a red text will be shown on the top bar next to the tabs names. Remember notifications are shown on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab and should be removed after reading.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.6.0''''' 2016/03/26
|
* The small '''Share''' button in the '''TMs and glossaries management''' dialog has been improved and simplified. The big '''Manage sharing''' button is kept for advanced sharing.
* New option for a confidential document share which do not allow download. See '''File''' tab => '''Share''' button.
* A document can be opened in WFP4 online even if it is already opened in Wordfast Anywhere.
* The '''Find & Replace''' tool in '''Edit''' tab can now find and replace on the source segment.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.5.0''''' 2016/02/20
|
* New IATE glossaries, build from the IATE dowload at http://iate.europa.eu/.
* The status bar has been improve again adding the glossary information.
* A document can be shared in read only. When a document is shared in the normal way, the guest can work and the owner can see the document in read-only. If the document is shared in read-only, the owner can work and the guest see the document in read-only.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.4.0''''' 2015/11/28
|
* New MT engine '''MyMemory'''. It offers 1000 words per day. No key needed.
* New target character counter in a new cell of the status bar.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.3.0''''' 2015/10/28
|
* New '''Tools''' button to reverse and assemble TMs and glossaries.
* Improvement of the statistics report to show words and characters percentages.
* Possibility to download multiple TXML files.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.2.0''''' 2015/10/21
|
'''Custom tab''' 
* You can customized the last tab to have your own buttons used for translation in one place.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.1.1''''' 2015/10/06
|
'''UI improvement of 4.1.0''' 
* The tabs can be opened either with the click or with the mouseover. Go to the Setup to configure.
* Improvement of the Analysis and pre-translate process.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.1.0''''' 2015/10/03
|
'''UI improvement of 4.0.0''' 
* The tabs are opened with the mouseover
* We added an auto-hide buttons mode. it is not set by default. if you want to try go to '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Setup''' button => tick '''Auto-Hide buttons'''
* The outline status (open/close) is now saved even after a logout.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.0.0''''' 2015/09/26
|
'''New User Interface''' 
All commands are re-ordered in a new top panel. 8 new tabs containing buttons.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.7.1''''' 2015/08/02
|
'''Assembling of TMs or glossaries''' 
You can assemble several TMs or glossaries of the same language pair and download them as one file. In a second step, you can upload that new TM or glossary and remove the old ones.
 In the TMs and glossaries dialog, selected first the TMs or glossaries by checking them in the active column then click on the assemble button.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.7.0''''' 2015/07/25
|
'''Tilde Terminology service''' 
A new type of glossary has been implement giving access to Tilde Terminology service. In the glossary setup click on the add button then choose Tilde Terminology service.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.6.0''''' 2015/05/23
|
'''Machine translation''' 
Add Iconic MT engine for patent translation. See the detail in the MT dialog how to use it. 
'''TM usage''' 
Some improvement with the read-only mode and a new icon has been addded to the status bar on bottom right. 
'''Segment tool bar''' 
You can now configure the buttons you want to keep on the bar.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.5.0''''' 2015/05/09
|
'''Auto-propagate''' 
Add a button on the segment toolbar after the provisional button to propagate the target on all the same source in the document.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.4.0''''' 2015/04/25
|
'''Cloud storage''' 
Dropbox has been implemented as a new storage for upload and download of files. 
'''MT''' 
Improvement of configuration dialog. 
'''Auto-suggest''' 
Add chunks of MT and an improvement to trigger the auto-suggest. 
'''TM rules''' 
Add the option: Do not overwrite existing TU

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.3.3''''' 2015/03/14
|
'''Cloud storage''' 
Google drive has been implemented as a new storage for upload and download of files.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.3.0''''' 2015/03/03
|
'''New welcome page''' 
Wordfast Anywhere start new. Security has been strengthened with a more attractive welcome page.
 You can reset your password even if your login is not a valid email by using the security question.
 The security question and answer can be set in your profile.

|-
|}

Wordfast Anywhere Release Notes

2023-01-02T08:02:38Z

Remiandre:

{{Languages}}
[[Category:Wordfast Anywhere]] 

{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: left;"

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.3''''' 2023/01/01
|
* '''Paid version''': Wordfast Anywhere becomes a subscription-based service. the logging is done at https://www.wordfast.com/myaccount

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.2''''' 2021/09/03
|
* '''Purchase Order''': On Advanced projects, a Purchase Order is used when document is shared with linguist. The Purchase Order template can be build on the user profile.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.1''''' 2021/08/13
|
* '''Multiple documents selection''': Available for extracting unique and frequent segments.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 6.0''''' 2021/07/17
|
* '''Project Management''': Project has been introduced with a standard mode for translator working alone as before and the advanced project for project managers working with several linguists.
* '''Languages pairs and documents''': The project contains languages pairs that contains documents. The list of documents is therefore sorted by language pairs.
* '''TMs and glossaries''': A global TM and Glossaries setup dialog is now located on '''''wordfast anywhere''''' menu and used only for management (create, add, upload, merge, edit, download, delete... ), no more for assignment. Assigning TMs and/or glossaries is done when setting up a language pair in the project setup. It can also be done, as before, for a selected document using the '''''TMs and glossaries''''' [[File:Preferences16round.png]] button in the '''''File''''' menu.
* '''Menus and buttons''': The '''''Help''''' menu and the '''''AutoAligner''''' [[File:WF_Update16.png]] buttons have been moved to the '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' menu. The '''''Upload''''' [[File:Add_File_To_Project16.png]] and '''''Delete''''' [[File:Remove16.png]] buttons of the '''''File''''' menu have been moved and integrated in the project panel. Project files (*.glp) are now managed with the '''''Import''''' [[File:pm_import_project_16.png]] and '''''Export''''' [[File:pm_export_project_16.png]] buttons in the '''''Project''''' menu. The global behavior has been improved showing menus and buttons in context.
* '''Multiple documents selection''': Multiple documents selection with checkboxes is now possible for Download, Analysis, Pre-translation and TMs and/or glossaries assignment.
*'''Close segment option''': Add a new close option '''''Close Retain''''' [[File:Close_retain.png]] in the '''''Translation''''' menu. On closing segment, target is retained but not saved in database.
*'''Jump empty segment''': Only open segments with empty target. The button is a toggle [[File:Jump_green.png]] [[File:Jump_red.png]] that can be stopped at any time.
*''' Find & Replace''': Add a new feature in the '''''Find & Replace''''' tool for unbreakable space and other special character. See the More checkbox.
*'''Merge Bilingual''': The '''''Merge Bilingual''''' [[File:Mergetms16.png]] button has been improved and simplified. Old related features have been moved to a new TM tool '''''Upload TM from bilingual document'''''.
*'''Number replacement''': There are new space characters for date and number conversion in Pandora's box #8 '''''Configure Auto-suggest'''''.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.14''''' 2020/09/05
|
* '''Machine Translation''': Added the Intento MT engines portal.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.13''''' 2020/08/01
|
* '''Machine Translation''': Improvement of MT engines management now found on a special tab in the Setup dialog.
* '''Machine Translation''': 3 possibilities of customized engines. ModernMT added in a preselection option.
* '''DeepL''': Added the formality setting.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.12''''' 2020/06/20
|
* '''DeepL''': Add new languages ZH, JA for source and target and Brazilian Portuguese for target only.
* '''MT''': Add MT usage and score in the configuration

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.11''''' 2019/11/16
|
* '''Untranslatable''': Untranslatable Segments (not having letters) are copied to target and next segment is opened. The feature is active by default but can be disable in the Setup, see Pandora 's box #18.
This feature will have a configuration in a second step to define more cases of untranslatable segments.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.10''''' 2019/09/18
|
* '''Split segment''': The Shrink feature has been improved, it is now possible to cut with the cursor and it is working with character languages like Chinese.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.9''''' 2019/06/05
|
* '''Upload''': Possibility to choose a TM and glossary other than the current one when uploading a document. Possibility to upload a TM or glossary from an URL location.
* '''Download''': Possibility to use advanced filters for document and TM. It can be used for downloading a clean TM or a clean set of TUs for training a MT engine.
*'''TM search''': The windows has been improve by adding new parameters for filtering the search.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.8''''' 2019/03/04
|
* '''Document sharing''': It has been improved to share TM and glossary at the same time and more than one document.
* '''One Drive''': Like Google Drive and Dropbox, you can now use Microsoft One Drive.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.7''''' 2019/01/26
|
* '''Kantan MT''': kantan provides a confidential and customized Machine Translation service that learns from your translations. See [https://www.kantanmt.com/ www.kantanmt.com]
* '''Sanitaze TM and bilingual document''': Translation memory and document can be sanitize through the advance filtering dialog. See the new download list box for TM and the download option '''filtered Bilingual''' for document. This cleaning can be useful for preparing a file for MT training.
* '''TM to bilingual''': A TM can be downloaded as a bilingual TXLF document. See the new option in the existing export format list box after Excel.
* '''XML and MQXLIFF''' formats are now available. For XML there is a new tab in the configure filters configuration to import an extraction rules file.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.6''''' 2018/12/22
|
* '''Custom MT''': You can add a new MT engine by configuring it.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.5''''' 2018/12/08
|
* '''TM download filter''': A TM can be downloaded filtering on date, user ID or attributes. See TM download option beside format.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.4''''' 2018/11/26
|
* '''Package''': You can upload and download a project file from and to Wordfast Pro 5. This package is a compressed file containing selected documents, translation memories and glossaries. For Upload just select a *.glp file and for download choose the new package option.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.3''''' 2018/09/20
|
* '''XLIF''': The editor is now mainly based on XLIF. Some formatting bold, italic and underline are displayed with their opening and closing tags. The expand/merge functionality for segments has been improved. Globally this version tightens compatibility with Wordfast Pro 5.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.2''''' 2018/04/06
|
* '''TM edition''': Improve TM edition by adding a new tags deletion button in edit tab, adding a new button ''add TU'' in TMs and glossaries tab and allowing offline download.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.1''''' 2018/03/24
|
* '''MT languages''': Added DeepL to the list of MT engines.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 5.0''''' 2018/03/01
|
* '''New login pages''': More simple, more secure, more mobile friendly.
* '''Multilingual UI''': The version comes with French and Spanish but is ready to be translated to other languages with a collaborative translation page accessible through your profile.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.23''''' 2017/11/08
|
* '''MyMemory TM import''': Contribute your TM to MyMemory or import it private. See the MyMemory choice in the download options.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.22''''' 2017/10/28
|
* '''MT languages''': Update new available languages for Microsoft, Google and Yandex.
* '''MyMemory MT and TM''': When setting MyMemory MT, you can also lookup a MyMemory TM by giving the key.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.21''''' 2017/09/23
|
* '''Internal fuzzy matches''': Internal fuzzy matches can be added to the analysis. It need to be enabled in the Pandora's box #17 in the Setup.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.20''''' 2017/08/25
|
* '''Extract unique segments''': The Extract frequents tool has been improved adding also the extraction of uniques segments. Go to '''''File''''' tab and use the '''''Extract Frequents''''' button.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.19''''' 2017/05/16
|
* '''Notes Report''': You can download a report with segments having a note. Go to '''''File''''' tab and use the '''''Download''''' button, there is a choice for notes. Provisional segments and revisions can be added to the report.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.18''''' 2017/04/29
|
* TM and Glossaries setup now available from '''''File''''' tab and '''''TM & Glossaries''''' tab with same functionality. Settings can now be done even when no file is selected or opened.
* '''Document Share Beta''': New features have been added to document share. A document can now be shared between several users allowing multiple editors to be working at the same time in the document due to a reservation system when opening the document. Check the [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_Manual Wordfast Anywhere Manual] for more information.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.17''''' 2017/03/31
|
* '''TM edition''': For TM under 100.000 lines, a document extracted from the TM can be opened in the document Panel. because the TM is associated with this document, updating this document update also the TM. The feature '''''Edit a TM''''' is a choice in the TM tools button.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.16''''' 2017/03/21
|
* '''New Aligner''': When clicking on the aligner button, You will find the option Wordfast Aligner (copy-paste document text).

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.15''''' 2016/12/17
|
* '''Yandex.Translate''': New MT engine which need a key but has a free amount of 1,000,000 characters a month.
* '''Microsoft Translator''' remaining bugs solved.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.14''''' 2016/12/10
|
* '''Microsoft Translator''': We prepare the configuration to accept the key generated on the new Azure portal.
* '''Machine translation''': We improve the management of an engine failure. It can be disabled without going to the Setup and the engine can recover by itself as soon as it is avaiable again.
* Glossary paging for Wordfast Anywhere glossaries. You can now visualize all the terms of a standard WFA glossary and even update them.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.13''''' 2016/11/26
|
* '''Offline mode''': Give the possibility to work for a while when there is some Internet or server issue. The segments are save locally and then save automatically to the server when the connection or server is back online. This feature is not working when FireFox is in private navigation mode.
* '''Double click''': A new configuration is possible to use double click to open, close or close and open by clicking on the segment or the segment source or just the number. See Pandora's box #10.
* Add a management of unwanted sessions break with automatic recovery and a warning if it is abnormally frequent.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.12''''' 2016/10/22
|
* '''Unit convertion''': This new feature is also in a beta state and will help users when translating a text that contains measures (Metric or Imperial). Possible conversions will be added to the auto-suggest list. Enabled by default in '''''Pandora's Box #8'''''
* Double click toggle to open/close a segment.
* Glossary paging for remote TMGR glossary.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.11''''' 2016/09/24
|
* Glossary improvements and changes : The attributes can be displayed in the glossary panel when clicking on the term. Highlighted terms in the source segment have different background colors for different glossaries. Glossaries are sorted after download.
* New privilege when sharing a TM to allow guests to see the email of other guests.
* New feature for MT to enable it on already translated file. See the "Enable MT for review" check box in the MT configuration. It is useful for a bilingual file when source segments are copied to the target.
* Lots of small improvements like TBX file upload and download, showing tag content in the status bar and in a popup if clicking on the status bar, some new FAQ articles.
* Many bugs fixed with MyMemory operation, adding a remote glossary with a given URL, glossary counts, Auto-suggest, Google and Dropbox access and more.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.10''''' 2016/06/25
|
* 4 more new '''''Insert char''''' buttons are now available in the '''''Edit''''' tab. Go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button for customizing them in the '''''Pandora's Box''''' tab #5. 4 more shortcuts has been created to match them: '''''Shift+Ctrl+1''''' until '''''Shift+Ctrl+7'''''. It can be customized in the '''''Shortcuts''''' tab. click on the '''''Restore default shortcuts''''' to add them all.
* 1 new '''''Delete targets''''' button also in the '''''Edit''''' tab to empty all targets from the document. Please use it sparingly.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.9.0''''' 2016/06/14
|
* The segment tool bar has been implemented back. Go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button. It can be enabled in the '''''General''''' tab and customized in the '''''Pandora's Box''''' tab #17
* Concordance matches are now sorted by date.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.8.0''''' 2016/05/25
|
* Glossaries can now be downloaded to TBX format.
* Spellcheck dictionaries have been updated and new languages have been added.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.7.0''''' 2016/05/12
|
* '''Voice Speech''' feature has been added. This new feature is in a beta state and only available for Chrome on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mic.png]] '''''Web Speech Beta''''' button and will allow users to dictate the text of the target segment when a segment is opened. For more information check '''''Help''''' tab => [[File:Wikipedia16w.jpg]] '''''Manual''''' button.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] '''''Document Layout''''' can now be mapped to a shortcut. No key combination has been assigned, you need to set in on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button.
* Text selection to add terms to the glossary has been improved. Now several words can be selected on both source and target to add them to the glossary using the shortcut (default, ''Ctrl+Alt+T'').
* Notification warning has been made more visible, now a red text will be shown on the top bar next to the tabs names. Remember notifications are shown on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab and should be removed after reading.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.6.0''''' 2016/03/26
|
* The small '''Share''' button in the '''TMs and glossaries management''' dialog has been improved and simplified. The big '''Manage sharing''' button is kept for advanced sharing.
* New option for a confidential document share which do not allow download. See '''File''' tab => '''Share''' button.
* A document can be opened in WFP4 online even if it is already opened in Wordfast Anywhere.
* The '''Find & Replace''' tool in '''Edit''' tab can now find and replace on the source segment.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.5.0''''' 2016/02/20
|
* New IATE glossaries, build from the IATE dowload at http://iate.europa.eu/.
* The status bar has been improve again adding the glossary information.
* A document can be shared in read only. When a document is shared in the normal way, the guest can work and the owner can see the document in read-only. If the document is shared in read-only, the owner can work and the guest see the document in read-only.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.4.0''''' 2015/11/28
|
* New MT engine '''MyMemory'''. It offers 1000 words per day. No key needed.
* New target character counter in a new cell of the status bar.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.3.0''''' 2015/10/28
|
* New '''Tools''' button to reverse and assemble TMs and glossaries.
* Improvement of the statistics report to show words and characters percentages.
* Possibility to download multiple TXML files.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.2.0''''' 2015/10/21
|
'''Custom tab''' 
* You can customized the last tab to have your own buttons used for translation in one place.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.1.1''''' 2015/10/06
|
'''UI improvement of 4.1.0''' 
* The tabs can be opened either with the click or with the mouseover. Go to the Setup to configure.
* Improvement of the Analysis and pre-translate process.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.1.0''''' 2015/10/03
|
'''UI improvement of 4.0.0''' 
* The tabs are opened with the mouseover
* We added an auto-hide buttons mode. it is not set by default. if you want to try go to '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Setup''' button => tick '''Auto-Hide buttons'''
* The outline status (open/close) is now saved even after a logout.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 4.0.0''''' 2015/09/26
|
'''New User Interface''' 
All commands are re-ordered in a new top panel. 8 new tabs containing buttons.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.7.1''''' 2015/08/02
|
'''Assembling of TMs or glossaries''' 
You can assemble several TMs or glossaries of the same language pair and download them as one file. In a second step, you can upload that new TM or glossary and remove the old ones.
 In the TMs and glossaries dialog, selected first the TMs or glossaries by checking them in the active column then click on the assemble button.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.7.0''''' 2015/07/25
|
'''Tilde Terminology service''' 
A new type of glossary has been implement giving access to Tilde Terminology service. In the glossary setup click on the add button then choose Tilde Terminology service.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.6.0''''' 2015/05/23
|
'''Machine translation''' 
Add Iconic MT engine for patent translation. See the detail in the MT dialog how to use it. 
'''TM usage''' 
Some improvement with the read-only mode and a new icon has been addded to the status bar on bottom right. 
'''Segment tool bar''' 
You can now configure the buttons you want to keep on the bar.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.5.0''''' 2015/05/09
|
'''Auto-propagate''' 
Add a button on the segment toolbar after the provisional button to propagate the target on all the same source in the document.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.4.0''''' 2015/04/25
|
'''Cloud storage''' 
Dropbox has been implemented as a new storage for upload and download of files. 
'''MT''' 
Improvement of configuration dialog. 
'''Auto-suggest''' 
Add chunks of MT and an improvement to trigger the auto-suggest. 
'''TM rules''' 
Add the option: Do not overwrite existing TU

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.3.3''''' 2015/03/14
|
'''Cloud storage''' 
Google drive has been implemented as a new storage for upload and download of files.

|-
|style="background-color:#ffffcc;width:110px;text-align:center;"|'''''Version 3.3.0''''' 2015/03/03
|
'''New welcome page''' 
Wordfast Anywhere start new. Security has been strengthened with a more attractive welcome page.
 You can reset your password even if your login is not a valid email by using the security question.
 The security question and answer can be set in your profile.

|-
|}

Wordfast Anywhere 6 Start Guide

2022-02-21T08:24:16Z

Remiandre: /* Create a New Project */

{{Languages}}
[[Category:Wordfast Anywhere]]

= Getting started =
The Wordfast Anywhere site is accessible via your browser from the following URL https://www.freetm.com. The WFA site will appear with the following screen in front:

[[File:Login.png]]

The main body of the page is the login form which requires your account email and password.
Bellow are two links for helping you get back your password and to create a new account.

At the top right you'll find some icons:
* Wordfast Anwyhere Twitter: We post there notifications about service interruptions
* Wordfast Facebook page: Find news related to the Wordfast community.
* Wordfast youtube channel
* Contact form. To report bugs that may occur before login in. [[File:Warning.png]] '''Technical support is only in English'''
* Information. Open the start guide.

At the bottom right you'll see the flags to change the language of the page.

== Before Login ==
=== How to create an account ===
On the start page (see above) click on '''''Create a new account''''' to open the create account form.

[[File:Createaccount.png|border]]

Enter:

* An '''existing valid email address'''. It will be used to activate the account and to recover your password.
* A '''secure password'''. It should have '''at least 8 characters and contain at least one number'''.
* Check the captcha to prove you are not a robot.

If fields are correct '''an email will be send to the email address''' to activate the account.

[[File:Warning.png]] Check your '''spam folder''' if you do not see the email, sometimes the email is there.

[[File:Warning.png]] If there is any problem filling the form a red message will be shown under the '''''Start''''' button. Possible errors are:

* Invalid email address.
* Invalid password. It should have at least 8 characters and contain at least one number.
* Captcha not checked or validation failed.

You also have the opportunity to read the terms and conditions by clicking the '''''Conditions & terms''''' link.

=== Get your password back ===
In case you have forgotten your password click on '''''Forgot your password?''''' on the start page (see above) to open the form.

[[File:Forgotpassword.png|border]]

Enter:

* The email address of your account.
* Check the captcha to prove you are not a robot.

[[File:Warning.png]] If there is any problem filling the form a red message will be shown under the '''''Start''''' button. Possible errors are:

* Invalid email address.
* Captcha not checked or validation failed.

An email will be send ([[File:Warning.png]] Check your spam folder) with the instructions to recover your password on a new form:

[[File:Changepwd.png|border]]

Enter:

* A secure password. It should have at least 8 characters and contain at least one number.
* Confirm password. Type again the password to prevent mistypings.

[[File:Warning.png]] If there is any problem filling the form a red message will be shown under the '''''Change Password''''' button. Possible errors are:

* Invalid password. It should have at least 8 characters and contain at least one number.
* Confirm password is different from password. Both need to be the same.
* Captcha not checked or validation failed.

=== Cannot log in to Wordfast Anywhere ===

[[File:Warning.png]] We recommend to use '''Chrome''' or '''FireFox''' browsers as some cookie problems have been detected on IE and Safari.

Wordfast Anywhere is a web application where the communication between your local browser and the remote server may be in trouble. If you cannot connect or cannot work properly, try the following:
# Check you are on '''Wordfast Anywhere site (https://www.freetm.com)'''.
# Check there are '''no spaces''' before or after the email or the password.
# Make sure to '''prove that you're not a robot''' using the captcha
# Check '''Cookies and JavaScript are enabled''' on your browser and that you are '''not using the browser in incognito/private mode'''.
# If it still does not work, try to '''refresh the page''', then log in.
# If it still does not work, try to '''clean your browser cache and cookies''' as it may contain old files. This operation is different on each browser and version. To know how to clean your cache try this [http://www.wikihow.com/Clear-Your-Browser%27s-Cache cache help page 1] and/or this [http://www.refreshyourcache.com/en/home/ cache help page 2] . Then refresh the page and log in.
# If it still does not work, check if the browser has some pending update. Then refresh the page and log in.
# If it still does not work, try a different browser.

If you are having problems with ''CAPTCHA'' validation (I'm not a robot), here are some tips to solve the issue:
# Make sure your browser is fully updated
# Check that JavaScript is enabled in your browser
# If ''CAPTCHA'' is too hard, don’t worry. Some ''CAPTCHA''s are hard. Just click the reload button next to the image to get another one.
# For more information about ''CAPTCHA'' check google help page on this [https://support.google.com/recaptcha LINK].

== Login in to WFA account ==
If you have already created your free account, simply enter the Login (email address) and Password (your password) information and click on '''''Log In'''''.

[[File:Login.png|border]]

[[File:Warning.png]] If you have not created an account yet, click on the '''''Create a new account''''' and follow the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#How_to_create_an_account instructions]'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you ever forget your password, click on the '''''Forgot your password?''''' and follow the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Get_your_password_back instructions]'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you are having login problems check '''''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Cannot_log_in_to_Wordfast_Anywhere Cannot log in to Wordfast Anywhere]''''' and follow the instructions.

The first time you log in you need to set up the initial configuration of the account. This configuration is minimal, allowing you to start translating immediately. You can always refine/change your configuration later.

You must specify the language pair (source and target) of your translation. Since English is the most used language in the world, its code (EN) is the default value. Enter a dash to the right of EN in the Source code language field to obtain a list of English versions available:

[[File:Initial dialog.png]]

Choose your source language and variant (if any). Then repeat for the target language. Finally, click OK.

WFA gives you the ability to translate each segment by online translation services called Machine Translation powered by different engines/companies. The translations proposed are not ever likely to be fully acceptable. However, by making a few small adjustments, you will be able to use them extensively in your translations.

[[File:Warning.png]] When using this service, the source segments that will return a translation are transmitted to the several engines. It is up to you whether or not to accept these translations; these companies are not made aware of your choice. However, be aware that sending the segments to any engine may raise privacy issues between you and your customers.

[[File:notice.png]] Machine Translation (MT) is activated by default and will be used if your translation memory has no translation to offer. To disable the MT, or for more details on how it works, please see '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Setting_up_Machine_Translation Machine translation]'''.

== Project content==
If you are accessing for the first time, you see the content of your default project with your chosen language pair ready for your first document.

* A project named "Project_1" is created by default. If you had an account before version 6, it will contain all the files from the previous version grouped by language pair.
* Every document now belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a project.
* Double-click a project to open it to see the content (documents grouped by language pairs).
* Double-click a document to start/resume work.

[[File:notice.png]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rDhVYY02Cds Wordfast Anywhere 6 Basic Projects video]'''

[[File:Project_content.png|border|1200px]]

== Create a New Project ==
On the Project tab click on [[File:Pm new project 16.png]]'''New''' to create a new project. This will open the ''Project Seup'' window where the settings for the project are done.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Up to 3 projects can be stored at any given time.'''

To access the project setup once the project has been created, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

[[File:Createproject.PNG]]
[[File:Createproject1.PNG]]
[[File:Createproject2.PNG]]

The ''Project Setup'' window has two sections that need to be set in order to create the project. Setting one section opens the next one.

;1.General
: On this section general information of the project is set. This includes:
# Project name (Compulsory)
# Description (optional)
# Project type. Defines the type of the project:
#* Standard: For translators working alone.
#* Advanced: For Project Managers (PMs) managing large, multi-language projects.
# Project status (for advanced type). Defines the status of the project:
#* In preparation (blue): When project is being prepared (files, TMs and glossaries and linguist being added)
#* In progress (orange): This marks the start of the project. Files are shared with the linguist at this point.
#* Completed (green): The project is finished.
# Currency(optional). It will be used to calculate the project cost.
# Decimals(optional). Use decimals when showing the project cost.
# Auto(optional). By default Project Manager will be responsible of pushing files to the next job when completion is done. Check it to automatically sent files to the next step upon completion
;2.Language Pairs and tasks
: On this section language pairs and tasks are added.
* Use the '''+''' next to the language pair header to add a new language pair. This will open the language selection dialog and then the TM and glossaries dialog to assign them to the language pair.
* Use the '''+''' at the end of the header row to add new tasks. Only 10 tasks can be added.
* A row is shown for each language pair where the default word rate (left box) and speed rate (right box) for each task can be set.
* Use the '''-''' next to the language pair to remove it. [[File:Warning.png]] Associated files and shares will be revoked.
* Use the '''-''' next to the task name to remove it. [[File:Warning.png]] Associated files and shares will be revoked.

Once all compulsory fields are set, click on '''Save project''' to save the project and go to the ''Project Content panel''.

[[File:Warning.png]] It is possible to move from standard to advanced but opposite is only possible if the advanced project has only one task.

== Upload a document ==
To translate your document, you must first upload it to WFA.

[[File:warning.png]] There is a file size limit of 20 Mb.

From the '''Project Content Panel''' there are two ways to add files to a project.

* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the header will add the files to all the languages in the project.
* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the language row. This will add the files only to that language.

[[File:Pmaddfiles.PNG]]

The following window will be displayed:

[[File:Upload_doc.png]]

There are several ways to upload a document
* '''From local file''': Use '''''Browse...''''' to navigate through the directories on your computer and locate the document to be uploaded.
* '''From URL''': This option allows you to upload a file that is located on an Internet server by entering the address (URL) into the field. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Google Drive''': Choose a file from your Google Drive to be uploaded. You'll be asked to allow access rights to WFA before choosing the file. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Dropbox''': Choose a file from your Dropbox to be uploaded. You'll be asked to allow access rights to WFA before choosing the file. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Clipboard''': Paste the text to be uploaded into the text area. A text file will be created with the text.

At the bottom of the window click on '''''View allowed formats''''' to check the allowed formats:

Finally click on:
* '''''Upload''''': to only upload the file, which will be listed on the Document Management.
* '''''Upload and Open''''': to upload and open the document, which will be displayed in the document panel.

[[File:warning.png]] Depending on the size of the file, this may take some time. Please be patient.

Upload can also be done by using drag and drop area.

== Setting up language pair, Translation Memories and glossaries ==
=== Language pair with its associated TMs and glossaries set in the project setup ===

To access the project setup dialog, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

[[File:Project_setup.png]]

Click on the language pair '''''+''''' button.

[[File:Langpair_dialog.png]]

Enter the languages and save, the TMs and glossaries dialog opens.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair.png]]

* If no TM and glossary exists for the language pair, a new dialog will propose you to create them. Save and wait they are listed.
* You can create and choose one or more TMs and glossaries. They are selected by checking the row in the '''''Active''''' column.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair_2.png]]

Finally save the TMs and glossaries selection by clicking on the '''''Save''''' button. The new language pair is now in the project setup and one icon is displayed for each TM and glossary.

[[File:Project_setup_2.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] The TMS and glossaries can be updated for a language pair by clicking on the icons. But if documents already exists for that language pair, they will not be affected by this change, only new documents added after the update.

=== TMs and glossaries set individually for a document ===
This selection for a document is overwriting the Language pair selection.
In the project content select a document by checking it and then click on the '''''TMs and glossaries''''' button [[File:Preferences16round.png]] of the '''''File''''' menu.

[[File:Project_content_3.png]]

The same TMs and glossaries dialog opens.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair_3.png]]

Saving will update only the TMs and glossaries for the selected document. A control can done hovering the TM icon.

[[File:Project_content_2.png]]

== Setting up Machine Translation ==

The Machine Translation setting is done In the general setup dialog. Click on the '''''Setup''''' button [[File:preferences.png]] of the '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' menu and go to the '''''MT''''' tab.

[[File:Wfasetup2.png]]

To disable an engine just uncheck it in the list.

To enable an existing engine in the list, just check it and run a test with the '''''Test''''' button.

To add a new one click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:Warning.png]] When using this service, the source segments that will return a translation are transmitted to the several engines. It is up to you whether or not to accept these translations; these companies are not made aware of your choice. However, be aware that sending the segments to any engine may raise privacy issues between you and your customers.

When reactivating MT engines, you will have the following warning:

[[File:Initial_dialog_mt.png]]

= Translating a document =
== Document translation ==
Your TM and document are now ready. You can start a translation session.

[[File:transTab.png]]

Click on the '''Start/Next''' button [[File:StartNext.png]] of the '''Translation''' tab. The first segment opens.

Basic to know about the segment:
* The source segment. It is not editable by default.
* The target segment. It is editable - this where you type your translation.
* There are 3 possible views of the segment: Classic, Horizontal (the default) and vertical (To change go to '''View''' tab => '''Doc Layout''' button [[File:Batchmonitor16 views.png]]).
* If there is no proposition from the TM, WFA will prefill the target with Machine Translation (MT). Machine Translation will be proposed against an orange background.
* If an exact source text exists in the TM (an "exact" match or 100%), the corresponding translation will be proposed against a green background.
* If a similar source text exists in the TM (a "fuzzy" match lower than 100%), its translation will be proposed against a yellow background, and differences will be highlighted.
* If you are re-opening an already translated segment, the existing translation will have a pink background.

[[File:notice.png]] '''''When translating, the segments are saved automatically in the translation memory and on the database system as soon as you go to the next segment.'''''

We recommend the use of the Alt+Down shortcut for this basic action. Common actions are associated to shortcuts (see '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Setup''' button [[File:Setup.png]] => '''Shortcuts''' tab).

Click on the '''Close & Commit''' button [[File:CloseSave.png]] to end the translation session.

[[File:notice.png]] When WFA load a big document, not all the content is visible on the screen. The document is loaded bit by bit while you are translating. However, you can move inside the document by using the buttons on the '''View''' tab.

[[File:notice.png]] An auto-suggest feature is enabled by default to help you translate. It will propose you non translatable words or phrases, terminology. If you want to recopy a tag from the source segment please type '''<''' to trigger the tags proposal.

[[File:tagProposal.png]]

Check the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Translating Translation section]''' on the Wordfast Anywhere Manual for more information.

== Document delivery ==
* Click on '''File''' tab.
* Click on the '''Download''' button [[File:Save16.png]] .
* Choose '''Translated document''' and click on the '''OK''' button.

[[File:Warning.png]] For '''download issues''', please check this [https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_fix_a_document_when_download_failed.3F link]

Verify documents after download.
Note that you can have no more than 10 documents in your Workspace at any time: delete translated documents from the Workspace after verification to free space for more documents.

== Shortcuts and buttons for main features ==
This start guide assumes the basic of the CAT tool. Please refer to the '''Learn more about...''' chapter for a full explanation of all features.

{|class="wikitable"
|Translation
|Start translation / Next segment
|Alt+Down
|[[File:StartNext.png]]
|Starts a translation session by opening the currently selected segment / Commits the current segment to TM and opens the next segment.
|-
|Translation
|Previous segment
|Alt+Up
|[[File:Previous.png]]
|Commits the current segment to TM and opens the previous segment.
|-
|Translation
|Close & Commit
|Alt+End
|[[File:CloseSave.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment and committing it to the TM.
|-
|Translation
|Close
|Shift+Alt+End
|[[File:Close.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment without committing it to the TM.
|-
|Translation
|Close & Delete
|Alt+Delete
|[[File:Close restore.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment and emptying the target. Do not commit to TM.
|-
|Translation
|Provisional segment
|F10
|[[File:Mark.png]]
|Marks a segment as provisional with a yellow Post-It.
|-
|Translation
|Copy Source
|Alt+Insert
|[[File:CopySource.png]]
|Copies the source segment over the target segment.
|-
|Translation
|Expand
|Alt+PgDn
|[[File:ExpandSeg.png]]
|Expands a segment, if it actually extends beyond the punctuation mark (wrong segmentation). Note that a segment cannot be extended beyond a paragraph mark, page break, tabulator, or table cell.
|-
|Translation
|Shrink
|Alt+PageUp
|[[File:ShrinkSeg.png]]
|Reverses any use of the Expand segment command.
|-
|Translation
|Translate
|Shift+Ctrl+PgDn
|[[File:TranslateUntilFuzzy.png]]
|Translates until a non-exact match is found.
|-
|Translation
|Toggle empty
|Ctrl+Alt+X
|[[File:Cleanup Project16.png]]
|Empty the target - remove the tags from the target - restore the original target
|-
|Wordfast Anywhere
|Wordfast setup
|Ctrl+Alt+W
|[[File:Setup.png]]
|Opens the Wordfast Anywhere general setup dialog.
|-
|Edit
|Search & Replace
|
|[[File:FindReplace.png]]
|Search and replace in the document.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|TMs and glossaries setup
|
|[[File:Preferences16round.png]]
|Opens the TMs and glossaries setup dialog.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Concordance search
|Ctrl+Alt+C
|[[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]]
|Looks up TUs in the TM containing a specific word or expression.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Glossary Search
|Ctrl+Alt+G
|[[File:GlossarySearch.png]]
|Looks up a term in the glossary
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Add term to glossary
|Ctrl+Alt+T
|[[File:TermEdit.png]]
|Pops up a glossary term entry form.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Copy TU
|Alt+right
|[[File:CopyTU.png]]
|Copy a TU from the TM panel to the target segment. If many, press many times, it will start by copying the second one assuming the first one is already copied. The TU can be a MT proposal.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Delete TU
|
|[[File:DeleteTU.png]]
|Delete from TM the current or selected TU visible in the TM panel.
|-
|View
|TM pane
|Ctrl+Alt+M
|[[File:panelTm.png]]
|Closes or opens the TM pane.
|-
|View
|Glossary pane
|Ctrl+Alt+H
|[[File:panelGlo.png]]
|Closes or opens the Glossary (Terminology) pane.
|-
|View
|Outline pane
|
|[[File:panelOutline.png]]
|Closes or opens the Outline. The outline is a view of all the segments showing which ones are translated but also which ones have notes or are provisional.
|-
|View
|Move next block
|Page Down
|[[File:moveNextScreen.png]]
|Move to the next block of document's content.
|-
|View
|Move previous block
|Page Up
|[[File:movePrevScreen.png]]
|Move to the previous block of document's content.
|}

= More Information =
This is a start guide.

* Check the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual Wordfast Anywhere 6 Manual]''' for more information.
* Check the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ FAQ]''' to check the Frequent Asked Questions.
* Check this '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Videos videos]''' for a couple of Youtube channels with WFA information.

Wordfast Anywhere 6 Manual

2022-02-21T08:23:30Z

Remiandre: /* Create a New Project */

{{Languages}}
[[Category:Wordfast Anywhere]]

= Introduction =
Wordfast Anywhere (WFA) is the online version of the popular Wordfast computer assisted translation (CAT) program that provides much of the functionality of the Classic and Pro desktop versions. Instead of being installed as a program on the user’s computer, WFA is made accessible from Wordfast’s servers via a web browser, regardless of the operating system used (Windows, Mac, Linux, etc.). Every effort has been made to ensure that the user interface is as close as possible to the other Wordfast flavours: toolbars, icons, shortcuts and working methods. A Wordfast Classic or Pro user should be able to use WFA with almost zero assimilation time.

It is worth remarking that WFA is almost certainly the CAT program that integrates best with the popular Mac operating system. Unlike Java-based, cross-platform programs – including Wordfast Pro – that will run on the Mac but don’t integrate with system-wide tools such as the built in Dictionary, WFA will run in Mac-native browsers such as Safari, thus giving you access to the entire range of language and text handling tools that are built into the Mac OS environment.

[[File:WFA_pagina_5_new.jpg]]
[[File:WFA_pagina_6_new.jpg]]

With WFA you can translate a wide range of both editable (TXT, DOC, DOCX, RTF, XLS, PPT, ODT, HTML, TXML, MIF, INX, etc.) and non-editable (PDF, TIFF) documents. You can store up ten current documents in your workspace, deleting your finished translations to free up space and permit new documents to be uploaded.

You can also import the TMs (translation memories) of all the language pairs you work in. Your memories will progressively expand as and when you translate. They are stored securely and will not be shared or revealed without your authorisation. If you need a local copy, you can download your TM to your computer at any time.

As is the case with other Wordfast flavours, you can add terms to your glossary as you translate. You can also upload existing glossaries to your workspace, for all language pairs. Here again, your glossaries are secure and will not be shared or revealed unless you specifically invite a colleague. You can also download your glossary if you need a local copy.

The following instructions have been written for complete beginners. Having understood the above comments, a Wordfast Classic or Pro user should have no difficulty in using WFA intuitively.

Check the '''[[Wordfast Anywhere 6 Start Guide]]''' for a quick start.

Check our [https://www.freetm.com/jsp/terms.jsp Terms of use].

== How to use WFA ==
On Wordfast Anywhere every document belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a translation project.

So the first you need is a project. A project named "Project_1" is created by default, but you can create up to 3 projects.

A project needs a language pair. A default one is suggested but more can be added. Each language pair can have a TM and glossary assigned which will be used on several processes and also automatically assigned to the documents uploaded.

A project also needs a task. "Translate" is the one by default.

Once the project is created you can add the documents. Documents can be added to all language pairs or to specific ones. There is a maximum number of documents per project depending of the type of project.

Double-click a project to open it to see the content (documents grouped by language pairs).

Double-click a document to start/resume work.

[[File:notice.png]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rDhVYY02Cds Wordfast Anywhere 6 Basic Projects video]'''

= Login in to WFA account =
Check the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Login_in_to_WFA_account Login in to WFA account]''' section on the Start Guide.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you have not created an account yet, click on the '''''Create a new account''''' and follow the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#How_to_create_an_account instructions]'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you ever ''forget your password'', click on the '''''Forgot your password?''''' and follow the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Get_your_password_back instructions]'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you are having ''login problems'' check '''''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Cannot_log_in_to_Wordfast_Anywhere Cannot log in to Wordfast Anywhere]''''' and follow the instructions.

=User Interface =
The user interface is divided into several sections. A top menu with tabs and buttons, a main central panel that changes depending on where we are (project list, project content, document translation) and a bottom panel where information and messages are shown.

Once you are connected to WFA, the workspace appears.

This should look similar to the following screenshot (depending on the browser, operating system or device used to access WFA):

[[File:Newui6.PNG]]

The workspace can be modified at any point according to your requirements.
==Top Menu==
At the very top you can find the ''Top Menu'' which consists in '''two rows''': one for the different '''menus''' (tabs) and one for the '''buttons''' corresponding to the selected tab.

Use [[File:CollapseTop.png]] to hide the buttons. Use [[File:CollapseBottom.png]] to show the buttons.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a project or selecting/opening a document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a project is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when a project is selected from the project list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when more than one file is selected from the document list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus used for translation (Edit, view, translation, review and TM & Glossaries) are only visible when the document is opened. Those buttons keep working as always, just need to open the document.

===Wordfast Anywhere Menu===

This tab a miscellaneous of buttons concerning the Wordfast Anywhere project.

[[File:Wfatab6.PNG]]

* [[File:Logout16.png]]: Use it when you want to '''leave''' Wordfast Anywhere.
* [[File:User profile.png]]: Here you'll find your '''account information'''. You'll be able to change your ''Login'' email, the ''Security Question'', the ''Security Answer'' and delete your account.
* [[File:Preferences.png]]: Here is where you set the '''configuration''' of Wordfast Anywhere:''Font Size'', ''Machine translation'', ''TM rules'', ''Shortcuts'', ''Segmentation'', ''Transcheck'' rules...etc.
* [[File:Preferences16round.png]]: Global TM & glossary management (create, add, upload, merge, edit, download, delete... ), no more for assignment.
* [[File:WF Update16.png]]: This button will direct you to a site to '''align''' your files.
* [[File:help16.png]]: WFA Help:
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''start guide''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''PM start guide''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''FAQ''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''manual''' wiki page.
** If the previous wiki pages do not work, this is a pdf backup.
* [[File:Notice.png]]: There are 4 icons corresponding to different types of '''notifications''' ([[File:Warning.png]] ONLY displayed when there are notifications):
** Webmaster Info: notifications coming from Wordfast Anywhere administration (p.e stopping the server for a publication).
** Background Info: notifications about ''Background'' processes (p.e. Analyze, Spellcheck...etc).
** System Info: notifications from the system (p.e. an unsupported browser).
** TM Server Info: notifications realted to the TM Server (p.e. TM server is disconnected).

===Project Menu===
This tab has the tools concerning a project.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when a project is selected on the project list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a project is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available for standard projects.

No project selected on the project list.

[[File:ProjecttabAll.PNG]]

This are the basic buttons:

* [[File:Pm new project 16.png]]: '''New''' use it to create a project.
* [[File:Pm open project 16.png]]: '''Open''' the selected project from the project list.
* [[File:Analyze Project16.png]]: '''Analyze''' all the documents of the project. A report is generated.
* [[File:Pm delete project 16.png]]: '''Delete''' the selected project.
* [[File:Pm close project 16.png]]: '''Close''' an opened project.
* [[File:Pm import project 16.png]]: '''Import''' a .glp file.
* [[File:Pm export project 16.png]]: '''Export''' a project into a .glp file.
* [[File:Linguist16.png]]: Use it to '''Manage''' the team of '''linguists'''.

To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

===File Tab===
This tab has the tools concerning a file.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be available when more than one file is selected from the list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be also available when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a document is opened.

[[File:FiletabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:Translate File16.png]]: '''Open''' the selected file from the list.
* [[File:About wordfast16.png]]: Open the document with '''Wordfast Pro Online'''. [[File:Warning.png]] The use of Wordfast Pro Online will be discontinued on December 31, 2021.
* [[File:Close16.png]]: '''Close''' an opened file.
* [[File:Save16.png]]: Here you'll find all the '''Download''' options for a file (p.e. translated version, bilingual versions, TXML, unformatted text, Off-line Report Tool, TM from doc segments).
* [[File:Preferences16round.png]]: With this button you'll change the '''TM & Glossary''' configuration for the document.
* [[File:Analyze Project16.png]]: '''Analyze''' the selected document/s. A report is generated.
* [[File:Statistics16.png]]: Get the '''Statistics''' of the document.
* [[File:Modify Project16.png]]: Get information about the file.
* [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]]: '''Pre-translate''' the selected document/s.
* [[File:Mergetms16.png]]: Use this button to '''merge''' the document with a '''TXML''' file.
* [[File:mergetms16_menu.png]]: Use this button to '''merge''' the document with an imported '''OFRT''' file.
* [[File:Split.png]] [[File:Join.png]]: '''Split''' the document in parts. '''Join''' the parts together again.
* [[File:Share.png]] [[File:Revoke.png]]: '''Share''' the document with an other Wordfast Anywhere user. '''Revoke''' will finish the share.
* [[File:Translate File16.png]]: '''Fuzzy Open''' the file without full matches.
* [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]]: '''Extract''' the '''frequent''' segments.
* [[File:Edit16.png]]: '''Rename''' the file.

===Edit Tab===

This tab is a translation tool extension.

[[File:Warning.png]] This buttons will be available when the document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be available when a TM is being edited.

[[File:EdittabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:FindReplace.png]]: Use it to '''Find & Replace''' text but also to go to a particular segment or get a list of segments ''untranslated'', ''provisional'', with ''notes'' or with ''tag differences''.
* [[File:EditSource16.png]]: '''Edit''' the source segment.
* [[File:Edit_Note16.png]]: Create, edit or remove a '''Note''' on a segment.
* [[File:Insert_c.png]]: '''Insert special characters'''. 7 different characters can be defined on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => '''''Setup''''' button > '''''Pandora's box'''''
* [[File:Delete_alltargetseg.png]]: '''Delete''' '''tags''' in the document. This is only available when editing a TM and has 2 options: Delete all target tags or delete all document tags.
* [[File:delete_revisions.png]]: '''Delete''' the segment '''history'''.
* [[File:Delete_alltargetseg.png]]: '''Delete''' all '''target''' segments of the document.
* [[File:caseChanger.png]]: Toggle between lowercase, uppercase, and capitalization..

===View Tab===

In this tab you'll find the buttons to move through the document and show or hide the different panels.

[[File:ViewtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:PanelOutline.png]]: Show or hide '''Outline'''.
* [[File:panelTm.png]]: Show or hide '''TM''' panel.
* [[File:panelGlo.png]]: Show or hide '''Glossary''' panel.
* [[File:MovePrevScreen.png]]: Go to '''Previous Block'''.
* [[File:MoveNextScreen.png]]: Go to '''Next Block'''.
* [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]]: Toggle between the different document layout: Classic, Horizontal and Vertical.
* [[File:move_prev_seg.png]]: Go to '''Previous segment'''.
* [[File:move_next_seg.png]]: Go to '''Next segment'''.
* [[File:move_first_seg_screen.png]]: Go to '''First segment''' of '''Block'''.
* [[File:move_last_seg_screen.png]]: Go to '''Last segment''' of '''Block'''.
* [[File:move_first_seg_doc.png]]: Go to '''First segment''' of '''document'''.
* [[File:move_last_seg_doc.png]]: Go to '''Last segment''' of '''document'''.

===Translation Tab===

Find here all the tools to perform a translation

[[File:TranslationtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:StartNext.png]]: '''Start translation''' or open next segment.
* [[File:Previous.png]]: Open previous segment.
* [[File:CloseSave.png]]: '''Close and commit''' to the TM.
* [[File:Close retain.png]]: '''Close and retain''' the segment as provisional but not commit to the TM
* [[File:close.png]]: '''Close segment'''.
* [[File:close_restore.png]]: '''Close and delete''' target content.
* [[File:mark.png]]: Mark segment as '''provisional'''.
* [[File:CopySource.png]]: '''Copy source''' to target.
* [[File:Expand_Segment16.png]]: '''Expand''' segment.
* [[File:ShrinkSeg.png]]: '''Shrink''' segment.
* [[File:TranslateUntilFuzzy.png]]: '''Translate''' document '''until a fuzzy''' match.
* [[File:Cleanup_Project16.png]]: Toggle between Empty target, Remove tags and Restore.
* [[File:autopropagate.png]]: '''Auto propagate''' segment changes through all the document.
* [[File:dropdown.png]]: Toggle placeable.
* [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]]: Go to '''Next Placeable'''.
* [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]]: '''Copy Placeable'''.
* [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]]: Go to '''Previous Placeable'''.
* [[File:increase_target.png]]: Increase target segment height.
* [[File:Mic.png]]: Use '''Web Speech''' to dictate the target content. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY available for Chrome. Currently disabled due to browser security.'''

===Review Tab===

This tab has the tools to review the document.

[[File:ReviewtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:Preview16.png]]: '''Preview''' a PDF version of the document.
* [[File:Transcheck16.png]]: Do a '''quality control''' on the document
* [[File:Spellcheck16.png]]: '''Spellcheck''' the document

===TMs and Glossaries Tab===

Tab with the tools related to TM and glossaries actions.

[[File:TmglotabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]]: Concordance search
* [[File:GlossarySearch.png]]: Glossary Search
* [[File:TermEdit.png]]: Term edition.
* [[File:CopyTU.png]]: Copy TU.
* [[File:DeleteTU.png]]: Delete TU.
* [[File:Add File To Project16.png]]: Add TU.
* [[File:force_tm_addtu.png]]: Update TU.
* [[File:force_tm.png]]: Force TM search.
* [[File:force_mt.png]]: Force Machine Translation search.
* [[File:force_term.png]]: Force Glossary search.
* [[File:update_tm_doc.png]]: Update TM with document content.
* [[File:iSearch.png]]: Lookup in online dictionary.

===Help Tab===

Help section is on the '''Wordfast Anywhere Menu'''.

===Custom Tab===
In this tab you can add up to 15 buttons of your choice, so you can have together in one tab your most used buttons.
Selection any of the translation menus buttons (Edit, view, translation, review and TM & Glossaries) and the WFA setup and TM&Glossary set up.

[[File:custom_tab.png]]

To do so you must go to [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab. Then go to '''Pandora Box''' tab and go to ''Custom Tab settings'', where you will find all the buttons that can be added to the '''Custom''' tab

[[File:custom_tab2.png]]

==Panels==

===Project List Panel===
This panel shows the list of projects.

[[File:Projectlistpanel.png]]

Projects will be listed here. '''Double click on one project''' or select it and use [[File:Pm open project 16.png]]'''Open''' from the top menu bar to open the project.

===Project content Panel===
When opening a project, the ''Content Panel'' area will show the content of the project, the list of documents in the project.

[[File:ProjectContentpanel.png]]

Main areas are:

* '''Header row (1)''': In this row you'll fine the headers of the columns. The columns are: Languages/file (1), Vol. (1C) and the columns for the different jobs will follow (1D). This row will change the background color according to the project status: blue for ''In preparation'', orange for ''In progress'' and green for ''completed''. Use the '''Add files''' button (1A) to add files to all language pairs and use '''dashboard''' button (1B) to see an estimation of cost of the project.
* '''Project setup (2)'''Click on the ''project name'' or icon next to it to open the project setup dialog.
* '''Language Row (3)''': In this row several icons will be shown depending on the file selection to perform actions such as add files to the language pair (3A), delete selected files (3B) or assign linguist to jobs (3C). Use the '''remove language pair''' icon (3D) to delete the language pair ([[File:Warning.png]] all the documents inside will be permanently deleted).
* '''Note (4)''' this icon allows to add a note to the document.
* '''TM & glossaries (5)''' This are the TMs and glossaries assigned to the document, mouse-over to see extra information. This TM and glossary assignment will be used for the tasks.
* On the '''Status bar''' you'll find information about the project.
* Clicking on the file name will open the document. And clicking on each of the other cell text or icon will open the edit dialog for that cell.

===Translation Panels===
When a document is opened for translation, the screen is divided in 4 different panels.

[[File:Panels.png]]

====Outline====
Show/Hide Outline panel using '''''View''''' tab => '''''Show/hide Outline''''' [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button

The outline displays all the segments of the document.
The available status are:
* A white box indicates that the segment is not translated
* A green box indicates a translated segment
* A yellow box indicates a provisional segment
* An 'i' after segment id indicates a segment having a note
* The black thick border on the box indicates the current document selected on document panel
* The pink border on the box indicates the visible segments in the document panel

You can jump and open any segment of the document by clicking on its number.
If the segment is not visible on the document panel (blue border instead of pink), the document panel will be refreshed.

Once a segment is opened you can use
'''''Edit''''' tab => '''''Edit Note''''' [[File:Edit_Note16.png]] button to create/delete a note and also '''''Translation ''''' tab => '''''Provisional''''' [[File:mark.png]] button to mark/unmark a provisional segment.

====TM Panel====
This panel shows the matches from TM or MT for the current segment.

You can show or hide this panel using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:panelTm.png]] button.

====Glossary Panel====
This panel shows the matching terms for the current segment.

You can show or hide this panel using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:panelGlo.png]] button.

====Document Panel====

When a document is opened, it shows the segments content.

Wordfast Anywhere do not load the entire document in the editor if there are many segments.

While translating the segments are added one by one to the editor, but if you can move inside the document to see any part you want.

To do so, you can use:
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:MovePrevScreen.png]] button to go to '''Previous Block'''.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:MoveNextScreen.png]] button to go to '''Next Block'''.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button to show '''Outline''' and then jump and open any segment of the document by clicking on its number. More information [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline here]

This is how an opened document looks like:

[[File:document_panel_doc.png]]

=====Document Layout=====
Using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] button you can change the document layout, which is the way segments are shown on Document Panel. The three possible views are:

'''''Classical'''''

[[File:ClassicalLayout.png]]

'''''Horizontal'''''

[[File:HorizontalLayout.png]]

'''''Vertical'''''

[[File:VerticalLayout.png]]

===Status Panel===
Always present at the bottom. Here you can find several information about the project, file, TM, display, translation process. Also some messages will be showed here.

==Other features==

===Show/Hide Top Menu Buttons ===
Buttons on the top menu can be hidden.

Use [[File:CollapseTop.png]] to hide the buttons. Use [[File:CollapseBottom.png]] to show the buttons.

= Project Operations =
A new Project menu bar has been added after Wordfast Anywhere menu. Yes! Project Management (PM) has been introduced to WFA.

* * A project named "Project_1" is created by default. If you had an account before version 6, it will contain all the files from the previous version grouped by language pair.
* Every document now belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a project.
* Double-click a project to open it to see the content (documents grouped by language pairs).
* Double-click a document to start/resume work.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a project.

[[File:notice.png]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rDhVYY02Cds Wordfast Anywhere 6 Basic Projects video]'''

== Create a New Project ==
On the Project tab click on [[File:Pm new project 16.png]]'''New''' to create a new project. This will open the ''Project Seup'' window where the settings for the project are done.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Up to 3 projects can be stored at any given time.'''

To access the project setup once the project has been created, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

[[File:Createproject.PNG]]
[[File:Createproject1.PNG]]
[[File:Createproject2.PNG]]

The ''Project Setup'' window has two sections that need to be set in order to create the project. Setting one section opens the next one.

;1.General
: On this section general information of the project is set. This includes:
# Project name (Compulsory)
# Description (optional)
# Project type. Defines the type of the project:
#* Standard: For translators working alone.
#* Advanced: For Project Managers (PMs) managing large, multi-language projects.
# Project status (for advanced type). Defines the status of the project:
#* In preparation (blue): When project is being prepared (files, TMs and glossaries and linguist being added)
#* In progress (orange): This marks the start of the project. Files are shared with the linguist at this point.
#* Completed (green): The project is finished.
# Currency(optional). It will be used to calculate the project cost.
# Decimals(optional). When this checkbox is marked the project estimated cost will show numbers with decimals.
# Auto(optional). By default Project Manager will be responsible of pushing files to the next job when completion is done. Mark this checkbox to automatically sent files to the next job upon completion.
;2.Language Pairs and tasks
: On this section language pairs and tasks are added.
* Use the '''+''' next to the language pair header to add a new language pair. This will open the language selection dialog and then the TM and glossaries dialog to assign them to the language pair.
* Use the '''+''' at the end of the header row to add new tasks. Only 10 tasks can be added.
* A row is shown for each language pair where the default word rate (left box) and speed rate (right box) for each task can be set.
* Use the '''-''' next to the language pair to remove it. [[File:Warning.png]] Associated files and shares will be revoked.
* Use the '''-''' next to the task name to remove it. [[File:Warning.png]] Associated files and shares will be revoked.

Once all compulsory fields are set, click on '''Save project''' to save the project and go to the ''Project Content panel''.

[[File:Warning.png]] It is possible to move from standard to advanced but opposite is only possible if the advanced project has only one task.

== Modify Project Setup ==
To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

Use this to change any of the project settings defined on the project creation.

[[File:Warning.png]] It is possible to move from standard to advanced but opposite is only possible if the advanced project has only one task.

It is the same than for creating a project, so check the section above to know about the different parts and settings.

== Setting up language pair, Translation Memories and glossaries ==
Languages are added/removed from the ''Project Setup'' dialog.

To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

Check ''Create Project'' section above to know about it.

=== Language pair with its associated TMs and glossaries set in the project setup ===

To access the project setup dialog, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

[[File:Project_setup.png]]

Click on the language pair '''''+''''' button.

[[File:Langpair_dialog.png]]

Enter the languages and save, the TMs and glossaries dialog opens.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair.png]]

* If no TM and glossary exists for the language pair, a new dialog will propose you to create them. Save and wait they are listed.
* You can create and choose one or more TMs and glossaries. They are selected by checking the row in the '''''Active''''' column.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair_2.png]]

Finally save the TMs and glossaries selection by clicking on the '''''Save''''' button. The new language pair is now in the project setup and one icon is displayed for each TM and glossary.

[[File:Project_setup_2.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] The TMS and glossaries can be updated for a language pair by clicking on the icons. But if documents already exists for that language pair, they will not be affected by this change, only new documents added after the update.

=== TMs and glossaries set individually for a document ===
This selection for a document is overwriting the Language pair selection.
In the project content select a document by checking it and then click on the '''''TMs and glossaries''''' button [[File:Preferences16round.png]] of the '''''File''''' menu.

[[File:Project_content_3.png]]

The same TMs and glossaries dialog opens.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair_3.png]]

Saving will update only the TMs and glossaries for the selected document. A control can done hovering the TM icon.

[[File:Project_content_2.png]]

== Add/Remove Files ==
From the '''Project Content Panel''' there are two ways to add files to a project.

* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the header will add the files to all the languages in the project.
* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the language row. This will add the files only to that language.

[[File:Pmaddfiles.PNG]]

To remove a file, first use the checkbox to select it and then use the [[File:Remove16.png]] icon on the language row.

[[File:Pmdeletefile.PNG]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Associated shares will be revoked.

Several files can be selected to be removed at the same time.

== Project dashboard ==
Using the [[File:Pm_cost_16.png]] icon on the header will show the estimated cost of the project. Click on the icon again to hide costs.

[[File:Pmdashboard.PNG]]

== Advanced Features ==
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

Advanced projects have some extra features to manage the files.

=== Task TM ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

Click on the TM icon on the file column to set how the TM will be used on the tasks.

[[File:PmaddtmPNG.PNG]]

There are different options for the TM use:
*'''''Share TM'''''
**The selected TM will be shared with linguists.
**This is the best option to use.
**Translator will have exact and fuzzy matches.
**Translator can use concordance.
*'''''Create Project TM'''''
**The selected TM will NOT be shared.
**It will be used to create a temporary project TM with the matches from the file/s
**The temporary project TM will be shared.
*'''''Pretranslate'''''
**The selected TM will NOT be shared.
**It will be used to pretransalte the document/s.
**Only one TU match (the highest) per segment will be available to the translator.
**Concordance cannot be used.
**Concordance will only be used in this temporary TM

[[File:Warning.png]] Once a task has started it is not possible to change this assignment.

To change the TM assigned click on the same icon and change the TM selection by marking the ''active'' checkbox for the TMs you want to use.
To unassign the TMs clean all the ''active'' checkboxes.

=== Task Glossaries ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

To assign glossaries to tasks follow the instructions for TMs, but using the ''active'' checkboxes on the glossaries side of the dialog.

=== Manage Linguists ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

The Manage Linguist window can be opened by using the [[File:Linguist16.png]] icon on the '''Project''' tab or the '''Manage linguists''' buttons on the ''Assign Job'' window.

This allows the PM to create a team of linguists that will be used on the project jobs.

The same linguist can be used in several languages and roles.

[[File:Pmlinguist1.PNG]]

Main areas are:

* '''Add new linguist to a new language pair (1)''': Use [[File:Pm_linguist_add_16.png]] icon to add a new linguist to the team for a new language pair.
* '''Add or remove a linguist from a language pair (2)''': Use [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] icon to add a linguist to a language pair and use [[File:Pm_collapse_16.png]] icon to remove it.
* '''Linguist task grid (3)''': In this grid, each cell shows the RATE-SPEED-SCORE settings for a linguist. The grid has 4 columns, one for each role: Translator (TR), Proofreader (PR), Revise (RE) and QA. In addition '''dark values mean that linguist has been marked as "able" to do that role'''. Grey values indicate that linguist is not marked as "able" to do that role. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''

==== New Linguist ====
Use [[File:Pm_linguist_add_16.png]] or [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] to add a new linguist.

[[File:Pmlinguistnew.PNG]]

Introduce the following information to add a linguist.

* '''Email''': It must be the email of the linguist WFA account.
* '''Initials''': Short 4 character nickname for the linguist.
* '''Ctry''': Country of the linguist.
* '''Comment''': Some words about the linguist.
* '''Source language''' and '''target language''' that the linguist can work with.
* Role performance. There are 4 default roles a linguist can do on project tasks.
** Mark the '''checkbox''' if the linguist is able to do the role. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''
** '''Rate''': Linguist minim rate. Rate is measured in import per word. The project currency will be user with the import. For example 0.5 Eur per word.
** '''Speed''': Linguist speed rate (words/day). For example 3,000 words/day.
** '''Score''': Linguist 1 to 5 ''star'' score.

=== Assign Job ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''

Use the [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] icon in the language row under the '''job name''' column to assign a job to a linguist for the checkbox marked files.

[[File:Pmaddtask.PNG]]

On the assign job dialog:
* Choose a linguist from the list to whom the job will be assigned. [[File:Warning.png]] The file will be shared with the linguist when the project is set as 'In progress'. The rate and job amount from the linguist will be set for the task.
* To override the linguist rate or job amount, a particular rate or job amount for the job can be set using the input field under the column header. [[File:Warning.png]] Bear in mind that both are related so changing one will update the other.
* A '''''Deadline''''' can be set on the input field under '''''Duration'''''.
* Fill the '''''Note''''' text box to send extra information to the linguist.
* Use '''''Linguist cannot download the shared file''''' to not allow the linguist to download the file.
* Click on '''''Manage linguists''''' to open the Manage Linguist window to add/edit/remove linguists.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' linguists marked as ''able'' to do a role will be listed.

Use the [[File:Pm_collapse_16.png]] icon in the language row under the '''job name''' column to unassign a linguist from a job for the checkbox marked files. [[File:Warning.png]] Shares will be revoked.

[[File:Pmdeletetask.PNG]]

=== Move file to next Task ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

If '''Auto''' tasking is not set on the ''Project Properties'' window, when a task is finished (file has been revoked by the linguist), PM has to manually move it to the next task which will share the file with the linguist assigned to that task.

To do so, click on the double arrow on the finished task.

[[File:Pmmoveon.PNG]]

=== Workflow ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

The project workflow should be:
# PM creates a project, sets languages, sets jobs (Project setup).
# PM adds files to the project and prepares them (i.e splitting).
# PM sets how the TMs and glossaries assigned to the document will be use on the tasks as Share TM, Create project TM or to pre-translate.
# PM prepares the team of linguists.
# PM assign a linguist to each file task. Multiple file selection for batch assign is possible.
# When PM sets the project status to ''In progress'' files that has been assigned a TM and a task will be shared to the corresponding linguist.
# Linguist works on the file. When his work is finished, revokes the file. This finishes the share.
# Once the file is revoked, the PM has to manually move it to the next task. This is done automatically if Auto tasking is selected on Project Setup.
# When all tasks are finished project is finished. PM can change the status of the project to ''Completed''.

=== Purchase Order ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

You can define a Purchase Order template with project, document and task information that will be send to the linguists when the file is shared.

A copy of the email send to the linguist is BCC to the project owner.

==== Purchase Order template ====
Go to [[File:User profile.png]] '''''User Profile''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab to see information about your account. On the ''PM'' tab you can edit the default template.

[[File:Po1.PNG]]

On this template you put the information you want to appear on the Purchase Order.

You can use some '''dynamic parameters''' to add project, document and task information. Use this parameters to build the Purchase Order.
Parameters will be substituted by project, document and task corresponding values or a predefined text.

{| class="wikitable"
|+Here is the list which you can also check them using the [[File:Pm info 16.png]] icon.
|-
|{purchase_order_number}
|Include a number for the purchase order.
|-
|{project_name}
|Project name.
|-
|{task_name}
|Task name.
|-
|{document_name}
|Document name.
|-
|{document_download}
|If linguist can download the document the text '(The document cannot be downloaded.)' will be added to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{document_volume}
|Document number of words.
|-
|{job_note}
|Job note
|-
|{job_rate}
|Job rate
|-
|{job_total}
|Job total cost
|-
|{job_deadline}
|Job deadline in the format 29/12/2021 15:00 GMT+02:00 and the remaining time.
|-
|{document_tmglo}
|If there are TMs or glossaries in the share the text 'For the duration of this job # Translation Memories and # Glossaries have been temporarily shared with you.' will be added to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{document_use}
|Add the text 'To work on this document, log into your Wordfast Anywhere account. If you are already logged, refresh the project list by closing all the projects.' to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{my_full_name}
|Full name from 'User profile'.
|-
|{my_professional_info}
|Professional information from 'User profile'.
|}

==== Purchase Order preview ====
On the '''assign job dialog''' you will see a preview of the Purchase Order.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of the dynamic parameters will be updated when changing the selections on the dialog, others might require the job to be saved and others will be updated when the Purchase Order is send.

[[File:Po2.PNG]]

==== Purchase Order batch send ====
You can send the Purchase Orders for all the saved jobs at any moment using the '''Send POs''' button on the ''Project Setup'' dialog

[[File:Warning.png]] Purchase Order will also be send when the file is shared.

= File Operations =
[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a document.

=== Upload ===
To translate your document, you must first upload it to WFA.

[[File:warning.png]] There is a file size limit of 20 Mb.

From the '''Project Content Panel''' there are two ways to add files to a project.

* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the header will add the files to all the languages in the project.
* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the language row. This will add the files only to that language.

[[File:Pmaddfiles.PNG]]

The following window will be displayed:

[[File:Upload_doc.png]]

There are several ways to upload a document
* '''From local file''': Use '''''Browse...''''' to navigate through the directories on your computer and locate the document to be uploaded.
* '''From URL''': This option allows you to upload a file that is located on an Internet server by entering the address (URL) into the field. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Google Drive''': Choose a file from your Google Drive to be uploaded. You'll be asked to allow access rights to WFA before choosing the file. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Dropbox''': Choose a file from your Dropbox to be uploaded. You'll be asked to allow access rights to WFA before choosing the file. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Clipboard''': Paste the text to be uploaded into the text area. A text file will be created with the text.

At the bottom of the window click on '''''View allowed formats''''' to check the allowed formats:

Finally click on:
* '''''Upload''''': to only upload the file, which will be listed on the Document Management.
* '''''Upload and Open''''': to upload and open the document, which will be displayed in the document panel.

[[File:warning.png]] Depending on the size of the file, this may take some time. Please be patient.

Upload can also be done by using drag and drop area.

For some file formats you can configure some filter behaviors when uploading the file on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters|Configure Filters]]''' in ''Pandora's Box #8''. This is important for '''Text based files (xml, xsl)''' where a rules file (.properties) is needed.

=== Open ===
To open a document, first select it from the list of documents. There are 2 options on '''[[{{PAGENAME}}#File Tab|File tab]]''':

* '''''Open''''' button [[File:Translate_File16.png]]: will open a document and show all the segments
* '''''Fuzzy Open''''' button [[File:Translate_File16.png]]: will open a document, but only segments with a score lower than 100.

=== Segmentation ===
In order to be translated with a CAT tool, a document is divided into translation units (TUs), also known as segments. This process is called segmentation. A segment is a text string that ends with a terminator segment, usually the period (.), colon (:), question mark (?), or exclamation mark (!) and also a paragraph or end of cell mark, a page break or a tab.

The advantage of segmentation is that the translation units are presented to you one by one, without any danger of missing one. These segments form the basis for the TUs that are saved in the TM, consisting of the source segment (to translate) and the target segment (translated).

To configure segmentation go to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Segmentation_tab| Segmentation tab]]''' on the WFA settings.

=== Review ===
Once translated, the text should be revised. Here are some methods:
* Download the translated document immediately to view it in your favourite word processor.
* Download it in an offline review format. See '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Offline_Review_Tool|Offline Review Tool (OFRT)]]'''.
* Revise it in WFA using '''Trancheck''', '''Spellcheck''' and '''Preview''' tools. See below.
* If you are using the Classic mode for the document Layout (See the '''''Doc Layout''''' button [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] on '''''View''''' tab) , you can toggle the display between the bilingual document, the original document and the translated document, use the shortcut '''Ctrl+,''' (Ctrl+comma). A different display mode is presented with each iteration. To confirm what you see in front of you, check the indicator on the status bar: bilingual document (Bilingual), original document (Source) or translated document (Target). You can also click on the indicator to change it. Please note this action does not alter the document in any way. It only changes the way that it is displayed in a way that is more convenient for the task you are currently engaged in.

==== Transcheck ====
Click on the '''''Transchek''''' button [[File:Transcheck16.png]] of the '''''Review''''' tab. Transcheck provides the means to check translated content for missing tags, empty targets, numbers, untranslated segments, and terminology.

[[File:Transcheck.png]]

Click on the '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#QA_tab|Set the criteria]]''' link to go to the '''Setup''' and configure them.

Click on the '''''Check''''' button to get the result.

Click on the '''''Move next''''' button to move in the document panel to the first segment in the result list. Click again to move to next segment and so on.

==== Spellcheck ====

Click on the '''''Spellcheck'''' button [[File:Spellcheck16.png]] of the '''''View''''' tab and choose again '''Spellcheck''' in the list of choice. Spellcheck is a good practice to ensure high quality as it flags words in a document that may not be spelled correctly. The Spellcheck is done immediately then you'll get the following report with the results.

[[File:Spellcheck.png]]

Click on the '''''Move''''' button to move in the document panel to the first segment in the result list. Click again to move to next segment and so on.

==== Preview ====
Click on the '''''Preview''''' butonn [[File:Preview16.png]] of the '''''View''''' tab . It can be done at any stage of completion to get a PDF file displayed in a pop-up window with the translated document.

[[File:Preview_1.png]]
[[File:Preview_2.png]]

=== Download ===

[[File:Warning.png]] For '''download issues''', please check this [https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_fix_a_document_when_download_failed.3F link]

When the translation is finally complete, you must download the final document in order to be able to deliver it. To do this, click on [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab. A dialog with all the download options will be shown.

[[File:Donwload_all.jpg]]

Here is a short description of each option:

* '''Translated document/s''': Click to download the translated file. It will be the translated version of the source document in the same file type.

* '''Bilingual''': Click to download the TXLF (or TXML) file from the document. [[File:Warning.png]] '''''The download bilingual file will be of the type used when the file was uploaded.''''' For example if the file was uploaded using TXML, the bilingual download will be TXML. A file cannot be uploaded using one type (TXML) and download the bilingual file of the other type (TXLF). The workaround is to change the type and upload the file again. [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters More information]

* '''Offline review export''': Click to download an Offline Review file (.doc).

* '''Bilingual DOC without formatting''': Click to download bilingual for MS Word without placeholders (*.doc).

* '''Unformatted text''': Click to download unformatted Text (*.txt).

* '''Notes report''': Click to download a report with the document notes.

* '''TM from document/s''': Click to download a TM with document's content (.txml).

* '''Backup workspace''': Click to download a backup of current document + TM + glossary.

* '''Package''': Click to download a WFP package file (.glp) containing documents, memories, glossaries....etc. More information [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Package here]

* '''Filtered bilingual''': Open an advanced filtering dialog to choose segments to be downloaded.

Clicking '''OK''' will take the next dialog.

You may receive this message if you have not yet fully translated the document:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

This is purely an advisory message, warning you if you have forgotten to translate a segment or if there are provisional segments or notes. However it is quite possible that this is your intention: sometimes there are segments that should not be translated.

You can find out at any time if you have completed the translation, or how many segments remain to be translated, by using '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''

If your file is fully translated or you clicked '''OK''' on this warning dialog, a dialog where you can choose the way to download the file will open.

This can have different extra options depending the type of download you have chosen on the first dialog.

[[File:DownloadOptions2.png]]

For downloading the translated file, you have the option to add a second document in PDF format to the downloading of the document in its original format. To add the PDF-formatted document, tick the Add PDF file box. This may take some time, so please wait.

[[File:DownloadOptions2a.png]]

For downloading the TXML file, you have the options to copy the source content in case target segment is empty and not use language variants.

You can cancel the download by clicking Cancel or continue by clicking OK.
You can verify that this operation is taking place: a series of small blue rectangles will display the progress in the status bar.

There are some cases when you will get a compressed ZIP file instead of the original format. Check [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#Why_do_I_get_a_zip_file_when_downloading.3F here] the reasons.

If you have requested the PDF file, both files – the original and the PDF – will be downloaded together and compressed together in ZIP format (*. zip).

There are several ways to download a file:

* '''Download file''': After you click on the OK button, Wordfast Anywhere prepares the data transfer and then sends it to your browser. The browser will then inform you that it has received the data according to its specific mode of operation. In some cases, a dialog box will pop up allowing you specify where to save the file; however, this depends on the particular browser you use. If nothing happens, check your browser’s downloads settings and / or repeat the process.
* '''Send file to email''': Send the downloaded file by email.
* '''Create file URL''': Create a url to the downloaded file. To get the file copy-paste the url in your browser to start the download. The file will be available at that location for 3 days.
* '''Google Drive''': Send the downloaded file to your Google Drive account.
* '''Dropbox''': Send the downloaded file to your Dropbox account.

[[File:Warning.png]] For '''download issues''', please check this [https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_fix_a_document_when_download_failed.3F link]

=== Delete ===
[[File:Warning.png]] Remember this can '''NOT''' be undone, so it is recommended to download the file first.

To remove a file, first use the checkbox to select it and then use the [[File:Remove16.png]] icon on the language row.

[[File:Pmdeletefile.PNG]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Associated shares will be revoked.

Several files can be selected to be removed at the same time.

[[File:notice.png]] In case you accidentally delete a file, you can recover it by uploading again and using the same TM to pre-translate it.

=== Package ===
Project files (*.glp) are managed with the [[File:Pm import project 16.png]] '''Import''' and [[File:Pm export project 16.png]] '''Export''' buttons in the Project menu.

[[File:Warning.png]] The project file (*.glp) is limited to one source language while a Wordfast Anywhere project can have many, in consequence, package export is done by source language.

[[File:Warning.png]]There is an issue importing packages coming from PD. If you cannot import the .glp file, please ask to receive the bilingual files (txml/txlf) and the url for the TM/glossary.

==== Upload ====

Upload must be done using '''''Project''''' menu => '''''Import''''' [[File:Pm import project 16.png]] button.

Once you have selected you local file, click '''Upload'''. A new dialog with the package information and upload options will be shown.

[[File:UploadPkg.JPG]]

* '''Package Information''' section shows package name, who and when created the package and which language pairs contain.
* '''Package content''' section shows the bilingual files on the package. The files with the check box marked will be uploaded. '''On the right''' there are two drop-down lists to add a TM and glossary to the file which can came from the package if WFA can handle them or from your list on WFA (Information about them can be found on the Resources section).
* '''Resources''' section shows a list of TMs and glossaries and source files.

Finally there are two options for the upload.
* '''Create new folder''': by default files will be added to the root folder, you can use this option to upload the package files in a new folder.
* If the package contains source files a drop-down list will be shown to choose between '''Export back later''' to upload just the bilingual files and '''Generate final files on WFA''' to upload source files and merge them with the corresponding bilingual file in the package.

Once the package has been successfully uploaded, an HTML report is created.

[[File:Warning.png]] A new project is created with the content of the package.

==== Download ====

[[File:Warning.png]] The project file (*.glp) is limited to one source language while a Wordfast Anywhere project can have many, in consequence, package export is done by source language.

Download must be done using '''''Project''''' menu => '''''Export''''' [[File:Pm export project 16.png]] button.

[[File:DownloadPkg.JPG]]

* '''Package Information''': Here you can choose to download an existing package or create a new one, source and target languages. Multiple target language can be chosen if the package had them when it was uploaded.
* '''Package content''': After clicking '''Find Files''' a list of available files, TMs and glossaries is shown. The files with the check box marked will be downloaded.

Finally you can chose to '''Add Source files''' to the package.

= TM & Glossary Management =
== TM & Glossary Basics ==

Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''Setup TM&Glo''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' menu.

[[File:TmgloDialog.png]]

===Translation Memory ===
==== Creating a translation memory ====
There are several ways to create or add a TM:
* Create an empty standard WFA TM
* Upload an existing TM like from Wordast Classic or Pro
* Link to a remote TM hosted on a private Wordfast server
* Link to a Very Large TM hosted on a public Wordfast server

To create an empty TM, click on the '''''Create''''' button of the TM buttons area.

[[File:CreateTm.png]]

Choose source and target language codes. It is recommended that you have only one TM for each language pair. This way, you will benefit from everything you have already translated in each pair. However, there may be reasons for you to maintain different TMs in the same language pair. In this case, enter an ID using up to 10 characters in the Assigned Name field.
 Then click on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''Create TM''''' dialog box. Your TM has now been created and is selected in the list of TMs.

To Upload an existing TM, click on the '''''upload'''' button.

[[File:CreateTm_3.png]]

If you already have a TM that you use with Wordfast Classic or Pro, you can upload it to WFA. The codes for source and target languages are written in the header of the TM file. If you already have a TM in the same pair, make sure that you enter an identifier of up to 10 characters in the Assigned Name field.
 This procedure is exactly the same if you have a TM from another CAT tool. However, check first that this TM has been exported in the '''TMX''' format, the standard file format with extension '''.tmx''' supported by all major CAT tool developers.
 Click on the '''''Upload''''' button of the '''''Upload''''' dialog box, you will be prompted to browse a local file on your PC.

If the TM is in Excel format, before uploading it you need to save it as ''Unicode Text''.

[[File:warning.png]] Depending on its size, uploading a TM may take some time. In this case, it can be run in the background, allowing you to perform other tasks while you are waiting.

To add a remote TM or VLTM, click on the '''''add''''' button.

[[File:AddTm_1.png]]

Select the type TM in the list box.

[[File:AddTm_2.png]]

For adding a remote TM, copy paste the given URL in the URL field and the workgroup ID, if any, in the workgroup ID field.
 If you have already a remote TM with the same languages, you will need to enter a symbolic name.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test the remote TM. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:AddTm_3.png]]

WFA has access to the public TM server, which consists of segments offered by the community of translators and is available to all under the name VLTM (Very Large Translation Memory). The TM is unrestricted, free of charge and anonymous.
 For a VLTM, you need to enter source and target language codes.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test if the VLTM is available for your languages. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

==== Update an existing TM by appending from a local TM ====
You can update one of your existing TM by appending TUs from a local TM by clicking on the '''''merge''''' button.

[[File:MergeTm.png]]

 The process is slightly the same than uploading a TM but you should first select the existing TM in the list. The memory to import will already have predefined source and target languages codes in the header of the TM. There may therefore be a conflict of languages between it and the existing memory. If the languages are different, the merge operation will be rejected.
 You also have the choice, in case there are identical source segments, to add always the TM segments, or to not add duplicated segments from the TM. Select '''Add always''' or '''Do not add duplicate''' in the list box.
 By default, the merge process will not take language variants into account. If you want to make sure exactly the same variants are merged, tick the '''append TUs having the same variant''' option.
 Finally click on the '''''Merge''''' button of the '''''Append TUs''''' dialog box

==== Selecting an existing TM for translating a document ====
Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''TMs and Glossaries''' button on '''File''' menu to open the dialog and select an existing TM.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Caution''': If your TM is selected in the TM list, it does not mean selected for translating a document.
To select a TM for translation, you have to tick it in the '''active''' column and click on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' dialog box.
In this example above, 2 EN>FR TMs and 2 EN>FR glossaries are set active for translation.

[[File:notice.png]] A document can have as active '''several read-only''' TMs, but '''only one writeable'''. You might need to uncheck the active checkbox from the current writeable TM in order to set a new one.

=== Glossary ===
The use of incorrect terminology can ruin an otherwise good translation. Many clients have a well-defined terminology (the jargon of the trade), compiled in the form of a glossary. By supplying this glossary to their translators, clients can impose a particular terminology. In adopting this approach, very common in technical translation, the end result should harmoniously fuse the linguistic competence of the translator with the terminological requirements of the client.

Sometimes the client will ask the translator to provide a glossary of terms arising from research undertaken during the translation. In this case, the translator must create a glossary and add specific terminology to it. This glossary building can either be done prior to translation (in an initial terminology research phase), or during the translation itself.

In many cases, however, the client provides a bilingual glossary, which has already been created during the course of previous translations. It is then up to the translator to comply strictly with it and, where appropriate, to add his or her own contributions.

When the translation work is of a more general nature (and especially if a translator is still in the process of acquiring the general vocabulary of a source language), WFA’s glossary function can also be used to itemise terminology that is encountered during the course of the translation process.

Wordfast Anywhere is designed to assist the translator in all the cases mentioned above through the implementation of its glossary function. This glossary consists of a simple tab-delimited text document, which – like the TM – can be uploaded to and downloaded from WFA, shared with other CAT programs, etc. as required.

==== Creating a glossary ====
Like TM there are several ways to create or add a glossary:
* Create an empty standard WFA glossary
* Upload an existing glossary
* Link to remote glossaries
* Link to Tilde Terminology services
* Link to a IATE glossary

To create an empty glossary, click on the '''''Create''''' button of the glossary buttons area and follow the same TM pattern.

To Upload an existing glossary, click on the '''''upload''''' button of the glossary buttons area and follow the same TM pattern.
 Allowed file types are simple tabulated text file (*.txt) (source + tab + target), Wordfast glossary text file (*.txt), Excel file (*.xls, *.xlsx) and TBX file (*.tbx).
 Excel files must be simple:
* 1st Column: Source (compulsory)
* 2nd Column: Target (compulsory)
* 3rd Column: Comment (optional)
* 4th Column: F1 (optional)
* 5th Column: F2 (optional)
* 6th Column: F3 (optional)

 Unlike with a TM, WFA cannot derive the source and target language information from the header of the glossary file; therefore this must be specified here.
 Once the glossary has been uploaded, you will receive a report summarising the operation:
 You will see how many terms have been submitted for upload, how many were rejected as invalid or duplicates well as the total number of terms added.

To add a remote glossary or Tilde Terminology services, click on the '''''add''''' button.

[[File:AddGlossary_1.png]]

Select the type in th elist box.

[[File:AddGlossary_2.png]]

For adding a remote glossary, copy paste the given URL in the URL field.
 If you have already a remote glossary with the same languages, you will need to enter a symbolic name.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test the remote glossary. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:AddGlossary_3.png]]

For setting Tilde Terminology services, you need to select source and target languages and a domain.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test if you have collections. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:addIATE.png]]

To set an IATE glossary, just select the source and target languages. Only languages from the European community are supported.
Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button and if the glossary exists, click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:addIATE2.png]]

By default not all IATE terminology is showed, but you can enable it by checking '''''Show all common terminology'''''.

==== Update an existing glossary by appending from a local glossary ====
You can update one of your existing glossaries by appending terms from a local glossary by clicking on the '''''merge''''' button.

[[File:MergeGlo.png]]

 The process is slightly the same than uploading but you should first select the existing glossary in the list.
 You have the choice, in case there are identical entries (source and target), to add always or to not add duplicated. Select '''Add always''' or '''Do not add duplicate''' in the list box.
 Finally click on the '''''Merge''''' button.

==== Selecting one or more glossaries for translation ====
Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''TMs and Glossaries''' button on '''File''' menu to open the dialog and select an existing TM.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Caution''': If your glossary is selected in the glossary list, it does not mean selected for translation.
To select a glossary for translation, you have to tick it in the '''active''' column and click after on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' dialog box.

[[File:notice.png]] A document can have as active '''several read-only''' glossaries, but '''only one writeable'''. You might need to uncheck the active checkbox from the current writeable glossary in order to set a new one.

==== Using a glossary ====

[[File:Use glossary.png]]

* Whenever WFA recognises a term from the glossary in the source segment it highlights it against a blue background

* The terms highlighted in blue are considered as placeables. They can thus be manipulated with the [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] and [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] icons or the Ctrl+Alt+Right and Ctrl+Alt+Left shortcuts and by clicking on them with the mouse or by typing their initial letter + Tab. The difference is that, when you use the [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]] icon or the Ctrl+Alt+Down shortcut, it is the corresponding translation that is copied to the target segment. The most easy way to copy a target is probably to use the Auto-suggest feature, enabled by default. Target terms are proposed by typing the first letter of the target term of the 3 first letters of the source term. [[File:Auto-suggest target term.png]] [[File:Auto-suggest target term 2.png]].

* You can see in advance what the translation of the highlighted items is by activating the glossary panel (keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+H or by selecting it from the '''''View''''' tab => '''''Show/Hide Glossary''''' [[File:panelGlo.png]] button )

* If you want to know more about a term, i.e. the information that you or someone else has entered in the comment or F1, F2 and F3 fields, place your mouse over the source term and this information will be displayed. See above the bubble of the last term on the glossary panel (translation).

==== Adding terms to the glossary ====

[[File:Add_term.png]]

It is quite likely that you will want to incorporate terms you come across in the source text into the glossary together with their translations that arise as part of your research process. This way, your linguist’s memory will be reinforced and you are less likely to have to research the same word or phrase again in the future. WFA allows you to do this dynamically, at any time and without exiting your translation process.

First, select the term in the source text. If it consists of one word, you can simply click on it or use the Tab key to move forwards (or Shift+Tab to move backwards) through the text until you reach its position.

The word you have selected will be highlighted against a red border.

Then click on the target term in the target segment.

The selected target term will have a blue background.

[[File:Select terms.png]]

Next, invoke the Glossary Dialog Box by typing Ctrl+Alt+T, or clicking the '''''Add Term''''' [[File:TermEdit.png]] button.

If a single word, the terms you highlighted in the source and target segments should automatically appear in the Source and Target fields.
If the terms consists of more than one word, it may be necessary to paste the text into the fields from your computer’s clipboard or type the information manually.

You can also add a comment – something that may prove useful in the future, e.g. if you want to remember the situation in which this translation was used. The F1, F2 and F3 fields may be used to store word role, context, grammatical form or any other relevant text-based information.

Then click Save to confirm.

==== Fuzzy terminology recognition ====
Each time you open a segment, Wordfast Anywhere checks for the presence in the glossary of all words and terms contained in the source segment. This operation is called terminology recognition. The recognised terms are highlighted in blue in the source segment, as discussed above.

In establishing a correspondence between the terms of the source segment and the terms found in the glossary, WFA will both recognise an exact match and attempt to recognise fuzzy matches.

WFA employs a stemming algorithm for some languages (e.g. German) in order to recognise different forms of the same word that may correspond to those listed in the glossary.

For example, WFA can recognised the infinitive verb ‘besuchen’ as being related to the adjective (or past participle) ‘besucht’ due to the fact that the two words share a common stem.

Fuzzy matching can also be established by using an asterisk in combination with the term. This method overrides the stemming algorithm, allowing you to find all terms that begin with, end with or contain a particular text string.

=== Concordance search ===
Segments stored in the TM are retrieved only if they have a minimum level of correspondence with the source segment (by default 75%). However, even if the level of correspondence is not sufficient to produce a fuzzy match, the TM may still contain terms that you have previously translated and wish to use in your current translation. To search in the memory you have two options:

1) Click on the '''''Concordance''''' button [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]] or use the '''Ctrl+Alt+C''' shortcut. The following window appears:

[[File:concordance.png]]

Enter the word or text string you want to research in the Search field. WFA will search for all words that are the same or begin with the same sequence of letters as the string entered.

You can also select the word or text string with the mouse and then click on the '''''Concordance''''' button [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]] or '''Ctrl+Alt+C''' shortcut. The result will be displayed immediately.

You can edit or delete a term in the concordance search window by clicking on the edit or delete links.

You can add to your search possibilities by choosing the Advanced option:
* Two words or text strings (search terms) separated by a space: one or the other must exist in the TU
* Two terms separated by the + sign: both terms must exist
* A term ending with an asterisk: a search is performed for all text strings containing the search term.

When you use this option, a help line is displayed to remind you how this command works.

=== Searching in a glossary===
You can also search in the glossary. To do this, click the '''''Glossary Search''''' button [[File:GlossarySearch.png]] or use the '''Ctrl+Alt+G''' shortcut:

[[File: Glossary search.png]]

Type the source language word you wish to search for in the Search field and click OK. The list of glossary entries that contain the search term will be displayed.
You can edit or delete a term in the glossary search window by clicking on the edit or delete icons.

By employing an asterisk in the search term, you can expand your search to find all glossary entries that include the text string that the search term is made up of.

== TM & Glossary Advanced features ==

=== TM operations ===
==== View/Edit a TM ====
Select the TM in the list then click on the '''''Edit''''' button.

[[File:ViewEditTm.png]]

The dialog box displays the TM information. Depending on the TM type, you can edit some properties.
* Standard WFA TM : you have the possibility to define attributes of your TM, which will allow you to subsequently identify its segments. Click on the '''Attributes''' tab.
[[File:EditTmAttributes.png]]

There are five attributes in a Wordfast TM: the first is fixed and immutable, consisting of the name of the user. The other four can be defined by each user at will, but it is recommended to use attribute 1 to describe the subject of the text to be translated and attribute 2 for the client, to maintain compatibility with Wordfast Classic and Wordfast Pro users. Attributes consist of codes, usually 3 letters, followed by a brief description. In the fields referred to as TM attribute 1 to 4, enter the name of the attribute (subject, client, etc.). In the field on their right, select one of the attributes that appear on the drop-down list or, if necessary, click '''add''' to add an attribute, '''upd''' to update it or '''del''' to delete it. Whatever option is chosen, a dialog will appear asking for the code of the attribute (ID) and a brief description (Name, ignored for the Del option).
[[file:EditTmAttributes_add.png]] [[file:EditTmAttributes_update.png]] [[file:EditTmAttributes_delete.png]]

Dynamic codes : Predefined attributes can be added by entering a code between accolades as explain in the help.
[[File:EditTmAttributes_help.png]]

* Remote private Wordfast server

[[File:EditRemoteTm.png]] You can edit the workgroup ID and/or the symbolic name.

==== Download a TM ====
This is available only for standard WFA TM.

[[File:DownloadTm.png]]

From the Downloaded file format drop-down list you can select either the Wordfast TM TXT format, the Standard TMX format, the MS Excel XLS format or the Bilingual document TXLF format.
 Click on the '''Download''' button.

===== Filters when downloading a TM =====
Select ''"Filtering (advanced options)"'' on the second drop-down list and click on the '''Download''' button.

[[File:Tm_download2.JPG]]

This will analyse the TM and let you apply some filters to select what you want to download from the TM.

[[File:Tm_download_filter.JPG]]

[[File:Tm_download_filter2.JPG]]

Once filters are selected click on the '''Download''' button to finish the download.

==== Removing a TM ====
After clicking on the top '''Remove''' button on the TM side, this red warning is displayed to confirm the deletion.
 For TMs that are not Wordfast Anywhere standard TMs only the link to the external TM is cut.

[[File:DeleteTm.png]]

==== Quick TM Share ====
By clicking on the small '''share''' button on top of the TM side, you can share quickly a TM to somebody else having an account in Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:CreateTMShare.png]]

Click on the '''''Add guest''''' button and enter his email address (which should be his account login), then click '''Add'''.

[[File:CreateTMShare2.png]]

You can change the privilege of your guest on your TM. Finally to save the share, click on the '''''Save''''' button.

==== TMs Tools ====
===== Reversing a TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmReverse.png]]

Select a TM to reverse and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a TM already exists with the same name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Assembling several TMs in one TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmAssembled.png]]

Select one or more TMs to assemble in one TM and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a TM already exists with the same name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 if '''keep old assigned name''' is unchecked this information will be lost.
 if '''keep variants''' is checked, the TU will not be changed, otherwise, it take the given language pair.
 if '''keep user ID''' is checked, the TU will not be changed, otherwise, it will take your user ID.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Edit a TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmEdit.png]]

Select a TM to edit and click on the '''Run''' button.
 The TM will be opened as a temporary associated document in the document panel.

[[File:ToolsTmEdit1.png]]

Here you can for example update target segments, edit source segments and delete TU. Those changes will be stored straight on your TM.
 Bear in mind that this is a TM although it looks like a document.

After the TM edition, the temporary document must be deleted because it is a static copy of the TM.
 The tool can only edit and delete existing TUs and the TM size is limited to 100000 TUs.

=== Glossary operations ===
==== View/Edit a glossary ====
Select the glossary in the list then click on the '''''View/Edit''''' button.

[[File:ViewEditGlo.png]]

The dialog box displays the glossary information. Depending on the glossary type, you can edit some properties.

[[File:EditRemoteGlo.png]]

[[File:EditTildeGlo.png]]

==== Download a glossary ====
This is available only for standard WFA glossary.

[[File:DownloadGlo.png]]

Click on the '''Download''' button.

==== Removing a glossary ====
After clicking on the top '''Remove''' button on the glossary side, this red warning is displayed to confirm the deletion.
 For glossaries that are not standard only the link to the external glossary is cut.

[[File:DeleteGlo.png]]

==== Quick Glossary Share ====
By clicking on the small '''share''' button on top of the glossary side, you can share quickly a glossary to somebody else having an account in Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:CreateGloShare.png]]

Click on the '''''Add guest''''' button and enter his email address (which should be his account login), then click '''Add'''.

[[File:CreateGloShare2.png]]

You can change the privilege of your guest on your glossary. Finally to save the share, click on the '''''Save''''' button.

==== Glossaries tools ====
===== Reversing a glossary=====
[[File:ToolsGloReverse.png]]

Select a glossary to reverse and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a glossary already exists with the reversed glossary name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Assembling several glossaries in one glossary =====
[[File:ToolsGloAssembled.png]]

Select two or more glossaries to assemble and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a glossary already exists with the assembled glossary name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 if '''keep old assigned name''' is unchecked this information will be lost.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

=== TMs and glossaries shares ===

You can allow other users to share your TM as well as your glossary and you can see the TMs and the glossaries shared to you by others.
To manage all kind of share, click on the bottom '''''Share''''' button of the TMs and glossaries dialog. At that time you will receive the following:

[[File:Tmglo_share_1.png]]

* If you have already enabled the sharing of your TMs and your glossaries with other users, they will be displayed in the '''My shares to other users''' table. You can revoke sharing with any of these users. To do this, select the user in question and click '''Revoke'''. To add or update an existing share click on the '''Add''' or '''Edit''' buttons and see the chapter '''Add and edit shares to other users''' below.
* You can visualize all the TMs and glossaries that have been shared to you in the '''My shares from other users''' table. You can end any share by selecting it and clicking on the '''Remove''' button.
* You can also share your TMs and glossaries to applications like Wordfast Classic and Wordfast Pro by generating keys. they are displayed in the '''My shares to applications''' table. See below the chapter '''Sharing to applications'''.

==== Add and edit shares to other users ====

[[File:Tmglo_share_2.png]]

[[File:Tmglo_share_edit.png]]

[[File:Tmglo_share_3.png]]

==== Sharing to applications ====
Wordfast Anywhere will generate up to 5 keys to share one or more TMs and, optionally, glossaries.
The key is needed for the external application to connect to that specific share.

[[File:Tmglo_share_app_1.png]]

If you want to add the TMs and glossaries currently used, click on the '''Add active TMs and glossaries''', otherwise click on the '''Add''' button to choose a TM and the '''Add''' button to choose a glossary.
 Choose the right privilege and the number of keys needed, then click on the the '''Save''' button.
 The keys will be generated and listed in the '''My shares to application''' table. See below.

[[File:Tmglo_share_app_2.png]]

For instance this can be used on Wordfast Pro 3.4.9, where there is a tab for Wordfast Anywhere TM and glossaries.

[[File:Wpftab.png]]

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QVOMOYfR2ws&feature=em-subs_digest this video] about how to do it.

 Although the API key is for a combined TM and glossary, on Wordfast Pro 3.4.9 you need to add it twice: one for TM and one for glossary

[[Wordfast Pro]] users can check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=S7QCHNpRtKo&feature=em-subs_digest this video].

= Translation =
== Preparation of the translation environment ==
Before beginning the translation of a document using a CAT tool, you must first have an active Translation Memory.

'''Note''': an initial TM was automatically set up when you created your account.

The TM consists of a database, which will record each source language segment (i.e. sentence, phrase) that you translate, together with the corresponding target language segment. As it grows, this increasingly allows you to obtain translations of phrases made previously that are the same or similar to the one you are currently translating.

For more information check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Translation_Memory|Translation Memory basics]]'''.

== Translating ==
To start the translation, you must first open the initial segment.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:StartNext.png]] '''''Start/Next''''' button or use the ''Alt + Down'' shortcut . When you do this, the document area is transformed: the segment is displayed in light blue block (source), a grey block (target) is placed just below it and the rest of your document is shown on the rest of the page. The cursor is located in the grey block.

Translate the segment in the grey block

[[File:StartTrans.png|1200px]]

After translating this segment, you can continue with your translation. To move to the next segment, click on the [[File:StartNext.png]] '''''Start/Next''''' or use the ''Alt+Down'' shortcut. Remember this shortcut, as you will use it for each segment you translate. You can also move to previous segment by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Previous.png]] '''''Previous''''' or use the ''Alt + Up'' shortcut.

[[File:notice.png]] '''''When translating, the segments are saved automatically in the translation memory and on the database system as soon as you go to the next segment.'''''

Now translate the segment as before.

Now that you get the idea, you can continue to translate. Remember: to move from one segment to the next, use ''Alt+Down''. To return to the previous segment (to correct something that you subsequently realised was mistaken), use ''Alt+Up''.

Following are some '''other considerations''' regarding the translation of segments.

'''Note''': Most browser / OS combinations, including Firefox, Safari and Chrome, have their own spell checker – in some cases it may be necessary for you to activate it. You can also use '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Spellcheck|Spellcheck]]'''

There is color code for the target block:
* Grey is the no match from the TM (score=0)
* Green is the full match from the TM (score=100)
* Yellow is a fuzzy match from the TM (score between 50 to 99)
* Orange is a MT proposition
* Purple is the color when the segment has been modified by the editor

Score information can be found in different places depending on the view.
For '''Classic view''' it can be found on ''<}score{>'' tag between source and target segment.

[[File:ScoreC.png|1200px]]

For '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views''' there is a column for the score.

[[File:ScoreH.png|1200px]]

[[File:ScoreV.png|1200px]]

=== Tags ===

Before translating this new segment, pay attention to the tag <1>, which appears here at the end. WFA is not a word processor and thus does not concern itself with a specific representation of the document's formatting. You'll see no changes in size or typeface, no bold or italic characters. Instead, this information is encoded and represented by what we call "tags", e.g. <1>. By slowly passing your mouse over this tag you will see what it represents. This tag is not to be translated, but it should be placed on the appropriate position in the target segment. If you want to recopy a tag from the source segment please type < to trigger the tags proposal.

[[File:tagProposal.png]]

You can also copy it by using the comands on '''Translation''' tab: [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] '''Next Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Right'') and [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] '''Previous Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Left'') to navigate the source segment to the desired tag. A red frame indicates the selected item. Then position the cursor in the target segment and click on [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]] '''Copy Pl.'''(''Ctrl+Alt+Down'').

Differences on the formatting tags (<1>, <2>) between source and target segment can make the file filter aligner have difficulties to build up the translated document.

Check there is no ''segments with tag difference'' using one of this options:
# Click on [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button on '''File''' tab to get a report. Check if there are any ''segments with tag difference''. Use '''''Show Outline''''' [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button on '''View''' tab to go straight to one segment.
# Click on [[File:FindReplace.png]] '''''Find & Replace''''' button on '''Edit''' tab. Go to ''Miscellaneous'' tab and run a ''Tag difference'' search. Segments with tag differences will be listed.

On the listed segments you must pay attention to:
# There is no target tag missing that exists on source.
# The target tag order is different from source order. For example [<1>text text<2>] on source but [<2>text text<1>] on target.
# The target tag content is not identical with the source tag. You can see the content of the tag when the mouse is over it.

[[File:Warning.png]] We '''do not recommend to use copy/paste or drag and drop''' to copy the tags as it can copy more than the eye can see and be problematic. It is better to use the the auto-suggest feature with tags (whenever you want to add a tag just type < and the list of tags from source will be proposed for selection) or the [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]] '''Copy Placeable''' on '''Translation''' tab.

== Main commands ==

=== Provisional segment ===
You may be unsure whether your translation of a segment is correct. To avoid having to interrupt your translation process, you can mark the segment as provisional.

It will be identified by a yellow square at the beginning of the line for '''Classic view''' or at the end of the row for '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views'''.

To mark a segment as provisional, use the F10 key or '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mark.png]] '''''Provisional'''''.

When you have resolved any doubts, simply return to the marked segment and make your corrections. Use ''Alt+Down'' ( [[File:StartNext.png]] ) or ''Alt-Up'' ( [[File:Previous.png]] ) to validate the segment and erase the yellow square.

=== Auto propagate ===
Use this command to translate a segment and automatically propagate the current segment changes through all the document to other segments having the same source.

Find it in '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Autopropagate.png]] '''''Auto Propagate'''''.

=== Note ===
You can also write a note to be attached to the segment for the duration of the translation (in a similar manner to a Post-ItTM). You can use this to remind yourself of something important about this segment or to pass information on to people who will have access to your translation, such as reviewers.

To write a note, click on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Edit_Note16.png]] '''''Edit Note'''''.

The following text box will be displayed:

[[File:Editnote.png|1200px]]

Write your note in the text box and click Save. You can cancel the operation by clicking Cancel. In the case of an existing note, you can edit and validate it by clicking Save, or delete it by clicking Remove.

A green square will be placed at the beginning of the segment to indicate that a note is attached. By passing the mouse pointer over this square, you will see a rectangle containing the text of the note.

It will be identified by a grey square with an "i" in it at the beginning of the line for '''Classic view''' or at the end of the row for '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views'''.

[[File:Editnote2.png|1200px]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Notes can be downloaded by going to '''''File''''' tab => [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' and choosing the '''''Notes Report'''''

=== Copying the original segment ===
Sometimes a segment contains very little to translate: for example, when it consists almost entirely of proper names or is made up of a website address. In this case, it may be preferable to copy the entire source segment to the target segment and make any adjustments there.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CopySource.png]] '''''Copy Source'''''. or use the shortcut ''Alt-Ins'.

=== Erasing the target segment ===
Sometimes it is necessary to erase what you have just written in the target segment.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Cleanup_Project16.png]] '''''Del Target'''''. or use the shortcut ''Ctrl+Alt+X''.

This button has a toggle behaviour through: Empty target, Remove tags and Restore.

=== Insertion of a special character like the non-breaking space ===
When you write in French, some characters must be accompanied by a non-breaking space: e.g. before the colon, semicolon, exclamation mark, question mark, exclamation mark, before and after quotes, thousands separators, and so on. In WFA, a non-breaking space is represented by the symbol < >.

However, such spaces cannot be automatically handled in an Internet browser as they are when using a text editor such as Word. Therefore it will be necessary to add them manually. By default, a non-breaking space is inserted at the cursor location by clicking on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Insert_c1.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 1'''''.

Two other special characters can be inserted like the curly quotes. Use '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Insert_c2.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 2''''' and [[File:Insert_c3.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 3'''''.

You can configure these 3 special characters in WFA setup (see '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Pandora.27s_box_tab|Pandora’s box]]''').

=== Expanding a segment ===
As we have seen, WFA considers that the segment is terminated when it encounters a segment termination marker. However, in some cases this segmentation is in error. For example, when WFA’s segmentation engine meets the following sentence:
''On pense aux conseils de Prof. Jacques Lacan:''
it can interpret the segment as ending with ''Prof.'' because a full stop is used as an end of segment marker. In this case we can command WFA to expand the segment, that is to say, to append the subsequent segment to it.

[[File:exspand1.png]]

This is done with the ''Alt+Pg'' dn shortcut or '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Expand_Segment16.png]] '''''Expand'''''.

[[File:exspand2.png]]

It is important to expand segments when the segmentation has not been performed correctly because this will increase the chances of it corresponding with a translation memory segment. For example, the segment ''On pense aux conseils de Prof.'' will have little chance of having a similarity of over 75% with another. By contrast, if the sentence ''On pense aux conseils de Prof. Jacques Lacan:'' is in the TM, when WFA encounters the source sentence ''On pense aux conseils de Professeur Jacques Lacan'', it will offer the existing translation, as it has 90% similarity (it is only the word Professor that is not the same).

A segment cannot be expanded if it is terminated by an end of paragraph or end of cell marker, a page break or a tab.

You should not have to expand all segments containing abbreviations that end with a full stop. A comma-separated, modifiable list of common language-specific abbreviations is included in WFA . This can be accessed and modified via the segmentation tab in the configuration dialog box [case-sensitive, optional letters are enclosed in square brackets].

[[File:Abbrev.png]]

=== Shrinking a segment ===
If, on the other hand, two segments are erroneously displayed together due to an absence of an end of segment marker, you can also shrink the segment with the shortcut ''Alt-Pg'' up or ''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:ShrinkSeg.png]] '''''Shrink'''''.

=== Placeables ===

A placeable is any term or expression contained in the source segment that is defined as such. WFA provides shortcuts for inserting them into the target segment, thus both saving time and reducing the potential for typing errors.

WFA predefines as placeables:
*Numbers
*Tags
*Words beginning with, or otherwise containing, capital (upper case) letters
*Words or phrases appearing in the source text that have matching items stored in the '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Glossary|Glossary]]'''.

We have already seen how to copy tags. Given that a tag is a placeable, the procedure is the same: to copy any placeable, simply select it with the comands on '''Translation''' tab: [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] '''Next Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Right'') and [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] '''Previous Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Left'').

You also have the possibility of clicking on any term in the source text, thus placing it under focus and temporarily transforming it into a placeable. A red frame indicates the item selected.

Next, position the cursor in the target segment at the point where the placeable should be positioned or double-click (click and drag) to select the word (phrase) to be replaced and click on the on [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]] '''Copy Pl.'''(''Ctrl+Alt+Down''). The placeable is copied to the relevant position in the target segment.

In this sentence, the placeable elements, selected by ''Ctrl+Alt+Right'' or [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]], are:

[[File:place1.png]]
(starts with a capital letter)

[[File:place2.png]]
(number)

[[File:place3.png]]
(tag)

And, if necessary, any term may be designated as a placeable simply by clicking on it:

[[File:place4.png]]

As you translate the text, you only want to place those elements that should not be translated:

[[File:place5.png]]

At this point, you want to write ‘Chenjerai.’. However it may be faster and more efficient (as well as reducing the possibility of error) to select the item using ''Ctrl+Alt+Right'' or [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] (or even by simply clicking on it) and place it into the segment target with ''Ctrl+Alt+Down'' or [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]].

[[File:place6.png]]

The following proper noun ‘Hove’ is also a placeable, so you can repeat the procedure. Simply use the '''Tab key''' on your keyboard to advance from one placeable to the next (or '''Shift+Tab''' to move in the opposite direction).

[[File:place7.png]]

You can also use the ''Ctrl+Alt+Up'' shortcut or [[File:Dropdown.png]] '''Toggle Pl.'' on '''Translation''' tab to transform terms in the source segment into placeables.

For even greater efficiency, if you type a letter that begins a word or term in the source segment and then successively press Tab, all words or terms beginning with that letter are successively copied to the target segment. For example, in the above sentence, typing ''l'' followed by '''Tab''' will copy ''lyrique'' to the target. Each time you press the Tab key, the word or term that has been copied to the target segment will be replaced by the next
word or term appearing in the source segment that begins with the same letter, i.e. ''le'', ''laisse'' and so on.

=== Case changer ===
Use this feature to toggle through: lowercase, uppercase and proper name for a word. This feature can be used in one word (by putting the cursor inside the word), or with more than one word (by selecting several words with the mouse or Shift+Left/Right Arrow).
Beware that some times it gets crazy with the first and last word.

Use it bu clicking on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:CaseChanger.png]] '''''Case Changer'''''.

=== Increase target height ===
You can increase the target height by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Increase_target.png]] '''''Target Height'''''.

=== Web Speech Beta ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY available for Chrome. Currently disabled due to browser security.'''

This is a beta implementation that uses Google Web Speech API to insert your dictation into the target segment.

To use it, first open the segment and then click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mic.png]] '''''Web Speech Beta''''' button to start the dictation. The icon will change to indicate recording is on. To stop dictation click again on the button.

You can add a shortcut to this command.

You can jump to the next segment as always and keep on dictating. Or you can stop dictation, jump to the next segment and start dictation again.

A provisional transcription will be shown as an auto-suggest text and the final transcription will be inserted on the target segment. The provisional transcription might not be accurate while final transcription should be quite accurate and may be different from provisional transcription.

Please take into account that this is a beta implementation and that voice transcription is done online so there can be delays when dictating. We encourage you to use it and give us some feedback.

[[File:Warning.png]] It can be that Chrome keeps asking you to allow the use of the microphone every time. You need to check the Chrome settings: "Privacy>Content Settings>Microphone>Manage exceptions". There you should have an exception for https:freetm.com.

If you are connected to the site via HTTS the grant is permanent, if you use HTTP, you are asked each time.

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rR88md-xyik&feature=em-uploademail this video] about how to use this tool.

Check this links for more information:

[https://support.google.com/chrome/answer/3123708?p=settings_manage_exceptions&rd=1 Chrome Exceptions]

[https://support.google.com/chrome/answer/6148059?hl=en Chrome website permissions]

=== Edit Source ===
Using '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:EditSource16.png]] '''''Edit Source''''' will help you to correct the source text in order to have valid TU in memory.

This will not change the source file and obviously will not automatically change the target segment.

=== Ending the translation ===
If for any reason you want to stop translating, you have three choices:
* Close the translation and validate the current segment in the TM ('''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close & Commit''''' or ''Alt+End'')
* Close the translation without validating it ('''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:Close.png]] '''''Close''''' or ''Shift+Alt+End'')
* Clear the content of the target segment, together with any attached note, by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:Close_restore.png]] '''''Close & Delete''''' .

== After Translation ==

When your translation is finished, you use one of our '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Review|Review]]''' tools before '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Download|Download]]''' it.

= Tools =
=== Downloading TXML file ===
You can download your document in TXML format, the standard working file format used by WFA. This permits you, for example, to send the file to a colleague for review using Wordfast Anywhere or Pro. Once reviewed and corrected, you can upload it again.

To download your working file go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual TXML'''''.

[[File:DownloadTypesList.png]]

If your translation is incomplete or contains provisional segments or notes, you will receive this warning:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

At this point you have the choice to accept (OK) or cancel (Cancel) to return to your translation. If you accept, you will need to consider the following dialog:

[[File:DownloadOptions2a.png]]

You can optionally instruct WFA to copy the source segment to the target segment if it is blank (check Copy source to target if target is empty) and/or to ignore language variations, e.g. to not make a distinction between British and American English (check No language variants).

Choose the way to download the file and click '''''OK''''' to donwload the file.

=== Merging TXML files ===
If you already have a file in TXML format you can upload it to your workspace. To do this go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:Mergetms16.png]] '''Merge Txml''' button. At this point you must complete the following dialog box:

[[File:Mergetxml1.PNG]]

By checking Merge an existing document, all documents that exist in your workspace will be listed according to language pair, and you will have to choose which will be merged with the file you intend to upload.

You can also set WFA to update the TM corresponding to the file you upload (check Update or create a TM with a bilingual document). Check Merge an existing TM and choose which TM to update from the list displayed. You will also need to determine whether, in the case of identical source segments, new TUs should be added to existing ones (Keep existing TUs) or whether they should replace them (Overwrite existing TUs). If, on the other hand, you prefer to create a new TM, click on Create a new TM. At this point, you will have the opportunity to give this new TM a name, if you have more than one TM for the same language pair. Then click Upload to upload the file or Close to exit without doing anything.

Note that operations performed on the document are independent from memory-related operations, allowing you to update only the document, or only the memory, or both.
If you have clicked Upload, you will receive the following message:

[[File:Mergetxml2.png]]

Click Browse to navigate through your directories and select your file, then click Submit to perform the upload or Cancel to cancel the operation. After the merge operation has been successfully performed, a report will appear showing how many segments were merged.

[[File:Mergetxml3.png]]

=== Other downloads ===
You can also download the working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments, usable by Wordfast Classic (and Trados Workbench).

[[File:Bilingualwordfastclassic.png]]

This will allow your document to be proofread by a Wordfast Classic user. Caution, this download is only available for files formatted as .doc and .rtf. Unlike the TXML file, this format cannot be imported into WFA.

To download your working file in bilingual MS-Word format, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the '''''Download''''' button and choose '''Bilingual Doc original''' option. This option is only available if your source file is a MS Word file.

[[File:DownloadTypesList.png]]

If your translation is incomplete or contains provisional segments or notes, you will receive this warning:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

At this point you have the choice to accept (OK) or cancel (Cancel) to return to your translation. If you accept, you will need to respond to the following message:

[[File:Bilingualwordfastclassic2.png]]

Following the same steps you can download this other files:

* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments without placeholders Bilingual. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC no placeholders''''' option.
* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments with placeholders Bilingual. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC with placeholders''''' option.
* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments with tag-content as placeholder. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC tag content''''' option.
* Your translated file, in plain text format, without any formatting. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Unformatted Text''''' option.

=== Find & Replace ===
It is often necessary to locate a word or text string in a file that has been translated. For this we use the Doc Find and Replace function. Go to '''''Edit''''' tab and click on the [[File:FindReplace.png]] '''''Find & Replace''''' button.

As with other functions that require the current segment to be closed, you will receive a warning that the current segment will be closed without being saved. If you agree, click OK, otherwise click Cancel to cancel the transaction and save your work.

[[File:Warning.png]] By default search is only done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:SR1.png]]

'''''Find & Replace''''' dialog has 4 tabs performing different actions.

* Use '''Find''' tab to locate a word or text in your document.
* Use '''Find/Replace''' tab to locate and replace a word or text in your document.
* Use '''Go to Segment''' tab to search for single segments (1,5,68,499) or a range of segments (25-66).
* Use '''Miscellaneous''' tab to perform different types of searches such as look for '''provisional''' or '''untranslated''' segments, or segments with '''notes''' or '''tag differences'''.

[[File:Notice.png]] You can use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:Warning.png]] Not all the options are always available.
==== Find ====
Use '''Find''' tab.
Type the word or text you want to find and click '''Find''' button to start a search. When search is done hits are highlighted and the number of hits is shown on the dialog.

[[File:SR6.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] By default search is only done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:SR7.png]]

==== Replace ====
Use '''Find/Replace''' tab. Type the word/text you want to find and the word/text you want it replaced for and click '''Find''' button to start a search. When search is done hits are highlighted and the number of hits is shown on the dialog.

[[File:SR8.png]]

It may happen that '''Replace''', '''Replace/Find''' and '''Replace All''' buttons are not available. This happens because the first search does not move you to the first hit, you have to click again '''Find''' to move to the next hit and then replace buttons will be available. Use them to replace, replace and move to next hit or replace all hits.

Replace can only be done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Go to Segment ====
Use '''Go to Segment''' tab. Use it to find specific segments. This can be an alternative to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''.
You can type single segments separated by commas (1,5,68,499) or a range of segments (25-66).

[[File:SR4.png]]

Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Miscellaneous ====
Use '''Miscellaneous''' tab. This 6 types of search do not require to type a word/text but will help you locate segments with some particularities. This can be an alternative to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''.

[[File:SR5a.png]]

You can search for:

* '''Provisional''' segments.
* '''Untranslated''' segments.
* Segments with '''Tag difference'''.
* Segments with '''Notes'''.
* Segments with '''Double spaces'''.
* Segments with '''Revisions'''.

Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Advanced search options ====

Using the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button you can access some advanced search options:

[[File:SR2.png]]

* Search for '''Whole Word'''.
* Do a '''Case sensitive''' search.
* Search for words that start/end by the characters using * as a joker. For example searching for *able will find: movable, payable, breakable,...etc. And searching for hand* will find: handbag, handmade, handbook,...etc
* Search on Source, Target or both. This can only be used in '''Find''' tab.
* Mark each found target as provisional.
* Create a note for each replaced segment.
* Update the TM for each replaced segment.
* Do a wrap search
* Change search direction: Backward or Forward.

=== Analyze ===
Before providing a translation quotation, you may wish to analyze the source text to determine the extent of the work required. WFA provides an analytical tool for this purpose. To do this, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the '''''Analyze''''' button and choose '''Analyze'''. If your file is big and you do not want to wait, choose '''Analyze in Background'''.

A progress message is displayed on the status bar. Then the analysis results will be displayed:

[[File:Analysis.png]]

According to the number of repetitions (identical segments that appear more than once in the document) or the percentage of segments that correspond either completely (100%) or partially (<100%) to matches in the TM, you will be able to precisely estimate the volume of work actually requiring to be translated. After having examined the analysis report, click Close.

=== Statistics ===
WFA allows you to see what progress you have made with your translation at any time. To do this, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button.

A statistical report on your translation will be displayed:

[[File:Statistics.png]]

You will see the number of source and target segments (with the percentage already translated in brackets); the number of source and current target words; the number of source and target tags and if there is any segmental discrepancy in terms of differences between the number and content of the source and target tags (segments with tag difference); the number of segments not stored in the TM (segments flagged not saved in TM); the number of provisional segments (provisional segments) and notes (segments with notes). The report also displays which segments remain to be translated. After viewing the statistics, click Close.

Another important indicator is always present on the status bar: it tells you on which segment you currently are in relation to the total number of segments in the document. In this example, the document has 149 segments in total and you are currently on the 68:

[[File:Foot1.png]]

=== Alignment ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This tool is not managed by WFA in case there is any problem use the '''Help''' in the tool, the third tab, to report your problem. You can also sent an email to '''converterhelp@wordfast.com'''

When you begin to translate with a CAT tool you may not be able to derive the maximum benefit from it if you do not yet have a translation memory. Or, a client may have source and target documents from a previous translation but cannot supply you with a TM. In this case, you can quickly derive a TM by performing an "alignment" on the documents you have already translated prior to using WFA for your translation work by using the alignment tool.

To do this, go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab and click on the [[File:WF Update16.png]] '''''AutoAligner''''' button.

A new page will open, displaying the following dialog:

[[File:Align.png]]

Follow the instructions to upload the files and align them to get the TM from the alignment.

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HVXTQ5Wb_Eg&feature=em-uploademail this video] about how to use this tool.

You can then upload this TM to be used in WFA.

[[File:Warning.png]] This tool is not managed by WFA in case there is any problem use the '''Help''' in the tool, the third tab, to report your problem. You can also sent an email to '''converterhelp@wordfast.com'''

=== Preview ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Preview|Preview]]'''

=== Transcheck ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Transcheck|Transcheck]]'''

=== Spellcheck ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Spellcheck|Spellcheck]]'''

=== Pretranslation ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.

Go to [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]] '''''Pre-translation''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to open the dialog:

[[File:Pretrans1.png]]

Configure how you want the pre-translation to run:
* Activate '''Fuzzy matches'''
* Set what to do when there is no match from the TM. For setting a MT check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Machine_translation|this]]'''
* Leverage segment scores. Make sure the owner of the document (translation agency or company) has agreed to leverage empty segments.

If your file is big and has many segments run pre-translation in background by clicking on '''Pre Translate in background''' so you can keep working in other things. Otherwise use '''Pre-translate''' button run pre-translation.
Ad the end of the process you'll get a report with the result.

[[File:Pretrans2.png]]

=== Offline Review Tool ===
Use Offline review tool to review a file outside Wordfast Anywhere using a bilingual file and then update the changes.

To get the bilingual file go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Offline review DOC'''''.

[[File:Ofrt11a.png]]

This will download a bilingual file like this.

[[File:ofrt2.png]]

[[File:Notice.png]] Read the disclaimer on the download window and the instructions at the top of the file.

[[File:Warning.png]] Remember to add the tags on the target column as you would do on any translation. '''''Missing tags''''' can cause problems when merging back the file into WFA.

After editing '''only''' the target segments an saving the file you can import it to be merged with the file in Wordfast Anywhere. To do this go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:mergetms16_menu.png]] '''''Merge Offline Review''''' button.

[[File:ofrt3.png]]

A report will be shown with the result of the merge.

[[File:ofrt4.png]]

=== Extract Frequents ===
Use [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]] '''''Extract Frequents''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to create anew file that will contain only the repeated segments of the document.

A first report is created showing the percentage of segments that have an occurrence greater than 2.

[[File:ExtractFrequents1.png]]

Set the '''minumum occurrence''' that you want to extract and click on '''Extract and Open''' to create a new file with the occurrence segments.

=== Go to WFP4 ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.
You can open your document in '''Wordfast Pro 4 Online''' by using [[File:About wordfast16.png]] '''''WFP4''''' button on '''''File''''' tab.

WFP4o will use several settings on WFA along with the TMs and glossaries, so all settings must be done on inside WFA before. Also bear in mind to save your work on WFP4o before switching back to WFA.

[[File:Wf4disclaimer.png]]

Read carefully the disclaimer dialog before clikcing in '''Continue to WFP4o'''.

=== File information ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.

Go to [[File:Modify Project16.png]] '''''File Info''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to open the dialog with information about the file:

[[File:Fileinfo.png]]

=== Split file ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''''This option is only available when the document is closed.'''''

You can split a file in 4 parts by using [[File:Split.png]] '''''Split''''' button on '''''File''''' tab.

[[File:Split1.png]]

For each part a txml file will be created with the corresponding part of the file. The name of the txml files will contain information about which part is. For instance '''_[1of2]''' means the file was splitted into 2 parts and that this file correspond to the first part.

By default files are splited in equally parts, but you can change this and set the boundaries that better suit you.

[[File:Split3.png]]

'''Downloading one of the splited parts will download a TXML file''', but you can choose to download also the entire file in the original format.

[[File:Split2.png]]

Use
[[File:Join.png]] '''''Join''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to put the parts together again. [[File:Warning.png]] '''''This option is only available when the document is closed.'''''

=== Share file ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''This option is only available when the document is closed and is selected from the list.'''

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Share is only possible between Wordfast Anywhere users.'''

You can share your document with '''several Wordfast Anywhere users'''. To do so go to [[File:Share.png]] '''''Share''''' on '''''File''''' tab.

[[File:Share3.png]]

Additional files can be added using '''''Add''''' button on the Document section of the dialogue. If the file belong to a package, all package documents will be added otherwise it will be all documents with the same source and target languages.

To start sharing click on '''''Add''''' button after the Document section to add a new guest. Repeat it to ad more guest users.

[[File:Share_addGuest2.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Guest email must be a valid Wordfast Anywhere account.'''

For each guest two properties can be chosen:
* '''''Share as read-only'''''. This means guest will only access the document in a read-only mode, but no edition will be allowed.
* '''''Keep online (not downloadable)'''''. This means guest will access the file but would not be allowed to download it.

Additionally, you can share a TM and/or glossary with the file.

To do it, use the buttons on the '''''Translation Memories''''' and '''''Glossaries''''' tabs
* '''''Linked to document''''' will add the corresponding TM/glossary associated to the document.
* '''''Add''''' will let you choose which TM/glossary with the same language pair you want to share
* '''''Remove''''' will revoke the share on the selected TM/glossary from the list.

Once guests are added, they are presented on a list on the main dialogue. Any guest will be allowed edit rights unless '''''Share as read-only''''' is check. Owner will always have edit rights.

[[File:Share_mainList2.png]]

Repeat this process to add more guests.

You can use '''''Duplicate''''' button to add a new guest with the same settings than a existing one. Use '''''Revoke''''' button to finish a share with a guest

Check '''''History''''' on the document to force the use of revisions in the document.

As owner and several guests can have edit rights '''a reservation system is used to ensure only one user can edit a segment at a time'''. When a user opens the document the free segments loaded in Document Panel will automatically reserved for him adding a green share icon at the end of the segment. Segments reserved by other users are shown with the same share icon but in red color.
'''The reservation of segments will end when the user closes the document'''.

[[File:Share_reserved.png]]

When a user opens a shared document that is being used by an other user a pop-up message is show to warn about that.

[[File:Share_message.png]]

Also a notification is send to the other working users that a new user has opened the document.

[[File:Share_notification.png]]

Jumping to the next block will release the previous segments and will reserve the new segments being loaded.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''There is no live update of the segments reserved by other users. Which means segments need to be refreshed manually on Document Panel by loading them again, for instance by jumping to a different block and back.'''

To help to know when a user closes the document and releases his segments, a notification is send to the other working users.

[[File:Share_notificationEnd.png]]

'''''To finish a share''''' with a guest owner users need to use '''''Revoke''''', and to remove all the shares use '''''Revoke all'''''. This is a button on the Share dialog ([[File:Share.png]] '''''Share''''' on '''''File''''' tab).

Guest users will not see the share dialogue. They should use [[File:Revoke.png]] '''''Revoke''''' on '''''File''''' tab to finish the share.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Remember Share/Revoke are only available when the document is closed.'''

=== Offline Mode ===
On those situations when there is an internet connection cut or when WFA server is unavailable, WFA will turn on '''Offline Mode'''.

'''Offline Mode''' lets you work offline. It allows you to translate the segments that are currently loaded on the ''Document Panel''.

The translated segments are stored locally and automatically committed to WFA server as soon as the connection is recovered.

If the TM you are using is writeable, TUs will be automatically updated from the document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Be aware that there will be some messages telling you about going in/out of Offline Mode and segments being saved. Some features will not be available during Offline Mode.

[[File:Warning.png]] This feature has nothing to do with Offline Review Tool (OFRT). For information about OFRT, check the index at the top of this Manual.

[[File:Warning.png]] We recommend not to close the browser till synchronization back is done.

= WFA Configuration =
== Features and Shortcuts ==

{|class="wikitable"
|'''Menu tab'''
|'''Feature'''
|'''Shortcut'''
|'''Icon'''
|'''Information'''
|-
|Translation
|Start translation / Next segment
|Alt+Down
|[[File:StartNext.png]]
|Starts a translation session by opening the currently selected segment / Commits the current segment to TM and opens the next segment.
|-
|Translation
|Previous segment
|Alt+Up
|[[File:Previous.png]]
|Commits the current segment to TM and opens the previous segment.
|-
|Translation
|Close & Commit
|Alt+End
|[[File:CloseSave.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment and committing it to the TM.
|-
|Translation
|Close
|Shift+Alt+End
|[[File:Close.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment without committing it to the TM.
|-
|Translation
|Close & Delete
|Alt+Delete
|[[File:Close restore.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment and deleting the target with any note. Do not commit to TM.
|-
|Translation
|Provisional segment
|F10
|[[File:Mark.png]]
|Marks a segment as provisional with a yellow Post-It.
|-
|Translation
|Copy Source
|Alt+Insert
|[[File:CopySource.png]]
|Copies the source segment over the target segment.
|-
|Translation
|Expand
|Alt+PgDn
|[[File:ExpandSeg.png]]
|Expands a segment, if it actually extends beyond the punctuation mark (wrong segmentation). Note that a segment cannot be extended beyond a paragraph mark, page break, tabulator, or table cell.
|-
|Translation
|Shrink
|Alt+PageUp
|[[File:ShrinkSeg.png]]
|Reverses any use of the Expand segment command or reduce the size of a segment.
|-
|Translation
|To Fuzzy
|Shift+Ctrl+PgDn
|[[File:TranslateUntilFuzzy.png]]
|Translates until a non-exact match is found.
|-
|Translation
|Toggle empty
|Ctrl+Alt+X
|[[File:Cleanup Project16.png]]
|Empty the target - remove the tags from the target - restore the original target.
|-
|Translation
|Auto Propagate
|
|[[File:autopropagate.png]]
|Auto propagate segment change through all the document for same source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Toggle Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Up
|[[File:dropdown.png]]
|Transforms all the terms in the source segment into placeables. If repeated, returns to the previous mode.
|-
|Translation
|Next Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Right
|[[File:Next_Placeable16.png]]
|Selects the next placeable element in the source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Copy Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Down
|[[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]]
|Places the selected transposable element from the source segment into the target segment, where the cursor is located (or replaces highlighted text in target segment).
|-
|Translation
|Previous Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Left
|[[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]]
|Selects the previous placeable element in the source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Next word
|Tab
|
|Places the subsequent source word with letter + Tab
|-
|Translation
|Previous word
|Shift+Tab
|
|Places the preceding source word with letter+Shift+Tab.
|-
|Translation
|Target Height
|Ctrl+Alt+T
|[[File:increase_target.png]]
|Increases the height of the target segment for easier viewing.
|-
|Wordfast Anywhere
|Wordfast setup
|Ctrl+Alt+W
|[[File:Setup.png]]
|Opens the Wordfast Anywhere general setup dialog.
|-
|Edit
|Find & Replace
|Ctrl+Alt+R
|[[File:FindReplace.png]]
|Find and replace in the document.
|-
|Edit
|Edit Source
|Ctrl+Alt+K
|[[File:EditSource16.png]]
|Used to make minor corrections to the source segment.
|-
|Edit
|Edit Note
|Ctrl+Alt+J
|[[File:Edit_Note16.png]]
|Allows you to create or edit a note.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 1
|Shift+Ctrl+1
|[[File:insert_c1.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 2
|Shift+Ctrl+2
|[[File:insert_c2.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 3
|Shift+Ctrl+3
|[[File:insert_c3.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Case Changer
|Shift+F3
|[[File:caseChanger.png]]
|Toggle between lowercase, uppercase, and capitalization.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|TMs and glossaries setup
|
|[[File:Preferences16round.png]]
|Opens the TMs and glossaries setup dialog.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Concordance search
|Ctrl+Alt+C
|[[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]]
|Performs a search in the TM and displays all segments containing the search term.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Glossary Search
|Ctrl+Alt+G
|[[File:GlossarySearch.png]]
|Search in the glossary for the word or phrase selected in the source segment.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Add term to glossary
|Ctrl+Alt+T
|[[File:TermEdit.png]]
|Pops up a glossary term entry form.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Copy TU
|Alt+right
|[[File:CopyTU.png]]
|Copy a TU from the TM panel to the target segment. If many, press many times, it will start by copying the second one assuming the first one is already copied. The TU can be a MT proposal.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Delete TU
|Ctrl+Alt+Backspace
|[[File:DeleteTU.png]]
|Delete from TM the current or selected TU visible in the TM panel.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Update TU
|
|[[File:force_tm_addtu.png]]
|Commits to TM the source and target segment as a new TU or update an existing one.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Force TM search
|
|[[File:force_tm.png]]
|Perform a direct search (without cache) in the TM.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Force MT
|
|[[File:force_mt.png]]
|Forces the translation of the segment by the configured MT engines like Google Translate / Microsoft Translator.
|-
|View
|Outline pane
|Ctrl+Alt+D
|[[File:panelOutline.png]]
|Closes or opens the Outline. The outline is a view of all the segments showing which ones are translated but also which ones have notes or are provisional.
|-
|View
|TM pane
|Ctrl+Alt+M
|[[File:panelTm.png]]
|Closes or opens the TM pane.
|-
|View
|Glossary pane
|Ctrl+Alt+H
|[[File:panelGlo.png]]
|Closes or opens the Glossary (Terminology) pane.
|-
|View
|Move next block
|Page Down
|[[File:moveNextScreen.png]]
|Move to the next block of document's content.
|-
|View
|Move previous block
|Page Up
|[[File:movePrevScreen.png]]
|Move to the previous block of document's content.
|-
|View
|First of Block
|Home
|[[File:move_first_seg_screen.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the first segment of the block.
|-
|View
|Last of Block
|End
|[[File:move_last_seg_screen.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the last segment of the page.
|-
|View
|First of Doc
|Ctrl+Home
|[[File:move_first_seg_doc.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the first segment of the document.
|-
|View
|Last of Doc
|Ctrl+End
|[[File:move_last_seg_doc.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the last segment of the document.
|}

== WFA Setup ==
The WFA Setup menu is accessible by the shortcut Ctrl+Alt+W or the [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab.

Six tabs are visible: General, TM rules, Shortcuts, Segmentation, Pandora's box and QA.

=== General tab ===
Several general settings can be don in this tab.

[[File:wfasetup1.png]]

==== Machine translation ====
Click on '''MT''' tab to access the ''Machine Translation'' settings.

[[File:wfasetup2.png]]

WFA gives you the ability to translate each segment by online translation services like Google Translate and Microsoft Translator. The translations proposed are not ever likely to be fully acceptable. However, by making a few small adjustments, you will be able to use them extensively in your translations.

[[File:Warning.png]] When using this service, the source segments that will return a translation are transmitted to Google and Microsoft. It is up to you whether or not to accept these translations; these companies are not made aware of your choice. However, be aware that sending the segments to Google and Microsoft may raise privacy issues between you and your customers.

Each MT engine has a window were to set it's settings. Bear in mind that some MT may require a personal ID or password.
* Use '''Add''' button to add a new MT.
* Use '''Edit''' the settings for the selected MT on the list.
* Use '''Remove''' will delete the selected MT on the list.
* Use '''Test''' to run a test on all the MTs with the active checkbox marked.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''To use a MT engine, it must be added to the list and with the "Active" checkbox marked'''.

On each MT engine window you can set its settings (i.e. the key or url). You can also set a particular values for
* ''Engine timeout'' as in some cases (i.e. small segments) the MT requires more time to get back with a result.
* ''Engine score'' value for each MT.
* ''Details'' for extra information about the MT like the list of available languages.
[[File:Warning.png]] Each MT engine has a different set of available languages.

Finally, there are several general options such as
* When to use the MT (when no TM match, when no TM full match, always)
* Remove tags before sending to MT.
* Use all available providers on ''force MT''.
* Do not copy MT proposition to target.
* Enable MT for review (May slow down the revision process)

===== Custom Machine translation =====

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Note:''' this section is '''DIY (Do It Yourself)'''. Our hotline cannot assist in the customization of an MT engine, because that requires knowledge of the remote provider's specifications. However, public discussion groups may offer help.

If your remote Machine Translation provider is not listed (as a provider tab), you can use '''Custom tab''' to create a custom connector for it. This is only possible if your MT provider's API is using a REST standard, and returns results in a JSON, or similar, format. That is the case with major MT providers currently available with WFC (Google, Microsoft, WorldLingo, deepL, MyMemory, etc.).

In WFA's Machine Translation setup, go to the "Custom MT" tab.

[[File:CustomMT.JPG]]

Note the various elements:
* URL: Tells WFA which is the url of the MT provider with the needed parameters.
** {ss} will be replaced with the source segment to be translated. This parameter must be present.
** {sl} and {tl} will be replaced with your given source and target language codes.
** {key} will be replaced with the given API key
* API Key: Some MT providers need a personal key, this is the place to add it.
* Source language: Source language of the text, it corresponds to the {sl} parameter in the URL.
* Target Language: Target language which will be the text translated to, it corresponds to the {tl} parameter in the URL.
* POST: includes parameters that should be used with the POST method, concatenated like in the URL format. If the parameters needs to be in JSON format, choose the way how to write it (either URL encoded text to convert to JSON either a direct JSON string).
* HEADER: includes parameters that need to be in the header of the request. The format is param:value. Put one parameter per line.
* Json key: Some MT providers return the translated text in a parameter (translation, translatedTex...etc), this tells WFA how to spot the returned translated segment.

Once all the elements are set you can test the connection by using the '''Test''' button. Optionally you can change the text to be tested on the text box next to the button.

Let's assume your preferred MT provider is WorldLingo and we create a custom engine for it. You explore WorldLingo's API documentation. It essentially boils down to a query URL, with parameters. On Custom tab you can use:

* URL: https://www.worldlingo.com/S000.1/api?wl_data={ss}&wl_srclang={sl}&wl_trglang={tl}&wl_password=secret
* API Key: Empty, as no API Key is needed.
* Source language: en.
* Target Language: fr.
* Json key: Empty.

'''Practical example:'''

Opening a browser, you begin by testing the URL. In the following example, the raw URL was customized for an English-to-French language pair, to translate "Hello World". Your real URL will look different, the following is an example based on WorldLingo:

::: ''http://www.worldlingo.com/S000.1/api?wl_data=Hello%20world&wl_srclang=en&wl_trglang=fr&wl_password=secret''

You can try pasting the above URL into a browser's address bar. If things go well, the site will send a reply:

::: ''Bonjour le monde''

Other MT providers may use a more complex JSON reply, in which case you specify the JSON key so that WFA can identify the result. Here the key is "translation" so you would use Json key => translation

::: ''{"responseData":{"translation":"Bonjour le monde","match":1} }''

Your MT provider may require more parameters, such as a secret ID key (aka an API key), or other elements, in which case, you should hard-code those in the URL.

==== Fonts ====
Font Size: this setting only affects the font size on the screen, your document will keep all its original layout unchanged. The available sizes are selected from the drop-down list.

Font Family: this setting only affects the fonts displayed on the screen, your document will keep its entire original layout unchanged. You can specify a specific font or a font family, for example Arial, Helvetica, Sans Serif (sans serif font, default) or Times New Roman, Times, Serif (seriffed font).

==== Target segment selection ====
Positions the mouse pointer at the opening of the segment, with or without selection.

# Cursor at start – no text selected, cursor positioned at the beginning of the segment.
# Cursor at end – no text selected, cursor positioned at the end of the segment. This is the default setting.
# Segment selected – The target segment is entirely selected.

==== Fuzzy Threshold in % ====
Percentage of similarity required for a TU contained in the TM to be suggested as a translation of the source segment. If several TUs meet this criterion, the TU with the highest percentage will be offered. In this case you can select the subsequent TUs with [[File:CopyTU.png]] '''''Copy TU''''' button on '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' tab or using the corresponding shortcut (Alt + Right).

The default percentage (75%) is recommended for most translations, but in some cases it may be appropriate to change it. For example, if you are translating short segments containing only 3 words, a fuzzy threshold of 75% will only offer those TUs which are identical (100%) and those where two words are identical, i.e. 66%, will never be proposed.

==== Record Revisions ====
Check this option if you want to save a record of the changes on translated segments.

==== Enable Auto-Suggest ====
Check this option if you want to get suggestions while you type on a translated segment.

Auto-Suggest can be configured in '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.238_Configure_Auto-Suggest|Pandora's box #7]]''' to add or remove items.

==== Tab behavior ====
Check this option if you want to use click or hover for triggering events on Top Menu bar.

==== Enable auto-hide buttons ====
Check this option to make toop toolbar buttons hide automatically.

==== Enable Segment Tool Bar ====
Check this option to enable the Segment Tool Bar on Horizontal and Vertical views. You can customize it on Pandora's Box #15

=== TM rules tab ===

Here you have the opportunity to establish penalties to be taken into account when calculating the similarity between the TM and the segment to be translated. In other words, the percentage of similarity is reduced, where applicable, according to the figure indicated for each of the following rules. Some rules allow fractional reductions, but this only applies to the calculation: the final reduction will be the sum of all penalties rounded to the nearest whole number. If the percentage of similarity to the TU, reduced to the sum of the penalties, is less than the specified Fuzzy Threshold percentage, it will not be proposed.

[[File:wfasetup3.png]]

Penalties for the following rules are activated only if the box on their right is checked. They apply only to the TUs proposed by the TM or VLTM, not from machine translation, which has its own non-modifiable penalty.

* ''Case penalty'': if there is a difference in case (upper and lower case) between the TU and the segment to be translated, WFA can ignore this and show 100% similarity. But you can assign a penalty of between 1 and 5 points for the difference in case. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 1.

* ''Non literal penalty'': this penalty detects differences due to special characters such as dashes, quotation marks, apostrophes, punctuation and whitespace characters (non-breaking space, horizontal and vertical tabs, ...). There exist several codes for representing each of these special characters. WFA can ignore these and show 100% similarity; otherwise a penalty is calculated using the following method: every time a difference is encountered, it adds the value of the first parameter (0.25, 0.50 or 0.75), which by default is 0.50. The second parameter sets out what the minimum value of the penalty is (default is 1). Since the penalty is necessarily an integer, if the value of the penalty is 0.25 and there is only one in the segment to be translated, the minimum is not reached. Finally, the third parameter sets the maximum penalty to be assigned, even if the addition of all the differences of this rule exceeds that figure (10 by default). This rule is selected by default with a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 10.

* ''Tag penalty'': this rule works exactly the same way as the previous one, but applied to the tags (markers that represent the bits of code used to format the document <1>). This rule is selected by default with a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 10.

* ''Alignment user penalty'': the TUs found in a memory imported into WFA produced by an alignment tool and having the identifier "TALIGN!" may be assigned a penalty from 1 to 10. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 3. Please note, TUs from an alignment may not have the "TALIGN!" identifier.

* ''MT user penalty'': the TUs found in a memory imported into WFA produced by machine translation and having the identifier "MT!" may be penalised from 1 to 10. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 25. Please note, TUs from a machine translation may not have the "MT!" identifier.

* ''Multiple translation penalty'': In the case of a source segment with multiple 100% matches, i.e. several TUs having the same source segment but different translated segments, a penalty may be applied to warn of a possible choice between translations. This scenario is rare and no penalty is assigned by default.

* ''Attribute penalty'': attributes are identifiers that are associated with a particular TU at the time that it is recorded in the memory. There are five possible attributes: the first is fixed (it identifies the user who posted the TU), while the other four can be user defined. In general, translators use attribute no. 1 to define the subject of the text to be translated and the attribute no. 2 to define the client who owns the text. The other two attributes are free to be used for anything else. For example, if the proposed TU is from a text whose subject is "electronics", it will be penalised if the subject of the text to be translated is "medicine." In other words if the TU is 100% identical to the segment to be translated, it will be displayed with a percentage similarity of 98% if the penalty applied is 2 points.

The penalty can be a number from 1 to 5, valid for the four attributes. By default this rule is not active.

If you use a TM uploaded from Wordfast Classic or Pro, the existing attributes of the TU may be penalised.

=== Shortcuts tab ===

You can set the shortcuts you want to use.

[[File:wfasetup4.png]]

WFA shortcuts are not immutable. If some of them do not suit you, you can reassign them. To do this, click on the '''''upd''''' link of the shortcut you wish to change.

[[File:wfasetup5.png]]

In this example, corresponding to the first shortcut, you see the name of the command and a drop-down list. Choose '''None''' if you want to remove the shortcut or choose another from the list. Then click '''''Update''''' to confirm or '''''Cancel''''' to dismiss the dialog. Repeat for all the shortcuts that you want to change. The new keyboard shortcuts will be displayed.

The last four commands have no shortcuts; however, you can assign shortcuts to them if you wish.

If after modifying several shortcuts you want to return them to their original state, click '''''Restore default shortcuts'''''.

Finally, click '''''Save''''' settings to confirm any changes or '''''Cancel''''' to dismiss the dialog.

=== Segmentation tab ===
This tab defines the rules for segmentation.

[[File:Segmentation111.JPG]]

* ''Segmentation style'': this block determines how the segmentation will be performed. If you choose ''Wordfast /Trados segmentation'' (default) the standard end-of-segment markers are defined as follows: full stop, colon, question mark, exclamation mark and tab (Tab). You can add other characters as well as space (Space), non-breaking space (NBSP), carriage return (CR) and line feed (LF). You can add as markers: a number followed by an end of segment marker (A number Followed by ESM ends a segment – default), an end of segment marker not followed by a space (An ESM without a trailing space ends a segment) and an end of segment marker followed by a space followed by a lowercase letter (An ESM followed by a space followed by a lower-case letter ends a segment). Although you can change these markers, it is recommended to maintain them in such manner that if you share your translations and your memories with other translators, all will follow the same rule.

[[File:Warning.png]] Segmentation is performed at the time of uploading the document to WFA. You cannot therefore change the rules applying to that document during the course of its translation.

The other segmentation rules that you can choose are:
* ''Break segmentation'': segmentation is done according to the end of paragraph character (carriage return) or the tag for HTML files.
* ''Idiom segmentation'': segmentation follows the rules of the software program Idiom.
* ''SRX segmentation'': the segmentation is done by using a previously uploaded file. It follows the rules of the SRX standard, which has become a standard like TMX for formatting memories and TBX for formatting glossaries. In the case of SRX segmentation, abbreviations are also included.

* ''TM compatibility'': You must ensure the compatibility according to the memory you have uploaded or the subsequent use of your documents. By default, WFA's memory is compatible with that of Wordfast Classic and Pro (Assume Wordfast TM). If this is your choice, you can also specify if you have old projects made with Wordfast Classic or Pro (check Legacy TM created by old projects). You can also establish that the memory was created by Trados (Assume Trados TM), even adding that it was created by Trados and Word (TM created by Trados + Word); by Idiom (Assume Idiom TM) or by SDLX (Assume SDLX TM).

*''Abbreviations'': Abbreviations end with a full stop, which WFA then interprets as an end of segment marker. To avoid this, WFA allows you to create and manage a list of abbreviations. While WFA already has lists for some languages, others are empty – the user must provide the necessary information. The abbreviations are entered into the text box, one after another, without spaces and separated by a comma. Once updated, save your list by clicking on Save the language. Repeat for each language that you translate.

=== Pandora's box tab ===
This tab has many different settings. Some of this settings will open a new dialog.

[[File:wfasetup7.png]]

==== #1 PC, tablet and smartphone modes ====
Use this mode if you are using a mobile device. The segment toolbar is enlarged; local file access is disabled.

==== #2 Real time collaboration ====
Real time collaboration disables data caching. This forces the TM search before you open a segment, causing a response delay. Avoid using this mode unless sharing a TM and if the TU updates need to be shared immediately.

==== #3 Document file name convention ====
Customize your document name for download by adding a prefix and/or a suffix.

==== #4 Special characters insertion ====
Configure the 7 special characters insertion of the Edition tab.

==== #5 Configure online dictionaries ====
Configure URLs for 2 online search engines.

* Click "Add" to add a new dictionary.
* After filling the "Friendly name" and "Url" correctly you need to use "Test" to check it works fine.
* Use "Save" to add the dictionary to the list. Bear in mind that if the URL already exists it cannot be added.

If all worked fine, the list should have been updated and your dictionary available to be used.

The list does not use "Friendly name" to sort the dictionaries, so you need to check all the list to find the one you added.

In order to use one dictionary you need to select it from the list and save the settings.

==== #6 Multiple Ctrl+Alt+Down toggles placeable ====
Use this feature to toggle between copy the target term, copy the source term, or leave blank.

==== #7 Configure Auto-Suggest ====
Auto-suggest is activated at the '''General''' tab when clicking on [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab.

On this section of Pandora's Box is where you can '''configure which suggestions will Auto-suggest show'''.

[[File:AutoSuggest1.JPG]]

'''Auto-suggest can show different items''' such as: Glossary matches, tags, word from with a capital letter, numbers, file path, email addresses, URLs, chunks of Machine Translation, date and number conversion, text in parentheses (), text in braces {}, bracketed text [], word containing special character and unit conversion.

On the left there is a combo box to select the number of typed characters that will trigger auto-suggest to show up.

For '''date and number conversion''' there is a sub dialog, that can be opened by clicking on the [[File:Edit.png]] button on the left.

[[File:AutoSuggest2.JPG]]

Here you can set how dates and numbers will be converted and shown in the auto-suggested text.

For '''dates''' you can choose a different format and separator. For instance source ''2015.04.01'' could be converted to ''01/04/2015'' on target.

For '''numbers''' you can choose a different group and decimal separator. For instance source ''123.456,00'' could be converted to ''123 456.00'' on target.

==== #8 Configure Filters ====
Configure conversion of documents from their original format to the internal editor format.

For some files you can configure some parameters that will tell the filter what to do for some situations such as translate comments or sheet names.

You can make this configuration for: '''xls, xlsx, ppt, pptx, doc, docx, rtf, htm, html, mif, idml, xml (Text based files)'''.

[[File:Pandora9.JPG]]

On this section there are also 3 settings that will apply to any file.

* '''Editor format'''. To choose which type of '''bilingual file (TXML or TXLF)''' the filter should produce.[[File:Warning.png]] '''''The download bilingual file will be of the type used when the file was uploaded.''''' For example if the file was uploaded using TXML, the bilingual download will be TXML. A file cannot be uploaded using one type (TXML) and download the bilingual file of the other type (TXLF). The workaround is to change the type and upload the file again.

* '''Extract numbers'''. To define the filter action on source segments that contain only numbers.

** ''all'': Extracts all segments with only numbers for translation
** ''time_date_measure'': Extracts only segments with time and date
** ''none'': Does not extract any segments that contain only numbers

* '''Segmentation on break'''. To enable segmentation on line breaks.

==== #9 Configure double click to open/close a segment ====
Configure opening/closing actions on a segment by double clicking in the document panel. This is always active for mobile plain text mode.

[[File:Pandora101.png]]

==== #10 Configure TM Search ====
Set the timeout for searches. After the timeout, the search is cancelled and returns nothing. The default value is 4 seconds.

==== #11 Copy source when no TM match and no MT proposition ====
Copy source to target when no TM match and no MT proposition.

==== #12 Do not show empty paragraph line in Classic view ====
Do not copy MT proposition to target.

==== #13 Hide segment's IDs column on the Table view ====
Do not copy MT proposition to target.

==== #14 Custom Tab settings ====
Use this mode if you are using a mobile device. The segment toolbar is enlarged; local file access is disabled.

==== #15 Customize Segment Toolbar ====
Dialog to choose which buttons will be placed on Segment toolbar. Segment toolbar is enabled on General tab.

==== #16 Copy untranslatable to target automatically and open next segment ====
Define what will be considered an "Untranslatable segment" which will be copied to target automatically and open next segment

=== QA tab ===
Set here the criteria that will be used to conduct an audit of quality when doing a '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Transcheck|Transcheck]]'''

[[File:wfasetup8.png]]

There are several criteria that can be checked, some of which can also ''be checked while translating'' (by using the second checkbox column under '''While Translating''' title).

Here is a short description:

* '''Source & target lengths''': Compares the character count between the source and target segments. You can set the minimum and maximum % of allowed character count for the target segment.

* '''Empty target''': Checks for an empty target segment. This is always checked while translating.

* '''Numerical''': Checks that the numerical values between the source and target segments are correct.

* '''Placeable''': Checks if the tags are copied correctly to the target segments. This is always checked while translating.

* '''Forbidden chars''': Checks if the target segment includes forbidden characters. You can set the list of forbidden characters that should not be included in the target segment.

* '''Punctuations''': Checks for consistency in punctuation between source and target segments. You can set the punctuation marks that should not be included in the target segment. [[File:notice.png]] The transcheck punctuation only works on end of segmentation punctuation.

* '''Untranslatable''': Compares the source and target segments to check if the untranslatable content is consistent. You can set the untranslatable text that must be retained in the target segment.

* '''Copied source''': Checks for untranslated text when copied source option is used.

* '''Blacklists''': Checks if the target segment includes blacklisted terms. You can set blacklisted terms that should not be included in the target segment. [[File:notice.png]] The blacklisted term list must be a tab delimited file (bad term + tabulation + proposed term).

* '''Terminology''': Checks if all term translations from an active glossary are used in the target of a segment. You can enable or disable Ignore Case option.

* '''First word capitalization''': Checks if the first letter of the segment is capitalized.

* '''Edited exact match''': Checks if any exact match segments from the TM have been edited.

* '''Unedited fuzzy''': Checks if any fuzzy match segments from the TM have been left unedited.

* '''Source Consistency''': Checks consistency between source segments if the target is repeated.

* '''Target consistency''': Checks consistency between target segments if the source is repeated.

== Profile Configuration ==
Go to [[File:User profile.png]] '''''User Profile''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' menu to see information about your account and change some settings of your profile.

[[File:Profileconfig1.png]]

=== Change email ===
Use this option to change the email of your account.

[[File:Profileconfig2.png]]

=== Change password ===
Check the [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_change_my_password Wordfast Anywhere FAQ] for more information.

=== Delete account ===
Use this option to remove your account from Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:Profileconfig4.png]]

Wordfast Anywhere 6 Manual

2022-02-21T08:23:06Z

Remiandre: /* Create a New Project */

{{Languages}}
[[Category:Wordfast Anywhere]]

= Introduction =
Wordfast Anywhere (WFA) is the online version of the popular Wordfast computer assisted translation (CAT) program that provides much of the functionality of the Classic and Pro desktop versions. Instead of being installed as a program on the user’s computer, WFA is made accessible from Wordfast’s servers via a web browser, regardless of the operating system used (Windows, Mac, Linux, etc.). Every effort has been made to ensure that the user interface is as close as possible to the other Wordfast flavours: toolbars, icons, shortcuts and working methods. A Wordfast Classic or Pro user should be able to use WFA with almost zero assimilation time.

It is worth remarking that WFA is almost certainly the CAT program that integrates best with the popular Mac operating system. Unlike Java-based, cross-platform programs – including Wordfast Pro – that will run on the Mac but don’t integrate with system-wide tools such as the built in Dictionary, WFA will run in Mac-native browsers such as Safari, thus giving you access to the entire range of language and text handling tools that are built into the Mac OS environment.

[[File:WFA_pagina_5_new.jpg]]
[[File:WFA_pagina_6_new.jpg]]

With WFA you can translate a wide range of both editable (TXT, DOC, DOCX, RTF, XLS, PPT, ODT, HTML, TXML, MIF, INX, etc.) and non-editable (PDF, TIFF) documents. You can store up ten current documents in your workspace, deleting your finished translations to free up space and permit new documents to be uploaded.

You can also import the TMs (translation memories) of all the language pairs you work in. Your memories will progressively expand as and when you translate. They are stored securely and will not be shared or revealed without your authorisation. If you need a local copy, you can download your TM to your computer at any time.

As is the case with other Wordfast flavours, you can add terms to your glossary as you translate. You can also upload existing glossaries to your workspace, for all language pairs. Here again, your glossaries are secure and will not be shared or revealed unless you specifically invite a colleague. You can also download your glossary if you need a local copy.

The following instructions have been written for complete beginners. Having understood the above comments, a Wordfast Classic or Pro user should have no difficulty in using WFA intuitively.

Check the '''[[Wordfast Anywhere 6 Start Guide]]''' for a quick start.

Check our [https://www.freetm.com/jsp/terms.jsp Terms of use].

== How to use WFA ==
On Wordfast Anywhere every document belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a translation project.

So the first you need is a project. A project named "Project_1" is created by default, but you can create up to 3 projects.

A project needs a language pair. A default one is suggested but more can be added. Each language pair can have a TM and glossary assigned which will be used on several processes and also automatically assigned to the documents uploaded.

A project also needs a task. "Translate" is the one by default.

Once the project is created you can add the documents. Documents can be added to all language pairs or to specific ones. There is a maximum number of documents per project depending of the type of project.

Double-click a project to open it to see the content (documents grouped by language pairs).

Double-click a document to start/resume work.

[[File:notice.png]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rDhVYY02Cds Wordfast Anywhere 6 Basic Projects video]'''

= Login in to WFA account =
Check the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Login_in_to_WFA_account Login in to WFA account]''' section on the Start Guide.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you have not created an account yet, click on the '''''Create a new account''''' and follow the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#How_to_create_an_account instructions]'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you ever ''forget your password'', click on the '''''Forgot your password?''''' and follow the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Get_your_password_back instructions]'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you are having ''login problems'' check '''''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Cannot_log_in_to_Wordfast_Anywhere Cannot log in to Wordfast Anywhere]''''' and follow the instructions.

=User Interface =
The user interface is divided into several sections. A top menu with tabs and buttons, a main central panel that changes depending on where we are (project list, project content, document translation) and a bottom panel where information and messages are shown.

Once you are connected to WFA, the workspace appears.

This should look similar to the following screenshot (depending on the browser, operating system or device used to access WFA):

[[File:Newui6.PNG]]

The workspace can be modified at any point according to your requirements.
==Top Menu==
At the very top you can find the ''Top Menu'' which consists in '''two rows''': one for the different '''menus''' (tabs) and one for the '''buttons''' corresponding to the selected tab.

Use [[File:CollapseTop.png]] to hide the buttons. Use [[File:CollapseBottom.png]] to show the buttons.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a project or selecting/opening a document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a project is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when a project is selected from the project list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when more than one file is selected from the document list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus used for translation (Edit, view, translation, review and TM & Glossaries) are only visible when the document is opened. Those buttons keep working as always, just need to open the document.

===Wordfast Anywhere Menu===

This tab a miscellaneous of buttons concerning the Wordfast Anywhere project.

[[File:Wfatab6.PNG]]

* [[File:Logout16.png]]: Use it when you want to '''leave''' Wordfast Anywhere.
* [[File:User profile.png]]: Here you'll find your '''account information'''. You'll be able to change your ''Login'' email, the ''Security Question'', the ''Security Answer'' and delete your account.
* [[File:Preferences.png]]: Here is where you set the '''configuration''' of Wordfast Anywhere:''Font Size'', ''Machine translation'', ''TM rules'', ''Shortcuts'', ''Segmentation'', ''Transcheck'' rules...etc.
* [[File:Preferences16round.png]]: Global TM & glossary management (create, add, upload, merge, edit, download, delete... ), no more for assignment.
* [[File:WF Update16.png]]: This button will direct you to a site to '''align''' your files.
* [[File:help16.png]]: WFA Help:
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''start guide''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''PM start guide''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''FAQ''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''manual''' wiki page.
** If the previous wiki pages do not work, this is a pdf backup.
* [[File:Notice.png]]: There are 4 icons corresponding to different types of '''notifications''' ([[File:Warning.png]] ONLY displayed when there are notifications):
** Webmaster Info: notifications coming from Wordfast Anywhere administration (p.e stopping the server for a publication).
** Background Info: notifications about ''Background'' processes (p.e. Analyze, Spellcheck...etc).
** System Info: notifications from the system (p.e. an unsupported browser).
** TM Server Info: notifications realted to the TM Server (p.e. TM server is disconnected).

===Project Menu===
This tab has the tools concerning a project.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when a project is selected on the project list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a project is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available for standard projects.

No project selected on the project list.

[[File:ProjecttabAll.PNG]]

This are the basic buttons:

* [[File:Pm new project 16.png]]: '''New''' use it to create a project.
* [[File:Pm open project 16.png]]: '''Open''' the selected project from the project list.
* [[File:Analyze Project16.png]]: '''Analyze''' all the documents of the project. A report is generated.
* [[File:Pm delete project 16.png]]: '''Delete''' the selected project.
* [[File:Pm close project 16.png]]: '''Close''' an opened project.
* [[File:Pm import project 16.png]]: '''Import''' a .glp file.
* [[File:Pm export project 16.png]]: '''Export''' a project into a .glp file.
* [[File:Linguist16.png]]: Use it to '''Manage''' the team of '''linguists'''.

To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

===File Tab===
This tab has the tools concerning a file.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be available when more than one file is selected from the list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be also available when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a document is opened.

[[File:FiletabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:Translate File16.png]]: '''Open''' the selected file from the list.
* [[File:About wordfast16.png]]: Open the document with '''Wordfast Pro Online'''. [[File:Warning.png]] The use of Wordfast Pro Online will be discontinued on December 31, 2021.
* [[File:Close16.png]]: '''Close''' an opened file.
* [[File:Save16.png]]: Here you'll find all the '''Download''' options for a file (p.e. translated version, bilingual versions, TXML, unformatted text, Off-line Report Tool, TM from doc segments).
* [[File:Preferences16round.png]]: With this button you'll change the '''TM & Glossary''' configuration for the document.
* [[File:Analyze Project16.png]]: '''Analyze''' the selected document/s. A report is generated.
* [[File:Statistics16.png]]: Get the '''Statistics''' of the document.
* [[File:Modify Project16.png]]: Get information about the file.
* [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]]: '''Pre-translate''' the selected document/s.
* [[File:Mergetms16.png]]: Use this button to '''merge''' the document with a '''TXML''' file.
* [[File:mergetms16_menu.png]]: Use this button to '''merge''' the document with an imported '''OFRT''' file.
* [[File:Split.png]] [[File:Join.png]]: '''Split''' the document in parts. '''Join''' the parts together again.
* [[File:Share.png]] [[File:Revoke.png]]: '''Share''' the document with an other Wordfast Anywhere user. '''Revoke''' will finish the share.
* [[File:Translate File16.png]]: '''Fuzzy Open''' the file without full matches.
* [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]]: '''Extract''' the '''frequent''' segments.
* [[File:Edit16.png]]: '''Rename''' the file.

===Edit Tab===

This tab is a translation tool extension.

[[File:Warning.png]] This buttons will be available when the document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be available when a TM is being edited.

[[File:EdittabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:FindReplace.png]]: Use it to '''Find & Replace''' text but also to go to a particular segment or get a list of segments ''untranslated'', ''provisional'', with ''notes'' or with ''tag differences''.
* [[File:EditSource16.png]]: '''Edit''' the source segment.
* [[File:Edit_Note16.png]]: Create, edit or remove a '''Note''' on a segment.
* [[File:Insert_c.png]]: '''Insert special characters'''. 7 different characters can be defined on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => '''''Setup''''' button > '''''Pandora's box'''''
* [[File:Delete_alltargetseg.png]]: '''Delete''' '''tags''' in the document. This is only available when editing a TM and has 2 options: Delete all target tags or delete all document tags.
* [[File:delete_revisions.png]]: '''Delete''' the segment '''history'''.
* [[File:Delete_alltargetseg.png]]: '''Delete''' all '''target''' segments of the document.
* [[File:caseChanger.png]]: Toggle between lowercase, uppercase, and capitalization..

===View Tab===

In this tab you'll find the buttons to move through the document and show or hide the different panels.

[[File:ViewtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:PanelOutline.png]]: Show or hide '''Outline'''.
* [[File:panelTm.png]]: Show or hide '''TM''' panel.
* [[File:panelGlo.png]]: Show or hide '''Glossary''' panel.
* [[File:MovePrevScreen.png]]: Go to '''Previous Block'''.
* [[File:MoveNextScreen.png]]: Go to '''Next Block'''.
* [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]]: Toggle between the different document layout: Classic, Horizontal and Vertical.
* [[File:move_prev_seg.png]]: Go to '''Previous segment'''.
* [[File:move_next_seg.png]]: Go to '''Next segment'''.
* [[File:move_first_seg_screen.png]]: Go to '''First segment''' of '''Block'''.
* [[File:move_last_seg_screen.png]]: Go to '''Last segment''' of '''Block'''.
* [[File:move_first_seg_doc.png]]: Go to '''First segment''' of '''document'''.
* [[File:move_last_seg_doc.png]]: Go to '''Last segment''' of '''document'''.

===Translation Tab===

Find here all the tools to perform a translation

[[File:TranslationtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:StartNext.png]]: '''Start translation''' or open next segment.
* [[File:Previous.png]]: Open previous segment.
* [[File:CloseSave.png]]: '''Close and commit''' to the TM.
* [[File:Close retain.png]]: '''Close and retain''' the segment as provisional but not commit to the TM
* [[File:close.png]]: '''Close segment'''.
* [[File:close_restore.png]]: '''Close and delete''' target content.
* [[File:mark.png]]: Mark segment as '''provisional'''.
* [[File:CopySource.png]]: '''Copy source''' to target.
* [[File:Expand_Segment16.png]]: '''Expand''' segment.
* [[File:ShrinkSeg.png]]: '''Shrink''' segment.
* [[File:TranslateUntilFuzzy.png]]: '''Translate''' document '''until a fuzzy''' match.
* [[File:Cleanup_Project16.png]]: Toggle between Empty target, Remove tags and Restore.
* [[File:autopropagate.png]]: '''Auto propagate''' segment changes through all the document.
* [[File:dropdown.png]]: Toggle placeable.
* [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]]: Go to '''Next Placeable'''.
* [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]]: '''Copy Placeable'''.
* [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]]: Go to '''Previous Placeable'''.
* [[File:increase_target.png]]: Increase target segment height.
* [[File:Mic.png]]: Use '''Web Speech''' to dictate the target content. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY available for Chrome. Currently disabled due to browser security.'''

===Review Tab===

This tab has the tools to review the document.

[[File:ReviewtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:Preview16.png]]: '''Preview''' a PDF version of the document.
* [[File:Transcheck16.png]]: Do a '''quality control''' on the document
* [[File:Spellcheck16.png]]: '''Spellcheck''' the document

===TMs and Glossaries Tab===

Tab with the tools related to TM and glossaries actions.

[[File:TmglotabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]]: Concordance search
* [[File:GlossarySearch.png]]: Glossary Search
* [[File:TermEdit.png]]: Term edition.
* [[File:CopyTU.png]]: Copy TU.
* [[File:DeleteTU.png]]: Delete TU.
* [[File:Add File To Project16.png]]: Add TU.
* [[File:force_tm_addtu.png]]: Update TU.
* [[File:force_tm.png]]: Force TM search.
* [[File:force_mt.png]]: Force Machine Translation search.
* [[File:force_term.png]]: Force Glossary search.
* [[File:update_tm_doc.png]]: Update TM with document content.
* [[File:iSearch.png]]: Lookup in online dictionary.

===Help Tab===

Help section is on the '''Wordfast Anywhere Menu'''.

===Custom Tab===
In this tab you can add up to 15 buttons of your choice, so you can have together in one tab your most used buttons.
Selection any of the translation menus buttons (Edit, view, translation, review and TM & Glossaries) and the WFA setup and TM&Glossary set up.

[[File:custom_tab.png]]

To do so you must go to [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab. Then go to '''Pandora Box''' tab and go to ''Custom Tab settings'', where you will find all the buttons that can be added to the '''Custom''' tab

[[File:custom_tab2.png]]

==Panels==

===Project List Panel===
This panel shows the list of projects.

[[File:Projectlistpanel.png]]

Projects will be listed here. '''Double click on one project''' or select it and use [[File:Pm open project 16.png]]'''Open''' from the top menu bar to open the project.

===Project content Panel===
When opening a project, the ''Content Panel'' area will show the content of the project, the list of documents in the project.

[[File:ProjectContentpanel.png]]

Main areas are:

* '''Header row (1)''': In this row you'll fine the headers of the columns. The columns are: Languages/file (1), Vol. (1C) and the columns for the different jobs will follow (1D). This row will change the background color according to the project status: blue for ''In preparation'', orange for ''In progress'' and green for ''completed''. Use the '''Add files''' button (1A) to add files to all language pairs and use '''dashboard''' button (1B) to see an estimation of cost of the project.
* '''Project setup (2)'''Click on the ''project name'' or icon next to it to open the project setup dialog.
* '''Language Row (3)''': In this row several icons will be shown depending on the file selection to perform actions such as add files to the language pair (3A), delete selected files (3B) or assign linguist to jobs (3C). Use the '''remove language pair''' icon (3D) to delete the language pair ([[File:Warning.png]] all the documents inside will be permanently deleted).
* '''Note (4)''' this icon allows to add a note to the document.
* '''TM & glossaries (5)''' This are the TMs and glossaries assigned to the document, mouse-over to see extra information. This TM and glossary assignment will be used for the tasks.
* On the '''Status bar''' you'll find information about the project.
* Clicking on the file name will open the document. And clicking on each of the other cell text or icon will open the edit dialog for that cell.

===Translation Panels===
When a document is opened for translation, the screen is divided in 4 different panels.

[[File:Panels.png]]

====Outline====
Show/Hide Outline panel using '''''View''''' tab => '''''Show/hide Outline''''' [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button

The outline displays all the segments of the document.
The available status are:
* A white box indicates that the segment is not translated
* A green box indicates a translated segment
* A yellow box indicates a provisional segment
* An 'i' after segment id indicates a segment having a note
* The black thick border on the box indicates the current document selected on document panel
* The pink border on the box indicates the visible segments in the document panel

You can jump and open any segment of the document by clicking on its number.
If the segment is not visible on the document panel (blue border instead of pink), the document panel will be refreshed.

Once a segment is opened you can use
'''''Edit''''' tab => '''''Edit Note''''' [[File:Edit_Note16.png]] button to create/delete a note and also '''''Translation ''''' tab => '''''Provisional''''' [[File:mark.png]] button to mark/unmark a provisional segment.

====TM Panel====
This panel shows the matches from TM or MT for the current segment.

You can show or hide this panel using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:panelTm.png]] button.

====Glossary Panel====
This panel shows the matching terms for the current segment.

You can show or hide this panel using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:panelGlo.png]] button.

====Document Panel====

When a document is opened, it shows the segments content.

Wordfast Anywhere do not load the entire document in the editor if there are many segments.

While translating the segments are added one by one to the editor, but if you can move inside the document to see any part you want.

To do so, you can use:
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:MovePrevScreen.png]] button to go to '''Previous Block'''.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:MoveNextScreen.png]] button to go to '''Next Block'''.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button to show '''Outline''' and then jump and open any segment of the document by clicking on its number. More information [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline here]

This is how an opened document looks like:

[[File:document_panel_doc.png]]

=====Document Layout=====
Using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] button you can change the document layout, which is the way segments are shown on Document Panel. The three possible views are:

'''''Classical'''''

[[File:ClassicalLayout.png]]

'''''Horizontal'''''

[[File:HorizontalLayout.png]]

'''''Vertical'''''

[[File:VerticalLayout.png]]

===Status Panel===
Always present at the bottom. Here you can find several information about the project, file, TM, display, translation process. Also some messages will be showed here.

==Other features==

===Show/Hide Top Menu Buttons ===
Buttons on the top menu can be hidden.

Use [[File:CollapseTop.png]] to hide the buttons. Use [[File:CollapseBottom.png]] to show the buttons.

= Project Operations =
A new Project menu bar has been added after Wordfast Anywhere menu. Yes! Project Management (PM) has been introduced to WFA.

* * A project named "Project_1" is created by default. If you had an account before version 6, it will contain all the files from the previous version grouped by language pair.
* Every document now belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a project.
* Double-click a project to open it to see the content (documents grouped by language pairs).
* Double-click a document to start/resume work.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a project.

[[File:notice.png]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rDhVYY02Cds Wordfast Anywhere 6 Basic Projects video]'''

== Create a New Project ==
On the Project tab click on [[File:Pm new project 16.png]]'''New''' to create a new project. This will open the ''Project Seup'' window where the settings for the project are done.

[[File:Warning.png]] Up to 3 projects can be stored at any given time.

To access the project setup once the project has been created, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

[[File:Createproject.PNG]]
[[File:Createproject1.PNG]]
[[File:Createproject2.PNG]]

The ''Project Setup'' window has two sections that need to be set in order to create the project. Setting one section opens the next one.

;1.General
: On this section general information of the project is set. This includes:
# Project name (Compulsory)
# Description (optional)
# Project type. Defines the type of the project:
#* Standard: For translators working alone.
#* Advanced: For Project Managers (PMs) managing large, multi-language projects.
# Project status (for advanced type). Defines the status of the project:
#* In preparation (blue): When project is being prepared (files, TMs and glossaries and linguist being added)
#* In progress (orange): This marks the start of the project. Files are shared with the linguist at this point.
#* Completed (green): The project is finished.
# Currency(optional). It will be used to calculate the project cost.
# Decimals(optional). When this checkbox is marked the project estimated cost will show numbers with decimals.
# Auto(optional). By default Project Manager will be responsible of pushing files to the next job when completion is done. Mark this checkbox to automatically sent files to the next job upon completion.
;2.Language Pairs and tasks
: On this section language pairs and tasks are added.
* Use the '''+''' next to the language pair header to add a new language pair. This will open the language selection dialog and then the TM and glossaries dialog to assign them to the language pair.
* Use the '''+''' at the end of the header row to add new tasks. Only 10 tasks can be added.
* A row is shown for each language pair where the default word rate (left box) and speed rate (right box) for each task can be set.
* Use the '''-''' next to the language pair to remove it. [[File:Warning.png]] Associated files and shares will be revoked.
* Use the '''-''' next to the task name to remove it. [[File:Warning.png]] Associated files and shares will be revoked.

Once all compulsory fields are set, click on '''Save project''' to save the project and go to the ''Project Content panel''.

[[File:Warning.png]] It is possible to move from standard to advanced but opposite is only possible if the advanced project has only one task.

== Modify Project Setup ==
To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

Use this to change any of the project settings defined on the project creation.

[[File:Warning.png]] It is possible to move from standard to advanced but opposite is only possible if the advanced project has only one task.

It is the same than for creating a project, so check the section above to know about the different parts and settings.

== Setting up language pair, Translation Memories and glossaries ==
Languages are added/removed from the ''Project Setup'' dialog.

To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

Check ''Create Project'' section above to know about it.

=== Language pair with its associated TMs and glossaries set in the project setup ===

To access the project setup dialog, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

[[File:Project_setup.png]]

Click on the language pair '''''+''''' button.

[[File:Langpair_dialog.png]]

Enter the languages and save, the TMs and glossaries dialog opens.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair.png]]

* If no TM and glossary exists for the language pair, a new dialog will propose you to create them. Save and wait they are listed.
* You can create and choose one or more TMs and glossaries. They are selected by checking the row in the '''''Active''''' column.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair_2.png]]

Finally save the TMs and glossaries selection by clicking on the '''''Save''''' button. The new language pair is now in the project setup and one icon is displayed for each TM and glossary.

[[File:Project_setup_2.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] The TMS and glossaries can be updated for a language pair by clicking on the icons. But if documents already exists for that language pair, they will not be affected by this change, only new documents added after the update.

=== TMs and glossaries set individually for a document ===
This selection for a document is overwriting the Language pair selection.
In the project content select a document by checking it and then click on the '''''TMs and glossaries''''' button [[File:Preferences16round.png]] of the '''''File''''' menu.

[[File:Project_content_3.png]]

The same TMs and glossaries dialog opens.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair_3.png]]

Saving will update only the TMs and glossaries for the selected document. A control can done hovering the TM icon.

[[File:Project_content_2.png]]

== Add/Remove Files ==
From the '''Project Content Panel''' there are two ways to add files to a project.

* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the header will add the files to all the languages in the project.
* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the language row. This will add the files only to that language.

[[File:Pmaddfiles.PNG]]

To remove a file, first use the checkbox to select it and then use the [[File:Remove16.png]] icon on the language row.

[[File:Pmdeletefile.PNG]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Associated shares will be revoked.

Several files can be selected to be removed at the same time.

== Project dashboard ==
Using the [[File:Pm_cost_16.png]] icon on the header will show the estimated cost of the project. Click on the icon again to hide costs.

[[File:Pmdashboard.PNG]]

== Advanced Features ==
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

Advanced projects have some extra features to manage the files.

=== Task TM ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

Click on the TM icon on the file column to set how the TM will be used on the tasks.

[[File:PmaddtmPNG.PNG]]

There are different options for the TM use:
*'''''Share TM'''''
**The selected TM will be shared with linguists.
**This is the best option to use.
**Translator will have exact and fuzzy matches.
**Translator can use concordance.
*'''''Create Project TM'''''
**The selected TM will NOT be shared.
**It will be used to create a temporary project TM with the matches from the file/s
**The temporary project TM will be shared.
*'''''Pretranslate'''''
**The selected TM will NOT be shared.
**It will be used to pretransalte the document/s.
**Only one TU match (the highest) per segment will be available to the translator.
**Concordance cannot be used.
**Concordance will only be used in this temporary TM

[[File:Warning.png]] Once a task has started it is not possible to change this assignment.

To change the TM assigned click on the same icon and change the TM selection by marking the ''active'' checkbox for the TMs you want to use.
To unassign the TMs clean all the ''active'' checkboxes.

=== Task Glossaries ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

To assign glossaries to tasks follow the instructions for TMs, but using the ''active'' checkboxes on the glossaries side of the dialog.

=== Manage Linguists ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

The Manage Linguist window can be opened by using the [[File:Linguist16.png]] icon on the '''Project''' tab or the '''Manage linguists''' buttons on the ''Assign Job'' window.

This allows the PM to create a team of linguists that will be used on the project jobs.

The same linguist can be used in several languages and roles.

[[File:Pmlinguist1.PNG]]

Main areas are:

* '''Add new linguist to a new language pair (1)''': Use [[File:Pm_linguist_add_16.png]] icon to add a new linguist to the team for a new language pair.
* '''Add or remove a linguist from a language pair (2)''': Use [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] icon to add a linguist to a language pair and use [[File:Pm_collapse_16.png]] icon to remove it.
* '''Linguist task grid (3)''': In this grid, each cell shows the RATE-SPEED-SCORE settings for a linguist. The grid has 4 columns, one for each role: Translator (TR), Proofreader (PR), Revise (RE) and QA. In addition '''dark values mean that linguist has been marked as "able" to do that role'''. Grey values indicate that linguist is not marked as "able" to do that role. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''

==== New Linguist ====
Use [[File:Pm_linguist_add_16.png]] or [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] to add a new linguist.

[[File:Pmlinguistnew.PNG]]

Introduce the following information to add a linguist.

* '''Email''': It must be the email of the linguist WFA account.
* '''Initials''': Short 4 character nickname for the linguist.
* '''Ctry''': Country of the linguist.
* '''Comment''': Some words about the linguist.
* '''Source language''' and '''target language''' that the linguist can work with.
* Role performance. There are 4 default roles a linguist can do on project tasks.
** Mark the '''checkbox''' if the linguist is able to do the role. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''
** '''Rate''': Linguist minim rate. Rate is measured in import per word. The project currency will be user with the import. For example 0.5 Eur per word.
** '''Speed''': Linguist speed rate (words/day). For example 3,000 words/day.
** '''Score''': Linguist 1 to 5 ''star'' score.

=== Assign Job ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''

Use the [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] icon in the language row under the '''job name''' column to assign a job to a linguist for the checkbox marked files.

[[File:Pmaddtask.PNG]]

On the assign job dialog:
* Choose a linguist from the list to whom the job will be assigned. [[File:Warning.png]] The file will be shared with the linguist when the project is set as 'In progress'. The rate and job amount from the linguist will be set for the task.
* To override the linguist rate or job amount, a particular rate or job amount for the job can be set using the input field under the column header. [[File:Warning.png]] Bear in mind that both are related so changing one will update the other.
* A '''''Deadline''''' can be set on the input field under '''''Duration'''''.
* Fill the '''''Note''''' text box to send extra information to the linguist.
* Use '''''Linguist cannot download the shared file''''' to not allow the linguist to download the file.
* Click on '''''Manage linguists''''' to open the Manage Linguist window to add/edit/remove linguists.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' linguists marked as ''able'' to do a role will be listed.

Use the [[File:Pm_collapse_16.png]] icon in the language row under the '''job name''' column to unassign a linguist from a job for the checkbox marked files. [[File:Warning.png]] Shares will be revoked.

[[File:Pmdeletetask.PNG]]

=== Move file to next Task ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

If '''Auto''' tasking is not set on the ''Project Properties'' window, when a task is finished (file has been revoked by the linguist), PM has to manually move it to the next task which will share the file with the linguist assigned to that task.

To do so, click on the double arrow on the finished task.

[[File:Pmmoveon.PNG]]

=== Workflow ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

The project workflow should be:
# PM creates a project, sets languages, sets jobs (Project setup).
# PM adds files to the project and prepares them (i.e splitting).
# PM sets how the TMs and glossaries assigned to the document will be use on the tasks as Share TM, Create project TM or to pre-translate.
# PM prepares the team of linguists.
# PM assign a linguist to each file task. Multiple file selection for batch assign is possible.
# When PM sets the project status to ''In progress'' files that has been assigned a TM and a task will be shared to the corresponding linguist.
# Linguist works on the file. When his work is finished, revokes the file. This finishes the share.
# Once the file is revoked, the PM has to manually move it to the next task. This is done automatically if Auto tasking is selected on Project Setup.
# When all tasks are finished project is finished. PM can change the status of the project to ''Completed''.

=== Purchase Order ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

You can define a Purchase Order template with project, document and task information that will be send to the linguists when the file is shared.

A copy of the email send to the linguist is BCC to the project owner.

==== Purchase Order template ====
Go to [[File:User profile.png]] '''''User Profile''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab to see information about your account. On the ''PM'' tab you can edit the default template.

[[File:Po1.PNG]]

On this template you put the information you want to appear on the Purchase Order.

You can use some '''dynamic parameters''' to add project, document and task information. Use this parameters to build the Purchase Order.
Parameters will be substituted by project, document and task corresponding values or a predefined text.

{| class="wikitable"
|+Here is the list which you can also check them using the [[File:Pm info 16.png]] icon.
|-
|{purchase_order_number}
|Include a number for the purchase order.
|-
|{project_name}
|Project name.
|-
|{task_name}
|Task name.
|-
|{document_name}
|Document name.
|-
|{document_download}
|If linguist can download the document the text '(The document cannot be downloaded.)' will be added to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{document_volume}
|Document number of words.
|-
|{job_note}
|Job note
|-
|{job_rate}
|Job rate
|-
|{job_total}
|Job total cost
|-
|{job_deadline}
|Job deadline in the format 29/12/2021 15:00 GMT+02:00 and the remaining time.
|-
|{document_tmglo}
|If there are TMs or glossaries in the share the text 'For the duration of this job # Translation Memories and # Glossaries have been temporarily shared with you.' will be added to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{document_use}
|Add the text 'To work on this document, log into your Wordfast Anywhere account. If you are already logged, refresh the project list by closing all the projects.' to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{my_full_name}
|Full name from 'User profile'.
|-
|{my_professional_info}
|Professional information from 'User profile'.
|}

==== Purchase Order preview ====
On the '''assign job dialog''' you will see a preview of the Purchase Order.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of the dynamic parameters will be updated when changing the selections on the dialog, others might require the job to be saved and others will be updated when the Purchase Order is send.

[[File:Po2.PNG]]

==== Purchase Order batch send ====
You can send the Purchase Orders for all the saved jobs at any moment using the '''Send POs''' button on the ''Project Setup'' dialog

[[File:Warning.png]] Purchase Order will also be send when the file is shared.

= File Operations =
[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a document.

=== Upload ===
To translate your document, you must first upload it to WFA.

[[File:warning.png]] There is a file size limit of 20 Mb.

From the '''Project Content Panel''' there are two ways to add files to a project.

* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the header will add the files to all the languages in the project.
* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the language row. This will add the files only to that language.

[[File:Pmaddfiles.PNG]]

The following window will be displayed:

[[File:Upload_doc.png]]

There are several ways to upload a document
* '''From local file''': Use '''''Browse...''''' to navigate through the directories on your computer and locate the document to be uploaded.
* '''From URL''': This option allows you to upload a file that is located on an Internet server by entering the address (URL) into the field. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Google Drive''': Choose a file from your Google Drive to be uploaded. You'll be asked to allow access rights to WFA before choosing the file. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Dropbox''': Choose a file from your Dropbox to be uploaded. You'll be asked to allow access rights to WFA before choosing the file. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Clipboard''': Paste the text to be uploaded into the text area. A text file will be created with the text.

At the bottom of the window click on '''''View allowed formats''''' to check the allowed formats:

Finally click on:
* '''''Upload''''': to only upload the file, which will be listed on the Document Management.
* '''''Upload and Open''''': to upload and open the document, which will be displayed in the document panel.

[[File:warning.png]] Depending on the size of the file, this may take some time. Please be patient.

Upload can also be done by using drag and drop area.

For some file formats you can configure some filter behaviors when uploading the file on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters|Configure Filters]]''' in ''Pandora's Box #8''. This is important for '''Text based files (xml, xsl)''' where a rules file (.properties) is needed.

=== Open ===
To open a document, first select it from the list of documents. There are 2 options on '''[[{{PAGENAME}}#File Tab|File tab]]''':

* '''''Open''''' button [[File:Translate_File16.png]]: will open a document and show all the segments
* '''''Fuzzy Open''''' button [[File:Translate_File16.png]]: will open a document, but only segments with a score lower than 100.

=== Segmentation ===
In order to be translated with a CAT tool, a document is divided into translation units (TUs), also known as segments. This process is called segmentation. A segment is a text string that ends with a terminator segment, usually the period (.), colon (:), question mark (?), or exclamation mark (!) and also a paragraph or end of cell mark, a page break or a tab.

The advantage of segmentation is that the translation units are presented to you one by one, without any danger of missing one. These segments form the basis for the TUs that are saved in the TM, consisting of the source segment (to translate) and the target segment (translated).

To configure segmentation go to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Segmentation_tab| Segmentation tab]]''' on the WFA settings.

=== Review ===
Once translated, the text should be revised. Here are some methods:
* Download the translated document immediately to view it in your favourite word processor.
* Download it in an offline review format. See '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Offline_Review_Tool|Offline Review Tool (OFRT)]]'''.
* Revise it in WFA using '''Trancheck''', '''Spellcheck''' and '''Preview''' tools. See below.
* If you are using the Classic mode for the document Layout (See the '''''Doc Layout''''' button [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] on '''''View''''' tab) , you can toggle the display between the bilingual document, the original document and the translated document, use the shortcut '''Ctrl+,''' (Ctrl+comma). A different display mode is presented with each iteration. To confirm what you see in front of you, check the indicator on the status bar: bilingual document (Bilingual), original document (Source) or translated document (Target). You can also click on the indicator to change it. Please note this action does not alter the document in any way. It only changes the way that it is displayed in a way that is more convenient for the task you are currently engaged in.

==== Transcheck ====
Click on the '''''Transchek''''' button [[File:Transcheck16.png]] of the '''''Review''''' tab. Transcheck provides the means to check translated content for missing tags, empty targets, numbers, untranslated segments, and terminology.

[[File:Transcheck.png]]

Click on the '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#QA_tab|Set the criteria]]''' link to go to the '''Setup''' and configure them.

Click on the '''''Check''''' button to get the result.

Click on the '''''Move next''''' button to move in the document panel to the first segment in the result list. Click again to move to next segment and so on.

==== Spellcheck ====

Click on the '''''Spellcheck'''' button [[File:Spellcheck16.png]] of the '''''View''''' tab and choose again '''Spellcheck''' in the list of choice. Spellcheck is a good practice to ensure high quality as it flags words in a document that may not be spelled correctly. The Spellcheck is done immediately then you'll get the following report with the results.

[[File:Spellcheck.png]]

Click on the '''''Move''''' button to move in the document panel to the first segment in the result list. Click again to move to next segment and so on.

==== Preview ====
Click on the '''''Preview''''' butonn [[File:Preview16.png]] of the '''''View''''' tab . It can be done at any stage of completion to get a PDF file displayed in a pop-up window with the translated document.

[[File:Preview_1.png]]
[[File:Preview_2.png]]

=== Download ===

[[File:Warning.png]] For '''download issues''', please check this [https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_fix_a_document_when_download_failed.3F link]

When the translation is finally complete, you must download the final document in order to be able to deliver it. To do this, click on [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab. A dialog with all the download options will be shown.

[[File:Donwload_all.jpg]]

Here is a short description of each option:

* '''Translated document/s''': Click to download the translated file. It will be the translated version of the source document in the same file type.

* '''Bilingual''': Click to download the TXLF (or TXML) file from the document. [[File:Warning.png]] '''''The download bilingual file will be of the type used when the file was uploaded.''''' For example if the file was uploaded using TXML, the bilingual download will be TXML. A file cannot be uploaded using one type (TXML) and download the bilingual file of the other type (TXLF). The workaround is to change the type and upload the file again. [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters More information]

* '''Offline review export''': Click to download an Offline Review file (.doc).

* '''Bilingual DOC without formatting''': Click to download bilingual for MS Word without placeholders (*.doc).

* '''Unformatted text''': Click to download unformatted Text (*.txt).

* '''Notes report''': Click to download a report with the document notes.

* '''TM from document/s''': Click to download a TM with document's content (.txml).

* '''Backup workspace''': Click to download a backup of current document + TM + glossary.

* '''Package''': Click to download a WFP package file (.glp) containing documents, memories, glossaries....etc. More information [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Package here]

* '''Filtered bilingual''': Open an advanced filtering dialog to choose segments to be downloaded.

Clicking '''OK''' will take the next dialog.

You may receive this message if you have not yet fully translated the document:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

This is purely an advisory message, warning you if you have forgotten to translate a segment or if there are provisional segments or notes. However it is quite possible that this is your intention: sometimes there are segments that should not be translated.

You can find out at any time if you have completed the translation, or how many segments remain to be translated, by using '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''

If your file is fully translated or you clicked '''OK''' on this warning dialog, a dialog where you can choose the way to download the file will open.

This can have different extra options depending the type of download you have chosen on the first dialog.

[[File:DownloadOptions2.png]]

For downloading the translated file, you have the option to add a second document in PDF format to the downloading of the document in its original format. To add the PDF-formatted document, tick the Add PDF file box. This may take some time, so please wait.

[[File:DownloadOptions2a.png]]

For downloading the TXML file, you have the options to copy the source content in case target segment is empty and not use language variants.

You can cancel the download by clicking Cancel or continue by clicking OK.
You can verify that this operation is taking place: a series of small blue rectangles will display the progress in the status bar.

There are some cases when you will get a compressed ZIP file instead of the original format. Check [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#Why_do_I_get_a_zip_file_when_downloading.3F here] the reasons.

If you have requested the PDF file, both files – the original and the PDF – will be downloaded together and compressed together in ZIP format (*. zip).

There are several ways to download a file:

* '''Download file''': After you click on the OK button, Wordfast Anywhere prepares the data transfer and then sends it to your browser. The browser will then inform you that it has received the data according to its specific mode of operation. In some cases, a dialog box will pop up allowing you specify where to save the file; however, this depends on the particular browser you use. If nothing happens, check your browser’s downloads settings and / or repeat the process.
* '''Send file to email''': Send the downloaded file by email.
* '''Create file URL''': Create a url to the downloaded file. To get the file copy-paste the url in your browser to start the download. The file will be available at that location for 3 days.
* '''Google Drive''': Send the downloaded file to your Google Drive account.
* '''Dropbox''': Send the downloaded file to your Dropbox account.

[[File:Warning.png]] For '''download issues''', please check this [https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_fix_a_document_when_download_failed.3F link]

=== Delete ===
[[File:Warning.png]] Remember this can '''NOT''' be undone, so it is recommended to download the file first.

To remove a file, first use the checkbox to select it and then use the [[File:Remove16.png]] icon on the language row.

[[File:Pmdeletefile.PNG]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Associated shares will be revoked.

Several files can be selected to be removed at the same time.

[[File:notice.png]] In case you accidentally delete a file, you can recover it by uploading again and using the same TM to pre-translate it.

=== Package ===
Project files (*.glp) are managed with the [[File:Pm import project 16.png]] '''Import''' and [[File:Pm export project 16.png]] '''Export''' buttons in the Project menu.

[[File:Warning.png]] The project file (*.glp) is limited to one source language while a Wordfast Anywhere project can have many, in consequence, package export is done by source language.

[[File:Warning.png]]There is an issue importing packages coming from PD. If you cannot import the .glp file, please ask to receive the bilingual files (txml/txlf) and the url for the TM/glossary.

==== Upload ====

Upload must be done using '''''Project''''' menu => '''''Import''''' [[File:Pm import project 16.png]] button.

Once you have selected you local file, click '''Upload'''. A new dialog with the package information and upload options will be shown.

[[File:UploadPkg.JPG]]

* '''Package Information''' section shows package name, who and when created the package and which language pairs contain.
* '''Package content''' section shows the bilingual files on the package. The files with the check box marked will be uploaded. '''On the right''' there are two drop-down lists to add a TM and glossary to the file which can came from the package if WFA can handle them or from your list on WFA (Information about them can be found on the Resources section).
* '''Resources''' section shows a list of TMs and glossaries and source files.

Finally there are two options for the upload.
* '''Create new folder''': by default files will be added to the root folder, you can use this option to upload the package files in a new folder.
* If the package contains source files a drop-down list will be shown to choose between '''Export back later''' to upload just the bilingual files and '''Generate final files on WFA''' to upload source files and merge them with the corresponding bilingual file in the package.

Once the package has been successfully uploaded, an HTML report is created.

[[File:Warning.png]] A new project is created with the content of the package.

==== Download ====

[[File:Warning.png]] The project file (*.glp) is limited to one source language while a Wordfast Anywhere project can have many, in consequence, package export is done by source language.

Download must be done using '''''Project''''' menu => '''''Export''''' [[File:Pm export project 16.png]] button.

[[File:DownloadPkg.JPG]]

* '''Package Information''': Here you can choose to download an existing package or create a new one, source and target languages. Multiple target language can be chosen if the package had them when it was uploaded.
* '''Package content''': After clicking '''Find Files''' a list of available files, TMs and glossaries is shown. The files with the check box marked will be downloaded.

Finally you can chose to '''Add Source files''' to the package.

= TM & Glossary Management =
== TM & Glossary Basics ==

Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''Setup TM&Glo''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' menu.

[[File:TmgloDialog.png]]

===Translation Memory ===
==== Creating a translation memory ====
There are several ways to create or add a TM:
* Create an empty standard WFA TM
* Upload an existing TM like from Wordast Classic or Pro
* Link to a remote TM hosted on a private Wordfast server
* Link to a Very Large TM hosted on a public Wordfast server

To create an empty TM, click on the '''''Create''''' button of the TM buttons area.

[[File:CreateTm.png]]

Choose source and target language codes. It is recommended that you have only one TM for each language pair. This way, you will benefit from everything you have already translated in each pair. However, there may be reasons for you to maintain different TMs in the same language pair. In this case, enter an ID using up to 10 characters in the Assigned Name field.
 Then click on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''Create TM''''' dialog box. Your TM has now been created and is selected in the list of TMs.

To Upload an existing TM, click on the '''''upload'''' button.

[[File:CreateTm_3.png]]

If you already have a TM that you use with Wordfast Classic or Pro, you can upload it to WFA. The codes for source and target languages are written in the header of the TM file. If you already have a TM in the same pair, make sure that you enter an identifier of up to 10 characters in the Assigned Name field.
 This procedure is exactly the same if you have a TM from another CAT tool. However, check first that this TM has been exported in the '''TMX''' format, the standard file format with extension '''.tmx''' supported by all major CAT tool developers.
 Click on the '''''Upload''''' button of the '''''Upload''''' dialog box, you will be prompted to browse a local file on your PC.

If the TM is in Excel format, before uploading it you need to save it as ''Unicode Text''.

[[File:warning.png]] Depending on its size, uploading a TM may take some time. In this case, it can be run in the background, allowing you to perform other tasks while you are waiting.

To add a remote TM or VLTM, click on the '''''add''''' button.

[[File:AddTm_1.png]]

Select the type TM in the list box.

[[File:AddTm_2.png]]

For adding a remote TM, copy paste the given URL in the URL field and the workgroup ID, if any, in the workgroup ID field.
 If you have already a remote TM with the same languages, you will need to enter a symbolic name.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test the remote TM. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:AddTm_3.png]]

WFA has access to the public TM server, which consists of segments offered by the community of translators and is available to all under the name VLTM (Very Large Translation Memory). The TM is unrestricted, free of charge and anonymous.
 For a VLTM, you need to enter source and target language codes.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test if the VLTM is available for your languages. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

==== Update an existing TM by appending from a local TM ====
You can update one of your existing TM by appending TUs from a local TM by clicking on the '''''merge''''' button.

[[File:MergeTm.png]]

 The process is slightly the same than uploading a TM but you should first select the existing TM in the list. The memory to import will already have predefined source and target languages codes in the header of the TM. There may therefore be a conflict of languages between it and the existing memory. If the languages are different, the merge operation will be rejected.
 You also have the choice, in case there are identical source segments, to add always the TM segments, or to not add duplicated segments from the TM. Select '''Add always''' or '''Do not add duplicate''' in the list box.
 By default, the merge process will not take language variants into account. If you want to make sure exactly the same variants are merged, tick the '''append TUs having the same variant''' option.
 Finally click on the '''''Merge''''' button of the '''''Append TUs''''' dialog box

==== Selecting an existing TM for translating a document ====
Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''TMs and Glossaries''' button on '''File''' menu to open the dialog and select an existing TM.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Caution''': If your TM is selected in the TM list, it does not mean selected for translating a document.
To select a TM for translation, you have to tick it in the '''active''' column and click on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' dialog box.
In this example above, 2 EN>FR TMs and 2 EN>FR glossaries are set active for translation.

[[File:notice.png]] A document can have as active '''several read-only''' TMs, but '''only one writeable'''. You might need to uncheck the active checkbox from the current writeable TM in order to set a new one.

=== Glossary ===
The use of incorrect terminology can ruin an otherwise good translation. Many clients have a well-defined terminology (the jargon of the trade), compiled in the form of a glossary. By supplying this glossary to their translators, clients can impose a particular terminology. In adopting this approach, very common in technical translation, the end result should harmoniously fuse the linguistic competence of the translator with the terminological requirements of the client.

Sometimes the client will ask the translator to provide a glossary of terms arising from research undertaken during the translation. In this case, the translator must create a glossary and add specific terminology to it. This glossary building can either be done prior to translation (in an initial terminology research phase), or during the translation itself.

In many cases, however, the client provides a bilingual glossary, which has already been created during the course of previous translations. It is then up to the translator to comply strictly with it and, where appropriate, to add his or her own contributions.

When the translation work is of a more general nature (and especially if a translator is still in the process of acquiring the general vocabulary of a source language), WFA’s glossary function can also be used to itemise terminology that is encountered during the course of the translation process.

Wordfast Anywhere is designed to assist the translator in all the cases mentioned above through the implementation of its glossary function. This glossary consists of a simple tab-delimited text document, which – like the TM – can be uploaded to and downloaded from WFA, shared with other CAT programs, etc. as required.

==== Creating a glossary ====
Like TM there are several ways to create or add a glossary:
* Create an empty standard WFA glossary
* Upload an existing glossary
* Link to remote glossaries
* Link to Tilde Terminology services
* Link to a IATE glossary

To create an empty glossary, click on the '''''Create''''' button of the glossary buttons area and follow the same TM pattern.

To Upload an existing glossary, click on the '''''upload''''' button of the glossary buttons area and follow the same TM pattern.
 Allowed file types are simple tabulated text file (*.txt) (source + tab + target), Wordfast glossary text file (*.txt), Excel file (*.xls, *.xlsx) and TBX file (*.tbx).
 Excel files must be simple:
* 1st Column: Source (compulsory)
* 2nd Column: Target (compulsory)
* 3rd Column: Comment (optional)
* 4th Column: F1 (optional)
* 5th Column: F2 (optional)
* 6th Column: F3 (optional)

 Unlike with a TM, WFA cannot derive the source and target language information from the header of the glossary file; therefore this must be specified here.
 Once the glossary has been uploaded, you will receive a report summarising the operation:
 You will see how many terms have been submitted for upload, how many were rejected as invalid or duplicates well as the total number of terms added.

To add a remote glossary or Tilde Terminology services, click on the '''''add''''' button.

[[File:AddGlossary_1.png]]

Select the type in th elist box.

[[File:AddGlossary_2.png]]

For adding a remote glossary, copy paste the given URL in the URL field.
 If you have already a remote glossary with the same languages, you will need to enter a symbolic name.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test the remote glossary. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:AddGlossary_3.png]]

For setting Tilde Terminology services, you need to select source and target languages and a domain.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test if you have collections. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:addIATE.png]]

To set an IATE glossary, just select the source and target languages. Only languages from the European community are supported.
Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button and if the glossary exists, click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:addIATE2.png]]

By default not all IATE terminology is showed, but you can enable it by checking '''''Show all common terminology'''''.

==== Update an existing glossary by appending from a local glossary ====
You can update one of your existing glossaries by appending terms from a local glossary by clicking on the '''''merge''''' button.

[[File:MergeGlo.png]]

 The process is slightly the same than uploading but you should first select the existing glossary in the list.
 You have the choice, in case there are identical entries (source and target), to add always or to not add duplicated. Select '''Add always''' or '''Do not add duplicate''' in the list box.
 Finally click on the '''''Merge''''' button.

==== Selecting one or more glossaries for translation ====
Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''TMs and Glossaries''' button on '''File''' menu to open the dialog and select an existing TM.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Caution''': If your glossary is selected in the glossary list, it does not mean selected for translation.
To select a glossary for translation, you have to tick it in the '''active''' column and click after on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' dialog box.

[[File:notice.png]] A document can have as active '''several read-only''' glossaries, but '''only one writeable'''. You might need to uncheck the active checkbox from the current writeable glossary in order to set a new one.

==== Using a glossary ====

[[File:Use glossary.png]]

* Whenever WFA recognises a term from the glossary in the source segment it highlights it against a blue background

* The terms highlighted in blue are considered as placeables. They can thus be manipulated with the [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] and [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] icons or the Ctrl+Alt+Right and Ctrl+Alt+Left shortcuts and by clicking on them with the mouse or by typing their initial letter + Tab. The difference is that, when you use the [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]] icon or the Ctrl+Alt+Down shortcut, it is the corresponding translation that is copied to the target segment. The most easy way to copy a target is probably to use the Auto-suggest feature, enabled by default. Target terms are proposed by typing the first letter of the target term of the 3 first letters of the source term. [[File:Auto-suggest target term.png]] [[File:Auto-suggest target term 2.png]].

* You can see in advance what the translation of the highlighted items is by activating the glossary panel (keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+H or by selecting it from the '''''View''''' tab => '''''Show/Hide Glossary''''' [[File:panelGlo.png]] button )

* If you want to know more about a term, i.e. the information that you or someone else has entered in the comment or F1, F2 and F3 fields, place your mouse over the source term and this information will be displayed. See above the bubble of the last term on the glossary panel (translation).

==== Adding terms to the glossary ====

[[File:Add_term.png]]

It is quite likely that you will want to incorporate terms you come across in the source text into the glossary together with their translations that arise as part of your research process. This way, your linguist’s memory will be reinforced and you are less likely to have to research the same word or phrase again in the future. WFA allows you to do this dynamically, at any time and without exiting your translation process.

First, select the term in the source text. If it consists of one word, you can simply click on it or use the Tab key to move forwards (or Shift+Tab to move backwards) through the text until you reach its position.

The word you have selected will be highlighted against a red border.

Then click on the target term in the target segment.

The selected target term will have a blue background.

[[File:Select terms.png]]

Next, invoke the Glossary Dialog Box by typing Ctrl+Alt+T, or clicking the '''''Add Term''''' [[File:TermEdit.png]] button.

If a single word, the terms you highlighted in the source and target segments should automatically appear in the Source and Target fields.
If the terms consists of more than one word, it may be necessary to paste the text into the fields from your computer’s clipboard or type the information manually.

You can also add a comment – something that may prove useful in the future, e.g. if you want to remember the situation in which this translation was used. The F1, F2 and F3 fields may be used to store word role, context, grammatical form or any other relevant text-based information.

Then click Save to confirm.

==== Fuzzy terminology recognition ====
Each time you open a segment, Wordfast Anywhere checks for the presence in the glossary of all words and terms contained in the source segment. This operation is called terminology recognition. The recognised terms are highlighted in blue in the source segment, as discussed above.

In establishing a correspondence between the terms of the source segment and the terms found in the glossary, WFA will both recognise an exact match and attempt to recognise fuzzy matches.

WFA employs a stemming algorithm for some languages (e.g. German) in order to recognise different forms of the same word that may correspond to those listed in the glossary.

For example, WFA can recognised the infinitive verb ‘besuchen’ as being related to the adjective (or past participle) ‘besucht’ due to the fact that the two words share a common stem.

Fuzzy matching can also be established by using an asterisk in combination with the term. This method overrides the stemming algorithm, allowing you to find all terms that begin with, end with or contain a particular text string.

=== Concordance search ===
Segments stored in the TM are retrieved only if they have a minimum level of correspondence with the source segment (by default 75%). However, even if the level of correspondence is not sufficient to produce a fuzzy match, the TM may still contain terms that you have previously translated and wish to use in your current translation. To search in the memory you have two options:

1) Click on the '''''Concordance''''' button [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]] or use the '''Ctrl+Alt+C''' shortcut. The following window appears:

[[File:concordance.png]]

Enter the word or text string you want to research in the Search field. WFA will search for all words that are the same or begin with the same sequence of letters as the string entered.

You can also select the word or text string with the mouse and then click on the '''''Concordance''''' button [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]] or '''Ctrl+Alt+C''' shortcut. The result will be displayed immediately.

You can edit or delete a term in the concordance search window by clicking on the edit or delete links.

You can add to your search possibilities by choosing the Advanced option:
* Two words or text strings (search terms) separated by a space: one or the other must exist in the TU
* Two terms separated by the + sign: both terms must exist
* A term ending with an asterisk: a search is performed for all text strings containing the search term.

When you use this option, a help line is displayed to remind you how this command works.

=== Searching in a glossary===
You can also search in the glossary. To do this, click the '''''Glossary Search''''' button [[File:GlossarySearch.png]] or use the '''Ctrl+Alt+G''' shortcut:

[[File: Glossary search.png]]

Type the source language word you wish to search for in the Search field and click OK. The list of glossary entries that contain the search term will be displayed.
You can edit or delete a term in the glossary search window by clicking on the edit or delete icons.

By employing an asterisk in the search term, you can expand your search to find all glossary entries that include the text string that the search term is made up of.

== TM & Glossary Advanced features ==

=== TM operations ===
==== View/Edit a TM ====
Select the TM in the list then click on the '''''Edit''''' button.

[[File:ViewEditTm.png]]

The dialog box displays the TM information. Depending on the TM type, you can edit some properties.
* Standard WFA TM : you have the possibility to define attributes of your TM, which will allow you to subsequently identify its segments. Click on the '''Attributes''' tab.
[[File:EditTmAttributes.png]]

There are five attributes in a Wordfast TM: the first is fixed and immutable, consisting of the name of the user. The other four can be defined by each user at will, but it is recommended to use attribute 1 to describe the subject of the text to be translated and attribute 2 for the client, to maintain compatibility with Wordfast Classic and Wordfast Pro users. Attributes consist of codes, usually 3 letters, followed by a brief description. In the fields referred to as TM attribute 1 to 4, enter the name of the attribute (subject, client, etc.). In the field on their right, select one of the attributes that appear on the drop-down list or, if necessary, click '''add''' to add an attribute, '''upd''' to update it or '''del''' to delete it. Whatever option is chosen, a dialog will appear asking for the code of the attribute (ID) and a brief description (Name, ignored for the Del option).
[[file:EditTmAttributes_add.png]] [[file:EditTmAttributes_update.png]] [[file:EditTmAttributes_delete.png]]

Dynamic codes : Predefined attributes can be added by entering a code between accolades as explain in the help.
[[File:EditTmAttributes_help.png]]

* Remote private Wordfast server

[[File:EditRemoteTm.png]] You can edit the workgroup ID and/or the symbolic name.

==== Download a TM ====
This is available only for standard WFA TM.

[[File:DownloadTm.png]]

From the Downloaded file format drop-down list you can select either the Wordfast TM TXT format, the Standard TMX format, the MS Excel XLS format or the Bilingual document TXLF format.
 Click on the '''Download''' button.

===== Filters when downloading a TM =====
Select ''"Filtering (advanced options)"'' on the second drop-down list and click on the '''Download''' button.

[[File:Tm_download2.JPG]]

This will analyse the TM and let you apply some filters to select what you want to download from the TM.

[[File:Tm_download_filter.JPG]]

[[File:Tm_download_filter2.JPG]]

Once filters are selected click on the '''Download''' button to finish the download.

==== Removing a TM ====
After clicking on the top '''Remove''' button on the TM side, this red warning is displayed to confirm the deletion.
 For TMs that are not Wordfast Anywhere standard TMs only the link to the external TM is cut.

[[File:DeleteTm.png]]

==== Quick TM Share ====
By clicking on the small '''share''' button on top of the TM side, you can share quickly a TM to somebody else having an account in Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:CreateTMShare.png]]

Click on the '''''Add guest''''' button and enter his email address (which should be his account login), then click '''Add'''.

[[File:CreateTMShare2.png]]

You can change the privilege of your guest on your TM. Finally to save the share, click on the '''''Save''''' button.

==== TMs Tools ====
===== Reversing a TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmReverse.png]]

Select a TM to reverse and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a TM already exists with the same name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Assembling several TMs in one TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmAssembled.png]]

Select one or more TMs to assemble in one TM and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a TM already exists with the same name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 if '''keep old assigned name''' is unchecked this information will be lost.
 if '''keep variants''' is checked, the TU will not be changed, otherwise, it take the given language pair.
 if '''keep user ID''' is checked, the TU will not be changed, otherwise, it will take your user ID.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Edit a TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmEdit.png]]

Select a TM to edit and click on the '''Run''' button.
 The TM will be opened as a temporary associated document in the document panel.

[[File:ToolsTmEdit1.png]]

Here you can for example update target segments, edit source segments and delete TU. Those changes will be stored straight on your TM.
 Bear in mind that this is a TM although it looks like a document.

After the TM edition, the temporary document must be deleted because it is a static copy of the TM.
 The tool can only edit and delete existing TUs and the TM size is limited to 100000 TUs.

=== Glossary operations ===
==== View/Edit a glossary ====
Select the glossary in the list then click on the '''''View/Edit''''' button.

[[File:ViewEditGlo.png]]

The dialog box displays the glossary information. Depending on the glossary type, you can edit some properties.

[[File:EditRemoteGlo.png]]

[[File:EditTildeGlo.png]]

==== Download a glossary ====
This is available only for standard WFA glossary.

[[File:DownloadGlo.png]]

Click on the '''Download''' button.

==== Removing a glossary ====
After clicking on the top '''Remove''' button on the glossary side, this red warning is displayed to confirm the deletion.
 For glossaries that are not standard only the link to the external glossary is cut.

[[File:DeleteGlo.png]]

==== Quick Glossary Share ====
By clicking on the small '''share''' button on top of the glossary side, you can share quickly a glossary to somebody else having an account in Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:CreateGloShare.png]]

Click on the '''''Add guest''''' button and enter his email address (which should be his account login), then click '''Add'''.

[[File:CreateGloShare2.png]]

You can change the privilege of your guest on your glossary. Finally to save the share, click on the '''''Save''''' button.

==== Glossaries tools ====
===== Reversing a glossary=====
[[File:ToolsGloReverse.png]]

Select a glossary to reverse and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a glossary already exists with the reversed glossary name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Assembling several glossaries in one glossary =====
[[File:ToolsGloAssembled.png]]

Select two or more glossaries to assemble and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a glossary already exists with the assembled glossary name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 if '''keep old assigned name''' is unchecked this information will be lost.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

=== TMs and glossaries shares ===

You can allow other users to share your TM as well as your glossary and you can see the TMs and the glossaries shared to you by others.
To manage all kind of share, click on the bottom '''''Share''''' button of the TMs and glossaries dialog. At that time you will receive the following:

[[File:Tmglo_share_1.png]]

* If you have already enabled the sharing of your TMs and your glossaries with other users, they will be displayed in the '''My shares to other users''' table. You can revoke sharing with any of these users. To do this, select the user in question and click '''Revoke'''. To add or update an existing share click on the '''Add''' or '''Edit''' buttons and see the chapter '''Add and edit shares to other users''' below.
* You can visualize all the TMs and glossaries that have been shared to you in the '''My shares from other users''' table. You can end any share by selecting it and clicking on the '''Remove''' button.
* You can also share your TMs and glossaries to applications like Wordfast Classic and Wordfast Pro by generating keys. they are displayed in the '''My shares to applications''' table. See below the chapter '''Sharing to applications'''.

==== Add and edit shares to other users ====

[[File:Tmglo_share_2.png]]

[[File:Tmglo_share_edit.png]]

[[File:Tmglo_share_3.png]]

==== Sharing to applications ====
Wordfast Anywhere will generate up to 5 keys to share one or more TMs and, optionally, glossaries.
The key is needed for the external application to connect to that specific share.

[[File:Tmglo_share_app_1.png]]

If you want to add the TMs and glossaries currently used, click on the '''Add active TMs and glossaries''', otherwise click on the '''Add''' button to choose a TM and the '''Add''' button to choose a glossary.
 Choose the right privilege and the number of keys needed, then click on the the '''Save''' button.
 The keys will be generated and listed in the '''My shares to application''' table. See below.

[[File:Tmglo_share_app_2.png]]

For instance this can be used on Wordfast Pro 3.4.9, where there is a tab for Wordfast Anywhere TM and glossaries.

[[File:Wpftab.png]]

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QVOMOYfR2ws&feature=em-subs_digest this video] about how to do it.

 Although the API key is for a combined TM and glossary, on Wordfast Pro 3.4.9 you need to add it twice: one for TM and one for glossary

[[Wordfast Pro]] users can check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=S7QCHNpRtKo&feature=em-subs_digest this video].

= Translation =
== Preparation of the translation environment ==
Before beginning the translation of a document using a CAT tool, you must first have an active Translation Memory.

'''Note''': an initial TM was automatically set up when you created your account.

The TM consists of a database, which will record each source language segment (i.e. sentence, phrase) that you translate, together with the corresponding target language segment. As it grows, this increasingly allows you to obtain translations of phrases made previously that are the same or similar to the one you are currently translating.

For more information check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Translation_Memory|Translation Memory basics]]'''.

== Translating ==
To start the translation, you must first open the initial segment.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:StartNext.png]] '''''Start/Next''''' button or use the ''Alt + Down'' shortcut . When you do this, the document area is transformed: the segment is displayed in light blue block (source), a grey block (target) is placed just below it and the rest of your document is shown on the rest of the page. The cursor is located in the grey block.

Translate the segment in the grey block

[[File:StartTrans.png|1200px]]

After translating this segment, you can continue with your translation. To move to the next segment, click on the [[File:StartNext.png]] '''''Start/Next''''' or use the ''Alt+Down'' shortcut. Remember this shortcut, as you will use it for each segment you translate. You can also move to previous segment by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Previous.png]] '''''Previous''''' or use the ''Alt + Up'' shortcut.

[[File:notice.png]] '''''When translating, the segments are saved automatically in the translation memory and on the database system as soon as you go to the next segment.'''''

Now translate the segment as before.

Now that you get the idea, you can continue to translate. Remember: to move from one segment to the next, use ''Alt+Down''. To return to the previous segment (to correct something that you subsequently realised was mistaken), use ''Alt+Up''.

Following are some '''other considerations''' regarding the translation of segments.

'''Note''': Most browser / OS combinations, including Firefox, Safari and Chrome, have their own spell checker – in some cases it may be necessary for you to activate it. You can also use '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Spellcheck|Spellcheck]]'''

There is color code for the target block:
* Grey is the no match from the TM (score=0)
* Green is the full match from the TM (score=100)
* Yellow is a fuzzy match from the TM (score between 50 to 99)
* Orange is a MT proposition
* Purple is the color when the segment has been modified by the editor

Score information can be found in different places depending on the view.
For '''Classic view''' it can be found on ''<}score{>'' tag between source and target segment.

[[File:ScoreC.png|1200px]]

For '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views''' there is a column for the score.

[[File:ScoreH.png|1200px]]

[[File:ScoreV.png|1200px]]

=== Tags ===

Before translating this new segment, pay attention to the tag <1>, which appears here at the end. WFA is not a word processor and thus does not concern itself with a specific representation of the document's formatting. You'll see no changes in size or typeface, no bold or italic characters. Instead, this information is encoded and represented by what we call "tags", e.g. <1>. By slowly passing your mouse over this tag you will see what it represents. This tag is not to be translated, but it should be placed on the appropriate position in the target segment. If you want to recopy a tag from the source segment please type < to trigger the tags proposal.

[[File:tagProposal.png]]

You can also copy it by using the comands on '''Translation''' tab: [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] '''Next Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Right'') and [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] '''Previous Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Left'') to navigate the source segment to the desired tag. A red frame indicates the selected item. Then position the cursor in the target segment and click on [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]] '''Copy Pl.'''(''Ctrl+Alt+Down'').

Differences on the formatting tags (<1>, <2>) between source and target segment can make the file filter aligner have difficulties to build up the translated document.

Check there is no ''segments with tag difference'' using one of this options:
# Click on [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button on '''File''' tab to get a report. Check if there are any ''segments with tag difference''. Use '''''Show Outline''''' [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button on '''View''' tab to go straight to one segment.
# Click on [[File:FindReplace.png]] '''''Find & Replace''''' button on '''Edit''' tab. Go to ''Miscellaneous'' tab and run a ''Tag difference'' search. Segments with tag differences will be listed.

On the listed segments you must pay attention to:
# There is no target tag missing that exists on source.
# The target tag order is different from source order. For example [<1>text text<2>] on source but [<2>text text<1>] on target.
# The target tag content is not identical with the source tag. You can see the content of the tag when the mouse is over it.

[[File:Warning.png]] We '''do not recommend to use copy/paste or drag and drop''' to copy the tags as it can copy more than the eye can see and be problematic. It is better to use the the auto-suggest feature with tags (whenever you want to add a tag just type < and the list of tags from source will be proposed for selection) or the [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]] '''Copy Placeable''' on '''Translation''' tab.

== Main commands ==

=== Provisional segment ===
You may be unsure whether your translation of a segment is correct. To avoid having to interrupt your translation process, you can mark the segment as provisional.

It will be identified by a yellow square at the beginning of the line for '''Classic view''' or at the end of the row for '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views'''.

To mark a segment as provisional, use the F10 key or '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mark.png]] '''''Provisional'''''.

When you have resolved any doubts, simply return to the marked segment and make your corrections. Use ''Alt+Down'' ( [[File:StartNext.png]] ) or ''Alt-Up'' ( [[File:Previous.png]] ) to validate the segment and erase the yellow square.

=== Auto propagate ===
Use this command to translate a segment and automatically propagate the current segment changes through all the document to other segments having the same source.

Find it in '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Autopropagate.png]] '''''Auto Propagate'''''.

=== Note ===
You can also write a note to be attached to the segment for the duration of the translation (in a similar manner to a Post-ItTM). You can use this to remind yourself of something important about this segment or to pass information on to people who will have access to your translation, such as reviewers.

To write a note, click on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Edit_Note16.png]] '''''Edit Note'''''.

The following text box will be displayed:

[[File:Editnote.png|1200px]]

Write your note in the text box and click Save. You can cancel the operation by clicking Cancel. In the case of an existing note, you can edit and validate it by clicking Save, or delete it by clicking Remove.

A green square will be placed at the beginning of the segment to indicate that a note is attached. By passing the mouse pointer over this square, you will see a rectangle containing the text of the note.

It will be identified by a grey square with an "i" in it at the beginning of the line for '''Classic view''' or at the end of the row for '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views'''.

[[File:Editnote2.png|1200px]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Notes can be downloaded by going to '''''File''''' tab => [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' and choosing the '''''Notes Report'''''

=== Copying the original segment ===
Sometimes a segment contains very little to translate: for example, when it consists almost entirely of proper names or is made up of a website address. In this case, it may be preferable to copy the entire source segment to the target segment and make any adjustments there.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CopySource.png]] '''''Copy Source'''''. or use the shortcut ''Alt-Ins'.

=== Erasing the target segment ===
Sometimes it is necessary to erase what you have just written in the target segment.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Cleanup_Project16.png]] '''''Del Target'''''. or use the shortcut ''Ctrl+Alt+X''.

This button has a toggle behaviour through: Empty target, Remove tags and Restore.

=== Insertion of a special character like the non-breaking space ===
When you write in French, some characters must be accompanied by a non-breaking space: e.g. before the colon, semicolon, exclamation mark, question mark, exclamation mark, before and after quotes, thousands separators, and so on. In WFA, a non-breaking space is represented by the symbol < >.

However, such spaces cannot be automatically handled in an Internet browser as they are when using a text editor such as Word. Therefore it will be necessary to add them manually. By default, a non-breaking space is inserted at the cursor location by clicking on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Insert_c1.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 1'''''.

Two other special characters can be inserted like the curly quotes. Use '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Insert_c2.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 2''''' and [[File:Insert_c3.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 3'''''.

You can configure these 3 special characters in WFA setup (see '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Pandora.27s_box_tab|Pandora’s box]]''').

=== Expanding a segment ===
As we have seen, WFA considers that the segment is terminated when it encounters a segment termination marker. However, in some cases this segmentation is in error. For example, when WFA’s segmentation engine meets the following sentence:
''On pense aux conseils de Prof. Jacques Lacan:''
it can interpret the segment as ending with ''Prof.'' because a full stop is used as an end of segment marker. In this case we can command WFA to expand the segment, that is to say, to append the subsequent segment to it.

[[File:exspand1.png]]

This is done with the ''Alt+Pg'' dn shortcut or '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Expand_Segment16.png]] '''''Expand'''''.

[[File:exspand2.png]]

It is important to expand segments when the segmentation has not been performed correctly because this will increase the chances of it corresponding with a translation memory segment. For example, the segment ''On pense aux conseils de Prof.'' will have little chance of having a similarity of over 75% with another. By contrast, if the sentence ''On pense aux conseils de Prof. Jacques Lacan:'' is in the TM, when WFA encounters the source sentence ''On pense aux conseils de Professeur Jacques Lacan'', it will offer the existing translation, as it has 90% similarity (it is only the word Professor that is not the same).

A segment cannot be expanded if it is terminated by an end of paragraph or end of cell marker, a page break or a tab.

You should not have to expand all segments containing abbreviations that end with a full stop. A comma-separated, modifiable list of common language-specific abbreviations is included in WFA . This can be accessed and modified via the segmentation tab in the configuration dialog box [case-sensitive, optional letters are enclosed in square brackets].

[[File:Abbrev.png]]

=== Shrinking a segment ===
If, on the other hand, two segments are erroneously displayed together due to an absence of an end of segment marker, you can also shrink the segment with the shortcut ''Alt-Pg'' up or ''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:ShrinkSeg.png]] '''''Shrink'''''.

=== Placeables ===

A placeable is any term or expression contained in the source segment that is defined as such. WFA provides shortcuts for inserting them into the target segment, thus both saving time and reducing the potential for typing errors.

WFA predefines as placeables:
*Numbers
*Tags
*Words beginning with, or otherwise containing, capital (upper case) letters
*Words or phrases appearing in the source text that have matching items stored in the '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Glossary|Glossary]]'''.

We have already seen how to copy tags. Given that a tag is a placeable, the procedure is the same: to copy any placeable, simply select it with the comands on '''Translation''' tab: [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] '''Next Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Right'') and [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] '''Previous Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Left'').

You also have the possibility of clicking on any term in the source text, thus placing it under focus and temporarily transforming it into a placeable. A red frame indicates the item selected.

Next, position the cursor in the target segment at the point where the placeable should be positioned or double-click (click and drag) to select the word (phrase) to be replaced and click on the on [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]] '''Copy Pl.'''(''Ctrl+Alt+Down''). The placeable is copied to the relevant position in the target segment.

In this sentence, the placeable elements, selected by ''Ctrl+Alt+Right'' or [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]], are:

[[File:place1.png]]
(starts with a capital letter)

[[File:place2.png]]
(number)

[[File:place3.png]]
(tag)

And, if necessary, any term may be designated as a placeable simply by clicking on it:

[[File:place4.png]]

As you translate the text, you only want to place those elements that should not be translated:

[[File:place5.png]]

At this point, you want to write ‘Chenjerai.’. However it may be faster and more efficient (as well as reducing the possibility of error) to select the item using ''Ctrl+Alt+Right'' or [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] (or even by simply clicking on it) and place it into the segment target with ''Ctrl+Alt+Down'' or [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]].

[[File:place6.png]]

The following proper noun ‘Hove’ is also a placeable, so you can repeat the procedure. Simply use the '''Tab key''' on your keyboard to advance from one placeable to the next (or '''Shift+Tab''' to move in the opposite direction).

[[File:place7.png]]

You can also use the ''Ctrl+Alt+Up'' shortcut or [[File:Dropdown.png]] '''Toggle Pl.'' on '''Translation''' tab to transform terms in the source segment into placeables.

For even greater efficiency, if you type a letter that begins a word or term in the source segment and then successively press Tab, all words or terms beginning with that letter are successively copied to the target segment. For example, in the above sentence, typing ''l'' followed by '''Tab''' will copy ''lyrique'' to the target. Each time you press the Tab key, the word or term that has been copied to the target segment will be replaced by the next
word or term appearing in the source segment that begins with the same letter, i.e. ''le'', ''laisse'' and so on.

=== Case changer ===
Use this feature to toggle through: lowercase, uppercase and proper name for a word. This feature can be used in one word (by putting the cursor inside the word), or with more than one word (by selecting several words with the mouse or Shift+Left/Right Arrow).
Beware that some times it gets crazy with the first and last word.

Use it bu clicking on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:CaseChanger.png]] '''''Case Changer'''''.

=== Increase target height ===
You can increase the target height by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Increase_target.png]] '''''Target Height'''''.

=== Web Speech Beta ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY available for Chrome. Currently disabled due to browser security.'''

This is a beta implementation that uses Google Web Speech API to insert your dictation into the target segment.

To use it, first open the segment and then click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mic.png]] '''''Web Speech Beta''''' button to start the dictation. The icon will change to indicate recording is on. To stop dictation click again on the button.

You can add a shortcut to this command.

You can jump to the next segment as always and keep on dictating. Or you can stop dictation, jump to the next segment and start dictation again.

A provisional transcription will be shown as an auto-suggest text and the final transcription will be inserted on the target segment. The provisional transcription might not be accurate while final transcription should be quite accurate and may be different from provisional transcription.

Please take into account that this is a beta implementation and that voice transcription is done online so there can be delays when dictating. We encourage you to use it and give us some feedback.

[[File:Warning.png]] It can be that Chrome keeps asking you to allow the use of the microphone every time. You need to check the Chrome settings: "Privacy>Content Settings>Microphone>Manage exceptions". There you should have an exception for https:freetm.com.

If you are connected to the site via HTTS the grant is permanent, if you use HTTP, you are asked each time.

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rR88md-xyik&feature=em-uploademail this video] about how to use this tool.

Check this links for more information:

[https://support.google.com/chrome/answer/3123708?p=settings_manage_exceptions&rd=1 Chrome Exceptions]

[https://support.google.com/chrome/answer/6148059?hl=en Chrome website permissions]

=== Edit Source ===
Using '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:EditSource16.png]] '''''Edit Source''''' will help you to correct the source text in order to have valid TU in memory.

This will not change the source file and obviously will not automatically change the target segment.

=== Ending the translation ===
If for any reason you want to stop translating, you have three choices:
* Close the translation and validate the current segment in the TM ('''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close & Commit''''' or ''Alt+End'')
* Close the translation without validating it ('''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:Close.png]] '''''Close''''' or ''Shift+Alt+End'')
* Clear the content of the target segment, together with any attached note, by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:Close_restore.png]] '''''Close & Delete''''' .

== After Translation ==

When your translation is finished, you use one of our '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Review|Review]]''' tools before '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Download|Download]]''' it.

= Tools =
=== Downloading TXML file ===
You can download your document in TXML format, the standard working file format used by WFA. This permits you, for example, to send the file to a colleague for review using Wordfast Anywhere or Pro. Once reviewed and corrected, you can upload it again.

To download your working file go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual TXML'''''.

[[File:DownloadTypesList.png]]

If your translation is incomplete or contains provisional segments or notes, you will receive this warning:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

At this point you have the choice to accept (OK) or cancel (Cancel) to return to your translation. If you accept, you will need to consider the following dialog:

[[File:DownloadOptions2a.png]]

You can optionally instruct WFA to copy the source segment to the target segment if it is blank (check Copy source to target if target is empty) and/or to ignore language variations, e.g. to not make a distinction between British and American English (check No language variants).

Choose the way to download the file and click '''''OK''''' to donwload the file.

=== Merging TXML files ===
If you already have a file in TXML format you can upload it to your workspace. To do this go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:Mergetms16.png]] '''Merge Txml''' button. At this point you must complete the following dialog box:

[[File:Mergetxml1.PNG]]

By checking Merge an existing document, all documents that exist in your workspace will be listed according to language pair, and you will have to choose which will be merged with the file you intend to upload.

You can also set WFA to update the TM corresponding to the file you upload (check Update or create a TM with a bilingual document). Check Merge an existing TM and choose which TM to update from the list displayed. You will also need to determine whether, in the case of identical source segments, new TUs should be added to existing ones (Keep existing TUs) or whether they should replace them (Overwrite existing TUs). If, on the other hand, you prefer to create a new TM, click on Create a new TM. At this point, you will have the opportunity to give this new TM a name, if you have more than one TM for the same language pair. Then click Upload to upload the file or Close to exit without doing anything.

Note that operations performed on the document are independent from memory-related operations, allowing you to update only the document, or only the memory, or both.
If you have clicked Upload, you will receive the following message:

[[File:Mergetxml2.png]]

Click Browse to navigate through your directories and select your file, then click Submit to perform the upload or Cancel to cancel the operation. After the merge operation has been successfully performed, a report will appear showing how many segments were merged.

[[File:Mergetxml3.png]]

=== Other downloads ===
You can also download the working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments, usable by Wordfast Classic (and Trados Workbench).

[[File:Bilingualwordfastclassic.png]]

This will allow your document to be proofread by a Wordfast Classic user. Caution, this download is only available for files formatted as .doc and .rtf. Unlike the TXML file, this format cannot be imported into WFA.

To download your working file in bilingual MS-Word format, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the '''''Download''''' button and choose '''Bilingual Doc original''' option. This option is only available if your source file is a MS Word file.

[[File:DownloadTypesList.png]]

If your translation is incomplete or contains provisional segments or notes, you will receive this warning:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

At this point you have the choice to accept (OK) or cancel (Cancel) to return to your translation. If you accept, you will need to respond to the following message:

[[File:Bilingualwordfastclassic2.png]]

Following the same steps you can download this other files:

* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments without placeholders Bilingual. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC no placeholders''''' option.
* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments with placeholders Bilingual. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC with placeholders''''' option.
* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments with tag-content as placeholder. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC tag content''''' option.
* Your translated file, in plain text format, without any formatting. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Unformatted Text''''' option.

=== Find & Replace ===
It is often necessary to locate a word or text string in a file that has been translated. For this we use the Doc Find and Replace function. Go to '''''Edit''''' tab and click on the [[File:FindReplace.png]] '''''Find & Replace''''' button.

As with other functions that require the current segment to be closed, you will receive a warning that the current segment will be closed without being saved. If you agree, click OK, otherwise click Cancel to cancel the transaction and save your work.

[[File:Warning.png]] By default search is only done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:SR1.png]]

'''''Find & Replace''''' dialog has 4 tabs performing different actions.

* Use '''Find''' tab to locate a word or text in your document.
* Use '''Find/Replace''' tab to locate and replace a word or text in your document.
* Use '''Go to Segment''' tab to search for single segments (1,5,68,499) or a range of segments (25-66).
* Use '''Miscellaneous''' tab to perform different types of searches such as look for '''provisional''' or '''untranslated''' segments, or segments with '''notes''' or '''tag differences'''.

[[File:Notice.png]] You can use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:Warning.png]] Not all the options are always available.
==== Find ====
Use '''Find''' tab.
Type the word or text you want to find and click '''Find''' button to start a search. When search is done hits are highlighted and the number of hits is shown on the dialog.

[[File:SR6.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] By default search is only done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:SR7.png]]

==== Replace ====
Use '''Find/Replace''' tab. Type the word/text you want to find and the word/text you want it replaced for and click '''Find''' button to start a search. When search is done hits are highlighted and the number of hits is shown on the dialog.

[[File:SR8.png]]

It may happen that '''Replace''', '''Replace/Find''' and '''Replace All''' buttons are not available. This happens because the first search does not move you to the first hit, you have to click again '''Find''' to move to the next hit and then replace buttons will be available. Use them to replace, replace and move to next hit or replace all hits.

Replace can only be done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Go to Segment ====
Use '''Go to Segment''' tab. Use it to find specific segments. This can be an alternative to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''.
You can type single segments separated by commas (1,5,68,499) or a range of segments (25-66).

[[File:SR4.png]]

Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Miscellaneous ====
Use '''Miscellaneous''' tab. This 6 types of search do not require to type a word/text but will help you locate segments with some particularities. This can be an alternative to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''.

[[File:SR5a.png]]

You can search for:

* '''Provisional''' segments.
* '''Untranslated''' segments.
* Segments with '''Tag difference'''.
* Segments with '''Notes'''.
* Segments with '''Double spaces'''.
* Segments with '''Revisions'''.

Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Advanced search options ====

Using the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button you can access some advanced search options:

[[File:SR2.png]]

* Search for '''Whole Word'''.
* Do a '''Case sensitive''' search.
* Search for words that start/end by the characters using * as a joker. For example searching for *able will find: movable, payable, breakable,...etc. And searching for hand* will find: handbag, handmade, handbook,...etc
* Search on Source, Target or both. This can only be used in '''Find''' tab.
* Mark each found target as provisional.
* Create a note for each replaced segment.
* Update the TM for each replaced segment.
* Do a wrap search
* Change search direction: Backward or Forward.

=== Analyze ===
Before providing a translation quotation, you may wish to analyze the source text to determine the extent of the work required. WFA provides an analytical tool for this purpose. To do this, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the '''''Analyze''''' button and choose '''Analyze'''. If your file is big and you do not want to wait, choose '''Analyze in Background'''.

A progress message is displayed on the status bar. Then the analysis results will be displayed:

[[File:Analysis.png]]

According to the number of repetitions (identical segments that appear more than once in the document) or the percentage of segments that correspond either completely (100%) or partially (<100%) to matches in the TM, you will be able to precisely estimate the volume of work actually requiring to be translated. After having examined the analysis report, click Close.

=== Statistics ===
WFA allows you to see what progress you have made with your translation at any time. To do this, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button.

A statistical report on your translation will be displayed:

[[File:Statistics.png]]

You will see the number of source and target segments (with the percentage already translated in brackets); the number of source and current target words; the number of source and target tags and if there is any segmental discrepancy in terms of differences between the number and content of the source and target tags (segments with tag difference); the number of segments not stored in the TM (segments flagged not saved in TM); the number of provisional segments (provisional segments) and notes (segments with notes). The report also displays which segments remain to be translated. After viewing the statistics, click Close.

Another important indicator is always present on the status bar: it tells you on which segment you currently are in relation to the total number of segments in the document. In this example, the document has 149 segments in total and you are currently on the 68:

[[File:Foot1.png]]

=== Alignment ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This tool is not managed by WFA in case there is any problem use the '''Help''' in the tool, the third tab, to report your problem. You can also sent an email to '''converterhelp@wordfast.com'''

When you begin to translate with a CAT tool you may not be able to derive the maximum benefit from it if you do not yet have a translation memory. Or, a client may have source and target documents from a previous translation but cannot supply you with a TM. In this case, you can quickly derive a TM by performing an "alignment" on the documents you have already translated prior to using WFA for your translation work by using the alignment tool.

To do this, go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab and click on the [[File:WF Update16.png]] '''''AutoAligner''''' button.

A new page will open, displaying the following dialog:

[[File:Align.png]]

Follow the instructions to upload the files and align them to get the TM from the alignment.

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HVXTQ5Wb_Eg&feature=em-uploademail this video] about how to use this tool.

You can then upload this TM to be used in WFA.

[[File:Warning.png]] This tool is not managed by WFA in case there is any problem use the '''Help''' in the tool, the third tab, to report your problem. You can also sent an email to '''converterhelp@wordfast.com'''

=== Preview ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Preview|Preview]]'''

=== Transcheck ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Transcheck|Transcheck]]'''

=== Spellcheck ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Spellcheck|Spellcheck]]'''

=== Pretranslation ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.

Go to [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]] '''''Pre-translation''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to open the dialog:

[[File:Pretrans1.png]]

Configure how you want the pre-translation to run:
* Activate '''Fuzzy matches'''
* Set what to do when there is no match from the TM. For setting a MT check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Machine_translation|this]]'''
* Leverage segment scores. Make sure the owner of the document (translation agency or company) has agreed to leverage empty segments.

If your file is big and has many segments run pre-translation in background by clicking on '''Pre Translate in background''' so you can keep working in other things. Otherwise use '''Pre-translate''' button run pre-translation.
Ad the end of the process you'll get a report with the result.

[[File:Pretrans2.png]]

=== Offline Review Tool ===
Use Offline review tool to review a file outside Wordfast Anywhere using a bilingual file and then update the changes.

To get the bilingual file go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Offline review DOC'''''.

[[File:Ofrt11a.png]]

This will download a bilingual file like this.

[[File:ofrt2.png]]

[[File:Notice.png]] Read the disclaimer on the download window and the instructions at the top of the file.

[[File:Warning.png]] Remember to add the tags on the target column as you would do on any translation. '''''Missing tags''''' can cause problems when merging back the file into WFA.

After editing '''only''' the target segments an saving the file you can import it to be merged with the file in Wordfast Anywhere. To do this go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:mergetms16_menu.png]] '''''Merge Offline Review''''' button.

[[File:ofrt3.png]]

A report will be shown with the result of the merge.

[[File:ofrt4.png]]

=== Extract Frequents ===
Use [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]] '''''Extract Frequents''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to create anew file that will contain only the repeated segments of the document.

A first report is created showing the percentage of segments that have an occurrence greater than 2.

[[File:ExtractFrequents1.png]]

Set the '''minumum occurrence''' that you want to extract and click on '''Extract and Open''' to create a new file with the occurrence segments.

=== Go to WFP4 ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.
You can open your document in '''Wordfast Pro 4 Online''' by using [[File:About wordfast16.png]] '''''WFP4''''' button on '''''File''''' tab.

WFP4o will use several settings on WFA along with the TMs and glossaries, so all settings must be done on inside WFA before. Also bear in mind to save your work on WFP4o before switching back to WFA.

[[File:Wf4disclaimer.png]]

Read carefully the disclaimer dialog before clikcing in '''Continue to WFP4o'''.

=== File information ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.

Go to [[File:Modify Project16.png]] '''''File Info''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to open the dialog with information about the file:

[[File:Fileinfo.png]]

=== Split file ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''''This option is only available when the document is closed.'''''

You can split a file in 4 parts by using [[File:Split.png]] '''''Split''''' button on '''''File''''' tab.

[[File:Split1.png]]

For each part a txml file will be created with the corresponding part of the file. The name of the txml files will contain information about which part is. For instance '''_[1of2]''' means the file was splitted into 2 parts and that this file correspond to the first part.

By default files are splited in equally parts, but you can change this and set the boundaries that better suit you.

[[File:Split3.png]]

'''Downloading one of the splited parts will download a TXML file''', but you can choose to download also the entire file in the original format.

[[File:Split2.png]]

Use
[[File:Join.png]] '''''Join''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to put the parts together again. [[File:Warning.png]] '''''This option is only available when the document is closed.'''''

=== Share file ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''This option is only available when the document is closed and is selected from the list.'''

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Share is only possible between Wordfast Anywhere users.'''

You can share your document with '''several Wordfast Anywhere users'''. To do so go to [[File:Share.png]] '''''Share''''' on '''''File''''' tab.

[[File:Share3.png]]

Additional files can be added using '''''Add''''' button on the Document section of the dialogue. If the file belong to a package, all package documents will be added otherwise it will be all documents with the same source and target languages.

To start sharing click on '''''Add''''' button after the Document section to add a new guest. Repeat it to ad more guest users.

[[File:Share_addGuest2.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Guest email must be a valid Wordfast Anywhere account.'''

For each guest two properties can be chosen:
* '''''Share as read-only'''''. This means guest will only access the document in a read-only mode, but no edition will be allowed.
* '''''Keep online (not downloadable)'''''. This means guest will access the file but would not be allowed to download it.

Additionally, you can share a TM and/or glossary with the file.

To do it, use the buttons on the '''''Translation Memories''''' and '''''Glossaries''''' tabs
* '''''Linked to document''''' will add the corresponding TM/glossary associated to the document.
* '''''Add''''' will let you choose which TM/glossary with the same language pair you want to share
* '''''Remove''''' will revoke the share on the selected TM/glossary from the list.

Once guests are added, they are presented on a list on the main dialogue. Any guest will be allowed edit rights unless '''''Share as read-only''''' is check. Owner will always have edit rights.

[[File:Share_mainList2.png]]

Repeat this process to add more guests.

You can use '''''Duplicate''''' button to add a new guest with the same settings than a existing one. Use '''''Revoke''''' button to finish a share with a guest

Check '''''History''''' on the document to force the use of revisions in the document.

As owner and several guests can have edit rights '''a reservation system is used to ensure only one user can edit a segment at a time'''. When a user opens the document the free segments loaded in Document Panel will automatically reserved for him adding a green share icon at the end of the segment. Segments reserved by other users are shown with the same share icon but in red color.
'''The reservation of segments will end when the user closes the document'''.

[[File:Share_reserved.png]]

When a user opens a shared document that is being used by an other user a pop-up message is show to warn about that.

[[File:Share_message.png]]

Also a notification is send to the other working users that a new user has opened the document.

[[File:Share_notification.png]]

Jumping to the next block will release the previous segments and will reserve the new segments being loaded.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''There is no live update of the segments reserved by other users. Which means segments need to be refreshed manually on Document Panel by loading them again, for instance by jumping to a different block and back.'''

To help to know when a user closes the document and releases his segments, a notification is send to the other working users.

[[File:Share_notificationEnd.png]]

'''''To finish a share''''' with a guest owner users need to use '''''Revoke''''', and to remove all the shares use '''''Revoke all'''''. This is a button on the Share dialog ([[File:Share.png]] '''''Share''''' on '''''File''''' tab).

Guest users will not see the share dialogue. They should use [[File:Revoke.png]] '''''Revoke''''' on '''''File''''' tab to finish the share.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Remember Share/Revoke are only available when the document is closed.'''

=== Offline Mode ===
On those situations when there is an internet connection cut or when WFA server is unavailable, WFA will turn on '''Offline Mode'''.

'''Offline Mode''' lets you work offline. It allows you to translate the segments that are currently loaded on the ''Document Panel''.

The translated segments are stored locally and automatically committed to WFA server as soon as the connection is recovered.

If the TM you are using is writeable, TUs will be automatically updated from the document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Be aware that there will be some messages telling you about going in/out of Offline Mode and segments being saved. Some features will not be available during Offline Mode.

[[File:Warning.png]] This feature has nothing to do with Offline Review Tool (OFRT). For information about OFRT, check the index at the top of this Manual.

[[File:Warning.png]] We recommend not to close the browser till synchronization back is done.

= WFA Configuration =
== Features and Shortcuts ==

{|class="wikitable"
|'''Menu tab'''
|'''Feature'''
|'''Shortcut'''
|'''Icon'''
|'''Information'''
|-
|Translation
|Start translation / Next segment
|Alt+Down
|[[File:StartNext.png]]
|Starts a translation session by opening the currently selected segment / Commits the current segment to TM and opens the next segment.
|-
|Translation
|Previous segment
|Alt+Up
|[[File:Previous.png]]
|Commits the current segment to TM and opens the previous segment.
|-
|Translation
|Close & Commit
|Alt+End
|[[File:CloseSave.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment and committing it to the TM.
|-
|Translation
|Close
|Shift+Alt+End
|[[File:Close.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment without committing it to the TM.
|-
|Translation
|Close & Delete
|Alt+Delete
|[[File:Close restore.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment and deleting the target with any note. Do not commit to TM.
|-
|Translation
|Provisional segment
|F10
|[[File:Mark.png]]
|Marks a segment as provisional with a yellow Post-It.
|-
|Translation
|Copy Source
|Alt+Insert
|[[File:CopySource.png]]
|Copies the source segment over the target segment.
|-
|Translation
|Expand
|Alt+PgDn
|[[File:ExpandSeg.png]]
|Expands a segment, if it actually extends beyond the punctuation mark (wrong segmentation). Note that a segment cannot be extended beyond a paragraph mark, page break, tabulator, or table cell.
|-
|Translation
|Shrink
|Alt+PageUp
|[[File:ShrinkSeg.png]]
|Reverses any use of the Expand segment command or reduce the size of a segment.
|-
|Translation
|To Fuzzy
|Shift+Ctrl+PgDn
|[[File:TranslateUntilFuzzy.png]]
|Translates until a non-exact match is found.
|-
|Translation
|Toggle empty
|Ctrl+Alt+X
|[[File:Cleanup Project16.png]]
|Empty the target - remove the tags from the target - restore the original target.
|-
|Translation
|Auto Propagate
|
|[[File:autopropagate.png]]
|Auto propagate segment change through all the document for same source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Toggle Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Up
|[[File:dropdown.png]]
|Transforms all the terms in the source segment into placeables. If repeated, returns to the previous mode.
|-
|Translation
|Next Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Right
|[[File:Next_Placeable16.png]]
|Selects the next placeable element in the source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Copy Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Down
|[[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]]
|Places the selected transposable element from the source segment into the target segment, where the cursor is located (or replaces highlighted text in target segment).
|-
|Translation
|Previous Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Left
|[[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]]
|Selects the previous placeable element in the source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Next word
|Tab
|
|Places the subsequent source word with letter + Tab
|-
|Translation
|Previous word
|Shift+Tab
|
|Places the preceding source word with letter+Shift+Tab.
|-
|Translation
|Target Height
|Ctrl+Alt+T
|[[File:increase_target.png]]
|Increases the height of the target segment for easier viewing.
|-
|Wordfast Anywhere
|Wordfast setup
|Ctrl+Alt+W
|[[File:Setup.png]]
|Opens the Wordfast Anywhere general setup dialog.
|-
|Edit
|Find & Replace
|Ctrl+Alt+R
|[[File:FindReplace.png]]
|Find and replace in the document.
|-
|Edit
|Edit Source
|Ctrl+Alt+K
|[[File:EditSource16.png]]
|Used to make minor corrections to the source segment.
|-
|Edit
|Edit Note
|Ctrl+Alt+J
|[[File:Edit_Note16.png]]
|Allows you to create or edit a note.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 1
|Shift+Ctrl+1
|[[File:insert_c1.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 2
|Shift+Ctrl+2
|[[File:insert_c2.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 3
|Shift+Ctrl+3
|[[File:insert_c3.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Case Changer
|Shift+F3
|[[File:caseChanger.png]]
|Toggle between lowercase, uppercase, and capitalization.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|TMs and glossaries setup
|
|[[File:Preferences16round.png]]
|Opens the TMs and glossaries setup dialog.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Concordance search
|Ctrl+Alt+C
|[[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]]
|Performs a search in the TM and displays all segments containing the search term.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Glossary Search
|Ctrl+Alt+G
|[[File:GlossarySearch.png]]
|Search in the glossary for the word or phrase selected in the source segment.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Add term to glossary
|Ctrl+Alt+T
|[[File:TermEdit.png]]
|Pops up a glossary term entry form.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Copy TU
|Alt+right
|[[File:CopyTU.png]]
|Copy a TU from the TM panel to the target segment. If many, press many times, it will start by copying the second one assuming the first one is already copied. The TU can be a MT proposal.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Delete TU
|Ctrl+Alt+Backspace
|[[File:DeleteTU.png]]
|Delete from TM the current or selected TU visible in the TM panel.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Update TU
|
|[[File:force_tm_addtu.png]]
|Commits to TM the source and target segment as a new TU or update an existing one.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Force TM search
|
|[[File:force_tm.png]]
|Perform a direct search (without cache) in the TM.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Force MT
|
|[[File:force_mt.png]]
|Forces the translation of the segment by the configured MT engines like Google Translate / Microsoft Translator.
|-
|View
|Outline pane
|Ctrl+Alt+D
|[[File:panelOutline.png]]
|Closes or opens the Outline. The outline is a view of all the segments showing which ones are translated but also which ones have notes or are provisional.
|-
|View
|TM pane
|Ctrl+Alt+M
|[[File:panelTm.png]]
|Closes or opens the TM pane.
|-
|View
|Glossary pane
|Ctrl+Alt+H
|[[File:panelGlo.png]]
|Closes or opens the Glossary (Terminology) pane.
|-
|View
|Move next block
|Page Down
|[[File:moveNextScreen.png]]
|Move to the next block of document's content.
|-
|View
|Move previous block
|Page Up
|[[File:movePrevScreen.png]]
|Move to the previous block of document's content.
|-
|View
|First of Block
|Home
|[[File:move_first_seg_screen.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the first segment of the block.
|-
|View
|Last of Block
|End
|[[File:move_last_seg_screen.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the last segment of the page.
|-
|View
|First of Doc
|Ctrl+Home
|[[File:move_first_seg_doc.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the first segment of the document.
|-
|View
|Last of Doc
|Ctrl+End
|[[File:move_last_seg_doc.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the last segment of the document.
|}

== WFA Setup ==
The WFA Setup menu is accessible by the shortcut Ctrl+Alt+W or the [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab.

Six tabs are visible: General, TM rules, Shortcuts, Segmentation, Pandora's box and QA.

=== General tab ===
Several general settings can be don in this tab.

[[File:wfasetup1.png]]

==== Machine translation ====
Click on '''MT''' tab to access the ''Machine Translation'' settings.

[[File:wfasetup2.png]]

WFA gives you the ability to translate each segment by online translation services like Google Translate and Microsoft Translator. The translations proposed are not ever likely to be fully acceptable. However, by making a few small adjustments, you will be able to use them extensively in your translations.

[[File:Warning.png]] When using this service, the source segments that will return a translation are transmitted to Google and Microsoft. It is up to you whether or not to accept these translations; these companies are not made aware of your choice. However, be aware that sending the segments to Google and Microsoft may raise privacy issues between you and your customers.

Each MT engine has a window were to set it's settings. Bear in mind that some MT may require a personal ID or password.
* Use '''Add''' button to add a new MT.
* Use '''Edit''' the settings for the selected MT on the list.
* Use '''Remove''' will delete the selected MT on the list.
* Use '''Test''' to run a test on all the MTs with the active checkbox marked.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''To use a MT engine, it must be added to the list and with the "Active" checkbox marked'''.

On each MT engine window you can set its settings (i.e. the key or url). You can also set a particular values for
* ''Engine timeout'' as in some cases (i.e. small segments) the MT requires more time to get back with a result.
* ''Engine score'' value for each MT.
* ''Details'' for extra information about the MT like the list of available languages.
[[File:Warning.png]] Each MT engine has a different set of available languages.

Finally, there are several general options such as
* When to use the MT (when no TM match, when no TM full match, always)
* Remove tags before sending to MT.
* Use all available providers on ''force MT''.
* Do not copy MT proposition to target.
* Enable MT for review (May slow down the revision process)

===== Custom Machine translation =====

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Note:''' this section is '''DIY (Do It Yourself)'''. Our hotline cannot assist in the customization of an MT engine, because that requires knowledge of the remote provider's specifications. However, public discussion groups may offer help.

If your remote Machine Translation provider is not listed (as a provider tab), you can use '''Custom tab''' to create a custom connector for it. This is only possible if your MT provider's API is using a REST standard, and returns results in a JSON, or similar, format. That is the case with major MT providers currently available with WFC (Google, Microsoft, WorldLingo, deepL, MyMemory, etc.).

In WFA's Machine Translation setup, go to the "Custom MT" tab.

[[File:CustomMT.JPG]]

Note the various elements:
* URL: Tells WFA which is the url of the MT provider with the needed parameters.
** {ss} will be replaced with the source segment to be translated. This parameter must be present.
** {sl} and {tl} will be replaced with your given source and target language codes.
** {key} will be replaced with the given API key
* API Key: Some MT providers need a personal key, this is the place to add it.
* Source language: Source language of the text, it corresponds to the {sl} parameter in the URL.
* Target Language: Target language which will be the text translated to, it corresponds to the {tl} parameter in the URL.
* POST: includes parameters that should be used with the POST method, concatenated like in the URL format. If the parameters needs to be in JSON format, choose the way how to write it (either URL encoded text to convert to JSON either a direct JSON string).
* HEADER: includes parameters that need to be in the header of the request. The format is param:value. Put one parameter per line.
* Json key: Some MT providers return the translated text in a parameter (translation, translatedTex...etc), this tells WFA how to spot the returned translated segment.

Once all the elements are set you can test the connection by using the '''Test''' button. Optionally you can change the text to be tested on the text box next to the button.

Let's assume your preferred MT provider is WorldLingo and we create a custom engine for it. You explore WorldLingo's API documentation. It essentially boils down to a query URL, with parameters. On Custom tab you can use:

* URL: https://www.worldlingo.com/S000.1/api?wl_data={ss}&wl_srclang={sl}&wl_trglang={tl}&wl_password=secret
* API Key: Empty, as no API Key is needed.
* Source language: en.
* Target Language: fr.
* Json key: Empty.

'''Practical example:'''

Opening a browser, you begin by testing the URL. In the following example, the raw URL was customized for an English-to-French language pair, to translate "Hello World". Your real URL will look different, the following is an example based on WorldLingo:

::: ''http://www.worldlingo.com/S000.1/api?wl_data=Hello%20world&wl_srclang=en&wl_trglang=fr&wl_password=secret''

You can try pasting the above URL into a browser's address bar. If things go well, the site will send a reply:

::: ''Bonjour le monde''

Other MT providers may use a more complex JSON reply, in which case you specify the JSON key so that WFA can identify the result. Here the key is "translation" so you would use Json key => translation

::: ''{"responseData":{"translation":"Bonjour le monde","match":1} }''

Your MT provider may require more parameters, such as a secret ID key (aka an API key), or other elements, in which case, you should hard-code those in the URL.

==== Fonts ====
Font Size: this setting only affects the font size on the screen, your document will keep all its original layout unchanged. The available sizes are selected from the drop-down list.

Font Family: this setting only affects the fonts displayed on the screen, your document will keep its entire original layout unchanged. You can specify a specific font or a font family, for example Arial, Helvetica, Sans Serif (sans serif font, default) or Times New Roman, Times, Serif (seriffed font).

==== Target segment selection ====
Positions the mouse pointer at the opening of the segment, with or without selection.

# Cursor at start – no text selected, cursor positioned at the beginning of the segment.
# Cursor at end – no text selected, cursor positioned at the end of the segment. This is the default setting.
# Segment selected – The target segment is entirely selected.

==== Fuzzy Threshold in % ====
Percentage of similarity required for a TU contained in the TM to be suggested as a translation of the source segment. If several TUs meet this criterion, the TU with the highest percentage will be offered. In this case you can select the subsequent TUs with [[File:CopyTU.png]] '''''Copy TU''''' button on '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' tab or using the corresponding shortcut (Alt + Right).

The default percentage (75%) is recommended for most translations, but in some cases it may be appropriate to change it. For example, if you are translating short segments containing only 3 words, a fuzzy threshold of 75% will only offer those TUs which are identical (100%) and those where two words are identical, i.e. 66%, will never be proposed.

==== Record Revisions ====
Check this option if you want to save a record of the changes on translated segments.

==== Enable Auto-Suggest ====
Check this option if you want to get suggestions while you type on a translated segment.

Auto-Suggest can be configured in '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.238_Configure_Auto-Suggest|Pandora's box #7]]''' to add or remove items.

==== Tab behavior ====
Check this option if you want to use click or hover for triggering events on Top Menu bar.

==== Enable auto-hide buttons ====
Check this option to make toop toolbar buttons hide automatically.

==== Enable Segment Tool Bar ====
Check this option to enable the Segment Tool Bar on Horizontal and Vertical views. You can customize it on Pandora's Box #15

=== TM rules tab ===

Here you have the opportunity to establish penalties to be taken into account when calculating the similarity between the TM and the segment to be translated. In other words, the percentage of similarity is reduced, where applicable, according to the figure indicated for each of the following rules. Some rules allow fractional reductions, but this only applies to the calculation: the final reduction will be the sum of all penalties rounded to the nearest whole number. If the percentage of similarity to the TU, reduced to the sum of the penalties, is less than the specified Fuzzy Threshold percentage, it will not be proposed.

[[File:wfasetup3.png]]

Penalties for the following rules are activated only if the box on their right is checked. They apply only to the TUs proposed by the TM or VLTM, not from machine translation, which has its own non-modifiable penalty.

* ''Case penalty'': if there is a difference in case (upper and lower case) between the TU and the segment to be translated, WFA can ignore this and show 100% similarity. But you can assign a penalty of between 1 and 5 points for the difference in case. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 1.

* ''Non literal penalty'': this penalty detects differences due to special characters such as dashes, quotation marks, apostrophes, punctuation and whitespace characters (non-breaking space, horizontal and vertical tabs, ...). There exist several codes for representing each of these special characters. WFA can ignore these and show 100% similarity; otherwise a penalty is calculated using the following method: every time a difference is encountered, it adds the value of the first parameter (0.25, 0.50 or 0.75), which by default is 0.50. The second parameter sets out what the minimum value of the penalty is (default is 1). Since the penalty is necessarily an integer, if the value of the penalty is 0.25 and there is only one in the segment to be translated, the minimum is not reached. Finally, the third parameter sets the maximum penalty to be assigned, even if the addition of all the differences of this rule exceeds that figure (10 by default). This rule is selected by default with a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 10.

* ''Tag penalty'': this rule works exactly the same way as the previous one, but applied to the tags (markers that represent the bits of code used to format the document <1>). This rule is selected by default with a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 10.

* ''Alignment user penalty'': the TUs found in a memory imported into WFA produced by an alignment tool and having the identifier "TALIGN!" may be assigned a penalty from 1 to 10. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 3. Please note, TUs from an alignment may not have the "TALIGN!" identifier.

* ''MT user penalty'': the TUs found in a memory imported into WFA produced by machine translation and having the identifier "MT!" may be penalised from 1 to 10. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 25. Please note, TUs from a machine translation may not have the "MT!" identifier.

* ''Multiple translation penalty'': In the case of a source segment with multiple 100% matches, i.e. several TUs having the same source segment but different translated segments, a penalty may be applied to warn of a possible choice between translations. This scenario is rare and no penalty is assigned by default.

* ''Attribute penalty'': attributes are identifiers that are associated with a particular TU at the time that it is recorded in the memory. There are five possible attributes: the first is fixed (it identifies the user who posted the TU), while the other four can be user defined. In general, translators use attribute no. 1 to define the subject of the text to be translated and the attribute no. 2 to define the client who owns the text. The other two attributes are free to be used for anything else. For example, if the proposed TU is from a text whose subject is "electronics", it will be penalised if the subject of the text to be translated is "medicine." In other words if the TU is 100% identical to the segment to be translated, it will be displayed with a percentage similarity of 98% if the penalty applied is 2 points.

The penalty can be a number from 1 to 5, valid for the four attributes. By default this rule is not active.

If you use a TM uploaded from Wordfast Classic or Pro, the existing attributes of the TU may be penalised.

=== Shortcuts tab ===

You can set the shortcuts you want to use.

[[File:wfasetup4.png]]

WFA shortcuts are not immutable. If some of them do not suit you, you can reassign them. To do this, click on the '''''upd''''' link of the shortcut you wish to change.

[[File:wfasetup5.png]]

In this example, corresponding to the first shortcut, you see the name of the command and a drop-down list. Choose '''None''' if you want to remove the shortcut or choose another from the list. Then click '''''Update''''' to confirm or '''''Cancel''''' to dismiss the dialog. Repeat for all the shortcuts that you want to change. The new keyboard shortcuts will be displayed.

The last four commands have no shortcuts; however, you can assign shortcuts to them if you wish.

If after modifying several shortcuts you want to return them to their original state, click '''''Restore default shortcuts'''''.

Finally, click '''''Save''''' settings to confirm any changes or '''''Cancel''''' to dismiss the dialog.

=== Segmentation tab ===
This tab defines the rules for segmentation.

[[File:Segmentation111.JPG]]

* ''Segmentation style'': this block determines how the segmentation will be performed. If you choose ''Wordfast /Trados segmentation'' (default) the standard end-of-segment markers are defined as follows: full stop, colon, question mark, exclamation mark and tab (Tab). You can add other characters as well as space (Space), non-breaking space (NBSP), carriage return (CR) and line feed (LF). You can add as markers: a number followed by an end of segment marker (A number Followed by ESM ends a segment – default), an end of segment marker not followed by a space (An ESM without a trailing space ends a segment) and an end of segment marker followed by a space followed by a lowercase letter (An ESM followed by a space followed by a lower-case letter ends a segment). Although you can change these markers, it is recommended to maintain them in such manner that if you share your translations and your memories with other translators, all will follow the same rule.

[[File:Warning.png]] Segmentation is performed at the time of uploading the document to WFA. You cannot therefore change the rules applying to that document during the course of its translation.

The other segmentation rules that you can choose are:
* ''Break segmentation'': segmentation is done according to the end of paragraph character (carriage return) or the tag for HTML files.
* ''Idiom segmentation'': segmentation follows the rules of the software program Idiom.
* ''SRX segmentation'': the segmentation is done by using a previously uploaded file. It follows the rules of the SRX standard, which has become a standard like TMX for formatting memories and TBX for formatting glossaries. In the case of SRX segmentation, abbreviations are also included.

* ''TM compatibility'': You must ensure the compatibility according to the memory you have uploaded or the subsequent use of your documents. By default, WFA's memory is compatible with that of Wordfast Classic and Pro (Assume Wordfast TM). If this is your choice, you can also specify if you have old projects made with Wordfast Classic or Pro (check Legacy TM created by old projects). You can also establish that the memory was created by Trados (Assume Trados TM), even adding that it was created by Trados and Word (TM created by Trados + Word); by Idiom (Assume Idiom TM) or by SDLX (Assume SDLX TM).

*''Abbreviations'': Abbreviations end with a full stop, which WFA then interprets as an end of segment marker. To avoid this, WFA allows you to create and manage a list of abbreviations. While WFA already has lists for some languages, others are empty – the user must provide the necessary information. The abbreviations are entered into the text box, one after another, without spaces and separated by a comma. Once updated, save your list by clicking on Save the language. Repeat for each language that you translate.

=== Pandora's box tab ===
This tab has many different settings. Some of this settings will open a new dialog.

[[File:wfasetup7.png]]

==== #1 PC, tablet and smartphone modes ====
Use this mode if you are using a mobile device. The segment toolbar is enlarged; local file access is disabled.

==== #2 Real time collaboration ====
Real time collaboration disables data caching. This forces the TM search before you open a segment, causing a response delay. Avoid using this mode unless sharing a TM and if the TU updates need to be shared immediately.

==== #3 Document file name convention ====
Customize your document name for download by adding a prefix and/or a suffix.

==== #4 Special characters insertion ====
Configure the 7 special characters insertion of the Edition tab.

==== #5 Configure online dictionaries ====
Configure URLs for 2 online search engines.

* Click "Add" to add a new dictionary.
* After filling the "Friendly name" and "Url" correctly you need to use "Test" to check it works fine.
* Use "Save" to add the dictionary to the list. Bear in mind that if the URL already exists it cannot be added.

If all worked fine, the list should have been updated and your dictionary available to be used.

The list does not use "Friendly name" to sort the dictionaries, so you need to check all the list to find the one you added.

In order to use one dictionary you need to select it from the list and save the settings.

==== #6 Multiple Ctrl+Alt+Down toggles placeable ====
Use this feature to toggle between copy the target term, copy the source term, or leave blank.

==== #7 Configure Auto-Suggest ====
Auto-suggest is activated at the '''General''' tab when clicking on [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab.

On this section of Pandora's Box is where you can '''configure which suggestions will Auto-suggest show'''.

[[File:AutoSuggest1.JPG]]

'''Auto-suggest can show different items''' such as: Glossary matches, tags, word from with a capital letter, numbers, file path, email addresses, URLs, chunks of Machine Translation, date and number conversion, text in parentheses (), text in braces {}, bracketed text [], word containing special character and unit conversion.

On the left there is a combo box to select the number of typed characters that will trigger auto-suggest to show up.

For '''date and number conversion''' there is a sub dialog, that can be opened by clicking on the [[File:Edit.png]] button on the left.

[[File:AutoSuggest2.JPG]]

Here you can set how dates and numbers will be converted and shown in the auto-suggested text.

For '''dates''' you can choose a different format and separator. For instance source ''2015.04.01'' could be converted to ''01/04/2015'' on target.

For '''numbers''' you can choose a different group and decimal separator. For instance source ''123.456,00'' could be converted to ''123 456.00'' on target.

==== #8 Configure Filters ====
Configure conversion of documents from their original format to the internal editor format.

For some files you can configure some parameters that will tell the filter what to do for some situations such as translate comments or sheet names.

You can make this configuration for: '''xls, xlsx, ppt, pptx, doc, docx, rtf, htm, html, mif, idml, xml (Text based files)'''.

[[File:Pandora9.JPG]]

On this section there are also 3 settings that will apply to any file.

* '''Editor format'''. To choose which type of '''bilingual file (TXML or TXLF)''' the filter should produce.[[File:Warning.png]] '''''The download bilingual file will be of the type used when the file was uploaded.''''' For example if the file was uploaded using TXML, the bilingual download will be TXML. A file cannot be uploaded using one type (TXML) and download the bilingual file of the other type (TXLF). The workaround is to change the type and upload the file again.

* '''Extract numbers'''. To define the filter action on source segments that contain only numbers.

** ''all'': Extracts all segments with only numbers for translation
** ''time_date_measure'': Extracts only segments with time and date
** ''none'': Does not extract any segments that contain only numbers

* '''Segmentation on break'''. To enable segmentation on line breaks.

==== #9 Configure double click to open/close a segment ====
Configure opening/closing actions on a segment by double clicking in the document panel. This is always active for mobile plain text mode.

[[File:Pandora101.png]]

==== #10 Configure TM Search ====
Set the timeout for searches. After the timeout, the search is cancelled and returns nothing. The default value is 4 seconds.

==== #11 Copy source when no TM match and no MT proposition ====
Copy source to target when no TM match and no MT proposition.

==== #12 Do not show empty paragraph line in Classic view ====
Do not copy MT proposition to target.

==== #13 Hide segment's IDs column on the Table view ====
Do not copy MT proposition to target.

==== #14 Custom Tab settings ====
Use this mode if you are using a mobile device. The segment toolbar is enlarged; local file access is disabled.

==== #15 Customize Segment Toolbar ====
Dialog to choose which buttons will be placed on Segment toolbar. Segment toolbar is enabled on General tab.

==== #16 Copy untranslatable to target automatically and open next segment ====
Define what will be considered an "Untranslatable segment" which will be copied to target automatically and open next segment

=== QA tab ===
Set here the criteria that will be used to conduct an audit of quality when doing a '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Transcheck|Transcheck]]'''

[[File:wfasetup8.png]]

There are several criteria that can be checked, some of which can also ''be checked while translating'' (by using the second checkbox column under '''While Translating''' title).

Here is a short description:

* '''Source & target lengths''': Compares the character count between the source and target segments. You can set the minimum and maximum % of allowed character count for the target segment.

* '''Empty target''': Checks for an empty target segment. This is always checked while translating.

* '''Numerical''': Checks that the numerical values between the source and target segments are correct.

* '''Placeable''': Checks if the tags are copied correctly to the target segments. This is always checked while translating.

* '''Forbidden chars''': Checks if the target segment includes forbidden characters. You can set the list of forbidden characters that should not be included in the target segment.

* '''Punctuations''': Checks for consistency in punctuation between source and target segments. You can set the punctuation marks that should not be included in the target segment. [[File:notice.png]] The transcheck punctuation only works on end of segmentation punctuation.

* '''Untranslatable''': Compares the source and target segments to check if the untranslatable content is consistent. You can set the untranslatable text that must be retained in the target segment.

* '''Copied source''': Checks for untranslated text when copied source option is used.

* '''Blacklists''': Checks if the target segment includes blacklisted terms. You can set blacklisted terms that should not be included in the target segment. [[File:notice.png]] The blacklisted term list must be a tab delimited file (bad term + tabulation + proposed term).

* '''Terminology''': Checks if all term translations from an active glossary are used in the target of a segment. You can enable or disable Ignore Case option.

* '''First word capitalization''': Checks if the first letter of the segment is capitalized.

* '''Edited exact match''': Checks if any exact match segments from the TM have been edited.

* '''Unedited fuzzy''': Checks if any fuzzy match segments from the TM have been left unedited.

* '''Source Consistency''': Checks consistency between source segments if the target is repeated.

* '''Target consistency''': Checks consistency between target segments if the source is repeated.

== Profile Configuration ==
Go to [[File:User profile.png]] '''''User Profile''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' menu to see information about your account and change some settings of your profile.

[[File:Profileconfig1.png]]

=== Change email ===
Use this option to change the email of your account.

[[File:Profileconfig2.png]]

=== Change password ===
Check the [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_change_my_password Wordfast Anywhere FAQ] for more information.

=== Delete account ===
Use this option to remove your account from Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:Profileconfig4.png]]

Wordfast Anywhere 6 Manual

2022-02-11T11:43:12Z

Remiandre: /* Appending(Update) terms on an existing glossary in Wordfast Anywhere from a local glossary */

{{Languages}}
[[Category:Wordfast Anywhere]]

= Introduction =
Wordfast Anywhere (WFA) is the online version of the popular Wordfast computer assisted translation (CAT) program that provides much of the functionality of the Classic and Pro desktop versions. Instead of being installed as a program on the user’s computer, WFA is made accessible from Wordfast’s servers via a web browser, regardless of the operating system used (Windows, Mac, Linux, etc.). Every effort has been made to ensure that the user interface is as close as possible to the other Wordfast flavours: toolbars, icons, shortcuts and working methods. A Wordfast Classic or Pro user should be able to use WFA with almost zero assimilation time.

It is worth remarking that WFA is almost certainly the CAT program that integrates best with the popular Mac operating system. Unlike Java-based, cross-platform programs – including Wordfast Pro – that will run on the Mac but don’t integrate with system-wide tools such as the built in Dictionary, WFA will run in Mac-native browsers such as Safari, thus giving you access to the entire range of language and text handling tools that are built into the Mac OS environment.

[[File:WFA_pagina_5_new.jpg]]
[[File:WFA_pagina_6_new.jpg]]

With WFA you can translate a wide range of both editable (TXT, DOC, DOCX, RTF, XLS, PPT, ODT, HTML, TXML, MIF, INX, etc.) and non-editable (PDF, TIFF) documents. You can store up ten current documents in your workspace, deleting your finished translations to free up space and permit new documents to be uploaded.

You can also import the TMs (translation memories) of all the language pairs you work in. Your memories will progressively expand as and when you translate. They are stored securely and will not be shared or revealed without your authorisation. If you need a local copy, you can download your TM to your computer at any time.

As is the case with other Wordfast flavours, you can add terms to your glossary as you translate. You can also upload existing glossaries to your workspace, for all language pairs. Here again, your glossaries are secure and will not be shared or revealed unless you specifically invite a colleague. You can also download your glossary if you need a local copy.

The following instructions have been written for complete beginners. Having understood the above comments, a Wordfast Classic or Pro user should have no difficulty in using WFA intuitively.

Check the '''[[Wordfast Anywhere 6 Start Guide]]''' for a quick start.

Check our [https://www.freetm.com/jsp/terms.jsp Terms of use].

== How to use WFA ==
On Wordfast Anywhere every document belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a translation project.

So the first you need is a project. A project named "Project_1" is created by default, but you can create up to 3 projects.

A project needs a language pair. A default one is suggested but more can be added. Each language pair can have a TM and glossary assigned which will be used on several processes and also automatically assigned to the documents uploaded.

A project also needs a task. "Translate" is the one by default.

Once the project is created you can add the documents. Documents can be added to all language pairs or to specific ones. There is a maximum number of documents per project depending of the type of project.

Double-click a project to open it to see the content (documents grouped by language pairs).

Double-click a document to start/resume work.

[[File:notice.png]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rDhVYY02Cds Wordfast Anywhere 6 Basic Projects video]'''

= Login in to WFA account =
Check the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Login_in_to_WFA_account Login in to WFA account]''' section on the Start Guide.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you have not created an account yet, click on the '''''Create a new account''''' and follow the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#How_to_create_an_account instructions]'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you ever ''forget your password'', click on the '''''Forgot your password?''''' and follow the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Get_your_password_back instructions]'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you are having ''login problems'' check '''''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Cannot_log_in_to_Wordfast_Anywhere Cannot log in to Wordfast Anywhere]''''' and follow the instructions.

=User Interface =
The user interface is divided into several sections. A top menu with tabs and buttons, a main central panel that changes depending on where we are (project list, project content, document translation) and a bottom panel where information and messages are shown.

Once you are connected to WFA, the workspace appears.

This should look similar to the following screenshot (depending on the browser, operating system or device used to access WFA):

[[File:Newui6.PNG]]

The workspace can be modified at any point according to your requirements.
==Top Menu==
At the very top you can find the ''Top Menu'' which consists in '''two rows''': one for the different '''menus''' (tabs) and one for the '''buttons''' corresponding to the selected tab.

Use [[File:CollapseTop.png]] to hide the buttons. Use [[File:CollapseBottom.png]] to show the buttons.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a project or selecting/opening a document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a project is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when a project is selected from the project list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when more than one file is selected from the document list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus used for translation (Edit, view, translation, review and TM & Glossaries) are only visible when the document is opened. Those buttons keep working as always, just need to open the document.

===Wordfast Anywhere Menu===

This tab a miscellaneous of buttons concerning the Wordfast Anywhere project.

[[File:Wfatab6.PNG]]

* [[File:Logout16.png]]: Use it when you want to '''leave''' Wordfast Anywhere.
* [[File:User profile.png]]: Here you'll find your '''account information'''. You'll be able to change your ''Login'' email, the ''Security Question'', the ''Security Answer'' and delete your account.
* [[File:Preferences.png]]: Here is where you set the '''configuration''' of Wordfast Anywhere:''Font Size'', ''Machine translation'', ''TM rules'', ''Shortcuts'', ''Segmentation'', ''Transcheck'' rules...etc.
* [[File:Preferences16round.png]]: Global TM & glossary management (create, add, upload, merge, edit, download, delete... ), no more for assignment.
* [[File:WF Update16.png]]: This button will direct you to a site to '''align''' your files.
* [[File:help16.png]]: WFA Help:
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''start guide''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''PM start guide''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''FAQ''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''manual''' wiki page.
** If the previous wiki pages do not work, this is a pdf backup.
* [[File:Notice.png]]: There are 4 icons corresponding to different types of '''notifications''' ([[File:Warning.png]] ONLY displayed when there are notifications):
** Webmaster Info: notifications coming from Wordfast Anywhere administration (p.e stopping the server for a publication).
** Background Info: notifications about ''Background'' processes (p.e. Analyze, Spellcheck...etc).
** System Info: notifications from the system (p.e. an unsupported browser).
** TM Server Info: notifications realted to the TM Server (p.e. TM server is disconnected).

===Project Menu===
This tab has the tools concerning a project.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when a project is selected on the project list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a project is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available for standard projects.

No project selected on the project list.

[[File:ProjecttabAll.PNG]]

This are the basic buttons:

* [[File:Pm new project 16.png]]: '''New''' use it to create a project.
* [[File:Pm open project 16.png]]: '''Open''' the selected project from the project list.
* [[File:Analyze Project16.png]]: '''Analyze''' all the documents of the project. A report is generated.
* [[File:Pm delete project 16.png]]: '''Delete''' the selected project.
* [[File:Pm close project 16.png]]: '''Close''' an opened project.
* [[File:Pm import project 16.png]]: '''Import''' a .glp file.
* [[File:Pm export project 16.png]]: '''Export''' a project into a .glp file.
* [[File:Linguist16.png]]: Use it to '''Manage''' the team of '''linguists'''.

To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

===File Tab===
This tab has the tools concerning a file.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be available when more than one file is selected from the list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be also available when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a document is opened.

[[File:FiletabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:Translate File16.png]]: '''Open''' the selected file from the list.
* [[File:About wordfast16.png]]: Open the document with '''Wordfast Pro Online'''. [[File:Warning.png]] The use of Wordfast Pro Online will be discontinued on December 31, 2021.
* [[File:Close16.png]]: '''Close''' an opened file.
* [[File:Save16.png]]: Here you'll find all the '''Download''' options for a file (p.e. translated version, bilingual versions, TXML, unformatted text, Off-line Report Tool, TM from doc segments).
* [[File:Preferences16round.png]]: With this button you'll change the '''TM & Glossary''' configuration for the document.
* [[File:Analyze Project16.png]]: '''Analyze''' the selected document/s. A report is generated.
* [[File:Statistics16.png]]: Get the '''Statistics''' of the document.
* [[File:Modify Project16.png]]: Get information about the file.
* [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]]: '''Pre-translate''' the selected document/s.
* [[File:Mergetms16.png]]: Use this button to '''merge''' the document with a '''TXML''' file.
* [[File:mergetms16_menu.png]]: Use this button to '''merge''' the document with an imported '''OFRT''' file.
* [[File:Split.png]] [[File:Join.png]]: '''Split''' the document in parts. '''Join''' the parts together again.
* [[File:Share.png]] [[File:Revoke.png]]: '''Share''' the document with an other Wordfast Anywhere user. '''Revoke''' will finish the share.
* [[File:Translate File16.png]]: '''Fuzzy Open''' the file without full matches.
* [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]]: '''Extract''' the '''frequent''' segments.
* [[File:Edit16.png]]: '''Rename''' the file.

===Edit Tab===

This tab is a translation tool extension.

[[File:Warning.png]] This buttons will be available when the document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be available when a TM is being edited.

[[File:EdittabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:FindReplace.png]]: Use it to '''Find & Replace''' text but also to go to a particular segment or get a list of segments ''untranslated'', ''provisional'', with ''notes'' or with ''tag differences''.
* [[File:EditSource16.png]]: '''Edit''' the source segment.
* [[File:Edit_Note16.png]]: Create, edit or remove a '''Note''' on a segment.
* [[File:Insert_c.png]]: '''Insert special characters'''. 7 different characters can be defined on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => '''''Setup''''' button > '''''Pandora's box'''''
* [[File:Delete_alltargetseg.png]]: '''Delete''' '''tags''' in the document. This is only available when editing a TM and has 2 options: Delete all target tags or delete all document tags.
* [[File:delete_revisions.png]]: '''Delete''' the segment '''history'''.
* [[File:Delete_alltargetseg.png]]: '''Delete''' all '''target''' segments of the document.
* [[File:caseChanger.png]]: Toggle between lowercase, uppercase, and capitalization..

===View Tab===

In this tab you'll find the buttons to move through the document and show or hide the different panels.

[[File:ViewtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:PanelOutline.png]]: Show or hide '''Outline'''.
* [[File:panelTm.png]]: Show or hide '''TM''' panel.
* [[File:panelGlo.png]]: Show or hide '''Glossary''' panel.
* [[File:MovePrevScreen.png]]: Go to '''Previous Block'''.
* [[File:MoveNextScreen.png]]: Go to '''Next Block'''.
* [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]]: Toggle between the different document layout: Classic, Horizontal and Vertical.
* [[File:move_prev_seg.png]]: Go to '''Previous segment'''.
* [[File:move_next_seg.png]]: Go to '''Next segment'''.
* [[File:move_first_seg_screen.png]]: Go to '''First segment''' of '''Block'''.
* [[File:move_last_seg_screen.png]]: Go to '''Last segment''' of '''Block'''.
* [[File:move_first_seg_doc.png]]: Go to '''First segment''' of '''document'''.
* [[File:move_last_seg_doc.png]]: Go to '''Last segment''' of '''document'''.

===Translation Tab===

Find here all the tools to perform a translation

[[File:TranslationtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:StartNext.png]]: '''Start translation''' or open next segment.
* [[File:Previous.png]]: Open previous segment.
* [[File:CloseSave.png]]: '''Close and commit''' to the TM.
* [[File:Close retain.png]]: '''Close and retain''' the segment as provisional but not commit to the TM
* [[File:close.png]]: '''Close segment'''.
* [[File:close_restore.png]]: '''Close and delete''' target content.
* [[File:mark.png]]: Mark segment as '''provisional'''.
* [[File:CopySource.png]]: '''Copy source''' to target.
* [[File:Expand_Segment16.png]]: '''Expand''' segment.
* [[File:ShrinkSeg.png]]: '''Shrink''' segment.
* [[File:TranslateUntilFuzzy.png]]: '''Translate''' document '''until a fuzzy''' match.
* [[File:Cleanup_Project16.png]]: Toggle between Empty target, Remove tags and Restore.
* [[File:autopropagate.png]]: '''Auto propagate''' segment changes through all the document.
* [[File:dropdown.png]]: Toggle placeable.
* [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]]: Go to '''Next Placeable'''.
* [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]]: '''Copy Placeable'''.
* [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]]: Go to '''Previous Placeable'''.
* [[File:increase_target.png]]: Increase target segment height.
* [[File:Mic.png]]: Use '''Web Speech''' to dictate the target content. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY available for Chrome. Currently disabled due to browser security.'''

===Review Tab===

This tab has the tools to review the document.

[[File:ReviewtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:Preview16.png]]: '''Preview''' a PDF version of the document.
* [[File:Transcheck16.png]]: Do a '''quality control''' on the document
* [[File:Spellcheck16.png]]: '''Spellcheck''' the document

===TMs and Glossaries Tab===

Tab with the tools related to TM and glossaries actions.

[[File:TmglotabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]]: Concordance search
* [[File:GlossarySearch.png]]: Glossary Search
* [[File:TermEdit.png]]: Term edition.
* [[File:CopyTU.png]]: Copy TU.
* [[File:DeleteTU.png]]: Delete TU.
* [[File:Add File To Project16.png]]: Add TU.
* [[File:force_tm_addtu.png]]: Update TU.
* [[File:force_tm.png]]: Force TM search.
* [[File:force_mt.png]]: Force Machine Translation search.
* [[File:force_term.png]]: Force Glossary search.
* [[File:update_tm_doc.png]]: Update TM with document content.
* [[File:iSearch.png]]: Lookup in online dictionary.

===Help Tab===

Help section is on the '''Wordfast Anywhere Menu'''.

===Custom Tab===
In this tab you can add up to 15 buttons of your choice, so you can have together in one tab your most used buttons.
Selection any of the translation menus buttons (Edit, view, translation, review and TM & Glossaries) and the WFA setup and TM&Glossary set up.

[[File:custom_tab.png]]

To do so you must go to [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab. Then go to '''Pandora Box''' tab and go to ''Custom Tab settings'', where you will find all the buttons that can be added to the '''Custom''' tab

[[File:custom_tab2.png]]

==Panels==

===Project List Panel===
This panel shows the list of projects.

[[File:Projectlistpanel.png]]

Projects will be listed here. '''Double click on one project''' or select it and use [[File:Pm open project 16.png]]'''Open''' from the top menu bar to open the project.

===Project content Panel===
When opening a project, the ''Content Panel'' area will show the content of the project, the list of documents in the project.

[[File:ProjectContentpanel.png]]

Main areas are:

* '''Header row (1)''': In this row you'll fine the headers of the columns. The columns are: Languages/file (1), Vol. (1C) and the columns for the different jobs will follow (1D). This row will change the background color according to the project status: blue for ''In preparation'', orange for ''In progress'' and green for ''completed''. Use the '''Add files''' button (1A) to add files to all language pairs and use '''dashboard''' button (1B) to see an estimation of cost of the project.
* '''Project setup (2)'''Click on the ''project name'' or icon next to it to open the project setup dialog.
* '''Language Row (3)''': In this row several icons will be shown depending on the file selection to perform actions such as add files to the language pair (3A), delete selected files (3B) or assign linguist to jobs (3C). Use the '''remove language pair''' icon (3D) to delete the language pair ([[File:Warning.png]] all the documents inside will be permanently deleted).
* '''Note (4)''' this icon allows to add a note to the document.
* '''TM & glossaries (5)''' This are the TMs and glossaries assigned to the document, mouse-over to see extra information. This TM and glossary assignment will be used for the tasks.
* On the '''Status bar''' you'll find information about the project.
* Clicking on the file name will open the document. And clicking on each of the other cell text or icon will open the edit dialog for that cell.

===Translation Panels===
When a document is opened for translation, the screen is divided in 4 different panels.

[[File:Panels.png]]

====Outline====
Show/Hide Outline panel using '''''View''''' tab => '''''Show/hide Outline''''' [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button

The outline displays all the segments of the document.
The available status are:
* A white box indicates that the segment is not translated
* A green box indicates a translated segment
* A yellow box indicates a provisional segment
* An 'i' after segment id indicates a segment having a note
* The black thick border on the box indicates the current document selected on document panel
* The pink border on the box indicates the visible segments in the document panel

You can jump and open any segment of the document by clicking on its number.
If the segment is not visible on the document panel (blue border instead of pink), the document panel will be refreshed.

Once a segment is opened you can use
'''''Edit''''' tab => '''''Edit Note''''' [[File:Edit_Note16.png]] button to create/delete a note and also '''''Translation ''''' tab => '''''Provisional''''' [[File:mark.png]] button to mark/unmark a provisional segment.

====TM Panel====
This panel shows the matches from TM or MT for the current segment.

You can show or hide this panel using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:panelTm.png]] button.

====Glossary Panel====
This panel shows the matching terms for the current segment.

You can show or hide this panel using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:panelGlo.png]] button.

====Document Panel====

When a document is opened, it shows the segments content.

Wordfast Anywhere do not load the entire document in the editor if there are many segments.

While translating the segments are added one by one to the editor, but if you can move inside the document to see any part you want.

To do so, you can use:
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:MovePrevScreen.png]] button to go to '''Previous Block'''.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:MoveNextScreen.png]] button to go to '''Next Block'''.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button to show '''Outline''' and then jump and open any segment of the document by clicking on its number. More information [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline here]

This is how an opened document looks like:

[[File:document_panel_doc.png]]

=====Document Layout=====
Using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] button you can change the document layout, which is the way segments are shown on Document Panel. The three possible views are:

'''''Classical'''''

[[File:ClassicalLayout.png]]

'''''Horizontal'''''

[[File:HorizontalLayout.png]]

'''''Vertical'''''

[[File:VerticalLayout.png]]

===Status Panel===
Always present at the bottom. Here you can find several information about the project, file, TM, display, translation process. Also some messages will be showed here.

==Other features==

===Show/Hide Top Menu Buttons ===
Buttons on the top menu can be hidden.

Use [[File:CollapseTop.png]] to hide the buttons. Use [[File:CollapseBottom.png]] to show the buttons.

= Project Operations =
A new Project menu bar has been added after Wordfast Anywhere menu. Yes! Project Management (PM) has been introduced to WFA.

* * A project named "Project_1" is created by default. If you had an account before version 6, it will contain all the files from the previous version grouped by language pair.
* Every document now belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a project.
* Double-click a project to open it to see the content (documents grouped by language pairs).
* Double-click a document to start/resume work.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a project.

[[File:notice.png]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rDhVYY02Cds Wordfast Anywhere 6 Basic Projects video]'''

== Create a New Project ==
On the Project tab click on [[File:Pm new project 16.png]]'''New''' to create a new project. This will open the ''Project Seup'' window where the settings for the project are done.

To access the project setup once the project has been created, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

[[File:Createproject.PNG]]
[[File:Createproject1.PNG]]
[[File:Createproject2.PNG]]

The ''Project Setup'' window has two sections that need to be set in order to create the project. Setting one section opens the next one.

;1.General
: On this section general information of the project is set. This includes:
# Project name (Compulsory)
# Description (optional)
# Project type. Defines the type of the project:
#* Standard: For translators working alone.
#* Advanced: For Project Managers (PMs) managing large, multi-language projects.
# Project status (for advanced type). Defines the status of the project:
#* In preparation (blue): When project is being prepared (files, TMs and glossaries and linguist being added)
#* In progress (orange): This marks the start of the project. Files are shared with the linguist at this point.
#* Completed (green): The project is finished.
# Currency(optional). It will be used to calculate the project cost.
# Decimals(optional). When this checkbox is marked the project estimated cost will show numbers with decimals.
# Auto(optional). By default Project Manager will be responsible of pushing files to the next job when completion is done. Mark this checkbox to automatically sent files to the next job upon completion.
;2.Language Pairs and tasks
: On this section language pairs and tasks are added.
* Use the '''+''' next to the language pair header to add a new language pair. This will open the language selection dialog and then the TM and glossaries dialog to assign them to the language pair.
* Use the '''+''' at the end of the header row to add new tasks. Only 10 tasks can be added.
* A row is shown for each language pair where the default word rate (left box) and speed rate (right box) for each task can be set.
* Use the '''-''' next to the language pair to remove it. [[File:Warning.png]] Associated files and shares will be revoked.
* Use the '''-''' next to the task name to remove it. [[File:Warning.png]] Associated files and shares will be revoked.

Once all compulsory fields are set, click on '''Save project''' to save the project and go to the ''Project Content panel''.

[[File:Warning.png]] It is possible to move from standard to advanced but opposite is only possible if the advanced project has only one task.

== Modify Project Setup ==
To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

Use this to change any of the project settings defined on the project creation.

[[File:Warning.png]] It is possible to move from standard to advanced but opposite is only possible if the advanced project has only one task.

It is the same than for creating a project, so check the section above to know about the different parts and settings.

== Setting up language pair, Translation Memories and glossaries ==
Languages are added/removed from the ''Project Setup'' dialog.

To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

Check ''Create Project'' section above to know about it.

=== Language pair with its associated TMs and glossaries set in the project setup ===

To access the project setup dialog, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

[[File:Project_setup.png]]

Click on the language pair '''''+''''' button.

[[File:Langpair_dialog.png]]

Enter the languages and save, the TMs and glossaries dialog opens.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair.png]]

* If no TM and glossary exists for the language pair, a new dialog will propose you to create them. Save and wait they are listed.
* You can create and choose one or more TMs and glossaries. They are selected by checking the row in the '''''Active''''' column.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair_2.png]]

Finally save the TMs and glossaries selection by clicking on the '''''Save''''' button. The new language pair is now in the project setup and one icon is displayed for each TM and glossary.

[[File:Project_setup_2.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] The TMS and glossaries can be updated for a language pair by clicking on the icons. But if documents already exists for that language pair, they will not be affected by this change, only new documents added after the update.

=== TMs and glossaries set individually for a document ===
This selection for a document is overwriting the Language pair selection.
In the project content select a document by checking it and then click on the '''''TMs and glossaries''''' button [[File:Preferences16round.png]] of the '''''File''''' menu.

[[File:Project_content_3.png]]

The same TMs and glossaries dialog opens.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair_3.png]]

Saving will update only the TMs and glossaries for the selected document. A control can done hovering the TM icon.

[[File:Project_content_2.png]]

== Add/Remove Files ==
From the '''Project Content Panel''' there are two ways to add files to a project.

* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the header will add the files to all the languages in the project.
* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the language row. This will add the files only to that language.

[[File:Pmaddfiles.PNG]]

To remove a file, first use the checkbox to select it and then use the [[File:Remove16.png]] icon on the language row.

[[File:Pmdeletefile.PNG]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Associated shares will be revoked.

Several files can be selected to be removed at the same time.

== Project dashboard ==
Using the [[File:Pm_cost_16.png]] icon on the header will show the estimated cost of the project. Click on the icon again to hide costs.

[[File:Pmdashboard.PNG]]

== Advanced Features ==
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

Advanced projects have some extra features to manage the files.

=== Task TM ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

Click on the TM icon on the file column to set how the TM will be used on the tasks.

[[File:PmaddtmPNG.PNG]]

There are different options for the TM use:
*'''''Share TM'''''
**The selected TM will be shared with linguists.
**This is the best option to use.
**Translator will have exact and fuzzy matches.
**Translator can use concordance.
*'''''Create Project TM'''''
**The selected TM will NOT be shared.
**It will be used to create a temporary project TM with the matches from the file/s
**The temporary project TM will be shared.
*'''''Pretranslate'''''
**The selected TM will NOT be shared.
**It will be used to pretransalte the document/s.
**Only one TU match (the highest) per segment will be available to the translator.
**Concordance cannot be used.
**Concordance will only be used in this temporary TM

[[File:Warning.png]] Once a task has started it is not possible to change this assignment.

To change the TM assigned click on the same icon and change the TM selection by marking the ''active'' checkbox for the TMs you want to use.
To unassign the TMs clean all the ''active'' checkboxes.

=== Task Glossaries ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

To assign glossaries to tasks follow the instructions for TMs, but using the ''active'' checkboxes on the glossaries side of the dialog.

=== Manage Linguists ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

The Manage Linguist window can be opened by using the [[File:Linguist16.png]] icon on the '''Project''' tab or the '''Manage linguists''' buttons on the ''Assign Job'' window.

This allows the PM to create a team of linguists that will be used on the project jobs.

The same linguist can be used in several languages and roles.

[[File:Pmlinguist1.PNG]]

Main areas are:

* '''Add new linguist to a new language pair (1)''': Use [[File:Pm_linguist_add_16.png]] icon to add a new linguist to the team for a new language pair.
* '''Add or remove a linguist from a language pair (2)''': Use [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] icon to add a linguist to a language pair and use [[File:Pm_collapse_16.png]] icon to remove it.
* '''Linguist task grid (3)''': In this grid, each cell shows the RATE-SPEED-SCORE settings for a linguist. The grid has 4 columns, one for each role: Translator (TR), Proofreader (PR), Revise (RE) and QA. In addition '''dark values mean that linguist has been marked as "able" to do that role'''. Grey values indicate that linguist is not marked as "able" to do that role. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''

==== New Linguist ====
Use [[File:Pm_linguist_add_16.png]] or [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] to add a new linguist.

[[File:Pmlinguistnew.PNG]]

Introduce the following information to add a linguist.

* '''Email''': It must be the email of the linguist WFA account.
* '''Initials''': Short 4 character nickname for the linguist.
* '''Ctry''': Country of the linguist.
* '''Comment''': Some words about the linguist.
* '''Source language''' and '''target language''' that the linguist can work with.
* Role performance. There are 4 default roles a linguist can do on project tasks.
** Mark the '''checkbox''' if the linguist is able to do the role. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''
** '''Rate''': Linguist minim rate. Rate is measured in import per word. The project currency will be user with the import. For example 0.5 Eur per word.
** '''Speed''': Linguist speed rate (words/day). For example 3,000 words/day.
** '''Score''': Linguist 1 to 5 ''star'' score.

=== Assign Job ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''

Use the [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] icon in the language row under the '''job name''' column to assign a job to a linguist for the checkbox marked files.

[[File:Pmaddtask.PNG]]

On the assign job dialog:
* Choose a linguist from the list to whom the job will be assigned. [[File:Warning.png]] The file will be shared with the linguist when the project is set as 'In progress'. The rate and job amount from the linguist will be set for the task.
* To override the linguist rate or job amount, a particular rate or job amount for the job can be set using the input field under the column header. [[File:Warning.png]] Bear in mind that both are related so changing one will update the other.
* A '''''Deadline''''' can be set on the input field under '''''Duration'''''.
* Fill the '''''Note''''' text box to send extra information to the linguist.
* Use '''''Linguist cannot download the shared file''''' to not allow the linguist to download the file.
* Click on '''''Manage linguists''''' to open the Manage Linguist window to add/edit/remove linguists.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' linguists marked as ''able'' to do a role will be listed.

Use the [[File:Pm_collapse_16.png]] icon in the language row under the '''job name''' column to unassign a linguist from a job for the checkbox marked files. [[File:Warning.png]] Shares will be revoked.

[[File:Pmdeletetask.PNG]]

=== Move file to next Task ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

If '''Auto''' tasking is not set on the ''Project Properties'' window, when a task is finished (file has been revoked by the linguist), PM has to manually move it to the next task which will share the file with the linguist assigned to that task.

To do so, click on the double arrow on the finished task.

[[File:Pmmoveon.PNG]]

=== Workflow ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

The project workflow should be:
# PM creates a project, sets languages, sets jobs (Project setup).
# PM adds files to the project and prepares them (i.e splitting).
# PM sets how the TMs and glossaries assigned to the document will be use on the tasks as Share TM, Create project TM or to pre-translate.
# PM prepares the team of linguists.
# PM assign a linguist to each file task. Multiple file selection for batch assign is possible.
# When PM sets the project status to ''In progress'' files that has been assigned a TM and a task will be shared to the corresponding linguist.
# Linguist works on the file. When his work is finished, revokes the file. This finishes the share.
# Once the file is revoked, the PM has to manually move it to the next task. This is done automatically if Auto tasking is selected on Project Setup.
# When all tasks are finished project is finished. PM can change the status of the project to ''Completed''.

=== Purchase Order ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

You can define a Purchase Order template with project, document and task information that will be send to the linguists when the file is shared.

A copy of the email send to the linguist is BCC to the project owner.

==== Purchase Order template ====
Go to [[File:User profile.png]] '''''User Profile''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab to see information about your account. On the ''PM'' tab you can edit the default template.

[[File:Po1.PNG]]

On this template you put the information you want to appear on the Purchase Order.

You can use some '''dynamic parameters''' to add project, document and task information. Use this parameters to build the Purchase Order.
Parameters will be substituted by project, document and task corresponding values or a predefined text.

{| class="wikitable"
|+Here is the list which you can also check them using the [[File:Pm info 16.png]] icon.
|-
|{purchase_order_number}
|Include a number for the purchase order.
|-
|{project_name}
|Project name.
|-
|{task_name}
|Task name.
|-
|{document_name}
|Document name.
|-
|{document_download}
|If linguist can download the document the text '(The document cannot be downloaded.)' will be added to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{document_volume}
|Document number of words.
|-
|{job_note}
|Job note
|-
|{job_rate}
|Job rate
|-
|{job_total}
|Job total cost
|-
|{job_deadline}
|Job deadline in the format 29/12/2021 15:00 GMT+02:00 and the remaining time.
|-
|{document_tmglo}
|If there are TMs or glossaries in the share the text 'For the duration of this job # Translation Memories and # Glossaries have been temporarily shared with you.' will be added to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{document_use}
|Add the text 'To work on this document, log into your Wordfast Anywhere account. If you are already logged, refresh the project list by closing all the projects.' to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{my_full_name}
|Full name from 'User profile'.
|-
|{my_professional_info}
|Professional information from 'User profile'.
|}

==== Purchase Order preview ====
On the '''assign job dialog''' you will see a preview of the Purchase Order.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of the dynamic parameters will be updated when changing the selections on the dialog, others might require the job to be saved and others will be updated when the Purchase Order is send.

[[File:Po2.PNG]]

==== Purchase Order batch send ====
You can send the Purchase Orders for all the saved jobs at any moment using the '''Send POs''' button on the ''Project Setup'' dialog

[[File:Warning.png]] Purchase Order will also be send when the file is shared.

= File Operations =
[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a document.

=== Upload ===
To translate your document, you must first upload it to WFA.

[[File:warning.png]] There is a file size limit of 20 Mb.

From the '''Project Content Panel''' there are two ways to add files to a project.

* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the header will add the files to all the languages in the project.
* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the language row. This will add the files only to that language.

[[File:Pmaddfiles.PNG]]

The following window will be displayed:

[[File:Upload_doc.png]]

There are several ways to upload a document
* '''From local file''': Use '''''Browse...''''' to navigate through the directories on your computer and locate the document to be uploaded.
* '''From URL''': This option allows you to upload a file that is located on an Internet server by entering the address (URL) into the field. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Google Drive''': Choose a file from your Google Drive to be uploaded. You'll be asked to allow access rights to WFA before choosing the file. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Dropbox''': Choose a file from your Dropbox to be uploaded. You'll be asked to allow access rights to WFA before choosing the file. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Clipboard''': Paste the text to be uploaded into the text area. A text file will be created with the text.

At the bottom of the window click on '''''View allowed formats''''' to check the allowed formats:

Finally click on:
* '''''Upload''''': to only upload the file, which will be listed on the Document Management.
* '''''Upload and Open''''': to upload and open the document, which will be displayed in the document panel.

[[File:warning.png]] Depending on the size of the file, this may take some time. Please be patient.

Upload can also be done by using drag and drop area.

For some file formats you can configure some filter behaviors when uploading the file on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters|Configure Filters]]''' in ''Pandora's Box #8''. This is important for '''Text based files (xml, xsl)''' where a rules file (.properties) is needed.

=== Open ===
To open a document, first select it from the list of documents. There are 2 options on '''[[{{PAGENAME}}#File Tab|File tab]]''':

* '''''Open''''' button [[File:Translate_File16.png]]: will open a document and show all the segments
* '''''Fuzzy Open''''' button [[File:Translate_File16.png]]: will open a document, but only segments with a score lower than 100.

=== Segmentation ===
In order to be translated with a CAT tool, a document is divided into translation units (TUs), also known as segments. This process is called segmentation. A segment is a text string that ends with a terminator segment, usually the period (.), colon (:), question mark (?), or exclamation mark (!) and also a paragraph or end of cell mark, a page break or a tab.

The advantage of segmentation is that the translation units are presented to you one by one, without any danger of missing one. These segments form the basis for the TUs that are saved in the TM, consisting of the source segment (to translate) and the target segment (translated).

To configure segmentation go to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Segmentation_tab| Segmentation tab]]''' on the WFA settings.

=== Review ===
Once translated, the text should be revised. Here are some methods:
* Download the translated document immediately to view it in your favourite word processor.
* Download it in an offline review format. See '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Offline_Review_Tool|Offline Review Tool (OFRT)]]'''.
* Revise it in WFA using '''Trancheck''', '''Spellcheck''' and '''Preview''' tools. See below.
* If you are using the Classic mode for the document Layout (See the '''''Doc Layout''''' button [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] on '''''View''''' tab) , you can toggle the display between the bilingual document, the original document and the translated document, use the shortcut '''Ctrl+,''' (Ctrl+comma). A different display mode is presented with each iteration. To confirm what you see in front of you, check the indicator on the status bar: bilingual document (Bilingual), original document (Source) or translated document (Target). You can also click on the indicator to change it. Please note this action does not alter the document in any way. It only changes the way that it is displayed in a way that is more convenient for the task you are currently engaged in.

==== Transcheck ====
Click on the '''''Transchek''''' button [[File:Transcheck16.png]] of the '''''Review''''' tab. Transcheck provides the means to check translated content for missing tags, empty targets, numbers, untranslated segments, and terminology.

[[File:Transcheck.png]]

Click on the '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#QA_tab|Set the criteria]]''' link to go to the '''Setup''' and configure them.

Click on the '''''Check''''' button to get the result.

Click on the '''''Move next''''' button to move in the document panel to the first segment in the result list. Click again to move to next segment and so on.

==== Spellcheck ====

Click on the '''''Spellcheck'''' button [[File:Spellcheck16.png]] of the '''''View''''' tab and choose again '''Spellcheck''' in the list of choice. Spellcheck is a good practice to ensure high quality as it flags words in a document that may not be spelled correctly. The Spellcheck is done immediately then you'll get the following report with the results.

[[File:Spellcheck.png]]

Click on the '''''Move''''' button to move in the document panel to the first segment in the result list. Click again to move to next segment and so on.

==== Preview ====
Click on the '''''Preview''''' butonn [[File:Preview16.png]] of the '''''View''''' tab . It can be done at any stage of completion to get a PDF file displayed in a pop-up window with the translated document.

[[File:Preview_1.png]]
[[File:Preview_2.png]]

=== Download ===

[[File:Warning.png]] For '''download issues''', please check this [https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_fix_a_document_when_download_failed.3F link]

When the translation is finally complete, you must download the final document in order to be able to deliver it. To do this, click on [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab. A dialog with all the download options will be shown.

[[File:Donwload_all.jpg]]

Here is a short description of each option:

* '''Translated document/s''': Click to download the translated file. It will be the translated version of the source document in the same file type.

* '''Bilingual''': Click to download the TXLF (or TXML) file from the document. [[File:Warning.png]] '''''The download bilingual file will be of the type used when the file was uploaded.''''' For example if the file was uploaded using TXML, the bilingual download will be TXML. A file cannot be uploaded using one type (TXML) and download the bilingual file of the other type (TXLF). The workaround is to change the type and upload the file again. [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters More information]

* '''Offline review export''': Click to download an Offline Review file (.doc).

* '''Bilingual DOC without formatting''': Click to download bilingual for MS Word without placeholders (*.doc).

* '''Unformatted text''': Click to download unformatted Text (*.txt).

* '''Notes report''': Click to download a report with the document notes.

* '''TM from document/s''': Click to download a TM with document's content (.txml).

* '''Backup workspace''': Click to download a backup of current document + TM + glossary.

* '''Package''': Click to download a WFP package file (.glp) containing documents, memories, glossaries....etc. More information [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Package here]

* '''Filtered bilingual''': Open an advanced filtering dialog to choose segments to be downloaded.

Clicking '''OK''' will take the next dialog.

You may receive this message if you have not yet fully translated the document:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

This is purely an advisory message, warning you if you have forgotten to translate a segment or if there are provisional segments or notes. However it is quite possible that this is your intention: sometimes there are segments that should not be translated.

You can find out at any time if you have completed the translation, or how many segments remain to be translated, by using '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''

If your file is fully translated or you clicked '''OK''' on this warning dialog, a dialog where you can choose the way to download the file will open.

This can have different extra options depending the type of download you have chosen on the first dialog.

[[File:DownloadOptions2.png]]

For downloading the translated file, you have the option to add a second document in PDF format to the downloading of the document in its original format. To add the PDF-formatted document, tick the Add PDF file box. This may take some time, so please wait.

[[File:DownloadOptions2a.png]]

For downloading the TXML file, you have the options to copy the source content in case target segment is empty and not use language variants.

You can cancel the download by clicking Cancel or continue by clicking OK.
You can verify that this operation is taking place: a series of small blue rectangles will display the progress in the status bar.

There are some cases when you will get a compressed ZIP file instead of the original format. Check [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#Why_do_I_get_a_zip_file_when_downloading.3F here] the reasons.

If you have requested the PDF file, both files – the original and the PDF – will be downloaded together and compressed together in ZIP format (*. zip).

There are several ways to download a file:

* '''Download file''': After you click on the OK button, Wordfast Anywhere prepares the data transfer and then sends it to your browser. The browser will then inform you that it has received the data according to its specific mode of operation. In some cases, a dialog box will pop up allowing you specify where to save the file; however, this depends on the particular browser you use. If nothing happens, check your browser’s downloads settings and / or repeat the process.
* '''Send file to email''': Send the downloaded file by email.
* '''Create file URL''': Create a url to the downloaded file. To get the file copy-paste the url in your browser to start the download. The file will be available at that location for 3 days.
* '''Google Drive''': Send the downloaded file to your Google Drive account.
* '''Dropbox''': Send the downloaded file to your Dropbox account.

[[File:Warning.png]] For '''download issues''', please check this [https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_fix_a_document_when_download_failed.3F link]

=== Delete ===
[[File:Warning.png]] Remember this can '''NOT''' be undone, so it is recommended to download the file first.

To remove a file, first use the checkbox to select it and then use the [[File:Remove16.png]] icon on the language row.

[[File:Pmdeletefile.PNG]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Associated shares will be revoked.

Several files can be selected to be removed at the same time.

[[File:notice.png]] In case you accidentally delete a file, you can recover it by uploading again and using the same TM to pre-translate it.

=== Package ===
Project files (*.glp) are managed with the [[File:Pm import project 16.png]] '''Import''' and [[File:Pm export project 16.png]] '''Export''' buttons in the Project menu.

[[File:Warning.png]] The project file (*.glp) is limited to one source language while a Wordfast Anywhere project can have many, in consequence, package export is done by source language.

[[File:Warning.png]]There is an issue importing packages coming from PD. If you cannot import the .glp file, please ask to receive the bilingual files (txml/txlf) and the url for the TM/glossary.

==== Upload ====

Upload must be done using '''''Project''''' menu => '''''Import''''' [[File:Pm import project 16.png]] button.

Once you have selected you local file, click '''Upload'''. A new dialog with the package information and upload options will be shown.

[[File:UploadPkg.JPG]]

* '''Package Information''' section shows package name, who and when created the package and which language pairs contain.
* '''Package content''' section shows the bilingual files on the package. The files with the check box marked will be uploaded. '''On the right''' there are two drop-down lists to add a TM and glossary to the file which can came from the package if WFA can handle them or from your list on WFA (Information about them can be found on the Resources section).
* '''Resources''' section shows a list of TMs and glossaries and source files.

Finally there are two options for the upload.
* '''Create new folder''': by default files will be added to the root folder, you can use this option to upload the package files in a new folder.
* If the package contains source files a drop-down list will be shown to choose between '''Export back later''' to upload just the bilingual files and '''Generate final files on WFA''' to upload source files and merge them with the corresponding bilingual file in the package.

Once the package has been successfully uploaded, an HTML report is created.

[[File:Warning.png]] A new project is created with the content of the package.

==== Download ====

[[File:Warning.png]] The project file (*.glp) is limited to one source language while a Wordfast Anywhere project can have many, in consequence, package export is done by source language.

Download must be done using '''''Project''''' menu => '''''Export''''' [[File:Pm export project 16.png]] button.

[[File:DownloadPkg.JPG]]

* '''Package Information''': Here you can choose to download an existing package or create a new one, source and target languages. Multiple target language can be chosen if the package had them when it was uploaded.
* '''Package content''': After clicking '''Find Files''' a list of available files, TMs and glossaries is shown. The files with the check box marked will be downloaded.

Finally you can chose to '''Add Source files''' to the package.

= TM & Glossary Management =
== TM & Glossary Basics ==

Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''Setup TM&Glo''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' menu.

[[File:TmgloDialog.png]]

===Translation Memory ===
==== Creating a translation memory ====
There are several ways to create or add a TM:
* Create an empty standard WFA TM
* Upload an existing TM like from Wordast Classic or Pro
* Link to a remote TM hosted on a private Wordfast server
* Link to a Very Large TM hosted on a public Wordfast server

To create an empty TM, click on the '''''Create''''' button of the TM buttons area.

[[File:CreateTm.png]]

Choose source and target language codes. It is recommended that you have only one TM for each language pair. This way, you will benefit from everything you have already translated in each pair. However, there may be reasons for you to maintain different TMs in the same language pair. In this case, enter an ID using up to 10 characters in the Assigned Name field.
 Then click on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''Create TM''''' dialog box. Your TM has now been created and is selected in the list of TMs.

To Upload an existing TM, click on the '''''upload'''' button.

[[File:CreateTm_3.png]]

If you already have a TM that you use with Wordfast Classic or Pro, you can upload it to WFA. The codes for source and target languages are written in the header of the TM file. If you already have a TM in the same pair, make sure that you enter an identifier of up to 10 characters in the Assigned Name field.
 This procedure is exactly the same if you have a TM from another CAT tool. However, check first that this TM has been exported in the '''TMX''' format, the standard file format with extension '''.tmx''' supported by all major CAT tool developers.
 Click on the '''''Upload''''' button of the '''''Upload''''' dialog box, you will be prompted to browse a local file on your PC.

If the TM is in Excel format, before uploading it you need to save it as ''Unicode Text''.

[[File:warning.png]] Depending on its size, uploading a TM may take some time. In this case, it can be run in the background, allowing you to perform other tasks while you are waiting.

To add a remote TM or VLTM, click on the '''''add''''' button.

[[File:AddTm_1.png]]

Select the type TM in the list box.

[[File:AddTm_2.png]]

For adding a remote TM, copy paste the given URL in the URL field and the workgroup ID, if any, in the workgroup ID field.
 If you have already a remote TM with the same languages, you will need to enter a symbolic name.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test the remote TM. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:AddTm_3.png]]

WFA has access to the public TM server, which consists of segments offered by the community of translators and is available to all under the name VLTM (Very Large Translation Memory). The TM is unrestricted, free of charge and anonymous.
 For a VLTM, you need to enter source and target language codes.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test if the VLTM is available for your languages. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

==== Update an existing TM by appending from a local TM ====
You can update one of your existing TM by appending TUs from a local TM by clicking on the '''''merge''''' button.

[[File:MergeTm.png]]

 The process is slightly the same than uploading a TM but you should first select the existing TM in the list. The memory to import will already have predefined source and target languages codes in the header of the TM. There may therefore be a conflict of languages between it and the existing memory. If the languages are different, the merge operation will be rejected.
 You also have the choice, in case there are identical source segments, to add always the TM segments, or to not add duplicated segments from the TM. Select '''Add always''' or '''Do not add duplicate''' in the list box.
 By default, the merge process will not take language variants into account. If you want to make sure exactly the same variants are merged, tick the '''append TUs having the same variant''' option.
 Finally click on the '''''Merge''''' button of the '''''Append TUs''''' dialog box

==== Selecting an existing TM for translating a document ====
Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''TMs and Glossaries''' button on '''File''' menu to open the dialog and select an existing TM.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Caution''': If your TM is selected in the TM list, it does not mean selected for translating a document.
To select a TM for translation, you have to tick it in the '''active''' column and click on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' dialog box.
In this example above, 2 EN>FR TMs and 2 EN>FR glossaries are set active for translation.

[[File:notice.png]] A document can have as active '''several read-only''' TMs, but '''only one writeable'''. You might need to uncheck the active checkbox from the current writeable TM in order to set a new one.

=== Glossary ===
The use of incorrect terminology can ruin an otherwise good translation. Many clients have a well-defined terminology (the jargon of the trade), compiled in the form of a glossary. By supplying this glossary to their translators, clients can impose a particular terminology. In adopting this approach, very common in technical translation, the end result should harmoniously fuse the linguistic competence of the translator with the terminological requirements of the client.

Sometimes the client will ask the translator to provide a glossary of terms arising from research undertaken during the translation. In this case, the translator must create a glossary and add specific terminology to it. This glossary building can either be done prior to translation (in an initial terminology research phase), or during the translation itself.

In many cases, however, the client provides a bilingual glossary, which has already been created during the course of previous translations. It is then up to the translator to comply strictly with it and, where appropriate, to add his or her own contributions.

When the translation work is of a more general nature (and especially if a translator is still in the process of acquiring the general vocabulary of a source language), WFA’s glossary function can also be used to itemise terminology that is encountered during the course of the translation process.

Wordfast Anywhere is designed to assist the translator in all the cases mentioned above through the implementation of its glossary function. This glossary consists of a simple tab-delimited text document, which – like the TM – can be uploaded to and downloaded from WFA, shared with other CAT programs, etc. as required.

==== Creating a glossary ====
Like TM there are several ways to create or add a glossary:
* Create an empty standard WFA glossary
* Upload an existing glossary
* Link to remote glossaries
* Link to Tilde Terminology services
* Link to a IATE glossary

To create an empty glossary, click on the '''''Create''''' button of the glossary buttons area and follow the same TM pattern.

To Upload an existing glossary, click on the '''''upload''''' button of the glossary buttons area and follow the same TM pattern.
 Allowed file types are simple tabulated text file (*.txt) (source + tab + target), Wordfast glossary text file (*.txt), Excel file (*.xls, *.xlsx) and TBX file (*.tbx).
 Excel files must be simple:
* 1st Column: Source (compulsory)
* 2nd Column: Target (compulsory)
* 3rd Column: Comment (optional)
* 4th Column: F1 (optional)
* 5th Column: F2 (optional)
* 6th Column: F3 (optional)

 Unlike with a TM, WFA cannot derive the source and target language information from the header of the glossary file; therefore this must be specified here.
 Once the glossary has been uploaded, you will receive a report summarising the operation:
 You will see how many terms have been submitted for upload, how many were rejected as invalid or duplicates well as the total number of terms added.

To add a remote glossary or Tilde Terminology services, click on the '''''add''''' button.

[[File:AddGlossary_1.png]]

Select the type in th elist box.

[[File:AddGlossary_2.png]]

For adding a remote glossary, copy paste the given URL in the URL field.
 If you have already a remote glossary with the same languages, you will need to enter a symbolic name.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test the remote glossary. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:AddGlossary_3.png]]

For setting Tilde Terminology services, you need to select source and target languages and a domain.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test if you have collections. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:addIATE.png]]

To set an IATE glossary, just select the source and target languages. Only languages from the European community are supported.
Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button and if the glossary exists, click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:addIATE2.png]]

By default not all IATE terminology is showed, but you can enable it by checking '''''Show all common terminology'''''.

==== Update an existing glossary by appending from a local glossary ====
You can update one of your existing glossaries by appending terms from a local glossary by clicking on the '''''merge''''' button.

[[File:MergeGlo.png]]

 The process is slightly the same than uploading but you should first select the existing glossary in the list.
 You have the choice, in case there are identical entries (source and target), to add always or to not add duplicated. Select '''Add always''' or '''Do not add duplicate''' in the list box.
 Finally click on the '''''Merge''''' button.

==== Selecting one or more glossaries for translation ====
Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''TMs and Glossaries''' button on '''File''' menu to open the dialog and select an existing TM.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Caution''': If your glossary is selected in the glossary list, it does not mean selected for translation.
To select a glossary for translation, you have to tick it in the '''active''' column and click after on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' dialog box.

[[File:notice.png]] A document can have as active '''several read-only''' glossaries, but '''only one writeable'''. You might need to uncheck the active checkbox from the current writeable glossary in order to set a new one.

==== Using a glossary ====

[[File:Use glossary.png]]

* Whenever WFA recognises a term from the glossary in the source segment it highlights it against a blue background

* The terms highlighted in blue are considered as placeables. They can thus be manipulated with the [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] and [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] icons or the Ctrl+Alt+Right and Ctrl+Alt+Left shortcuts and by clicking on them with the mouse or by typing their initial letter + Tab. The difference is that, when you use the [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]] icon or the Ctrl+Alt+Down shortcut, it is the corresponding translation that is copied to the target segment. The most easy way to copy a target is probably to use the Auto-suggest feature, enabled by default. Target terms are proposed by typing the first letter of the target term of the 3 first letters of the source term. [[File:Auto-suggest target term.png]] [[File:Auto-suggest target term 2.png]].

* You can see in advance what the translation of the highlighted items is by activating the glossary panel (keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+H or by selecting it from the '''''View''''' tab => '''''Show/Hide Glossary''''' [[File:panelGlo.png]] button )

* If you want to know more about a term, i.e. the information that you or someone else has entered in the comment or F1, F2 and F3 fields, place your mouse over the source term and this information will be displayed. See above the bubble of the last term on the glossary panel (translation).

==== Adding terms to the glossary ====

[[File:Add_term.png]]

It is quite likely that you will want to incorporate terms you come across in the source text into the glossary together with their translations that arise as part of your research process. This way, your linguist’s memory will be reinforced and you are less likely to have to research the same word or phrase again in the future. WFA allows you to do this dynamically, at any time and without exiting your translation process.

First, select the term in the source text. If it consists of one word, you can simply click on it or use the Tab key to move forwards (or Shift+Tab to move backwards) through the text until you reach its position.

The word you have selected will be highlighted against a red border.

Then click on the target term in the target segment.

The selected target term will have a blue background.

[[File:Select terms.png]]

Next, invoke the Glossary Dialog Box by typing Ctrl+Alt+T, or clicking the '''''Add Term''''' [[File:TermEdit.png]] button.

If a single word, the terms you highlighted in the source and target segments should automatically appear in the Source and Target fields.
If the terms consists of more than one word, it may be necessary to paste the text into the fields from your computer’s clipboard or type the information manually.

You can also add a comment – something that may prove useful in the future, e.g. if you want to remember the situation in which this translation was used. The F1, F2 and F3 fields may be used to store word role, context, grammatical form or any other relevant text-based information.

Then click Save to confirm.

==== Fuzzy terminology recognition ====
Each time you open a segment, Wordfast Anywhere checks for the presence in the glossary of all words and terms contained in the source segment. This operation is called terminology recognition. The recognised terms are highlighted in blue in the source segment, as discussed above.

In establishing a correspondence between the terms of the source segment and the terms found in the glossary, WFA will both recognise an exact match and attempt to recognise fuzzy matches.

WFA employs a stemming algorithm for some languages (e.g. German) in order to recognise different forms of the same word that may correspond to those listed in the glossary.

For example, WFA can recognised the infinitive verb ‘besuchen’ as being related to the adjective (or past participle) ‘besucht’ due to the fact that the two words share a common stem.

Fuzzy matching can also be established by using an asterisk in combination with the term. This method overrides the stemming algorithm, allowing you to find all terms that begin with, end with or contain a particular text string.

=== Concordance search ===
Segments stored in the TM are retrieved only if they have a minimum level of correspondence with the source segment (by default 75%). However, even if the level of correspondence is not sufficient to produce a fuzzy match, the TM may still contain terms that you have previously translated and wish to use in your current translation. To search in the memory you have two options:

1) Click on the '''''Concordance''''' button [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]] or use the '''Ctrl+Alt+C''' shortcut. The following window appears:

[[File:concordance.png]]

Enter the word or text string you want to research in the Search field. WFA will search for all words that are the same or begin with the same sequence of letters as the string entered.

You can also select the word or text string with the mouse and then click on the '''''Concordance''''' button [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]] or '''Ctrl+Alt+C''' shortcut. The result will be displayed immediately.

You can edit or delete a term in the concordance search window by clicking on the edit or delete links.

You can add to your search possibilities by choosing the Advanced option:
* Two words or text strings (search terms) separated by a space: one or the other must exist in the TU
* Two terms separated by the + sign: both terms must exist
* A term ending with an asterisk: a search is performed for all text strings containing the search term.

When you use this option, a help line is displayed to remind you how this command works.

=== Searching in a glossary===
You can also search in the glossary. To do this, click the '''''Glossary Search''''' button [[File:GlossarySearch.png]] or use the '''Ctrl+Alt+G''' shortcut:

[[File: Glossary search.png]]

Type the source language word you wish to search for in the Search field and click OK. The list of glossary entries that contain the search term will be displayed.
You can edit or delete a term in the glossary search window by clicking on the edit or delete icons.

By employing an asterisk in the search term, you can expand your search to find all glossary entries that include the text string that the search term is made up of.

== TM & Glossary Advanced features ==

=== TM operations ===
==== View/Edit a TM ====
Select the TM in the list then click on the '''''Edit''''' button.

[[File:ViewEditTm.png]]

The dialog box displays the TM information. Depending on the TM type, you can edit some properties.
* Standard WFA TM : you have the possibility to define attributes of your TM, which will allow you to subsequently identify its segments. Click on the '''Attributes''' tab.
[[File:EditTmAttributes.png]]

There are five attributes in a Wordfast TM: the first is fixed and immutable, consisting of the name of the user. The other four can be defined by each user at will, but it is recommended to use attribute 1 to describe the subject of the text to be translated and attribute 2 for the client, to maintain compatibility with Wordfast Classic and Wordfast Pro users. Attributes consist of codes, usually 3 letters, followed by a brief description. In the fields referred to as TM attribute 1 to 4, enter the name of the attribute (subject, client, etc.). In the field on their right, select one of the attributes that appear on the drop-down list or, if necessary, click '''add''' to add an attribute, '''upd''' to update it or '''del''' to delete it. Whatever option is chosen, a dialog will appear asking for the code of the attribute (ID) and a brief description (Name, ignored for the Del option).
[[file:EditTmAttributes_add.png]] [[file:EditTmAttributes_update.png]] [[file:EditTmAttributes_delete.png]]

Dynamic codes : Predefined attributes can be added by entering a code between accolades as explain in the help.
[[File:EditTmAttributes_help.png]]

* Remote private Wordfast server

[[File:EditRemoteTm.png]] You can edit the workgroup ID and/or the symbolic name.

==== Download a TM ====
This is available only for standard WFA TM.

[[File:DownloadTm.png]]

From the Downloaded file format drop-down list you can select either the Wordfast TM TXT format, the Standard TMX format, the MS Excel XLS format or the Bilingual document TXLF format.
 Click on the '''Download''' button.

===== Filters when downloading a TM =====
Select ''"Filtering (advanced options)"'' on the second drop-down list and click on the '''Download''' button.

[[File:Tm_download2.JPG]]

This will analyse the TM and let you apply some filters to select what you want to download from the TM.

[[File:Tm_download_filter.JPG]]

[[File:Tm_download_filter2.JPG]]

Once filters are selected click on the '''Download''' button to finish the download.

==== Removing a TM ====
After clicking on the top '''Remove''' button on the TM side, this red warning is displayed to confirm the deletion.
 For TMs that are not Wordfast Anywhere standard TMs only the link to the external TM is cut.

[[File:DeleteTm.png]]

==== Quick TM Share ====
By clicking on the small '''share''' button on top of the TM side, you can share quickly a TM to somebody else having an account in Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:CreateTMShare.png]]

Click on the '''''Add guest''''' button and enter his email address (which should be his account login), then click '''Add'''.

[[File:CreateTMShare2.png]]

You can change the privilege of your guest on your TM. Finally to save the share, click on the '''''Save''''' button.

==== TMs Tools ====
===== Reversing a TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmReverse.png]]

Select a TM to reverse and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a TM already exists with the same name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Assembling several TMs in one TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmAssembled.png]]

Select one or more TMs to assemble in one TM and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a TM already exists with the same name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 if '''keep old assigned name''' is unchecked this information will be lost.
 if '''keep variants''' is checked, the TU will not be changed, otherwise, it take the given language pair.
 if '''keep user ID''' is checked, the TU will not be changed, otherwise, it will take your user ID.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Edit a TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmEdit.png]]

Select a TM to edit and click on the '''Run''' button.
 The TM will be opened as a temporary associated document in the document panel.

[[File:ToolsTmEdit1.png]]

Here you can for example update target segments, edit source segments and delete TU. Those changes will be stored straight on your TM.
 Bear in mind that this is a TM although it looks like a document.

After the TM edition, the temporary document must be deleted because it is a static copy of the TM.
 The tool can only edit and delete existing TUs and the TM size is limited to 100000 TUs.

=== Glossary operations ===
==== View/Edit a glossary ====
Select the glossary in the list then click on the '''''View/Edit''''' button.

[[File:ViewEditGlo.png]]

The dialog box displays the glossary information. Depending on the glossary type, you can edit some properties.

[[File:EditRemoteGlo.png]]

[[File:EditTildeGlo.png]]

==== Download a glossary ====
This is available only for standard WFA glossary.

[[File:DownloadGlo.png]]

Click on the '''Download''' button.

==== Removing a glossary ====
After clicking on the top '''Remove''' button on the glossary side, this red warning is displayed to confirm the deletion.
 For glossaries that are not standard only the link to the external glossary is cut.

[[File:DeleteGlo.png]]

==== Quick Glossary Share ====
By clicking on the small '''share''' button on top of the glossary side, you can share quickly a glossary to somebody else having an account in Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:CreateGloShare.png]]

Click on the '''''Add guest''''' button and enter his email address (which should be his account login), then click '''Add'''.

[[File:CreateGloShare2.png]]

You can change the privilege of your guest on your glossary. Finally to save the share, click on the '''''Save''''' button.

==== Glossaries tools ====
===== Reversing a glossary=====
[[File:ToolsGloReverse.png]]

Select a glossary to reverse and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a glossary already exists with the reversed glossary name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Assembling several glossaries in one glossary =====
[[File:ToolsGloAssembled.png]]

Select two or more glossaries to assemble and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a glossary already exists with the assembled glossary name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 if '''keep old assigned name''' is unchecked this information will be lost.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

=== TMs and glossaries shares ===

You can allow other users to share your TM as well as your glossary and you can see the TMs and the glossaries shared to you by others.
To manage all kind of share, click on the bottom '''''Share''''' button of the TMs and glossaries dialog. At that time you will receive the following:

[[File:Tmglo_share_1.png]]

* If you have already enabled the sharing of your TMs and your glossaries with other users, they will be displayed in the '''My shares to other users''' table. You can revoke sharing with any of these users. To do this, select the user in question and click '''Revoke'''. To add or update an existing share click on the '''Add''' or '''Edit''' buttons and see the chapter '''Add and edit shares to other users''' below.
* You can visualize all the TMs and glossaries that have been shared to you in the '''My shares from other users''' table. You can end any share by selecting it and clicking on the '''Remove''' button.
* You can also share your TMs and glossaries to applications like Wordfast Classic and Wordfast Pro by generating keys. they are displayed in the '''My shares to applications''' table. See below the chapter '''Sharing to applications'''.

==== Add and edit shares to other users ====

[[File:Tmglo_share_2.png]]

[[File:Tmglo_share_edit.png]]

[[File:Tmglo_share_3.png]]

==== Sharing to applications ====
Wordfast Anywhere will generate up to 5 keys to share one or more TMs and, optionally, glossaries.
The key is needed for the external application to connect to that specific share.

[[File:Tmglo_share_app_1.png]]

If you want to add the TMs and glossaries currently used, click on the '''Add active TMs and glossaries''', otherwise click on the '''Add''' button to choose a TM and the '''Add''' button to choose a glossary.
 Choose the right privilege and the number of keys needed, then click on the the '''Save''' button.
 The keys will be generated and listed in the '''My shares to application''' table. See below.

[[File:Tmglo_share_app_2.png]]

For instance this can be used on Wordfast Pro 3.4.9, where there is a tab for Wordfast Anywhere TM and glossaries.

[[File:Wpftab.png]]

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QVOMOYfR2ws&feature=em-subs_digest this video] about how to do it.

 Although the API key is for a combined TM and glossary, on Wordfast Pro 3.4.9 you need to add it twice: one for TM and one for glossary

[[Wordfast Pro]] users can check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=S7QCHNpRtKo&feature=em-subs_digest this video].

= Translation =
== Preparation of the translation environment ==
Before beginning the translation of a document using a CAT tool, you must first have an active Translation Memory.

'''Note''': an initial TM was automatically set up when you created your account.

The TM consists of a database, which will record each source language segment (i.e. sentence, phrase) that you translate, together with the corresponding target language segment. As it grows, this increasingly allows you to obtain translations of phrases made previously that are the same or similar to the one you are currently translating.

For more information check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Translation_Memory|Translation Memory basics]]'''.

== Translating ==
To start the translation, you must first open the initial segment.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:StartNext.png]] '''''Start/Next''''' button or use the ''Alt + Down'' shortcut . When you do this, the document area is transformed: the segment is displayed in light blue block (source), a grey block (target) is placed just below it and the rest of your document is shown on the rest of the page. The cursor is located in the grey block.

Translate the segment in the grey block

[[File:StartTrans.png|1200px]]

After translating this segment, you can continue with your translation. To move to the next segment, click on the [[File:StartNext.png]] '''''Start/Next''''' or use the ''Alt+Down'' shortcut. Remember this shortcut, as you will use it for each segment you translate. You can also move to previous segment by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Previous.png]] '''''Previous''''' or use the ''Alt + Up'' shortcut.

[[File:notice.png]] '''''When translating, the segments are saved automatically in the translation memory and on the database system as soon as you go to the next segment.'''''

Now translate the segment as before.

Now that you get the idea, you can continue to translate. Remember: to move from one segment to the next, use ''Alt+Down''. To return to the previous segment (to correct something that you subsequently realised was mistaken), use ''Alt+Up''.

Following are some '''other considerations''' regarding the translation of segments.

'''Note''': Most browser / OS combinations, including Firefox, Safari and Chrome, have their own spell checker – in some cases it may be necessary for you to activate it. You can also use '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Spellcheck|Spellcheck]]'''

There is color code for the target block:
* Grey is the no match from the TM (score=0)
* Green is the full match from the TM (score=100)
* Yellow is a fuzzy match from the TM (score between 50 to 99)
* Orange is a MT proposition
* Purple is the color when the segment has been modified by the editor

Score information can be found in different places depending on the view.
For '''Classic view''' it can be found on ''<}score{>'' tag between source and target segment.

[[File:ScoreC.png|1200px]]

For '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views''' there is a column for the score.

[[File:ScoreH.png|1200px]]

[[File:ScoreV.png|1200px]]

=== Tags ===

Before translating this new segment, pay attention to the tag <1>, which appears here at the end. WFA is not a word processor and thus does not concern itself with a specific representation of the document's formatting. You'll see no changes in size or typeface, no bold or italic characters. Instead, this information is encoded and represented by what we call "tags", e.g. <1>. By slowly passing your mouse over this tag you will see what it represents. This tag is not to be translated, but it should be placed on the appropriate position in the target segment. If you want to recopy a tag from the source segment please type < to trigger the tags proposal.

[[File:tagProposal.png]]

You can also copy it by using the comands on '''Translation''' tab: [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] '''Next Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Right'') and [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] '''Previous Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Left'') to navigate the source segment to the desired tag. A red frame indicates the selected item. Then position the cursor in the target segment and click on [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]] '''Copy Pl.'''(''Ctrl+Alt+Down'').

Differences on the formatting tags (<1>, <2>) between source and target segment can make the file filter aligner have difficulties to build up the translated document.

Check there is no ''segments with tag difference'' using one of this options:
# Click on [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button on '''File''' tab to get a report. Check if there are any ''segments with tag difference''. Use '''''Show Outline''''' [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button on '''View''' tab to go straight to one segment.
# Click on [[File:FindReplace.png]] '''''Find & Replace''''' button on '''Edit''' tab. Go to ''Miscellaneous'' tab and run a ''Tag difference'' search. Segments with tag differences will be listed.

On the listed segments you must pay attention to:
# There is no target tag missing that exists on source.
# The target tag order is different from source order. For example [<1>text text<2>] on source but [<2>text text<1>] on target.
# The target tag content is not identical with the source tag. You can see the content of the tag when the mouse is over it.

[[File:Warning.png]] We '''do not recommend to use copy/paste or drag and drop''' to copy the tags as it can copy more than the eye can see and be problematic. It is better to use the the auto-suggest feature with tags (whenever you want to add a tag just type < and the list of tags from source will be proposed for selection) or the [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]] '''Copy Placeable''' on '''Translation''' tab.

== Main commands ==

=== Provisional segment ===
You may be unsure whether your translation of a segment is correct. To avoid having to interrupt your translation process, you can mark the segment as provisional.

It will be identified by a yellow square at the beginning of the line for '''Classic view''' or at the end of the row for '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views'''.

To mark a segment as provisional, use the F10 key or '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mark.png]] '''''Provisional'''''.

When you have resolved any doubts, simply return to the marked segment and make your corrections. Use ''Alt+Down'' ( [[File:StartNext.png]] ) or ''Alt-Up'' ( [[File:Previous.png]] ) to validate the segment and erase the yellow square.

=== Auto propagate ===
Use this command to translate a segment and automatically propagate the current segment changes through all the document to other segments having the same source.

Find it in '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Autopropagate.png]] '''''Auto Propagate'''''.

=== Note ===
You can also write a note to be attached to the segment for the duration of the translation (in a similar manner to a Post-ItTM). You can use this to remind yourself of something important about this segment or to pass information on to people who will have access to your translation, such as reviewers.

To write a note, click on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Edit_Note16.png]] '''''Edit Note'''''.

The following text box will be displayed:

[[File:Editnote.png|1200px]]

Write your note in the text box and click Save. You can cancel the operation by clicking Cancel. In the case of an existing note, you can edit and validate it by clicking Save, or delete it by clicking Remove.

A green square will be placed at the beginning of the segment to indicate that a note is attached. By passing the mouse pointer over this square, you will see a rectangle containing the text of the note.

It will be identified by a grey square with an "i" in it at the beginning of the line for '''Classic view''' or at the end of the row for '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views'''.

[[File:Editnote2.png|1200px]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Notes can be downloaded by going to '''''File''''' tab => [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' and choosing the '''''Notes Report'''''

=== Copying the original segment ===
Sometimes a segment contains very little to translate: for example, when it consists almost entirely of proper names or is made up of a website address. In this case, it may be preferable to copy the entire source segment to the target segment and make any adjustments there.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CopySource.png]] '''''Copy Source'''''. or use the shortcut ''Alt-Ins'.

=== Erasing the target segment ===
Sometimes it is necessary to erase what you have just written in the target segment.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Cleanup_Project16.png]] '''''Del Target'''''. or use the shortcut ''Ctrl+Alt+X''.

This button has a toggle behaviour through: Empty target, Remove tags and Restore.

=== Insertion of a special character like the non-breaking space ===
When you write in French, some characters must be accompanied by a non-breaking space: e.g. before the colon, semicolon, exclamation mark, question mark, exclamation mark, before and after quotes, thousands separators, and so on. In WFA, a non-breaking space is represented by the symbol < >.

However, such spaces cannot be automatically handled in an Internet browser as they are when using a text editor such as Word. Therefore it will be necessary to add them manually. By default, a non-breaking space is inserted at the cursor location by clicking on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Insert_c1.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 1'''''.

Two other special characters can be inserted like the curly quotes. Use '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Insert_c2.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 2''''' and [[File:Insert_c3.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 3'''''.

You can configure these 3 special characters in WFA setup (see '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Pandora.27s_box_tab|Pandora’s box]]''').

=== Expanding a segment ===
As we have seen, WFA considers that the segment is terminated when it encounters a segment termination marker. However, in some cases this segmentation is in error. For example, when WFA’s segmentation engine meets the following sentence:
''On pense aux conseils de Prof. Jacques Lacan:''
it can interpret the segment as ending with ''Prof.'' because a full stop is used as an end of segment marker. In this case we can command WFA to expand the segment, that is to say, to append the subsequent segment to it.

[[File:exspand1.png]]

This is done with the ''Alt+Pg'' dn shortcut or '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Expand_Segment16.png]] '''''Expand'''''.

[[File:exspand2.png]]

It is important to expand segments when the segmentation has not been performed correctly because this will increase the chances of it corresponding with a translation memory segment. For example, the segment ''On pense aux conseils de Prof.'' will have little chance of having a similarity of over 75% with another. By contrast, if the sentence ''On pense aux conseils de Prof. Jacques Lacan:'' is in the TM, when WFA encounters the source sentence ''On pense aux conseils de Professeur Jacques Lacan'', it will offer the existing translation, as it has 90% similarity (it is only the word Professor that is not the same).

A segment cannot be expanded if it is terminated by an end of paragraph or end of cell marker, a page break or a tab.

You should not have to expand all segments containing abbreviations that end with a full stop. A comma-separated, modifiable list of common language-specific abbreviations is included in WFA . This can be accessed and modified via the segmentation tab in the configuration dialog box [case-sensitive, optional letters are enclosed in square brackets].

[[File:Abbrev.png]]

=== Shrinking a segment ===
If, on the other hand, two segments are erroneously displayed together due to an absence of an end of segment marker, you can also shrink the segment with the shortcut ''Alt-Pg'' up or ''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:ShrinkSeg.png]] '''''Shrink'''''.

=== Placeables ===

A placeable is any term or expression contained in the source segment that is defined as such. WFA provides shortcuts for inserting them into the target segment, thus both saving time and reducing the potential for typing errors.

WFA predefines as placeables:
*Numbers
*Tags
*Words beginning with, or otherwise containing, capital (upper case) letters
*Words or phrases appearing in the source text that have matching items stored in the '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Glossary|Glossary]]'''.

We have already seen how to copy tags. Given that a tag is a placeable, the procedure is the same: to copy any placeable, simply select it with the comands on '''Translation''' tab: [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] '''Next Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Right'') and [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] '''Previous Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Left'').

You also have the possibility of clicking on any term in the source text, thus placing it under focus and temporarily transforming it into a placeable. A red frame indicates the item selected.

Next, position the cursor in the target segment at the point where the placeable should be positioned or double-click (click and drag) to select the word (phrase) to be replaced and click on the on [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]] '''Copy Pl.'''(''Ctrl+Alt+Down''). The placeable is copied to the relevant position in the target segment.

In this sentence, the placeable elements, selected by ''Ctrl+Alt+Right'' or [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]], are:

[[File:place1.png]]
(starts with a capital letter)

[[File:place2.png]]
(number)

[[File:place3.png]]
(tag)

And, if necessary, any term may be designated as a placeable simply by clicking on it:

[[File:place4.png]]

As you translate the text, you only want to place those elements that should not be translated:

[[File:place5.png]]

At this point, you want to write ‘Chenjerai.’. However it may be faster and more efficient (as well as reducing the possibility of error) to select the item using ''Ctrl+Alt+Right'' or [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] (or even by simply clicking on it) and place it into the segment target with ''Ctrl+Alt+Down'' or [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]].

[[File:place6.png]]

The following proper noun ‘Hove’ is also a placeable, so you can repeat the procedure. Simply use the '''Tab key''' on your keyboard to advance from one placeable to the next (or '''Shift+Tab''' to move in the opposite direction).

[[File:place7.png]]

You can also use the ''Ctrl+Alt+Up'' shortcut or [[File:Dropdown.png]] '''Toggle Pl.'' on '''Translation''' tab to transform terms in the source segment into placeables.

For even greater efficiency, if you type a letter that begins a word or term in the source segment and then successively press Tab, all words or terms beginning with that letter are successively copied to the target segment. For example, in the above sentence, typing ''l'' followed by '''Tab''' will copy ''lyrique'' to the target. Each time you press the Tab key, the word or term that has been copied to the target segment will be replaced by the next
word or term appearing in the source segment that begins with the same letter, i.e. ''le'', ''laisse'' and so on.

=== Case changer ===
Use this feature to toggle through: lowercase, uppercase and proper name for a word. This feature can be used in one word (by putting the cursor inside the word), or with more than one word (by selecting several words with the mouse or Shift+Left/Right Arrow).
Beware that some times it gets crazy with the first and last word.

Use it bu clicking on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:CaseChanger.png]] '''''Case Changer'''''.

=== Increase target height ===
You can increase the target height by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Increase_target.png]] '''''Target Height'''''.

=== Web Speech Beta ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY available for Chrome. Currently disabled due to browser security.'''

This is a beta implementation that uses Google Web Speech API to insert your dictation into the target segment.

To use it, first open the segment and then click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mic.png]] '''''Web Speech Beta''''' button to start the dictation. The icon will change to indicate recording is on. To stop dictation click again on the button.

You can add a shortcut to this command.

You can jump to the next segment as always and keep on dictating. Or you can stop dictation, jump to the next segment and start dictation again.

A provisional transcription will be shown as an auto-suggest text and the final transcription will be inserted on the target segment. The provisional transcription might not be accurate while final transcription should be quite accurate and may be different from provisional transcription.

Please take into account that this is a beta implementation and that voice transcription is done online so there can be delays when dictating. We encourage you to use it and give us some feedback.

[[File:Warning.png]] It can be that Chrome keeps asking you to allow the use of the microphone every time. You need to check the Chrome settings: "Privacy>Content Settings>Microphone>Manage exceptions". There you should have an exception for https:freetm.com.

If you are connected to the site via HTTS the grant is permanent, if you use HTTP, you are asked each time.

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rR88md-xyik&feature=em-uploademail this video] about how to use this tool.

Check this links for more information:

[https://support.google.com/chrome/answer/3123708?p=settings_manage_exceptions&rd=1 Chrome Exceptions]

[https://support.google.com/chrome/answer/6148059?hl=en Chrome website permissions]

=== Edit Source ===
Using '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:EditSource16.png]] '''''Edit Source''''' will help you to correct the source text in order to have valid TU in memory.

This will not change the source file and obviously will not automatically change the target segment.

=== Ending the translation ===
If for any reason you want to stop translating, you have three choices:
* Close the translation and validate the current segment in the TM ('''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close & Commit''''' or ''Alt+End'')
* Close the translation without validating it ('''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:Close.png]] '''''Close''''' or ''Shift+Alt+End'')
* Clear the content of the target segment, together with any attached note, by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:Close_restore.png]] '''''Close & Delete''''' .

== After Translation ==

When your translation is finished, you use one of our '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Review|Review]]''' tools before '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Download|Download]]''' it.

= Tools =
=== Downloading TXML file ===
You can download your document in TXML format, the standard working file format used by WFA. This permits you, for example, to send the file to a colleague for review using Wordfast Anywhere or Pro. Once reviewed and corrected, you can upload it again.

To download your working file go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual TXML'''''.

[[File:DownloadTypesList.png]]

If your translation is incomplete or contains provisional segments or notes, you will receive this warning:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

At this point you have the choice to accept (OK) or cancel (Cancel) to return to your translation. If you accept, you will need to consider the following dialog:

[[File:DownloadOptions2a.png]]

You can optionally instruct WFA to copy the source segment to the target segment if it is blank (check Copy source to target if target is empty) and/or to ignore language variations, e.g. to not make a distinction between British and American English (check No language variants).

Choose the way to download the file and click '''''OK''''' to donwload the file.

=== Merging TXML files ===
If you already have a file in TXML format you can upload it to your workspace. To do this go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:Mergetms16.png]] '''Merge Txml''' button. At this point you must complete the following dialog box:

[[File:Mergetxml1.PNG]]

By checking Merge an existing document, all documents that exist in your workspace will be listed according to language pair, and you will have to choose which will be merged with the file you intend to upload.

You can also set WFA to update the TM corresponding to the file you upload (check Update or create a TM with a bilingual document). Check Merge an existing TM and choose which TM to update from the list displayed. You will also need to determine whether, in the case of identical source segments, new TUs should be added to existing ones (Keep existing TUs) or whether they should replace them (Overwrite existing TUs). If, on the other hand, you prefer to create a new TM, click on Create a new TM. At this point, you will have the opportunity to give this new TM a name, if you have more than one TM for the same language pair. Then click Upload to upload the file or Close to exit without doing anything.

Note that operations performed on the document are independent from memory-related operations, allowing you to update only the document, or only the memory, or both.
If you have clicked Upload, you will receive the following message:

[[File:Mergetxml2.png]]

Click Browse to navigate through your directories and select your file, then click Submit to perform the upload or Cancel to cancel the operation. After the merge operation has been successfully performed, a report will appear showing how many segments were merged.

[[File:Mergetxml3.png]]

=== Other downloads ===
You can also download the working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments, usable by Wordfast Classic (and Trados Workbench).

[[File:Bilingualwordfastclassic.png]]

This will allow your document to be proofread by a Wordfast Classic user. Caution, this download is only available for files formatted as .doc and .rtf. Unlike the TXML file, this format cannot be imported into WFA.

To download your working file in bilingual MS-Word format, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the '''''Download''''' button and choose '''Bilingual Doc original''' option. This option is only available if your source file is a MS Word file.

[[File:DownloadTypesList.png]]

If your translation is incomplete or contains provisional segments or notes, you will receive this warning:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

At this point you have the choice to accept (OK) or cancel (Cancel) to return to your translation. If you accept, you will need to respond to the following message:

[[File:Bilingualwordfastclassic2.png]]

Following the same steps you can download this other files:

* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments without placeholders Bilingual. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC no placeholders''''' option.
* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments with placeholders Bilingual. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC with placeholders''''' option.
* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments with tag-content as placeholder. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC tag content''''' option.
* Your translated file, in plain text format, without any formatting. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Unformatted Text''''' option.

=== Find & Replace ===
It is often necessary to locate a word or text string in a file that has been translated. For this we use the Doc Find and Replace function. Go to '''''Edit''''' tab and click on the [[File:FindReplace.png]] '''''Find & Replace''''' button.

As with other functions that require the current segment to be closed, you will receive a warning that the current segment will be closed without being saved. If you agree, click OK, otherwise click Cancel to cancel the transaction and save your work.

[[File:Warning.png]] By default search is only done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:SR1.png]]

'''''Find & Replace''''' dialog has 4 tabs performing different actions.

* Use '''Find''' tab to locate a word or text in your document.
* Use '''Find/Replace''' tab to locate and replace a word or text in your document.
* Use '''Go to Segment''' tab to search for single segments (1,5,68,499) or a range of segments (25-66).
* Use '''Miscellaneous''' tab to perform different types of searches such as look for '''provisional''' or '''untranslated''' segments, or segments with '''notes''' or '''tag differences'''.

[[File:Notice.png]] You can use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:Warning.png]] Not all the options are always available.
==== Find ====
Use '''Find''' tab.
Type the word or text you want to find and click '''Find''' button to start a search. When search is done hits are highlighted and the number of hits is shown on the dialog.

[[File:SR6.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] By default search is only done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:SR7.png]]

==== Replace ====
Use '''Find/Replace''' tab. Type the word/text you want to find and the word/text you want it replaced for and click '''Find''' button to start a search. When search is done hits are highlighted and the number of hits is shown on the dialog.

[[File:SR8.png]]

It may happen that '''Replace''', '''Replace/Find''' and '''Replace All''' buttons are not available. This happens because the first search does not move you to the first hit, you have to click again '''Find''' to move to the next hit and then replace buttons will be available. Use them to replace, replace and move to next hit or replace all hits.

Replace can only be done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Go to Segment ====
Use '''Go to Segment''' tab. Use it to find specific segments. This can be an alternative to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''.
You can type single segments separated by commas (1,5,68,499) or a range of segments (25-66).

[[File:SR4.png]]

Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Miscellaneous ====
Use '''Miscellaneous''' tab. This 6 types of search do not require to type a word/text but will help you locate segments with some particularities. This can be an alternative to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''.

[[File:SR5a.png]]

You can search for:

* '''Provisional''' segments.
* '''Untranslated''' segments.
* Segments with '''Tag difference'''.
* Segments with '''Notes'''.
* Segments with '''Double spaces'''.
* Segments with '''Revisions'''.

Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Advanced search options ====

Using the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button you can access some advanced search options:

[[File:SR2.png]]

* Search for '''Whole Word'''.
* Do a '''Case sensitive''' search.
* Search for words that start/end by the characters using * as a joker. For example searching for *able will find: movable, payable, breakable,...etc. And searching for hand* will find: handbag, handmade, handbook,...etc
* Search on Source, Target or both. This can only be used in '''Find''' tab.
* Mark each found target as provisional.
* Create a note for each replaced segment.
* Update the TM for each replaced segment.
* Do a wrap search
* Change search direction: Backward or Forward.

=== Analyze ===
Before providing a translation quotation, you may wish to analyze the source text to determine the extent of the work required. WFA provides an analytical tool for this purpose. To do this, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the '''''Analyze''''' button and choose '''Analyze'''. If your file is big and you do not want to wait, choose '''Analyze in Background'''.

A progress message is displayed on the status bar. Then the analysis results will be displayed:

[[File:Analysis.png]]

According to the number of repetitions (identical segments that appear more than once in the document) or the percentage of segments that correspond either completely (100%) or partially (<100%) to matches in the TM, you will be able to precisely estimate the volume of work actually requiring to be translated. After having examined the analysis report, click Close.

=== Statistics ===
WFA allows you to see what progress you have made with your translation at any time. To do this, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button.

A statistical report on your translation will be displayed:

[[File:Statistics.png]]

You will see the number of source and target segments (with the percentage already translated in brackets); the number of source and current target words; the number of source and target tags and if there is any segmental discrepancy in terms of differences between the number and content of the source and target tags (segments with tag difference); the number of segments not stored in the TM (segments flagged not saved in TM); the number of provisional segments (provisional segments) and notes (segments with notes). The report also displays which segments remain to be translated. After viewing the statistics, click Close.

Another important indicator is always present on the status bar: it tells you on which segment you currently are in relation to the total number of segments in the document. In this example, the document has 149 segments in total and you are currently on the 68:

[[File:Foot1.png]]

=== Alignment ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This tool is not managed by WFA in case there is any problem use the '''Help''' in the tool, the third tab, to report your problem. You can also sent an email to '''converterhelp@wordfast.com'''

When you begin to translate with a CAT tool you may not be able to derive the maximum benefit from it if you do not yet have a translation memory. Or, a client may have source and target documents from a previous translation but cannot supply you with a TM. In this case, you can quickly derive a TM by performing an "alignment" on the documents you have already translated prior to using WFA for your translation work by using the alignment tool.

To do this, go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab and click on the [[File:WF Update16.png]] '''''AutoAligner''''' button.

A new page will open, displaying the following dialog:

[[File:Align.png]]

Follow the instructions to upload the files and align them to get the TM from the alignment.

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HVXTQ5Wb_Eg&feature=em-uploademail this video] about how to use this tool.

You can then upload this TM to be used in WFA.

[[File:Warning.png]] This tool is not managed by WFA in case there is any problem use the '''Help''' in the tool, the third tab, to report your problem. You can also sent an email to '''converterhelp@wordfast.com'''

=== Preview ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Preview|Preview]]'''

=== Transcheck ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Transcheck|Transcheck]]'''

=== Spellcheck ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Spellcheck|Spellcheck]]'''

=== Pretranslation ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.

Go to [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]] '''''Pre-translation''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to open the dialog:

[[File:Pretrans1.png]]

Configure how you want the pre-translation to run:
* Activate '''Fuzzy matches'''
* Set what to do when there is no match from the TM. For setting a MT check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Machine_translation|this]]'''
* Leverage segment scores. Make sure the owner of the document (translation agency or company) has agreed to leverage empty segments.

If your file is big and has many segments run pre-translation in background by clicking on '''Pre Translate in background''' so you can keep working in other things. Otherwise use '''Pre-translate''' button run pre-translation.
Ad the end of the process you'll get a report with the result.

[[File:Pretrans2.png]]

=== Offline Review Tool ===
Use Offline review tool to review a file outside Wordfast Anywhere using a bilingual file and then update the changes.

To get the bilingual file go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Offline review DOC'''''.

[[File:Ofrt11a.png]]

This will download a bilingual file like this.

[[File:ofrt2.png]]

[[File:Notice.png]] Read the disclaimer on the download window and the instructions at the top of the file.

[[File:Warning.png]] Remember to add the tags on the target column as you would do on any translation. '''''Missing tags''''' can cause problems when merging back the file into WFA.

After editing '''only''' the target segments an saving the file you can import it to be merged with the file in Wordfast Anywhere. To do this go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:mergetms16_menu.png]] '''''Merge Offline Review''''' button.

[[File:ofrt3.png]]

A report will be shown with the result of the merge.

[[File:ofrt4.png]]

=== Extract Frequents ===
Use [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]] '''''Extract Frequents''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to create anew file that will contain only the repeated segments of the document.

A first report is created showing the percentage of segments that have an occurrence greater than 2.

[[File:ExtractFrequents1.png]]

Set the '''minumum occurrence''' that you want to extract and click on '''Extract and Open''' to create a new file with the occurrence segments.

=== Go to WFP4 ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.
You can open your document in '''Wordfast Pro 4 Online''' by using [[File:About wordfast16.png]] '''''WFP4''''' button on '''''File''''' tab.

WFP4o will use several settings on WFA along with the TMs and glossaries, so all settings must be done on inside WFA before. Also bear in mind to save your work on WFP4o before switching back to WFA.

[[File:Wf4disclaimer.png]]

Read carefully the disclaimer dialog before clikcing in '''Continue to WFP4o'''.

=== File information ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.

Go to [[File:Modify Project16.png]] '''''File Info''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to open the dialog with information about the file:

[[File:Fileinfo.png]]

=== Split file ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''''This option is only available when the document is closed.'''''

You can split a file in 4 parts by using [[File:Split.png]] '''''Split''''' button on '''''File''''' tab.

[[File:Split1.png]]

For each part a txml file will be created with the corresponding part of the file. The name of the txml files will contain information about which part is. For instance '''_[1of2]''' means the file was splitted into 2 parts and that this file correspond to the first part.

By default files are splited in equally parts, but you can change this and set the boundaries that better suit you.

[[File:Split3.png]]

'''Downloading one of the splited parts will download a TXML file''', but you can choose to download also the entire file in the original format.

[[File:Split2.png]]

Use
[[File:Join.png]] '''''Join''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to put the parts together again. [[File:Warning.png]] '''''This option is only available when the document is closed.'''''

=== Share file ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''This option is only available when the document is closed and is selected from the list.'''

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Share is only possible between Wordfast Anywhere users.'''

You can share your document with '''several Wordfast Anywhere users'''. To do so go to [[File:Share.png]] '''''Share''''' on '''''File''''' tab.

[[File:Share3.png]]

Additional files can be added using '''''Add''''' button on the Document section of the dialogue. If the file belong to a package, all package documents will be added otherwise it will be all documents with the same source and target languages.

To start sharing click on '''''Add''''' button after the Document section to add a new guest. Repeat it to ad more guest users.

[[File:Share_addGuest2.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Guest email must be a valid Wordfast Anywhere account.'''

For each guest two properties can be chosen:
* '''''Share as read-only'''''. This means guest will only access the document in a read-only mode, but no edition will be allowed.
* '''''Keep online (not downloadable)'''''. This means guest will access the file but would not be allowed to download it.

Additionally, you can share a TM and/or glossary with the file.

To do it, use the buttons on the '''''Translation Memories''''' and '''''Glossaries''''' tabs
* '''''Linked to document''''' will add the corresponding TM/glossary associated to the document.
* '''''Add''''' will let you choose which TM/glossary with the same language pair you want to share
* '''''Remove''''' will revoke the share on the selected TM/glossary from the list.

Once guests are added, they are presented on a list on the main dialogue. Any guest will be allowed edit rights unless '''''Share as read-only''''' is check. Owner will always have edit rights.

[[File:Share_mainList2.png]]

Repeat this process to add more guests.

You can use '''''Duplicate''''' button to add a new guest with the same settings than a existing one. Use '''''Revoke''''' button to finish a share with a guest

Check '''''History''''' on the document to force the use of revisions in the document.

As owner and several guests can have edit rights '''a reservation system is used to ensure only one user can edit a segment at a time'''. When a user opens the document the free segments loaded in Document Panel will automatically reserved for him adding a green share icon at the end of the segment. Segments reserved by other users are shown with the same share icon but in red color.
'''The reservation of segments will end when the user closes the document'''.

[[File:Share_reserved.png]]

When a user opens a shared document that is being used by an other user a pop-up message is show to warn about that.

[[File:Share_message.png]]

Also a notification is send to the other working users that a new user has opened the document.

[[File:Share_notification.png]]

Jumping to the next block will release the previous segments and will reserve the new segments being loaded.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''There is no live update of the segments reserved by other users. Which means segments need to be refreshed manually on Document Panel by loading them again, for instance by jumping to a different block and back.'''

To help to know when a user closes the document and releases his segments, a notification is send to the other working users.

[[File:Share_notificationEnd.png]]

'''''To finish a share''''' with a guest owner users need to use '''''Revoke''''', and to remove all the shares use '''''Revoke all'''''. This is a button on the Share dialog ([[File:Share.png]] '''''Share''''' on '''''File''''' tab).

Guest users will not see the share dialogue. They should use [[File:Revoke.png]] '''''Revoke''''' on '''''File''''' tab to finish the share.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Remember Share/Revoke are only available when the document is closed.'''

=== Offline Mode ===
On those situations when there is an internet connection cut or when WFA server is unavailable, WFA will turn on '''Offline Mode'''.

'''Offline Mode''' lets you work offline. It allows you to translate the segments that are currently loaded on the ''Document Panel''.

The translated segments are stored locally and automatically committed to WFA server as soon as the connection is recovered.

If the TM you are using is writeable, TUs will be automatically updated from the document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Be aware that there will be some messages telling you about going in/out of Offline Mode and segments being saved. Some features will not be available during Offline Mode.

[[File:Warning.png]] This feature has nothing to do with Offline Review Tool (OFRT). For information about OFRT, check the index at the top of this Manual.

[[File:Warning.png]] We recommend not to close the browser till synchronization back is done.

= WFA Configuration =
== Features and Shortcuts ==

{|class="wikitable"
|'''Menu tab'''
|'''Feature'''
|'''Shortcut'''
|'''Icon'''
|'''Information'''
|-
|Translation
|Start translation / Next segment
|Alt+Down
|[[File:StartNext.png]]
|Starts a translation session by opening the currently selected segment / Commits the current segment to TM and opens the next segment.
|-
|Translation
|Previous segment
|Alt+Up
|[[File:Previous.png]]
|Commits the current segment to TM and opens the previous segment.
|-
|Translation
|Close & Commit
|Alt+End
|[[File:CloseSave.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment and committing it to the TM.
|-
|Translation
|Close
|Shift+Alt+End
|[[File:Close.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment without committing it to the TM.
|-
|Translation
|Close & Delete
|Alt+Delete
|[[File:Close restore.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment and deleting the target with any note. Do not commit to TM.
|-
|Translation
|Provisional segment
|F10
|[[File:Mark.png]]
|Marks a segment as provisional with a yellow Post-It.
|-
|Translation
|Copy Source
|Alt+Insert
|[[File:CopySource.png]]
|Copies the source segment over the target segment.
|-
|Translation
|Expand
|Alt+PgDn
|[[File:ExpandSeg.png]]
|Expands a segment, if it actually extends beyond the punctuation mark (wrong segmentation). Note that a segment cannot be extended beyond a paragraph mark, page break, tabulator, or table cell.
|-
|Translation
|Shrink
|Alt+PageUp
|[[File:ShrinkSeg.png]]
|Reverses any use of the Expand segment command or reduce the size of a segment.
|-
|Translation
|To Fuzzy
|Shift+Ctrl+PgDn
|[[File:TranslateUntilFuzzy.png]]
|Translates until a non-exact match is found.
|-
|Translation
|Toggle empty
|Ctrl+Alt+X
|[[File:Cleanup Project16.png]]
|Empty the target - remove the tags from the target - restore the original target.
|-
|Translation
|Auto Propagate
|
|[[File:autopropagate.png]]
|Auto propagate segment change through all the document for same source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Toggle Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Up
|[[File:dropdown.png]]
|Transforms all the terms in the source segment into placeables. If repeated, returns to the previous mode.
|-
|Translation
|Next Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Right
|[[File:Next_Placeable16.png]]
|Selects the next placeable element in the source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Copy Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Down
|[[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]]
|Places the selected transposable element from the source segment into the target segment, where the cursor is located (or replaces highlighted text in target segment).
|-
|Translation
|Previous Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Left
|[[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]]
|Selects the previous placeable element in the source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Next word
|Tab
|
|Places the subsequent source word with letter + Tab
|-
|Translation
|Previous word
|Shift+Tab
|
|Places the preceding source word with letter+Shift+Tab.
|-
|Translation
|Target Height
|Ctrl+Alt+T
|[[File:increase_target.png]]
|Increases the height of the target segment for easier viewing.
|-
|Wordfast Anywhere
|Wordfast setup
|Ctrl+Alt+W
|[[File:Setup.png]]
|Opens the Wordfast Anywhere general setup dialog.
|-
|Edit
|Find & Replace
|Ctrl+Alt+R
|[[File:FindReplace.png]]
|Find and replace in the document.
|-
|Edit
|Edit Source
|Ctrl+Alt+K
|[[File:EditSource16.png]]
|Used to make minor corrections to the source segment.
|-
|Edit
|Edit Note
|Ctrl+Alt+J
|[[File:Edit_Note16.png]]
|Allows you to create or edit a note.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 1
|Shift+Ctrl+1
|[[File:insert_c1.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 2
|Shift+Ctrl+2
|[[File:insert_c2.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 3
|Shift+Ctrl+3
|[[File:insert_c3.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Case Changer
|Shift+F3
|[[File:caseChanger.png]]
|Toggle between lowercase, uppercase, and capitalization.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|TMs and glossaries setup
|
|[[File:Preferences16round.png]]
|Opens the TMs and glossaries setup dialog.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Concordance search
|Ctrl+Alt+C
|[[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]]
|Performs a search in the TM and displays all segments containing the search term.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Glossary Search
|Ctrl+Alt+G
|[[File:GlossarySearch.png]]
|Search in the glossary for the word or phrase selected in the source segment.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Add term to glossary
|Ctrl+Alt+T
|[[File:TermEdit.png]]
|Pops up a glossary term entry form.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Copy TU
|Alt+right
|[[File:CopyTU.png]]
|Copy a TU from the TM panel to the target segment. If many, press many times, it will start by copying the second one assuming the first one is already copied. The TU can be a MT proposal.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Delete TU
|Ctrl+Alt+Backspace
|[[File:DeleteTU.png]]
|Delete from TM the current or selected TU visible in the TM panel.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Update TU
|
|[[File:force_tm_addtu.png]]
|Commits to TM the source and target segment as a new TU or update an existing one.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Force TM search
|
|[[File:force_tm.png]]
|Perform a direct search (without cache) in the TM.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Force MT
|
|[[File:force_mt.png]]
|Forces the translation of the segment by the configured MT engines like Google Translate / Microsoft Translator.
|-
|View
|Outline pane
|Ctrl+Alt+D
|[[File:panelOutline.png]]
|Closes or opens the Outline. The outline is a view of all the segments showing which ones are translated but also which ones have notes or are provisional.
|-
|View
|TM pane
|Ctrl+Alt+M
|[[File:panelTm.png]]
|Closes or opens the TM pane.
|-
|View
|Glossary pane
|Ctrl+Alt+H
|[[File:panelGlo.png]]
|Closes or opens the Glossary (Terminology) pane.
|-
|View
|Move next block
|Page Down
|[[File:moveNextScreen.png]]
|Move to the next block of document's content.
|-
|View
|Move previous block
|Page Up
|[[File:movePrevScreen.png]]
|Move to the previous block of document's content.
|-
|View
|First of Block
|Home
|[[File:move_first_seg_screen.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the first segment of the block.
|-
|View
|Last of Block
|End
|[[File:move_last_seg_screen.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the last segment of the page.
|-
|View
|First of Doc
|Ctrl+Home
|[[File:move_first_seg_doc.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the first segment of the document.
|-
|View
|Last of Doc
|Ctrl+End
|[[File:move_last_seg_doc.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the last segment of the document.
|}

== WFA Setup ==
The WFA Setup menu is accessible by the shortcut Ctrl+Alt+W or the [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab.

Six tabs are visible: General, TM rules, Shortcuts, Segmentation, Pandora's box and QA.

=== General tab ===
Several general settings can be don in this tab.

[[File:wfasetup1.png]]

==== Machine translation ====
Click on '''MT''' tab to access the ''Machine Translation'' settings.

[[File:wfasetup2.png]]

WFA gives you the ability to translate each segment by online translation services like Google Translate and Microsoft Translator. The translations proposed are not ever likely to be fully acceptable. However, by making a few small adjustments, you will be able to use them extensively in your translations.

[[File:Warning.png]] When using this service, the source segments that will return a translation are transmitted to Google and Microsoft. It is up to you whether or not to accept these translations; these companies are not made aware of your choice. However, be aware that sending the segments to Google and Microsoft may raise privacy issues between you and your customers.

Each MT engine has a window were to set it's settings. Bear in mind that some MT may require a personal ID or password.
* Use '''Add''' button to add a new MT.
* Use '''Edit''' the settings for the selected MT on the list.
* Use '''Remove''' will delete the selected MT on the list.
* Use '''Test''' to run a test on all the MTs with the active checkbox marked.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''To use a MT engine, it must be added to the list and with the "Active" checkbox marked'''.

On each MT engine window you can set its settings (i.e. the key or url). You can also set a particular values for
* ''Engine timeout'' as in some cases (i.e. small segments) the MT requires more time to get back with a result.
* ''Engine score'' value for each MT.
* ''Details'' for extra information about the MT like the list of available languages.
[[File:Warning.png]] Each MT engine has a different set of available languages.

Finally, there are several general options such as
* When to use the MT (when no TM match, when no TM full match, always)
* Remove tags before sending to MT.
* Use all available providers on ''force MT''.
* Do not copy MT proposition to target.
* Enable MT for review (May slow down the revision process)

===== Custom Machine translation =====

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Note:''' this section is '''DIY (Do It Yourself)'''. Our hotline cannot assist in the customization of an MT engine, because that requires knowledge of the remote provider's specifications. However, public discussion groups may offer help.

If your remote Machine Translation provider is not listed (as a provider tab), you can use '''Custom tab''' to create a custom connector for it. This is only possible if your MT provider's API is using a REST standard, and returns results in a JSON, or similar, format. That is the case with major MT providers currently available with WFC (Google, Microsoft, WorldLingo, deepL, MyMemory, etc.).

In WFA's Machine Translation setup, go to the "Custom MT" tab.

[[File:CustomMT.JPG]]

Note the various elements:
* URL: Tells WFA which is the url of the MT provider with the needed parameters.
** {ss} will be replaced with the source segment to be translated. This parameter must be present.
** {sl} and {tl} will be replaced with your given source and target language codes.
** {key} will be replaced with the given API key
* API Key: Some MT providers need a personal key, this is the place to add it.
* Source language: Source language of the text, it corresponds to the {sl} parameter in the URL.
* Target Language: Target language which will be the text translated to, it corresponds to the {tl} parameter in the URL.
* POST: includes parameters that should be used with the POST method, concatenated like in the URL format. If the parameters needs to be in JSON format, choose the way how to write it (either URL encoded text to convert to JSON either a direct JSON string).
* HEADER: includes parameters that need to be in the header of the request. The format is param:value. Put one parameter per line.
* Json key: Some MT providers return the translated text in a parameter (translation, translatedTex...etc), this tells WFA how to spot the returned translated segment.

Once all the elements are set you can test the connection by using the '''Test''' button. Optionally you can change the text to be tested on the text box next to the button.

Let's assume your preferred MT provider is WorldLingo and we create a custom engine for it. You explore WorldLingo's API documentation. It essentially boils down to a query URL, with parameters. On Custom tab you can use:

* URL: https://www.worldlingo.com/S000.1/api?wl_data={ss}&wl_srclang={sl}&wl_trglang={tl}&wl_password=secret
* API Key: Empty, as no API Key is needed.
* Source language: en.
* Target Language: fr.
* Json key: Empty.

'''Practical example:'''

Opening a browser, you begin by testing the URL. In the following example, the raw URL was customized for an English-to-French language pair, to translate "Hello World". Your real URL will look different, the following is an example based on WorldLingo:

::: ''http://www.worldlingo.com/S000.1/api?wl_data=Hello%20world&wl_srclang=en&wl_trglang=fr&wl_password=secret''

You can try pasting the above URL into a browser's address bar. If things go well, the site will send a reply:

::: ''Bonjour le monde''

Other MT providers may use a more complex JSON reply, in which case you specify the JSON key so that WFA can identify the result. Here the key is "translation" so you would use Json key => translation

::: ''{"responseData":{"translation":"Bonjour le monde","match":1} }''

Your MT provider may require more parameters, such as a secret ID key (aka an API key), or other elements, in which case, you should hard-code those in the URL.

==== Fonts ====
Font Size: this setting only affects the font size on the screen, your document will keep all its original layout unchanged. The available sizes are selected from the drop-down list.

Font Family: this setting only affects the fonts displayed on the screen, your document will keep its entire original layout unchanged. You can specify a specific font or a font family, for example Arial, Helvetica, Sans Serif (sans serif font, default) or Times New Roman, Times, Serif (seriffed font).

==== Target segment selection ====
Positions the mouse pointer at the opening of the segment, with or without selection.

# Cursor at start – no text selected, cursor positioned at the beginning of the segment.
# Cursor at end – no text selected, cursor positioned at the end of the segment. This is the default setting.
# Segment selected – The target segment is entirely selected.

==== Fuzzy Threshold in % ====
Percentage of similarity required for a TU contained in the TM to be suggested as a translation of the source segment. If several TUs meet this criterion, the TU with the highest percentage will be offered. In this case you can select the subsequent TUs with [[File:CopyTU.png]] '''''Copy TU''''' button on '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' tab or using the corresponding shortcut (Alt + Right).

The default percentage (75%) is recommended for most translations, but in some cases it may be appropriate to change it. For example, if you are translating short segments containing only 3 words, a fuzzy threshold of 75% will only offer those TUs which are identical (100%) and those where two words are identical, i.e. 66%, will never be proposed.

==== Record Revisions ====
Check this option if you want to save a record of the changes on translated segments.

==== Enable Auto-Suggest ====
Check this option if you want to get suggestions while you type on a translated segment.

Auto-Suggest can be configured in '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.238_Configure_Auto-Suggest|Pandora's box #7]]''' to add or remove items.

==== Tab behavior ====
Check this option if you want to use click or hover for triggering events on Top Menu bar.

==== Enable auto-hide buttons ====
Check this option to make toop toolbar buttons hide automatically.

==== Enable Segment Tool Bar ====
Check this option to enable the Segment Tool Bar on Horizontal and Vertical views. You can customize it on Pandora's Box #15

=== TM rules tab ===

Here you have the opportunity to establish penalties to be taken into account when calculating the similarity between the TM and the segment to be translated. In other words, the percentage of similarity is reduced, where applicable, according to the figure indicated for each of the following rules. Some rules allow fractional reductions, but this only applies to the calculation: the final reduction will be the sum of all penalties rounded to the nearest whole number. If the percentage of similarity to the TU, reduced to the sum of the penalties, is less than the specified Fuzzy Threshold percentage, it will not be proposed.

[[File:wfasetup3.png]]

Penalties for the following rules are activated only if the box on their right is checked. They apply only to the TUs proposed by the TM or VLTM, not from machine translation, which has its own non-modifiable penalty.

* ''Case penalty'': if there is a difference in case (upper and lower case) between the TU and the segment to be translated, WFA can ignore this and show 100% similarity. But you can assign a penalty of between 1 and 5 points for the difference in case. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 1.

* ''Non literal penalty'': this penalty detects differences due to special characters such as dashes, quotation marks, apostrophes, punctuation and whitespace characters (non-breaking space, horizontal and vertical tabs, ...). There exist several codes for representing each of these special characters. WFA can ignore these and show 100% similarity; otherwise a penalty is calculated using the following method: every time a difference is encountered, it adds the value of the first parameter (0.25, 0.50 or 0.75), which by default is 0.50. The second parameter sets out what the minimum value of the penalty is (default is 1). Since the penalty is necessarily an integer, if the value of the penalty is 0.25 and there is only one in the segment to be translated, the minimum is not reached. Finally, the third parameter sets the maximum penalty to be assigned, even if the addition of all the differences of this rule exceeds that figure (10 by default). This rule is selected by default with a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 10.

* ''Tag penalty'': this rule works exactly the same way as the previous one, but applied to the tags (markers that represent the bits of code used to format the document <1>). This rule is selected by default with a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 10.

* ''Alignment user penalty'': the TUs found in a memory imported into WFA produced by an alignment tool and having the identifier "TALIGN!" may be assigned a penalty from 1 to 10. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 3. Please note, TUs from an alignment may not have the "TALIGN!" identifier.

* ''MT user penalty'': the TUs found in a memory imported into WFA produced by machine translation and having the identifier "MT!" may be penalised from 1 to 10. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 25. Please note, TUs from a machine translation may not have the "MT!" identifier.

* ''Multiple translation penalty'': In the case of a source segment with multiple 100% matches, i.e. several TUs having the same source segment but different translated segments, a penalty may be applied to warn of a possible choice between translations. This scenario is rare and no penalty is assigned by default.

* ''Attribute penalty'': attributes are identifiers that are associated with a particular TU at the time that it is recorded in the memory. There are five possible attributes: the first is fixed (it identifies the user who posted the TU), while the other four can be user defined. In general, translators use attribute no. 1 to define the subject of the text to be translated and the attribute no. 2 to define the client who owns the text. The other two attributes are free to be used for anything else. For example, if the proposed TU is from a text whose subject is "electronics", it will be penalised if the subject of the text to be translated is "medicine." In other words if the TU is 100% identical to the segment to be translated, it will be displayed with a percentage similarity of 98% if the penalty applied is 2 points.

The penalty can be a number from 1 to 5, valid for the four attributes. By default this rule is not active.

If you use a TM uploaded from Wordfast Classic or Pro, the existing attributes of the TU may be penalised.

=== Shortcuts tab ===

You can set the shortcuts you want to use.

[[File:wfasetup4.png]]

WFA shortcuts are not immutable. If some of them do not suit you, you can reassign them. To do this, click on the '''''upd''''' link of the shortcut you wish to change.

[[File:wfasetup5.png]]

In this example, corresponding to the first shortcut, you see the name of the command and a drop-down list. Choose '''None''' if you want to remove the shortcut or choose another from the list. Then click '''''Update''''' to confirm or '''''Cancel''''' to dismiss the dialog. Repeat for all the shortcuts that you want to change. The new keyboard shortcuts will be displayed.

The last four commands have no shortcuts; however, you can assign shortcuts to them if you wish.

If after modifying several shortcuts you want to return them to their original state, click '''''Restore default shortcuts'''''.

Finally, click '''''Save''''' settings to confirm any changes or '''''Cancel''''' to dismiss the dialog.

=== Segmentation tab ===
This tab defines the rules for segmentation.

[[File:Segmentation111.JPG]]

* ''Segmentation style'': this block determines how the segmentation will be performed. If you choose ''Wordfast /Trados segmentation'' (default) the standard end-of-segment markers are defined as follows: full stop, colon, question mark, exclamation mark and tab (Tab). You can add other characters as well as space (Space), non-breaking space (NBSP), carriage return (CR) and line feed (LF). You can add as markers: a number followed by an end of segment marker (A number Followed by ESM ends a segment – default), an end of segment marker not followed by a space (An ESM without a trailing space ends a segment) and an end of segment marker followed by a space followed by a lowercase letter (An ESM followed by a space followed by a lower-case letter ends a segment). Although you can change these markers, it is recommended to maintain them in such manner that if you share your translations and your memories with other translators, all will follow the same rule.

[[File:Warning.png]] Segmentation is performed at the time of uploading the document to WFA. You cannot therefore change the rules applying to that document during the course of its translation.

The other segmentation rules that you can choose are:
* ''Break segmentation'': segmentation is done according to the end of paragraph character (carriage return) or the tag for HTML files.
* ''Idiom segmentation'': segmentation follows the rules of the software program Idiom.
* ''SRX segmentation'': the segmentation is done by using a previously uploaded file. It follows the rules of the SRX standard, which has become a standard like TMX for formatting memories and TBX for formatting glossaries. In the case of SRX segmentation, abbreviations are also included.

* ''TM compatibility'': You must ensure the compatibility according to the memory you have uploaded or the subsequent use of your documents. By default, WFA's memory is compatible with that of Wordfast Classic and Pro (Assume Wordfast TM). If this is your choice, you can also specify if you have old projects made with Wordfast Classic or Pro (check Legacy TM created by old projects). You can also establish that the memory was created by Trados (Assume Trados TM), even adding that it was created by Trados and Word (TM created by Trados + Word); by Idiom (Assume Idiom TM) or by SDLX (Assume SDLX TM).

*''Abbreviations'': Abbreviations end with a full stop, which WFA then interprets as an end of segment marker. To avoid this, WFA allows you to create and manage a list of abbreviations. While WFA already has lists for some languages, others are empty – the user must provide the necessary information. The abbreviations are entered into the text box, one after another, without spaces and separated by a comma. Once updated, save your list by clicking on Save the language. Repeat for each language that you translate.

=== Pandora's box tab ===
This tab has many different settings. Some of this settings will open a new dialog.

[[File:wfasetup7.png]]

==== #1 PC, tablet and smartphone modes ====
Use this mode if you are using a mobile device. The segment toolbar is enlarged; local file access is disabled.

==== #2 Real time collaboration ====
Real time collaboration disables data caching. This forces the TM search before you open a segment, causing a response delay. Avoid using this mode unless sharing a TM and if the TU updates need to be shared immediately.

==== #3 Document file name convention ====
Customize your document name for download by adding a prefix and/or a suffix.

==== #4 Special characters insertion ====
Configure the 7 special characters insertion of the Edition tab.

==== #5 Configure online dictionaries ====
Configure URLs for 2 online search engines.

* Click "Add" to add a new dictionary.
* After filling the "Friendly name" and "Url" correctly you need to use "Test" to check it works fine.
* Use "Save" to add the dictionary to the list. Bear in mind that if the URL already exists it cannot be added.

If all worked fine, the list should have been updated and your dictionary available to be used.

The list does not use "Friendly name" to sort the dictionaries, so you need to check all the list to find the one you added.

In order to use one dictionary you need to select it from the list and save the settings.

==== #6 Multiple Ctrl+Alt+Down toggles placeable ====
Use this feature to toggle between copy the target term, copy the source term, or leave blank.

==== #7 Configure Auto-Suggest ====
Auto-suggest is activated at the '''General''' tab when clicking on [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab.

On this section of Pandora's Box is where you can '''configure which suggestions will Auto-suggest show'''.

[[File:AutoSuggest1.JPG]]

'''Auto-suggest can show different items''' such as: Glossary matches, tags, word from with a capital letter, numbers, file path, email addresses, URLs, chunks of Machine Translation, date and number conversion, text in parentheses (), text in braces {}, bracketed text [], word containing special character and unit conversion.

On the left there is a combo box to select the number of typed characters that will trigger auto-suggest to show up.

For '''date and number conversion''' there is a sub dialog, that can be opened by clicking on the [[File:Edit.png]] button on the left.

[[File:AutoSuggest2.JPG]]

Here you can set how dates and numbers will be converted and shown in the auto-suggested text.

For '''dates''' you can choose a different format and separator. For instance source ''2015.04.01'' could be converted to ''01/04/2015'' on target.

For '''numbers''' you can choose a different group and decimal separator. For instance source ''123.456,00'' could be converted to ''123 456.00'' on target.

==== #8 Configure Filters ====
Configure conversion of documents from their original format to the internal editor format.

For some files you can configure some parameters that will tell the filter what to do for some situations such as translate comments or sheet names.

You can make this configuration for: '''xls, xlsx, ppt, pptx, doc, docx, rtf, htm, html, mif, idml, xml (Text based files)'''.

[[File:Pandora9.JPG]]

On this section there are also 3 settings that will apply to any file.

* '''Editor format'''. To choose which type of '''bilingual file (TXML or TXLF)''' the filter should produce.[[File:Warning.png]] '''''The download bilingual file will be of the type used when the file was uploaded.''''' For example if the file was uploaded using TXML, the bilingual download will be TXML. A file cannot be uploaded using one type (TXML) and download the bilingual file of the other type (TXLF). The workaround is to change the type and upload the file again.

* '''Extract numbers'''. To define the filter action on source segments that contain only numbers.

** ''all'': Extracts all segments with only numbers for translation
** ''time_date_measure'': Extracts only segments with time and date
** ''none'': Does not extract any segments that contain only numbers

* '''Segmentation on break'''. To enable segmentation on line breaks.

==== #9 Configure double click to open/close a segment ====
Configure opening/closing actions on a segment by double clicking in the document panel. This is always active for mobile plain text mode.

[[File:Pandora101.png]]

==== #10 Configure TM Search ====
Set the timeout for searches. After the timeout, the search is cancelled and returns nothing. The default value is 4 seconds.

==== #11 Copy source when no TM match and no MT proposition ====
Copy source to target when no TM match and no MT proposition.

==== #12 Do not show empty paragraph line in Classic view ====
Do not copy MT proposition to target.

==== #13 Hide segment's IDs column on the Table view ====
Do not copy MT proposition to target.

==== #14 Custom Tab settings ====
Use this mode if you are using a mobile device. The segment toolbar is enlarged; local file access is disabled.

==== #15 Customize Segment Toolbar ====
Dialog to choose which buttons will be placed on Segment toolbar. Segment toolbar is enabled on General tab.

==== #16 Copy untranslatable to target automatically and open next segment ====
Define what will be considered an "Untranslatable segment" which will be copied to target automatically and open next segment

=== QA tab ===
Set here the criteria that will be used to conduct an audit of quality when doing a '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Transcheck|Transcheck]]'''

[[File:wfasetup8.png]]

There are several criteria that can be checked, some of which can also ''be checked while translating'' (by using the second checkbox column under '''While Translating''' title).

Here is a short description:

* '''Source & target lengths''': Compares the character count between the source and target segments. You can set the minimum and maximum % of allowed character count for the target segment.

* '''Empty target''': Checks for an empty target segment. This is always checked while translating.

* '''Numerical''': Checks that the numerical values between the source and target segments are correct.

* '''Placeable''': Checks if the tags are copied correctly to the target segments. This is always checked while translating.

* '''Forbidden chars''': Checks if the target segment includes forbidden characters. You can set the list of forbidden characters that should not be included in the target segment.

* '''Punctuations''': Checks for consistency in punctuation between source and target segments. You can set the punctuation marks that should not be included in the target segment. [[File:notice.png]] The transcheck punctuation only works on end of segmentation punctuation.

* '''Untranslatable''': Compares the source and target segments to check if the untranslatable content is consistent. You can set the untranslatable text that must be retained in the target segment.

* '''Copied source''': Checks for untranslated text when copied source option is used.

* '''Blacklists''': Checks if the target segment includes blacklisted terms. You can set blacklisted terms that should not be included in the target segment. [[File:notice.png]] The blacklisted term list must be a tab delimited file (bad term + tabulation + proposed term).

* '''Terminology''': Checks if all term translations from an active glossary are used in the target of a segment. You can enable or disable Ignore Case option.

* '''First word capitalization''': Checks if the first letter of the segment is capitalized.

* '''Edited exact match''': Checks if any exact match segments from the TM have been edited.

* '''Unedited fuzzy''': Checks if any fuzzy match segments from the TM have been left unedited.

* '''Source Consistency''': Checks consistency between source segments if the target is repeated.

* '''Target consistency''': Checks consistency between target segments if the source is repeated.

== Profile Configuration ==
Go to [[File:User profile.png]] '''''User Profile''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' menu to see information about your account and change some settings of your profile.

[[File:Profileconfig1.png]]

=== Change email ===
Use this option to change the email of your account.

[[File:Profileconfig2.png]]

=== Change password ===
Check the [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_change_my_password Wordfast Anywhere FAQ] for more information.

=== Delete account ===
Use this option to remove your account from Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:Profileconfig4.png]]

Wordfast Anywhere 6 Manual

2022-02-11T11:41:02Z

Remiandre: /* Appending(Update) an existing TM with a local TM */

{{Languages}}
[[Category:Wordfast Anywhere]]

= Introduction =
Wordfast Anywhere (WFA) is the online version of the popular Wordfast computer assisted translation (CAT) program that provides much of the functionality of the Classic and Pro desktop versions. Instead of being installed as a program on the user’s computer, WFA is made accessible from Wordfast’s servers via a web browser, regardless of the operating system used (Windows, Mac, Linux, etc.). Every effort has been made to ensure that the user interface is as close as possible to the other Wordfast flavours: toolbars, icons, shortcuts and working methods. A Wordfast Classic or Pro user should be able to use WFA with almost zero assimilation time.

It is worth remarking that WFA is almost certainly the CAT program that integrates best with the popular Mac operating system. Unlike Java-based, cross-platform programs – including Wordfast Pro – that will run on the Mac but don’t integrate with system-wide tools such as the built in Dictionary, WFA will run in Mac-native browsers such as Safari, thus giving you access to the entire range of language and text handling tools that are built into the Mac OS environment.

[[File:WFA_pagina_5_new.jpg]]
[[File:WFA_pagina_6_new.jpg]]

With WFA you can translate a wide range of both editable (TXT, DOC, DOCX, RTF, XLS, PPT, ODT, HTML, TXML, MIF, INX, etc.) and non-editable (PDF, TIFF) documents. You can store up ten current documents in your workspace, deleting your finished translations to free up space and permit new documents to be uploaded.

You can also import the TMs (translation memories) of all the language pairs you work in. Your memories will progressively expand as and when you translate. They are stored securely and will not be shared or revealed without your authorisation. If you need a local copy, you can download your TM to your computer at any time.

As is the case with other Wordfast flavours, you can add terms to your glossary as you translate. You can also upload existing glossaries to your workspace, for all language pairs. Here again, your glossaries are secure and will not be shared or revealed unless you specifically invite a colleague. You can also download your glossary if you need a local copy.

The following instructions have been written for complete beginners. Having understood the above comments, a Wordfast Classic or Pro user should have no difficulty in using WFA intuitively.

Check the '''[[Wordfast Anywhere 6 Start Guide]]''' for a quick start.

Check our [https://www.freetm.com/jsp/terms.jsp Terms of use].

== How to use WFA ==
On Wordfast Anywhere every document belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a translation project.

So the first you need is a project. A project named "Project_1" is created by default, but you can create up to 3 projects.

A project needs a language pair. A default one is suggested but more can be added. Each language pair can have a TM and glossary assigned which will be used on several processes and also automatically assigned to the documents uploaded.

A project also needs a task. "Translate" is the one by default.

Once the project is created you can add the documents. Documents can be added to all language pairs or to specific ones. There is a maximum number of documents per project depending of the type of project.

Double-click a project to open it to see the content (documents grouped by language pairs).

Double-click a document to start/resume work.

[[File:notice.png]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rDhVYY02Cds Wordfast Anywhere 6 Basic Projects video]'''

= Login in to WFA account =
Check the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Login_in_to_WFA_account Login in to WFA account]''' section on the Start Guide.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you have not created an account yet, click on the '''''Create a new account''''' and follow the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#How_to_create_an_account instructions]'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you ever ''forget your password'', click on the '''''Forgot your password?''''' and follow the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Get_your_password_back instructions]'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you are having ''login problems'' check '''''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Cannot_log_in_to_Wordfast_Anywhere Cannot log in to Wordfast Anywhere]''''' and follow the instructions.

=User Interface =
The user interface is divided into several sections. A top menu with tabs and buttons, a main central panel that changes depending on where we are (project list, project content, document translation) and a bottom panel where information and messages are shown.

Once you are connected to WFA, the workspace appears.

This should look similar to the following screenshot (depending on the browser, operating system or device used to access WFA):

[[File:Newui6.PNG]]

The workspace can be modified at any point according to your requirements.
==Top Menu==
At the very top you can find the ''Top Menu'' which consists in '''two rows''': one for the different '''menus''' (tabs) and one for the '''buttons''' corresponding to the selected tab.

Use [[File:CollapseTop.png]] to hide the buttons. Use [[File:CollapseBottom.png]] to show the buttons.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a project or selecting/opening a document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a project is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when a project is selected from the project list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when more than one file is selected from the document list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus used for translation (Edit, view, translation, review and TM & Glossaries) are only visible when the document is opened. Those buttons keep working as always, just need to open the document.

===Wordfast Anywhere Menu===

This tab a miscellaneous of buttons concerning the Wordfast Anywhere project.

[[File:Wfatab6.PNG]]

* [[File:Logout16.png]]: Use it when you want to '''leave''' Wordfast Anywhere.
* [[File:User profile.png]]: Here you'll find your '''account information'''. You'll be able to change your ''Login'' email, the ''Security Question'', the ''Security Answer'' and delete your account.
* [[File:Preferences.png]]: Here is where you set the '''configuration''' of Wordfast Anywhere:''Font Size'', ''Machine translation'', ''TM rules'', ''Shortcuts'', ''Segmentation'', ''Transcheck'' rules...etc.
* [[File:Preferences16round.png]]: Global TM & glossary management (create, add, upload, merge, edit, download, delete... ), no more for assignment.
* [[File:WF Update16.png]]: This button will direct you to a site to '''align''' your files.
* [[File:help16.png]]: WFA Help:
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''start guide''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''PM start guide''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''FAQ''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''manual''' wiki page.
** If the previous wiki pages do not work, this is a pdf backup.
* [[File:Notice.png]]: There are 4 icons corresponding to different types of '''notifications''' ([[File:Warning.png]] ONLY displayed when there are notifications):
** Webmaster Info: notifications coming from Wordfast Anywhere administration (p.e stopping the server for a publication).
** Background Info: notifications about ''Background'' processes (p.e. Analyze, Spellcheck...etc).
** System Info: notifications from the system (p.e. an unsupported browser).
** TM Server Info: notifications realted to the TM Server (p.e. TM server is disconnected).

===Project Menu===
This tab has the tools concerning a project.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when a project is selected on the project list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a project is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available for standard projects.

No project selected on the project list.

[[File:ProjecttabAll.PNG]]

This are the basic buttons:

* [[File:Pm new project 16.png]]: '''New''' use it to create a project.
* [[File:Pm open project 16.png]]: '''Open''' the selected project from the project list.
* [[File:Analyze Project16.png]]: '''Analyze''' all the documents of the project. A report is generated.
* [[File:Pm delete project 16.png]]: '''Delete''' the selected project.
* [[File:Pm close project 16.png]]: '''Close''' an opened project.
* [[File:Pm import project 16.png]]: '''Import''' a .glp file.
* [[File:Pm export project 16.png]]: '''Export''' a project into a .glp file.
* [[File:Linguist16.png]]: Use it to '''Manage''' the team of '''linguists'''.

To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

===File Tab===
This tab has the tools concerning a file.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be available when more than one file is selected from the list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be also available when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a document is opened.

[[File:FiletabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:Translate File16.png]]: '''Open''' the selected file from the list.
* [[File:About wordfast16.png]]: Open the document with '''Wordfast Pro Online'''. [[File:Warning.png]] The use of Wordfast Pro Online will be discontinued on December 31, 2021.
* [[File:Close16.png]]: '''Close''' an opened file.
* [[File:Save16.png]]: Here you'll find all the '''Download''' options for a file (p.e. translated version, bilingual versions, TXML, unformatted text, Off-line Report Tool, TM from doc segments).
* [[File:Preferences16round.png]]: With this button you'll change the '''TM & Glossary''' configuration for the document.
* [[File:Analyze Project16.png]]: '''Analyze''' the selected document/s. A report is generated.
* [[File:Statistics16.png]]: Get the '''Statistics''' of the document.
* [[File:Modify Project16.png]]: Get information about the file.
* [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]]: '''Pre-translate''' the selected document/s.
* [[File:Mergetms16.png]]: Use this button to '''merge''' the document with a '''TXML''' file.
* [[File:mergetms16_menu.png]]: Use this button to '''merge''' the document with an imported '''OFRT''' file.
* [[File:Split.png]] [[File:Join.png]]: '''Split''' the document in parts. '''Join''' the parts together again.
* [[File:Share.png]] [[File:Revoke.png]]: '''Share''' the document with an other Wordfast Anywhere user. '''Revoke''' will finish the share.
* [[File:Translate File16.png]]: '''Fuzzy Open''' the file without full matches.
* [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]]: '''Extract''' the '''frequent''' segments.
* [[File:Edit16.png]]: '''Rename''' the file.

===Edit Tab===

This tab is a translation tool extension.

[[File:Warning.png]] This buttons will be available when the document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be available when a TM is being edited.

[[File:EdittabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:FindReplace.png]]: Use it to '''Find & Replace''' text but also to go to a particular segment or get a list of segments ''untranslated'', ''provisional'', with ''notes'' or with ''tag differences''.
* [[File:EditSource16.png]]: '''Edit''' the source segment.
* [[File:Edit_Note16.png]]: Create, edit or remove a '''Note''' on a segment.
* [[File:Insert_c.png]]: '''Insert special characters'''. 7 different characters can be defined on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => '''''Setup''''' button > '''''Pandora's box'''''
* [[File:Delete_alltargetseg.png]]: '''Delete''' '''tags''' in the document. This is only available when editing a TM and has 2 options: Delete all target tags or delete all document tags.
* [[File:delete_revisions.png]]: '''Delete''' the segment '''history'''.
* [[File:Delete_alltargetseg.png]]: '''Delete''' all '''target''' segments of the document.
* [[File:caseChanger.png]]: Toggle between lowercase, uppercase, and capitalization..

===View Tab===

In this tab you'll find the buttons to move through the document and show or hide the different panels.

[[File:ViewtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:PanelOutline.png]]: Show or hide '''Outline'''.
* [[File:panelTm.png]]: Show or hide '''TM''' panel.
* [[File:panelGlo.png]]: Show or hide '''Glossary''' panel.
* [[File:MovePrevScreen.png]]: Go to '''Previous Block'''.
* [[File:MoveNextScreen.png]]: Go to '''Next Block'''.
* [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]]: Toggle between the different document layout: Classic, Horizontal and Vertical.
* [[File:move_prev_seg.png]]: Go to '''Previous segment'''.
* [[File:move_next_seg.png]]: Go to '''Next segment'''.
* [[File:move_first_seg_screen.png]]: Go to '''First segment''' of '''Block'''.
* [[File:move_last_seg_screen.png]]: Go to '''Last segment''' of '''Block'''.
* [[File:move_first_seg_doc.png]]: Go to '''First segment''' of '''document'''.
* [[File:move_last_seg_doc.png]]: Go to '''Last segment''' of '''document'''.

===Translation Tab===

Find here all the tools to perform a translation

[[File:TranslationtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:StartNext.png]]: '''Start translation''' or open next segment.
* [[File:Previous.png]]: Open previous segment.
* [[File:CloseSave.png]]: '''Close and commit''' to the TM.
* [[File:Close retain.png]]: '''Close and retain''' the segment as provisional but not commit to the TM
* [[File:close.png]]: '''Close segment'''.
* [[File:close_restore.png]]: '''Close and delete''' target content.
* [[File:mark.png]]: Mark segment as '''provisional'''.
* [[File:CopySource.png]]: '''Copy source''' to target.
* [[File:Expand_Segment16.png]]: '''Expand''' segment.
* [[File:ShrinkSeg.png]]: '''Shrink''' segment.
* [[File:TranslateUntilFuzzy.png]]: '''Translate''' document '''until a fuzzy''' match.
* [[File:Cleanup_Project16.png]]: Toggle between Empty target, Remove tags and Restore.
* [[File:autopropagate.png]]: '''Auto propagate''' segment changes through all the document.
* [[File:dropdown.png]]: Toggle placeable.
* [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]]: Go to '''Next Placeable'''.
* [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]]: '''Copy Placeable'''.
* [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]]: Go to '''Previous Placeable'''.
* [[File:increase_target.png]]: Increase target segment height.
* [[File:Mic.png]]: Use '''Web Speech''' to dictate the target content. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY available for Chrome. Currently disabled due to browser security.'''

===Review Tab===

This tab has the tools to review the document.

[[File:ReviewtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:Preview16.png]]: '''Preview''' a PDF version of the document.
* [[File:Transcheck16.png]]: Do a '''quality control''' on the document
* [[File:Spellcheck16.png]]: '''Spellcheck''' the document

===TMs and Glossaries Tab===

Tab with the tools related to TM and glossaries actions.

[[File:TmglotabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]]: Concordance search
* [[File:GlossarySearch.png]]: Glossary Search
* [[File:TermEdit.png]]: Term edition.
* [[File:CopyTU.png]]: Copy TU.
* [[File:DeleteTU.png]]: Delete TU.
* [[File:Add File To Project16.png]]: Add TU.
* [[File:force_tm_addtu.png]]: Update TU.
* [[File:force_tm.png]]: Force TM search.
* [[File:force_mt.png]]: Force Machine Translation search.
* [[File:force_term.png]]: Force Glossary search.
* [[File:update_tm_doc.png]]: Update TM with document content.
* [[File:iSearch.png]]: Lookup in online dictionary.

===Help Tab===

Help section is on the '''Wordfast Anywhere Menu'''.

===Custom Tab===
In this tab you can add up to 15 buttons of your choice, so you can have together in one tab your most used buttons.
Selection any of the translation menus buttons (Edit, view, translation, review and TM & Glossaries) and the WFA setup and TM&Glossary set up.

[[File:custom_tab.png]]

To do so you must go to [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab. Then go to '''Pandora Box''' tab and go to ''Custom Tab settings'', where you will find all the buttons that can be added to the '''Custom''' tab

[[File:custom_tab2.png]]

==Panels==

===Project List Panel===
This panel shows the list of projects.

[[File:Projectlistpanel.png]]

Projects will be listed here. '''Double click on one project''' or select it and use [[File:Pm open project 16.png]]'''Open''' from the top menu bar to open the project.

===Project content Panel===
When opening a project, the ''Content Panel'' area will show the content of the project, the list of documents in the project.

[[File:ProjectContentpanel.png]]

Main areas are:

* '''Header row (1)''': In this row you'll fine the headers of the columns. The columns are: Languages/file (1), Vol. (1C) and the columns for the different jobs will follow (1D). This row will change the background color according to the project status: blue for ''In preparation'', orange for ''In progress'' and green for ''completed''. Use the '''Add files''' button (1A) to add files to all language pairs and use '''dashboard''' button (1B) to see an estimation of cost of the project.
* '''Project setup (2)'''Click on the ''project name'' or icon next to it to open the project setup dialog.
* '''Language Row (3)''': In this row several icons will be shown depending on the file selection to perform actions such as add files to the language pair (3A), delete selected files (3B) or assign linguist to jobs (3C). Use the '''remove language pair''' icon (3D) to delete the language pair ([[File:Warning.png]] all the documents inside will be permanently deleted).
* '''Note (4)''' this icon allows to add a note to the document.
* '''TM & glossaries (5)''' This are the TMs and glossaries assigned to the document, mouse-over to see extra information. This TM and glossary assignment will be used for the tasks.
* On the '''Status bar''' you'll find information about the project.
* Clicking on the file name will open the document. And clicking on each of the other cell text or icon will open the edit dialog for that cell.

===Translation Panels===
When a document is opened for translation, the screen is divided in 4 different panels.

[[File:Panels.png]]

====Outline====
Show/Hide Outline panel using '''''View''''' tab => '''''Show/hide Outline''''' [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button

The outline displays all the segments of the document.
The available status are:
* A white box indicates that the segment is not translated
* A green box indicates a translated segment
* A yellow box indicates a provisional segment
* An 'i' after segment id indicates a segment having a note
* The black thick border on the box indicates the current document selected on document panel
* The pink border on the box indicates the visible segments in the document panel

You can jump and open any segment of the document by clicking on its number.
If the segment is not visible on the document panel (blue border instead of pink), the document panel will be refreshed.

Once a segment is opened you can use
'''''Edit''''' tab => '''''Edit Note''''' [[File:Edit_Note16.png]] button to create/delete a note and also '''''Translation ''''' tab => '''''Provisional''''' [[File:mark.png]] button to mark/unmark a provisional segment.

====TM Panel====
This panel shows the matches from TM or MT for the current segment.

You can show or hide this panel using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:panelTm.png]] button.

====Glossary Panel====
This panel shows the matching terms for the current segment.

You can show or hide this panel using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:panelGlo.png]] button.

====Document Panel====

When a document is opened, it shows the segments content.

Wordfast Anywhere do not load the entire document in the editor if there are many segments.

While translating the segments are added one by one to the editor, but if you can move inside the document to see any part you want.

To do so, you can use:
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:MovePrevScreen.png]] button to go to '''Previous Block'''.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:MoveNextScreen.png]] button to go to '''Next Block'''.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button to show '''Outline''' and then jump and open any segment of the document by clicking on its number. More information [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline here]

This is how an opened document looks like:

[[File:document_panel_doc.png]]

=====Document Layout=====
Using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] button you can change the document layout, which is the way segments are shown on Document Panel. The three possible views are:

'''''Classical'''''

[[File:ClassicalLayout.png]]

'''''Horizontal'''''

[[File:HorizontalLayout.png]]

'''''Vertical'''''

[[File:VerticalLayout.png]]

===Status Panel===
Always present at the bottom. Here you can find several information about the project, file, TM, display, translation process. Also some messages will be showed here.

==Other features==

===Show/Hide Top Menu Buttons ===
Buttons on the top menu can be hidden.

Use [[File:CollapseTop.png]] to hide the buttons. Use [[File:CollapseBottom.png]] to show the buttons.

= Project Operations =
A new Project menu bar has been added after Wordfast Anywhere menu. Yes! Project Management (PM) has been introduced to WFA.

* * A project named "Project_1" is created by default. If you had an account before version 6, it will contain all the files from the previous version grouped by language pair.
* Every document now belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a project.
* Double-click a project to open it to see the content (documents grouped by language pairs).
* Double-click a document to start/resume work.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a project.

[[File:notice.png]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rDhVYY02Cds Wordfast Anywhere 6 Basic Projects video]'''

== Create a New Project ==
On the Project tab click on [[File:Pm new project 16.png]]'''New''' to create a new project. This will open the ''Project Seup'' window where the settings for the project are done.

To access the project setup once the project has been created, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

[[File:Createproject.PNG]]
[[File:Createproject1.PNG]]
[[File:Createproject2.PNG]]

The ''Project Setup'' window has two sections that need to be set in order to create the project. Setting one section opens the next one.

;1.General
: On this section general information of the project is set. This includes:
# Project name (Compulsory)
# Description (optional)
# Project type. Defines the type of the project:
#* Standard: For translators working alone.
#* Advanced: For Project Managers (PMs) managing large, multi-language projects.
# Project status (for advanced type). Defines the status of the project:
#* In preparation (blue): When project is being prepared (files, TMs and glossaries and linguist being added)
#* In progress (orange): This marks the start of the project. Files are shared with the linguist at this point.
#* Completed (green): The project is finished.
# Currency(optional). It will be used to calculate the project cost.
# Decimals(optional). When this checkbox is marked the project estimated cost will show numbers with decimals.
# Auto(optional). By default Project Manager will be responsible of pushing files to the next job when completion is done. Mark this checkbox to automatically sent files to the next job upon completion.
;2.Language Pairs and tasks
: On this section language pairs and tasks are added.
* Use the '''+''' next to the language pair header to add a new language pair. This will open the language selection dialog and then the TM and glossaries dialog to assign them to the language pair.
* Use the '''+''' at the end of the header row to add new tasks. Only 10 tasks can be added.
* A row is shown for each language pair where the default word rate (left box) and speed rate (right box) for each task can be set.
* Use the '''-''' next to the language pair to remove it. [[File:Warning.png]] Associated files and shares will be revoked.
* Use the '''-''' next to the task name to remove it. [[File:Warning.png]] Associated files and shares will be revoked.

Once all compulsory fields are set, click on '''Save project''' to save the project and go to the ''Project Content panel''.

[[File:Warning.png]] It is possible to move from standard to advanced but opposite is only possible if the advanced project has only one task.

== Modify Project Setup ==
To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

Use this to change any of the project settings defined on the project creation.

[[File:Warning.png]] It is possible to move from standard to advanced but opposite is only possible if the advanced project has only one task.

It is the same than for creating a project, so check the section above to know about the different parts and settings.

== Setting up language pair, Translation Memories and glossaries ==
Languages are added/removed from the ''Project Setup'' dialog.

To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

Check ''Create Project'' section above to know about it.

=== Language pair with its associated TMs and glossaries set in the project setup ===

To access the project setup dialog, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

[[File:Project_setup.png]]

Click on the language pair '''''+''''' button.

[[File:Langpair_dialog.png]]

Enter the languages and save, the TMs and glossaries dialog opens.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair.png]]

* If no TM and glossary exists for the language pair, a new dialog will propose you to create them. Save and wait they are listed.
* You can create and choose one or more TMs and glossaries. They are selected by checking the row in the '''''Active''''' column.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair_2.png]]

Finally save the TMs and glossaries selection by clicking on the '''''Save''''' button. The new language pair is now in the project setup and one icon is displayed for each TM and glossary.

[[File:Project_setup_2.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] The TMS and glossaries can be updated for a language pair by clicking on the icons. But if documents already exists for that language pair, they will not be affected by this change, only new documents added after the update.

=== TMs and glossaries set individually for a document ===
This selection for a document is overwriting the Language pair selection.
In the project content select a document by checking it and then click on the '''''TMs and glossaries''''' button [[File:Preferences16round.png]] of the '''''File''''' menu.

[[File:Project_content_3.png]]

The same TMs and glossaries dialog opens.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair_3.png]]

Saving will update only the TMs and glossaries for the selected document. A control can done hovering the TM icon.

[[File:Project_content_2.png]]

== Add/Remove Files ==
From the '''Project Content Panel''' there are two ways to add files to a project.

* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the header will add the files to all the languages in the project.
* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the language row. This will add the files only to that language.

[[File:Pmaddfiles.PNG]]

To remove a file, first use the checkbox to select it and then use the [[File:Remove16.png]] icon on the language row.

[[File:Pmdeletefile.PNG]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Associated shares will be revoked.

Several files can be selected to be removed at the same time.

== Project dashboard ==
Using the [[File:Pm_cost_16.png]] icon on the header will show the estimated cost of the project. Click on the icon again to hide costs.

[[File:Pmdashboard.PNG]]

== Advanced Features ==
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

Advanced projects have some extra features to manage the files.

=== Task TM ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

Click on the TM icon on the file column to set how the TM will be used on the tasks.

[[File:PmaddtmPNG.PNG]]

There are different options for the TM use:
*'''''Share TM'''''
**The selected TM will be shared with linguists.
**This is the best option to use.
**Translator will have exact and fuzzy matches.
**Translator can use concordance.
*'''''Create Project TM'''''
**The selected TM will NOT be shared.
**It will be used to create a temporary project TM with the matches from the file/s
**The temporary project TM will be shared.
*'''''Pretranslate'''''
**The selected TM will NOT be shared.
**It will be used to pretransalte the document/s.
**Only one TU match (the highest) per segment will be available to the translator.
**Concordance cannot be used.
**Concordance will only be used in this temporary TM

[[File:Warning.png]] Once a task has started it is not possible to change this assignment.

To change the TM assigned click on the same icon and change the TM selection by marking the ''active'' checkbox for the TMs you want to use.
To unassign the TMs clean all the ''active'' checkboxes.

=== Task Glossaries ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

To assign glossaries to tasks follow the instructions for TMs, but using the ''active'' checkboxes on the glossaries side of the dialog.

=== Manage Linguists ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

The Manage Linguist window can be opened by using the [[File:Linguist16.png]] icon on the '''Project''' tab or the '''Manage linguists''' buttons on the ''Assign Job'' window.

This allows the PM to create a team of linguists that will be used on the project jobs.

The same linguist can be used in several languages and roles.

[[File:Pmlinguist1.PNG]]

Main areas are:

* '''Add new linguist to a new language pair (1)''': Use [[File:Pm_linguist_add_16.png]] icon to add a new linguist to the team for a new language pair.
* '''Add or remove a linguist from a language pair (2)''': Use [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] icon to add a linguist to a language pair and use [[File:Pm_collapse_16.png]] icon to remove it.
* '''Linguist task grid (3)''': In this grid, each cell shows the RATE-SPEED-SCORE settings for a linguist. The grid has 4 columns, one for each role: Translator (TR), Proofreader (PR), Revise (RE) and QA. In addition '''dark values mean that linguist has been marked as "able" to do that role'''. Grey values indicate that linguist is not marked as "able" to do that role. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''

==== New Linguist ====
Use [[File:Pm_linguist_add_16.png]] or [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] to add a new linguist.

[[File:Pmlinguistnew.PNG]]

Introduce the following information to add a linguist.

* '''Email''': It must be the email of the linguist WFA account.
* '''Initials''': Short 4 character nickname for the linguist.
* '''Ctry''': Country of the linguist.
* '''Comment''': Some words about the linguist.
* '''Source language''' and '''target language''' that the linguist can work with.
* Role performance. There are 4 default roles a linguist can do on project tasks.
** Mark the '''checkbox''' if the linguist is able to do the role. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''
** '''Rate''': Linguist minim rate. Rate is measured in import per word. The project currency will be user with the import. For example 0.5 Eur per word.
** '''Speed''': Linguist speed rate (words/day). For example 3,000 words/day.
** '''Score''': Linguist 1 to 5 ''star'' score.

=== Assign Job ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''

Use the [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] icon in the language row under the '''job name''' column to assign a job to a linguist for the checkbox marked files.

[[File:Pmaddtask.PNG]]

On the assign job dialog:
* Choose a linguist from the list to whom the job will be assigned. [[File:Warning.png]] The file will be shared with the linguist when the project is set as 'In progress'. The rate and job amount from the linguist will be set for the task.
* To override the linguist rate or job amount, a particular rate or job amount for the job can be set using the input field under the column header. [[File:Warning.png]] Bear in mind that both are related so changing one will update the other.
* A '''''Deadline''''' can be set on the input field under '''''Duration'''''.
* Fill the '''''Note''''' text box to send extra information to the linguist.
* Use '''''Linguist cannot download the shared file''''' to not allow the linguist to download the file.
* Click on '''''Manage linguists''''' to open the Manage Linguist window to add/edit/remove linguists.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' linguists marked as ''able'' to do a role will be listed.

Use the [[File:Pm_collapse_16.png]] icon in the language row under the '''job name''' column to unassign a linguist from a job for the checkbox marked files. [[File:Warning.png]] Shares will be revoked.

[[File:Pmdeletetask.PNG]]

=== Move file to next Task ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

If '''Auto''' tasking is not set on the ''Project Properties'' window, when a task is finished (file has been revoked by the linguist), PM has to manually move it to the next task which will share the file with the linguist assigned to that task.

To do so, click on the double arrow on the finished task.

[[File:Pmmoveon.PNG]]

=== Workflow ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

The project workflow should be:
# PM creates a project, sets languages, sets jobs (Project setup).
# PM adds files to the project and prepares them (i.e splitting).
# PM sets how the TMs and glossaries assigned to the document will be use on the tasks as Share TM, Create project TM or to pre-translate.
# PM prepares the team of linguists.
# PM assign a linguist to each file task. Multiple file selection for batch assign is possible.
# When PM sets the project status to ''In progress'' files that has been assigned a TM and a task will be shared to the corresponding linguist.
# Linguist works on the file. When his work is finished, revokes the file. This finishes the share.
# Once the file is revoked, the PM has to manually move it to the next task. This is done automatically if Auto tasking is selected on Project Setup.
# When all tasks are finished project is finished. PM can change the status of the project to ''Completed''.

=== Purchase Order ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

You can define a Purchase Order template with project, document and task information that will be send to the linguists when the file is shared.

A copy of the email send to the linguist is BCC to the project owner.

==== Purchase Order template ====
Go to [[File:User profile.png]] '''''User Profile''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab to see information about your account. On the ''PM'' tab you can edit the default template.

[[File:Po1.PNG]]

On this template you put the information you want to appear on the Purchase Order.

You can use some '''dynamic parameters''' to add project, document and task information. Use this parameters to build the Purchase Order.
Parameters will be substituted by project, document and task corresponding values or a predefined text.

{| class="wikitable"
|+Here is the list which you can also check them using the [[File:Pm info 16.png]] icon.
|-
|{purchase_order_number}
|Include a number for the purchase order.
|-
|{project_name}
|Project name.
|-
|{task_name}
|Task name.
|-
|{document_name}
|Document name.
|-
|{document_download}
|If linguist can download the document the text '(The document cannot be downloaded.)' will be added to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{document_volume}
|Document number of words.
|-
|{job_note}
|Job note
|-
|{job_rate}
|Job rate
|-
|{job_total}
|Job total cost
|-
|{job_deadline}
|Job deadline in the format 29/12/2021 15:00 GMT+02:00 and the remaining time.
|-
|{document_tmglo}
|If there are TMs or glossaries in the share the text 'For the duration of this job # Translation Memories and # Glossaries have been temporarily shared with you.' will be added to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{document_use}
|Add the text 'To work on this document, log into your Wordfast Anywhere account. If you are already logged, refresh the project list by closing all the projects.' to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{my_full_name}
|Full name from 'User profile'.
|-
|{my_professional_info}
|Professional information from 'User profile'.
|}

==== Purchase Order preview ====
On the '''assign job dialog''' you will see a preview of the Purchase Order.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of the dynamic parameters will be updated when changing the selections on the dialog, others might require the job to be saved and others will be updated when the Purchase Order is send.

[[File:Po2.PNG]]

==== Purchase Order batch send ====
You can send the Purchase Orders for all the saved jobs at any moment using the '''Send POs''' button on the ''Project Setup'' dialog

[[File:Warning.png]] Purchase Order will also be send when the file is shared.

= File Operations =
[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a document.

=== Upload ===
To translate your document, you must first upload it to WFA.

[[File:warning.png]] There is a file size limit of 20 Mb.

From the '''Project Content Panel''' there are two ways to add files to a project.

* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the header will add the files to all the languages in the project.
* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the language row. This will add the files only to that language.

[[File:Pmaddfiles.PNG]]

The following window will be displayed:

[[File:Upload_doc.png]]

There are several ways to upload a document
* '''From local file''': Use '''''Browse...''''' to navigate through the directories on your computer and locate the document to be uploaded.
* '''From URL''': This option allows you to upload a file that is located on an Internet server by entering the address (URL) into the field. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Google Drive''': Choose a file from your Google Drive to be uploaded. You'll be asked to allow access rights to WFA before choosing the file. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Dropbox''': Choose a file from your Dropbox to be uploaded. You'll be asked to allow access rights to WFA before choosing the file. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Clipboard''': Paste the text to be uploaded into the text area. A text file will be created with the text.

At the bottom of the window click on '''''View allowed formats''''' to check the allowed formats:

Finally click on:
* '''''Upload''''': to only upload the file, which will be listed on the Document Management.
* '''''Upload and Open''''': to upload and open the document, which will be displayed in the document panel.

[[File:warning.png]] Depending on the size of the file, this may take some time. Please be patient.

Upload can also be done by using drag and drop area.

For some file formats you can configure some filter behaviors when uploading the file on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters|Configure Filters]]''' in ''Pandora's Box #8''. This is important for '''Text based files (xml, xsl)''' where a rules file (.properties) is needed.

=== Open ===
To open a document, first select it from the list of documents. There are 2 options on '''[[{{PAGENAME}}#File Tab|File tab]]''':

* '''''Open''''' button [[File:Translate_File16.png]]: will open a document and show all the segments
* '''''Fuzzy Open''''' button [[File:Translate_File16.png]]: will open a document, but only segments with a score lower than 100.

=== Segmentation ===
In order to be translated with a CAT tool, a document is divided into translation units (TUs), also known as segments. This process is called segmentation. A segment is a text string that ends with a terminator segment, usually the period (.), colon (:), question mark (?), or exclamation mark (!) and also a paragraph or end of cell mark, a page break or a tab.

The advantage of segmentation is that the translation units are presented to you one by one, without any danger of missing one. These segments form the basis for the TUs that are saved in the TM, consisting of the source segment (to translate) and the target segment (translated).

To configure segmentation go to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Segmentation_tab| Segmentation tab]]''' on the WFA settings.

=== Review ===
Once translated, the text should be revised. Here are some methods:
* Download the translated document immediately to view it in your favourite word processor.
* Download it in an offline review format. See '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Offline_Review_Tool|Offline Review Tool (OFRT)]]'''.
* Revise it in WFA using '''Trancheck''', '''Spellcheck''' and '''Preview''' tools. See below.
* If you are using the Classic mode for the document Layout (See the '''''Doc Layout''''' button [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] on '''''View''''' tab) , you can toggle the display between the bilingual document, the original document and the translated document, use the shortcut '''Ctrl+,''' (Ctrl+comma). A different display mode is presented with each iteration. To confirm what you see in front of you, check the indicator on the status bar: bilingual document (Bilingual), original document (Source) or translated document (Target). You can also click on the indicator to change it. Please note this action does not alter the document in any way. It only changes the way that it is displayed in a way that is more convenient for the task you are currently engaged in.

==== Transcheck ====
Click on the '''''Transchek''''' button [[File:Transcheck16.png]] of the '''''Review''''' tab. Transcheck provides the means to check translated content for missing tags, empty targets, numbers, untranslated segments, and terminology.

[[File:Transcheck.png]]

Click on the '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#QA_tab|Set the criteria]]''' link to go to the '''Setup''' and configure them.

Click on the '''''Check''''' button to get the result.

Click on the '''''Move next''''' button to move in the document panel to the first segment in the result list. Click again to move to next segment and so on.

==== Spellcheck ====

Click on the '''''Spellcheck'''' button [[File:Spellcheck16.png]] of the '''''View''''' tab and choose again '''Spellcheck''' in the list of choice. Spellcheck is a good practice to ensure high quality as it flags words in a document that may not be spelled correctly. The Spellcheck is done immediately then you'll get the following report with the results.

[[File:Spellcheck.png]]

Click on the '''''Move''''' button to move in the document panel to the first segment in the result list. Click again to move to next segment and so on.

==== Preview ====
Click on the '''''Preview''''' butonn [[File:Preview16.png]] of the '''''View''''' tab . It can be done at any stage of completion to get a PDF file displayed in a pop-up window with the translated document.

[[File:Preview_1.png]]
[[File:Preview_2.png]]

=== Download ===

[[File:Warning.png]] For '''download issues''', please check this [https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_fix_a_document_when_download_failed.3F link]

When the translation is finally complete, you must download the final document in order to be able to deliver it. To do this, click on [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab. A dialog with all the download options will be shown.

[[File:Donwload_all.jpg]]

Here is a short description of each option:

* '''Translated document/s''': Click to download the translated file. It will be the translated version of the source document in the same file type.

* '''Bilingual''': Click to download the TXLF (or TXML) file from the document. [[File:Warning.png]] '''''The download bilingual file will be of the type used when the file was uploaded.''''' For example if the file was uploaded using TXML, the bilingual download will be TXML. A file cannot be uploaded using one type (TXML) and download the bilingual file of the other type (TXLF). The workaround is to change the type and upload the file again. [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters More information]

* '''Offline review export''': Click to download an Offline Review file (.doc).

* '''Bilingual DOC without formatting''': Click to download bilingual for MS Word without placeholders (*.doc).

* '''Unformatted text''': Click to download unformatted Text (*.txt).

* '''Notes report''': Click to download a report with the document notes.

* '''TM from document/s''': Click to download a TM with document's content (.txml).

* '''Backup workspace''': Click to download a backup of current document + TM + glossary.

* '''Package''': Click to download a WFP package file (.glp) containing documents, memories, glossaries....etc. More information [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Package here]

* '''Filtered bilingual''': Open an advanced filtering dialog to choose segments to be downloaded.

Clicking '''OK''' will take the next dialog.

You may receive this message if you have not yet fully translated the document:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

This is purely an advisory message, warning you if you have forgotten to translate a segment or if there are provisional segments or notes. However it is quite possible that this is your intention: sometimes there are segments that should not be translated.

You can find out at any time if you have completed the translation, or how many segments remain to be translated, by using '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''

If your file is fully translated or you clicked '''OK''' on this warning dialog, a dialog where you can choose the way to download the file will open.

This can have different extra options depending the type of download you have chosen on the first dialog.

[[File:DownloadOptions2.png]]

For downloading the translated file, you have the option to add a second document in PDF format to the downloading of the document in its original format. To add the PDF-formatted document, tick the Add PDF file box. This may take some time, so please wait.

[[File:DownloadOptions2a.png]]

For downloading the TXML file, you have the options to copy the source content in case target segment is empty and not use language variants.

You can cancel the download by clicking Cancel or continue by clicking OK.
You can verify that this operation is taking place: a series of small blue rectangles will display the progress in the status bar.

There are some cases when you will get a compressed ZIP file instead of the original format. Check [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#Why_do_I_get_a_zip_file_when_downloading.3F here] the reasons.

If you have requested the PDF file, both files – the original and the PDF – will be downloaded together and compressed together in ZIP format (*. zip).

There are several ways to download a file:

* '''Download file''': After you click on the OK button, Wordfast Anywhere prepares the data transfer and then sends it to your browser. The browser will then inform you that it has received the data according to its specific mode of operation. In some cases, a dialog box will pop up allowing you specify where to save the file; however, this depends on the particular browser you use. If nothing happens, check your browser’s downloads settings and / or repeat the process.
* '''Send file to email''': Send the downloaded file by email.
* '''Create file URL''': Create a url to the downloaded file. To get the file copy-paste the url in your browser to start the download. The file will be available at that location for 3 days.
* '''Google Drive''': Send the downloaded file to your Google Drive account.
* '''Dropbox''': Send the downloaded file to your Dropbox account.

[[File:Warning.png]] For '''download issues''', please check this [https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_fix_a_document_when_download_failed.3F link]

=== Delete ===
[[File:Warning.png]] Remember this can '''NOT''' be undone, so it is recommended to download the file first.

To remove a file, first use the checkbox to select it and then use the [[File:Remove16.png]] icon on the language row.

[[File:Pmdeletefile.PNG]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Associated shares will be revoked.

Several files can be selected to be removed at the same time.

[[File:notice.png]] In case you accidentally delete a file, you can recover it by uploading again and using the same TM to pre-translate it.

=== Package ===
Project files (*.glp) are managed with the [[File:Pm import project 16.png]] '''Import''' and [[File:Pm export project 16.png]] '''Export''' buttons in the Project menu.

[[File:Warning.png]] The project file (*.glp) is limited to one source language while a Wordfast Anywhere project can have many, in consequence, package export is done by source language.

[[File:Warning.png]]There is an issue importing packages coming from PD. If you cannot import the .glp file, please ask to receive the bilingual files (txml/txlf) and the url for the TM/glossary.

==== Upload ====

Upload must be done using '''''Project''''' menu => '''''Import''''' [[File:Pm import project 16.png]] button.

Once you have selected you local file, click '''Upload'''. A new dialog with the package information and upload options will be shown.

[[File:UploadPkg.JPG]]

* '''Package Information''' section shows package name, who and when created the package and which language pairs contain.
* '''Package content''' section shows the bilingual files on the package. The files with the check box marked will be uploaded. '''On the right''' there are two drop-down lists to add a TM and glossary to the file which can came from the package if WFA can handle them or from your list on WFA (Information about them can be found on the Resources section).
* '''Resources''' section shows a list of TMs and glossaries and source files.

Finally there are two options for the upload.
* '''Create new folder''': by default files will be added to the root folder, you can use this option to upload the package files in a new folder.
* If the package contains source files a drop-down list will be shown to choose between '''Export back later''' to upload just the bilingual files and '''Generate final files on WFA''' to upload source files and merge them with the corresponding bilingual file in the package.

Once the package has been successfully uploaded, an HTML report is created.

[[File:Warning.png]] A new project is created with the content of the package.

==== Download ====

[[File:Warning.png]] The project file (*.glp) is limited to one source language while a Wordfast Anywhere project can have many, in consequence, package export is done by source language.

Download must be done using '''''Project''''' menu => '''''Export''''' [[File:Pm export project 16.png]] button.

[[File:DownloadPkg.JPG]]

* '''Package Information''': Here you can choose to download an existing package or create a new one, source and target languages. Multiple target language can be chosen if the package had them when it was uploaded.
* '''Package content''': After clicking '''Find Files''' a list of available files, TMs and glossaries is shown. The files with the check box marked will be downloaded.

Finally you can chose to '''Add Source files''' to the package.

= TM & Glossary Management =
== TM & Glossary Basics ==

Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''Setup TM&Glo''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' menu.

[[File:TmgloDialog.png]]

===Translation Memory ===
==== Creating a translation memory ====
There are several ways to create or add a TM:
* Create an empty standard WFA TM
* Upload an existing TM like from Wordast Classic or Pro
* Link to a remote TM hosted on a private Wordfast server
* Link to a Very Large TM hosted on a public Wordfast server

To create an empty TM, click on the '''''Create''''' button of the TM buttons area.

[[File:CreateTm.png]]

Choose source and target language codes. It is recommended that you have only one TM for each language pair. This way, you will benefit from everything you have already translated in each pair. However, there may be reasons for you to maintain different TMs in the same language pair. In this case, enter an ID using up to 10 characters in the Assigned Name field.
 Then click on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''Create TM''''' dialog box. Your TM has now been created and is selected in the list of TMs.

To Upload an existing TM, click on the '''''upload'''' button.

[[File:CreateTm_3.png]]

If you already have a TM that you use with Wordfast Classic or Pro, you can upload it to WFA. The codes for source and target languages are written in the header of the TM file. If you already have a TM in the same pair, make sure that you enter an identifier of up to 10 characters in the Assigned Name field.
 This procedure is exactly the same if you have a TM from another CAT tool. However, check first that this TM has been exported in the '''TMX''' format, the standard file format with extension '''.tmx''' supported by all major CAT tool developers.
 Click on the '''''Upload''''' button of the '''''Upload''''' dialog box, you will be prompted to browse a local file on your PC.

If the TM is in Excel format, before uploading it you need to save it as ''Unicode Text''.

[[File:warning.png]] Depending on its size, uploading a TM may take some time. In this case, it can be run in the background, allowing you to perform other tasks while you are waiting.

To add a remote TM or VLTM, click on the '''''add''''' button.

[[File:AddTm_1.png]]

Select the type TM in the list box.

[[File:AddTm_2.png]]

For adding a remote TM, copy paste the given URL in the URL field and the workgroup ID, if any, in the workgroup ID field.
 If you have already a remote TM with the same languages, you will need to enter a symbolic name.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test the remote TM. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:AddTm_3.png]]

WFA has access to the public TM server, which consists of segments offered by the community of translators and is available to all under the name VLTM (Very Large Translation Memory). The TM is unrestricted, free of charge and anonymous.
 For a VLTM, you need to enter source and target language codes.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test if the VLTM is available for your languages. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

==== Update an existing TM by appending from a local TM ====
You can update one of your existing TM by appending TUs from a local TM by clicking on the '''''merge''''' button.

[[File:MergeTm.png]]

 The process is slightly the same than uploading a TM but you should first select the existing TM in the list. The memory to import will already have predefined source and target languages codes in the header of the TM. There may therefore be a conflict of languages between it and the existing memory. If the languages are different, the merge operation will be rejected.
 You also have the choice, in case there are identical source segments, to add always the TM segments, or to not add duplicated segments from the TM. Select '''Add always''' or '''Do not add duplicate''' in the list box.
 By default, the merge process will not take language variants into account. If you want to make sure exactly the same variants are merged, tick the '''append TUs having the same variant''' option.
 Finally click on the '''''Merge''''' button of the '''''Append TUs''''' dialog box

==== Selecting an existing TM for translating a document ====
Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''TMs and Glossaries''' button on '''File''' menu to open the dialog and select an existing TM.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Caution''': If your TM is selected in the TM list, it does not mean selected for translating a document.
To select a TM for translation, you have to tick it in the '''active''' column and click on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' dialog box.
In this example above, 2 EN>FR TMs and 2 EN>FR glossaries are set active for translation.

[[File:notice.png]] A document can have as active '''several read-only''' TMs, but '''only one writeable'''. You might need to uncheck the active checkbox from the current writeable TM in order to set a new one.

=== Glossary ===
The use of incorrect terminology can ruin an otherwise good translation. Many clients have a well-defined terminology (the jargon of the trade), compiled in the form of a glossary. By supplying this glossary to their translators, clients can impose a particular terminology. In adopting this approach, very common in technical translation, the end result should harmoniously fuse the linguistic competence of the translator with the terminological requirements of the client.

Sometimes the client will ask the translator to provide a glossary of terms arising from research undertaken during the translation. In this case, the translator must create a glossary and add specific terminology to it. This glossary building can either be done prior to translation (in an initial terminology research phase), or during the translation itself.

In many cases, however, the client provides a bilingual glossary, which has already been created during the course of previous translations. It is then up to the translator to comply strictly with it and, where appropriate, to add his or her own contributions.

When the translation work is of a more general nature (and especially if a translator is still in the process of acquiring the general vocabulary of a source language), WFA’s glossary function can also be used to itemise terminology that is encountered during the course of the translation process.

Wordfast Anywhere is designed to assist the translator in all the cases mentioned above through the implementation of its glossary function. This glossary consists of a simple tab-delimited text document, which – like the TM – can be uploaded to and downloaded from WFA, shared with other CAT programs, etc. as required.

==== Creating a glossary ====
Like TM there are several ways to create or add a glossary:
* Create an empty standard WFA glossary
* Upload an existing glossary
* Link to remote glossaries
* Link to Tilde Terminology services
* Link to a IATE glossary

To create an empty glossary, click on the '''''Create''''' button of the glossary buttons area and follow the same TM pattern.

To Upload an existing glossary, click on the '''''upload''''' button of the glossary buttons area and follow the same TM pattern.
 Allowed file types are simple tabulated text file (*.txt) (source + tab + target), Wordfast glossary text file (*.txt), Excel file (*.xls, *.xlsx) and TBX file (*.tbx).
 Excel files must be simple:
* 1st Column: Source (compulsory)
* 2nd Column: Target (compulsory)
* 3rd Column: Comment (optional)
* 4th Column: F1 (optional)
* 5th Column: F2 (optional)
* 6th Column: F3 (optional)

 Unlike with a TM, WFA cannot derive the source and target language information from the header of the glossary file; therefore this must be specified here.
 Once the glossary has been uploaded, you will receive a report summarising the operation:
 You will see how many terms have been submitted for upload, how many were rejected as invalid or duplicates well as the total number of terms added.

To add a remote glossary or Tilde Terminology services, click on the '''''add''''' button.

[[File:AddGlossary_1.png]]

Select the type in th elist box.

[[File:AddGlossary_2.png]]

For adding a remote glossary, copy paste the given URL in the URL field.
 If you have already a remote glossary with the same languages, you will need to enter a symbolic name.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test the remote glossary. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:AddGlossary_3.png]]

For setting Tilde Terminology services, you need to select source and target languages and a domain.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test if you have collections. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:addIATE.png]]

To set an IATE glossary, just select the source and target languages. Only languages from the European community are supported.
Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button and if the glossary exists, click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:addIATE2.png]]

By default not all IATE terminology is showed, but you can enable it by checking '''''Show all common terminology'''''.

==== Appending(Update) terms on an existing glossary in Wordfast Anywhere from a local glossary ====
You can upload and append(update)one of your existing glossaries with terms from a local glossary by clicking on the '''''merge''''' button.

[[File:MergeGlo.png]]

 The process is slightly the same than uploading but you should first select the existing glossary in the list.
 You have the choice, in case there are identical entries (source and target), to add always or to not add duplicated. Select '''Add always''' or '''Do not add duplicate''' in the list box.
 Finally click on the '''''Merge''''' button.

==== Selecting one or more glossaries for translation ====
Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''TMs and Glossaries''' button on '''File''' menu to open the dialog and select an existing TM.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Caution''': If your glossary is selected in the glossary list, it does not mean selected for translation.
To select a glossary for translation, you have to tick it in the '''active''' column and click after on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' dialog box.

[[File:notice.png]] A document can have as active '''several read-only''' glossaries, but '''only one writeable'''. You might need to uncheck the active checkbox from the current writeable glossary in order to set a new one.

==== Using a glossary ====

[[File:Use glossary.png]]

* Whenever WFA recognises a term from the glossary in the source segment it highlights it against a blue background

* The terms highlighted in blue are considered as placeables. They can thus be manipulated with the [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] and [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] icons or the Ctrl+Alt+Right and Ctrl+Alt+Left shortcuts and by clicking on them with the mouse or by typing their initial letter + Tab. The difference is that, when you use the [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]] icon or the Ctrl+Alt+Down shortcut, it is the corresponding translation that is copied to the target segment. The most easy way to copy a target is probably to use the Auto-suggest feature, enabled by default. Target terms are proposed by typing the first letter of the target term of the 3 first letters of the source term. [[File:Auto-suggest target term.png]] [[File:Auto-suggest target term 2.png]].

* You can see in advance what the translation of the highlighted items is by activating the glossary panel (keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+H or by selecting it from the '''''View''''' tab => '''''Show/Hide Glossary''''' [[File:panelGlo.png]] button )

* If you want to know more about a term, i.e. the information that you or someone else has entered in the comment or F1, F2 and F3 fields, place your mouse over the source term and this information will be displayed. See above the bubble of the last term on the glossary panel (translation).

==== Adding terms to the glossary ====

[[File:Add_term.png]]

It is quite likely that you will want to incorporate terms you come across in the source text into the glossary together with their translations that arise as part of your research process. This way, your linguist’s memory will be reinforced and you are less likely to have to research the same word or phrase again in the future. WFA allows you to do this dynamically, at any time and without exiting your translation process.

First, select the term in the source text. If it consists of one word, you can simply click on it or use the Tab key to move forwards (or Shift+Tab to move backwards) through the text until you reach its position.

The word you have selected will be highlighted against a red border.

Then click on the target term in the target segment.

The selected target term will have a blue background.

[[File:Select terms.png]]

Next, invoke the Glossary Dialog Box by typing Ctrl+Alt+T, or clicking the '''''Add Term''''' [[File:TermEdit.png]] button.

If a single word, the terms you highlighted in the source and target segments should automatically appear in the Source and Target fields.
If the terms consists of more than one word, it may be necessary to paste the text into the fields from your computer’s clipboard or type the information manually.

You can also add a comment – something that may prove useful in the future, e.g. if you want to remember the situation in which this translation was used. The F1, F2 and F3 fields may be used to store word role, context, grammatical form or any other relevant text-based information.

Then click Save to confirm.

==== Fuzzy terminology recognition ====
Each time you open a segment, Wordfast Anywhere checks for the presence in the glossary of all words and terms contained in the source segment. This operation is called terminology recognition. The recognised terms are highlighted in blue in the source segment, as discussed above.

In establishing a correspondence between the terms of the source segment and the terms found in the glossary, WFA will both recognise an exact match and attempt to recognise fuzzy matches.

WFA employs a stemming algorithm for some languages (e.g. German) in order to recognise different forms of the same word that may correspond to those listed in the glossary.

For example, WFA can recognised the infinitive verb ‘besuchen’ as being related to the adjective (or past participle) ‘besucht’ due to the fact that the two words share a common stem.

Fuzzy matching can also be established by using an asterisk in combination with the term. This method overrides the stemming algorithm, allowing you to find all terms that begin with, end with or contain a particular text string.

=== Concordance search ===
Segments stored in the TM are retrieved only if they have a minimum level of correspondence with the source segment (by default 75%). However, even if the level of correspondence is not sufficient to produce a fuzzy match, the TM may still contain terms that you have previously translated and wish to use in your current translation. To search in the memory you have two options:

1) Click on the '''''Concordance''''' button [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]] or use the '''Ctrl+Alt+C''' shortcut. The following window appears:

[[File:concordance.png]]

Enter the word or text string you want to research in the Search field. WFA will search for all words that are the same or begin with the same sequence of letters as the string entered.

You can also select the word or text string with the mouse and then click on the '''''Concordance''''' button [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]] or '''Ctrl+Alt+C''' shortcut. The result will be displayed immediately.

You can edit or delete a term in the concordance search window by clicking on the edit or delete links.

You can add to your search possibilities by choosing the Advanced option:
* Two words or text strings (search terms) separated by a space: one or the other must exist in the TU
* Two terms separated by the + sign: both terms must exist
* A term ending with an asterisk: a search is performed for all text strings containing the search term.

When you use this option, a help line is displayed to remind you how this command works.

=== Searching in a glossary===
You can also search in the glossary. To do this, click the '''''Glossary Search''''' button [[File:GlossarySearch.png]] or use the '''Ctrl+Alt+G''' shortcut:

[[File: Glossary search.png]]

Type the source language word you wish to search for in the Search field and click OK. The list of glossary entries that contain the search term will be displayed.
You can edit or delete a term in the glossary search window by clicking on the edit or delete icons.

By employing an asterisk in the search term, you can expand your search to find all glossary entries that include the text string that the search term is made up of.

== TM & Glossary Advanced features ==

=== TM operations ===
==== View/Edit a TM ====
Select the TM in the list then click on the '''''Edit''''' button.

[[File:ViewEditTm.png]]

The dialog box displays the TM information. Depending on the TM type, you can edit some properties.
* Standard WFA TM : you have the possibility to define attributes of your TM, which will allow you to subsequently identify its segments. Click on the '''Attributes''' tab.
[[File:EditTmAttributes.png]]

There are five attributes in a Wordfast TM: the first is fixed and immutable, consisting of the name of the user. The other four can be defined by each user at will, but it is recommended to use attribute 1 to describe the subject of the text to be translated and attribute 2 for the client, to maintain compatibility with Wordfast Classic and Wordfast Pro users. Attributes consist of codes, usually 3 letters, followed by a brief description. In the fields referred to as TM attribute 1 to 4, enter the name of the attribute (subject, client, etc.). In the field on their right, select one of the attributes that appear on the drop-down list or, if necessary, click '''add''' to add an attribute, '''upd''' to update it or '''del''' to delete it. Whatever option is chosen, a dialog will appear asking for the code of the attribute (ID) and a brief description (Name, ignored for the Del option).
[[file:EditTmAttributes_add.png]] [[file:EditTmAttributes_update.png]] [[file:EditTmAttributes_delete.png]]

Dynamic codes : Predefined attributes can be added by entering a code between accolades as explain in the help.
[[File:EditTmAttributes_help.png]]

* Remote private Wordfast server

[[File:EditRemoteTm.png]] You can edit the workgroup ID and/or the symbolic name.

==== Download a TM ====
This is available only for standard WFA TM.

[[File:DownloadTm.png]]

From the Downloaded file format drop-down list you can select either the Wordfast TM TXT format, the Standard TMX format, the MS Excel XLS format or the Bilingual document TXLF format.
 Click on the '''Download''' button.

===== Filters when downloading a TM =====
Select ''"Filtering (advanced options)"'' on the second drop-down list and click on the '''Download''' button.

[[File:Tm_download2.JPG]]

This will analyse the TM and let you apply some filters to select what you want to download from the TM.

[[File:Tm_download_filter.JPG]]

[[File:Tm_download_filter2.JPG]]

Once filters are selected click on the '''Download''' button to finish the download.

==== Removing a TM ====
After clicking on the top '''Remove''' button on the TM side, this red warning is displayed to confirm the deletion.
 For TMs that are not Wordfast Anywhere standard TMs only the link to the external TM is cut.

[[File:DeleteTm.png]]

==== Quick TM Share ====
By clicking on the small '''share''' button on top of the TM side, you can share quickly a TM to somebody else having an account in Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:CreateTMShare.png]]

Click on the '''''Add guest''''' button and enter his email address (which should be his account login), then click '''Add'''.

[[File:CreateTMShare2.png]]

You can change the privilege of your guest on your TM. Finally to save the share, click on the '''''Save''''' button.

==== TMs Tools ====
===== Reversing a TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmReverse.png]]

Select a TM to reverse and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a TM already exists with the same name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Assembling several TMs in one TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmAssembled.png]]

Select one or more TMs to assemble in one TM and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a TM already exists with the same name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 if '''keep old assigned name''' is unchecked this information will be lost.
 if '''keep variants''' is checked, the TU will not be changed, otherwise, it take the given language pair.
 if '''keep user ID''' is checked, the TU will not be changed, otherwise, it will take your user ID.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Edit a TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmEdit.png]]

Select a TM to edit and click on the '''Run''' button.
 The TM will be opened as a temporary associated document in the document panel.

[[File:ToolsTmEdit1.png]]

Here you can for example update target segments, edit source segments and delete TU. Those changes will be stored straight on your TM.
 Bear in mind that this is a TM although it looks like a document.

After the TM edition, the temporary document must be deleted because it is a static copy of the TM.
 The tool can only edit and delete existing TUs and the TM size is limited to 100000 TUs.

=== Glossary operations ===
==== View/Edit a glossary ====
Select the glossary in the list then click on the '''''View/Edit''''' button.

[[File:ViewEditGlo.png]]

The dialog box displays the glossary information. Depending on the glossary type, you can edit some properties.

[[File:EditRemoteGlo.png]]

[[File:EditTildeGlo.png]]

==== Download a glossary ====
This is available only for standard WFA glossary.

[[File:DownloadGlo.png]]

Click on the '''Download''' button.

==== Removing a glossary ====
After clicking on the top '''Remove''' button on the glossary side, this red warning is displayed to confirm the deletion.
 For glossaries that are not standard only the link to the external glossary is cut.

[[File:DeleteGlo.png]]

==== Quick Glossary Share ====
By clicking on the small '''share''' button on top of the glossary side, you can share quickly a glossary to somebody else having an account in Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:CreateGloShare.png]]

Click on the '''''Add guest''''' button and enter his email address (which should be his account login), then click '''Add'''.

[[File:CreateGloShare2.png]]

You can change the privilege of your guest on your glossary. Finally to save the share, click on the '''''Save''''' button.

==== Glossaries tools ====
===== Reversing a glossary=====
[[File:ToolsGloReverse.png]]

Select a glossary to reverse and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a glossary already exists with the reversed glossary name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Assembling several glossaries in one glossary =====
[[File:ToolsGloAssembled.png]]

Select two or more glossaries to assemble and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a glossary already exists with the assembled glossary name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 if '''keep old assigned name''' is unchecked this information will be lost.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

=== TMs and glossaries shares ===

You can allow other users to share your TM as well as your glossary and you can see the TMs and the glossaries shared to you by others.
To manage all kind of share, click on the bottom '''''Share''''' button of the TMs and glossaries dialog. At that time you will receive the following:

[[File:Tmglo_share_1.png]]

* If you have already enabled the sharing of your TMs and your glossaries with other users, they will be displayed in the '''My shares to other users''' table. You can revoke sharing with any of these users. To do this, select the user in question and click '''Revoke'''. To add or update an existing share click on the '''Add''' or '''Edit''' buttons and see the chapter '''Add and edit shares to other users''' below.
* You can visualize all the TMs and glossaries that have been shared to you in the '''My shares from other users''' table. You can end any share by selecting it and clicking on the '''Remove''' button.
* You can also share your TMs and glossaries to applications like Wordfast Classic and Wordfast Pro by generating keys. they are displayed in the '''My shares to applications''' table. See below the chapter '''Sharing to applications'''.

==== Add and edit shares to other users ====

[[File:Tmglo_share_2.png]]

[[File:Tmglo_share_edit.png]]

[[File:Tmglo_share_3.png]]

==== Sharing to applications ====
Wordfast Anywhere will generate up to 5 keys to share one or more TMs and, optionally, glossaries.
The key is needed for the external application to connect to that specific share.

[[File:Tmglo_share_app_1.png]]

If you want to add the TMs and glossaries currently used, click on the '''Add active TMs and glossaries''', otherwise click on the '''Add''' button to choose a TM and the '''Add''' button to choose a glossary.
 Choose the right privilege and the number of keys needed, then click on the the '''Save''' button.
 The keys will be generated and listed in the '''My shares to application''' table. See below.

[[File:Tmglo_share_app_2.png]]

For instance this can be used on Wordfast Pro 3.4.9, where there is a tab for Wordfast Anywhere TM and glossaries.

[[File:Wpftab.png]]

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QVOMOYfR2ws&feature=em-subs_digest this video] about how to do it.

 Although the API key is for a combined TM and glossary, on Wordfast Pro 3.4.9 you need to add it twice: one for TM and one for glossary

[[Wordfast Pro]] users can check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=S7QCHNpRtKo&feature=em-subs_digest this video].

= Translation =
== Preparation of the translation environment ==
Before beginning the translation of a document using a CAT tool, you must first have an active Translation Memory.

'''Note''': an initial TM was automatically set up when you created your account.

The TM consists of a database, which will record each source language segment (i.e. sentence, phrase) that you translate, together with the corresponding target language segment. As it grows, this increasingly allows you to obtain translations of phrases made previously that are the same or similar to the one you are currently translating.

For more information check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Translation_Memory|Translation Memory basics]]'''.

== Translating ==
To start the translation, you must first open the initial segment.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:StartNext.png]] '''''Start/Next''''' button or use the ''Alt + Down'' shortcut . When you do this, the document area is transformed: the segment is displayed in light blue block (source), a grey block (target) is placed just below it and the rest of your document is shown on the rest of the page. The cursor is located in the grey block.

Translate the segment in the grey block

[[File:StartTrans.png|1200px]]

After translating this segment, you can continue with your translation. To move to the next segment, click on the [[File:StartNext.png]] '''''Start/Next''''' or use the ''Alt+Down'' shortcut. Remember this shortcut, as you will use it for each segment you translate. You can also move to previous segment by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Previous.png]] '''''Previous''''' or use the ''Alt + Up'' shortcut.

[[File:notice.png]] '''''When translating, the segments are saved automatically in the translation memory and on the database system as soon as you go to the next segment.'''''

Now translate the segment as before.

Now that you get the idea, you can continue to translate. Remember: to move from one segment to the next, use ''Alt+Down''. To return to the previous segment (to correct something that you subsequently realised was mistaken), use ''Alt+Up''.

Following are some '''other considerations''' regarding the translation of segments.

'''Note''': Most browser / OS combinations, including Firefox, Safari and Chrome, have their own spell checker – in some cases it may be necessary for you to activate it. You can also use '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Spellcheck|Spellcheck]]'''

There is color code for the target block:
* Grey is the no match from the TM (score=0)
* Green is the full match from the TM (score=100)
* Yellow is a fuzzy match from the TM (score between 50 to 99)
* Orange is a MT proposition
* Purple is the color when the segment has been modified by the editor

Score information can be found in different places depending on the view.
For '''Classic view''' it can be found on ''<}score{>'' tag between source and target segment.

[[File:ScoreC.png|1200px]]

For '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views''' there is a column for the score.

[[File:ScoreH.png|1200px]]

[[File:ScoreV.png|1200px]]

=== Tags ===

Before translating this new segment, pay attention to the tag <1>, which appears here at the end. WFA is not a word processor and thus does not concern itself with a specific representation of the document's formatting. You'll see no changes in size or typeface, no bold or italic characters. Instead, this information is encoded and represented by what we call "tags", e.g. <1>. By slowly passing your mouse over this tag you will see what it represents. This tag is not to be translated, but it should be placed on the appropriate position in the target segment. If you want to recopy a tag from the source segment please type < to trigger the tags proposal.

[[File:tagProposal.png]]

You can also copy it by using the comands on '''Translation''' tab: [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] '''Next Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Right'') and [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] '''Previous Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Left'') to navigate the source segment to the desired tag. A red frame indicates the selected item. Then position the cursor in the target segment and click on [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]] '''Copy Pl.'''(''Ctrl+Alt+Down'').

Differences on the formatting tags (<1>, <2>) between source and target segment can make the file filter aligner have difficulties to build up the translated document.

Check there is no ''segments with tag difference'' using one of this options:
# Click on [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button on '''File''' tab to get a report. Check if there are any ''segments with tag difference''. Use '''''Show Outline''''' [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button on '''View''' tab to go straight to one segment.
# Click on [[File:FindReplace.png]] '''''Find & Replace''''' button on '''Edit''' tab. Go to ''Miscellaneous'' tab and run a ''Tag difference'' search. Segments with tag differences will be listed.

On the listed segments you must pay attention to:
# There is no target tag missing that exists on source.
# The target tag order is different from source order. For example [<1>text text<2>] on source but [<2>text text<1>] on target.
# The target tag content is not identical with the source tag. You can see the content of the tag when the mouse is over it.

[[File:Warning.png]] We '''do not recommend to use copy/paste or drag and drop''' to copy the tags as it can copy more than the eye can see and be problematic. It is better to use the the auto-suggest feature with tags (whenever you want to add a tag just type < and the list of tags from source will be proposed for selection) or the [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]] '''Copy Placeable''' on '''Translation''' tab.

== Main commands ==

=== Provisional segment ===
You may be unsure whether your translation of a segment is correct. To avoid having to interrupt your translation process, you can mark the segment as provisional.

It will be identified by a yellow square at the beginning of the line for '''Classic view''' or at the end of the row for '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views'''.

To mark a segment as provisional, use the F10 key or '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mark.png]] '''''Provisional'''''.

When you have resolved any doubts, simply return to the marked segment and make your corrections. Use ''Alt+Down'' ( [[File:StartNext.png]] ) or ''Alt-Up'' ( [[File:Previous.png]] ) to validate the segment and erase the yellow square.

=== Auto propagate ===
Use this command to translate a segment and automatically propagate the current segment changes through all the document to other segments having the same source.

Find it in '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Autopropagate.png]] '''''Auto Propagate'''''.

=== Note ===
You can also write a note to be attached to the segment for the duration of the translation (in a similar manner to a Post-ItTM). You can use this to remind yourself of something important about this segment or to pass information on to people who will have access to your translation, such as reviewers.

To write a note, click on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Edit_Note16.png]] '''''Edit Note'''''.

The following text box will be displayed:

[[File:Editnote.png|1200px]]

Write your note in the text box and click Save. You can cancel the operation by clicking Cancel. In the case of an existing note, you can edit and validate it by clicking Save, or delete it by clicking Remove.

A green square will be placed at the beginning of the segment to indicate that a note is attached. By passing the mouse pointer over this square, you will see a rectangle containing the text of the note.

It will be identified by a grey square with an "i" in it at the beginning of the line for '''Classic view''' or at the end of the row for '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views'''.

[[File:Editnote2.png|1200px]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Notes can be downloaded by going to '''''File''''' tab => [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' and choosing the '''''Notes Report'''''

=== Copying the original segment ===
Sometimes a segment contains very little to translate: for example, when it consists almost entirely of proper names or is made up of a website address. In this case, it may be preferable to copy the entire source segment to the target segment and make any adjustments there.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CopySource.png]] '''''Copy Source'''''. or use the shortcut ''Alt-Ins'.

=== Erasing the target segment ===
Sometimes it is necessary to erase what you have just written in the target segment.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Cleanup_Project16.png]] '''''Del Target'''''. or use the shortcut ''Ctrl+Alt+X''.

This button has a toggle behaviour through: Empty target, Remove tags and Restore.

=== Insertion of a special character like the non-breaking space ===
When you write in French, some characters must be accompanied by a non-breaking space: e.g. before the colon, semicolon, exclamation mark, question mark, exclamation mark, before and after quotes, thousands separators, and so on. In WFA, a non-breaking space is represented by the symbol < >.

However, such spaces cannot be automatically handled in an Internet browser as they are when using a text editor such as Word. Therefore it will be necessary to add them manually. By default, a non-breaking space is inserted at the cursor location by clicking on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Insert_c1.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 1'''''.

Two other special characters can be inserted like the curly quotes. Use '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Insert_c2.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 2''''' and [[File:Insert_c3.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 3'''''.

You can configure these 3 special characters in WFA setup (see '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Pandora.27s_box_tab|Pandora’s box]]''').

=== Expanding a segment ===
As we have seen, WFA considers that the segment is terminated when it encounters a segment termination marker. However, in some cases this segmentation is in error. For example, when WFA’s segmentation engine meets the following sentence:
''On pense aux conseils de Prof. Jacques Lacan:''
it can interpret the segment as ending with ''Prof.'' because a full stop is used as an end of segment marker. In this case we can command WFA to expand the segment, that is to say, to append the subsequent segment to it.

[[File:exspand1.png]]

This is done with the ''Alt+Pg'' dn shortcut or '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Expand_Segment16.png]] '''''Expand'''''.

[[File:exspand2.png]]

It is important to expand segments when the segmentation has not been performed correctly because this will increase the chances of it corresponding with a translation memory segment. For example, the segment ''On pense aux conseils de Prof.'' will have little chance of having a similarity of over 75% with another. By contrast, if the sentence ''On pense aux conseils de Prof. Jacques Lacan:'' is in the TM, when WFA encounters the source sentence ''On pense aux conseils de Professeur Jacques Lacan'', it will offer the existing translation, as it has 90% similarity (it is only the word Professor that is not the same).

A segment cannot be expanded if it is terminated by an end of paragraph or end of cell marker, a page break or a tab.

You should not have to expand all segments containing abbreviations that end with a full stop. A comma-separated, modifiable list of common language-specific abbreviations is included in WFA . This can be accessed and modified via the segmentation tab in the configuration dialog box [case-sensitive, optional letters are enclosed in square brackets].

[[File:Abbrev.png]]

=== Shrinking a segment ===
If, on the other hand, two segments are erroneously displayed together due to an absence of an end of segment marker, you can also shrink the segment with the shortcut ''Alt-Pg'' up or ''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:ShrinkSeg.png]] '''''Shrink'''''.

=== Placeables ===

A placeable is any term or expression contained in the source segment that is defined as such. WFA provides shortcuts for inserting them into the target segment, thus both saving time and reducing the potential for typing errors.

WFA predefines as placeables:
*Numbers
*Tags
*Words beginning with, or otherwise containing, capital (upper case) letters
*Words or phrases appearing in the source text that have matching items stored in the '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Glossary|Glossary]]'''.

We have already seen how to copy tags. Given that a tag is a placeable, the procedure is the same: to copy any placeable, simply select it with the comands on '''Translation''' tab: [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] '''Next Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Right'') and [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] '''Previous Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Left'').

You also have the possibility of clicking on any term in the source text, thus placing it under focus and temporarily transforming it into a placeable. A red frame indicates the item selected.

Next, position the cursor in the target segment at the point where the placeable should be positioned or double-click (click and drag) to select the word (phrase) to be replaced and click on the on [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]] '''Copy Pl.'''(''Ctrl+Alt+Down''). The placeable is copied to the relevant position in the target segment.

In this sentence, the placeable elements, selected by ''Ctrl+Alt+Right'' or [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]], are:

[[File:place1.png]]
(starts with a capital letter)

[[File:place2.png]]
(number)

[[File:place3.png]]
(tag)

And, if necessary, any term may be designated as a placeable simply by clicking on it:

[[File:place4.png]]

As you translate the text, you only want to place those elements that should not be translated:

[[File:place5.png]]

At this point, you want to write ‘Chenjerai.’. However it may be faster and more efficient (as well as reducing the possibility of error) to select the item using ''Ctrl+Alt+Right'' or [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] (or even by simply clicking on it) and place it into the segment target with ''Ctrl+Alt+Down'' or [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]].

[[File:place6.png]]

The following proper noun ‘Hove’ is also a placeable, so you can repeat the procedure. Simply use the '''Tab key''' on your keyboard to advance from one placeable to the next (or '''Shift+Tab''' to move in the opposite direction).

[[File:place7.png]]

You can also use the ''Ctrl+Alt+Up'' shortcut or [[File:Dropdown.png]] '''Toggle Pl.'' on '''Translation''' tab to transform terms in the source segment into placeables.

For even greater efficiency, if you type a letter that begins a word or term in the source segment and then successively press Tab, all words or terms beginning with that letter are successively copied to the target segment. For example, in the above sentence, typing ''l'' followed by '''Tab''' will copy ''lyrique'' to the target. Each time you press the Tab key, the word or term that has been copied to the target segment will be replaced by the next
word or term appearing in the source segment that begins with the same letter, i.e. ''le'', ''laisse'' and so on.

=== Case changer ===
Use this feature to toggle through: lowercase, uppercase and proper name for a word. This feature can be used in one word (by putting the cursor inside the word), or with more than one word (by selecting several words with the mouse or Shift+Left/Right Arrow).
Beware that some times it gets crazy with the first and last word.

Use it bu clicking on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:CaseChanger.png]] '''''Case Changer'''''.

=== Increase target height ===
You can increase the target height by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Increase_target.png]] '''''Target Height'''''.

=== Web Speech Beta ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY available for Chrome. Currently disabled due to browser security.'''

This is a beta implementation that uses Google Web Speech API to insert your dictation into the target segment.

To use it, first open the segment and then click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mic.png]] '''''Web Speech Beta''''' button to start the dictation. The icon will change to indicate recording is on. To stop dictation click again on the button.

You can add a shortcut to this command.

You can jump to the next segment as always and keep on dictating. Or you can stop dictation, jump to the next segment and start dictation again.

A provisional transcription will be shown as an auto-suggest text and the final transcription will be inserted on the target segment. The provisional transcription might not be accurate while final transcription should be quite accurate and may be different from provisional transcription.

Please take into account that this is a beta implementation and that voice transcription is done online so there can be delays when dictating. We encourage you to use it and give us some feedback.

[[File:Warning.png]] It can be that Chrome keeps asking you to allow the use of the microphone every time. You need to check the Chrome settings: "Privacy>Content Settings>Microphone>Manage exceptions". There you should have an exception for https:freetm.com.

If you are connected to the site via HTTS the grant is permanent, if you use HTTP, you are asked each time.

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rR88md-xyik&feature=em-uploademail this video] about how to use this tool.

Check this links for more information:

[https://support.google.com/chrome/answer/3123708?p=settings_manage_exceptions&rd=1 Chrome Exceptions]

[https://support.google.com/chrome/answer/6148059?hl=en Chrome website permissions]

=== Edit Source ===
Using '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:EditSource16.png]] '''''Edit Source''''' will help you to correct the source text in order to have valid TU in memory.

This will not change the source file and obviously will not automatically change the target segment.

=== Ending the translation ===
If for any reason you want to stop translating, you have three choices:
* Close the translation and validate the current segment in the TM ('''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close & Commit''''' or ''Alt+End'')
* Close the translation without validating it ('''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:Close.png]] '''''Close''''' or ''Shift+Alt+End'')
* Clear the content of the target segment, together with any attached note, by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:Close_restore.png]] '''''Close & Delete''''' .

== After Translation ==

When your translation is finished, you use one of our '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Review|Review]]''' tools before '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Download|Download]]''' it.

= Tools =
=== Downloading TXML file ===
You can download your document in TXML format, the standard working file format used by WFA. This permits you, for example, to send the file to a colleague for review using Wordfast Anywhere or Pro. Once reviewed and corrected, you can upload it again.

To download your working file go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual TXML'''''.

[[File:DownloadTypesList.png]]

If your translation is incomplete or contains provisional segments or notes, you will receive this warning:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

At this point you have the choice to accept (OK) or cancel (Cancel) to return to your translation. If you accept, you will need to consider the following dialog:

[[File:DownloadOptions2a.png]]

You can optionally instruct WFA to copy the source segment to the target segment if it is blank (check Copy source to target if target is empty) and/or to ignore language variations, e.g. to not make a distinction between British and American English (check No language variants).

Choose the way to download the file and click '''''OK''''' to donwload the file.

=== Merging TXML files ===
If you already have a file in TXML format you can upload it to your workspace. To do this go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:Mergetms16.png]] '''Merge Txml''' button. At this point you must complete the following dialog box:

[[File:Mergetxml1.PNG]]

By checking Merge an existing document, all documents that exist in your workspace will be listed according to language pair, and you will have to choose which will be merged with the file you intend to upload.

You can also set WFA to update the TM corresponding to the file you upload (check Update or create a TM with a bilingual document). Check Merge an existing TM and choose which TM to update from the list displayed. You will also need to determine whether, in the case of identical source segments, new TUs should be added to existing ones (Keep existing TUs) or whether they should replace them (Overwrite existing TUs). If, on the other hand, you prefer to create a new TM, click on Create a new TM. At this point, you will have the opportunity to give this new TM a name, if you have more than one TM for the same language pair. Then click Upload to upload the file or Close to exit without doing anything.

Note that operations performed on the document are independent from memory-related operations, allowing you to update only the document, or only the memory, or both.
If you have clicked Upload, you will receive the following message:

[[File:Mergetxml2.png]]

Click Browse to navigate through your directories and select your file, then click Submit to perform the upload or Cancel to cancel the operation. After the merge operation has been successfully performed, a report will appear showing how many segments were merged.

[[File:Mergetxml3.png]]

=== Other downloads ===
You can also download the working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments, usable by Wordfast Classic (and Trados Workbench).

[[File:Bilingualwordfastclassic.png]]

This will allow your document to be proofread by a Wordfast Classic user. Caution, this download is only available for files formatted as .doc and .rtf. Unlike the TXML file, this format cannot be imported into WFA.

To download your working file in bilingual MS-Word format, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the '''''Download''''' button and choose '''Bilingual Doc original''' option. This option is only available if your source file is a MS Word file.

[[File:DownloadTypesList.png]]

If your translation is incomplete or contains provisional segments or notes, you will receive this warning:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

At this point you have the choice to accept (OK) or cancel (Cancel) to return to your translation. If you accept, you will need to respond to the following message:

[[File:Bilingualwordfastclassic2.png]]

Following the same steps you can download this other files:

* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments without placeholders Bilingual. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC no placeholders''''' option.
* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments with placeholders Bilingual. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC with placeholders''''' option.
* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments with tag-content as placeholder. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC tag content''''' option.
* Your translated file, in plain text format, without any formatting. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Unformatted Text''''' option.

=== Find & Replace ===
It is often necessary to locate a word or text string in a file that has been translated. For this we use the Doc Find and Replace function. Go to '''''Edit''''' tab and click on the [[File:FindReplace.png]] '''''Find & Replace''''' button.

As with other functions that require the current segment to be closed, you will receive a warning that the current segment will be closed without being saved. If you agree, click OK, otherwise click Cancel to cancel the transaction and save your work.

[[File:Warning.png]] By default search is only done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:SR1.png]]

'''''Find & Replace''''' dialog has 4 tabs performing different actions.

* Use '''Find''' tab to locate a word or text in your document.
* Use '''Find/Replace''' tab to locate and replace a word or text in your document.
* Use '''Go to Segment''' tab to search for single segments (1,5,68,499) or a range of segments (25-66).
* Use '''Miscellaneous''' tab to perform different types of searches such as look for '''provisional''' or '''untranslated''' segments, or segments with '''notes''' or '''tag differences'''.

[[File:Notice.png]] You can use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:Warning.png]] Not all the options are always available.
==== Find ====
Use '''Find''' tab.
Type the word or text you want to find and click '''Find''' button to start a search. When search is done hits are highlighted and the number of hits is shown on the dialog.

[[File:SR6.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] By default search is only done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:SR7.png]]

==== Replace ====
Use '''Find/Replace''' tab. Type the word/text you want to find and the word/text you want it replaced for and click '''Find''' button to start a search. When search is done hits are highlighted and the number of hits is shown on the dialog.

[[File:SR8.png]]

It may happen that '''Replace''', '''Replace/Find''' and '''Replace All''' buttons are not available. This happens because the first search does not move you to the first hit, you have to click again '''Find''' to move to the next hit and then replace buttons will be available. Use them to replace, replace and move to next hit or replace all hits.

Replace can only be done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Go to Segment ====
Use '''Go to Segment''' tab. Use it to find specific segments. This can be an alternative to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''.
You can type single segments separated by commas (1,5,68,499) or a range of segments (25-66).

[[File:SR4.png]]

Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Miscellaneous ====
Use '''Miscellaneous''' tab. This 6 types of search do not require to type a word/text but will help you locate segments with some particularities. This can be an alternative to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''.

[[File:SR5a.png]]

You can search for:

* '''Provisional''' segments.
* '''Untranslated''' segments.
* Segments with '''Tag difference'''.
* Segments with '''Notes'''.
* Segments with '''Double spaces'''.
* Segments with '''Revisions'''.

Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Advanced search options ====

Using the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button you can access some advanced search options:

[[File:SR2.png]]

* Search for '''Whole Word'''.
* Do a '''Case sensitive''' search.
* Search for words that start/end by the characters using * as a joker. For example searching for *able will find: movable, payable, breakable,...etc. And searching for hand* will find: handbag, handmade, handbook,...etc
* Search on Source, Target or both. This can only be used in '''Find''' tab.
* Mark each found target as provisional.
* Create a note for each replaced segment.
* Update the TM for each replaced segment.
* Do a wrap search
* Change search direction: Backward or Forward.

=== Analyze ===
Before providing a translation quotation, you may wish to analyze the source text to determine the extent of the work required. WFA provides an analytical tool for this purpose. To do this, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the '''''Analyze''''' button and choose '''Analyze'''. If your file is big and you do not want to wait, choose '''Analyze in Background'''.

A progress message is displayed on the status bar. Then the analysis results will be displayed:

[[File:Analysis.png]]

According to the number of repetitions (identical segments that appear more than once in the document) or the percentage of segments that correspond either completely (100%) or partially (<100%) to matches in the TM, you will be able to precisely estimate the volume of work actually requiring to be translated. After having examined the analysis report, click Close.

=== Statistics ===
WFA allows you to see what progress you have made with your translation at any time. To do this, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button.

A statistical report on your translation will be displayed:

[[File:Statistics.png]]

You will see the number of source and target segments (with the percentage already translated in brackets); the number of source and current target words; the number of source and target tags and if there is any segmental discrepancy in terms of differences between the number and content of the source and target tags (segments with tag difference); the number of segments not stored in the TM (segments flagged not saved in TM); the number of provisional segments (provisional segments) and notes (segments with notes). The report also displays which segments remain to be translated. After viewing the statistics, click Close.

Another important indicator is always present on the status bar: it tells you on which segment you currently are in relation to the total number of segments in the document. In this example, the document has 149 segments in total and you are currently on the 68:

[[File:Foot1.png]]

=== Alignment ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This tool is not managed by WFA in case there is any problem use the '''Help''' in the tool, the third tab, to report your problem. You can also sent an email to '''converterhelp@wordfast.com'''

When you begin to translate with a CAT tool you may not be able to derive the maximum benefit from it if you do not yet have a translation memory. Or, a client may have source and target documents from a previous translation but cannot supply you with a TM. In this case, you can quickly derive a TM by performing an "alignment" on the documents you have already translated prior to using WFA for your translation work by using the alignment tool.

To do this, go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab and click on the [[File:WF Update16.png]] '''''AutoAligner''''' button.

A new page will open, displaying the following dialog:

[[File:Align.png]]

Follow the instructions to upload the files and align them to get the TM from the alignment.

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HVXTQ5Wb_Eg&feature=em-uploademail this video] about how to use this tool.

You can then upload this TM to be used in WFA.

[[File:Warning.png]] This tool is not managed by WFA in case there is any problem use the '''Help''' in the tool, the third tab, to report your problem. You can also sent an email to '''converterhelp@wordfast.com'''

=== Preview ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Preview|Preview]]'''

=== Transcheck ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Transcheck|Transcheck]]'''

=== Spellcheck ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Spellcheck|Spellcheck]]'''

=== Pretranslation ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.

Go to [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]] '''''Pre-translation''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to open the dialog:

[[File:Pretrans1.png]]

Configure how you want the pre-translation to run:
* Activate '''Fuzzy matches'''
* Set what to do when there is no match from the TM. For setting a MT check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Machine_translation|this]]'''
* Leverage segment scores. Make sure the owner of the document (translation agency or company) has agreed to leverage empty segments.

If your file is big and has many segments run pre-translation in background by clicking on '''Pre Translate in background''' so you can keep working in other things. Otherwise use '''Pre-translate''' button run pre-translation.
Ad the end of the process you'll get a report with the result.

[[File:Pretrans2.png]]

=== Offline Review Tool ===
Use Offline review tool to review a file outside Wordfast Anywhere using a bilingual file and then update the changes.

To get the bilingual file go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Offline review DOC'''''.

[[File:Ofrt11a.png]]

This will download a bilingual file like this.

[[File:ofrt2.png]]

[[File:Notice.png]] Read the disclaimer on the download window and the instructions at the top of the file.

[[File:Warning.png]] Remember to add the tags on the target column as you would do on any translation. '''''Missing tags''''' can cause problems when merging back the file into WFA.

After editing '''only''' the target segments an saving the file you can import it to be merged with the file in Wordfast Anywhere. To do this go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:mergetms16_menu.png]] '''''Merge Offline Review''''' button.

[[File:ofrt3.png]]

A report will be shown with the result of the merge.

[[File:ofrt4.png]]

=== Extract Frequents ===
Use [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]] '''''Extract Frequents''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to create anew file that will contain only the repeated segments of the document.

A first report is created showing the percentage of segments that have an occurrence greater than 2.

[[File:ExtractFrequents1.png]]

Set the '''minumum occurrence''' that you want to extract and click on '''Extract and Open''' to create a new file with the occurrence segments.

=== Go to WFP4 ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.
You can open your document in '''Wordfast Pro 4 Online''' by using [[File:About wordfast16.png]] '''''WFP4''''' button on '''''File''''' tab.

WFP4o will use several settings on WFA along with the TMs and glossaries, so all settings must be done on inside WFA before. Also bear in mind to save your work on WFP4o before switching back to WFA.

[[File:Wf4disclaimer.png]]

Read carefully the disclaimer dialog before clikcing in '''Continue to WFP4o'''.

=== File information ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.

Go to [[File:Modify Project16.png]] '''''File Info''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to open the dialog with information about the file:

[[File:Fileinfo.png]]

=== Split file ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''''This option is only available when the document is closed.'''''

You can split a file in 4 parts by using [[File:Split.png]] '''''Split''''' button on '''''File''''' tab.

[[File:Split1.png]]

For each part a txml file will be created with the corresponding part of the file. The name of the txml files will contain information about which part is. For instance '''_[1of2]''' means the file was splitted into 2 parts and that this file correspond to the first part.

By default files are splited in equally parts, but you can change this and set the boundaries that better suit you.

[[File:Split3.png]]

'''Downloading one of the splited parts will download a TXML file''', but you can choose to download also the entire file in the original format.

[[File:Split2.png]]

Use
[[File:Join.png]] '''''Join''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to put the parts together again. [[File:Warning.png]] '''''This option is only available when the document is closed.'''''

=== Share file ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''This option is only available when the document is closed and is selected from the list.'''

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Share is only possible between Wordfast Anywhere users.'''

You can share your document with '''several Wordfast Anywhere users'''. To do so go to [[File:Share.png]] '''''Share''''' on '''''File''''' tab.

[[File:Share3.png]]

Additional files can be added using '''''Add''''' button on the Document section of the dialogue. If the file belong to a package, all package documents will be added otherwise it will be all documents with the same source and target languages.

To start sharing click on '''''Add''''' button after the Document section to add a new guest. Repeat it to ad more guest users.

[[File:Share_addGuest2.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Guest email must be a valid Wordfast Anywhere account.'''

For each guest two properties can be chosen:
* '''''Share as read-only'''''. This means guest will only access the document in a read-only mode, but no edition will be allowed.
* '''''Keep online (not downloadable)'''''. This means guest will access the file but would not be allowed to download it.

Additionally, you can share a TM and/or glossary with the file.

To do it, use the buttons on the '''''Translation Memories''''' and '''''Glossaries''''' tabs
* '''''Linked to document''''' will add the corresponding TM/glossary associated to the document.
* '''''Add''''' will let you choose which TM/glossary with the same language pair you want to share
* '''''Remove''''' will revoke the share on the selected TM/glossary from the list.

Once guests are added, they are presented on a list on the main dialogue. Any guest will be allowed edit rights unless '''''Share as read-only''''' is check. Owner will always have edit rights.

[[File:Share_mainList2.png]]

Repeat this process to add more guests.

You can use '''''Duplicate''''' button to add a new guest with the same settings than a existing one. Use '''''Revoke''''' button to finish a share with a guest

Check '''''History''''' on the document to force the use of revisions in the document.

As owner and several guests can have edit rights '''a reservation system is used to ensure only one user can edit a segment at a time'''. When a user opens the document the free segments loaded in Document Panel will automatically reserved for him adding a green share icon at the end of the segment. Segments reserved by other users are shown with the same share icon but in red color.
'''The reservation of segments will end when the user closes the document'''.

[[File:Share_reserved.png]]

When a user opens a shared document that is being used by an other user a pop-up message is show to warn about that.

[[File:Share_message.png]]

Also a notification is send to the other working users that a new user has opened the document.

[[File:Share_notification.png]]

Jumping to the next block will release the previous segments and will reserve the new segments being loaded.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''There is no live update of the segments reserved by other users. Which means segments need to be refreshed manually on Document Panel by loading them again, for instance by jumping to a different block and back.'''

To help to know when a user closes the document and releases his segments, a notification is send to the other working users.

[[File:Share_notificationEnd.png]]

'''''To finish a share''''' with a guest owner users need to use '''''Revoke''''', and to remove all the shares use '''''Revoke all'''''. This is a button on the Share dialog ([[File:Share.png]] '''''Share''''' on '''''File''''' tab).

Guest users will not see the share dialogue. They should use [[File:Revoke.png]] '''''Revoke''''' on '''''File''''' tab to finish the share.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Remember Share/Revoke are only available when the document is closed.'''

=== Offline Mode ===
On those situations when there is an internet connection cut or when WFA server is unavailable, WFA will turn on '''Offline Mode'''.

'''Offline Mode''' lets you work offline. It allows you to translate the segments that are currently loaded on the ''Document Panel''.

The translated segments are stored locally and automatically committed to WFA server as soon as the connection is recovered.

If the TM you are using is writeable, TUs will be automatically updated from the document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Be aware that there will be some messages telling you about going in/out of Offline Mode and segments being saved. Some features will not be available during Offline Mode.

[[File:Warning.png]] This feature has nothing to do with Offline Review Tool (OFRT). For information about OFRT, check the index at the top of this Manual.

[[File:Warning.png]] We recommend not to close the browser till synchronization back is done.

= WFA Configuration =
== Features and Shortcuts ==

{|class="wikitable"
|'''Menu tab'''
|'''Feature'''
|'''Shortcut'''
|'''Icon'''
|'''Information'''
|-
|Translation
|Start translation / Next segment
|Alt+Down
|[[File:StartNext.png]]
|Starts a translation session by opening the currently selected segment / Commits the current segment to TM and opens the next segment.
|-
|Translation
|Previous segment
|Alt+Up
|[[File:Previous.png]]
|Commits the current segment to TM and opens the previous segment.
|-
|Translation
|Close & Commit
|Alt+End
|[[File:CloseSave.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment and committing it to the TM.
|-
|Translation
|Close
|Shift+Alt+End
|[[File:Close.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment without committing it to the TM.
|-
|Translation
|Close & Delete
|Alt+Delete
|[[File:Close restore.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment and deleting the target with any note. Do not commit to TM.
|-
|Translation
|Provisional segment
|F10
|[[File:Mark.png]]
|Marks a segment as provisional with a yellow Post-It.
|-
|Translation
|Copy Source
|Alt+Insert
|[[File:CopySource.png]]
|Copies the source segment over the target segment.
|-
|Translation
|Expand
|Alt+PgDn
|[[File:ExpandSeg.png]]
|Expands a segment, if it actually extends beyond the punctuation mark (wrong segmentation). Note that a segment cannot be extended beyond a paragraph mark, page break, tabulator, or table cell.
|-
|Translation
|Shrink
|Alt+PageUp
|[[File:ShrinkSeg.png]]
|Reverses any use of the Expand segment command or reduce the size of a segment.
|-
|Translation
|To Fuzzy
|Shift+Ctrl+PgDn
|[[File:TranslateUntilFuzzy.png]]
|Translates until a non-exact match is found.
|-
|Translation
|Toggle empty
|Ctrl+Alt+X
|[[File:Cleanup Project16.png]]
|Empty the target - remove the tags from the target - restore the original target.
|-
|Translation
|Auto Propagate
|
|[[File:autopropagate.png]]
|Auto propagate segment change through all the document for same source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Toggle Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Up
|[[File:dropdown.png]]
|Transforms all the terms in the source segment into placeables. If repeated, returns to the previous mode.
|-
|Translation
|Next Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Right
|[[File:Next_Placeable16.png]]
|Selects the next placeable element in the source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Copy Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Down
|[[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]]
|Places the selected transposable element from the source segment into the target segment, where the cursor is located (or replaces highlighted text in target segment).
|-
|Translation
|Previous Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Left
|[[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]]
|Selects the previous placeable element in the source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Next word
|Tab
|
|Places the subsequent source word with letter + Tab
|-
|Translation
|Previous word
|Shift+Tab
|
|Places the preceding source word with letter+Shift+Tab.
|-
|Translation
|Target Height
|Ctrl+Alt+T
|[[File:increase_target.png]]
|Increases the height of the target segment for easier viewing.
|-
|Wordfast Anywhere
|Wordfast setup
|Ctrl+Alt+W
|[[File:Setup.png]]
|Opens the Wordfast Anywhere general setup dialog.
|-
|Edit
|Find & Replace
|Ctrl+Alt+R
|[[File:FindReplace.png]]
|Find and replace in the document.
|-
|Edit
|Edit Source
|Ctrl+Alt+K
|[[File:EditSource16.png]]
|Used to make minor corrections to the source segment.
|-
|Edit
|Edit Note
|Ctrl+Alt+J
|[[File:Edit_Note16.png]]
|Allows you to create or edit a note.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 1
|Shift+Ctrl+1
|[[File:insert_c1.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 2
|Shift+Ctrl+2
|[[File:insert_c2.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 3
|Shift+Ctrl+3
|[[File:insert_c3.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Case Changer
|Shift+F3
|[[File:caseChanger.png]]
|Toggle between lowercase, uppercase, and capitalization.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|TMs and glossaries setup
|
|[[File:Preferences16round.png]]
|Opens the TMs and glossaries setup dialog.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Concordance search
|Ctrl+Alt+C
|[[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]]
|Performs a search in the TM and displays all segments containing the search term.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Glossary Search
|Ctrl+Alt+G
|[[File:GlossarySearch.png]]
|Search in the glossary for the word or phrase selected in the source segment.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Add term to glossary
|Ctrl+Alt+T
|[[File:TermEdit.png]]
|Pops up a glossary term entry form.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Copy TU
|Alt+right
|[[File:CopyTU.png]]
|Copy a TU from the TM panel to the target segment. If many, press many times, it will start by copying the second one assuming the first one is already copied. The TU can be a MT proposal.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Delete TU
|Ctrl+Alt+Backspace
|[[File:DeleteTU.png]]
|Delete from TM the current or selected TU visible in the TM panel.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Update TU
|
|[[File:force_tm_addtu.png]]
|Commits to TM the source and target segment as a new TU or update an existing one.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Force TM search
|
|[[File:force_tm.png]]
|Perform a direct search (without cache) in the TM.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Force MT
|
|[[File:force_mt.png]]
|Forces the translation of the segment by the configured MT engines like Google Translate / Microsoft Translator.
|-
|View
|Outline pane
|Ctrl+Alt+D
|[[File:panelOutline.png]]
|Closes or opens the Outline. The outline is a view of all the segments showing which ones are translated but also which ones have notes or are provisional.
|-
|View
|TM pane
|Ctrl+Alt+M
|[[File:panelTm.png]]
|Closes or opens the TM pane.
|-
|View
|Glossary pane
|Ctrl+Alt+H
|[[File:panelGlo.png]]
|Closes or opens the Glossary (Terminology) pane.
|-
|View
|Move next block
|Page Down
|[[File:moveNextScreen.png]]
|Move to the next block of document's content.
|-
|View
|Move previous block
|Page Up
|[[File:movePrevScreen.png]]
|Move to the previous block of document's content.
|-
|View
|First of Block
|Home
|[[File:move_first_seg_screen.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the first segment of the block.
|-
|View
|Last of Block
|End
|[[File:move_last_seg_screen.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the last segment of the page.
|-
|View
|First of Doc
|Ctrl+Home
|[[File:move_first_seg_doc.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the first segment of the document.
|-
|View
|Last of Doc
|Ctrl+End
|[[File:move_last_seg_doc.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the last segment of the document.
|}

== WFA Setup ==
The WFA Setup menu is accessible by the shortcut Ctrl+Alt+W or the [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab.

Six tabs are visible: General, TM rules, Shortcuts, Segmentation, Pandora's box and QA.

=== General tab ===
Several general settings can be don in this tab.

[[File:wfasetup1.png]]

==== Machine translation ====
Click on '''MT''' tab to access the ''Machine Translation'' settings.

[[File:wfasetup2.png]]

WFA gives you the ability to translate each segment by online translation services like Google Translate and Microsoft Translator. The translations proposed are not ever likely to be fully acceptable. However, by making a few small adjustments, you will be able to use them extensively in your translations.

[[File:Warning.png]] When using this service, the source segments that will return a translation are transmitted to Google and Microsoft. It is up to you whether or not to accept these translations; these companies are not made aware of your choice. However, be aware that sending the segments to Google and Microsoft may raise privacy issues between you and your customers.

Each MT engine has a window were to set it's settings. Bear in mind that some MT may require a personal ID or password.
* Use '''Add''' button to add a new MT.
* Use '''Edit''' the settings for the selected MT on the list.
* Use '''Remove''' will delete the selected MT on the list.
* Use '''Test''' to run a test on all the MTs with the active checkbox marked.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''To use a MT engine, it must be added to the list and with the "Active" checkbox marked'''.

On each MT engine window you can set its settings (i.e. the key or url). You can also set a particular values for
* ''Engine timeout'' as in some cases (i.e. small segments) the MT requires more time to get back with a result.
* ''Engine score'' value for each MT.
* ''Details'' for extra information about the MT like the list of available languages.
[[File:Warning.png]] Each MT engine has a different set of available languages.

Finally, there are several general options such as
* When to use the MT (when no TM match, when no TM full match, always)
* Remove tags before sending to MT.
* Use all available providers on ''force MT''.
* Do not copy MT proposition to target.
* Enable MT for review (May slow down the revision process)

===== Custom Machine translation =====

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Note:''' this section is '''DIY (Do It Yourself)'''. Our hotline cannot assist in the customization of an MT engine, because that requires knowledge of the remote provider's specifications. However, public discussion groups may offer help.

If your remote Machine Translation provider is not listed (as a provider tab), you can use '''Custom tab''' to create a custom connector for it. This is only possible if your MT provider's API is using a REST standard, and returns results in a JSON, or similar, format. That is the case with major MT providers currently available with WFC (Google, Microsoft, WorldLingo, deepL, MyMemory, etc.).

In WFA's Machine Translation setup, go to the "Custom MT" tab.

[[File:CustomMT.JPG]]

Note the various elements:
* URL: Tells WFA which is the url of the MT provider with the needed parameters.
** {ss} will be replaced with the source segment to be translated. This parameter must be present.
** {sl} and {tl} will be replaced with your given source and target language codes.
** {key} will be replaced with the given API key
* API Key: Some MT providers need a personal key, this is the place to add it.
* Source language: Source language of the text, it corresponds to the {sl} parameter in the URL.
* Target Language: Target language which will be the text translated to, it corresponds to the {tl} parameter in the URL.
* POST: includes parameters that should be used with the POST method, concatenated like in the URL format. If the parameters needs to be in JSON format, choose the way how to write it (either URL encoded text to convert to JSON either a direct JSON string).
* HEADER: includes parameters that need to be in the header of the request. The format is param:value. Put one parameter per line.
* Json key: Some MT providers return the translated text in a parameter (translation, translatedTex...etc), this tells WFA how to spot the returned translated segment.

Once all the elements are set you can test the connection by using the '''Test''' button. Optionally you can change the text to be tested on the text box next to the button.

Let's assume your preferred MT provider is WorldLingo and we create a custom engine for it. You explore WorldLingo's API documentation. It essentially boils down to a query URL, with parameters. On Custom tab you can use:

* URL: https://www.worldlingo.com/S000.1/api?wl_data={ss}&wl_srclang={sl}&wl_trglang={tl}&wl_password=secret
* API Key: Empty, as no API Key is needed.
* Source language: en.
* Target Language: fr.
* Json key: Empty.

'''Practical example:'''

Opening a browser, you begin by testing the URL. In the following example, the raw URL was customized for an English-to-French language pair, to translate "Hello World". Your real URL will look different, the following is an example based on WorldLingo:

::: ''http://www.worldlingo.com/S000.1/api?wl_data=Hello%20world&wl_srclang=en&wl_trglang=fr&wl_password=secret''

You can try pasting the above URL into a browser's address bar. If things go well, the site will send a reply:

::: ''Bonjour le monde''

Other MT providers may use a more complex JSON reply, in which case you specify the JSON key so that WFA can identify the result. Here the key is "translation" so you would use Json key => translation

::: ''{"responseData":{"translation":"Bonjour le monde","match":1} }''

Your MT provider may require more parameters, such as a secret ID key (aka an API key), or other elements, in which case, you should hard-code those in the URL.

==== Fonts ====
Font Size: this setting only affects the font size on the screen, your document will keep all its original layout unchanged. The available sizes are selected from the drop-down list.

Font Family: this setting only affects the fonts displayed on the screen, your document will keep its entire original layout unchanged. You can specify a specific font or a font family, for example Arial, Helvetica, Sans Serif (sans serif font, default) or Times New Roman, Times, Serif (seriffed font).

==== Target segment selection ====
Positions the mouse pointer at the opening of the segment, with or without selection.

# Cursor at start – no text selected, cursor positioned at the beginning of the segment.
# Cursor at end – no text selected, cursor positioned at the end of the segment. This is the default setting.
# Segment selected – The target segment is entirely selected.

==== Fuzzy Threshold in % ====
Percentage of similarity required for a TU contained in the TM to be suggested as a translation of the source segment. If several TUs meet this criterion, the TU with the highest percentage will be offered. In this case you can select the subsequent TUs with [[File:CopyTU.png]] '''''Copy TU''''' button on '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' tab or using the corresponding shortcut (Alt + Right).

The default percentage (75%) is recommended for most translations, but in some cases it may be appropriate to change it. For example, if you are translating short segments containing only 3 words, a fuzzy threshold of 75% will only offer those TUs which are identical (100%) and those where two words are identical, i.e. 66%, will never be proposed.

==== Record Revisions ====
Check this option if you want to save a record of the changes on translated segments.

==== Enable Auto-Suggest ====
Check this option if you want to get suggestions while you type on a translated segment.

Auto-Suggest can be configured in '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.238_Configure_Auto-Suggest|Pandora's box #7]]''' to add or remove items.

==== Tab behavior ====
Check this option if you want to use click or hover for triggering events on Top Menu bar.

==== Enable auto-hide buttons ====
Check this option to make toop toolbar buttons hide automatically.

==== Enable Segment Tool Bar ====
Check this option to enable the Segment Tool Bar on Horizontal and Vertical views. You can customize it on Pandora's Box #15

=== TM rules tab ===

Here you have the opportunity to establish penalties to be taken into account when calculating the similarity between the TM and the segment to be translated. In other words, the percentage of similarity is reduced, where applicable, according to the figure indicated for each of the following rules. Some rules allow fractional reductions, but this only applies to the calculation: the final reduction will be the sum of all penalties rounded to the nearest whole number. If the percentage of similarity to the TU, reduced to the sum of the penalties, is less than the specified Fuzzy Threshold percentage, it will not be proposed.

[[File:wfasetup3.png]]

Penalties for the following rules are activated only if the box on their right is checked. They apply only to the TUs proposed by the TM or VLTM, not from machine translation, which has its own non-modifiable penalty.

* ''Case penalty'': if there is a difference in case (upper and lower case) between the TU and the segment to be translated, WFA can ignore this and show 100% similarity. But you can assign a penalty of between 1 and 5 points for the difference in case. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 1.

* ''Non literal penalty'': this penalty detects differences due to special characters such as dashes, quotation marks, apostrophes, punctuation and whitespace characters (non-breaking space, horizontal and vertical tabs, ...). There exist several codes for representing each of these special characters. WFA can ignore these and show 100% similarity; otherwise a penalty is calculated using the following method: every time a difference is encountered, it adds the value of the first parameter (0.25, 0.50 or 0.75), which by default is 0.50. The second parameter sets out what the minimum value of the penalty is (default is 1). Since the penalty is necessarily an integer, if the value of the penalty is 0.25 and there is only one in the segment to be translated, the minimum is not reached. Finally, the third parameter sets the maximum penalty to be assigned, even if the addition of all the differences of this rule exceeds that figure (10 by default). This rule is selected by default with a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 10.

* ''Tag penalty'': this rule works exactly the same way as the previous one, but applied to the tags (markers that represent the bits of code used to format the document <1>). This rule is selected by default with a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 10.

* ''Alignment user penalty'': the TUs found in a memory imported into WFA produced by an alignment tool and having the identifier "TALIGN!" may be assigned a penalty from 1 to 10. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 3. Please note, TUs from an alignment may not have the "TALIGN!" identifier.

* ''MT user penalty'': the TUs found in a memory imported into WFA produced by machine translation and having the identifier "MT!" may be penalised from 1 to 10. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 25. Please note, TUs from a machine translation may not have the "MT!" identifier.

* ''Multiple translation penalty'': In the case of a source segment with multiple 100% matches, i.e. several TUs having the same source segment but different translated segments, a penalty may be applied to warn of a possible choice between translations. This scenario is rare and no penalty is assigned by default.

* ''Attribute penalty'': attributes are identifiers that are associated with a particular TU at the time that it is recorded in the memory. There are five possible attributes: the first is fixed (it identifies the user who posted the TU), while the other four can be user defined. In general, translators use attribute no. 1 to define the subject of the text to be translated and the attribute no. 2 to define the client who owns the text. The other two attributes are free to be used for anything else. For example, if the proposed TU is from a text whose subject is "electronics", it will be penalised if the subject of the text to be translated is "medicine." In other words if the TU is 100% identical to the segment to be translated, it will be displayed with a percentage similarity of 98% if the penalty applied is 2 points.

The penalty can be a number from 1 to 5, valid for the four attributes. By default this rule is not active.

If you use a TM uploaded from Wordfast Classic or Pro, the existing attributes of the TU may be penalised.

=== Shortcuts tab ===

You can set the shortcuts you want to use.

[[File:wfasetup4.png]]

WFA shortcuts are not immutable. If some of them do not suit you, you can reassign them. To do this, click on the '''''upd''''' link of the shortcut you wish to change.

[[File:wfasetup5.png]]

In this example, corresponding to the first shortcut, you see the name of the command and a drop-down list. Choose '''None''' if you want to remove the shortcut or choose another from the list. Then click '''''Update''''' to confirm or '''''Cancel''''' to dismiss the dialog. Repeat for all the shortcuts that you want to change. The new keyboard shortcuts will be displayed.

The last four commands have no shortcuts; however, you can assign shortcuts to them if you wish.

If after modifying several shortcuts you want to return them to their original state, click '''''Restore default shortcuts'''''.

Finally, click '''''Save''''' settings to confirm any changes or '''''Cancel''''' to dismiss the dialog.

=== Segmentation tab ===
This tab defines the rules for segmentation.

[[File:Segmentation111.JPG]]

* ''Segmentation style'': this block determines how the segmentation will be performed. If you choose ''Wordfast /Trados segmentation'' (default) the standard end-of-segment markers are defined as follows: full stop, colon, question mark, exclamation mark and tab (Tab). You can add other characters as well as space (Space), non-breaking space (NBSP), carriage return (CR) and line feed (LF). You can add as markers: a number followed by an end of segment marker (A number Followed by ESM ends a segment – default), an end of segment marker not followed by a space (An ESM without a trailing space ends a segment) and an end of segment marker followed by a space followed by a lowercase letter (An ESM followed by a space followed by a lower-case letter ends a segment). Although you can change these markers, it is recommended to maintain them in such manner that if you share your translations and your memories with other translators, all will follow the same rule.

[[File:Warning.png]] Segmentation is performed at the time of uploading the document to WFA. You cannot therefore change the rules applying to that document during the course of its translation.

The other segmentation rules that you can choose are:
* ''Break segmentation'': segmentation is done according to the end of paragraph character (carriage return) or the tag for HTML files.
* ''Idiom segmentation'': segmentation follows the rules of the software program Idiom.
* ''SRX segmentation'': the segmentation is done by using a previously uploaded file. It follows the rules of the SRX standard, which has become a standard like TMX for formatting memories and TBX for formatting glossaries. In the case of SRX segmentation, abbreviations are also included.

* ''TM compatibility'': You must ensure the compatibility according to the memory you have uploaded or the subsequent use of your documents. By default, WFA's memory is compatible with that of Wordfast Classic and Pro (Assume Wordfast TM). If this is your choice, you can also specify if you have old projects made with Wordfast Classic or Pro (check Legacy TM created by old projects). You can also establish that the memory was created by Trados (Assume Trados TM), even adding that it was created by Trados and Word (TM created by Trados + Word); by Idiom (Assume Idiom TM) or by SDLX (Assume SDLX TM).

*''Abbreviations'': Abbreviations end with a full stop, which WFA then interprets as an end of segment marker. To avoid this, WFA allows you to create and manage a list of abbreviations. While WFA already has lists for some languages, others are empty – the user must provide the necessary information. The abbreviations are entered into the text box, one after another, without spaces and separated by a comma. Once updated, save your list by clicking on Save the language. Repeat for each language that you translate.

=== Pandora's box tab ===
This tab has many different settings. Some of this settings will open a new dialog.

[[File:wfasetup7.png]]

==== #1 PC, tablet and smartphone modes ====
Use this mode if you are using a mobile device. The segment toolbar is enlarged; local file access is disabled.

==== #2 Real time collaboration ====
Real time collaboration disables data caching. This forces the TM search before you open a segment, causing a response delay. Avoid using this mode unless sharing a TM and if the TU updates need to be shared immediately.

==== #3 Document file name convention ====
Customize your document name for download by adding a prefix and/or a suffix.

==== #4 Special characters insertion ====
Configure the 7 special characters insertion of the Edition tab.

==== #5 Configure online dictionaries ====
Configure URLs for 2 online search engines.

* Click "Add" to add a new dictionary.
* After filling the "Friendly name" and "Url" correctly you need to use "Test" to check it works fine.
* Use "Save" to add the dictionary to the list. Bear in mind that if the URL already exists it cannot be added.

If all worked fine, the list should have been updated and your dictionary available to be used.

The list does not use "Friendly name" to sort the dictionaries, so you need to check all the list to find the one you added.

In order to use one dictionary you need to select it from the list and save the settings.

==== #6 Multiple Ctrl+Alt+Down toggles placeable ====
Use this feature to toggle between copy the target term, copy the source term, or leave blank.

==== #7 Configure Auto-Suggest ====
Auto-suggest is activated at the '''General''' tab when clicking on [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab.

On this section of Pandora's Box is where you can '''configure which suggestions will Auto-suggest show'''.

[[File:AutoSuggest1.JPG]]

'''Auto-suggest can show different items''' such as: Glossary matches, tags, word from with a capital letter, numbers, file path, email addresses, URLs, chunks of Machine Translation, date and number conversion, text in parentheses (), text in braces {}, bracketed text [], word containing special character and unit conversion.

On the left there is a combo box to select the number of typed characters that will trigger auto-suggest to show up.

For '''date and number conversion''' there is a sub dialog, that can be opened by clicking on the [[File:Edit.png]] button on the left.

[[File:AutoSuggest2.JPG]]

Here you can set how dates and numbers will be converted and shown in the auto-suggested text.

For '''dates''' you can choose a different format and separator. For instance source ''2015.04.01'' could be converted to ''01/04/2015'' on target.

For '''numbers''' you can choose a different group and decimal separator. For instance source ''123.456,00'' could be converted to ''123 456.00'' on target.

==== #8 Configure Filters ====
Configure conversion of documents from their original format to the internal editor format.

For some files you can configure some parameters that will tell the filter what to do for some situations such as translate comments or sheet names.

You can make this configuration for: '''xls, xlsx, ppt, pptx, doc, docx, rtf, htm, html, mif, idml, xml (Text based files)'''.

[[File:Pandora9.JPG]]

On this section there are also 3 settings that will apply to any file.

* '''Editor format'''. To choose which type of '''bilingual file (TXML or TXLF)''' the filter should produce.[[File:Warning.png]] '''''The download bilingual file will be of the type used when the file was uploaded.''''' For example if the file was uploaded using TXML, the bilingual download will be TXML. A file cannot be uploaded using one type (TXML) and download the bilingual file of the other type (TXLF). The workaround is to change the type and upload the file again.

* '''Extract numbers'''. To define the filter action on source segments that contain only numbers.

** ''all'': Extracts all segments with only numbers for translation
** ''time_date_measure'': Extracts only segments with time and date
** ''none'': Does not extract any segments that contain only numbers

* '''Segmentation on break'''. To enable segmentation on line breaks.

==== #9 Configure double click to open/close a segment ====
Configure opening/closing actions on a segment by double clicking in the document panel. This is always active for mobile plain text mode.

[[File:Pandora101.png]]

==== #10 Configure TM Search ====
Set the timeout for searches. After the timeout, the search is cancelled and returns nothing. The default value is 4 seconds.

==== #11 Copy source when no TM match and no MT proposition ====
Copy source to target when no TM match and no MT proposition.

==== #12 Do not show empty paragraph line in Classic view ====
Do not copy MT proposition to target.

==== #13 Hide segment's IDs column on the Table view ====
Do not copy MT proposition to target.

==== #14 Custom Tab settings ====
Use this mode if you are using a mobile device. The segment toolbar is enlarged; local file access is disabled.

==== #15 Customize Segment Toolbar ====
Dialog to choose which buttons will be placed on Segment toolbar. Segment toolbar is enabled on General tab.

==== #16 Copy untranslatable to target automatically and open next segment ====
Define what will be considered an "Untranslatable segment" which will be copied to target automatically and open next segment

=== QA tab ===
Set here the criteria that will be used to conduct an audit of quality when doing a '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Transcheck|Transcheck]]'''

[[File:wfasetup8.png]]

There are several criteria that can be checked, some of which can also ''be checked while translating'' (by using the second checkbox column under '''While Translating''' title).

Here is a short description:

* '''Source & target lengths''': Compares the character count between the source and target segments. You can set the minimum and maximum % of allowed character count for the target segment.

* '''Empty target''': Checks for an empty target segment. This is always checked while translating.

* '''Numerical''': Checks that the numerical values between the source and target segments are correct.

* '''Placeable''': Checks if the tags are copied correctly to the target segments. This is always checked while translating.

* '''Forbidden chars''': Checks if the target segment includes forbidden characters. You can set the list of forbidden characters that should not be included in the target segment.

* '''Punctuations''': Checks for consistency in punctuation between source and target segments. You can set the punctuation marks that should not be included in the target segment. [[File:notice.png]] The transcheck punctuation only works on end of segmentation punctuation.

* '''Untranslatable''': Compares the source and target segments to check if the untranslatable content is consistent. You can set the untranslatable text that must be retained in the target segment.

* '''Copied source''': Checks for untranslated text when copied source option is used.

* '''Blacklists''': Checks if the target segment includes blacklisted terms. You can set blacklisted terms that should not be included in the target segment. [[File:notice.png]] The blacklisted term list must be a tab delimited file (bad term + tabulation + proposed term).

* '''Terminology''': Checks if all term translations from an active glossary are used in the target of a segment. You can enable or disable Ignore Case option.

* '''First word capitalization''': Checks if the first letter of the segment is capitalized.

* '''Edited exact match''': Checks if any exact match segments from the TM have been edited.

* '''Unedited fuzzy''': Checks if any fuzzy match segments from the TM have been left unedited.

* '''Source Consistency''': Checks consistency between source segments if the target is repeated.

* '''Target consistency''': Checks consistency between target segments if the source is repeated.

== Profile Configuration ==
Go to [[File:User profile.png]] '''''User Profile''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' menu to see information about your account and change some settings of your profile.

[[File:Profileconfig1.png]]

=== Change email ===
Use this option to change the email of your account.

[[File:Profileconfig2.png]]

=== Change password ===
Check the [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_change_my_password Wordfast Anywhere FAQ] for more information.

=== Delete account ===
Use this option to remove your account from Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:Profileconfig4.png]]

Wordfast Anywhere 6 Manual

2022-02-11T11:38:28Z

Remiandre: /* Appending terms from a local glossary to an existing glossary in Wordfast Anywhere */

{{Languages}}
[[Category:Wordfast Anywhere]]

= Introduction =
Wordfast Anywhere (WFA) is the online version of the popular Wordfast computer assisted translation (CAT) program that provides much of the functionality of the Classic and Pro desktop versions. Instead of being installed as a program on the user’s computer, WFA is made accessible from Wordfast’s servers via a web browser, regardless of the operating system used (Windows, Mac, Linux, etc.). Every effort has been made to ensure that the user interface is as close as possible to the other Wordfast flavours: toolbars, icons, shortcuts and working methods. A Wordfast Classic or Pro user should be able to use WFA with almost zero assimilation time.

It is worth remarking that WFA is almost certainly the CAT program that integrates best with the popular Mac operating system. Unlike Java-based, cross-platform programs – including Wordfast Pro – that will run on the Mac but don’t integrate with system-wide tools such as the built in Dictionary, WFA will run in Mac-native browsers such as Safari, thus giving you access to the entire range of language and text handling tools that are built into the Mac OS environment.

[[File:WFA_pagina_5_new.jpg]]
[[File:WFA_pagina_6_new.jpg]]

With WFA you can translate a wide range of both editable (TXT, DOC, DOCX, RTF, XLS, PPT, ODT, HTML, TXML, MIF, INX, etc.) and non-editable (PDF, TIFF) documents. You can store up ten current documents in your workspace, deleting your finished translations to free up space and permit new documents to be uploaded.

You can also import the TMs (translation memories) of all the language pairs you work in. Your memories will progressively expand as and when you translate. They are stored securely and will not be shared or revealed without your authorisation. If you need a local copy, you can download your TM to your computer at any time.

As is the case with other Wordfast flavours, you can add terms to your glossary as you translate. You can also upload existing glossaries to your workspace, for all language pairs. Here again, your glossaries are secure and will not be shared or revealed unless you specifically invite a colleague. You can also download your glossary if you need a local copy.

The following instructions have been written for complete beginners. Having understood the above comments, a Wordfast Classic or Pro user should have no difficulty in using WFA intuitively.

Check the '''[[Wordfast Anywhere 6 Start Guide]]''' for a quick start.

Check our [https://www.freetm.com/jsp/terms.jsp Terms of use].

== How to use WFA ==
On Wordfast Anywhere every document belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a translation project.

So the first you need is a project. A project named "Project_1" is created by default, but you can create up to 3 projects.

A project needs a language pair. A default one is suggested but more can be added. Each language pair can have a TM and glossary assigned which will be used on several processes and also automatically assigned to the documents uploaded.

A project also needs a task. "Translate" is the one by default.

Once the project is created you can add the documents. Documents can be added to all language pairs or to specific ones. There is a maximum number of documents per project depending of the type of project.

Double-click a project to open it to see the content (documents grouped by language pairs).

Double-click a document to start/resume work.

[[File:notice.png]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rDhVYY02Cds Wordfast Anywhere 6 Basic Projects video]'''

= Login in to WFA account =
Check the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Login_in_to_WFA_account Login in to WFA account]''' section on the Start Guide.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you have not created an account yet, click on the '''''Create a new account''''' and follow the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#How_to_create_an_account instructions]'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you ever ''forget your password'', click on the '''''Forgot your password?''''' and follow the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Get_your_password_back instructions]'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you are having ''login problems'' check '''''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Cannot_log_in_to_Wordfast_Anywhere Cannot log in to Wordfast Anywhere]''''' and follow the instructions.

=User Interface =
The user interface is divided into several sections. A top menu with tabs and buttons, a main central panel that changes depending on where we are (project list, project content, document translation) and a bottom panel where information and messages are shown.

Once you are connected to WFA, the workspace appears.

This should look similar to the following screenshot (depending on the browser, operating system or device used to access WFA):

[[File:Newui6.PNG]]

The workspace can be modified at any point according to your requirements.
==Top Menu==
At the very top you can find the ''Top Menu'' which consists in '''two rows''': one for the different '''menus''' (tabs) and one for the '''buttons''' corresponding to the selected tab.

Use [[File:CollapseTop.png]] to hide the buttons. Use [[File:CollapseBottom.png]] to show the buttons.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a project or selecting/opening a document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a project is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when a project is selected from the project list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when more than one file is selected from the document list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus used for translation (Edit, view, translation, review and TM & Glossaries) are only visible when the document is opened. Those buttons keep working as always, just need to open the document.

===Wordfast Anywhere Menu===

This tab a miscellaneous of buttons concerning the Wordfast Anywhere project.

[[File:Wfatab6.PNG]]

* [[File:Logout16.png]]: Use it when you want to '''leave''' Wordfast Anywhere.
* [[File:User profile.png]]: Here you'll find your '''account information'''. You'll be able to change your ''Login'' email, the ''Security Question'', the ''Security Answer'' and delete your account.
* [[File:Preferences.png]]: Here is where you set the '''configuration''' of Wordfast Anywhere:''Font Size'', ''Machine translation'', ''TM rules'', ''Shortcuts'', ''Segmentation'', ''Transcheck'' rules...etc.
* [[File:Preferences16round.png]]: Global TM & glossary management (create, add, upload, merge, edit, download, delete... ), no more for assignment.
* [[File:WF Update16.png]]: This button will direct you to a site to '''align''' your files.
* [[File:help16.png]]: WFA Help:
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''start guide''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''PM start guide''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''FAQ''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''manual''' wiki page.
** If the previous wiki pages do not work, this is a pdf backup.
* [[File:Notice.png]]: There are 4 icons corresponding to different types of '''notifications''' ([[File:Warning.png]] ONLY displayed when there are notifications):
** Webmaster Info: notifications coming from Wordfast Anywhere administration (p.e stopping the server for a publication).
** Background Info: notifications about ''Background'' processes (p.e. Analyze, Spellcheck...etc).
** System Info: notifications from the system (p.e. an unsupported browser).
** TM Server Info: notifications realted to the TM Server (p.e. TM server is disconnected).

===Project Menu===
This tab has the tools concerning a project.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when a project is selected on the project list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a project is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available for standard projects.

No project selected on the project list.

[[File:ProjecttabAll.PNG]]

This are the basic buttons:

* [[File:Pm new project 16.png]]: '''New''' use it to create a project.
* [[File:Pm open project 16.png]]: '''Open''' the selected project from the project list.
* [[File:Analyze Project16.png]]: '''Analyze''' all the documents of the project. A report is generated.
* [[File:Pm delete project 16.png]]: '''Delete''' the selected project.
* [[File:Pm close project 16.png]]: '''Close''' an opened project.
* [[File:Pm import project 16.png]]: '''Import''' a .glp file.
* [[File:Pm export project 16.png]]: '''Export''' a project into a .glp file.
* [[File:Linguist16.png]]: Use it to '''Manage''' the team of '''linguists'''.

To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

===File Tab===
This tab has the tools concerning a file.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be available when more than one file is selected from the list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be also available when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a document is opened.

[[File:FiletabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:Translate File16.png]]: '''Open''' the selected file from the list.
* [[File:About wordfast16.png]]: Open the document with '''Wordfast Pro Online'''. [[File:Warning.png]] The use of Wordfast Pro Online will be discontinued on December 31, 2021.
* [[File:Close16.png]]: '''Close''' an opened file.
* [[File:Save16.png]]: Here you'll find all the '''Download''' options for a file (p.e. translated version, bilingual versions, TXML, unformatted text, Off-line Report Tool, TM from doc segments).
* [[File:Preferences16round.png]]: With this button you'll change the '''TM & Glossary''' configuration for the document.
* [[File:Analyze Project16.png]]: '''Analyze''' the selected document/s. A report is generated.
* [[File:Statistics16.png]]: Get the '''Statistics''' of the document.
* [[File:Modify Project16.png]]: Get information about the file.
* [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]]: '''Pre-translate''' the selected document/s.
* [[File:Mergetms16.png]]: Use this button to '''merge''' the document with a '''TXML''' file.
* [[File:mergetms16_menu.png]]: Use this button to '''merge''' the document with an imported '''OFRT''' file.
* [[File:Split.png]] [[File:Join.png]]: '''Split''' the document in parts. '''Join''' the parts together again.
* [[File:Share.png]] [[File:Revoke.png]]: '''Share''' the document with an other Wordfast Anywhere user. '''Revoke''' will finish the share.
* [[File:Translate File16.png]]: '''Fuzzy Open''' the file without full matches.
* [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]]: '''Extract''' the '''frequent''' segments.
* [[File:Edit16.png]]: '''Rename''' the file.

===Edit Tab===

This tab is a translation tool extension.

[[File:Warning.png]] This buttons will be available when the document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be available when a TM is being edited.

[[File:EdittabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:FindReplace.png]]: Use it to '''Find & Replace''' text but also to go to a particular segment or get a list of segments ''untranslated'', ''provisional'', with ''notes'' or with ''tag differences''.
* [[File:EditSource16.png]]: '''Edit''' the source segment.
* [[File:Edit_Note16.png]]: Create, edit or remove a '''Note''' on a segment.
* [[File:Insert_c.png]]: '''Insert special characters'''. 7 different characters can be defined on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => '''''Setup''''' button > '''''Pandora's box'''''
* [[File:Delete_alltargetseg.png]]: '''Delete''' '''tags''' in the document. This is only available when editing a TM and has 2 options: Delete all target tags or delete all document tags.
* [[File:delete_revisions.png]]: '''Delete''' the segment '''history'''.
* [[File:Delete_alltargetseg.png]]: '''Delete''' all '''target''' segments of the document.
* [[File:caseChanger.png]]: Toggle between lowercase, uppercase, and capitalization..

===View Tab===

In this tab you'll find the buttons to move through the document and show or hide the different panels.

[[File:ViewtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:PanelOutline.png]]: Show or hide '''Outline'''.
* [[File:panelTm.png]]: Show or hide '''TM''' panel.
* [[File:panelGlo.png]]: Show or hide '''Glossary''' panel.
* [[File:MovePrevScreen.png]]: Go to '''Previous Block'''.
* [[File:MoveNextScreen.png]]: Go to '''Next Block'''.
* [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]]: Toggle between the different document layout: Classic, Horizontal and Vertical.
* [[File:move_prev_seg.png]]: Go to '''Previous segment'''.
* [[File:move_next_seg.png]]: Go to '''Next segment'''.
* [[File:move_first_seg_screen.png]]: Go to '''First segment''' of '''Block'''.
* [[File:move_last_seg_screen.png]]: Go to '''Last segment''' of '''Block'''.
* [[File:move_first_seg_doc.png]]: Go to '''First segment''' of '''document'''.
* [[File:move_last_seg_doc.png]]: Go to '''Last segment''' of '''document'''.

===Translation Tab===

Find here all the tools to perform a translation

[[File:TranslationtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:StartNext.png]]: '''Start translation''' or open next segment.
* [[File:Previous.png]]: Open previous segment.
* [[File:CloseSave.png]]: '''Close and commit''' to the TM.
* [[File:Close retain.png]]: '''Close and retain''' the segment as provisional but not commit to the TM
* [[File:close.png]]: '''Close segment'''.
* [[File:close_restore.png]]: '''Close and delete''' target content.
* [[File:mark.png]]: Mark segment as '''provisional'''.
* [[File:CopySource.png]]: '''Copy source''' to target.
* [[File:Expand_Segment16.png]]: '''Expand''' segment.
* [[File:ShrinkSeg.png]]: '''Shrink''' segment.
* [[File:TranslateUntilFuzzy.png]]: '''Translate''' document '''until a fuzzy''' match.
* [[File:Cleanup_Project16.png]]: Toggle between Empty target, Remove tags and Restore.
* [[File:autopropagate.png]]: '''Auto propagate''' segment changes through all the document.
* [[File:dropdown.png]]: Toggle placeable.
* [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]]: Go to '''Next Placeable'''.
* [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]]: '''Copy Placeable'''.
* [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]]: Go to '''Previous Placeable'''.
* [[File:increase_target.png]]: Increase target segment height.
* [[File:Mic.png]]: Use '''Web Speech''' to dictate the target content. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY available for Chrome. Currently disabled due to browser security.'''

===Review Tab===

This tab has the tools to review the document.

[[File:ReviewtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:Preview16.png]]: '''Preview''' a PDF version of the document.
* [[File:Transcheck16.png]]: Do a '''quality control''' on the document
* [[File:Spellcheck16.png]]: '''Spellcheck''' the document

===TMs and Glossaries Tab===

Tab with the tools related to TM and glossaries actions.

[[File:TmglotabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]]: Concordance search
* [[File:GlossarySearch.png]]: Glossary Search
* [[File:TermEdit.png]]: Term edition.
* [[File:CopyTU.png]]: Copy TU.
* [[File:DeleteTU.png]]: Delete TU.
* [[File:Add File To Project16.png]]: Add TU.
* [[File:force_tm_addtu.png]]: Update TU.
* [[File:force_tm.png]]: Force TM search.
* [[File:force_mt.png]]: Force Machine Translation search.
* [[File:force_term.png]]: Force Glossary search.
* [[File:update_tm_doc.png]]: Update TM with document content.
* [[File:iSearch.png]]: Lookup in online dictionary.

===Help Tab===

Help section is on the '''Wordfast Anywhere Menu'''.

===Custom Tab===
In this tab you can add up to 15 buttons of your choice, so you can have together in one tab your most used buttons.
Selection any of the translation menus buttons (Edit, view, translation, review and TM & Glossaries) and the WFA setup and TM&Glossary set up.

[[File:custom_tab.png]]

To do so you must go to [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab. Then go to '''Pandora Box''' tab and go to ''Custom Tab settings'', where you will find all the buttons that can be added to the '''Custom''' tab

[[File:custom_tab2.png]]

==Panels==

===Project List Panel===
This panel shows the list of projects.

[[File:Projectlistpanel.png]]

Projects will be listed here. '''Double click on one project''' or select it and use [[File:Pm open project 16.png]]'''Open''' from the top menu bar to open the project.

===Project content Panel===
When opening a project, the ''Content Panel'' area will show the content of the project, the list of documents in the project.

[[File:ProjectContentpanel.png]]

Main areas are:

* '''Header row (1)''': In this row you'll fine the headers of the columns. The columns are: Languages/file (1), Vol. (1C) and the columns for the different jobs will follow (1D). This row will change the background color according to the project status: blue for ''In preparation'', orange for ''In progress'' and green for ''completed''. Use the '''Add files''' button (1A) to add files to all language pairs and use '''dashboard''' button (1B) to see an estimation of cost of the project.
* '''Project setup (2)'''Click on the ''project name'' or icon next to it to open the project setup dialog.
* '''Language Row (3)''': In this row several icons will be shown depending on the file selection to perform actions such as add files to the language pair (3A), delete selected files (3B) or assign linguist to jobs (3C). Use the '''remove language pair''' icon (3D) to delete the language pair ([[File:Warning.png]] all the documents inside will be permanently deleted).
* '''Note (4)''' this icon allows to add a note to the document.
* '''TM & glossaries (5)''' This are the TMs and glossaries assigned to the document, mouse-over to see extra information. This TM and glossary assignment will be used for the tasks.
* On the '''Status bar''' you'll find information about the project.
* Clicking on the file name will open the document. And clicking on each of the other cell text or icon will open the edit dialog for that cell.

===Translation Panels===
When a document is opened for translation, the screen is divided in 4 different panels.

[[File:Panels.png]]

====Outline====
Show/Hide Outline panel using '''''View''''' tab => '''''Show/hide Outline''''' [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button

The outline displays all the segments of the document.
The available status are:
* A white box indicates that the segment is not translated
* A green box indicates a translated segment
* A yellow box indicates a provisional segment
* An 'i' after segment id indicates a segment having a note
* The black thick border on the box indicates the current document selected on document panel
* The pink border on the box indicates the visible segments in the document panel

You can jump and open any segment of the document by clicking on its number.
If the segment is not visible on the document panel (blue border instead of pink), the document panel will be refreshed.

Once a segment is opened you can use
'''''Edit''''' tab => '''''Edit Note''''' [[File:Edit_Note16.png]] button to create/delete a note and also '''''Translation ''''' tab => '''''Provisional''''' [[File:mark.png]] button to mark/unmark a provisional segment.

====TM Panel====
This panel shows the matches from TM or MT for the current segment.

You can show or hide this panel using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:panelTm.png]] button.

====Glossary Panel====
This panel shows the matching terms for the current segment.

You can show or hide this panel using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:panelGlo.png]] button.

====Document Panel====

When a document is opened, it shows the segments content.

Wordfast Anywhere do not load the entire document in the editor if there are many segments.

While translating the segments are added one by one to the editor, but if you can move inside the document to see any part you want.

To do so, you can use:
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:MovePrevScreen.png]] button to go to '''Previous Block'''.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:MoveNextScreen.png]] button to go to '''Next Block'''.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button to show '''Outline''' and then jump and open any segment of the document by clicking on its number. More information [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline here]

This is how an opened document looks like:

[[File:document_panel_doc.png]]

=====Document Layout=====
Using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] button you can change the document layout, which is the way segments are shown on Document Panel. The three possible views are:

'''''Classical'''''

[[File:ClassicalLayout.png]]

'''''Horizontal'''''

[[File:HorizontalLayout.png]]

'''''Vertical'''''

[[File:VerticalLayout.png]]

===Status Panel===
Always present at the bottom. Here you can find several information about the project, file, TM, display, translation process. Also some messages will be showed here.

==Other features==

===Show/Hide Top Menu Buttons ===
Buttons on the top menu can be hidden.

Use [[File:CollapseTop.png]] to hide the buttons. Use [[File:CollapseBottom.png]] to show the buttons.

= Project Operations =
A new Project menu bar has been added after Wordfast Anywhere menu. Yes! Project Management (PM) has been introduced to WFA.

* * A project named "Project_1" is created by default. If you had an account before version 6, it will contain all the files from the previous version grouped by language pair.
* Every document now belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a project.
* Double-click a project to open it to see the content (documents grouped by language pairs).
* Double-click a document to start/resume work.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a project.

[[File:notice.png]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rDhVYY02Cds Wordfast Anywhere 6 Basic Projects video]'''

== Create a New Project ==
On the Project tab click on [[File:Pm new project 16.png]]'''New''' to create a new project. This will open the ''Project Seup'' window where the settings for the project are done.

To access the project setup once the project has been created, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

[[File:Createproject.PNG]]
[[File:Createproject1.PNG]]
[[File:Createproject2.PNG]]

The ''Project Setup'' window has two sections that need to be set in order to create the project. Setting one section opens the next one.

;1.General
: On this section general information of the project is set. This includes:
# Project name (Compulsory)
# Description (optional)
# Project type. Defines the type of the project:
#* Standard: For translators working alone.
#* Advanced: For Project Managers (PMs) managing large, multi-language projects.
# Project status (for advanced type). Defines the status of the project:
#* In preparation (blue): When project is being prepared (files, TMs and glossaries and linguist being added)
#* In progress (orange): This marks the start of the project. Files are shared with the linguist at this point.
#* Completed (green): The project is finished.
# Currency(optional). It will be used to calculate the project cost.
# Decimals(optional). When this checkbox is marked the project estimated cost will show numbers with decimals.
# Auto(optional). By default Project Manager will be responsible of pushing files to the next job when completion is done. Mark this checkbox to automatically sent files to the next job upon completion.
;2.Language Pairs and tasks
: On this section language pairs and tasks are added.
* Use the '''+''' next to the language pair header to add a new language pair. This will open the language selection dialog and then the TM and glossaries dialog to assign them to the language pair.
* Use the '''+''' at the end of the header row to add new tasks. Only 10 tasks can be added.
* A row is shown for each language pair where the default word rate (left box) and speed rate (right box) for each task can be set.
* Use the '''-''' next to the language pair to remove it. [[File:Warning.png]] Associated files and shares will be revoked.
* Use the '''-''' next to the task name to remove it. [[File:Warning.png]] Associated files and shares will be revoked.

Once all compulsory fields are set, click on '''Save project''' to save the project and go to the ''Project Content panel''.

[[File:Warning.png]] It is possible to move from standard to advanced but opposite is only possible if the advanced project has only one task.

== Modify Project Setup ==
To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

Use this to change any of the project settings defined on the project creation.

[[File:Warning.png]] It is possible to move from standard to advanced but opposite is only possible if the advanced project has only one task.

It is the same than for creating a project, so check the section above to know about the different parts and settings.

== Setting up language pair, Translation Memories and glossaries ==
Languages are added/removed from the ''Project Setup'' dialog.

To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

Check ''Create Project'' section above to know about it.

=== Language pair with its associated TMs and glossaries set in the project setup ===

To access the project setup dialog, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

[[File:Project_setup.png]]

Click on the language pair '''''+''''' button.

[[File:Langpair_dialog.png]]

Enter the languages and save, the TMs and glossaries dialog opens.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair.png]]

* If no TM and glossary exists for the language pair, a new dialog will propose you to create them. Save and wait they are listed.
* You can create and choose one or more TMs and glossaries. They are selected by checking the row in the '''''Active''''' column.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair_2.png]]

Finally save the TMs and glossaries selection by clicking on the '''''Save''''' button. The new language pair is now in the project setup and one icon is displayed for each TM and glossary.

[[File:Project_setup_2.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] The TMS and glossaries can be updated for a language pair by clicking on the icons. But if documents already exists for that language pair, they will not be affected by this change, only new documents added after the update.

=== TMs and glossaries set individually for a document ===
This selection for a document is overwriting the Language pair selection.
In the project content select a document by checking it and then click on the '''''TMs and glossaries''''' button [[File:Preferences16round.png]] of the '''''File''''' menu.

[[File:Project_content_3.png]]

The same TMs and glossaries dialog opens.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair_3.png]]

Saving will update only the TMs and glossaries for the selected document. A control can done hovering the TM icon.

[[File:Project_content_2.png]]

== Add/Remove Files ==
From the '''Project Content Panel''' there are two ways to add files to a project.

* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the header will add the files to all the languages in the project.
* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the language row. This will add the files only to that language.

[[File:Pmaddfiles.PNG]]

To remove a file, first use the checkbox to select it and then use the [[File:Remove16.png]] icon on the language row.

[[File:Pmdeletefile.PNG]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Associated shares will be revoked.

Several files can be selected to be removed at the same time.

== Project dashboard ==
Using the [[File:Pm_cost_16.png]] icon on the header will show the estimated cost of the project. Click on the icon again to hide costs.

[[File:Pmdashboard.PNG]]

== Advanced Features ==
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

Advanced projects have some extra features to manage the files.

=== Task TM ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

Click on the TM icon on the file column to set how the TM will be used on the tasks.

[[File:PmaddtmPNG.PNG]]

There are different options for the TM use:
*'''''Share TM'''''
**The selected TM will be shared with linguists.
**This is the best option to use.
**Translator will have exact and fuzzy matches.
**Translator can use concordance.
*'''''Create Project TM'''''
**The selected TM will NOT be shared.
**It will be used to create a temporary project TM with the matches from the file/s
**The temporary project TM will be shared.
*'''''Pretranslate'''''
**The selected TM will NOT be shared.
**It will be used to pretransalte the document/s.
**Only one TU match (the highest) per segment will be available to the translator.
**Concordance cannot be used.
**Concordance will only be used in this temporary TM

[[File:Warning.png]] Once a task has started it is not possible to change this assignment.

To change the TM assigned click on the same icon and change the TM selection by marking the ''active'' checkbox for the TMs you want to use.
To unassign the TMs clean all the ''active'' checkboxes.

=== Task Glossaries ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

To assign glossaries to tasks follow the instructions for TMs, but using the ''active'' checkboxes on the glossaries side of the dialog.

=== Manage Linguists ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

The Manage Linguist window can be opened by using the [[File:Linguist16.png]] icon on the '''Project''' tab or the '''Manage linguists''' buttons on the ''Assign Job'' window.

This allows the PM to create a team of linguists that will be used on the project jobs.

The same linguist can be used in several languages and roles.

[[File:Pmlinguist1.PNG]]

Main areas are:

* '''Add new linguist to a new language pair (1)''': Use [[File:Pm_linguist_add_16.png]] icon to add a new linguist to the team for a new language pair.
* '''Add or remove a linguist from a language pair (2)''': Use [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] icon to add a linguist to a language pair and use [[File:Pm_collapse_16.png]] icon to remove it.
* '''Linguist task grid (3)''': In this grid, each cell shows the RATE-SPEED-SCORE settings for a linguist. The grid has 4 columns, one for each role: Translator (TR), Proofreader (PR), Revise (RE) and QA. In addition '''dark values mean that linguist has been marked as "able" to do that role'''. Grey values indicate that linguist is not marked as "able" to do that role. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''

==== New Linguist ====
Use [[File:Pm_linguist_add_16.png]] or [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] to add a new linguist.

[[File:Pmlinguistnew.PNG]]

Introduce the following information to add a linguist.

* '''Email''': It must be the email of the linguist WFA account.
* '''Initials''': Short 4 character nickname for the linguist.
* '''Ctry''': Country of the linguist.
* '''Comment''': Some words about the linguist.
* '''Source language''' and '''target language''' that the linguist can work with.
* Role performance. There are 4 default roles a linguist can do on project tasks.
** Mark the '''checkbox''' if the linguist is able to do the role. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''
** '''Rate''': Linguist minim rate. Rate is measured in import per word. The project currency will be user with the import. For example 0.5 Eur per word.
** '''Speed''': Linguist speed rate (words/day). For example 3,000 words/day.
** '''Score''': Linguist 1 to 5 ''star'' score.

=== Assign Job ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''

Use the [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] icon in the language row under the '''job name''' column to assign a job to a linguist for the checkbox marked files.

[[File:Pmaddtask.PNG]]

On the assign job dialog:
* Choose a linguist from the list to whom the job will be assigned. [[File:Warning.png]] The file will be shared with the linguist when the project is set as 'In progress'. The rate and job amount from the linguist will be set for the task.
* To override the linguist rate or job amount, a particular rate or job amount for the job can be set using the input field under the column header. [[File:Warning.png]] Bear in mind that both are related so changing one will update the other.
* A '''''Deadline''''' can be set on the input field under '''''Duration'''''.
* Fill the '''''Note''''' text box to send extra information to the linguist.
* Use '''''Linguist cannot download the shared file''''' to not allow the linguist to download the file.
* Click on '''''Manage linguists''''' to open the Manage Linguist window to add/edit/remove linguists.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' linguists marked as ''able'' to do a role will be listed.

Use the [[File:Pm_collapse_16.png]] icon in the language row under the '''job name''' column to unassign a linguist from a job for the checkbox marked files. [[File:Warning.png]] Shares will be revoked.

[[File:Pmdeletetask.PNG]]

=== Move file to next Task ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

If '''Auto''' tasking is not set on the ''Project Properties'' window, when a task is finished (file has been revoked by the linguist), PM has to manually move it to the next task which will share the file with the linguist assigned to that task.

To do so, click on the double arrow on the finished task.

[[File:Pmmoveon.PNG]]

=== Workflow ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

The project workflow should be:
# PM creates a project, sets languages, sets jobs (Project setup).
# PM adds files to the project and prepares them (i.e splitting).
# PM sets how the TMs and glossaries assigned to the document will be use on the tasks as Share TM, Create project TM or to pre-translate.
# PM prepares the team of linguists.
# PM assign a linguist to each file task. Multiple file selection for batch assign is possible.
# When PM sets the project status to ''In progress'' files that has been assigned a TM and a task will be shared to the corresponding linguist.
# Linguist works on the file. When his work is finished, revokes the file. This finishes the share.
# Once the file is revoked, the PM has to manually move it to the next task. This is done automatically if Auto tasking is selected on Project Setup.
# When all tasks are finished project is finished. PM can change the status of the project to ''Completed''.

=== Purchase Order ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

You can define a Purchase Order template with project, document and task information that will be send to the linguists when the file is shared.

A copy of the email send to the linguist is BCC to the project owner.

==== Purchase Order template ====
Go to [[File:User profile.png]] '''''User Profile''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab to see information about your account. On the ''PM'' tab you can edit the default template.

[[File:Po1.PNG]]

On this template you put the information you want to appear on the Purchase Order.

You can use some '''dynamic parameters''' to add project, document and task information. Use this parameters to build the Purchase Order.
Parameters will be substituted by project, document and task corresponding values or a predefined text.

{| class="wikitable"
|+Here is the list which you can also check them using the [[File:Pm info 16.png]] icon.
|-
|{purchase_order_number}
|Include a number for the purchase order.
|-
|{project_name}
|Project name.
|-
|{task_name}
|Task name.
|-
|{document_name}
|Document name.
|-
|{document_download}
|If linguist can download the document the text '(The document cannot be downloaded.)' will be added to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{document_volume}
|Document number of words.
|-
|{job_note}
|Job note
|-
|{job_rate}
|Job rate
|-
|{job_total}
|Job total cost
|-
|{job_deadline}
|Job deadline in the format 29/12/2021 15:00 GMT+02:00 and the remaining time.
|-
|{document_tmglo}
|If there are TMs or glossaries in the share the text 'For the duration of this job # Translation Memories and # Glossaries have been temporarily shared with you.' will be added to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{document_use}
|Add the text 'To work on this document, log into your Wordfast Anywhere account. If you are already logged, refresh the project list by closing all the projects.' to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{my_full_name}
|Full name from 'User profile'.
|-
|{my_professional_info}
|Professional information from 'User profile'.
|}

==== Purchase Order preview ====
On the '''assign job dialog''' you will see a preview of the Purchase Order.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of the dynamic parameters will be updated when changing the selections on the dialog, others might require the job to be saved and others will be updated when the Purchase Order is send.

[[File:Po2.PNG]]

==== Purchase Order batch send ====
You can send the Purchase Orders for all the saved jobs at any moment using the '''Send POs''' button on the ''Project Setup'' dialog

[[File:Warning.png]] Purchase Order will also be send when the file is shared.

= File Operations =
[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a document.

=== Upload ===
To translate your document, you must first upload it to WFA.

[[File:warning.png]] There is a file size limit of 20 Mb.

From the '''Project Content Panel''' there are two ways to add files to a project.

* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the header will add the files to all the languages in the project.
* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the language row. This will add the files only to that language.

[[File:Pmaddfiles.PNG]]

The following window will be displayed:

[[File:Upload_doc.png]]

There are several ways to upload a document
* '''From local file''': Use '''''Browse...''''' to navigate through the directories on your computer and locate the document to be uploaded.
* '''From URL''': This option allows you to upload a file that is located on an Internet server by entering the address (URL) into the field. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Google Drive''': Choose a file from your Google Drive to be uploaded. You'll be asked to allow access rights to WFA before choosing the file. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Dropbox''': Choose a file from your Dropbox to be uploaded. You'll be asked to allow access rights to WFA before choosing the file. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Clipboard''': Paste the text to be uploaded into the text area. A text file will be created with the text.

At the bottom of the window click on '''''View allowed formats''''' to check the allowed formats:

Finally click on:
* '''''Upload''''': to only upload the file, which will be listed on the Document Management.
* '''''Upload and Open''''': to upload and open the document, which will be displayed in the document panel.

[[File:warning.png]] Depending on the size of the file, this may take some time. Please be patient.

Upload can also be done by using drag and drop area.

For some file formats you can configure some filter behaviors when uploading the file on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters|Configure Filters]]''' in ''Pandora's Box #8''. This is important for '''Text based files (xml, xsl)''' where a rules file (.properties) is needed.

=== Open ===
To open a document, first select it from the list of documents. There are 2 options on '''[[{{PAGENAME}}#File Tab|File tab]]''':

* '''''Open''''' button [[File:Translate_File16.png]]: will open a document and show all the segments
* '''''Fuzzy Open''''' button [[File:Translate_File16.png]]: will open a document, but only segments with a score lower than 100.

=== Segmentation ===
In order to be translated with a CAT tool, a document is divided into translation units (TUs), also known as segments. This process is called segmentation. A segment is a text string that ends with a terminator segment, usually the period (.), colon (:), question mark (?), or exclamation mark (!) and also a paragraph or end of cell mark, a page break or a tab.

The advantage of segmentation is that the translation units are presented to you one by one, without any danger of missing one. These segments form the basis for the TUs that are saved in the TM, consisting of the source segment (to translate) and the target segment (translated).

To configure segmentation go to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Segmentation_tab| Segmentation tab]]''' on the WFA settings.

=== Review ===
Once translated, the text should be revised. Here are some methods:
* Download the translated document immediately to view it in your favourite word processor.
* Download it in an offline review format. See '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Offline_Review_Tool|Offline Review Tool (OFRT)]]'''.
* Revise it in WFA using '''Trancheck''', '''Spellcheck''' and '''Preview''' tools. See below.
* If you are using the Classic mode for the document Layout (See the '''''Doc Layout''''' button [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] on '''''View''''' tab) , you can toggle the display between the bilingual document, the original document and the translated document, use the shortcut '''Ctrl+,''' (Ctrl+comma). A different display mode is presented with each iteration. To confirm what you see in front of you, check the indicator on the status bar: bilingual document (Bilingual), original document (Source) or translated document (Target). You can also click on the indicator to change it. Please note this action does not alter the document in any way. It only changes the way that it is displayed in a way that is more convenient for the task you are currently engaged in.

==== Transcheck ====
Click on the '''''Transchek''''' button [[File:Transcheck16.png]] of the '''''Review''''' tab. Transcheck provides the means to check translated content for missing tags, empty targets, numbers, untranslated segments, and terminology.

[[File:Transcheck.png]]

Click on the '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#QA_tab|Set the criteria]]''' link to go to the '''Setup''' and configure them.

Click on the '''''Check''''' button to get the result.

Click on the '''''Move next''''' button to move in the document panel to the first segment in the result list. Click again to move to next segment and so on.

==== Spellcheck ====

Click on the '''''Spellcheck'''' button [[File:Spellcheck16.png]] of the '''''View''''' tab and choose again '''Spellcheck''' in the list of choice. Spellcheck is a good practice to ensure high quality as it flags words in a document that may not be spelled correctly. The Spellcheck is done immediately then you'll get the following report with the results.

[[File:Spellcheck.png]]

Click on the '''''Move''''' button to move in the document panel to the first segment in the result list. Click again to move to next segment and so on.

==== Preview ====
Click on the '''''Preview''''' butonn [[File:Preview16.png]] of the '''''View''''' tab . It can be done at any stage of completion to get a PDF file displayed in a pop-up window with the translated document.

[[File:Preview_1.png]]
[[File:Preview_2.png]]

=== Download ===

[[File:Warning.png]] For '''download issues''', please check this [https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_fix_a_document_when_download_failed.3F link]

When the translation is finally complete, you must download the final document in order to be able to deliver it. To do this, click on [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab. A dialog with all the download options will be shown.

[[File:Donwload_all.jpg]]

Here is a short description of each option:

* '''Translated document/s''': Click to download the translated file. It will be the translated version of the source document in the same file type.

* '''Bilingual''': Click to download the TXLF (or TXML) file from the document. [[File:Warning.png]] '''''The download bilingual file will be of the type used when the file was uploaded.''''' For example if the file was uploaded using TXML, the bilingual download will be TXML. A file cannot be uploaded using one type (TXML) and download the bilingual file of the other type (TXLF). The workaround is to change the type and upload the file again. [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters More information]

* '''Offline review export''': Click to download an Offline Review file (.doc).

* '''Bilingual DOC without formatting''': Click to download bilingual for MS Word without placeholders (*.doc).

* '''Unformatted text''': Click to download unformatted Text (*.txt).

* '''Notes report''': Click to download a report with the document notes.

* '''TM from document/s''': Click to download a TM with document's content (.txml).

* '''Backup workspace''': Click to download a backup of current document + TM + glossary.

* '''Package''': Click to download a WFP package file (.glp) containing documents, memories, glossaries....etc. More information [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Package here]

* '''Filtered bilingual''': Open an advanced filtering dialog to choose segments to be downloaded.

Clicking '''OK''' will take the next dialog.

You may receive this message if you have not yet fully translated the document:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

This is purely an advisory message, warning you if you have forgotten to translate a segment or if there are provisional segments or notes. However it is quite possible that this is your intention: sometimes there are segments that should not be translated.

You can find out at any time if you have completed the translation, or how many segments remain to be translated, by using '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''

If your file is fully translated or you clicked '''OK''' on this warning dialog, a dialog where you can choose the way to download the file will open.

This can have different extra options depending the type of download you have chosen on the first dialog.

[[File:DownloadOptions2.png]]

For downloading the translated file, you have the option to add a second document in PDF format to the downloading of the document in its original format. To add the PDF-formatted document, tick the Add PDF file box. This may take some time, so please wait.

[[File:DownloadOptions2a.png]]

For downloading the TXML file, you have the options to copy the source content in case target segment is empty and not use language variants.

You can cancel the download by clicking Cancel or continue by clicking OK.
You can verify that this operation is taking place: a series of small blue rectangles will display the progress in the status bar.

There are some cases when you will get a compressed ZIP file instead of the original format. Check [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#Why_do_I_get_a_zip_file_when_downloading.3F here] the reasons.

If you have requested the PDF file, both files – the original and the PDF – will be downloaded together and compressed together in ZIP format (*. zip).

There are several ways to download a file:

* '''Download file''': After you click on the OK button, Wordfast Anywhere prepares the data transfer and then sends it to your browser. The browser will then inform you that it has received the data according to its specific mode of operation. In some cases, a dialog box will pop up allowing you specify where to save the file; however, this depends on the particular browser you use. If nothing happens, check your browser’s downloads settings and / or repeat the process.
* '''Send file to email''': Send the downloaded file by email.
* '''Create file URL''': Create a url to the downloaded file. To get the file copy-paste the url in your browser to start the download. The file will be available at that location for 3 days.
* '''Google Drive''': Send the downloaded file to your Google Drive account.
* '''Dropbox''': Send the downloaded file to your Dropbox account.

[[File:Warning.png]] For '''download issues''', please check this [https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_fix_a_document_when_download_failed.3F link]

=== Delete ===
[[File:Warning.png]] Remember this can '''NOT''' be undone, so it is recommended to download the file first.

To remove a file, first use the checkbox to select it and then use the [[File:Remove16.png]] icon on the language row.

[[File:Pmdeletefile.PNG]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Associated shares will be revoked.

Several files can be selected to be removed at the same time.

[[File:notice.png]] In case you accidentally delete a file, you can recover it by uploading again and using the same TM to pre-translate it.

=== Package ===
Project files (*.glp) are managed with the [[File:Pm import project 16.png]] '''Import''' and [[File:Pm export project 16.png]] '''Export''' buttons in the Project menu.

[[File:Warning.png]] The project file (*.glp) is limited to one source language while a Wordfast Anywhere project can have many, in consequence, package export is done by source language.

[[File:Warning.png]]There is an issue importing packages coming from PD. If you cannot import the .glp file, please ask to receive the bilingual files (txml/txlf) and the url for the TM/glossary.

==== Upload ====

Upload must be done using '''''Project''''' menu => '''''Import''''' [[File:Pm import project 16.png]] button.

Once you have selected you local file, click '''Upload'''. A new dialog with the package information and upload options will be shown.

[[File:UploadPkg.JPG]]

* '''Package Information''' section shows package name, who and when created the package and which language pairs contain.
* '''Package content''' section shows the bilingual files on the package. The files with the check box marked will be uploaded. '''On the right''' there are two drop-down lists to add a TM and glossary to the file which can came from the package if WFA can handle them or from your list on WFA (Information about them can be found on the Resources section).
* '''Resources''' section shows a list of TMs and glossaries and source files.

Finally there are two options for the upload.
* '''Create new folder''': by default files will be added to the root folder, you can use this option to upload the package files in a new folder.
* If the package contains source files a drop-down list will be shown to choose between '''Export back later''' to upload just the bilingual files and '''Generate final files on WFA''' to upload source files and merge them with the corresponding bilingual file in the package.

Once the package has been successfully uploaded, an HTML report is created.

[[File:Warning.png]] A new project is created with the content of the package.

==== Download ====

[[File:Warning.png]] The project file (*.glp) is limited to one source language while a Wordfast Anywhere project can have many, in consequence, package export is done by source language.

Download must be done using '''''Project''''' menu => '''''Export''''' [[File:Pm export project 16.png]] button.

[[File:DownloadPkg.JPG]]

* '''Package Information''': Here you can choose to download an existing package or create a new one, source and target languages. Multiple target language can be chosen if the package had them when it was uploaded.
* '''Package content''': After clicking '''Find Files''' a list of available files, TMs and glossaries is shown. The files with the check box marked will be downloaded.

Finally you can chose to '''Add Source files''' to the package.

= TM & Glossary Management =
== TM & Glossary Basics ==

Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''Setup TM&Glo''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' menu.

[[File:TmgloDialog.png]]

===Translation Memory ===
==== Creating a translation memory ====
There are several ways to create or add a TM:
* Create an empty standard WFA TM
* Upload an existing TM like from Wordast Classic or Pro
* Link to a remote TM hosted on a private Wordfast server
* Link to a Very Large TM hosted on a public Wordfast server

To create an empty TM, click on the '''''Create''''' button of the TM buttons area.

[[File:CreateTm.png]]

Choose source and target language codes. It is recommended that you have only one TM for each language pair. This way, you will benefit from everything you have already translated in each pair. However, there may be reasons for you to maintain different TMs in the same language pair. In this case, enter an ID using up to 10 characters in the Assigned Name field.
 Then click on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''Create TM''''' dialog box. Your TM has now been created and is selected in the list of TMs.

To Upload an existing TM, click on the '''''upload'''' button.

[[File:CreateTm_3.png]]

If you already have a TM that you use with Wordfast Classic or Pro, you can upload it to WFA. The codes for source and target languages are written in the header of the TM file. If you already have a TM in the same pair, make sure that you enter an identifier of up to 10 characters in the Assigned Name field.
 This procedure is exactly the same if you have a TM from another CAT tool. However, check first that this TM has been exported in the '''TMX''' format, the standard file format with extension '''.tmx''' supported by all major CAT tool developers.
 Click on the '''''Upload''''' button of the '''''Upload''''' dialog box, you will be prompted to browse a local file on your PC.

If the TM is in Excel format, before uploading it you need to save it as ''Unicode Text''.

[[File:warning.png]] Depending on its size, uploading a TM may take some time. In this case, it can be run in the background, allowing you to perform other tasks while you are waiting.

To add a remote TM or VLTM, click on the '''''add''''' button.

[[File:AddTm_1.png]]

Select the type TM in the list box.

[[File:AddTm_2.png]]

For adding a remote TM, copy paste the given URL in the URL field and the workgroup ID, if any, in the workgroup ID field.
 If you have already a remote TM with the same languages, you will need to enter a symbolic name.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test the remote TM. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:AddTm_3.png]]

WFA has access to the public TM server, which consists of segments offered by the community of translators and is available to all under the name VLTM (Very Large Translation Memory). The TM is unrestricted, free of charge and anonymous.
 For a VLTM, you need to enter source and target language codes.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test if the VLTM is available for your languages. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

==== Appending(Update) an existing TM with a local TM ====
You can upload and append(Update) one of your existing TMs with a local TM by clicking on the '''''merge''''' button.

[[File:MergeTm.png]]

 The process is slightly the same than uploading a TM but you should first select the existing TM in the list. The memory to import will already have predefined source and target languages codes in the header of the TM. There may therefore be a conflict of languages between it and the existing memory. If the languages are different, the merge operation will be rejected.
 You also have the choice, in case there are identical source segments, to add always the TM segments, or to not add duplicated segments from the TM. Select '''Add always''' or '''Do not add duplicate''' in the list box.
 By default, the merge process will not take language variants into account. If you want to make sure exactly the same variants are merged, tick the '''append TUs having the same variant''' option.
 Finally click on the '''''Merge''''' button of the '''''Append TUs''''' dialog box

==== Selecting an existing TM for translating a document ====
Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''TMs and Glossaries''' button on '''File''' menu to open the dialog and select an existing TM.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Caution''': If your TM is selected in the TM list, it does not mean selected for translating a document.
To select a TM for translation, you have to tick it in the '''active''' column and click on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' dialog box.
In this example above, 2 EN>FR TMs and 2 EN>FR glossaries are set active for translation.

[[File:notice.png]] A document can have as active '''several read-only''' TMs, but '''only one writeable'''. You might need to uncheck the active checkbox from the current writeable TM in order to set a new one.

=== Glossary ===
The use of incorrect terminology can ruin an otherwise good translation. Many clients have a well-defined terminology (the jargon of the trade), compiled in the form of a glossary. By supplying this glossary to their translators, clients can impose a particular terminology. In adopting this approach, very common in technical translation, the end result should harmoniously fuse the linguistic competence of the translator with the terminological requirements of the client.

Sometimes the client will ask the translator to provide a glossary of terms arising from research undertaken during the translation. In this case, the translator must create a glossary and add specific terminology to it. This glossary building can either be done prior to translation (in an initial terminology research phase), or during the translation itself.

In many cases, however, the client provides a bilingual glossary, which has already been created during the course of previous translations. It is then up to the translator to comply strictly with it and, where appropriate, to add his or her own contributions.

When the translation work is of a more general nature (and especially if a translator is still in the process of acquiring the general vocabulary of a source language), WFA’s glossary function can also be used to itemise terminology that is encountered during the course of the translation process.

Wordfast Anywhere is designed to assist the translator in all the cases mentioned above through the implementation of its glossary function. This glossary consists of a simple tab-delimited text document, which – like the TM – can be uploaded to and downloaded from WFA, shared with other CAT programs, etc. as required.

==== Creating a glossary ====
Like TM there are several ways to create or add a glossary:
* Create an empty standard WFA glossary
* Upload an existing glossary
* Link to remote glossaries
* Link to Tilde Terminology services
* Link to a IATE glossary

To create an empty glossary, click on the '''''Create''''' button of the glossary buttons area and follow the same TM pattern.

To Upload an existing glossary, click on the '''''upload''''' button of the glossary buttons area and follow the same TM pattern.
 Allowed file types are simple tabulated text file (*.txt) (source + tab + target), Wordfast glossary text file (*.txt), Excel file (*.xls, *.xlsx) and TBX file (*.tbx).
 Excel files must be simple:
* 1st Column: Source (compulsory)
* 2nd Column: Target (compulsory)
* 3rd Column: Comment (optional)
* 4th Column: F1 (optional)
* 5th Column: F2 (optional)
* 6th Column: F3 (optional)

 Unlike with a TM, WFA cannot derive the source and target language information from the header of the glossary file; therefore this must be specified here.
 Once the glossary has been uploaded, you will receive a report summarising the operation:
 You will see how many terms have been submitted for upload, how many were rejected as invalid or duplicates well as the total number of terms added.

To add a remote glossary or Tilde Terminology services, click on the '''''add''''' button.

[[File:AddGlossary_1.png]]

Select the type in th elist box.

[[File:AddGlossary_2.png]]

For adding a remote glossary, copy paste the given URL in the URL field.
 If you have already a remote glossary with the same languages, you will need to enter a symbolic name.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test the remote glossary. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:AddGlossary_3.png]]

For setting Tilde Terminology services, you need to select source and target languages and a domain.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test if you have collections. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:addIATE.png]]

To set an IATE glossary, just select the source and target languages. Only languages from the European community are supported.
Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button and if the glossary exists, click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:addIATE2.png]]

By default not all IATE terminology is showed, but you can enable it by checking '''''Show all common terminology'''''.

==== Appending(Update) terms on an existing glossary in Wordfast Anywhere from a local glossary ====
You can upload and append(update)one of your existing glossaries with terms from a local glossary by clicking on the '''''merge''''' button.

[[File:MergeGlo.png]]

 The process is slightly the same than uploading but you should first select the existing glossary in the list.
 You have the choice, in case there are identical entries (source and target), to add always or to not add duplicated. Select '''Add always''' or '''Do not add duplicate''' in the list box.
 Finally click on the '''''Merge''''' button.

==== Selecting one or more glossaries for translation ====
Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''TMs and Glossaries''' button on '''File''' menu to open the dialog and select an existing TM.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Caution''': If your glossary is selected in the glossary list, it does not mean selected for translation.
To select a glossary for translation, you have to tick it in the '''active''' column and click after on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' dialog box.

[[File:notice.png]] A document can have as active '''several read-only''' glossaries, but '''only one writeable'''. You might need to uncheck the active checkbox from the current writeable glossary in order to set a new one.

==== Using a glossary ====

[[File:Use glossary.png]]

* Whenever WFA recognises a term from the glossary in the source segment it highlights it against a blue background

* The terms highlighted in blue are considered as placeables. They can thus be manipulated with the [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] and [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] icons or the Ctrl+Alt+Right and Ctrl+Alt+Left shortcuts and by clicking on them with the mouse or by typing their initial letter + Tab. The difference is that, when you use the [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]] icon or the Ctrl+Alt+Down shortcut, it is the corresponding translation that is copied to the target segment. The most easy way to copy a target is probably to use the Auto-suggest feature, enabled by default. Target terms are proposed by typing the first letter of the target term of the 3 first letters of the source term. [[File:Auto-suggest target term.png]] [[File:Auto-suggest target term 2.png]].

* You can see in advance what the translation of the highlighted items is by activating the glossary panel (keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+H or by selecting it from the '''''View''''' tab => '''''Show/Hide Glossary''''' [[File:panelGlo.png]] button )

* If you want to know more about a term, i.e. the information that you or someone else has entered in the comment or F1, F2 and F3 fields, place your mouse over the source term and this information will be displayed. See above the bubble of the last term on the glossary panel (translation).

==== Adding terms to the glossary ====

[[File:Add_term.png]]

It is quite likely that you will want to incorporate terms you come across in the source text into the glossary together with their translations that arise as part of your research process. This way, your linguist’s memory will be reinforced and you are less likely to have to research the same word or phrase again in the future. WFA allows you to do this dynamically, at any time and without exiting your translation process.

First, select the term in the source text. If it consists of one word, you can simply click on it or use the Tab key to move forwards (or Shift+Tab to move backwards) through the text until you reach its position.

The word you have selected will be highlighted against a red border.

Then click on the target term in the target segment.

The selected target term will have a blue background.

[[File:Select terms.png]]

Next, invoke the Glossary Dialog Box by typing Ctrl+Alt+T, or clicking the '''''Add Term''''' [[File:TermEdit.png]] button.

If a single word, the terms you highlighted in the source and target segments should automatically appear in the Source and Target fields.
If the terms consists of more than one word, it may be necessary to paste the text into the fields from your computer’s clipboard or type the information manually.

You can also add a comment – something that may prove useful in the future, e.g. if you want to remember the situation in which this translation was used. The F1, F2 and F3 fields may be used to store word role, context, grammatical form or any other relevant text-based information.

Then click Save to confirm.

==== Fuzzy terminology recognition ====
Each time you open a segment, Wordfast Anywhere checks for the presence in the glossary of all words and terms contained in the source segment. This operation is called terminology recognition. The recognised terms are highlighted in blue in the source segment, as discussed above.

In establishing a correspondence between the terms of the source segment and the terms found in the glossary, WFA will both recognise an exact match and attempt to recognise fuzzy matches.

WFA employs a stemming algorithm for some languages (e.g. German) in order to recognise different forms of the same word that may correspond to those listed in the glossary.

For example, WFA can recognised the infinitive verb ‘besuchen’ as being related to the adjective (or past participle) ‘besucht’ due to the fact that the two words share a common stem.

Fuzzy matching can also be established by using an asterisk in combination with the term. This method overrides the stemming algorithm, allowing you to find all terms that begin with, end with or contain a particular text string.

=== Concordance search ===
Segments stored in the TM are retrieved only if they have a minimum level of correspondence with the source segment (by default 75%). However, even if the level of correspondence is not sufficient to produce a fuzzy match, the TM may still contain terms that you have previously translated and wish to use in your current translation. To search in the memory you have two options:

1) Click on the '''''Concordance''''' button [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]] or use the '''Ctrl+Alt+C''' shortcut. The following window appears:

[[File:concordance.png]]

Enter the word or text string you want to research in the Search field. WFA will search for all words that are the same or begin with the same sequence of letters as the string entered.

You can also select the word or text string with the mouse and then click on the '''''Concordance''''' button [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]] or '''Ctrl+Alt+C''' shortcut. The result will be displayed immediately.

You can edit or delete a term in the concordance search window by clicking on the edit or delete links.

You can add to your search possibilities by choosing the Advanced option:
* Two words or text strings (search terms) separated by a space: one or the other must exist in the TU
* Two terms separated by the + sign: both terms must exist
* A term ending with an asterisk: a search is performed for all text strings containing the search term.

When you use this option, a help line is displayed to remind you how this command works.

=== Searching in a glossary===
You can also search in the glossary. To do this, click the '''''Glossary Search''''' button [[File:GlossarySearch.png]] or use the '''Ctrl+Alt+G''' shortcut:

[[File: Glossary search.png]]

Type the source language word you wish to search for in the Search field and click OK. The list of glossary entries that contain the search term will be displayed.
You can edit or delete a term in the glossary search window by clicking on the edit or delete icons.

By employing an asterisk in the search term, you can expand your search to find all glossary entries that include the text string that the search term is made up of.

== TM & Glossary Advanced features ==

=== TM operations ===
==== View/Edit a TM ====
Select the TM in the list then click on the '''''Edit''''' button.

[[File:ViewEditTm.png]]

The dialog box displays the TM information. Depending on the TM type, you can edit some properties.
* Standard WFA TM : you have the possibility to define attributes of your TM, which will allow you to subsequently identify its segments. Click on the '''Attributes''' tab.
[[File:EditTmAttributes.png]]

There are five attributes in a Wordfast TM: the first is fixed and immutable, consisting of the name of the user. The other four can be defined by each user at will, but it is recommended to use attribute 1 to describe the subject of the text to be translated and attribute 2 for the client, to maintain compatibility with Wordfast Classic and Wordfast Pro users. Attributes consist of codes, usually 3 letters, followed by a brief description. In the fields referred to as TM attribute 1 to 4, enter the name of the attribute (subject, client, etc.). In the field on their right, select one of the attributes that appear on the drop-down list or, if necessary, click '''add''' to add an attribute, '''upd''' to update it or '''del''' to delete it. Whatever option is chosen, a dialog will appear asking for the code of the attribute (ID) and a brief description (Name, ignored for the Del option).
[[file:EditTmAttributes_add.png]] [[file:EditTmAttributes_update.png]] [[file:EditTmAttributes_delete.png]]

Dynamic codes : Predefined attributes can be added by entering a code between accolades as explain in the help.
[[File:EditTmAttributes_help.png]]

* Remote private Wordfast server

[[File:EditRemoteTm.png]] You can edit the workgroup ID and/or the symbolic name.

==== Download a TM ====
This is available only for standard WFA TM.

[[File:DownloadTm.png]]

From the Downloaded file format drop-down list you can select either the Wordfast TM TXT format, the Standard TMX format, the MS Excel XLS format or the Bilingual document TXLF format.
 Click on the '''Download''' button.

===== Filters when downloading a TM =====
Select ''"Filtering (advanced options)"'' on the second drop-down list and click on the '''Download''' button.

[[File:Tm_download2.JPG]]

This will analyse the TM and let you apply some filters to select what you want to download from the TM.

[[File:Tm_download_filter.JPG]]

[[File:Tm_download_filter2.JPG]]

Once filters are selected click on the '''Download''' button to finish the download.

==== Removing a TM ====
After clicking on the top '''Remove''' button on the TM side, this red warning is displayed to confirm the deletion.
 For TMs that are not Wordfast Anywhere standard TMs only the link to the external TM is cut.

[[File:DeleteTm.png]]

==== Quick TM Share ====
By clicking on the small '''share''' button on top of the TM side, you can share quickly a TM to somebody else having an account in Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:CreateTMShare.png]]

Click on the '''''Add guest''''' button and enter his email address (which should be his account login), then click '''Add'''.

[[File:CreateTMShare2.png]]

You can change the privilege of your guest on your TM. Finally to save the share, click on the '''''Save''''' button.

==== TMs Tools ====
===== Reversing a TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmReverse.png]]

Select a TM to reverse and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a TM already exists with the same name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Assembling several TMs in one TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmAssembled.png]]

Select one or more TMs to assemble in one TM and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a TM already exists with the same name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 if '''keep old assigned name''' is unchecked this information will be lost.
 if '''keep variants''' is checked, the TU will not be changed, otherwise, it take the given language pair.
 if '''keep user ID''' is checked, the TU will not be changed, otherwise, it will take your user ID.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Edit a TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmEdit.png]]

Select a TM to edit and click on the '''Run''' button.
 The TM will be opened as a temporary associated document in the document panel.

[[File:ToolsTmEdit1.png]]

Here you can for example update target segments, edit source segments and delete TU. Those changes will be stored straight on your TM.
 Bear in mind that this is a TM although it looks like a document.

After the TM edition, the temporary document must be deleted because it is a static copy of the TM.
 The tool can only edit and delete existing TUs and the TM size is limited to 100000 TUs.

=== Glossary operations ===
==== View/Edit a glossary ====
Select the glossary in the list then click on the '''''View/Edit''''' button.

[[File:ViewEditGlo.png]]

The dialog box displays the glossary information. Depending on the glossary type, you can edit some properties.

[[File:EditRemoteGlo.png]]

[[File:EditTildeGlo.png]]

==== Download a glossary ====
This is available only for standard WFA glossary.

[[File:DownloadGlo.png]]

Click on the '''Download''' button.

==== Removing a glossary ====
After clicking on the top '''Remove''' button on the glossary side, this red warning is displayed to confirm the deletion.
 For glossaries that are not standard only the link to the external glossary is cut.

[[File:DeleteGlo.png]]

==== Quick Glossary Share ====
By clicking on the small '''share''' button on top of the glossary side, you can share quickly a glossary to somebody else having an account in Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:CreateGloShare.png]]

Click on the '''''Add guest''''' button and enter his email address (which should be his account login), then click '''Add'''.

[[File:CreateGloShare2.png]]

You can change the privilege of your guest on your glossary. Finally to save the share, click on the '''''Save''''' button.

==== Glossaries tools ====
===== Reversing a glossary=====
[[File:ToolsGloReverse.png]]

Select a glossary to reverse and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a glossary already exists with the reversed glossary name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Assembling several glossaries in one glossary =====
[[File:ToolsGloAssembled.png]]

Select two or more glossaries to assemble and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a glossary already exists with the assembled glossary name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 if '''keep old assigned name''' is unchecked this information will be lost.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

=== TMs and glossaries shares ===

You can allow other users to share your TM as well as your glossary and you can see the TMs and the glossaries shared to you by others.
To manage all kind of share, click on the bottom '''''Share''''' button of the TMs and glossaries dialog. At that time you will receive the following:

[[File:Tmglo_share_1.png]]

* If you have already enabled the sharing of your TMs and your glossaries with other users, they will be displayed in the '''My shares to other users''' table. You can revoke sharing with any of these users. To do this, select the user in question and click '''Revoke'''. To add or update an existing share click on the '''Add''' or '''Edit''' buttons and see the chapter '''Add and edit shares to other users''' below.
* You can visualize all the TMs and glossaries that have been shared to you in the '''My shares from other users''' table. You can end any share by selecting it and clicking on the '''Remove''' button.
* You can also share your TMs and glossaries to applications like Wordfast Classic and Wordfast Pro by generating keys. they are displayed in the '''My shares to applications''' table. See below the chapter '''Sharing to applications'''.

==== Add and edit shares to other users ====

[[File:Tmglo_share_2.png]]

[[File:Tmglo_share_edit.png]]

[[File:Tmglo_share_3.png]]

==== Sharing to applications ====
Wordfast Anywhere will generate up to 5 keys to share one or more TMs and, optionally, glossaries.
The key is needed for the external application to connect to that specific share.

[[File:Tmglo_share_app_1.png]]

If you want to add the TMs and glossaries currently used, click on the '''Add active TMs and glossaries''', otherwise click on the '''Add''' button to choose a TM and the '''Add''' button to choose a glossary.
 Choose the right privilege and the number of keys needed, then click on the the '''Save''' button.
 The keys will be generated and listed in the '''My shares to application''' table. See below.

[[File:Tmglo_share_app_2.png]]

For instance this can be used on Wordfast Pro 3.4.9, where there is a tab for Wordfast Anywhere TM and glossaries.

[[File:Wpftab.png]]

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QVOMOYfR2ws&feature=em-subs_digest this video] about how to do it.

 Although the API key is for a combined TM and glossary, on Wordfast Pro 3.4.9 you need to add it twice: one for TM and one for glossary

[[Wordfast Pro]] users can check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=S7QCHNpRtKo&feature=em-subs_digest this video].

= Translation =
== Preparation of the translation environment ==
Before beginning the translation of a document using a CAT tool, you must first have an active Translation Memory.

'''Note''': an initial TM was automatically set up when you created your account.

The TM consists of a database, which will record each source language segment (i.e. sentence, phrase) that you translate, together with the corresponding target language segment. As it grows, this increasingly allows you to obtain translations of phrases made previously that are the same or similar to the one you are currently translating.

For more information check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Translation_Memory|Translation Memory basics]]'''.

== Translating ==
To start the translation, you must first open the initial segment.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:StartNext.png]] '''''Start/Next''''' button or use the ''Alt + Down'' shortcut . When you do this, the document area is transformed: the segment is displayed in light blue block (source), a grey block (target) is placed just below it and the rest of your document is shown on the rest of the page. The cursor is located in the grey block.

Translate the segment in the grey block

[[File:StartTrans.png|1200px]]

After translating this segment, you can continue with your translation. To move to the next segment, click on the [[File:StartNext.png]] '''''Start/Next''''' or use the ''Alt+Down'' shortcut. Remember this shortcut, as you will use it for each segment you translate. You can also move to previous segment by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Previous.png]] '''''Previous''''' or use the ''Alt + Up'' shortcut.

[[File:notice.png]] '''''When translating, the segments are saved automatically in the translation memory and on the database system as soon as you go to the next segment.'''''

Now translate the segment as before.

Now that you get the idea, you can continue to translate. Remember: to move from one segment to the next, use ''Alt+Down''. To return to the previous segment (to correct something that you subsequently realised was mistaken), use ''Alt+Up''.

Following are some '''other considerations''' regarding the translation of segments.

'''Note''': Most browser / OS combinations, including Firefox, Safari and Chrome, have their own spell checker – in some cases it may be necessary for you to activate it. You can also use '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Spellcheck|Spellcheck]]'''

There is color code for the target block:
* Grey is the no match from the TM (score=0)
* Green is the full match from the TM (score=100)
* Yellow is a fuzzy match from the TM (score between 50 to 99)
* Orange is a MT proposition
* Purple is the color when the segment has been modified by the editor

Score information can be found in different places depending on the view.
For '''Classic view''' it can be found on ''<}score{>'' tag between source and target segment.

[[File:ScoreC.png|1200px]]

For '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views''' there is a column for the score.

[[File:ScoreH.png|1200px]]

[[File:ScoreV.png|1200px]]

=== Tags ===

Before translating this new segment, pay attention to the tag <1>, which appears here at the end. WFA is not a word processor and thus does not concern itself with a specific representation of the document's formatting. You'll see no changes in size or typeface, no bold or italic characters. Instead, this information is encoded and represented by what we call "tags", e.g. <1>. By slowly passing your mouse over this tag you will see what it represents. This tag is not to be translated, but it should be placed on the appropriate position in the target segment. If you want to recopy a tag from the source segment please type < to trigger the tags proposal.

[[File:tagProposal.png]]

You can also copy it by using the comands on '''Translation''' tab: [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] '''Next Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Right'') and [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] '''Previous Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Left'') to navigate the source segment to the desired tag. A red frame indicates the selected item. Then position the cursor in the target segment and click on [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]] '''Copy Pl.'''(''Ctrl+Alt+Down'').

Differences on the formatting tags (<1>, <2>) between source and target segment can make the file filter aligner have difficulties to build up the translated document.

Check there is no ''segments with tag difference'' using one of this options:
# Click on [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button on '''File''' tab to get a report. Check if there are any ''segments with tag difference''. Use '''''Show Outline''''' [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button on '''View''' tab to go straight to one segment.
# Click on [[File:FindReplace.png]] '''''Find & Replace''''' button on '''Edit''' tab. Go to ''Miscellaneous'' tab and run a ''Tag difference'' search. Segments with tag differences will be listed.

On the listed segments you must pay attention to:
# There is no target tag missing that exists on source.
# The target tag order is different from source order. For example [<1>text text<2>] on source but [<2>text text<1>] on target.
# The target tag content is not identical with the source tag. You can see the content of the tag when the mouse is over it.

[[File:Warning.png]] We '''do not recommend to use copy/paste or drag and drop''' to copy the tags as it can copy more than the eye can see and be problematic. It is better to use the the auto-suggest feature with tags (whenever you want to add a tag just type < and the list of tags from source will be proposed for selection) or the [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]] '''Copy Placeable''' on '''Translation''' tab.

== Main commands ==

=== Provisional segment ===
You may be unsure whether your translation of a segment is correct. To avoid having to interrupt your translation process, you can mark the segment as provisional.

It will be identified by a yellow square at the beginning of the line for '''Classic view''' or at the end of the row for '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views'''.

To mark a segment as provisional, use the F10 key or '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mark.png]] '''''Provisional'''''.

When you have resolved any doubts, simply return to the marked segment and make your corrections. Use ''Alt+Down'' ( [[File:StartNext.png]] ) or ''Alt-Up'' ( [[File:Previous.png]] ) to validate the segment and erase the yellow square.

=== Auto propagate ===
Use this command to translate a segment and automatically propagate the current segment changes through all the document to other segments having the same source.

Find it in '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Autopropagate.png]] '''''Auto Propagate'''''.

=== Note ===
You can also write a note to be attached to the segment for the duration of the translation (in a similar manner to a Post-ItTM). You can use this to remind yourself of something important about this segment or to pass information on to people who will have access to your translation, such as reviewers.

To write a note, click on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Edit_Note16.png]] '''''Edit Note'''''.

The following text box will be displayed:

[[File:Editnote.png|1200px]]

Write your note in the text box and click Save. You can cancel the operation by clicking Cancel. In the case of an existing note, you can edit and validate it by clicking Save, or delete it by clicking Remove.

A green square will be placed at the beginning of the segment to indicate that a note is attached. By passing the mouse pointer over this square, you will see a rectangle containing the text of the note.

It will be identified by a grey square with an "i" in it at the beginning of the line for '''Classic view''' or at the end of the row for '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views'''.

[[File:Editnote2.png|1200px]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Notes can be downloaded by going to '''''File''''' tab => [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' and choosing the '''''Notes Report'''''

=== Copying the original segment ===
Sometimes a segment contains very little to translate: for example, when it consists almost entirely of proper names or is made up of a website address. In this case, it may be preferable to copy the entire source segment to the target segment and make any adjustments there.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CopySource.png]] '''''Copy Source'''''. or use the shortcut ''Alt-Ins'.

=== Erasing the target segment ===
Sometimes it is necessary to erase what you have just written in the target segment.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Cleanup_Project16.png]] '''''Del Target'''''. or use the shortcut ''Ctrl+Alt+X''.

This button has a toggle behaviour through: Empty target, Remove tags and Restore.

=== Insertion of a special character like the non-breaking space ===
When you write in French, some characters must be accompanied by a non-breaking space: e.g. before the colon, semicolon, exclamation mark, question mark, exclamation mark, before and after quotes, thousands separators, and so on. In WFA, a non-breaking space is represented by the symbol < >.

However, such spaces cannot be automatically handled in an Internet browser as they are when using a text editor such as Word. Therefore it will be necessary to add them manually. By default, a non-breaking space is inserted at the cursor location by clicking on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Insert_c1.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 1'''''.

Two other special characters can be inserted like the curly quotes. Use '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Insert_c2.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 2''''' and [[File:Insert_c3.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 3'''''.

You can configure these 3 special characters in WFA setup (see '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Pandora.27s_box_tab|Pandora’s box]]''').

=== Expanding a segment ===
As we have seen, WFA considers that the segment is terminated when it encounters a segment termination marker. However, in some cases this segmentation is in error. For example, when WFA’s segmentation engine meets the following sentence:
''On pense aux conseils de Prof. Jacques Lacan:''
it can interpret the segment as ending with ''Prof.'' because a full stop is used as an end of segment marker. In this case we can command WFA to expand the segment, that is to say, to append the subsequent segment to it.

[[File:exspand1.png]]

This is done with the ''Alt+Pg'' dn shortcut or '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Expand_Segment16.png]] '''''Expand'''''.

[[File:exspand2.png]]

It is important to expand segments when the segmentation has not been performed correctly because this will increase the chances of it corresponding with a translation memory segment. For example, the segment ''On pense aux conseils de Prof.'' will have little chance of having a similarity of over 75% with another. By contrast, if the sentence ''On pense aux conseils de Prof. Jacques Lacan:'' is in the TM, when WFA encounters the source sentence ''On pense aux conseils de Professeur Jacques Lacan'', it will offer the existing translation, as it has 90% similarity (it is only the word Professor that is not the same).

A segment cannot be expanded if it is terminated by an end of paragraph or end of cell marker, a page break or a tab.

You should not have to expand all segments containing abbreviations that end with a full stop. A comma-separated, modifiable list of common language-specific abbreviations is included in WFA . This can be accessed and modified via the segmentation tab in the configuration dialog box [case-sensitive, optional letters are enclosed in square brackets].

[[File:Abbrev.png]]

=== Shrinking a segment ===
If, on the other hand, two segments are erroneously displayed together due to an absence of an end of segment marker, you can also shrink the segment with the shortcut ''Alt-Pg'' up or ''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:ShrinkSeg.png]] '''''Shrink'''''.

=== Placeables ===

A placeable is any term or expression contained in the source segment that is defined as such. WFA provides shortcuts for inserting them into the target segment, thus both saving time and reducing the potential for typing errors.

WFA predefines as placeables:
*Numbers
*Tags
*Words beginning with, or otherwise containing, capital (upper case) letters
*Words or phrases appearing in the source text that have matching items stored in the '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Glossary|Glossary]]'''.

We have already seen how to copy tags. Given that a tag is a placeable, the procedure is the same: to copy any placeable, simply select it with the comands on '''Translation''' tab: [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] '''Next Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Right'') and [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] '''Previous Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Left'').

You also have the possibility of clicking on any term in the source text, thus placing it under focus and temporarily transforming it into a placeable. A red frame indicates the item selected.

Next, position the cursor in the target segment at the point where the placeable should be positioned or double-click (click and drag) to select the word (phrase) to be replaced and click on the on [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]] '''Copy Pl.'''(''Ctrl+Alt+Down''). The placeable is copied to the relevant position in the target segment.

In this sentence, the placeable elements, selected by ''Ctrl+Alt+Right'' or [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]], are:

[[File:place1.png]]
(starts with a capital letter)

[[File:place2.png]]
(number)

[[File:place3.png]]
(tag)

And, if necessary, any term may be designated as a placeable simply by clicking on it:

[[File:place4.png]]

As you translate the text, you only want to place those elements that should not be translated:

[[File:place5.png]]

At this point, you want to write ‘Chenjerai.’. However it may be faster and more efficient (as well as reducing the possibility of error) to select the item using ''Ctrl+Alt+Right'' or [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] (or even by simply clicking on it) and place it into the segment target with ''Ctrl+Alt+Down'' or [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]].

[[File:place6.png]]

The following proper noun ‘Hove’ is also a placeable, so you can repeat the procedure. Simply use the '''Tab key''' on your keyboard to advance from one placeable to the next (or '''Shift+Tab''' to move in the opposite direction).

[[File:place7.png]]

You can also use the ''Ctrl+Alt+Up'' shortcut or [[File:Dropdown.png]] '''Toggle Pl.'' on '''Translation''' tab to transform terms in the source segment into placeables.

For even greater efficiency, if you type a letter that begins a word or term in the source segment and then successively press Tab, all words or terms beginning with that letter are successively copied to the target segment. For example, in the above sentence, typing ''l'' followed by '''Tab''' will copy ''lyrique'' to the target. Each time you press the Tab key, the word or term that has been copied to the target segment will be replaced by the next
word or term appearing in the source segment that begins with the same letter, i.e. ''le'', ''laisse'' and so on.

=== Case changer ===
Use this feature to toggle through: lowercase, uppercase and proper name for a word. This feature can be used in one word (by putting the cursor inside the word), or with more than one word (by selecting several words with the mouse or Shift+Left/Right Arrow).
Beware that some times it gets crazy with the first and last word.

Use it bu clicking on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:CaseChanger.png]] '''''Case Changer'''''.

=== Increase target height ===
You can increase the target height by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Increase_target.png]] '''''Target Height'''''.

=== Web Speech Beta ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY available for Chrome. Currently disabled due to browser security.'''

This is a beta implementation that uses Google Web Speech API to insert your dictation into the target segment.

To use it, first open the segment and then click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mic.png]] '''''Web Speech Beta''''' button to start the dictation. The icon will change to indicate recording is on. To stop dictation click again on the button.

You can add a shortcut to this command.

You can jump to the next segment as always and keep on dictating. Or you can stop dictation, jump to the next segment and start dictation again.

A provisional transcription will be shown as an auto-suggest text and the final transcription will be inserted on the target segment. The provisional transcription might not be accurate while final transcription should be quite accurate and may be different from provisional transcription.

Please take into account that this is a beta implementation and that voice transcription is done online so there can be delays when dictating. We encourage you to use it and give us some feedback.

[[File:Warning.png]] It can be that Chrome keeps asking you to allow the use of the microphone every time. You need to check the Chrome settings: "Privacy>Content Settings>Microphone>Manage exceptions". There you should have an exception for https:freetm.com.

If you are connected to the site via HTTS the grant is permanent, if you use HTTP, you are asked each time.

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rR88md-xyik&feature=em-uploademail this video] about how to use this tool.

Check this links for more information:

[https://support.google.com/chrome/answer/3123708?p=settings_manage_exceptions&rd=1 Chrome Exceptions]

[https://support.google.com/chrome/answer/6148059?hl=en Chrome website permissions]

=== Edit Source ===
Using '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:EditSource16.png]] '''''Edit Source''''' will help you to correct the source text in order to have valid TU in memory.

This will not change the source file and obviously will not automatically change the target segment.

=== Ending the translation ===
If for any reason you want to stop translating, you have three choices:
* Close the translation and validate the current segment in the TM ('''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close & Commit''''' or ''Alt+End'')
* Close the translation without validating it ('''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:Close.png]] '''''Close''''' or ''Shift+Alt+End'')
* Clear the content of the target segment, together with any attached note, by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:Close_restore.png]] '''''Close & Delete''''' .

== After Translation ==

When your translation is finished, you use one of our '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Review|Review]]''' tools before '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Download|Download]]''' it.

= Tools =
=== Downloading TXML file ===
You can download your document in TXML format, the standard working file format used by WFA. This permits you, for example, to send the file to a colleague for review using Wordfast Anywhere or Pro. Once reviewed and corrected, you can upload it again.

To download your working file go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual TXML'''''.

[[File:DownloadTypesList.png]]

If your translation is incomplete or contains provisional segments or notes, you will receive this warning:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

At this point you have the choice to accept (OK) or cancel (Cancel) to return to your translation. If you accept, you will need to consider the following dialog:

[[File:DownloadOptions2a.png]]

You can optionally instruct WFA to copy the source segment to the target segment if it is blank (check Copy source to target if target is empty) and/or to ignore language variations, e.g. to not make a distinction between British and American English (check No language variants).

Choose the way to download the file and click '''''OK''''' to donwload the file.

=== Merging TXML files ===
If you already have a file in TXML format you can upload it to your workspace. To do this go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:Mergetms16.png]] '''Merge Txml''' button. At this point you must complete the following dialog box:

[[File:Mergetxml1.PNG]]

By checking Merge an existing document, all documents that exist in your workspace will be listed according to language pair, and you will have to choose which will be merged with the file you intend to upload.

You can also set WFA to update the TM corresponding to the file you upload (check Update or create a TM with a bilingual document). Check Merge an existing TM and choose which TM to update from the list displayed. You will also need to determine whether, in the case of identical source segments, new TUs should be added to existing ones (Keep existing TUs) or whether they should replace them (Overwrite existing TUs). If, on the other hand, you prefer to create a new TM, click on Create a new TM. At this point, you will have the opportunity to give this new TM a name, if you have more than one TM for the same language pair. Then click Upload to upload the file or Close to exit without doing anything.

Note that operations performed on the document are independent from memory-related operations, allowing you to update only the document, or only the memory, or both.
If you have clicked Upload, you will receive the following message:

[[File:Mergetxml2.png]]

Click Browse to navigate through your directories and select your file, then click Submit to perform the upload or Cancel to cancel the operation. After the merge operation has been successfully performed, a report will appear showing how many segments were merged.

[[File:Mergetxml3.png]]

=== Other downloads ===
You can also download the working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments, usable by Wordfast Classic (and Trados Workbench).

[[File:Bilingualwordfastclassic.png]]

This will allow your document to be proofread by a Wordfast Classic user. Caution, this download is only available for files formatted as .doc and .rtf. Unlike the TXML file, this format cannot be imported into WFA.

To download your working file in bilingual MS-Word format, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the '''''Download''''' button and choose '''Bilingual Doc original''' option. This option is only available if your source file is a MS Word file.

[[File:DownloadTypesList.png]]

If your translation is incomplete or contains provisional segments or notes, you will receive this warning:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

At this point you have the choice to accept (OK) or cancel (Cancel) to return to your translation. If you accept, you will need to respond to the following message:

[[File:Bilingualwordfastclassic2.png]]

Following the same steps you can download this other files:

* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments without placeholders Bilingual. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC no placeholders''''' option.
* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments with placeholders Bilingual. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC with placeholders''''' option.
* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments with tag-content as placeholder. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC tag content''''' option.
* Your translated file, in plain text format, without any formatting. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Unformatted Text''''' option.

=== Find & Replace ===
It is often necessary to locate a word or text string in a file that has been translated. For this we use the Doc Find and Replace function. Go to '''''Edit''''' tab and click on the [[File:FindReplace.png]] '''''Find & Replace''''' button.

As with other functions that require the current segment to be closed, you will receive a warning that the current segment will be closed without being saved. If you agree, click OK, otherwise click Cancel to cancel the transaction and save your work.

[[File:Warning.png]] By default search is only done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:SR1.png]]

'''''Find & Replace''''' dialog has 4 tabs performing different actions.

* Use '''Find''' tab to locate a word or text in your document.
* Use '''Find/Replace''' tab to locate and replace a word or text in your document.
* Use '''Go to Segment''' tab to search for single segments (1,5,68,499) or a range of segments (25-66).
* Use '''Miscellaneous''' tab to perform different types of searches such as look for '''provisional''' or '''untranslated''' segments, or segments with '''notes''' or '''tag differences'''.

[[File:Notice.png]] You can use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:Warning.png]] Not all the options are always available.
==== Find ====
Use '''Find''' tab.
Type the word or text you want to find and click '''Find''' button to start a search. When search is done hits are highlighted and the number of hits is shown on the dialog.

[[File:SR6.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] By default search is only done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:SR7.png]]

==== Replace ====
Use '''Find/Replace''' tab. Type the word/text you want to find and the word/text you want it replaced for and click '''Find''' button to start a search. When search is done hits are highlighted and the number of hits is shown on the dialog.

[[File:SR8.png]]

It may happen that '''Replace''', '''Replace/Find''' and '''Replace All''' buttons are not available. This happens because the first search does not move you to the first hit, you have to click again '''Find''' to move to the next hit and then replace buttons will be available. Use them to replace, replace and move to next hit or replace all hits.

Replace can only be done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Go to Segment ====
Use '''Go to Segment''' tab. Use it to find specific segments. This can be an alternative to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''.
You can type single segments separated by commas (1,5,68,499) or a range of segments (25-66).

[[File:SR4.png]]

Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Miscellaneous ====
Use '''Miscellaneous''' tab. This 6 types of search do not require to type a word/text but will help you locate segments with some particularities. This can be an alternative to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''.

[[File:SR5a.png]]

You can search for:

* '''Provisional''' segments.
* '''Untranslated''' segments.
* Segments with '''Tag difference'''.
* Segments with '''Notes'''.
* Segments with '''Double spaces'''.
* Segments with '''Revisions'''.

Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Advanced search options ====

Using the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button you can access some advanced search options:

[[File:SR2.png]]

* Search for '''Whole Word'''.
* Do a '''Case sensitive''' search.
* Search for words that start/end by the characters using * as a joker. For example searching for *able will find: movable, payable, breakable,...etc. And searching for hand* will find: handbag, handmade, handbook,...etc
* Search on Source, Target or both. This can only be used in '''Find''' tab.
* Mark each found target as provisional.
* Create a note for each replaced segment.
* Update the TM for each replaced segment.
* Do a wrap search
* Change search direction: Backward or Forward.

=== Analyze ===
Before providing a translation quotation, you may wish to analyze the source text to determine the extent of the work required. WFA provides an analytical tool for this purpose. To do this, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the '''''Analyze''''' button and choose '''Analyze'''. If your file is big and you do not want to wait, choose '''Analyze in Background'''.

A progress message is displayed on the status bar. Then the analysis results will be displayed:

[[File:Analysis.png]]

According to the number of repetitions (identical segments that appear more than once in the document) or the percentage of segments that correspond either completely (100%) or partially (<100%) to matches in the TM, you will be able to precisely estimate the volume of work actually requiring to be translated. After having examined the analysis report, click Close.

=== Statistics ===
WFA allows you to see what progress you have made with your translation at any time. To do this, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button.

A statistical report on your translation will be displayed:

[[File:Statistics.png]]

You will see the number of source and target segments (with the percentage already translated in brackets); the number of source and current target words; the number of source and target tags and if there is any segmental discrepancy in terms of differences between the number and content of the source and target tags (segments with tag difference); the number of segments not stored in the TM (segments flagged not saved in TM); the number of provisional segments (provisional segments) and notes (segments with notes). The report also displays which segments remain to be translated. After viewing the statistics, click Close.

Another important indicator is always present on the status bar: it tells you on which segment you currently are in relation to the total number of segments in the document. In this example, the document has 149 segments in total and you are currently on the 68:

[[File:Foot1.png]]

=== Alignment ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This tool is not managed by WFA in case there is any problem use the '''Help''' in the tool, the third tab, to report your problem. You can also sent an email to '''converterhelp@wordfast.com'''

When you begin to translate with a CAT tool you may not be able to derive the maximum benefit from it if you do not yet have a translation memory. Or, a client may have source and target documents from a previous translation but cannot supply you with a TM. In this case, you can quickly derive a TM by performing an "alignment" on the documents you have already translated prior to using WFA for your translation work by using the alignment tool.

To do this, go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab and click on the [[File:WF Update16.png]] '''''AutoAligner''''' button.

A new page will open, displaying the following dialog:

[[File:Align.png]]

Follow the instructions to upload the files and align them to get the TM from the alignment.

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HVXTQ5Wb_Eg&feature=em-uploademail this video] about how to use this tool.

You can then upload this TM to be used in WFA.

[[File:Warning.png]] This tool is not managed by WFA in case there is any problem use the '''Help''' in the tool, the third tab, to report your problem. You can also sent an email to '''converterhelp@wordfast.com'''

=== Preview ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Preview|Preview]]'''

=== Transcheck ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Transcheck|Transcheck]]'''

=== Spellcheck ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Spellcheck|Spellcheck]]'''

=== Pretranslation ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.

Go to [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]] '''''Pre-translation''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to open the dialog:

[[File:Pretrans1.png]]

Configure how you want the pre-translation to run:
* Activate '''Fuzzy matches'''
* Set what to do when there is no match from the TM. For setting a MT check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Machine_translation|this]]'''
* Leverage segment scores. Make sure the owner of the document (translation agency or company) has agreed to leverage empty segments.

If your file is big and has many segments run pre-translation in background by clicking on '''Pre Translate in background''' so you can keep working in other things. Otherwise use '''Pre-translate''' button run pre-translation.
Ad the end of the process you'll get a report with the result.

[[File:Pretrans2.png]]

=== Offline Review Tool ===
Use Offline review tool to review a file outside Wordfast Anywhere using a bilingual file and then update the changes.

To get the bilingual file go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Offline review DOC'''''.

[[File:Ofrt11a.png]]

This will download a bilingual file like this.

[[File:ofrt2.png]]

[[File:Notice.png]] Read the disclaimer on the download window and the instructions at the top of the file.

[[File:Warning.png]] Remember to add the tags on the target column as you would do on any translation. '''''Missing tags''''' can cause problems when merging back the file into WFA.

After editing '''only''' the target segments an saving the file you can import it to be merged with the file in Wordfast Anywhere. To do this go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:mergetms16_menu.png]] '''''Merge Offline Review''''' button.

[[File:ofrt3.png]]

A report will be shown with the result of the merge.

[[File:ofrt4.png]]

=== Extract Frequents ===
Use [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]] '''''Extract Frequents''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to create anew file that will contain only the repeated segments of the document.

A first report is created showing the percentage of segments that have an occurrence greater than 2.

[[File:ExtractFrequents1.png]]

Set the '''minumum occurrence''' that you want to extract and click on '''Extract and Open''' to create a new file with the occurrence segments.

=== Go to WFP4 ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.
You can open your document in '''Wordfast Pro 4 Online''' by using [[File:About wordfast16.png]] '''''WFP4''''' button on '''''File''''' tab.

WFP4o will use several settings on WFA along with the TMs and glossaries, so all settings must be done on inside WFA before. Also bear in mind to save your work on WFP4o before switching back to WFA.

[[File:Wf4disclaimer.png]]

Read carefully the disclaimer dialog before clikcing in '''Continue to WFP4o'''.

=== File information ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.

Go to [[File:Modify Project16.png]] '''''File Info''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to open the dialog with information about the file:

[[File:Fileinfo.png]]

=== Split file ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''''This option is only available when the document is closed.'''''

You can split a file in 4 parts by using [[File:Split.png]] '''''Split''''' button on '''''File''''' tab.

[[File:Split1.png]]

For each part a txml file will be created with the corresponding part of the file. The name of the txml files will contain information about which part is. For instance '''_[1of2]''' means the file was splitted into 2 parts and that this file correspond to the first part.

By default files are splited in equally parts, but you can change this and set the boundaries that better suit you.

[[File:Split3.png]]

'''Downloading one of the splited parts will download a TXML file''', but you can choose to download also the entire file in the original format.

[[File:Split2.png]]

Use
[[File:Join.png]] '''''Join''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to put the parts together again. [[File:Warning.png]] '''''This option is only available when the document is closed.'''''

=== Share file ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''This option is only available when the document is closed and is selected from the list.'''

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Share is only possible between Wordfast Anywhere users.'''

You can share your document with '''several Wordfast Anywhere users'''. To do so go to [[File:Share.png]] '''''Share''''' on '''''File''''' tab.

[[File:Share3.png]]

Additional files can be added using '''''Add''''' button on the Document section of the dialogue. If the file belong to a package, all package documents will be added otherwise it will be all documents with the same source and target languages.

To start sharing click on '''''Add''''' button after the Document section to add a new guest. Repeat it to ad more guest users.

[[File:Share_addGuest2.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Guest email must be a valid Wordfast Anywhere account.'''

For each guest two properties can be chosen:
* '''''Share as read-only'''''. This means guest will only access the document in a read-only mode, but no edition will be allowed.
* '''''Keep online (not downloadable)'''''. This means guest will access the file but would not be allowed to download it.

Additionally, you can share a TM and/or glossary with the file.

To do it, use the buttons on the '''''Translation Memories''''' and '''''Glossaries''''' tabs
* '''''Linked to document''''' will add the corresponding TM/glossary associated to the document.
* '''''Add''''' will let you choose which TM/glossary with the same language pair you want to share
* '''''Remove''''' will revoke the share on the selected TM/glossary from the list.

Once guests are added, they are presented on a list on the main dialogue. Any guest will be allowed edit rights unless '''''Share as read-only''''' is check. Owner will always have edit rights.

[[File:Share_mainList2.png]]

Repeat this process to add more guests.

You can use '''''Duplicate''''' button to add a new guest with the same settings than a existing one. Use '''''Revoke''''' button to finish a share with a guest

Check '''''History''''' on the document to force the use of revisions in the document.

As owner and several guests can have edit rights '''a reservation system is used to ensure only one user can edit a segment at a time'''. When a user opens the document the free segments loaded in Document Panel will automatically reserved for him adding a green share icon at the end of the segment. Segments reserved by other users are shown with the same share icon but in red color.
'''The reservation of segments will end when the user closes the document'''.

[[File:Share_reserved.png]]

When a user opens a shared document that is being used by an other user a pop-up message is show to warn about that.

[[File:Share_message.png]]

Also a notification is send to the other working users that a new user has opened the document.

[[File:Share_notification.png]]

Jumping to the next block will release the previous segments and will reserve the new segments being loaded.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''There is no live update of the segments reserved by other users. Which means segments need to be refreshed manually on Document Panel by loading them again, for instance by jumping to a different block and back.'''

To help to know when a user closes the document and releases his segments, a notification is send to the other working users.

[[File:Share_notificationEnd.png]]

'''''To finish a share''''' with a guest owner users need to use '''''Revoke''''', and to remove all the shares use '''''Revoke all'''''. This is a button on the Share dialog ([[File:Share.png]] '''''Share''''' on '''''File''''' tab).

Guest users will not see the share dialogue. They should use [[File:Revoke.png]] '''''Revoke''''' on '''''File''''' tab to finish the share.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Remember Share/Revoke are only available when the document is closed.'''

=== Offline Mode ===
On those situations when there is an internet connection cut or when WFA server is unavailable, WFA will turn on '''Offline Mode'''.

'''Offline Mode''' lets you work offline. It allows you to translate the segments that are currently loaded on the ''Document Panel''.

The translated segments are stored locally and automatically committed to WFA server as soon as the connection is recovered.

If the TM you are using is writeable, TUs will be automatically updated from the document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Be aware that there will be some messages telling you about going in/out of Offline Mode and segments being saved. Some features will not be available during Offline Mode.

[[File:Warning.png]] This feature has nothing to do with Offline Review Tool (OFRT). For information about OFRT, check the index at the top of this Manual.

[[File:Warning.png]] We recommend not to close the browser till synchronization back is done.

= WFA Configuration =
== Features and Shortcuts ==

{|class="wikitable"
|'''Menu tab'''
|'''Feature'''
|'''Shortcut'''
|'''Icon'''
|'''Information'''
|-
|Translation
|Start translation / Next segment
|Alt+Down
|[[File:StartNext.png]]
|Starts a translation session by opening the currently selected segment / Commits the current segment to TM and opens the next segment.
|-
|Translation
|Previous segment
|Alt+Up
|[[File:Previous.png]]
|Commits the current segment to TM and opens the previous segment.
|-
|Translation
|Close & Commit
|Alt+End
|[[File:CloseSave.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment and committing it to the TM.
|-
|Translation
|Close
|Shift+Alt+End
|[[File:Close.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment without committing it to the TM.
|-
|Translation
|Close & Delete
|Alt+Delete
|[[File:Close restore.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment and deleting the target with any note. Do not commit to TM.
|-
|Translation
|Provisional segment
|F10
|[[File:Mark.png]]
|Marks a segment as provisional with a yellow Post-It.
|-
|Translation
|Copy Source
|Alt+Insert
|[[File:CopySource.png]]
|Copies the source segment over the target segment.
|-
|Translation
|Expand
|Alt+PgDn
|[[File:ExpandSeg.png]]
|Expands a segment, if it actually extends beyond the punctuation mark (wrong segmentation). Note that a segment cannot be extended beyond a paragraph mark, page break, tabulator, or table cell.
|-
|Translation
|Shrink
|Alt+PageUp
|[[File:ShrinkSeg.png]]
|Reverses any use of the Expand segment command or reduce the size of a segment.
|-
|Translation
|To Fuzzy
|Shift+Ctrl+PgDn
|[[File:TranslateUntilFuzzy.png]]
|Translates until a non-exact match is found.
|-
|Translation
|Toggle empty
|Ctrl+Alt+X
|[[File:Cleanup Project16.png]]
|Empty the target - remove the tags from the target - restore the original target.
|-
|Translation
|Auto Propagate
|
|[[File:autopropagate.png]]
|Auto propagate segment change through all the document for same source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Toggle Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Up
|[[File:dropdown.png]]
|Transforms all the terms in the source segment into placeables. If repeated, returns to the previous mode.
|-
|Translation
|Next Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Right
|[[File:Next_Placeable16.png]]
|Selects the next placeable element in the source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Copy Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Down
|[[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]]
|Places the selected transposable element from the source segment into the target segment, where the cursor is located (or replaces highlighted text in target segment).
|-
|Translation
|Previous Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Left
|[[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]]
|Selects the previous placeable element in the source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Next word
|Tab
|
|Places the subsequent source word with letter + Tab
|-
|Translation
|Previous word
|Shift+Tab
|
|Places the preceding source word with letter+Shift+Tab.
|-
|Translation
|Target Height
|Ctrl+Alt+T
|[[File:increase_target.png]]
|Increases the height of the target segment for easier viewing.
|-
|Wordfast Anywhere
|Wordfast setup
|Ctrl+Alt+W
|[[File:Setup.png]]
|Opens the Wordfast Anywhere general setup dialog.
|-
|Edit
|Find & Replace
|Ctrl+Alt+R
|[[File:FindReplace.png]]
|Find and replace in the document.
|-
|Edit
|Edit Source
|Ctrl+Alt+K
|[[File:EditSource16.png]]
|Used to make minor corrections to the source segment.
|-
|Edit
|Edit Note
|Ctrl+Alt+J
|[[File:Edit_Note16.png]]
|Allows you to create or edit a note.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 1
|Shift+Ctrl+1
|[[File:insert_c1.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 2
|Shift+Ctrl+2
|[[File:insert_c2.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 3
|Shift+Ctrl+3
|[[File:insert_c3.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Case Changer
|Shift+F3
|[[File:caseChanger.png]]
|Toggle between lowercase, uppercase, and capitalization.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|TMs and glossaries setup
|
|[[File:Preferences16round.png]]
|Opens the TMs and glossaries setup dialog.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Concordance search
|Ctrl+Alt+C
|[[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]]
|Performs a search in the TM and displays all segments containing the search term.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Glossary Search
|Ctrl+Alt+G
|[[File:GlossarySearch.png]]
|Search in the glossary for the word or phrase selected in the source segment.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Add term to glossary
|Ctrl+Alt+T
|[[File:TermEdit.png]]
|Pops up a glossary term entry form.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Copy TU
|Alt+right
|[[File:CopyTU.png]]
|Copy a TU from the TM panel to the target segment. If many, press many times, it will start by copying the second one assuming the first one is already copied. The TU can be a MT proposal.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Delete TU
|Ctrl+Alt+Backspace
|[[File:DeleteTU.png]]
|Delete from TM the current or selected TU visible in the TM panel.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Update TU
|
|[[File:force_tm_addtu.png]]
|Commits to TM the source and target segment as a new TU or update an existing one.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Force TM search
|
|[[File:force_tm.png]]
|Perform a direct search (without cache) in the TM.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Force MT
|
|[[File:force_mt.png]]
|Forces the translation of the segment by the configured MT engines like Google Translate / Microsoft Translator.
|-
|View
|Outline pane
|Ctrl+Alt+D
|[[File:panelOutline.png]]
|Closes or opens the Outline. The outline is a view of all the segments showing which ones are translated but also which ones have notes or are provisional.
|-
|View
|TM pane
|Ctrl+Alt+M
|[[File:panelTm.png]]
|Closes or opens the TM pane.
|-
|View
|Glossary pane
|Ctrl+Alt+H
|[[File:panelGlo.png]]
|Closes or opens the Glossary (Terminology) pane.
|-
|View
|Move next block
|Page Down
|[[File:moveNextScreen.png]]
|Move to the next block of document's content.
|-
|View
|Move previous block
|Page Up
|[[File:movePrevScreen.png]]
|Move to the previous block of document's content.
|-
|View
|First of Block
|Home
|[[File:move_first_seg_screen.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the first segment of the block.
|-
|View
|Last of Block
|End
|[[File:move_last_seg_screen.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the last segment of the page.
|-
|View
|First of Doc
|Ctrl+Home
|[[File:move_first_seg_doc.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the first segment of the document.
|-
|View
|Last of Doc
|Ctrl+End
|[[File:move_last_seg_doc.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the last segment of the document.
|}

== WFA Setup ==
The WFA Setup menu is accessible by the shortcut Ctrl+Alt+W or the [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab.

Six tabs are visible: General, TM rules, Shortcuts, Segmentation, Pandora's box and QA.

=== General tab ===
Several general settings can be don in this tab.

[[File:wfasetup1.png]]

==== Machine translation ====
Click on '''MT''' tab to access the ''Machine Translation'' settings.

[[File:wfasetup2.png]]

WFA gives you the ability to translate each segment by online translation services like Google Translate and Microsoft Translator. The translations proposed are not ever likely to be fully acceptable. However, by making a few small adjustments, you will be able to use them extensively in your translations.

[[File:Warning.png]] When using this service, the source segments that will return a translation are transmitted to Google and Microsoft. It is up to you whether or not to accept these translations; these companies are not made aware of your choice. However, be aware that sending the segments to Google and Microsoft may raise privacy issues between you and your customers.

Each MT engine has a window were to set it's settings. Bear in mind that some MT may require a personal ID or password.
* Use '''Add''' button to add a new MT.
* Use '''Edit''' the settings for the selected MT on the list.
* Use '''Remove''' will delete the selected MT on the list.
* Use '''Test''' to run a test on all the MTs with the active checkbox marked.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''To use a MT engine, it must be added to the list and with the "Active" checkbox marked'''.

On each MT engine window you can set its settings (i.e. the key or url). You can also set a particular values for
* ''Engine timeout'' as in some cases (i.e. small segments) the MT requires more time to get back with a result.
* ''Engine score'' value for each MT.
* ''Details'' for extra information about the MT like the list of available languages.
[[File:Warning.png]] Each MT engine has a different set of available languages.

Finally, there are several general options such as
* When to use the MT (when no TM match, when no TM full match, always)
* Remove tags before sending to MT.
* Use all available providers on ''force MT''.
* Do not copy MT proposition to target.
* Enable MT for review (May slow down the revision process)

===== Custom Machine translation =====

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Note:''' this section is '''DIY (Do It Yourself)'''. Our hotline cannot assist in the customization of an MT engine, because that requires knowledge of the remote provider's specifications. However, public discussion groups may offer help.

If your remote Machine Translation provider is not listed (as a provider tab), you can use '''Custom tab''' to create a custom connector for it. This is only possible if your MT provider's API is using a REST standard, and returns results in a JSON, or similar, format. That is the case with major MT providers currently available with WFC (Google, Microsoft, WorldLingo, deepL, MyMemory, etc.).

In WFA's Machine Translation setup, go to the "Custom MT" tab.

[[File:CustomMT.JPG]]

Note the various elements:
* URL: Tells WFA which is the url of the MT provider with the needed parameters.
** {ss} will be replaced with the source segment to be translated. This parameter must be present.
** {sl} and {tl} will be replaced with your given source and target language codes.
** {key} will be replaced with the given API key
* API Key: Some MT providers need a personal key, this is the place to add it.
* Source language: Source language of the text, it corresponds to the {sl} parameter in the URL.
* Target Language: Target language which will be the text translated to, it corresponds to the {tl} parameter in the URL.
* POST: includes parameters that should be used with the POST method, concatenated like in the URL format. If the parameters needs to be in JSON format, choose the way how to write it (either URL encoded text to convert to JSON either a direct JSON string).
* HEADER: includes parameters that need to be in the header of the request. The format is param:value. Put one parameter per line.
* Json key: Some MT providers return the translated text in a parameter (translation, translatedTex...etc), this tells WFA how to spot the returned translated segment.

Once all the elements are set you can test the connection by using the '''Test''' button. Optionally you can change the text to be tested on the text box next to the button.

Let's assume your preferred MT provider is WorldLingo and we create a custom engine for it. You explore WorldLingo's API documentation. It essentially boils down to a query URL, with parameters. On Custom tab you can use:

* URL: https://www.worldlingo.com/S000.1/api?wl_data={ss}&wl_srclang={sl}&wl_trglang={tl}&wl_password=secret
* API Key: Empty, as no API Key is needed.
* Source language: en.
* Target Language: fr.
* Json key: Empty.

'''Practical example:'''

Opening a browser, you begin by testing the URL. In the following example, the raw URL was customized for an English-to-French language pair, to translate "Hello World". Your real URL will look different, the following is an example based on WorldLingo:

::: ''http://www.worldlingo.com/S000.1/api?wl_data=Hello%20world&wl_srclang=en&wl_trglang=fr&wl_password=secret''

You can try pasting the above URL into a browser's address bar. If things go well, the site will send a reply:

::: ''Bonjour le monde''

Other MT providers may use a more complex JSON reply, in which case you specify the JSON key so that WFA can identify the result. Here the key is "translation" so you would use Json key => translation

::: ''{"responseData":{"translation":"Bonjour le monde","match":1} }''

Your MT provider may require more parameters, such as a secret ID key (aka an API key), or other elements, in which case, you should hard-code those in the URL.

==== Fonts ====
Font Size: this setting only affects the font size on the screen, your document will keep all its original layout unchanged. The available sizes are selected from the drop-down list.

Font Family: this setting only affects the fonts displayed on the screen, your document will keep its entire original layout unchanged. You can specify a specific font or a font family, for example Arial, Helvetica, Sans Serif (sans serif font, default) or Times New Roman, Times, Serif (seriffed font).

==== Target segment selection ====
Positions the mouse pointer at the opening of the segment, with or without selection.

# Cursor at start – no text selected, cursor positioned at the beginning of the segment.
# Cursor at end – no text selected, cursor positioned at the end of the segment. This is the default setting.
# Segment selected – The target segment is entirely selected.

==== Fuzzy Threshold in % ====
Percentage of similarity required for a TU contained in the TM to be suggested as a translation of the source segment. If several TUs meet this criterion, the TU with the highest percentage will be offered. In this case you can select the subsequent TUs with [[File:CopyTU.png]] '''''Copy TU''''' button on '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' tab or using the corresponding shortcut (Alt + Right).

The default percentage (75%) is recommended for most translations, but in some cases it may be appropriate to change it. For example, if you are translating short segments containing only 3 words, a fuzzy threshold of 75% will only offer those TUs which are identical (100%) and those where two words are identical, i.e. 66%, will never be proposed.

==== Record Revisions ====
Check this option if you want to save a record of the changes on translated segments.

==== Enable Auto-Suggest ====
Check this option if you want to get suggestions while you type on a translated segment.

Auto-Suggest can be configured in '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.238_Configure_Auto-Suggest|Pandora's box #7]]''' to add or remove items.

==== Tab behavior ====
Check this option if you want to use click or hover for triggering events on Top Menu bar.

==== Enable auto-hide buttons ====
Check this option to make toop toolbar buttons hide automatically.

==== Enable Segment Tool Bar ====
Check this option to enable the Segment Tool Bar on Horizontal and Vertical views. You can customize it on Pandora's Box #15

=== TM rules tab ===

Here you have the opportunity to establish penalties to be taken into account when calculating the similarity between the TM and the segment to be translated. In other words, the percentage of similarity is reduced, where applicable, according to the figure indicated for each of the following rules. Some rules allow fractional reductions, but this only applies to the calculation: the final reduction will be the sum of all penalties rounded to the nearest whole number. If the percentage of similarity to the TU, reduced to the sum of the penalties, is less than the specified Fuzzy Threshold percentage, it will not be proposed.

[[File:wfasetup3.png]]

Penalties for the following rules are activated only if the box on their right is checked. They apply only to the TUs proposed by the TM or VLTM, not from machine translation, which has its own non-modifiable penalty.

* ''Case penalty'': if there is a difference in case (upper and lower case) between the TU and the segment to be translated, WFA can ignore this and show 100% similarity. But you can assign a penalty of between 1 and 5 points for the difference in case. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 1.

* ''Non literal penalty'': this penalty detects differences due to special characters such as dashes, quotation marks, apostrophes, punctuation and whitespace characters (non-breaking space, horizontal and vertical tabs, ...). There exist several codes for representing each of these special characters. WFA can ignore these and show 100% similarity; otherwise a penalty is calculated using the following method: every time a difference is encountered, it adds the value of the first parameter (0.25, 0.50 or 0.75), which by default is 0.50. The second parameter sets out what the minimum value of the penalty is (default is 1). Since the penalty is necessarily an integer, if the value of the penalty is 0.25 and there is only one in the segment to be translated, the minimum is not reached. Finally, the third parameter sets the maximum penalty to be assigned, even if the addition of all the differences of this rule exceeds that figure (10 by default). This rule is selected by default with a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 10.

* ''Tag penalty'': this rule works exactly the same way as the previous one, but applied to the tags (markers that represent the bits of code used to format the document <1>). This rule is selected by default with a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 10.

* ''Alignment user penalty'': the TUs found in a memory imported into WFA produced by an alignment tool and having the identifier "TALIGN!" may be assigned a penalty from 1 to 10. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 3. Please note, TUs from an alignment may not have the "TALIGN!" identifier.

* ''MT user penalty'': the TUs found in a memory imported into WFA produced by machine translation and having the identifier "MT!" may be penalised from 1 to 10. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 25. Please note, TUs from a machine translation may not have the "MT!" identifier.

* ''Multiple translation penalty'': In the case of a source segment with multiple 100% matches, i.e. several TUs having the same source segment but different translated segments, a penalty may be applied to warn of a possible choice between translations. This scenario is rare and no penalty is assigned by default.

* ''Attribute penalty'': attributes are identifiers that are associated with a particular TU at the time that it is recorded in the memory. There are five possible attributes: the first is fixed (it identifies the user who posted the TU), while the other four can be user defined. In general, translators use attribute no. 1 to define the subject of the text to be translated and the attribute no. 2 to define the client who owns the text. The other two attributes are free to be used for anything else. For example, if the proposed TU is from a text whose subject is "electronics", it will be penalised if the subject of the text to be translated is "medicine." In other words if the TU is 100% identical to the segment to be translated, it will be displayed with a percentage similarity of 98% if the penalty applied is 2 points.

The penalty can be a number from 1 to 5, valid for the four attributes. By default this rule is not active.

If you use a TM uploaded from Wordfast Classic or Pro, the existing attributes of the TU may be penalised.

=== Shortcuts tab ===

You can set the shortcuts you want to use.

[[File:wfasetup4.png]]

WFA shortcuts are not immutable. If some of them do not suit you, you can reassign them. To do this, click on the '''''upd''''' link of the shortcut you wish to change.

[[File:wfasetup5.png]]

In this example, corresponding to the first shortcut, you see the name of the command and a drop-down list. Choose '''None''' if you want to remove the shortcut or choose another from the list. Then click '''''Update''''' to confirm or '''''Cancel''''' to dismiss the dialog. Repeat for all the shortcuts that you want to change. The new keyboard shortcuts will be displayed.

The last four commands have no shortcuts; however, you can assign shortcuts to them if you wish.

If after modifying several shortcuts you want to return them to their original state, click '''''Restore default shortcuts'''''.

Finally, click '''''Save''''' settings to confirm any changes or '''''Cancel''''' to dismiss the dialog.

=== Segmentation tab ===
This tab defines the rules for segmentation.

[[File:Segmentation111.JPG]]

* ''Segmentation style'': this block determines how the segmentation will be performed. If you choose ''Wordfast /Trados segmentation'' (default) the standard end-of-segment markers are defined as follows: full stop, colon, question mark, exclamation mark and tab (Tab). You can add other characters as well as space (Space), non-breaking space (NBSP), carriage return (CR) and line feed (LF). You can add as markers: a number followed by an end of segment marker (A number Followed by ESM ends a segment – default), an end of segment marker not followed by a space (An ESM without a trailing space ends a segment) and an end of segment marker followed by a space followed by a lowercase letter (An ESM followed by a space followed by a lower-case letter ends a segment). Although you can change these markers, it is recommended to maintain them in such manner that if you share your translations and your memories with other translators, all will follow the same rule.

[[File:Warning.png]] Segmentation is performed at the time of uploading the document to WFA. You cannot therefore change the rules applying to that document during the course of its translation.

The other segmentation rules that you can choose are:
* ''Break segmentation'': segmentation is done according to the end of paragraph character (carriage return) or the tag for HTML files.
* ''Idiom segmentation'': segmentation follows the rules of the software program Idiom.
* ''SRX segmentation'': the segmentation is done by using a previously uploaded file. It follows the rules of the SRX standard, which has become a standard like TMX for formatting memories and TBX for formatting glossaries. In the case of SRX segmentation, abbreviations are also included.

* ''TM compatibility'': You must ensure the compatibility according to the memory you have uploaded or the subsequent use of your documents. By default, WFA's memory is compatible with that of Wordfast Classic and Pro (Assume Wordfast TM). If this is your choice, you can also specify if you have old projects made with Wordfast Classic or Pro (check Legacy TM created by old projects). You can also establish that the memory was created by Trados (Assume Trados TM), even adding that it was created by Trados and Word (TM created by Trados + Word); by Idiom (Assume Idiom TM) or by SDLX (Assume SDLX TM).

*''Abbreviations'': Abbreviations end with a full stop, which WFA then interprets as an end of segment marker. To avoid this, WFA allows you to create and manage a list of abbreviations. While WFA already has lists for some languages, others are empty – the user must provide the necessary information. The abbreviations are entered into the text box, one after another, without spaces and separated by a comma. Once updated, save your list by clicking on Save the language. Repeat for each language that you translate.

=== Pandora's box tab ===
This tab has many different settings. Some of this settings will open a new dialog.

[[File:wfasetup7.png]]

==== #1 PC, tablet and smartphone modes ====
Use this mode if you are using a mobile device. The segment toolbar is enlarged; local file access is disabled.

==== #2 Real time collaboration ====
Real time collaboration disables data caching. This forces the TM search before you open a segment, causing a response delay. Avoid using this mode unless sharing a TM and if the TU updates need to be shared immediately.

==== #3 Document file name convention ====
Customize your document name for download by adding a prefix and/or a suffix.

==== #4 Special characters insertion ====
Configure the 7 special characters insertion of the Edition tab.

==== #5 Configure online dictionaries ====
Configure URLs for 2 online search engines.

* Click "Add" to add a new dictionary.
* After filling the "Friendly name" and "Url" correctly you need to use "Test" to check it works fine.
* Use "Save" to add the dictionary to the list. Bear in mind that if the URL already exists it cannot be added.

If all worked fine, the list should have been updated and your dictionary available to be used.

The list does not use "Friendly name" to sort the dictionaries, so you need to check all the list to find the one you added.

In order to use one dictionary you need to select it from the list and save the settings.

==== #6 Multiple Ctrl+Alt+Down toggles placeable ====
Use this feature to toggle between copy the target term, copy the source term, or leave blank.

==== #7 Configure Auto-Suggest ====
Auto-suggest is activated at the '''General''' tab when clicking on [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab.

On this section of Pandora's Box is where you can '''configure which suggestions will Auto-suggest show'''.

[[File:AutoSuggest1.JPG]]

'''Auto-suggest can show different items''' such as: Glossary matches, tags, word from with a capital letter, numbers, file path, email addresses, URLs, chunks of Machine Translation, date and number conversion, text in parentheses (), text in braces {}, bracketed text [], word containing special character and unit conversion.

On the left there is a combo box to select the number of typed characters that will trigger auto-suggest to show up.

For '''date and number conversion''' there is a sub dialog, that can be opened by clicking on the [[File:Edit.png]] button on the left.

[[File:AutoSuggest2.JPG]]

Here you can set how dates and numbers will be converted and shown in the auto-suggested text.

For '''dates''' you can choose a different format and separator. For instance source ''2015.04.01'' could be converted to ''01/04/2015'' on target.

For '''numbers''' you can choose a different group and decimal separator. For instance source ''123.456,00'' could be converted to ''123 456.00'' on target.

==== #8 Configure Filters ====
Configure conversion of documents from their original format to the internal editor format.

For some files you can configure some parameters that will tell the filter what to do for some situations such as translate comments or sheet names.

You can make this configuration for: '''xls, xlsx, ppt, pptx, doc, docx, rtf, htm, html, mif, idml, xml (Text based files)'''.

[[File:Pandora9.JPG]]

On this section there are also 3 settings that will apply to any file.

* '''Editor format'''. To choose which type of '''bilingual file (TXML or TXLF)''' the filter should produce.[[File:Warning.png]] '''''The download bilingual file will be of the type used when the file was uploaded.''''' For example if the file was uploaded using TXML, the bilingual download will be TXML. A file cannot be uploaded using one type (TXML) and download the bilingual file of the other type (TXLF). The workaround is to change the type and upload the file again.

* '''Extract numbers'''. To define the filter action on source segments that contain only numbers.

** ''all'': Extracts all segments with only numbers for translation
** ''time_date_measure'': Extracts only segments with time and date
** ''none'': Does not extract any segments that contain only numbers

* '''Segmentation on break'''. To enable segmentation on line breaks.

==== #9 Configure double click to open/close a segment ====
Configure opening/closing actions on a segment by double clicking in the document panel. This is always active for mobile plain text mode.

[[File:Pandora101.png]]

==== #10 Configure TM Search ====
Set the timeout for searches. After the timeout, the search is cancelled and returns nothing. The default value is 4 seconds.

==== #11 Copy source when no TM match and no MT proposition ====
Copy source to target when no TM match and no MT proposition.

==== #12 Do not show empty paragraph line in Classic view ====
Do not copy MT proposition to target.

==== #13 Hide segment's IDs column on the Table view ====
Do not copy MT proposition to target.

==== #14 Custom Tab settings ====
Use this mode if you are using a mobile device. The segment toolbar is enlarged; local file access is disabled.

==== #15 Customize Segment Toolbar ====
Dialog to choose which buttons will be placed on Segment toolbar. Segment toolbar is enabled on General tab.

==== #16 Copy untranslatable to target automatically and open next segment ====
Define what will be considered an "Untranslatable segment" which will be copied to target automatically and open next segment

=== QA tab ===
Set here the criteria that will be used to conduct an audit of quality when doing a '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Transcheck|Transcheck]]'''

[[File:wfasetup8.png]]

There are several criteria that can be checked, some of which can also ''be checked while translating'' (by using the second checkbox column under '''While Translating''' title).

Here is a short description:

* '''Source & target lengths''': Compares the character count between the source and target segments. You can set the minimum and maximum % of allowed character count for the target segment.

* '''Empty target''': Checks for an empty target segment. This is always checked while translating.

* '''Numerical''': Checks that the numerical values between the source and target segments are correct.

* '''Placeable''': Checks if the tags are copied correctly to the target segments. This is always checked while translating.

* '''Forbidden chars''': Checks if the target segment includes forbidden characters. You can set the list of forbidden characters that should not be included in the target segment.

* '''Punctuations''': Checks for consistency in punctuation between source and target segments. You can set the punctuation marks that should not be included in the target segment. [[File:notice.png]] The transcheck punctuation only works on end of segmentation punctuation.

* '''Untranslatable''': Compares the source and target segments to check if the untranslatable content is consistent. You can set the untranslatable text that must be retained in the target segment.

* '''Copied source''': Checks for untranslated text when copied source option is used.

* '''Blacklists''': Checks if the target segment includes blacklisted terms. You can set blacklisted terms that should not be included in the target segment. [[File:notice.png]] The blacklisted term list must be a tab delimited file (bad term + tabulation + proposed term).

* '''Terminology''': Checks if all term translations from an active glossary are used in the target of a segment. You can enable or disable Ignore Case option.

* '''First word capitalization''': Checks if the first letter of the segment is capitalized.

* '''Edited exact match''': Checks if any exact match segments from the TM have been edited.

* '''Unedited fuzzy''': Checks if any fuzzy match segments from the TM have been left unedited.

* '''Source Consistency''': Checks consistency between source segments if the target is repeated.

* '''Target consistency''': Checks consistency between target segments if the source is repeated.

== Profile Configuration ==
Go to [[File:User profile.png]] '''''User Profile''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' menu to see information about your account and change some settings of your profile.

[[File:Profileconfig1.png]]

=== Change email ===
Use this option to change the email of your account.

[[File:Profileconfig2.png]]

=== Change password ===
Check the [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_change_my_password Wordfast Anywhere FAQ] for more information.

=== Delete account ===
Use this option to remove your account from Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:Profileconfig4.png]]

Wordfast Anywhere 6 Manual

2022-02-11T11:36:05Z

Remiandre: /* Appending(Update) a local TM to an existing TM */

{{Languages}}
[[Category:Wordfast Anywhere]]

= Introduction =
Wordfast Anywhere (WFA) is the online version of the popular Wordfast computer assisted translation (CAT) program that provides much of the functionality of the Classic and Pro desktop versions. Instead of being installed as a program on the user’s computer, WFA is made accessible from Wordfast’s servers via a web browser, regardless of the operating system used (Windows, Mac, Linux, etc.). Every effort has been made to ensure that the user interface is as close as possible to the other Wordfast flavours: toolbars, icons, shortcuts and working methods. A Wordfast Classic or Pro user should be able to use WFA with almost zero assimilation time.

It is worth remarking that WFA is almost certainly the CAT program that integrates best with the popular Mac operating system. Unlike Java-based, cross-platform programs – including Wordfast Pro – that will run on the Mac but don’t integrate with system-wide tools such as the built in Dictionary, WFA will run in Mac-native browsers such as Safari, thus giving you access to the entire range of language and text handling tools that are built into the Mac OS environment.

[[File:WFA_pagina_5_new.jpg]]
[[File:WFA_pagina_6_new.jpg]]

With WFA you can translate a wide range of both editable (TXT, DOC, DOCX, RTF, XLS, PPT, ODT, HTML, TXML, MIF, INX, etc.) and non-editable (PDF, TIFF) documents. You can store up ten current documents in your workspace, deleting your finished translations to free up space and permit new documents to be uploaded.

You can also import the TMs (translation memories) of all the language pairs you work in. Your memories will progressively expand as and when you translate. They are stored securely and will not be shared or revealed without your authorisation. If you need a local copy, you can download your TM to your computer at any time.

As is the case with other Wordfast flavours, you can add terms to your glossary as you translate. You can also upload existing glossaries to your workspace, for all language pairs. Here again, your glossaries are secure and will not be shared or revealed unless you specifically invite a colleague. You can also download your glossary if you need a local copy.

The following instructions have been written for complete beginners. Having understood the above comments, a Wordfast Classic or Pro user should have no difficulty in using WFA intuitively.

Check the '''[[Wordfast Anywhere 6 Start Guide]]''' for a quick start.

Check our [https://www.freetm.com/jsp/terms.jsp Terms of use].

== How to use WFA ==
On Wordfast Anywhere every document belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a translation project.

So the first you need is a project. A project named "Project_1" is created by default, but you can create up to 3 projects.

A project needs a language pair. A default one is suggested but more can be added. Each language pair can have a TM and glossary assigned which will be used on several processes and also automatically assigned to the documents uploaded.

A project also needs a task. "Translate" is the one by default.

Once the project is created you can add the documents. Documents can be added to all language pairs or to specific ones. There is a maximum number of documents per project depending of the type of project.

Double-click a project to open it to see the content (documents grouped by language pairs).

Double-click a document to start/resume work.

[[File:notice.png]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rDhVYY02Cds Wordfast Anywhere 6 Basic Projects video]'''

= Login in to WFA account =
Check the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Login_in_to_WFA_account Login in to WFA account]''' section on the Start Guide.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you have not created an account yet, click on the '''''Create a new account''''' and follow the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#How_to_create_an_account instructions]'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you ever ''forget your password'', click on the '''''Forgot your password?''''' and follow the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Get_your_password_back instructions]'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you are having ''login problems'' check '''''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Cannot_log_in_to_Wordfast_Anywhere Cannot log in to Wordfast Anywhere]''''' and follow the instructions.

=User Interface =
The user interface is divided into several sections. A top menu with tabs and buttons, a main central panel that changes depending on where we are (project list, project content, document translation) and a bottom panel where information and messages are shown.

Once you are connected to WFA, the workspace appears.

This should look similar to the following screenshot (depending on the browser, operating system or device used to access WFA):

[[File:Newui6.PNG]]

The workspace can be modified at any point according to your requirements.
==Top Menu==
At the very top you can find the ''Top Menu'' which consists in '''two rows''': one for the different '''menus''' (tabs) and one for the '''buttons''' corresponding to the selected tab.

Use [[File:CollapseTop.png]] to hide the buttons. Use [[File:CollapseBottom.png]] to show the buttons.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a project or selecting/opening a document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a project is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when a project is selected from the project list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when more than one file is selected from the document list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus used for translation (Edit, view, translation, review and TM & Glossaries) are only visible when the document is opened. Those buttons keep working as always, just need to open the document.

===Wordfast Anywhere Menu===

This tab a miscellaneous of buttons concerning the Wordfast Anywhere project.

[[File:Wfatab6.PNG]]

* [[File:Logout16.png]]: Use it when you want to '''leave''' Wordfast Anywhere.
* [[File:User profile.png]]: Here you'll find your '''account information'''. You'll be able to change your ''Login'' email, the ''Security Question'', the ''Security Answer'' and delete your account.
* [[File:Preferences.png]]: Here is where you set the '''configuration''' of Wordfast Anywhere:''Font Size'', ''Machine translation'', ''TM rules'', ''Shortcuts'', ''Segmentation'', ''Transcheck'' rules...etc.
* [[File:Preferences16round.png]]: Global TM & glossary management (create, add, upload, merge, edit, download, delete... ), no more for assignment.
* [[File:WF Update16.png]]: This button will direct you to a site to '''align''' your files.
* [[File:help16.png]]: WFA Help:
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''start guide''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''PM start guide''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''FAQ''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''manual''' wiki page.
** If the previous wiki pages do not work, this is a pdf backup.
* [[File:Notice.png]]: There are 4 icons corresponding to different types of '''notifications''' ([[File:Warning.png]] ONLY displayed when there are notifications):
** Webmaster Info: notifications coming from Wordfast Anywhere administration (p.e stopping the server for a publication).
** Background Info: notifications about ''Background'' processes (p.e. Analyze, Spellcheck...etc).
** System Info: notifications from the system (p.e. an unsupported browser).
** TM Server Info: notifications realted to the TM Server (p.e. TM server is disconnected).

===Project Menu===
This tab has the tools concerning a project.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when a project is selected on the project list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a project is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available for standard projects.

No project selected on the project list.

[[File:ProjecttabAll.PNG]]

This are the basic buttons:

* [[File:Pm new project 16.png]]: '''New''' use it to create a project.
* [[File:Pm open project 16.png]]: '''Open''' the selected project from the project list.
* [[File:Analyze Project16.png]]: '''Analyze''' all the documents of the project. A report is generated.
* [[File:Pm delete project 16.png]]: '''Delete''' the selected project.
* [[File:Pm close project 16.png]]: '''Close''' an opened project.
* [[File:Pm import project 16.png]]: '''Import''' a .glp file.
* [[File:Pm export project 16.png]]: '''Export''' a project into a .glp file.
* [[File:Linguist16.png]]: Use it to '''Manage''' the team of '''linguists'''.

To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

===File Tab===
This tab has the tools concerning a file.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be available when more than one file is selected from the list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be also available when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a document is opened.

[[File:FiletabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:Translate File16.png]]: '''Open''' the selected file from the list.
* [[File:About wordfast16.png]]: Open the document with '''Wordfast Pro Online'''. [[File:Warning.png]] The use of Wordfast Pro Online will be discontinued on December 31, 2021.
* [[File:Close16.png]]: '''Close''' an opened file.
* [[File:Save16.png]]: Here you'll find all the '''Download''' options for a file (p.e. translated version, bilingual versions, TXML, unformatted text, Off-line Report Tool, TM from doc segments).
* [[File:Preferences16round.png]]: With this button you'll change the '''TM & Glossary''' configuration for the document.
* [[File:Analyze Project16.png]]: '''Analyze''' the selected document/s. A report is generated.
* [[File:Statistics16.png]]: Get the '''Statistics''' of the document.
* [[File:Modify Project16.png]]: Get information about the file.
* [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]]: '''Pre-translate''' the selected document/s.
* [[File:Mergetms16.png]]: Use this button to '''merge''' the document with a '''TXML''' file.
* [[File:mergetms16_menu.png]]: Use this button to '''merge''' the document with an imported '''OFRT''' file.
* [[File:Split.png]] [[File:Join.png]]: '''Split''' the document in parts. '''Join''' the parts together again.
* [[File:Share.png]] [[File:Revoke.png]]: '''Share''' the document with an other Wordfast Anywhere user. '''Revoke''' will finish the share.
* [[File:Translate File16.png]]: '''Fuzzy Open''' the file without full matches.
* [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]]: '''Extract''' the '''frequent''' segments.
* [[File:Edit16.png]]: '''Rename''' the file.

===Edit Tab===

This tab is a translation tool extension.

[[File:Warning.png]] This buttons will be available when the document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be available when a TM is being edited.

[[File:EdittabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:FindReplace.png]]: Use it to '''Find & Replace''' text but also to go to a particular segment or get a list of segments ''untranslated'', ''provisional'', with ''notes'' or with ''tag differences''.
* [[File:EditSource16.png]]: '''Edit''' the source segment.
* [[File:Edit_Note16.png]]: Create, edit or remove a '''Note''' on a segment.
* [[File:Insert_c.png]]: '''Insert special characters'''. 7 different characters can be defined on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => '''''Setup''''' button > '''''Pandora's box'''''
* [[File:Delete_alltargetseg.png]]: '''Delete''' '''tags''' in the document. This is only available when editing a TM and has 2 options: Delete all target tags or delete all document tags.
* [[File:delete_revisions.png]]: '''Delete''' the segment '''history'''.
* [[File:Delete_alltargetseg.png]]: '''Delete''' all '''target''' segments of the document.
* [[File:caseChanger.png]]: Toggle between lowercase, uppercase, and capitalization..

===View Tab===

In this tab you'll find the buttons to move through the document and show or hide the different panels.

[[File:ViewtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:PanelOutline.png]]: Show or hide '''Outline'''.
* [[File:panelTm.png]]: Show or hide '''TM''' panel.
* [[File:panelGlo.png]]: Show or hide '''Glossary''' panel.
* [[File:MovePrevScreen.png]]: Go to '''Previous Block'''.
* [[File:MoveNextScreen.png]]: Go to '''Next Block'''.
* [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]]: Toggle between the different document layout: Classic, Horizontal and Vertical.
* [[File:move_prev_seg.png]]: Go to '''Previous segment'''.
* [[File:move_next_seg.png]]: Go to '''Next segment'''.
* [[File:move_first_seg_screen.png]]: Go to '''First segment''' of '''Block'''.
* [[File:move_last_seg_screen.png]]: Go to '''Last segment''' of '''Block'''.
* [[File:move_first_seg_doc.png]]: Go to '''First segment''' of '''document'''.
* [[File:move_last_seg_doc.png]]: Go to '''Last segment''' of '''document'''.

===Translation Tab===

Find here all the tools to perform a translation

[[File:TranslationtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:StartNext.png]]: '''Start translation''' or open next segment.
* [[File:Previous.png]]: Open previous segment.
* [[File:CloseSave.png]]: '''Close and commit''' to the TM.
* [[File:Close retain.png]]: '''Close and retain''' the segment as provisional but not commit to the TM
* [[File:close.png]]: '''Close segment'''.
* [[File:close_restore.png]]: '''Close and delete''' target content.
* [[File:mark.png]]: Mark segment as '''provisional'''.
* [[File:CopySource.png]]: '''Copy source''' to target.
* [[File:Expand_Segment16.png]]: '''Expand''' segment.
* [[File:ShrinkSeg.png]]: '''Shrink''' segment.
* [[File:TranslateUntilFuzzy.png]]: '''Translate''' document '''until a fuzzy''' match.
* [[File:Cleanup_Project16.png]]: Toggle between Empty target, Remove tags and Restore.
* [[File:autopropagate.png]]: '''Auto propagate''' segment changes through all the document.
* [[File:dropdown.png]]: Toggle placeable.
* [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]]: Go to '''Next Placeable'''.
* [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]]: '''Copy Placeable'''.
* [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]]: Go to '''Previous Placeable'''.
* [[File:increase_target.png]]: Increase target segment height.
* [[File:Mic.png]]: Use '''Web Speech''' to dictate the target content. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY available for Chrome. Currently disabled due to browser security.'''

===Review Tab===

This tab has the tools to review the document.

[[File:ReviewtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:Preview16.png]]: '''Preview''' a PDF version of the document.
* [[File:Transcheck16.png]]: Do a '''quality control''' on the document
* [[File:Spellcheck16.png]]: '''Spellcheck''' the document

===TMs and Glossaries Tab===

Tab with the tools related to TM and glossaries actions.

[[File:TmglotabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]]: Concordance search
* [[File:GlossarySearch.png]]: Glossary Search
* [[File:TermEdit.png]]: Term edition.
* [[File:CopyTU.png]]: Copy TU.
* [[File:DeleteTU.png]]: Delete TU.
* [[File:Add File To Project16.png]]: Add TU.
* [[File:force_tm_addtu.png]]: Update TU.
* [[File:force_tm.png]]: Force TM search.
* [[File:force_mt.png]]: Force Machine Translation search.
* [[File:force_term.png]]: Force Glossary search.
* [[File:update_tm_doc.png]]: Update TM with document content.
* [[File:iSearch.png]]: Lookup in online dictionary.

===Help Tab===

Help section is on the '''Wordfast Anywhere Menu'''.

===Custom Tab===
In this tab you can add up to 15 buttons of your choice, so you can have together in one tab your most used buttons.
Selection any of the translation menus buttons (Edit, view, translation, review and TM & Glossaries) and the WFA setup and TM&Glossary set up.

[[File:custom_tab.png]]

To do so you must go to [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab. Then go to '''Pandora Box''' tab and go to ''Custom Tab settings'', where you will find all the buttons that can be added to the '''Custom''' tab

[[File:custom_tab2.png]]

==Panels==

===Project List Panel===
This panel shows the list of projects.

[[File:Projectlistpanel.png]]

Projects will be listed here. '''Double click on one project''' or select it and use [[File:Pm open project 16.png]]'''Open''' from the top menu bar to open the project.

===Project content Panel===
When opening a project, the ''Content Panel'' area will show the content of the project, the list of documents in the project.

[[File:ProjectContentpanel.png]]

Main areas are:

* '''Header row (1)''': In this row you'll fine the headers of the columns. The columns are: Languages/file (1), Vol. (1C) and the columns for the different jobs will follow (1D). This row will change the background color according to the project status: blue for ''In preparation'', orange for ''In progress'' and green for ''completed''. Use the '''Add files''' button (1A) to add files to all language pairs and use '''dashboard''' button (1B) to see an estimation of cost of the project.
* '''Project setup (2)'''Click on the ''project name'' or icon next to it to open the project setup dialog.
* '''Language Row (3)''': In this row several icons will be shown depending on the file selection to perform actions such as add files to the language pair (3A), delete selected files (3B) or assign linguist to jobs (3C). Use the '''remove language pair''' icon (3D) to delete the language pair ([[File:Warning.png]] all the documents inside will be permanently deleted).
* '''Note (4)''' this icon allows to add a note to the document.
* '''TM & glossaries (5)''' This are the TMs and glossaries assigned to the document, mouse-over to see extra information. This TM and glossary assignment will be used for the tasks.
* On the '''Status bar''' you'll find information about the project.
* Clicking on the file name will open the document. And clicking on each of the other cell text or icon will open the edit dialog for that cell.

===Translation Panels===
When a document is opened for translation, the screen is divided in 4 different panels.

[[File:Panels.png]]

====Outline====
Show/Hide Outline panel using '''''View''''' tab => '''''Show/hide Outline''''' [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button

The outline displays all the segments of the document.
The available status are:
* A white box indicates that the segment is not translated
* A green box indicates a translated segment
* A yellow box indicates a provisional segment
* An 'i' after segment id indicates a segment having a note
* The black thick border on the box indicates the current document selected on document panel
* The pink border on the box indicates the visible segments in the document panel

You can jump and open any segment of the document by clicking on its number.
If the segment is not visible on the document panel (blue border instead of pink), the document panel will be refreshed.

Once a segment is opened you can use
'''''Edit''''' tab => '''''Edit Note''''' [[File:Edit_Note16.png]] button to create/delete a note and also '''''Translation ''''' tab => '''''Provisional''''' [[File:mark.png]] button to mark/unmark a provisional segment.

====TM Panel====
This panel shows the matches from TM or MT for the current segment.

You can show or hide this panel using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:panelTm.png]] button.

====Glossary Panel====
This panel shows the matching terms for the current segment.

You can show or hide this panel using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:panelGlo.png]] button.

====Document Panel====

When a document is opened, it shows the segments content.

Wordfast Anywhere do not load the entire document in the editor if there are many segments.

While translating the segments are added one by one to the editor, but if you can move inside the document to see any part you want.

To do so, you can use:
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:MovePrevScreen.png]] button to go to '''Previous Block'''.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:MoveNextScreen.png]] button to go to '''Next Block'''.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button to show '''Outline''' and then jump and open any segment of the document by clicking on its number. More information [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline here]

This is how an opened document looks like:

[[File:document_panel_doc.png]]

=====Document Layout=====
Using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] button you can change the document layout, which is the way segments are shown on Document Panel. The three possible views are:

'''''Classical'''''

[[File:ClassicalLayout.png]]

'''''Horizontal'''''

[[File:HorizontalLayout.png]]

'''''Vertical'''''

[[File:VerticalLayout.png]]

===Status Panel===
Always present at the bottom. Here you can find several information about the project, file, TM, display, translation process. Also some messages will be showed here.

==Other features==

===Show/Hide Top Menu Buttons ===
Buttons on the top menu can be hidden.

Use [[File:CollapseTop.png]] to hide the buttons. Use [[File:CollapseBottom.png]] to show the buttons.

= Project Operations =
A new Project menu bar has been added after Wordfast Anywhere menu. Yes! Project Management (PM) has been introduced to WFA.

* * A project named "Project_1" is created by default. If you had an account before version 6, it will contain all the files from the previous version grouped by language pair.
* Every document now belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a project.
* Double-click a project to open it to see the content (documents grouped by language pairs).
* Double-click a document to start/resume work.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a project.

[[File:notice.png]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rDhVYY02Cds Wordfast Anywhere 6 Basic Projects video]'''

== Create a New Project ==
On the Project tab click on [[File:Pm new project 16.png]]'''New''' to create a new project. This will open the ''Project Seup'' window where the settings for the project are done.

To access the project setup once the project has been created, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

[[File:Createproject.PNG]]
[[File:Createproject1.PNG]]
[[File:Createproject2.PNG]]

The ''Project Setup'' window has two sections that need to be set in order to create the project. Setting one section opens the next one.

;1.General
: On this section general information of the project is set. This includes:
# Project name (Compulsory)
# Description (optional)
# Project type. Defines the type of the project:
#* Standard: For translators working alone.
#* Advanced: For Project Managers (PMs) managing large, multi-language projects.
# Project status (for advanced type). Defines the status of the project:
#* In preparation (blue): When project is being prepared (files, TMs and glossaries and linguist being added)
#* In progress (orange): This marks the start of the project. Files are shared with the linguist at this point.
#* Completed (green): The project is finished.
# Currency(optional). It will be used to calculate the project cost.
# Decimals(optional). When this checkbox is marked the project estimated cost will show numbers with decimals.
# Auto(optional). By default Project Manager will be responsible of pushing files to the next job when completion is done. Mark this checkbox to automatically sent files to the next job upon completion.
;2.Language Pairs and tasks
: On this section language pairs and tasks are added.
* Use the '''+''' next to the language pair header to add a new language pair. This will open the language selection dialog and then the TM and glossaries dialog to assign them to the language pair.
* Use the '''+''' at the end of the header row to add new tasks. Only 10 tasks can be added.
* A row is shown for each language pair where the default word rate (left box) and speed rate (right box) for each task can be set.
* Use the '''-''' next to the language pair to remove it. [[File:Warning.png]] Associated files and shares will be revoked.
* Use the '''-''' next to the task name to remove it. [[File:Warning.png]] Associated files and shares will be revoked.

Once all compulsory fields are set, click on '''Save project''' to save the project and go to the ''Project Content panel''.

[[File:Warning.png]] It is possible to move from standard to advanced but opposite is only possible if the advanced project has only one task.

== Modify Project Setup ==
To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

Use this to change any of the project settings defined on the project creation.

[[File:Warning.png]] It is possible to move from standard to advanced but opposite is only possible if the advanced project has only one task.

It is the same than for creating a project, so check the section above to know about the different parts and settings.

== Setting up language pair, Translation Memories and glossaries ==
Languages are added/removed from the ''Project Setup'' dialog.

To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

Check ''Create Project'' section above to know about it.

=== Language pair with its associated TMs and glossaries set in the project setup ===

To access the project setup dialog, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

[[File:Project_setup.png]]

Click on the language pair '''''+''''' button.

[[File:Langpair_dialog.png]]

Enter the languages and save, the TMs and glossaries dialog opens.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair.png]]

* If no TM and glossary exists for the language pair, a new dialog will propose you to create them. Save and wait they are listed.
* You can create and choose one or more TMs and glossaries. They are selected by checking the row in the '''''Active''''' column.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair_2.png]]

Finally save the TMs and glossaries selection by clicking on the '''''Save''''' button. The new language pair is now in the project setup and one icon is displayed for each TM and glossary.

[[File:Project_setup_2.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] The TMS and glossaries can be updated for a language pair by clicking on the icons. But if documents already exists for that language pair, they will not be affected by this change, only new documents added after the update.

=== TMs and glossaries set individually for a document ===
This selection for a document is overwriting the Language pair selection.
In the project content select a document by checking it and then click on the '''''TMs and glossaries''''' button [[File:Preferences16round.png]] of the '''''File''''' menu.

[[File:Project_content_3.png]]

The same TMs and glossaries dialog opens.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair_3.png]]

Saving will update only the TMs and glossaries for the selected document. A control can done hovering the TM icon.

[[File:Project_content_2.png]]

== Add/Remove Files ==
From the '''Project Content Panel''' there are two ways to add files to a project.

* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the header will add the files to all the languages in the project.
* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the language row. This will add the files only to that language.

[[File:Pmaddfiles.PNG]]

To remove a file, first use the checkbox to select it and then use the [[File:Remove16.png]] icon on the language row.

[[File:Pmdeletefile.PNG]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Associated shares will be revoked.

Several files can be selected to be removed at the same time.

== Project dashboard ==
Using the [[File:Pm_cost_16.png]] icon on the header will show the estimated cost of the project. Click on the icon again to hide costs.

[[File:Pmdashboard.PNG]]

== Advanced Features ==
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

Advanced projects have some extra features to manage the files.

=== Task TM ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

Click on the TM icon on the file column to set how the TM will be used on the tasks.

[[File:PmaddtmPNG.PNG]]

There are different options for the TM use:
*'''''Share TM'''''
**The selected TM will be shared with linguists.
**This is the best option to use.
**Translator will have exact and fuzzy matches.
**Translator can use concordance.
*'''''Create Project TM'''''
**The selected TM will NOT be shared.
**It will be used to create a temporary project TM with the matches from the file/s
**The temporary project TM will be shared.
*'''''Pretranslate'''''
**The selected TM will NOT be shared.
**It will be used to pretransalte the document/s.
**Only one TU match (the highest) per segment will be available to the translator.
**Concordance cannot be used.
**Concordance will only be used in this temporary TM

[[File:Warning.png]] Once a task has started it is not possible to change this assignment.

To change the TM assigned click on the same icon and change the TM selection by marking the ''active'' checkbox for the TMs you want to use.
To unassign the TMs clean all the ''active'' checkboxes.

=== Task Glossaries ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

To assign glossaries to tasks follow the instructions for TMs, but using the ''active'' checkboxes on the glossaries side of the dialog.

=== Manage Linguists ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

The Manage Linguist window can be opened by using the [[File:Linguist16.png]] icon on the '''Project''' tab or the '''Manage linguists''' buttons on the ''Assign Job'' window.

This allows the PM to create a team of linguists that will be used on the project jobs.

The same linguist can be used in several languages and roles.

[[File:Pmlinguist1.PNG]]

Main areas are:

* '''Add new linguist to a new language pair (1)''': Use [[File:Pm_linguist_add_16.png]] icon to add a new linguist to the team for a new language pair.
* '''Add or remove a linguist from a language pair (2)''': Use [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] icon to add a linguist to a language pair and use [[File:Pm_collapse_16.png]] icon to remove it.
* '''Linguist task grid (3)''': In this grid, each cell shows the RATE-SPEED-SCORE settings for a linguist. The grid has 4 columns, one for each role: Translator (TR), Proofreader (PR), Revise (RE) and QA. In addition '''dark values mean that linguist has been marked as "able" to do that role'''. Grey values indicate that linguist is not marked as "able" to do that role. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''

==== New Linguist ====
Use [[File:Pm_linguist_add_16.png]] or [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] to add a new linguist.

[[File:Pmlinguistnew.PNG]]

Introduce the following information to add a linguist.

* '''Email''': It must be the email of the linguist WFA account.
* '''Initials''': Short 4 character nickname for the linguist.
* '''Ctry''': Country of the linguist.
* '''Comment''': Some words about the linguist.
* '''Source language''' and '''target language''' that the linguist can work with.
* Role performance. There are 4 default roles a linguist can do on project tasks.
** Mark the '''checkbox''' if the linguist is able to do the role. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''
** '''Rate''': Linguist minim rate. Rate is measured in import per word. The project currency will be user with the import. For example 0.5 Eur per word.
** '''Speed''': Linguist speed rate (words/day). For example 3,000 words/day.
** '''Score''': Linguist 1 to 5 ''star'' score.

=== Assign Job ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''

Use the [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] icon in the language row under the '''job name''' column to assign a job to a linguist for the checkbox marked files.

[[File:Pmaddtask.PNG]]

On the assign job dialog:
* Choose a linguist from the list to whom the job will be assigned. [[File:Warning.png]] The file will be shared with the linguist when the project is set as 'In progress'. The rate and job amount from the linguist will be set for the task.
* To override the linguist rate or job amount, a particular rate or job amount for the job can be set using the input field under the column header. [[File:Warning.png]] Bear in mind that both are related so changing one will update the other.
* A '''''Deadline''''' can be set on the input field under '''''Duration'''''.
* Fill the '''''Note''''' text box to send extra information to the linguist.
* Use '''''Linguist cannot download the shared file''''' to not allow the linguist to download the file.
* Click on '''''Manage linguists''''' to open the Manage Linguist window to add/edit/remove linguists.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' linguists marked as ''able'' to do a role will be listed.

Use the [[File:Pm_collapse_16.png]] icon in the language row under the '''job name''' column to unassign a linguist from a job for the checkbox marked files. [[File:Warning.png]] Shares will be revoked.

[[File:Pmdeletetask.PNG]]

=== Move file to next Task ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

If '''Auto''' tasking is not set on the ''Project Properties'' window, when a task is finished (file has been revoked by the linguist), PM has to manually move it to the next task which will share the file with the linguist assigned to that task.

To do so, click on the double arrow on the finished task.

[[File:Pmmoveon.PNG]]

=== Workflow ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

The project workflow should be:
# PM creates a project, sets languages, sets jobs (Project setup).
# PM adds files to the project and prepares them (i.e splitting).
# PM sets how the TMs and glossaries assigned to the document will be use on the tasks as Share TM, Create project TM or to pre-translate.
# PM prepares the team of linguists.
# PM assign a linguist to each file task. Multiple file selection for batch assign is possible.
# When PM sets the project status to ''In progress'' files that has been assigned a TM and a task will be shared to the corresponding linguist.
# Linguist works on the file. When his work is finished, revokes the file. This finishes the share.
# Once the file is revoked, the PM has to manually move it to the next task. This is done automatically if Auto tasking is selected on Project Setup.
# When all tasks are finished project is finished. PM can change the status of the project to ''Completed''.

=== Purchase Order ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

You can define a Purchase Order template with project, document and task information that will be send to the linguists when the file is shared.

A copy of the email send to the linguist is BCC to the project owner.

==== Purchase Order template ====
Go to [[File:User profile.png]] '''''User Profile''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab to see information about your account. On the ''PM'' tab you can edit the default template.

[[File:Po1.PNG]]

On this template you put the information you want to appear on the Purchase Order.

You can use some '''dynamic parameters''' to add project, document and task information. Use this parameters to build the Purchase Order.
Parameters will be substituted by project, document and task corresponding values or a predefined text.

{| class="wikitable"
|+Here is the list which you can also check them using the [[File:Pm info 16.png]] icon.
|-
|{purchase_order_number}
|Include a number for the purchase order.
|-
|{project_name}
|Project name.
|-
|{task_name}
|Task name.
|-
|{document_name}
|Document name.
|-
|{document_download}
|If linguist can download the document the text '(The document cannot be downloaded.)' will be added to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{document_volume}
|Document number of words.
|-
|{job_note}
|Job note
|-
|{job_rate}
|Job rate
|-
|{job_total}
|Job total cost
|-
|{job_deadline}
|Job deadline in the format 29/12/2021 15:00 GMT+02:00 and the remaining time.
|-
|{document_tmglo}
|If there are TMs or glossaries in the share the text 'For the duration of this job # Translation Memories and # Glossaries have been temporarily shared with you.' will be added to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{document_use}
|Add the text 'To work on this document, log into your Wordfast Anywhere account. If you are already logged, refresh the project list by closing all the projects.' to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{my_full_name}
|Full name from 'User profile'.
|-
|{my_professional_info}
|Professional information from 'User profile'.
|}

==== Purchase Order preview ====
On the '''assign job dialog''' you will see a preview of the Purchase Order.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of the dynamic parameters will be updated when changing the selections on the dialog, others might require the job to be saved and others will be updated when the Purchase Order is send.

[[File:Po2.PNG]]

==== Purchase Order batch send ====
You can send the Purchase Orders for all the saved jobs at any moment using the '''Send POs''' button on the ''Project Setup'' dialog

[[File:Warning.png]] Purchase Order will also be send when the file is shared.

= File Operations =
[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a document.

=== Upload ===
To translate your document, you must first upload it to WFA.

[[File:warning.png]] There is a file size limit of 20 Mb.

From the '''Project Content Panel''' there are two ways to add files to a project.

* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the header will add the files to all the languages in the project.
* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the language row. This will add the files only to that language.

[[File:Pmaddfiles.PNG]]

The following window will be displayed:

[[File:Upload_doc.png]]

There are several ways to upload a document
* '''From local file''': Use '''''Browse...''''' to navigate through the directories on your computer and locate the document to be uploaded.
* '''From URL''': This option allows you to upload a file that is located on an Internet server by entering the address (URL) into the field. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Google Drive''': Choose a file from your Google Drive to be uploaded. You'll be asked to allow access rights to WFA before choosing the file. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Dropbox''': Choose a file from your Dropbox to be uploaded. You'll be asked to allow access rights to WFA before choosing the file. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Clipboard''': Paste the text to be uploaded into the text area. A text file will be created with the text.

At the bottom of the window click on '''''View allowed formats''''' to check the allowed formats:

Finally click on:
* '''''Upload''''': to only upload the file, which will be listed on the Document Management.
* '''''Upload and Open''''': to upload and open the document, which will be displayed in the document panel.

[[File:warning.png]] Depending on the size of the file, this may take some time. Please be patient.

Upload can also be done by using drag and drop area.

For some file formats you can configure some filter behaviors when uploading the file on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters|Configure Filters]]''' in ''Pandora's Box #8''. This is important for '''Text based files (xml, xsl)''' where a rules file (.properties) is needed.

=== Open ===
To open a document, first select it from the list of documents. There are 2 options on '''[[{{PAGENAME}}#File Tab|File tab]]''':

* '''''Open''''' button [[File:Translate_File16.png]]: will open a document and show all the segments
* '''''Fuzzy Open''''' button [[File:Translate_File16.png]]: will open a document, but only segments with a score lower than 100.

=== Segmentation ===
In order to be translated with a CAT tool, a document is divided into translation units (TUs), also known as segments. This process is called segmentation. A segment is a text string that ends with a terminator segment, usually the period (.), colon (:), question mark (?), or exclamation mark (!) and also a paragraph or end of cell mark, a page break or a tab.

The advantage of segmentation is that the translation units are presented to you one by one, without any danger of missing one. These segments form the basis for the TUs that are saved in the TM, consisting of the source segment (to translate) and the target segment (translated).

To configure segmentation go to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Segmentation_tab| Segmentation tab]]''' on the WFA settings.

=== Review ===
Once translated, the text should be revised. Here are some methods:
* Download the translated document immediately to view it in your favourite word processor.
* Download it in an offline review format. See '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Offline_Review_Tool|Offline Review Tool (OFRT)]]'''.
* Revise it in WFA using '''Trancheck''', '''Spellcheck''' and '''Preview''' tools. See below.
* If you are using the Classic mode for the document Layout (See the '''''Doc Layout''''' button [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] on '''''View''''' tab) , you can toggle the display between the bilingual document, the original document and the translated document, use the shortcut '''Ctrl+,''' (Ctrl+comma). A different display mode is presented with each iteration. To confirm what you see in front of you, check the indicator on the status bar: bilingual document (Bilingual), original document (Source) or translated document (Target). You can also click on the indicator to change it. Please note this action does not alter the document in any way. It only changes the way that it is displayed in a way that is more convenient for the task you are currently engaged in.

==== Transcheck ====
Click on the '''''Transchek''''' button [[File:Transcheck16.png]] of the '''''Review''''' tab. Transcheck provides the means to check translated content for missing tags, empty targets, numbers, untranslated segments, and terminology.

[[File:Transcheck.png]]

Click on the '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#QA_tab|Set the criteria]]''' link to go to the '''Setup''' and configure them.

Click on the '''''Check''''' button to get the result.

Click on the '''''Move next''''' button to move in the document panel to the first segment in the result list. Click again to move to next segment and so on.

==== Spellcheck ====

Click on the '''''Spellcheck'''' button [[File:Spellcheck16.png]] of the '''''View''''' tab and choose again '''Spellcheck''' in the list of choice. Spellcheck is a good practice to ensure high quality as it flags words in a document that may not be spelled correctly. The Spellcheck is done immediately then you'll get the following report with the results.

[[File:Spellcheck.png]]

Click on the '''''Move''''' button to move in the document panel to the first segment in the result list. Click again to move to next segment and so on.

==== Preview ====
Click on the '''''Preview''''' butonn [[File:Preview16.png]] of the '''''View''''' tab . It can be done at any stage of completion to get a PDF file displayed in a pop-up window with the translated document.

[[File:Preview_1.png]]
[[File:Preview_2.png]]

=== Download ===

[[File:Warning.png]] For '''download issues''', please check this [https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_fix_a_document_when_download_failed.3F link]

When the translation is finally complete, you must download the final document in order to be able to deliver it. To do this, click on [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab. A dialog with all the download options will be shown.

[[File:Donwload_all.jpg]]

Here is a short description of each option:

* '''Translated document/s''': Click to download the translated file. It will be the translated version of the source document in the same file type.

* '''Bilingual''': Click to download the TXLF (or TXML) file from the document. [[File:Warning.png]] '''''The download bilingual file will be of the type used when the file was uploaded.''''' For example if the file was uploaded using TXML, the bilingual download will be TXML. A file cannot be uploaded using one type (TXML) and download the bilingual file of the other type (TXLF). The workaround is to change the type and upload the file again. [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters More information]

* '''Offline review export''': Click to download an Offline Review file (.doc).

* '''Bilingual DOC without formatting''': Click to download bilingual for MS Word without placeholders (*.doc).

* '''Unformatted text''': Click to download unformatted Text (*.txt).

* '''Notes report''': Click to download a report with the document notes.

* '''TM from document/s''': Click to download a TM with document's content (.txml).

* '''Backup workspace''': Click to download a backup of current document + TM + glossary.

* '''Package''': Click to download a WFP package file (.glp) containing documents, memories, glossaries....etc. More information [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Package here]

* '''Filtered bilingual''': Open an advanced filtering dialog to choose segments to be downloaded.

Clicking '''OK''' will take the next dialog.

You may receive this message if you have not yet fully translated the document:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

This is purely an advisory message, warning you if you have forgotten to translate a segment or if there are provisional segments or notes. However it is quite possible that this is your intention: sometimes there are segments that should not be translated.

You can find out at any time if you have completed the translation, or how many segments remain to be translated, by using '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''

If your file is fully translated or you clicked '''OK''' on this warning dialog, a dialog where you can choose the way to download the file will open.

This can have different extra options depending the type of download you have chosen on the first dialog.

[[File:DownloadOptions2.png]]

For downloading the translated file, you have the option to add a second document in PDF format to the downloading of the document in its original format. To add the PDF-formatted document, tick the Add PDF file box. This may take some time, so please wait.

[[File:DownloadOptions2a.png]]

For downloading the TXML file, you have the options to copy the source content in case target segment is empty and not use language variants.

You can cancel the download by clicking Cancel or continue by clicking OK.
You can verify that this operation is taking place: a series of small blue rectangles will display the progress in the status bar.

There are some cases when you will get a compressed ZIP file instead of the original format. Check [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#Why_do_I_get_a_zip_file_when_downloading.3F here] the reasons.

If you have requested the PDF file, both files – the original and the PDF – will be downloaded together and compressed together in ZIP format (*. zip).

There are several ways to download a file:

* '''Download file''': After you click on the OK button, Wordfast Anywhere prepares the data transfer and then sends it to your browser. The browser will then inform you that it has received the data according to its specific mode of operation. In some cases, a dialog box will pop up allowing you specify where to save the file; however, this depends on the particular browser you use. If nothing happens, check your browser’s downloads settings and / or repeat the process.
* '''Send file to email''': Send the downloaded file by email.
* '''Create file URL''': Create a url to the downloaded file. To get the file copy-paste the url in your browser to start the download. The file will be available at that location for 3 days.
* '''Google Drive''': Send the downloaded file to your Google Drive account.
* '''Dropbox''': Send the downloaded file to your Dropbox account.

[[File:Warning.png]] For '''download issues''', please check this [https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_fix_a_document_when_download_failed.3F link]

=== Delete ===
[[File:Warning.png]] Remember this can '''NOT''' be undone, so it is recommended to download the file first.

To remove a file, first use the checkbox to select it and then use the [[File:Remove16.png]] icon on the language row.

[[File:Pmdeletefile.PNG]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Associated shares will be revoked.

Several files can be selected to be removed at the same time.

[[File:notice.png]] In case you accidentally delete a file, you can recover it by uploading again and using the same TM to pre-translate it.

=== Package ===
Project files (*.glp) are managed with the [[File:Pm import project 16.png]] '''Import''' and [[File:Pm export project 16.png]] '''Export''' buttons in the Project menu.

[[File:Warning.png]] The project file (*.glp) is limited to one source language while a Wordfast Anywhere project can have many, in consequence, package export is done by source language.

[[File:Warning.png]]There is an issue importing packages coming from PD. If you cannot import the .glp file, please ask to receive the bilingual files (txml/txlf) and the url for the TM/glossary.

==== Upload ====

Upload must be done using '''''Project''''' menu => '''''Import''''' [[File:Pm import project 16.png]] button.

Once you have selected you local file, click '''Upload'''. A new dialog with the package information and upload options will be shown.

[[File:UploadPkg.JPG]]

* '''Package Information''' section shows package name, who and when created the package and which language pairs contain.
* '''Package content''' section shows the bilingual files on the package. The files with the check box marked will be uploaded. '''On the right''' there are two drop-down lists to add a TM and glossary to the file which can came from the package if WFA can handle them or from your list on WFA (Information about them can be found on the Resources section).
* '''Resources''' section shows a list of TMs and glossaries and source files.

Finally there are two options for the upload.
* '''Create new folder''': by default files will be added to the root folder, you can use this option to upload the package files in a new folder.
* If the package contains source files a drop-down list will be shown to choose between '''Export back later''' to upload just the bilingual files and '''Generate final files on WFA''' to upload source files and merge them with the corresponding bilingual file in the package.

Once the package has been successfully uploaded, an HTML report is created.

[[File:Warning.png]] A new project is created with the content of the package.

==== Download ====

[[File:Warning.png]] The project file (*.glp) is limited to one source language while a Wordfast Anywhere project can have many, in consequence, package export is done by source language.

Download must be done using '''''Project''''' menu => '''''Export''''' [[File:Pm export project 16.png]] button.

[[File:DownloadPkg.JPG]]

* '''Package Information''': Here you can choose to download an existing package or create a new one, source and target languages. Multiple target language can be chosen if the package had them when it was uploaded.
* '''Package content''': After clicking '''Find Files''' a list of available files, TMs and glossaries is shown. The files with the check box marked will be downloaded.

Finally you can chose to '''Add Source files''' to the package.

= TM & Glossary Management =
== TM & Glossary Basics ==

Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''Setup TM&Glo''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' menu.

[[File:TmgloDialog.png]]

===Translation Memory ===
==== Creating a translation memory ====
There are several ways to create or add a TM:
* Create an empty standard WFA TM
* Upload an existing TM like from Wordast Classic or Pro
* Link to a remote TM hosted on a private Wordfast server
* Link to a Very Large TM hosted on a public Wordfast server

To create an empty TM, click on the '''''Create''''' button of the TM buttons area.

[[File:CreateTm.png]]

Choose source and target language codes. It is recommended that you have only one TM for each language pair. This way, you will benefit from everything you have already translated in each pair. However, there may be reasons for you to maintain different TMs in the same language pair. In this case, enter an ID using up to 10 characters in the Assigned Name field.
 Then click on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''Create TM''''' dialog box. Your TM has now been created and is selected in the list of TMs.

To Upload an existing TM, click on the '''''upload'''' button.

[[File:CreateTm_3.png]]

If you already have a TM that you use with Wordfast Classic or Pro, you can upload it to WFA. The codes for source and target languages are written in the header of the TM file. If you already have a TM in the same pair, make sure that you enter an identifier of up to 10 characters in the Assigned Name field.
 This procedure is exactly the same if you have a TM from another CAT tool. However, check first that this TM has been exported in the '''TMX''' format, the standard file format with extension '''.tmx''' supported by all major CAT tool developers.
 Click on the '''''Upload''''' button of the '''''Upload''''' dialog box, you will be prompted to browse a local file on your PC.

If the TM is in Excel format, before uploading it you need to save it as ''Unicode Text''.

[[File:warning.png]] Depending on its size, uploading a TM may take some time. In this case, it can be run in the background, allowing you to perform other tasks while you are waiting.

To add a remote TM or VLTM, click on the '''''add''''' button.

[[File:AddTm_1.png]]

Select the type TM in the list box.

[[File:AddTm_2.png]]

For adding a remote TM, copy paste the given URL in the URL field and the workgroup ID, if any, in the workgroup ID field.
 If you have already a remote TM with the same languages, you will need to enter a symbolic name.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test the remote TM. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:AddTm_3.png]]

WFA has access to the public TM server, which consists of segments offered by the community of translators and is available to all under the name VLTM (Very Large Translation Memory). The TM is unrestricted, free of charge and anonymous.
 For a VLTM, you need to enter source and target language codes.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test if the VLTM is available for your languages. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

==== Appending(Update) an existing TM with a local TM ====
You can upload and append(Update) one of your existing TMs with a local TM by clicking on the '''''merge''''' button.

[[File:MergeTm.png]]

 The process is slightly the same than uploading a TM but you should first select the existing TM in the list. The memory to import will already have predefined source and target languages codes in the header of the TM. There may therefore be a conflict of languages between it and the existing memory. If the languages are different, the merge operation will be rejected.
 You also have the choice, in case there are identical source segments, to add always the TM segments, or to not add duplicated segments from the TM. Select '''Add always''' or '''Do not add duplicate''' in the list box.
 By default, the merge process will not take language variants into account. If you want to make sure exactly the same variants are merged, tick the '''append TUs having the same variant''' option.
 Finally click on the '''''Merge''''' button of the '''''Append TUs''''' dialog box

==== Selecting an existing TM for translating a document ====
Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''TMs and Glossaries''' button on '''File''' menu to open the dialog and select an existing TM.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Caution''': If your TM is selected in the TM list, it does not mean selected for translating a document.
To select a TM for translation, you have to tick it in the '''active''' column and click on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' dialog box.
In this example above, 2 EN>FR TMs and 2 EN>FR glossaries are set active for translation.

[[File:notice.png]] A document can have as active '''several read-only''' TMs, but '''only one writeable'''. You might need to uncheck the active checkbox from the current writeable TM in order to set a new one.

=== Glossary ===
The use of incorrect terminology can ruin an otherwise good translation. Many clients have a well-defined terminology (the jargon of the trade), compiled in the form of a glossary. By supplying this glossary to their translators, clients can impose a particular terminology. In adopting this approach, very common in technical translation, the end result should harmoniously fuse the linguistic competence of the translator with the terminological requirements of the client.

Sometimes the client will ask the translator to provide a glossary of terms arising from research undertaken during the translation. In this case, the translator must create a glossary and add specific terminology to it. This glossary building can either be done prior to translation (in an initial terminology research phase), or during the translation itself.

In many cases, however, the client provides a bilingual glossary, which has already been created during the course of previous translations. It is then up to the translator to comply strictly with it and, where appropriate, to add his or her own contributions.

When the translation work is of a more general nature (and especially if a translator is still in the process of acquiring the general vocabulary of a source language), WFA’s glossary function can also be used to itemise terminology that is encountered during the course of the translation process.

Wordfast Anywhere is designed to assist the translator in all the cases mentioned above through the implementation of its glossary function. This glossary consists of a simple tab-delimited text document, which – like the TM – can be uploaded to and downloaded from WFA, shared with other CAT programs, etc. as required.

==== Creating a glossary ====
Like TM there are several ways to create or add a glossary:
* Create an empty standard WFA glossary
* Upload an existing glossary
* Link to remote glossaries
* Link to Tilde Terminology services
* Link to a IATE glossary

To create an empty glossary, click on the '''''Create''''' button of the glossary buttons area and follow the same TM pattern.

To Upload an existing glossary, click on the '''''upload''''' button of the glossary buttons area and follow the same TM pattern.
 Allowed file types are simple tabulated text file (*.txt) (source + tab + target), Wordfast glossary text file (*.txt), Excel file (*.xls, *.xlsx) and TBX file (*.tbx).
 Excel files must be simple:
* 1st Column: Source (compulsory)
* 2nd Column: Target (compulsory)
* 3rd Column: Comment (optional)
* 4th Column: F1 (optional)
* 5th Column: F2 (optional)
* 6th Column: F3 (optional)

 Unlike with a TM, WFA cannot derive the source and target language information from the header of the glossary file; therefore this must be specified here.
 Once the glossary has been uploaded, you will receive a report summarising the operation:
 You will see how many terms have been submitted for upload, how many were rejected as invalid or duplicates well as the total number of terms added.

To add a remote glossary or Tilde Terminology services, click on the '''''add''''' button.

[[File:AddGlossary_1.png]]

Select the type in th elist box.

[[File:AddGlossary_2.png]]

For adding a remote glossary, copy paste the given URL in the URL field.
 If you have already a remote glossary with the same languages, you will need to enter a symbolic name.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test the remote glossary. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:AddGlossary_3.png]]

For setting Tilde Terminology services, you need to select source and target languages and a domain.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test if you have collections. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:addIATE.png]]

To set an IATE glossary, just select the source and target languages. Only languages from the European community are supported.
Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button and if the glossary exists, click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:addIATE2.png]]

By default not all IATE terminology is showed, but you can enable it by checking '''''Show all common terminology'''''.

==== Appending terms from a local glossary to an existing glossary in Wordfast Anywhere ====
You can upload and append a glossary to one of your existing glossaries by clicking on the '''''merge''''' button.

[[File:MergeGlo.png]]

 The process is slightly the same than uploading but you should first select the existing glossary in the list.
 You have the choice, in case there are identical entries (source and target), to add always or to not add duplicated. Select '''Add always''' or '''Do not add duplicate''' in the list box.
 Finally click on the '''''Merge''''' button.

==== Selecting one or more glossaries for translation ====
Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''TMs and Glossaries''' button on '''File''' menu to open the dialog and select an existing TM.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Caution''': If your glossary is selected in the glossary list, it does not mean selected for translation.
To select a glossary for translation, you have to tick it in the '''active''' column and click after on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' dialog box.

[[File:notice.png]] A document can have as active '''several read-only''' glossaries, but '''only one writeable'''. You might need to uncheck the active checkbox from the current writeable glossary in order to set a new one.

==== Using a glossary ====

[[File:Use glossary.png]]

* Whenever WFA recognises a term from the glossary in the source segment it highlights it against a blue background

* The terms highlighted in blue are considered as placeables. They can thus be manipulated with the [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] and [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] icons or the Ctrl+Alt+Right and Ctrl+Alt+Left shortcuts and by clicking on them with the mouse or by typing their initial letter + Tab. The difference is that, when you use the [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]] icon or the Ctrl+Alt+Down shortcut, it is the corresponding translation that is copied to the target segment. The most easy way to copy a target is probably to use the Auto-suggest feature, enabled by default. Target terms are proposed by typing the first letter of the target term of the 3 first letters of the source term. [[File:Auto-suggest target term.png]] [[File:Auto-suggest target term 2.png]].

* You can see in advance what the translation of the highlighted items is by activating the glossary panel (keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+H or by selecting it from the '''''View''''' tab => '''''Show/Hide Glossary''''' [[File:panelGlo.png]] button )

* If you want to know more about a term, i.e. the information that you or someone else has entered in the comment or F1, F2 and F3 fields, place your mouse over the source term and this information will be displayed. See above the bubble of the last term on the glossary panel (translation).

==== Adding terms to the glossary ====

[[File:Add_term.png]]

It is quite likely that you will want to incorporate terms you come across in the source text into the glossary together with their translations that arise as part of your research process. This way, your linguist’s memory will be reinforced and you are less likely to have to research the same word or phrase again in the future. WFA allows you to do this dynamically, at any time and without exiting your translation process.

First, select the term in the source text. If it consists of one word, you can simply click on it or use the Tab key to move forwards (or Shift+Tab to move backwards) through the text until you reach its position.

The word you have selected will be highlighted against a red border.

Then click on the target term in the target segment.

The selected target term will have a blue background.

[[File:Select terms.png]]

Next, invoke the Glossary Dialog Box by typing Ctrl+Alt+T, or clicking the '''''Add Term''''' [[File:TermEdit.png]] button.

If a single word, the terms you highlighted in the source and target segments should automatically appear in the Source and Target fields.
If the terms consists of more than one word, it may be necessary to paste the text into the fields from your computer’s clipboard or type the information manually.

You can also add a comment – something that may prove useful in the future, e.g. if you want to remember the situation in which this translation was used. The F1, F2 and F3 fields may be used to store word role, context, grammatical form or any other relevant text-based information.

Then click Save to confirm.

==== Fuzzy terminology recognition ====
Each time you open a segment, Wordfast Anywhere checks for the presence in the glossary of all words and terms contained in the source segment. This operation is called terminology recognition. The recognised terms are highlighted in blue in the source segment, as discussed above.

In establishing a correspondence between the terms of the source segment and the terms found in the glossary, WFA will both recognise an exact match and attempt to recognise fuzzy matches.

WFA employs a stemming algorithm for some languages (e.g. German) in order to recognise different forms of the same word that may correspond to those listed in the glossary.

For example, WFA can recognised the infinitive verb ‘besuchen’ as being related to the adjective (or past participle) ‘besucht’ due to the fact that the two words share a common stem.

Fuzzy matching can also be established by using an asterisk in combination with the term. This method overrides the stemming algorithm, allowing you to find all terms that begin with, end with or contain a particular text string.

=== Concordance search ===
Segments stored in the TM are retrieved only if they have a minimum level of correspondence with the source segment (by default 75%). However, even if the level of correspondence is not sufficient to produce a fuzzy match, the TM may still contain terms that you have previously translated and wish to use in your current translation. To search in the memory you have two options:

1) Click on the '''''Concordance''''' button [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]] or use the '''Ctrl+Alt+C''' shortcut. The following window appears:

[[File:concordance.png]]

Enter the word or text string you want to research in the Search field. WFA will search for all words that are the same or begin with the same sequence of letters as the string entered.

You can also select the word or text string with the mouse and then click on the '''''Concordance''''' button [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]] or '''Ctrl+Alt+C''' shortcut. The result will be displayed immediately.

You can edit or delete a term in the concordance search window by clicking on the edit or delete links.

You can add to your search possibilities by choosing the Advanced option:
* Two words or text strings (search terms) separated by a space: one or the other must exist in the TU
* Two terms separated by the + sign: both terms must exist
* A term ending with an asterisk: a search is performed for all text strings containing the search term.

When you use this option, a help line is displayed to remind you how this command works.

=== Searching in a glossary===
You can also search in the glossary. To do this, click the '''''Glossary Search''''' button [[File:GlossarySearch.png]] or use the '''Ctrl+Alt+G''' shortcut:

[[File: Glossary search.png]]

Type the source language word you wish to search for in the Search field and click OK. The list of glossary entries that contain the search term will be displayed.
You can edit or delete a term in the glossary search window by clicking on the edit or delete icons.

By employing an asterisk in the search term, you can expand your search to find all glossary entries that include the text string that the search term is made up of.

== TM & Glossary Advanced features ==

=== TM operations ===
==== View/Edit a TM ====
Select the TM in the list then click on the '''''Edit''''' button.

[[File:ViewEditTm.png]]

The dialog box displays the TM information. Depending on the TM type, you can edit some properties.
* Standard WFA TM : you have the possibility to define attributes of your TM, which will allow you to subsequently identify its segments. Click on the '''Attributes''' tab.
[[File:EditTmAttributes.png]]

There are five attributes in a Wordfast TM: the first is fixed and immutable, consisting of the name of the user. The other four can be defined by each user at will, but it is recommended to use attribute 1 to describe the subject of the text to be translated and attribute 2 for the client, to maintain compatibility with Wordfast Classic and Wordfast Pro users. Attributes consist of codes, usually 3 letters, followed by a brief description. In the fields referred to as TM attribute 1 to 4, enter the name of the attribute (subject, client, etc.). In the field on their right, select one of the attributes that appear on the drop-down list or, if necessary, click '''add''' to add an attribute, '''upd''' to update it or '''del''' to delete it. Whatever option is chosen, a dialog will appear asking for the code of the attribute (ID) and a brief description (Name, ignored for the Del option).
[[file:EditTmAttributes_add.png]] [[file:EditTmAttributes_update.png]] [[file:EditTmAttributes_delete.png]]

Dynamic codes : Predefined attributes can be added by entering a code between accolades as explain in the help.
[[File:EditTmAttributes_help.png]]

* Remote private Wordfast server

[[File:EditRemoteTm.png]] You can edit the workgroup ID and/or the symbolic name.

==== Download a TM ====
This is available only for standard WFA TM.

[[File:DownloadTm.png]]

From the Downloaded file format drop-down list you can select either the Wordfast TM TXT format, the Standard TMX format, the MS Excel XLS format or the Bilingual document TXLF format.
 Click on the '''Download''' button.

===== Filters when downloading a TM =====
Select ''"Filtering (advanced options)"'' on the second drop-down list and click on the '''Download''' button.

[[File:Tm_download2.JPG]]

This will analyse the TM and let you apply some filters to select what you want to download from the TM.

[[File:Tm_download_filter.JPG]]

[[File:Tm_download_filter2.JPG]]

Once filters are selected click on the '''Download''' button to finish the download.

==== Removing a TM ====
After clicking on the top '''Remove''' button on the TM side, this red warning is displayed to confirm the deletion.
 For TMs that are not Wordfast Anywhere standard TMs only the link to the external TM is cut.

[[File:DeleteTm.png]]

==== Quick TM Share ====
By clicking on the small '''share''' button on top of the TM side, you can share quickly a TM to somebody else having an account in Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:CreateTMShare.png]]

Click on the '''''Add guest''''' button and enter his email address (which should be his account login), then click '''Add'''.

[[File:CreateTMShare2.png]]

You can change the privilege of your guest on your TM. Finally to save the share, click on the '''''Save''''' button.

==== TMs Tools ====
===== Reversing a TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmReverse.png]]

Select a TM to reverse and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a TM already exists with the same name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Assembling several TMs in one TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmAssembled.png]]

Select one or more TMs to assemble in one TM and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a TM already exists with the same name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 if '''keep old assigned name''' is unchecked this information will be lost.
 if '''keep variants''' is checked, the TU will not be changed, otherwise, it take the given language pair.
 if '''keep user ID''' is checked, the TU will not be changed, otherwise, it will take your user ID.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Edit a TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmEdit.png]]

Select a TM to edit and click on the '''Run''' button.
 The TM will be opened as a temporary associated document in the document panel.

[[File:ToolsTmEdit1.png]]

Here you can for example update target segments, edit source segments and delete TU. Those changes will be stored straight on your TM.
 Bear in mind that this is a TM although it looks like a document.

After the TM edition, the temporary document must be deleted because it is a static copy of the TM.
 The tool can only edit and delete existing TUs and the TM size is limited to 100000 TUs.

=== Glossary operations ===
==== View/Edit a glossary ====
Select the glossary in the list then click on the '''''View/Edit''''' button.

[[File:ViewEditGlo.png]]

The dialog box displays the glossary information. Depending on the glossary type, you can edit some properties.

[[File:EditRemoteGlo.png]]

[[File:EditTildeGlo.png]]

==== Download a glossary ====
This is available only for standard WFA glossary.

[[File:DownloadGlo.png]]

Click on the '''Download''' button.

==== Removing a glossary ====
After clicking on the top '''Remove''' button on the glossary side, this red warning is displayed to confirm the deletion.
 For glossaries that are not standard only the link to the external glossary is cut.

[[File:DeleteGlo.png]]

==== Quick Glossary Share ====
By clicking on the small '''share''' button on top of the glossary side, you can share quickly a glossary to somebody else having an account in Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:CreateGloShare.png]]

Click on the '''''Add guest''''' button and enter his email address (which should be his account login), then click '''Add'''.

[[File:CreateGloShare2.png]]

You can change the privilege of your guest on your glossary. Finally to save the share, click on the '''''Save''''' button.

==== Glossaries tools ====
===== Reversing a glossary=====
[[File:ToolsGloReverse.png]]

Select a glossary to reverse and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a glossary already exists with the reversed glossary name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Assembling several glossaries in one glossary =====
[[File:ToolsGloAssembled.png]]

Select two or more glossaries to assemble and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a glossary already exists with the assembled glossary name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 if '''keep old assigned name''' is unchecked this information will be lost.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

=== TMs and glossaries shares ===

You can allow other users to share your TM as well as your glossary and you can see the TMs and the glossaries shared to you by others.
To manage all kind of share, click on the bottom '''''Share''''' button of the TMs and glossaries dialog. At that time you will receive the following:

[[File:Tmglo_share_1.png]]

* If you have already enabled the sharing of your TMs and your glossaries with other users, they will be displayed in the '''My shares to other users''' table. You can revoke sharing with any of these users. To do this, select the user in question and click '''Revoke'''. To add or update an existing share click on the '''Add''' or '''Edit''' buttons and see the chapter '''Add and edit shares to other users''' below.
* You can visualize all the TMs and glossaries that have been shared to you in the '''My shares from other users''' table. You can end any share by selecting it and clicking on the '''Remove''' button.
* You can also share your TMs and glossaries to applications like Wordfast Classic and Wordfast Pro by generating keys. they are displayed in the '''My shares to applications''' table. See below the chapter '''Sharing to applications'''.

==== Add and edit shares to other users ====

[[File:Tmglo_share_2.png]]

[[File:Tmglo_share_edit.png]]

[[File:Tmglo_share_3.png]]

==== Sharing to applications ====
Wordfast Anywhere will generate up to 5 keys to share one or more TMs and, optionally, glossaries.
The key is needed for the external application to connect to that specific share.

[[File:Tmglo_share_app_1.png]]

If you want to add the TMs and glossaries currently used, click on the '''Add active TMs and glossaries''', otherwise click on the '''Add''' button to choose a TM and the '''Add''' button to choose a glossary.
 Choose the right privilege and the number of keys needed, then click on the the '''Save''' button.
 The keys will be generated and listed in the '''My shares to application''' table. See below.

[[File:Tmglo_share_app_2.png]]

For instance this can be used on Wordfast Pro 3.4.9, where there is a tab for Wordfast Anywhere TM and glossaries.

[[File:Wpftab.png]]

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QVOMOYfR2ws&feature=em-subs_digest this video] about how to do it.

 Although the API key is for a combined TM and glossary, on Wordfast Pro 3.4.9 you need to add it twice: one for TM and one for glossary

[[Wordfast Pro]] users can check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=S7QCHNpRtKo&feature=em-subs_digest this video].

= Translation =
== Preparation of the translation environment ==
Before beginning the translation of a document using a CAT tool, you must first have an active Translation Memory.

'''Note''': an initial TM was automatically set up when you created your account.

The TM consists of a database, which will record each source language segment (i.e. sentence, phrase) that you translate, together with the corresponding target language segment. As it grows, this increasingly allows you to obtain translations of phrases made previously that are the same or similar to the one you are currently translating.

For more information check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Translation_Memory|Translation Memory basics]]'''.

== Translating ==
To start the translation, you must first open the initial segment.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:StartNext.png]] '''''Start/Next''''' button or use the ''Alt + Down'' shortcut . When you do this, the document area is transformed: the segment is displayed in light blue block (source), a grey block (target) is placed just below it and the rest of your document is shown on the rest of the page. The cursor is located in the grey block.

Translate the segment in the grey block

[[File:StartTrans.png|1200px]]

After translating this segment, you can continue with your translation. To move to the next segment, click on the [[File:StartNext.png]] '''''Start/Next''''' or use the ''Alt+Down'' shortcut. Remember this shortcut, as you will use it for each segment you translate. You can also move to previous segment by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Previous.png]] '''''Previous''''' or use the ''Alt + Up'' shortcut.

[[File:notice.png]] '''''When translating, the segments are saved automatically in the translation memory and on the database system as soon as you go to the next segment.'''''

Now translate the segment as before.

Now that you get the idea, you can continue to translate. Remember: to move from one segment to the next, use ''Alt+Down''. To return to the previous segment (to correct something that you subsequently realised was mistaken), use ''Alt+Up''.

Following are some '''other considerations''' regarding the translation of segments.

'''Note''': Most browser / OS combinations, including Firefox, Safari and Chrome, have their own spell checker – in some cases it may be necessary for you to activate it. You can also use '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Spellcheck|Spellcheck]]'''

There is color code for the target block:
* Grey is the no match from the TM (score=0)
* Green is the full match from the TM (score=100)
* Yellow is a fuzzy match from the TM (score between 50 to 99)
* Orange is a MT proposition
* Purple is the color when the segment has been modified by the editor

Score information can be found in different places depending on the view.
For '''Classic view''' it can be found on ''<}score{>'' tag between source and target segment.

[[File:ScoreC.png|1200px]]

For '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views''' there is a column for the score.

[[File:ScoreH.png|1200px]]

[[File:ScoreV.png|1200px]]

=== Tags ===

Before translating this new segment, pay attention to the tag <1>, which appears here at the end. WFA is not a word processor and thus does not concern itself with a specific representation of the document's formatting. You'll see no changes in size or typeface, no bold or italic characters. Instead, this information is encoded and represented by what we call "tags", e.g. <1>. By slowly passing your mouse over this tag you will see what it represents. This tag is not to be translated, but it should be placed on the appropriate position in the target segment. If you want to recopy a tag from the source segment please type < to trigger the tags proposal.

[[File:tagProposal.png]]

You can also copy it by using the comands on '''Translation''' tab: [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] '''Next Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Right'') and [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] '''Previous Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Left'') to navigate the source segment to the desired tag. A red frame indicates the selected item. Then position the cursor in the target segment and click on [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]] '''Copy Pl.'''(''Ctrl+Alt+Down'').

Differences on the formatting tags (<1>, <2>) between source and target segment can make the file filter aligner have difficulties to build up the translated document.

Check there is no ''segments with tag difference'' using one of this options:
# Click on [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button on '''File''' tab to get a report. Check if there are any ''segments with tag difference''. Use '''''Show Outline''''' [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button on '''View''' tab to go straight to one segment.
# Click on [[File:FindReplace.png]] '''''Find & Replace''''' button on '''Edit''' tab. Go to ''Miscellaneous'' tab and run a ''Tag difference'' search. Segments with tag differences will be listed.

On the listed segments you must pay attention to:
# There is no target tag missing that exists on source.
# The target tag order is different from source order. For example [<1>text text<2>] on source but [<2>text text<1>] on target.
# The target tag content is not identical with the source tag. You can see the content of the tag when the mouse is over it.

[[File:Warning.png]] We '''do not recommend to use copy/paste or drag and drop''' to copy the tags as it can copy more than the eye can see and be problematic. It is better to use the the auto-suggest feature with tags (whenever you want to add a tag just type < and the list of tags from source will be proposed for selection) or the [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]] '''Copy Placeable''' on '''Translation''' tab.

== Main commands ==

=== Provisional segment ===
You may be unsure whether your translation of a segment is correct. To avoid having to interrupt your translation process, you can mark the segment as provisional.

It will be identified by a yellow square at the beginning of the line for '''Classic view''' or at the end of the row for '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views'''.

To mark a segment as provisional, use the F10 key or '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mark.png]] '''''Provisional'''''.

When you have resolved any doubts, simply return to the marked segment and make your corrections. Use ''Alt+Down'' ( [[File:StartNext.png]] ) or ''Alt-Up'' ( [[File:Previous.png]] ) to validate the segment and erase the yellow square.

=== Auto propagate ===
Use this command to translate a segment and automatically propagate the current segment changes through all the document to other segments having the same source.

Find it in '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Autopropagate.png]] '''''Auto Propagate'''''.

=== Note ===
You can also write a note to be attached to the segment for the duration of the translation (in a similar manner to a Post-ItTM). You can use this to remind yourself of something important about this segment or to pass information on to people who will have access to your translation, such as reviewers.

To write a note, click on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Edit_Note16.png]] '''''Edit Note'''''.

The following text box will be displayed:

[[File:Editnote.png|1200px]]

Write your note in the text box and click Save. You can cancel the operation by clicking Cancel. In the case of an existing note, you can edit and validate it by clicking Save, or delete it by clicking Remove.

A green square will be placed at the beginning of the segment to indicate that a note is attached. By passing the mouse pointer over this square, you will see a rectangle containing the text of the note.

It will be identified by a grey square with an "i" in it at the beginning of the line for '''Classic view''' or at the end of the row for '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views'''.

[[File:Editnote2.png|1200px]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Notes can be downloaded by going to '''''File''''' tab => [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' and choosing the '''''Notes Report'''''

=== Copying the original segment ===
Sometimes a segment contains very little to translate: for example, when it consists almost entirely of proper names or is made up of a website address. In this case, it may be preferable to copy the entire source segment to the target segment and make any adjustments there.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CopySource.png]] '''''Copy Source'''''. or use the shortcut ''Alt-Ins'.

=== Erasing the target segment ===
Sometimes it is necessary to erase what you have just written in the target segment.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Cleanup_Project16.png]] '''''Del Target'''''. or use the shortcut ''Ctrl+Alt+X''.

This button has a toggle behaviour through: Empty target, Remove tags and Restore.

=== Insertion of a special character like the non-breaking space ===
When you write in French, some characters must be accompanied by a non-breaking space: e.g. before the colon, semicolon, exclamation mark, question mark, exclamation mark, before and after quotes, thousands separators, and so on. In WFA, a non-breaking space is represented by the symbol < >.

However, such spaces cannot be automatically handled in an Internet browser as they are when using a text editor such as Word. Therefore it will be necessary to add them manually. By default, a non-breaking space is inserted at the cursor location by clicking on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Insert_c1.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 1'''''.

Two other special characters can be inserted like the curly quotes. Use '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Insert_c2.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 2''''' and [[File:Insert_c3.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 3'''''.

You can configure these 3 special characters in WFA setup (see '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Pandora.27s_box_tab|Pandora’s box]]''').

=== Expanding a segment ===
As we have seen, WFA considers that the segment is terminated when it encounters a segment termination marker. However, in some cases this segmentation is in error. For example, when WFA’s segmentation engine meets the following sentence:
''On pense aux conseils de Prof. Jacques Lacan:''
it can interpret the segment as ending with ''Prof.'' because a full stop is used as an end of segment marker. In this case we can command WFA to expand the segment, that is to say, to append the subsequent segment to it.

[[File:exspand1.png]]

This is done with the ''Alt+Pg'' dn shortcut or '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Expand_Segment16.png]] '''''Expand'''''.

[[File:exspand2.png]]

It is important to expand segments when the segmentation has not been performed correctly because this will increase the chances of it corresponding with a translation memory segment. For example, the segment ''On pense aux conseils de Prof.'' will have little chance of having a similarity of over 75% with another. By contrast, if the sentence ''On pense aux conseils de Prof. Jacques Lacan:'' is in the TM, when WFA encounters the source sentence ''On pense aux conseils de Professeur Jacques Lacan'', it will offer the existing translation, as it has 90% similarity (it is only the word Professor that is not the same).

A segment cannot be expanded if it is terminated by an end of paragraph or end of cell marker, a page break or a tab.

You should not have to expand all segments containing abbreviations that end with a full stop. A comma-separated, modifiable list of common language-specific abbreviations is included in WFA . This can be accessed and modified via the segmentation tab in the configuration dialog box [case-sensitive, optional letters are enclosed in square brackets].

[[File:Abbrev.png]]

=== Shrinking a segment ===
If, on the other hand, two segments are erroneously displayed together due to an absence of an end of segment marker, you can also shrink the segment with the shortcut ''Alt-Pg'' up or ''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:ShrinkSeg.png]] '''''Shrink'''''.

=== Placeables ===

A placeable is any term or expression contained in the source segment that is defined as such. WFA provides shortcuts for inserting them into the target segment, thus both saving time and reducing the potential for typing errors.

WFA predefines as placeables:
*Numbers
*Tags
*Words beginning with, or otherwise containing, capital (upper case) letters
*Words or phrases appearing in the source text that have matching items stored in the '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Glossary|Glossary]]'''.

We have already seen how to copy tags. Given that a tag is a placeable, the procedure is the same: to copy any placeable, simply select it with the comands on '''Translation''' tab: [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] '''Next Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Right'') and [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] '''Previous Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Left'').

You also have the possibility of clicking on any term in the source text, thus placing it under focus and temporarily transforming it into a placeable. A red frame indicates the item selected.

Next, position the cursor in the target segment at the point where the placeable should be positioned or double-click (click and drag) to select the word (phrase) to be replaced and click on the on [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]] '''Copy Pl.'''(''Ctrl+Alt+Down''). The placeable is copied to the relevant position in the target segment.

In this sentence, the placeable elements, selected by ''Ctrl+Alt+Right'' or [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]], are:

[[File:place1.png]]
(starts with a capital letter)

[[File:place2.png]]
(number)

[[File:place3.png]]
(tag)

And, if necessary, any term may be designated as a placeable simply by clicking on it:

[[File:place4.png]]

As you translate the text, you only want to place those elements that should not be translated:

[[File:place5.png]]

At this point, you want to write ‘Chenjerai.’. However it may be faster and more efficient (as well as reducing the possibility of error) to select the item using ''Ctrl+Alt+Right'' or [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] (or even by simply clicking on it) and place it into the segment target with ''Ctrl+Alt+Down'' or [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]].

[[File:place6.png]]

The following proper noun ‘Hove’ is also a placeable, so you can repeat the procedure. Simply use the '''Tab key''' on your keyboard to advance from one placeable to the next (or '''Shift+Tab''' to move in the opposite direction).

[[File:place7.png]]

You can also use the ''Ctrl+Alt+Up'' shortcut or [[File:Dropdown.png]] '''Toggle Pl.'' on '''Translation''' tab to transform terms in the source segment into placeables.

For even greater efficiency, if you type a letter that begins a word or term in the source segment and then successively press Tab, all words or terms beginning with that letter are successively copied to the target segment. For example, in the above sentence, typing ''l'' followed by '''Tab''' will copy ''lyrique'' to the target. Each time you press the Tab key, the word or term that has been copied to the target segment will be replaced by the next
word or term appearing in the source segment that begins with the same letter, i.e. ''le'', ''laisse'' and so on.

=== Case changer ===
Use this feature to toggle through: lowercase, uppercase and proper name for a word. This feature can be used in one word (by putting the cursor inside the word), or with more than one word (by selecting several words with the mouse or Shift+Left/Right Arrow).
Beware that some times it gets crazy with the first and last word.

Use it bu clicking on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:CaseChanger.png]] '''''Case Changer'''''.

=== Increase target height ===
You can increase the target height by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Increase_target.png]] '''''Target Height'''''.

=== Web Speech Beta ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY available for Chrome. Currently disabled due to browser security.'''

This is a beta implementation that uses Google Web Speech API to insert your dictation into the target segment.

To use it, first open the segment and then click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mic.png]] '''''Web Speech Beta''''' button to start the dictation. The icon will change to indicate recording is on. To stop dictation click again on the button.

You can add a shortcut to this command.

You can jump to the next segment as always and keep on dictating. Or you can stop dictation, jump to the next segment and start dictation again.

A provisional transcription will be shown as an auto-suggest text and the final transcription will be inserted on the target segment. The provisional transcription might not be accurate while final transcription should be quite accurate and may be different from provisional transcription.

Please take into account that this is a beta implementation and that voice transcription is done online so there can be delays when dictating. We encourage you to use it and give us some feedback.

[[File:Warning.png]] It can be that Chrome keeps asking you to allow the use of the microphone every time. You need to check the Chrome settings: "Privacy>Content Settings>Microphone>Manage exceptions". There you should have an exception for https:freetm.com.

If you are connected to the site via HTTS the grant is permanent, if you use HTTP, you are asked each time.

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rR88md-xyik&feature=em-uploademail this video] about how to use this tool.

Check this links for more information:

[https://support.google.com/chrome/answer/3123708?p=settings_manage_exceptions&rd=1 Chrome Exceptions]

[https://support.google.com/chrome/answer/6148059?hl=en Chrome website permissions]

=== Edit Source ===
Using '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:EditSource16.png]] '''''Edit Source''''' will help you to correct the source text in order to have valid TU in memory.

This will not change the source file and obviously will not automatically change the target segment.

=== Ending the translation ===
If for any reason you want to stop translating, you have three choices:
* Close the translation and validate the current segment in the TM ('''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close & Commit''''' or ''Alt+End'')
* Close the translation without validating it ('''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:Close.png]] '''''Close''''' or ''Shift+Alt+End'')
* Clear the content of the target segment, together with any attached note, by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:Close_restore.png]] '''''Close & Delete''''' .

== After Translation ==

When your translation is finished, you use one of our '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Review|Review]]''' tools before '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Download|Download]]''' it.

= Tools =
=== Downloading TXML file ===
You can download your document in TXML format, the standard working file format used by WFA. This permits you, for example, to send the file to a colleague for review using Wordfast Anywhere or Pro. Once reviewed and corrected, you can upload it again.

To download your working file go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual TXML'''''.

[[File:DownloadTypesList.png]]

If your translation is incomplete or contains provisional segments or notes, you will receive this warning:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

At this point you have the choice to accept (OK) or cancel (Cancel) to return to your translation. If you accept, you will need to consider the following dialog:

[[File:DownloadOptions2a.png]]

You can optionally instruct WFA to copy the source segment to the target segment if it is blank (check Copy source to target if target is empty) and/or to ignore language variations, e.g. to not make a distinction between British and American English (check No language variants).

Choose the way to download the file and click '''''OK''''' to donwload the file.

=== Merging TXML files ===
If you already have a file in TXML format you can upload it to your workspace. To do this go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:Mergetms16.png]] '''Merge Txml''' button. At this point you must complete the following dialog box:

[[File:Mergetxml1.PNG]]

By checking Merge an existing document, all documents that exist in your workspace will be listed according to language pair, and you will have to choose which will be merged with the file you intend to upload.

You can also set WFA to update the TM corresponding to the file you upload (check Update or create a TM with a bilingual document). Check Merge an existing TM and choose which TM to update from the list displayed. You will also need to determine whether, in the case of identical source segments, new TUs should be added to existing ones (Keep existing TUs) or whether they should replace them (Overwrite existing TUs). If, on the other hand, you prefer to create a new TM, click on Create a new TM. At this point, you will have the opportunity to give this new TM a name, if you have more than one TM for the same language pair. Then click Upload to upload the file or Close to exit without doing anything.

Note that operations performed on the document are independent from memory-related operations, allowing you to update only the document, or only the memory, or both.
If you have clicked Upload, you will receive the following message:

[[File:Mergetxml2.png]]

Click Browse to navigate through your directories and select your file, then click Submit to perform the upload or Cancel to cancel the operation. After the merge operation has been successfully performed, a report will appear showing how many segments were merged.

[[File:Mergetxml3.png]]

=== Other downloads ===
You can also download the working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments, usable by Wordfast Classic (and Trados Workbench).

[[File:Bilingualwordfastclassic.png]]

This will allow your document to be proofread by a Wordfast Classic user. Caution, this download is only available for files formatted as .doc and .rtf. Unlike the TXML file, this format cannot be imported into WFA.

To download your working file in bilingual MS-Word format, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the '''''Download''''' button and choose '''Bilingual Doc original''' option. This option is only available if your source file is a MS Word file.

[[File:DownloadTypesList.png]]

If your translation is incomplete or contains provisional segments or notes, you will receive this warning:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

At this point you have the choice to accept (OK) or cancel (Cancel) to return to your translation. If you accept, you will need to respond to the following message:

[[File:Bilingualwordfastclassic2.png]]

Following the same steps you can download this other files:

* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments without placeholders Bilingual. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC no placeholders''''' option.
* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments with placeholders Bilingual. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC with placeholders''''' option.
* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments with tag-content as placeholder. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC tag content''''' option.
* Your translated file, in plain text format, without any formatting. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Unformatted Text''''' option.

=== Find & Replace ===
It is often necessary to locate a word or text string in a file that has been translated. For this we use the Doc Find and Replace function. Go to '''''Edit''''' tab and click on the [[File:FindReplace.png]] '''''Find & Replace''''' button.

As with other functions that require the current segment to be closed, you will receive a warning that the current segment will be closed without being saved. If you agree, click OK, otherwise click Cancel to cancel the transaction and save your work.

[[File:Warning.png]] By default search is only done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:SR1.png]]

'''''Find & Replace''''' dialog has 4 tabs performing different actions.

* Use '''Find''' tab to locate a word or text in your document.
* Use '''Find/Replace''' tab to locate and replace a word or text in your document.
* Use '''Go to Segment''' tab to search for single segments (1,5,68,499) or a range of segments (25-66).
* Use '''Miscellaneous''' tab to perform different types of searches such as look for '''provisional''' or '''untranslated''' segments, or segments with '''notes''' or '''tag differences'''.

[[File:Notice.png]] You can use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:Warning.png]] Not all the options are always available.
==== Find ====
Use '''Find''' tab.
Type the word or text you want to find and click '''Find''' button to start a search. When search is done hits are highlighted and the number of hits is shown on the dialog.

[[File:SR6.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] By default search is only done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:SR7.png]]

==== Replace ====
Use '''Find/Replace''' tab. Type the word/text you want to find and the word/text you want it replaced for and click '''Find''' button to start a search. When search is done hits are highlighted and the number of hits is shown on the dialog.

[[File:SR8.png]]

It may happen that '''Replace''', '''Replace/Find''' and '''Replace All''' buttons are not available. This happens because the first search does not move you to the first hit, you have to click again '''Find''' to move to the next hit and then replace buttons will be available. Use them to replace, replace and move to next hit or replace all hits.

Replace can only be done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Go to Segment ====
Use '''Go to Segment''' tab. Use it to find specific segments. This can be an alternative to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''.
You can type single segments separated by commas (1,5,68,499) or a range of segments (25-66).

[[File:SR4.png]]

Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Miscellaneous ====
Use '''Miscellaneous''' tab. This 6 types of search do not require to type a word/text but will help you locate segments with some particularities. This can be an alternative to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''.

[[File:SR5a.png]]

You can search for:

* '''Provisional''' segments.
* '''Untranslated''' segments.
* Segments with '''Tag difference'''.
* Segments with '''Notes'''.
* Segments with '''Double spaces'''.
* Segments with '''Revisions'''.

Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Advanced search options ====

Using the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button you can access some advanced search options:

[[File:SR2.png]]

* Search for '''Whole Word'''.
* Do a '''Case sensitive''' search.
* Search for words that start/end by the characters using * as a joker. For example searching for *able will find: movable, payable, breakable,...etc. And searching for hand* will find: handbag, handmade, handbook,...etc
* Search on Source, Target or both. This can only be used in '''Find''' tab.
* Mark each found target as provisional.
* Create a note for each replaced segment.
* Update the TM for each replaced segment.
* Do a wrap search
* Change search direction: Backward or Forward.

=== Analyze ===
Before providing a translation quotation, you may wish to analyze the source text to determine the extent of the work required. WFA provides an analytical tool for this purpose. To do this, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the '''''Analyze''''' button and choose '''Analyze'''. If your file is big and you do not want to wait, choose '''Analyze in Background'''.

A progress message is displayed on the status bar. Then the analysis results will be displayed:

[[File:Analysis.png]]

According to the number of repetitions (identical segments that appear more than once in the document) or the percentage of segments that correspond either completely (100%) or partially (<100%) to matches in the TM, you will be able to precisely estimate the volume of work actually requiring to be translated. After having examined the analysis report, click Close.

=== Statistics ===
WFA allows you to see what progress you have made with your translation at any time. To do this, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button.

A statistical report on your translation will be displayed:

[[File:Statistics.png]]

You will see the number of source and target segments (with the percentage already translated in brackets); the number of source and current target words; the number of source and target tags and if there is any segmental discrepancy in terms of differences between the number and content of the source and target tags (segments with tag difference); the number of segments not stored in the TM (segments flagged not saved in TM); the number of provisional segments (provisional segments) and notes (segments with notes). The report also displays which segments remain to be translated. After viewing the statistics, click Close.

Another important indicator is always present on the status bar: it tells you on which segment you currently are in relation to the total number of segments in the document. In this example, the document has 149 segments in total and you are currently on the 68:

[[File:Foot1.png]]

=== Alignment ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This tool is not managed by WFA in case there is any problem use the '''Help''' in the tool, the third tab, to report your problem. You can also sent an email to '''converterhelp@wordfast.com'''

When you begin to translate with a CAT tool you may not be able to derive the maximum benefit from it if you do not yet have a translation memory. Or, a client may have source and target documents from a previous translation but cannot supply you with a TM. In this case, you can quickly derive a TM by performing an "alignment" on the documents you have already translated prior to using WFA for your translation work by using the alignment tool.

To do this, go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab and click on the [[File:WF Update16.png]] '''''AutoAligner''''' button.

A new page will open, displaying the following dialog:

[[File:Align.png]]

Follow the instructions to upload the files and align them to get the TM from the alignment.

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HVXTQ5Wb_Eg&feature=em-uploademail this video] about how to use this tool.

You can then upload this TM to be used in WFA.

[[File:Warning.png]] This tool is not managed by WFA in case there is any problem use the '''Help''' in the tool, the third tab, to report your problem. You can also sent an email to '''converterhelp@wordfast.com'''

=== Preview ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Preview|Preview]]'''

=== Transcheck ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Transcheck|Transcheck]]'''

=== Spellcheck ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Spellcheck|Spellcheck]]'''

=== Pretranslation ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.

Go to [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]] '''''Pre-translation''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to open the dialog:

[[File:Pretrans1.png]]

Configure how you want the pre-translation to run:
* Activate '''Fuzzy matches'''
* Set what to do when there is no match from the TM. For setting a MT check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Machine_translation|this]]'''
* Leverage segment scores. Make sure the owner of the document (translation agency or company) has agreed to leverage empty segments.

If your file is big and has many segments run pre-translation in background by clicking on '''Pre Translate in background''' so you can keep working in other things. Otherwise use '''Pre-translate''' button run pre-translation.
Ad the end of the process you'll get a report with the result.

[[File:Pretrans2.png]]

=== Offline Review Tool ===
Use Offline review tool to review a file outside Wordfast Anywhere using a bilingual file and then update the changes.

To get the bilingual file go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Offline review DOC'''''.

[[File:Ofrt11a.png]]

This will download a bilingual file like this.

[[File:ofrt2.png]]

[[File:Notice.png]] Read the disclaimer on the download window and the instructions at the top of the file.

[[File:Warning.png]] Remember to add the tags on the target column as you would do on any translation. '''''Missing tags''''' can cause problems when merging back the file into WFA.

After editing '''only''' the target segments an saving the file you can import it to be merged with the file in Wordfast Anywhere. To do this go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:mergetms16_menu.png]] '''''Merge Offline Review''''' button.

[[File:ofrt3.png]]

A report will be shown with the result of the merge.

[[File:ofrt4.png]]

=== Extract Frequents ===
Use [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]] '''''Extract Frequents''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to create anew file that will contain only the repeated segments of the document.

A first report is created showing the percentage of segments that have an occurrence greater than 2.

[[File:ExtractFrequents1.png]]

Set the '''minumum occurrence''' that you want to extract and click on '''Extract and Open''' to create a new file with the occurrence segments.

=== Go to WFP4 ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.
You can open your document in '''Wordfast Pro 4 Online''' by using [[File:About wordfast16.png]] '''''WFP4''''' button on '''''File''''' tab.

WFP4o will use several settings on WFA along with the TMs and glossaries, so all settings must be done on inside WFA before. Also bear in mind to save your work on WFP4o before switching back to WFA.

[[File:Wf4disclaimer.png]]

Read carefully the disclaimer dialog before clikcing in '''Continue to WFP4o'''.

=== File information ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.

Go to [[File:Modify Project16.png]] '''''File Info''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to open the dialog with information about the file:

[[File:Fileinfo.png]]

=== Split file ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''''This option is only available when the document is closed.'''''

You can split a file in 4 parts by using [[File:Split.png]] '''''Split''''' button on '''''File''''' tab.

[[File:Split1.png]]

For each part a txml file will be created with the corresponding part of the file. The name of the txml files will contain information about which part is. For instance '''_[1of2]''' means the file was splitted into 2 parts and that this file correspond to the first part.

By default files are splited in equally parts, but you can change this and set the boundaries that better suit you.

[[File:Split3.png]]

'''Downloading one of the splited parts will download a TXML file''', but you can choose to download also the entire file in the original format.

[[File:Split2.png]]

Use
[[File:Join.png]] '''''Join''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to put the parts together again. [[File:Warning.png]] '''''This option is only available when the document is closed.'''''

=== Share file ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''This option is only available when the document is closed and is selected from the list.'''

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Share is only possible between Wordfast Anywhere users.'''

You can share your document with '''several Wordfast Anywhere users'''. To do so go to [[File:Share.png]] '''''Share''''' on '''''File''''' tab.

[[File:Share3.png]]

Additional files can be added using '''''Add''''' button on the Document section of the dialogue. If the file belong to a package, all package documents will be added otherwise it will be all documents with the same source and target languages.

To start sharing click on '''''Add''''' button after the Document section to add a new guest. Repeat it to ad more guest users.

[[File:Share_addGuest2.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Guest email must be a valid Wordfast Anywhere account.'''

For each guest two properties can be chosen:
* '''''Share as read-only'''''. This means guest will only access the document in a read-only mode, but no edition will be allowed.
* '''''Keep online (not downloadable)'''''. This means guest will access the file but would not be allowed to download it.

Additionally, you can share a TM and/or glossary with the file.

To do it, use the buttons on the '''''Translation Memories''''' and '''''Glossaries''''' tabs
* '''''Linked to document''''' will add the corresponding TM/glossary associated to the document.
* '''''Add''''' will let you choose which TM/glossary with the same language pair you want to share
* '''''Remove''''' will revoke the share on the selected TM/glossary from the list.

Once guests are added, they are presented on a list on the main dialogue. Any guest will be allowed edit rights unless '''''Share as read-only''''' is check. Owner will always have edit rights.

[[File:Share_mainList2.png]]

Repeat this process to add more guests.

You can use '''''Duplicate''''' button to add a new guest with the same settings than a existing one. Use '''''Revoke''''' button to finish a share with a guest

Check '''''History''''' on the document to force the use of revisions in the document.

As owner and several guests can have edit rights '''a reservation system is used to ensure only one user can edit a segment at a time'''. When a user opens the document the free segments loaded in Document Panel will automatically reserved for him adding a green share icon at the end of the segment. Segments reserved by other users are shown with the same share icon but in red color.
'''The reservation of segments will end when the user closes the document'''.

[[File:Share_reserved.png]]

When a user opens a shared document that is being used by an other user a pop-up message is show to warn about that.

[[File:Share_message.png]]

Also a notification is send to the other working users that a new user has opened the document.

[[File:Share_notification.png]]

Jumping to the next block will release the previous segments and will reserve the new segments being loaded.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''There is no live update of the segments reserved by other users. Which means segments need to be refreshed manually on Document Panel by loading them again, for instance by jumping to a different block and back.'''

To help to know when a user closes the document and releases his segments, a notification is send to the other working users.

[[File:Share_notificationEnd.png]]

'''''To finish a share''''' with a guest owner users need to use '''''Revoke''''', and to remove all the shares use '''''Revoke all'''''. This is a button on the Share dialog ([[File:Share.png]] '''''Share''''' on '''''File''''' tab).

Guest users will not see the share dialogue. They should use [[File:Revoke.png]] '''''Revoke''''' on '''''File''''' tab to finish the share.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Remember Share/Revoke are only available when the document is closed.'''

=== Offline Mode ===
On those situations when there is an internet connection cut or when WFA server is unavailable, WFA will turn on '''Offline Mode'''.

'''Offline Mode''' lets you work offline. It allows you to translate the segments that are currently loaded on the ''Document Panel''.

The translated segments are stored locally and automatically committed to WFA server as soon as the connection is recovered.

If the TM you are using is writeable, TUs will be automatically updated from the document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Be aware that there will be some messages telling you about going in/out of Offline Mode and segments being saved. Some features will not be available during Offline Mode.

[[File:Warning.png]] This feature has nothing to do with Offline Review Tool (OFRT). For information about OFRT, check the index at the top of this Manual.

[[File:Warning.png]] We recommend not to close the browser till synchronization back is done.

= WFA Configuration =
== Features and Shortcuts ==

{|class="wikitable"
|'''Menu tab'''
|'''Feature'''
|'''Shortcut'''
|'''Icon'''
|'''Information'''
|-
|Translation
|Start translation / Next segment
|Alt+Down
|[[File:StartNext.png]]
|Starts a translation session by opening the currently selected segment / Commits the current segment to TM and opens the next segment.
|-
|Translation
|Previous segment
|Alt+Up
|[[File:Previous.png]]
|Commits the current segment to TM and opens the previous segment.
|-
|Translation
|Close & Commit
|Alt+End
|[[File:CloseSave.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment and committing it to the TM.
|-
|Translation
|Close
|Shift+Alt+End
|[[File:Close.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment without committing it to the TM.
|-
|Translation
|Close & Delete
|Alt+Delete
|[[File:Close restore.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment and deleting the target with any note. Do not commit to TM.
|-
|Translation
|Provisional segment
|F10
|[[File:Mark.png]]
|Marks a segment as provisional with a yellow Post-It.
|-
|Translation
|Copy Source
|Alt+Insert
|[[File:CopySource.png]]
|Copies the source segment over the target segment.
|-
|Translation
|Expand
|Alt+PgDn
|[[File:ExpandSeg.png]]
|Expands a segment, if it actually extends beyond the punctuation mark (wrong segmentation). Note that a segment cannot be extended beyond a paragraph mark, page break, tabulator, or table cell.
|-
|Translation
|Shrink
|Alt+PageUp
|[[File:ShrinkSeg.png]]
|Reverses any use of the Expand segment command or reduce the size of a segment.
|-
|Translation
|To Fuzzy
|Shift+Ctrl+PgDn
|[[File:TranslateUntilFuzzy.png]]
|Translates until a non-exact match is found.
|-
|Translation
|Toggle empty
|Ctrl+Alt+X
|[[File:Cleanup Project16.png]]
|Empty the target - remove the tags from the target - restore the original target.
|-
|Translation
|Auto Propagate
|
|[[File:autopropagate.png]]
|Auto propagate segment change through all the document for same source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Toggle Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Up
|[[File:dropdown.png]]
|Transforms all the terms in the source segment into placeables. If repeated, returns to the previous mode.
|-
|Translation
|Next Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Right
|[[File:Next_Placeable16.png]]
|Selects the next placeable element in the source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Copy Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Down
|[[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]]
|Places the selected transposable element from the source segment into the target segment, where the cursor is located (or replaces highlighted text in target segment).
|-
|Translation
|Previous Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Left
|[[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]]
|Selects the previous placeable element in the source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Next word
|Tab
|
|Places the subsequent source word with letter + Tab
|-
|Translation
|Previous word
|Shift+Tab
|
|Places the preceding source word with letter+Shift+Tab.
|-
|Translation
|Target Height
|Ctrl+Alt+T
|[[File:increase_target.png]]
|Increases the height of the target segment for easier viewing.
|-
|Wordfast Anywhere
|Wordfast setup
|Ctrl+Alt+W
|[[File:Setup.png]]
|Opens the Wordfast Anywhere general setup dialog.
|-
|Edit
|Find & Replace
|Ctrl+Alt+R
|[[File:FindReplace.png]]
|Find and replace in the document.
|-
|Edit
|Edit Source
|Ctrl+Alt+K
|[[File:EditSource16.png]]
|Used to make minor corrections to the source segment.
|-
|Edit
|Edit Note
|Ctrl+Alt+J
|[[File:Edit_Note16.png]]
|Allows you to create or edit a note.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 1
|Shift+Ctrl+1
|[[File:insert_c1.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 2
|Shift+Ctrl+2
|[[File:insert_c2.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 3
|Shift+Ctrl+3
|[[File:insert_c3.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Case Changer
|Shift+F3
|[[File:caseChanger.png]]
|Toggle between lowercase, uppercase, and capitalization.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|TMs and glossaries setup
|
|[[File:Preferences16round.png]]
|Opens the TMs and glossaries setup dialog.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Concordance search
|Ctrl+Alt+C
|[[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]]
|Performs a search in the TM and displays all segments containing the search term.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Glossary Search
|Ctrl+Alt+G
|[[File:GlossarySearch.png]]
|Search in the glossary for the word or phrase selected in the source segment.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Add term to glossary
|Ctrl+Alt+T
|[[File:TermEdit.png]]
|Pops up a glossary term entry form.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Copy TU
|Alt+right
|[[File:CopyTU.png]]
|Copy a TU from the TM panel to the target segment. If many, press many times, it will start by copying the second one assuming the first one is already copied. The TU can be a MT proposal.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Delete TU
|Ctrl+Alt+Backspace
|[[File:DeleteTU.png]]
|Delete from TM the current or selected TU visible in the TM panel.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Update TU
|
|[[File:force_tm_addtu.png]]
|Commits to TM the source and target segment as a new TU or update an existing one.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Force TM search
|
|[[File:force_tm.png]]
|Perform a direct search (without cache) in the TM.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Force MT
|
|[[File:force_mt.png]]
|Forces the translation of the segment by the configured MT engines like Google Translate / Microsoft Translator.
|-
|View
|Outline pane
|Ctrl+Alt+D
|[[File:panelOutline.png]]
|Closes or opens the Outline. The outline is a view of all the segments showing which ones are translated but also which ones have notes or are provisional.
|-
|View
|TM pane
|Ctrl+Alt+M
|[[File:panelTm.png]]
|Closes or opens the TM pane.
|-
|View
|Glossary pane
|Ctrl+Alt+H
|[[File:panelGlo.png]]
|Closes or opens the Glossary (Terminology) pane.
|-
|View
|Move next block
|Page Down
|[[File:moveNextScreen.png]]
|Move to the next block of document's content.
|-
|View
|Move previous block
|Page Up
|[[File:movePrevScreen.png]]
|Move to the previous block of document's content.
|-
|View
|First of Block
|Home
|[[File:move_first_seg_screen.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the first segment of the block.
|-
|View
|Last of Block
|End
|[[File:move_last_seg_screen.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the last segment of the page.
|-
|View
|First of Doc
|Ctrl+Home
|[[File:move_first_seg_doc.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the first segment of the document.
|-
|View
|Last of Doc
|Ctrl+End
|[[File:move_last_seg_doc.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the last segment of the document.
|}

== WFA Setup ==
The WFA Setup menu is accessible by the shortcut Ctrl+Alt+W or the [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab.

Six tabs are visible: General, TM rules, Shortcuts, Segmentation, Pandora's box and QA.

=== General tab ===
Several general settings can be don in this tab.

[[File:wfasetup1.png]]

==== Machine translation ====
Click on '''MT''' tab to access the ''Machine Translation'' settings.

[[File:wfasetup2.png]]

WFA gives you the ability to translate each segment by online translation services like Google Translate and Microsoft Translator. The translations proposed are not ever likely to be fully acceptable. However, by making a few small adjustments, you will be able to use them extensively in your translations.

[[File:Warning.png]] When using this service, the source segments that will return a translation are transmitted to Google and Microsoft. It is up to you whether or not to accept these translations; these companies are not made aware of your choice. However, be aware that sending the segments to Google and Microsoft may raise privacy issues between you and your customers.

Each MT engine has a window were to set it's settings. Bear in mind that some MT may require a personal ID or password.
* Use '''Add''' button to add a new MT.
* Use '''Edit''' the settings for the selected MT on the list.
* Use '''Remove''' will delete the selected MT on the list.
* Use '''Test''' to run a test on all the MTs with the active checkbox marked.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''To use a MT engine, it must be added to the list and with the "Active" checkbox marked'''.

On each MT engine window you can set its settings (i.e. the key or url). You can also set a particular values for
* ''Engine timeout'' as in some cases (i.e. small segments) the MT requires more time to get back with a result.
* ''Engine score'' value for each MT.
* ''Details'' for extra information about the MT like the list of available languages.
[[File:Warning.png]] Each MT engine has a different set of available languages.

Finally, there are several general options such as
* When to use the MT (when no TM match, when no TM full match, always)
* Remove tags before sending to MT.
* Use all available providers on ''force MT''.
* Do not copy MT proposition to target.
* Enable MT for review (May slow down the revision process)

===== Custom Machine translation =====

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Note:''' this section is '''DIY (Do It Yourself)'''. Our hotline cannot assist in the customization of an MT engine, because that requires knowledge of the remote provider's specifications. However, public discussion groups may offer help.

If your remote Machine Translation provider is not listed (as a provider tab), you can use '''Custom tab''' to create a custom connector for it. This is only possible if your MT provider's API is using a REST standard, and returns results in a JSON, or similar, format. That is the case with major MT providers currently available with WFC (Google, Microsoft, WorldLingo, deepL, MyMemory, etc.).

In WFA's Machine Translation setup, go to the "Custom MT" tab.

[[File:CustomMT.JPG]]

Note the various elements:
* URL: Tells WFA which is the url of the MT provider with the needed parameters.
** {ss} will be replaced with the source segment to be translated. This parameter must be present.
** {sl} and {tl} will be replaced with your given source and target language codes.
** {key} will be replaced with the given API key
* API Key: Some MT providers need a personal key, this is the place to add it.
* Source language: Source language of the text, it corresponds to the {sl} parameter in the URL.
* Target Language: Target language which will be the text translated to, it corresponds to the {tl} parameter in the URL.
* POST: includes parameters that should be used with the POST method, concatenated like in the URL format. If the parameters needs to be in JSON format, choose the way how to write it (either URL encoded text to convert to JSON either a direct JSON string).
* HEADER: includes parameters that need to be in the header of the request. The format is param:value. Put one parameter per line.
* Json key: Some MT providers return the translated text in a parameter (translation, translatedTex...etc), this tells WFA how to spot the returned translated segment.

Once all the elements are set you can test the connection by using the '''Test''' button. Optionally you can change the text to be tested on the text box next to the button.

Let's assume your preferred MT provider is WorldLingo and we create a custom engine for it. You explore WorldLingo's API documentation. It essentially boils down to a query URL, with parameters. On Custom tab you can use:

* URL: https://www.worldlingo.com/S000.1/api?wl_data={ss}&wl_srclang={sl}&wl_trglang={tl}&wl_password=secret
* API Key: Empty, as no API Key is needed.
* Source language: en.
* Target Language: fr.
* Json key: Empty.

'''Practical example:'''

Opening a browser, you begin by testing the URL. In the following example, the raw URL was customized for an English-to-French language pair, to translate "Hello World". Your real URL will look different, the following is an example based on WorldLingo:

::: ''http://www.worldlingo.com/S000.1/api?wl_data=Hello%20world&wl_srclang=en&wl_trglang=fr&wl_password=secret''

You can try pasting the above URL into a browser's address bar. If things go well, the site will send a reply:

::: ''Bonjour le monde''

Other MT providers may use a more complex JSON reply, in which case you specify the JSON key so that WFA can identify the result. Here the key is "translation" so you would use Json key => translation

::: ''{"responseData":{"translation":"Bonjour le monde","match":1} }''

Your MT provider may require more parameters, such as a secret ID key (aka an API key), or other elements, in which case, you should hard-code those in the URL.

==== Fonts ====
Font Size: this setting only affects the font size on the screen, your document will keep all its original layout unchanged. The available sizes are selected from the drop-down list.

Font Family: this setting only affects the fonts displayed on the screen, your document will keep its entire original layout unchanged. You can specify a specific font or a font family, for example Arial, Helvetica, Sans Serif (sans serif font, default) or Times New Roman, Times, Serif (seriffed font).

==== Target segment selection ====
Positions the mouse pointer at the opening of the segment, with or without selection.

# Cursor at start – no text selected, cursor positioned at the beginning of the segment.
# Cursor at end – no text selected, cursor positioned at the end of the segment. This is the default setting.
# Segment selected – The target segment is entirely selected.

==== Fuzzy Threshold in % ====
Percentage of similarity required for a TU contained in the TM to be suggested as a translation of the source segment. If several TUs meet this criterion, the TU with the highest percentage will be offered. In this case you can select the subsequent TUs with [[File:CopyTU.png]] '''''Copy TU''''' button on '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' tab or using the corresponding shortcut (Alt + Right).

The default percentage (75%) is recommended for most translations, but in some cases it may be appropriate to change it. For example, if you are translating short segments containing only 3 words, a fuzzy threshold of 75% will only offer those TUs which are identical (100%) and those where two words are identical, i.e. 66%, will never be proposed.

==== Record Revisions ====
Check this option if you want to save a record of the changes on translated segments.

==== Enable Auto-Suggest ====
Check this option if you want to get suggestions while you type on a translated segment.

Auto-Suggest can be configured in '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.238_Configure_Auto-Suggest|Pandora's box #7]]''' to add or remove items.

==== Tab behavior ====
Check this option if you want to use click or hover for triggering events on Top Menu bar.

==== Enable auto-hide buttons ====
Check this option to make toop toolbar buttons hide automatically.

==== Enable Segment Tool Bar ====
Check this option to enable the Segment Tool Bar on Horizontal and Vertical views. You can customize it on Pandora's Box #15

=== TM rules tab ===

Here you have the opportunity to establish penalties to be taken into account when calculating the similarity between the TM and the segment to be translated. In other words, the percentage of similarity is reduced, where applicable, according to the figure indicated for each of the following rules. Some rules allow fractional reductions, but this only applies to the calculation: the final reduction will be the sum of all penalties rounded to the nearest whole number. If the percentage of similarity to the TU, reduced to the sum of the penalties, is less than the specified Fuzzy Threshold percentage, it will not be proposed.

[[File:wfasetup3.png]]

Penalties for the following rules are activated only if the box on their right is checked. They apply only to the TUs proposed by the TM or VLTM, not from machine translation, which has its own non-modifiable penalty.

* ''Case penalty'': if there is a difference in case (upper and lower case) between the TU and the segment to be translated, WFA can ignore this and show 100% similarity. But you can assign a penalty of between 1 and 5 points for the difference in case. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 1.

* ''Non literal penalty'': this penalty detects differences due to special characters such as dashes, quotation marks, apostrophes, punctuation and whitespace characters (non-breaking space, horizontal and vertical tabs, ...). There exist several codes for representing each of these special characters. WFA can ignore these and show 100% similarity; otherwise a penalty is calculated using the following method: every time a difference is encountered, it adds the value of the first parameter (0.25, 0.50 or 0.75), which by default is 0.50. The second parameter sets out what the minimum value of the penalty is (default is 1). Since the penalty is necessarily an integer, if the value of the penalty is 0.25 and there is only one in the segment to be translated, the minimum is not reached. Finally, the third parameter sets the maximum penalty to be assigned, even if the addition of all the differences of this rule exceeds that figure (10 by default). This rule is selected by default with a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 10.

* ''Tag penalty'': this rule works exactly the same way as the previous one, but applied to the tags (markers that represent the bits of code used to format the document <1>). This rule is selected by default with a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 10.

* ''Alignment user penalty'': the TUs found in a memory imported into WFA produced by an alignment tool and having the identifier "TALIGN!" may be assigned a penalty from 1 to 10. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 3. Please note, TUs from an alignment may not have the "TALIGN!" identifier.

* ''MT user penalty'': the TUs found in a memory imported into WFA produced by machine translation and having the identifier "MT!" may be penalised from 1 to 10. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 25. Please note, TUs from a machine translation may not have the "MT!" identifier.

* ''Multiple translation penalty'': In the case of a source segment with multiple 100% matches, i.e. several TUs having the same source segment but different translated segments, a penalty may be applied to warn of a possible choice between translations. This scenario is rare and no penalty is assigned by default.

* ''Attribute penalty'': attributes are identifiers that are associated with a particular TU at the time that it is recorded in the memory. There are five possible attributes: the first is fixed (it identifies the user who posted the TU), while the other four can be user defined. In general, translators use attribute no. 1 to define the subject of the text to be translated and the attribute no. 2 to define the client who owns the text. The other two attributes are free to be used for anything else. For example, if the proposed TU is from a text whose subject is "electronics", it will be penalised if the subject of the text to be translated is "medicine." In other words if the TU is 100% identical to the segment to be translated, it will be displayed with a percentage similarity of 98% if the penalty applied is 2 points.

The penalty can be a number from 1 to 5, valid for the four attributes. By default this rule is not active.

If you use a TM uploaded from Wordfast Classic or Pro, the existing attributes of the TU may be penalised.

=== Shortcuts tab ===

You can set the shortcuts you want to use.

[[File:wfasetup4.png]]

WFA shortcuts are not immutable. If some of them do not suit you, you can reassign them. To do this, click on the '''''upd''''' link of the shortcut you wish to change.

[[File:wfasetup5.png]]

In this example, corresponding to the first shortcut, you see the name of the command and a drop-down list. Choose '''None''' if you want to remove the shortcut or choose another from the list. Then click '''''Update''''' to confirm or '''''Cancel''''' to dismiss the dialog. Repeat for all the shortcuts that you want to change. The new keyboard shortcuts will be displayed.

The last four commands have no shortcuts; however, you can assign shortcuts to them if you wish.

If after modifying several shortcuts you want to return them to their original state, click '''''Restore default shortcuts'''''.

Finally, click '''''Save''''' settings to confirm any changes or '''''Cancel''''' to dismiss the dialog.

=== Segmentation tab ===
This tab defines the rules for segmentation.

[[File:Segmentation111.JPG]]

* ''Segmentation style'': this block determines how the segmentation will be performed. If you choose ''Wordfast /Trados segmentation'' (default) the standard end-of-segment markers are defined as follows: full stop, colon, question mark, exclamation mark and tab (Tab). You can add other characters as well as space (Space), non-breaking space (NBSP), carriage return (CR) and line feed (LF). You can add as markers: a number followed by an end of segment marker (A number Followed by ESM ends a segment – default), an end of segment marker not followed by a space (An ESM without a trailing space ends a segment) and an end of segment marker followed by a space followed by a lowercase letter (An ESM followed by a space followed by a lower-case letter ends a segment). Although you can change these markers, it is recommended to maintain them in such manner that if you share your translations and your memories with other translators, all will follow the same rule.

[[File:Warning.png]] Segmentation is performed at the time of uploading the document to WFA. You cannot therefore change the rules applying to that document during the course of its translation.

The other segmentation rules that you can choose are:
* ''Break segmentation'': segmentation is done according to the end of paragraph character (carriage return) or the tag for HTML files.
* ''Idiom segmentation'': segmentation follows the rules of the software program Idiom.
* ''SRX segmentation'': the segmentation is done by using a previously uploaded file. It follows the rules of the SRX standard, which has become a standard like TMX for formatting memories and TBX for formatting glossaries. In the case of SRX segmentation, abbreviations are also included.

* ''TM compatibility'': You must ensure the compatibility according to the memory you have uploaded or the subsequent use of your documents. By default, WFA's memory is compatible with that of Wordfast Classic and Pro (Assume Wordfast TM). If this is your choice, you can also specify if you have old projects made with Wordfast Classic or Pro (check Legacy TM created by old projects). You can also establish that the memory was created by Trados (Assume Trados TM), even adding that it was created by Trados and Word (TM created by Trados + Word); by Idiom (Assume Idiom TM) or by SDLX (Assume SDLX TM).

*''Abbreviations'': Abbreviations end with a full stop, which WFA then interprets as an end of segment marker. To avoid this, WFA allows you to create and manage a list of abbreviations. While WFA already has lists for some languages, others are empty – the user must provide the necessary information. The abbreviations are entered into the text box, one after another, without spaces and separated by a comma. Once updated, save your list by clicking on Save the language. Repeat for each language that you translate.

=== Pandora's box tab ===
This tab has many different settings. Some of this settings will open a new dialog.

[[File:wfasetup7.png]]

==== #1 PC, tablet and smartphone modes ====
Use this mode if you are using a mobile device. The segment toolbar is enlarged; local file access is disabled.

==== #2 Real time collaboration ====
Real time collaboration disables data caching. This forces the TM search before you open a segment, causing a response delay. Avoid using this mode unless sharing a TM and if the TU updates need to be shared immediately.

==== #3 Document file name convention ====
Customize your document name for download by adding a prefix and/or a suffix.

==== #4 Special characters insertion ====
Configure the 7 special characters insertion of the Edition tab.

==== #5 Configure online dictionaries ====
Configure URLs for 2 online search engines.

* Click "Add" to add a new dictionary.
* After filling the "Friendly name" and "Url" correctly you need to use "Test" to check it works fine.
* Use "Save" to add the dictionary to the list. Bear in mind that if the URL already exists it cannot be added.

If all worked fine, the list should have been updated and your dictionary available to be used.

The list does not use "Friendly name" to sort the dictionaries, so you need to check all the list to find the one you added.

In order to use one dictionary you need to select it from the list and save the settings.

==== #6 Multiple Ctrl+Alt+Down toggles placeable ====
Use this feature to toggle between copy the target term, copy the source term, or leave blank.

==== #7 Configure Auto-Suggest ====
Auto-suggest is activated at the '''General''' tab when clicking on [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab.

On this section of Pandora's Box is where you can '''configure which suggestions will Auto-suggest show'''.

[[File:AutoSuggest1.JPG]]

'''Auto-suggest can show different items''' such as: Glossary matches, tags, word from with a capital letter, numbers, file path, email addresses, URLs, chunks of Machine Translation, date and number conversion, text in parentheses (), text in braces {}, bracketed text [], word containing special character and unit conversion.

On the left there is a combo box to select the number of typed characters that will trigger auto-suggest to show up.

For '''date and number conversion''' there is a sub dialog, that can be opened by clicking on the [[File:Edit.png]] button on the left.

[[File:AutoSuggest2.JPG]]

Here you can set how dates and numbers will be converted and shown in the auto-suggested text.

For '''dates''' you can choose a different format and separator. For instance source ''2015.04.01'' could be converted to ''01/04/2015'' on target.

For '''numbers''' you can choose a different group and decimal separator. For instance source ''123.456,00'' could be converted to ''123 456.00'' on target.

==== #8 Configure Filters ====
Configure conversion of documents from their original format to the internal editor format.

For some files you can configure some parameters that will tell the filter what to do for some situations such as translate comments or sheet names.

You can make this configuration for: '''xls, xlsx, ppt, pptx, doc, docx, rtf, htm, html, mif, idml, xml (Text based files)'''.

[[File:Pandora9.JPG]]

On this section there are also 3 settings that will apply to any file.

* '''Editor format'''. To choose which type of '''bilingual file (TXML or TXLF)''' the filter should produce.[[File:Warning.png]] '''''The download bilingual file will be of the type used when the file was uploaded.''''' For example if the file was uploaded using TXML, the bilingual download will be TXML. A file cannot be uploaded using one type (TXML) and download the bilingual file of the other type (TXLF). The workaround is to change the type and upload the file again.

* '''Extract numbers'''. To define the filter action on source segments that contain only numbers.

** ''all'': Extracts all segments with only numbers for translation
** ''time_date_measure'': Extracts only segments with time and date
** ''none'': Does not extract any segments that contain only numbers

* '''Segmentation on break'''. To enable segmentation on line breaks.

==== #9 Configure double click to open/close a segment ====
Configure opening/closing actions on a segment by double clicking in the document panel. This is always active for mobile plain text mode.

[[File:Pandora101.png]]

==== #10 Configure TM Search ====
Set the timeout for searches. After the timeout, the search is cancelled and returns nothing. The default value is 4 seconds.

==== #11 Copy source when no TM match and no MT proposition ====
Copy source to target when no TM match and no MT proposition.

==== #12 Do not show empty paragraph line in Classic view ====
Do not copy MT proposition to target.

==== #13 Hide segment's IDs column on the Table view ====
Do not copy MT proposition to target.

==== #14 Custom Tab settings ====
Use this mode if you are using a mobile device. The segment toolbar is enlarged; local file access is disabled.

==== #15 Customize Segment Toolbar ====
Dialog to choose which buttons will be placed on Segment toolbar. Segment toolbar is enabled on General tab.

==== #16 Copy untranslatable to target automatically and open next segment ====
Define what will be considered an "Untranslatable segment" which will be copied to target automatically and open next segment

=== QA tab ===
Set here the criteria that will be used to conduct an audit of quality when doing a '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Transcheck|Transcheck]]'''

[[File:wfasetup8.png]]

There are several criteria that can be checked, some of which can also ''be checked while translating'' (by using the second checkbox column under '''While Translating''' title).

Here is a short description:

* '''Source & target lengths''': Compares the character count between the source and target segments. You can set the minimum and maximum % of allowed character count for the target segment.

* '''Empty target''': Checks for an empty target segment. This is always checked while translating.

* '''Numerical''': Checks that the numerical values between the source and target segments are correct.

* '''Placeable''': Checks if the tags are copied correctly to the target segments. This is always checked while translating.

* '''Forbidden chars''': Checks if the target segment includes forbidden characters. You can set the list of forbidden characters that should not be included in the target segment.

* '''Punctuations''': Checks for consistency in punctuation between source and target segments. You can set the punctuation marks that should not be included in the target segment. [[File:notice.png]] The transcheck punctuation only works on end of segmentation punctuation.

* '''Untranslatable''': Compares the source and target segments to check if the untranslatable content is consistent. You can set the untranslatable text that must be retained in the target segment.

* '''Copied source''': Checks for untranslated text when copied source option is used.

* '''Blacklists''': Checks if the target segment includes blacklisted terms. You can set blacklisted terms that should not be included in the target segment. [[File:notice.png]] The blacklisted term list must be a tab delimited file (bad term + tabulation + proposed term).

* '''Terminology''': Checks if all term translations from an active glossary are used in the target of a segment. You can enable or disable Ignore Case option.

* '''First word capitalization''': Checks if the first letter of the segment is capitalized.

* '''Edited exact match''': Checks if any exact match segments from the TM have been edited.

* '''Unedited fuzzy''': Checks if any fuzzy match segments from the TM have been left unedited.

* '''Source Consistency''': Checks consistency between source segments if the target is repeated.

* '''Target consistency''': Checks consistency between target segments if the source is repeated.

== Profile Configuration ==
Go to [[File:User profile.png]] '''''User Profile''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' menu to see information about your account and change some settings of your profile.

[[File:Profileconfig1.png]]

=== Change email ===
Use this option to change the email of your account.

[[File:Profileconfig2.png]]

=== Change password ===
Check the [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_change_my_password Wordfast Anywhere FAQ] for more information.

=== Delete account ===
Use this option to remove your account from Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:Profileconfig4.png]]

Wordfast Anywhere 6 Manual

2022-02-11T11:35:06Z

Remiandre: /* Appending a TM to an existing TM */

{{Languages}}
[[Category:Wordfast Anywhere]]

= Introduction =
Wordfast Anywhere (WFA) is the online version of the popular Wordfast computer assisted translation (CAT) program that provides much of the functionality of the Classic and Pro desktop versions. Instead of being installed as a program on the user’s computer, WFA is made accessible from Wordfast’s servers via a web browser, regardless of the operating system used (Windows, Mac, Linux, etc.). Every effort has been made to ensure that the user interface is as close as possible to the other Wordfast flavours: toolbars, icons, shortcuts and working methods. A Wordfast Classic or Pro user should be able to use WFA with almost zero assimilation time.

It is worth remarking that WFA is almost certainly the CAT program that integrates best with the popular Mac operating system. Unlike Java-based, cross-platform programs – including Wordfast Pro – that will run on the Mac but don’t integrate with system-wide tools such as the built in Dictionary, WFA will run in Mac-native browsers such as Safari, thus giving you access to the entire range of language and text handling tools that are built into the Mac OS environment.

[[File:WFA_pagina_5_new.jpg]]
[[File:WFA_pagina_6_new.jpg]]

With WFA you can translate a wide range of both editable (TXT, DOC, DOCX, RTF, XLS, PPT, ODT, HTML, TXML, MIF, INX, etc.) and non-editable (PDF, TIFF) documents. You can store up ten current documents in your workspace, deleting your finished translations to free up space and permit new documents to be uploaded.

You can also import the TMs (translation memories) of all the language pairs you work in. Your memories will progressively expand as and when you translate. They are stored securely and will not be shared or revealed without your authorisation. If you need a local copy, you can download your TM to your computer at any time.

As is the case with other Wordfast flavours, you can add terms to your glossary as you translate. You can also upload existing glossaries to your workspace, for all language pairs. Here again, your glossaries are secure and will not be shared or revealed unless you specifically invite a colleague. You can also download your glossary if you need a local copy.

The following instructions have been written for complete beginners. Having understood the above comments, a Wordfast Classic or Pro user should have no difficulty in using WFA intuitively.

Check the '''[[Wordfast Anywhere 6 Start Guide]]''' for a quick start.

Check our [https://www.freetm.com/jsp/terms.jsp Terms of use].

== How to use WFA ==
On Wordfast Anywhere every document belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a translation project.

So the first you need is a project. A project named "Project_1" is created by default, but you can create up to 3 projects.

A project needs a language pair. A default one is suggested but more can be added. Each language pair can have a TM and glossary assigned which will be used on several processes and also automatically assigned to the documents uploaded.

A project also needs a task. "Translate" is the one by default.

Once the project is created you can add the documents. Documents can be added to all language pairs or to specific ones. There is a maximum number of documents per project depending of the type of project.

Double-click a project to open it to see the content (documents grouped by language pairs).

Double-click a document to start/resume work.

[[File:notice.png]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rDhVYY02Cds Wordfast Anywhere 6 Basic Projects video]'''

= Login in to WFA account =
Check the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Login_in_to_WFA_account Login in to WFA account]''' section on the Start Guide.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you have not created an account yet, click on the '''''Create a new account''''' and follow the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#How_to_create_an_account instructions]'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you ever ''forget your password'', click on the '''''Forgot your password?''''' and follow the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Get_your_password_back instructions]'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you are having ''login problems'' check '''''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Cannot_log_in_to_Wordfast_Anywhere Cannot log in to Wordfast Anywhere]''''' and follow the instructions.

=User Interface =
The user interface is divided into several sections. A top menu with tabs and buttons, a main central panel that changes depending on where we are (project list, project content, document translation) and a bottom panel where information and messages are shown.

Once you are connected to WFA, the workspace appears.

This should look similar to the following screenshot (depending on the browser, operating system or device used to access WFA):

[[File:Newui6.PNG]]

The workspace can be modified at any point according to your requirements.
==Top Menu==
At the very top you can find the ''Top Menu'' which consists in '''two rows''': one for the different '''menus''' (tabs) and one for the '''buttons''' corresponding to the selected tab.

Use [[File:CollapseTop.png]] to hide the buttons. Use [[File:CollapseBottom.png]] to show the buttons.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a project or selecting/opening a document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a project is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when a project is selected from the project list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when more than one file is selected from the document list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus used for translation (Edit, view, translation, review and TM & Glossaries) are only visible when the document is opened. Those buttons keep working as always, just need to open the document.

===Wordfast Anywhere Menu===

This tab a miscellaneous of buttons concerning the Wordfast Anywhere project.

[[File:Wfatab6.PNG]]

* [[File:Logout16.png]]: Use it when you want to '''leave''' Wordfast Anywhere.
* [[File:User profile.png]]: Here you'll find your '''account information'''. You'll be able to change your ''Login'' email, the ''Security Question'', the ''Security Answer'' and delete your account.
* [[File:Preferences.png]]: Here is where you set the '''configuration''' of Wordfast Anywhere:''Font Size'', ''Machine translation'', ''TM rules'', ''Shortcuts'', ''Segmentation'', ''Transcheck'' rules...etc.
* [[File:Preferences16round.png]]: Global TM & glossary management (create, add, upload, merge, edit, download, delete... ), no more for assignment.
* [[File:WF Update16.png]]: This button will direct you to a site to '''align''' your files.
* [[File:help16.png]]: WFA Help:
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''start guide''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''PM start guide''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''FAQ''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''manual''' wiki page.
** If the previous wiki pages do not work, this is a pdf backup.
* [[File:Notice.png]]: There are 4 icons corresponding to different types of '''notifications''' ([[File:Warning.png]] ONLY displayed when there are notifications):
** Webmaster Info: notifications coming from Wordfast Anywhere administration (p.e stopping the server for a publication).
** Background Info: notifications about ''Background'' processes (p.e. Analyze, Spellcheck...etc).
** System Info: notifications from the system (p.e. an unsupported browser).
** TM Server Info: notifications realted to the TM Server (p.e. TM server is disconnected).

===Project Menu===
This tab has the tools concerning a project.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when a project is selected on the project list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a project is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available for standard projects.

No project selected on the project list.

[[File:ProjecttabAll.PNG]]

This are the basic buttons:

* [[File:Pm new project 16.png]]: '''New''' use it to create a project.
* [[File:Pm open project 16.png]]: '''Open''' the selected project from the project list.
* [[File:Analyze Project16.png]]: '''Analyze''' all the documents of the project. A report is generated.
* [[File:Pm delete project 16.png]]: '''Delete''' the selected project.
* [[File:Pm close project 16.png]]: '''Close''' an opened project.
* [[File:Pm import project 16.png]]: '''Import''' a .glp file.
* [[File:Pm export project 16.png]]: '''Export''' a project into a .glp file.
* [[File:Linguist16.png]]: Use it to '''Manage''' the team of '''linguists'''.

To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

===File Tab===
This tab has the tools concerning a file.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be available when more than one file is selected from the list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be also available when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a document is opened.

[[File:FiletabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:Translate File16.png]]: '''Open''' the selected file from the list.
* [[File:About wordfast16.png]]: Open the document with '''Wordfast Pro Online'''. [[File:Warning.png]] The use of Wordfast Pro Online will be discontinued on December 31, 2021.
* [[File:Close16.png]]: '''Close''' an opened file.
* [[File:Save16.png]]: Here you'll find all the '''Download''' options for a file (p.e. translated version, bilingual versions, TXML, unformatted text, Off-line Report Tool, TM from doc segments).
* [[File:Preferences16round.png]]: With this button you'll change the '''TM & Glossary''' configuration for the document.
* [[File:Analyze Project16.png]]: '''Analyze''' the selected document/s. A report is generated.
* [[File:Statistics16.png]]: Get the '''Statistics''' of the document.
* [[File:Modify Project16.png]]: Get information about the file.
* [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]]: '''Pre-translate''' the selected document/s.
* [[File:Mergetms16.png]]: Use this button to '''merge''' the document with a '''TXML''' file.
* [[File:mergetms16_menu.png]]: Use this button to '''merge''' the document with an imported '''OFRT''' file.
* [[File:Split.png]] [[File:Join.png]]: '''Split''' the document in parts. '''Join''' the parts together again.
* [[File:Share.png]] [[File:Revoke.png]]: '''Share''' the document with an other Wordfast Anywhere user. '''Revoke''' will finish the share.
* [[File:Translate File16.png]]: '''Fuzzy Open''' the file without full matches.
* [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]]: '''Extract''' the '''frequent''' segments.
* [[File:Edit16.png]]: '''Rename''' the file.

===Edit Tab===

This tab is a translation tool extension.

[[File:Warning.png]] This buttons will be available when the document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be available when a TM is being edited.

[[File:EdittabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:FindReplace.png]]: Use it to '''Find & Replace''' text but also to go to a particular segment or get a list of segments ''untranslated'', ''provisional'', with ''notes'' or with ''tag differences''.
* [[File:EditSource16.png]]: '''Edit''' the source segment.
* [[File:Edit_Note16.png]]: Create, edit or remove a '''Note''' on a segment.
* [[File:Insert_c.png]]: '''Insert special characters'''. 7 different characters can be defined on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => '''''Setup''''' button > '''''Pandora's box'''''
* [[File:Delete_alltargetseg.png]]: '''Delete''' '''tags''' in the document. This is only available when editing a TM and has 2 options: Delete all target tags or delete all document tags.
* [[File:delete_revisions.png]]: '''Delete''' the segment '''history'''.
* [[File:Delete_alltargetseg.png]]: '''Delete''' all '''target''' segments of the document.
* [[File:caseChanger.png]]: Toggle between lowercase, uppercase, and capitalization..

===View Tab===

In this tab you'll find the buttons to move through the document and show or hide the different panels.

[[File:ViewtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:PanelOutline.png]]: Show or hide '''Outline'''.
* [[File:panelTm.png]]: Show or hide '''TM''' panel.
* [[File:panelGlo.png]]: Show or hide '''Glossary''' panel.
* [[File:MovePrevScreen.png]]: Go to '''Previous Block'''.
* [[File:MoveNextScreen.png]]: Go to '''Next Block'''.
* [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]]: Toggle between the different document layout: Classic, Horizontal and Vertical.
* [[File:move_prev_seg.png]]: Go to '''Previous segment'''.
* [[File:move_next_seg.png]]: Go to '''Next segment'''.
* [[File:move_first_seg_screen.png]]: Go to '''First segment''' of '''Block'''.
* [[File:move_last_seg_screen.png]]: Go to '''Last segment''' of '''Block'''.
* [[File:move_first_seg_doc.png]]: Go to '''First segment''' of '''document'''.
* [[File:move_last_seg_doc.png]]: Go to '''Last segment''' of '''document'''.

===Translation Tab===

Find here all the tools to perform a translation

[[File:TranslationtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:StartNext.png]]: '''Start translation''' or open next segment.
* [[File:Previous.png]]: Open previous segment.
* [[File:CloseSave.png]]: '''Close and commit''' to the TM.
* [[File:Close retain.png]]: '''Close and retain''' the segment as provisional but not commit to the TM
* [[File:close.png]]: '''Close segment'''.
* [[File:close_restore.png]]: '''Close and delete''' target content.
* [[File:mark.png]]: Mark segment as '''provisional'''.
* [[File:CopySource.png]]: '''Copy source''' to target.
* [[File:Expand_Segment16.png]]: '''Expand''' segment.
* [[File:ShrinkSeg.png]]: '''Shrink''' segment.
* [[File:TranslateUntilFuzzy.png]]: '''Translate''' document '''until a fuzzy''' match.
* [[File:Cleanup_Project16.png]]: Toggle between Empty target, Remove tags and Restore.
* [[File:autopropagate.png]]: '''Auto propagate''' segment changes through all the document.
* [[File:dropdown.png]]: Toggle placeable.
* [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]]: Go to '''Next Placeable'''.
* [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]]: '''Copy Placeable'''.
* [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]]: Go to '''Previous Placeable'''.
* [[File:increase_target.png]]: Increase target segment height.
* [[File:Mic.png]]: Use '''Web Speech''' to dictate the target content. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY available for Chrome. Currently disabled due to browser security.'''

===Review Tab===

This tab has the tools to review the document.

[[File:ReviewtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:Preview16.png]]: '''Preview''' a PDF version of the document.
* [[File:Transcheck16.png]]: Do a '''quality control''' on the document
* [[File:Spellcheck16.png]]: '''Spellcheck''' the document

===TMs and Glossaries Tab===

Tab with the tools related to TM and glossaries actions.

[[File:TmglotabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]]: Concordance search
* [[File:GlossarySearch.png]]: Glossary Search
* [[File:TermEdit.png]]: Term edition.
* [[File:CopyTU.png]]: Copy TU.
* [[File:DeleteTU.png]]: Delete TU.
* [[File:Add File To Project16.png]]: Add TU.
* [[File:force_tm_addtu.png]]: Update TU.
* [[File:force_tm.png]]: Force TM search.
* [[File:force_mt.png]]: Force Machine Translation search.
* [[File:force_term.png]]: Force Glossary search.
* [[File:update_tm_doc.png]]: Update TM with document content.
* [[File:iSearch.png]]: Lookup in online dictionary.

===Help Tab===

Help section is on the '''Wordfast Anywhere Menu'''.

===Custom Tab===
In this tab you can add up to 15 buttons of your choice, so you can have together in one tab your most used buttons.
Selection any of the translation menus buttons (Edit, view, translation, review and TM & Glossaries) and the WFA setup and TM&Glossary set up.

[[File:custom_tab.png]]

To do so you must go to [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab. Then go to '''Pandora Box''' tab and go to ''Custom Tab settings'', where you will find all the buttons that can be added to the '''Custom''' tab

[[File:custom_tab2.png]]

==Panels==

===Project List Panel===
This panel shows the list of projects.

[[File:Projectlistpanel.png]]

Projects will be listed here. '''Double click on one project''' or select it and use [[File:Pm open project 16.png]]'''Open''' from the top menu bar to open the project.

===Project content Panel===
When opening a project, the ''Content Panel'' area will show the content of the project, the list of documents in the project.

[[File:ProjectContentpanel.png]]

Main areas are:

* '''Header row (1)''': In this row you'll fine the headers of the columns. The columns are: Languages/file (1), Vol. (1C) and the columns for the different jobs will follow (1D). This row will change the background color according to the project status: blue for ''In preparation'', orange for ''In progress'' and green for ''completed''. Use the '''Add files''' button (1A) to add files to all language pairs and use '''dashboard''' button (1B) to see an estimation of cost of the project.
* '''Project setup (2)'''Click on the ''project name'' or icon next to it to open the project setup dialog.
* '''Language Row (3)''': In this row several icons will be shown depending on the file selection to perform actions such as add files to the language pair (3A), delete selected files (3B) or assign linguist to jobs (3C). Use the '''remove language pair''' icon (3D) to delete the language pair ([[File:Warning.png]] all the documents inside will be permanently deleted).
* '''Note (4)''' this icon allows to add a note to the document.
* '''TM & glossaries (5)''' This are the TMs and glossaries assigned to the document, mouse-over to see extra information. This TM and glossary assignment will be used for the tasks.
* On the '''Status bar''' you'll find information about the project.
* Clicking on the file name will open the document. And clicking on each of the other cell text or icon will open the edit dialog for that cell.

===Translation Panels===
When a document is opened for translation, the screen is divided in 4 different panels.

[[File:Panels.png]]

====Outline====
Show/Hide Outline panel using '''''View''''' tab => '''''Show/hide Outline''''' [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button

The outline displays all the segments of the document.
The available status are:
* A white box indicates that the segment is not translated
* A green box indicates a translated segment
* A yellow box indicates a provisional segment
* An 'i' after segment id indicates a segment having a note
* The black thick border on the box indicates the current document selected on document panel
* The pink border on the box indicates the visible segments in the document panel

You can jump and open any segment of the document by clicking on its number.
If the segment is not visible on the document panel (blue border instead of pink), the document panel will be refreshed.

Once a segment is opened you can use
'''''Edit''''' tab => '''''Edit Note''''' [[File:Edit_Note16.png]] button to create/delete a note and also '''''Translation ''''' tab => '''''Provisional''''' [[File:mark.png]] button to mark/unmark a provisional segment.

====TM Panel====
This panel shows the matches from TM or MT for the current segment.

You can show or hide this panel using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:panelTm.png]] button.

====Glossary Panel====
This panel shows the matching terms for the current segment.

You can show or hide this panel using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:panelGlo.png]] button.

====Document Panel====

When a document is opened, it shows the segments content.

Wordfast Anywhere do not load the entire document in the editor if there are many segments.

While translating the segments are added one by one to the editor, but if you can move inside the document to see any part you want.

To do so, you can use:
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:MovePrevScreen.png]] button to go to '''Previous Block'''.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:MoveNextScreen.png]] button to go to '''Next Block'''.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button to show '''Outline''' and then jump and open any segment of the document by clicking on its number. More information [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline here]

This is how an opened document looks like:

[[File:document_panel_doc.png]]

=====Document Layout=====
Using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] button you can change the document layout, which is the way segments are shown on Document Panel. The three possible views are:

'''''Classical'''''

[[File:ClassicalLayout.png]]

'''''Horizontal'''''

[[File:HorizontalLayout.png]]

'''''Vertical'''''

[[File:VerticalLayout.png]]

===Status Panel===
Always present at the bottom. Here you can find several information about the project, file, TM, display, translation process. Also some messages will be showed here.

==Other features==

===Show/Hide Top Menu Buttons ===
Buttons on the top menu can be hidden.

Use [[File:CollapseTop.png]] to hide the buttons. Use [[File:CollapseBottom.png]] to show the buttons.

= Project Operations =
A new Project menu bar has been added after Wordfast Anywhere menu. Yes! Project Management (PM) has been introduced to WFA.

* * A project named "Project_1" is created by default. If you had an account before version 6, it will contain all the files from the previous version grouped by language pair.
* Every document now belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a project.
* Double-click a project to open it to see the content (documents grouped by language pairs).
* Double-click a document to start/resume work.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a project.

[[File:notice.png]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rDhVYY02Cds Wordfast Anywhere 6 Basic Projects video]'''

== Create a New Project ==
On the Project tab click on [[File:Pm new project 16.png]]'''New''' to create a new project. This will open the ''Project Seup'' window where the settings for the project are done.

To access the project setup once the project has been created, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

[[File:Createproject.PNG]]
[[File:Createproject1.PNG]]
[[File:Createproject2.PNG]]

The ''Project Setup'' window has two sections that need to be set in order to create the project. Setting one section opens the next one.

;1.General
: On this section general information of the project is set. This includes:
# Project name (Compulsory)
# Description (optional)
# Project type. Defines the type of the project:
#* Standard: For translators working alone.
#* Advanced: For Project Managers (PMs) managing large, multi-language projects.
# Project status (for advanced type). Defines the status of the project:
#* In preparation (blue): When project is being prepared (files, TMs and glossaries and linguist being added)
#* In progress (orange): This marks the start of the project. Files are shared with the linguist at this point.
#* Completed (green): The project is finished.
# Currency(optional). It will be used to calculate the project cost.
# Decimals(optional). When this checkbox is marked the project estimated cost will show numbers with decimals.
# Auto(optional). By default Project Manager will be responsible of pushing files to the next job when completion is done. Mark this checkbox to automatically sent files to the next job upon completion.
;2.Language Pairs and tasks
: On this section language pairs and tasks are added.
* Use the '''+''' next to the language pair header to add a new language pair. This will open the language selection dialog and then the TM and glossaries dialog to assign them to the language pair.
* Use the '''+''' at the end of the header row to add new tasks. Only 10 tasks can be added.
* A row is shown for each language pair where the default word rate (left box) and speed rate (right box) for each task can be set.
* Use the '''-''' next to the language pair to remove it. [[File:Warning.png]] Associated files and shares will be revoked.
* Use the '''-''' next to the task name to remove it. [[File:Warning.png]] Associated files and shares will be revoked.

Once all compulsory fields are set, click on '''Save project''' to save the project and go to the ''Project Content panel''.

[[File:Warning.png]] It is possible to move from standard to advanced but opposite is only possible if the advanced project has only one task.

== Modify Project Setup ==
To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

Use this to change any of the project settings defined on the project creation.

[[File:Warning.png]] It is possible to move from standard to advanced but opposite is only possible if the advanced project has only one task.

It is the same than for creating a project, so check the section above to know about the different parts and settings.

== Setting up language pair, Translation Memories and glossaries ==
Languages are added/removed from the ''Project Setup'' dialog.

To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

Check ''Create Project'' section above to know about it.

=== Language pair with its associated TMs and glossaries set in the project setup ===

To access the project setup dialog, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

[[File:Project_setup.png]]

Click on the language pair '''''+''''' button.

[[File:Langpair_dialog.png]]

Enter the languages and save, the TMs and glossaries dialog opens.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair.png]]

* If no TM and glossary exists for the language pair, a new dialog will propose you to create them. Save and wait they are listed.
* You can create and choose one or more TMs and glossaries. They are selected by checking the row in the '''''Active''''' column.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair_2.png]]

Finally save the TMs and glossaries selection by clicking on the '''''Save''''' button. The new language pair is now in the project setup and one icon is displayed for each TM and glossary.

[[File:Project_setup_2.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] The TMS and glossaries can be updated for a language pair by clicking on the icons. But if documents already exists for that language pair, they will not be affected by this change, only new documents added after the update.

=== TMs and glossaries set individually for a document ===
This selection for a document is overwriting the Language pair selection.
In the project content select a document by checking it and then click on the '''''TMs and glossaries''''' button [[File:Preferences16round.png]] of the '''''File''''' menu.

[[File:Project_content_3.png]]

The same TMs and glossaries dialog opens.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair_3.png]]

Saving will update only the TMs and glossaries for the selected document. A control can done hovering the TM icon.

[[File:Project_content_2.png]]

== Add/Remove Files ==
From the '''Project Content Panel''' there are two ways to add files to a project.

* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the header will add the files to all the languages in the project.
* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the language row. This will add the files only to that language.

[[File:Pmaddfiles.PNG]]

To remove a file, first use the checkbox to select it and then use the [[File:Remove16.png]] icon on the language row.

[[File:Pmdeletefile.PNG]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Associated shares will be revoked.

Several files can be selected to be removed at the same time.

== Project dashboard ==
Using the [[File:Pm_cost_16.png]] icon on the header will show the estimated cost of the project. Click on the icon again to hide costs.

[[File:Pmdashboard.PNG]]

== Advanced Features ==
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

Advanced projects have some extra features to manage the files.

=== Task TM ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

Click on the TM icon on the file column to set how the TM will be used on the tasks.

[[File:PmaddtmPNG.PNG]]

There are different options for the TM use:
*'''''Share TM'''''
**The selected TM will be shared with linguists.
**This is the best option to use.
**Translator will have exact and fuzzy matches.
**Translator can use concordance.
*'''''Create Project TM'''''
**The selected TM will NOT be shared.
**It will be used to create a temporary project TM with the matches from the file/s
**The temporary project TM will be shared.
*'''''Pretranslate'''''
**The selected TM will NOT be shared.
**It will be used to pretransalte the document/s.
**Only one TU match (the highest) per segment will be available to the translator.
**Concordance cannot be used.
**Concordance will only be used in this temporary TM

[[File:Warning.png]] Once a task has started it is not possible to change this assignment.

To change the TM assigned click on the same icon and change the TM selection by marking the ''active'' checkbox for the TMs you want to use.
To unassign the TMs clean all the ''active'' checkboxes.

=== Task Glossaries ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

To assign glossaries to tasks follow the instructions for TMs, but using the ''active'' checkboxes on the glossaries side of the dialog.

=== Manage Linguists ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

The Manage Linguist window can be opened by using the [[File:Linguist16.png]] icon on the '''Project''' tab or the '''Manage linguists''' buttons on the ''Assign Job'' window.

This allows the PM to create a team of linguists that will be used on the project jobs.

The same linguist can be used in several languages and roles.

[[File:Pmlinguist1.PNG]]

Main areas are:

* '''Add new linguist to a new language pair (1)''': Use [[File:Pm_linguist_add_16.png]] icon to add a new linguist to the team for a new language pair.
* '''Add or remove a linguist from a language pair (2)''': Use [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] icon to add a linguist to a language pair and use [[File:Pm_collapse_16.png]] icon to remove it.
* '''Linguist task grid (3)''': In this grid, each cell shows the RATE-SPEED-SCORE settings for a linguist. The grid has 4 columns, one for each role: Translator (TR), Proofreader (PR), Revise (RE) and QA. In addition '''dark values mean that linguist has been marked as "able" to do that role'''. Grey values indicate that linguist is not marked as "able" to do that role. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''

==== New Linguist ====
Use [[File:Pm_linguist_add_16.png]] or [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] to add a new linguist.

[[File:Pmlinguistnew.PNG]]

Introduce the following information to add a linguist.

* '''Email''': It must be the email of the linguist WFA account.
* '''Initials''': Short 4 character nickname for the linguist.
* '''Ctry''': Country of the linguist.
* '''Comment''': Some words about the linguist.
* '''Source language''' and '''target language''' that the linguist can work with.
* Role performance. There are 4 default roles a linguist can do on project tasks.
** Mark the '''checkbox''' if the linguist is able to do the role. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''
** '''Rate''': Linguist minim rate. Rate is measured in import per word. The project currency will be user with the import. For example 0.5 Eur per word.
** '''Speed''': Linguist speed rate (words/day). For example 3,000 words/day.
** '''Score''': Linguist 1 to 5 ''star'' score.

=== Assign Job ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''

Use the [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] icon in the language row under the '''job name''' column to assign a job to a linguist for the checkbox marked files.

[[File:Pmaddtask.PNG]]

On the assign job dialog:
* Choose a linguist from the list to whom the job will be assigned. [[File:Warning.png]] The file will be shared with the linguist when the project is set as 'In progress'. The rate and job amount from the linguist will be set for the task.
* To override the linguist rate or job amount, a particular rate or job amount for the job can be set using the input field under the column header. [[File:Warning.png]] Bear in mind that both are related so changing one will update the other.
* A '''''Deadline''''' can be set on the input field under '''''Duration'''''.
* Fill the '''''Note''''' text box to send extra information to the linguist.
* Use '''''Linguist cannot download the shared file''''' to not allow the linguist to download the file.
* Click on '''''Manage linguists''''' to open the Manage Linguist window to add/edit/remove linguists.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' linguists marked as ''able'' to do a role will be listed.

Use the [[File:Pm_collapse_16.png]] icon in the language row under the '''job name''' column to unassign a linguist from a job for the checkbox marked files. [[File:Warning.png]] Shares will be revoked.

[[File:Pmdeletetask.PNG]]

=== Move file to next Task ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

If '''Auto''' tasking is not set on the ''Project Properties'' window, when a task is finished (file has been revoked by the linguist), PM has to manually move it to the next task which will share the file with the linguist assigned to that task.

To do so, click on the double arrow on the finished task.

[[File:Pmmoveon.PNG]]

=== Workflow ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

The project workflow should be:
# PM creates a project, sets languages, sets jobs (Project setup).
# PM adds files to the project and prepares them (i.e splitting).
# PM sets how the TMs and glossaries assigned to the document will be use on the tasks as Share TM, Create project TM or to pre-translate.
# PM prepares the team of linguists.
# PM assign a linguist to each file task. Multiple file selection for batch assign is possible.
# When PM sets the project status to ''In progress'' files that has been assigned a TM and a task will be shared to the corresponding linguist.
# Linguist works on the file. When his work is finished, revokes the file. This finishes the share.
# Once the file is revoked, the PM has to manually move it to the next task. This is done automatically if Auto tasking is selected on Project Setup.
# When all tasks are finished project is finished. PM can change the status of the project to ''Completed''.

=== Purchase Order ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

You can define a Purchase Order template with project, document and task information that will be send to the linguists when the file is shared.

A copy of the email send to the linguist is BCC to the project owner.

==== Purchase Order template ====
Go to [[File:User profile.png]] '''''User Profile''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab to see information about your account. On the ''PM'' tab you can edit the default template.

[[File:Po1.PNG]]

On this template you put the information you want to appear on the Purchase Order.

You can use some '''dynamic parameters''' to add project, document and task information. Use this parameters to build the Purchase Order.
Parameters will be substituted by project, document and task corresponding values or a predefined text.

{| class="wikitable"
|+Here is the list which you can also check them using the [[File:Pm info 16.png]] icon.
|-
|{purchase_order_number}
|Include a number for the purchase order.
|-
|{project_name}
|Project name.
|-
|{task_name}
|Task name.
|-
|{document_name}
|Document name.
|-
|{document_download}
|If linguist can download the document the text '(The document cannot be downloaded.)' will be added to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{document_volume}
|Document number of words.
|-
|{job_note}
|Job note
|-
|{job_rate}
|Job rate
|-
|{job_total}
|Job total cost
|-
|{job_deadline}
|Job deadline in the format 29/12/2021 15:00 GMT+02:00 and the remaining time.
|-
|{document_tmglo}
|If there are TMs or glossaries in the share the text 'For the duration of this job # Translation Memories and # Glossaries have been temporarily shared with you.' will be added to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{document_use}
|Add the text 'To work on this document, log into your Wordfast Anywhere account. If you are already logged, refresh the project list by closing all the projects.' to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{my_full_name}
|Full name from 'User profile'.
|-
|{my_professional_info}
|Professional information from 'User profile'.
|}

==== Purchase Order preview ====
On the '''assign job dialog''' you will see a preview of the Purchase Order.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of the dynamic parameters will be updated when changing the selections on the dialog, others might require the job to be saved and others will be updated when the Purchase Order is send.

[[File:Po2.PNG]]

==== Purchase Order batch send ====
You can send the Purchase Orders for all the saved jobs at any moment using the '''Send POs''' button on the ''Project Setup'' dialog

[[File:Warning.png]] Purchase Order will also be send when the file is shared.

= File Operations =
[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a document.

=== Upload ===
To translate your document, you must first upload it to WFA.

[[File:warning.png]] There is a file size limit of 20 Mb.

From the '''Project Content Panel''' there are two ways to add files to a project.

* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the header will add the files to all the languages in the project.
* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the language row. This will add the files only to that language.

[[File:Pmaddfiles.PNG]]

The following window will be displayed:

[[File:Upload_doc.png]]

There are several ways to upload a document
* '''From local file''': Use '''''Browse...''''' to navigate through the directories on your computer and locate the document to be uploaded.
* '''From URL''': This option allows you to upload a file that is located on an Internet server by entering the address (URL) into the field. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Google Drive''': Choose a file from your Google Drive to be uploaded. You'll be asked to allow access rights to WFA before choosing the file. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Dropbox''': Choose a file from your Dropbox to be uploaded. You'll be asked to allow access rights to WFA before choosing the file. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Clipboard''': Paste the text to be uploaded into the text area. A text file will be created with the text.

At the bottom of the window click on '''''View allowed formats''''' to check the allowed formats:

Finally click on:
* '''''Upload''''': to only upload the file, which will be listed on the Document Management.
* '''''Upload and Open''''': to upload and open the document, which will be displayed in the document panel.

[[File:warning.png]] Depending on the size of the file, this may take some time. Please be patient.

Upload can also be done by using drag and drop area.

For some file formats you can configure some filter behaviors when uploading the file on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters|Configure Filters]]''' in ''Pandora's Box #8''. This is important for '''Text based files (xml, xsl)''' where a rules file (.properties) is needed.

=== Open ===
To open a document, first select it from the list of documents. There are 2 options on '''[[{{PAGENAME}}#File Tab|File tab]]''':

* '''''Open''''' button [[File:Translate_File16.png]]: will open a document and show all the segments
* '''''Fuzzy Open''''' button [[File:Translate_File16.png]]: will open a document, but only segments with a score lower than 100.

=== Segmentation ===
In order to be translated with a CAT tool, a document is divided into translation units (TUs), also known as segments. This process is called segmentation. A segment is a text string that ends with a terminator segment, usually the period (.), colon (:), question mark (?), or exclamation mark (!) and also a paragraph or end of cell mark, a page break or a tab.

The advantage of segmentation is that the translation units are presented to you one by one, without any danger of missing one. These segments form the basis for the TUs that are saved in the TM, consisting of the source segment (to translate) and the target segment (translated).

To configure segmentation go to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Segmentation_tab| Segmentation tab]]''' on the WFA settings.

=== Review ===
Once translated, the text should be revised. Here are some methods:
* Download the translated document immediately to view it in your favourite word processor.
* Download it in an offline review format. See '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Offline_Review_Tool|Offline Review Tool (OFRT)]]'''.
* Revise it in WFA using '''Trancheck''', '''Spellcheck''' and '''Preview''' tools. See below.
* If you are using the Classic mode for the document Layout (See the '''''Doc Layout''''' button [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] on '''''View''''' tab) , you can toggle the display between the bilingual document, the original document and the translated document, use the shortcut '''Ctrl+,''' (Ctrl+comma). A different display mode is presented with each iteration. To confirm what you see in front of you, check the indicator on the status bar: bilingual document (Bilingual), original document (Source) or translated document (Target). You can also click on the indicator to change it. Please note this action does not alter the document in any way. It only changes the way that it is displayed in a way that is more convenient for the task you are currently engaged in.

==== Transcheck ====
Click on the '''''Transchek''''' button [[File:Transcheck16.png]] of the '''''Review''''' tab. Transcheck provides the means to check translated content for missing tags, empty targets, numbers, untranslated segments, and terminology.

[[File:Transcheck.png]]

Click on the '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#QA_tab|Set the criteria]]''' link to go to the '''Setup''' and configure them.

Click on the '''''Check''''' button to get the result.

Click on the '''''Move next''''' button to move in the document panel to the first segment in the result list. Click again to move to next segment and so on.

==== Spellcheck ====

Click on the '''''Spellcheck'''' button [[File:Spellcheck16.png]] of the '''''View''''' tab and choose again '''Spellcheck''' in the list of choice. Spellcheck is a good practice to ensure high quality as it flags words in a document that may not be spelled correctly. The Spellcheck is done immediately then you'll get the following report with the results.

[[File:Spellcheck.png]]

Click on the '''''Move''''' button to move in the document panel to the first segment in the result list. Click again to move to next segment and so on.

==== Preview ====
Click on the '''''Preview''''' butonn [[File:Preview16.png]] of the '''''View''''' tab . It can be done at any stage of completion to get a PDF file displayed in a pop-up window with the translated document.

[[File:Preview_1.png]]
[[File:Preview_2.png]]

=== Download ===

[[File:Warning.png]] For '''download issues''', please check this [https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_fix_a_document_when_download_failed.3F link]

When the translation is finally complete, you must download the final document in order to be able to deliver it. To do this, click on [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab. A dialog with all the download options will be shown.

[[File:Donwload_all.jpg]]

Here is a short description of each option:

* '''Translated document/s''': Click to download the translated file. It will be the translated version of the source document in the same file type.

* '''Bilingual''': Click to download the TXLF (or TXML) file from the document. [[File:Warning.png]] '''''The download bilingual file will be of the type used when the file was uploaded.''''' For example if the file was uploaded using TXML, the bilingual download will be TXML. A file cannot be uploaded using one type (TXML) and download the bilingual file of the other type (TXLF). The workaround is to change the type and upload the file again. [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters More information]

* '''Offline review export''': Click to download an Offline Review file (.doc).

* '''Bilingual DOC without formatting''': Click to download bilingual for MS Word without placeholders (*.doc).

* '''Unformatted text''': Click to download unformatted Text (*.txt).

* '''Notes report''': Click to download a report with the document notes.

* '''TM from document/s''': Click to download a TM with document's content (.txml).

* '''Backup workspace''': Click to download a backup of current document + TM + glossary.

* '''Package''': Click to download a WFP package file (.glp) containing documents, memories, glossaries....etc. More information [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Package here]

* '''Filtered bilingual''': Open an advanced filtering dialog to choose segments to be downloaded.

Clicking '''OK''' will take the next dialog.

You may receive this message if you have not yet fully translated the document:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

This is purely an advisory message, warning you if you have forgotten to translate a segment or if there are provisional segments or notes. However it is quite possible that this is your intention: sometimes there are segments that should not be translated.

You can find out at any time if you have completed the translation, or how many segments remain to be translated, by using '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''

If your file is fully translated or you clicked '''OK''' on this warning dialog, a dialog where you can choose the way to download the file will open.

This can have different extra options depending the type of download you have chosen on the first dialog.

[[File:DownloadOptions2.png]]

For downloading the translated file, you have the option to add a second document in PDF format to the downloading of the document in its original format. To add the PDF-formatted document, tick the Add PDF file box. This may take some time, so please wait.

[[File:DownloadOptions2a.png]]

For downloading the TXML file, you have the options to copy the source content in case target segment is empty and not use language variants.

You can cancel the download by clicking Cancel or continue by clicking OK.
You can verify that this operation is taking place: a series of small blue rectangles will display the progress in the status bar.

There are some cases when you will get a compressed ZIP file instead of the original format. Check [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#Why_do_I_get_a_zip_file_when_downloading.3F here] the reasons.

If you have requested the PDF file, both files – the original and the PDF – will be downloaded together and compressed together in ZIP format (*. zip).

There are several ways to download a file:

* '''Download file''': After you click on the OK button, Wordfast Anywhere prepares the data transfer and then sends it to your browser. The browser will then inform you that it has received the data according to its specific mode of operation. In some cases, a dialog box will pop up allowing you specify where to save the file; however, this depends on the particular browser you use. If nothing happens, check your browser’s downloads settings and / or repeat the process.
* '''Send file to email''': Send the downloaded file by email.
* '''Create file URL''': Create a url to the downloaded file. To get the file copy-paste the url in your browser to start the download. The file will be available at that location for 3 days.
* '''Google Drive''': Send the downloaded file to your Google Drive account.
* '''Dropbox''': Send the downloaded file to your Dropbox account.

[[File:Warning.png]] For '''download issues''', please check this [https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_fix_a_document_when_download_failed.3F link]

=== Delete ===
[[File:Warning.png]] Remember this can '''NOT''' be undone, so it is recommended to download the file first.

To remove a file, first use the checkbox to select it and then use the [[File:Remove16.png]] icon on the language row.

[[File:Pmdeletefile.PNG]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Associated shares will be revoked.

Several files can be selected to be removed at the same time.

[[File:notice.png]] In case you accidentally delete a file, you can recover it by uploading again and using the same TM to pre-translate it.

=== Package ===
Project files (*.glp) are managed with the [[File:Pm import project 16.png]] '''Import''' and [[File:Pm export project 16.png]] '''Export''' buttons in the Project menu.

[[File:Warning.png]] The project file (*.glp) is limited to one source language while a Wordfast Anywhere project can have many, in consequence, package export is done by source language.

[[File:Warning.png]]There is an issue importing packages coming from PD. If you cannot import the .glp file, please ask to receive the bilingual files (txml/txlf) and the url for the TM/glossary.

==== Upload ====

Upload must be done using '''''Project''''' menu => '''''Import''''' [[File:Pm import project 16.png]] button.

Once you have selected you local file, click '''Upload'''. A new dialog with the package information and upload options will be shown.

[[File:UploadPkg.JPG]]

* '''Package Information''' section shows package name, who and when created the package and which language pairs contain.
* '''Package content''' section shows the bilingual files on the package. The files with the check box marked will be uploaded. '''On the right''' there are two drop-down lists to add a TM and glossary to the file which can came from the package if WFA can handle them or from your list on WFA (Information about them can be found on the Resources section).
* '''Resources''' section shows a list of TMs and glossaries and source files.

Finally there are two options for the upload.
* '''Create new folder''': by default files will be added to the root folder, you can use this option to upload the package files in a new folder.
* If the package contains source files a drop-down list will be shown to choose between '''Export back later''' to upload just the bilingual files and '''Generate final files on WFA''' to upload source files and merge them with the corresponding bilingual file in the package.

Once the package has been successfully uploaded, an HTML report is created.

[[File:Warning.png]] A new project is created with the content of the package.

==== Download ====

[[File:Warning.png]] The project file (*.glp) is limited to one source language while a Wordfast Anywhere project can have many, in consequence, package export is done by source language.

Download must be done using '''''Project''''' menu => '''''Export''''' [[File:Pm export project 16.png]] button.

[[File:DownloadPkg.JPG]]

* '''Package Information''': Here you can choose to download an existing package or create a new one, source and target languages. Multiple target language can be chosen if the package had them when it was uploaded.
* '''Package content''': After clicking '''Find Files''' a list of available files, TMs and glossaries is shown. The files with the check box marked will be downloaded.

Finally you can chose to '''Add Source files''' to the package.

= TM & Glossary Management =
== TM & Glossary Basics ==

Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''Setup TM&Glo''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' menu.

[[File:TmgloDialog.png]]

===Translation Memory ===
==== Creating a translation memory ====
There are several ways to create or add a TM:
* Create an empty standard WFA TM
* Upload an existing TM like from Wordast Classic or Pro
* Link to a remote TM hosted on a private Wordfast server
* Link to a Very Large TM hosted on a public Wordfast server

To create an empty TM, click on the '''''Create''''' button of the TM buttons area.

[[File:CreateTm.png]]

Choose source and target language codes. It is recommended that you have only one TM for each language pair. This way, you will benefit from everything you have already translated in each pair. However, there may be reasons for you to maintain different TMs in the same language pair. In this case, enter an ID using up to 10 characters in the Assigned Name field.
 Then click on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''Create TM''''' dialog box. Your TM has now been created and is selected in the list of TMs.

To Upload an existing TM, click on the '''''upload'''' button.

[[File:CreateTm_3.png]]

If you already have a TM that you use with Wordfast Classic or Pro, you can upload it to WFA. The codes for source and target languages are written in the header of the TM file. If you already have a TM in the same pair, make sure that you enter an identifier of up to 10 characters in the Assigned Name field.
 This procedure is exactly the same if you have a TM from another CAT tool. However, check first that this TM has been exported in the '''TMX''' format, the standard file format with extension '''.tmx''' supported by all major CAT tool developers.
 Click on the '''''Upload''''' button of the '''''Upload''''' dialog box, you will be prompted to browse a local file on your PC.

If the TM is in Excel format, before uploading it you need to save it as ''Unicode Text''.

[[File:warning.png]] Depending on its size, uploading a TM may take some time. In this case, it can be run in the background, allowing you to perform other tasks while you are waiting.

To add a remote TM or VLTM, click on the '''''add''''' button.

[[File:AddTm_1.png]]

Select the type TM in the list box.

[[File:AddTm_2.png]]

For adding a remote TM, copy paste the given URL in the URL field and the workgroup ID, if any, in the workgroup ID field.
 If you have already a remote TM with the same languages, you will need to enter a symbolic name.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test the remote TM. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:AddTm_3.png]]

WFA has access to the public TM server, which consists of segments offered by the community of translators and is available to all under the name VLTM (Very Large Translation Memory). The TM is unrestricted, free of charge and anonymous.
 For a VLTM, you need to enter source and target language codes.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test if the VLTM is available for your languages. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

==== Appending(Update) a local TM to an existing TM ====
You can upload and append(Update) a local TM to one of your existing TMs by clicking on the '''''merge''''' button.

[[File:MergeTm.png]]

 The process is slightly the same than uploading a TM but you should first select the existing TM in the list. The memory to import will already have predefined source and target languages codes in the header of the TM. There may therefore be a conflict of languages between it and the existing memory. If the languages are different, the merge operation will be rejected.
 You also have the choice, in case there are identical source segments, to add always the TM segments, or to not add duplicated segments from the TM. Select '''Add always''' or '''Do not add duplicate''' in the list box.
 By default, the merge process will not take language variants into account. If you want to make sure exactly the same variants are merged, tick the '''append TUs having the same variant''' option.
 Finally click on the '''''Merge''''' button of the '''''Append TUs''''' dialog box

==== Selecting an existing TM for translating a document ====
Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''TMs and Glossaries''' button on '''File''' menu to open the dialog and select an existing TM.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Caution''': If your TM is selected in the TM list, it does not mean selected for translating a document.
To select a TM for translation, you have to tick it in the '''active''' column and click on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' dialog box.
In this example above, 2 EN>FR TMs and 2 EN>FR glossaries are set active for translation.

[[File:notice.png]] A document can have as active '''several read-only''' TMs, but '''only one writeable'''. You might need to uncheck the active checkbox from the current writeable TM in order to set a new one.

=== Glossary ===
The use of incorrect terminology can ruin an otherwise good translation. Many clients have a well-defined terminology (the jargon of the trade), compiled in the form of a glossary. By supplying this glossary to their translators, clients can impose a particular terminology. In adopting this approach, very common in technical translation, the end result should harmoniously fuse the linguistic competence of the translator with the terminological requirements of the client.

Sometimes the client will ask the translator to provide a glossary of terms arising from research undertaken during the translation. In this case, the translator must create a glossary and add specific terminology to it. This glossary building can either be done prior to translation (in an initial terminology research phase), or during the translation itself.

In many cases, however, the client provides a bilingual glossary, which has already been created during the course of previous translations. It is then up to the translator to comply strictly with it and, where appropriate, to add his or her own contributions.

When the translation work is of a more general nature (and especially if a translator is still in the process of acquiring the general vocabulary of a source language), WFA’s glossary function can also be used to itemise terminology that is encountered during the course of the translation process.

Wordfast Anywhere is designed to assist the translator in all the cases mentioned above through the implementation of its glossary function. This glossary consists of a simple tab-delimited text document, which – like the TM – can be uploaded to and downloaded from WFA, shared with other CAT programs, etc. as required.

==== Creating a glossary ====
Like TM there are several ways to create or add a glossary:
* Create an empty standard WFA glossary
* Upload an existing glossary
* Link to remote glossaries
* Link to Tilde Terminology services
* Link to a IATE glossary

To create an empty glossary, click on the '''''Create''''' button of the glossary buttons area and follow the same TM pattern.

To Upload an existing glossary, click on the '''''upload''''' button of the glossary buttons area and follow the same TM pattern.
 Allowed file types are simple tabulated text file (*.txt) (source + tab + target), Wordfast glossary text file (*.txt), Excel file (*.xls, *.xlsx) and TBX file (*.tbx).
 Excel files must be simple:
* 1st Column: Source (compulsory)
* 2nd Column: Target (compulsory)
* 3rd Column: Comment (optional)
* 4th Column: F1 (optional)
* 5th Column: F2 (optional)
* 6th Column: F3 (optional)

 Unlike with a TM, WFA cannot derive the source and target language information from the header of the glossary file; therefore this must be specified here.
 Once the glossary has been uploaded, you will receive a report summarising the operation:
 You will see how many terms have been submitted for upload, how many were rejected as invalid or duplicates well as the total number of terms added.

To add a remote glossary or Tilde Terminology services, click on the '''''add''''' button.

[[File:AddGlossary_1.png]]

Select the type in th elist box.

[[File:AddGlossary_2.png]]

For adding a remote glossary, copy paste the given URL in the URL field.
 If you have already a remote glossary with the same languages, you will need to enter a symbolic name.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test the remote glossary. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:AddGlossary_3.png]]

For setting Tilde Terminology services, you need to select source and target languages and a domain.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test if you have collections. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:addIATE.png]]

To set an IATE glossary, just select the source and target languages. Only languages from the European community are supported.
Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button and if the glossary exists, click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:addIATE2.png]]

By default not all IATE terminology is showed, but you can enable it by checking '''''Show all common terminology'''''.

==== Appending terms from a local glossary to an existing glossary in Wordfast Anywhere ====
You can upload and append a glossary to one of your existing glossaries by clicking on the '''''merge''''' button.

[[File:MergeGlo.png]]

 The process is slightly the same than uploading but you should first select the existing glossary in the list.
 You have the choice, in case there are identical entries (source and target), to add always or to not add duplicated. Select '''Add always''' or '''Do not add duplicate''' in the list box.
 Finally click on the '''''Merge''''' button.

==== Selecting one or more glossaries for translation ====
Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''TMs and Glossaries''' button on '''File''' menu to open the dialog and select an existing TM.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Caution''': If your glossary is selected in the glossary list, it does not mean selected for translation.
To select a glossary for translation, you have to tick it in the '''active''' column and click after on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' dialog box.

[[File:notice.png]] A document can have as active '''several read-only''' glossaries, but '''only one writeable'''. You might need to uncheck the active checkbox from the current writeable glossary in order to set a new one.

==== Using a glossary ====

[[File:Use glossary.png]]

* Whenever WFA recognises a term from the glossary in the source segment it highlights it against a blue background

* The terms highlighted in blue are considered as placeables. They can thus be manipulated with the [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] and [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] icons or the Ctrl+Alt+Right and Ctrl+Alt+Left shortcuts and by clicking on them with the mouse or by typing their initial letter + Tab. The difference is that, when you use the [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]] icon or the Ctrl+Alt+Down shortcut, it is the corresponding translation that is copied to the target segment. The most easy way to copy a target is probably to use the Auto-suggest feature, enabled by default. Target terms are proposed by typing the first letter of the target term of the 3 first letters of the source term. [[File:Auto-suggest target term.png]] [[File:Auto-suggest target term 2.png]].

* You can see in advance what the translation of the highlighted items is by activating the glossary panel (keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+H or by selecting it from the '''''View''''' tab => '''''Show/Hide Glossary''''' [[File:panelGlo.png]] button )

* If you want to know more about a term, i.e. the information that you or someone else has entered in the comment or F1, F2 and F3 fields, place your mouse over the source term and this information will be displayed. See above the bubble of the last term on the glossary panel (translation).

==== Adding terms to the glossary ====

[[File:Add_term.png]]

It is quite likely that you will want to incorporate terms you come across in the source text into the glossary together with their translations that arise as part of your research process. This way, your linguist’s memory will be reinforced and you are less likely to have to research the same word or phrase again in the future. WFA allows you to do this dynamically, at any time and without exiting your translation process.

First, select the term in the source text. If it consists of one word, you can simply click on it or use the Tab key to move forwards (or Shift+Tab to move backwards) through the text until you reach its position.

The word you have selected will be highlighted against a red border.

Then click on the target term in the target segment.

The selected target term will have a blue background.

[[File:Select terms.png]]

Next, invoke the Glossary Dialog Box by typing Ctrl+Alt+T, or clicking the '''''Add Term''''' [[File:TermEdit.png]] button.

If a single word, the terms you highlighted in the source and target segments should automatically appear in the Source and Target fields.
If the terms consists of more than one word, it may be necessary to paste the text into the fields from your computer’s clipboard or type the information manually.

You can also add a comment – something that may prove useful in the future, e.g. if you want to remember the situation in which this translation was used. The F1, F2 and F3 fields may be used to store word role, context, grammatical form or any other relevant text-based information.

Then click Save to confirm.

==== Fuzzy terminology recognition ====
Each time you open a segment, Wordfast Anywhere checks for the presence in the glossary of all words and terms contained in the source segment. This operation is called terminology recognition. The recognised terms are highlighted in blue in the source segment, as discussed above.

In establishing a correspondence between the terms of the source segment and the terms found in the glossary, WFA will both recognise an exact match and attempt to recognise fuzzy matches.

WFA employs a stemming algorithm for some languages (e.g. German) in order to recognise different forms of the same word that may correspond to those listed in the glossary.

For example, WFA can recognised the infinitive verb ‘besuchen’ as being related to the adjective (or past participle) ‘besucht’ due to the fact that the two words share a common stem.

Fuzzy matching can also be established by using an asterisk in combination with the term. This method overrides the stemming algorithm, allowing you to find all terms that begin with, end with or contain a particular text string.

=== Concordance search ===
Segments stored in the TM are retrieved only if they have a minimum level of correspondence with the source segment (by default 75%). However, even if the level of correspondence is not sufficient to produce a fuzzy match, the TM may still contain terms that you have previously translated and wish to use in your current translation. To search in the memory you have two options:

1) Click on the '''''Concordance''''' button [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]] or use the '''Ctrl+Alt+C''' shortcut. The following window appears:

[[File:concordance.png]]

Enter the word or text string you want to research in the Search field. WFA will search for all words that are the same or begin with the same sequence of letters as the string entered.

You can also select the word or text string with the mouse and then click on the '''''Concordance''''' button [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]] or '''Ctrl+Alt+C''' shortcut. The result will be displayed immediately.

You can edit or delete a term in the concordance search window by clicking on the edit or delete links.

You can add to your search possibilities by choosing the Advanced option:
* Two words or text strings (search terms) separated by a space: one or the other must exist in the TU
* Two terms separated by the + sign: both terms must exist
* A term ending with an asterisk: a search is performed for all text strings containing the search term.

When you use this option, a help line is displayed to remind you how this command works.

=== Searching in a glossary===
You can also search in the glossary. To do this, click the '''''Glossary Search''''' button [[File:GlossarySearch.png]] or use the '''Ctrl+Alt+G''' shortcut:

[[File: Glossary search.png]]

Type the source language word you wish to search for in the Search field and click OK. The list of glossary entries that contain the search term will be displayed.
You can edit or delete a term in the glossary search window by clicking on the edit or delete icons.

By employing an asterisk in the search term, you can expand your search to find all glossary entries that include the text string that the search term is made up of.

== TM & Glossary Advanced features ==

=== TM operations ===
==== View/Edit a TM ====
Select the TM in the list then click on the '''''Edit''''' button.

[[File:ViewEditTm.png]]

The dialog box displays the TM information. Depending on the TM type, you can edit some properties.
* Standard WFA TM : you have the possibility to define attributes of your TM, which will allow you to subsequently identify its segments. Click on the '''Attributes''' tab.
[[File:EditTmAttributes.png]]

There are five attributes in a Wordfast TM: the first is fixed and immutable, consisting of the name of the user. The other four can be defined by each user at will, but it is recommended to use attribute 1 to describe the subject of the text to be translated and attribute 2 for the client, to maintain compatibility with Wordfast Classic and Wordfast Pro users. Attributes consist of codes, usually 3 letters, followed by a brief description. In the fields referred to as TM attribute 1 to 4, enter the name of the attribute (subject, client, etc.). In the field on their right, select one of the attributes that appear on the drop-down list or, if necessary, click '''add''' to add an attribute, '''upd''' to update it or '''del''' to delete it. Whatever option is chosen, a dialog will appear asking for the code of the attribute (ID) and a brief description (Name, ignored for the Del option).
[[file:EditTmAttributes_add.png]] [[file:EditTmAttributes_update.png]] [[file:EditTmAttributes_delete.png]]

Dynamic codes : Predefined attributes can be added by entering a code between accolades as explain in the help.
[[File:EditTmAttributes_help.png]]

* Remote private Wordfast server

[[File:EditRemoteTm.png]] You can edit the workgroup ID and/or the symbolic name.

==== Download a TM ====
This is available only for standard WFA TM.

[[File:DownloadTm.png]]

From the Downloaded file format drop-down list you can select either the Wordfast TM TXT format, the Standard TMX format, the MS Excel XLS format or the Bilingual document TXLF format.
 Click on the '''Download''' button.

===== Filters when downloading a TM =====
Select ''"Filtering (advanced options)"'' on the second drop-down list and click on the '''Download''' button.

[[File:Tm_download2.JPG]]

This will analyse the TM and let you apply some filters to select what you want to download from the TM.

[[File:Tm_download_filter.JPG]]

[[File:Tm_download_filter2.JPG]]

Once filters are selected click on the '''Download''' button to finish the download.

==== Removing a TM ====
After clicking on the top '''Remove''' button on the TM side, this red warning is displayed to confirm the deletion.
 For TMs that are not Wordfast Anywhere standard TMs only the link to the external TM is cut.

[[File:DeleteTm.png]]

==== Quick TM Share ====
By clicking on the small '''share''' button on top of the TM side, you can share quickly a TM to somebody else having an account in Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:CreateTMShare.png]]

Click on the '''''Add guest''''' button and enter his email address (which should be his account login), then click '''Add'''.

[[File:CreateTMShare2.png]]

You can change the privilege of your guest on your TM. Finally to save the share, click on the '''''Save''''' button.

==== TMs Tools ====
===== Reversing a TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmReverse.png]]

Select a TM to reverse and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a TM already exists with the same name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Assembling several TMs in one TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmAssembled.png]]

Select one or more TMs to assemble in one TM and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a TM already exists with the same name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 if '''keep old assigned name''' is unchecked this information will be lost.
 if '''keep variants''' is checked, the TU will not be changed, otherwise, it take the given language pair.
 if '''keep user ID''' is checked, the TU will not be changed, otherwise, it will take your user ID.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Edit a TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmEdit.png]]

Select a TM to edit and click on the '''Run''' button.
 The TM will be opened as a temporary associated document in the document panel.

[[File:ToolsTmEdit1.png]]

Here you can for example update target segments, edit source segments and delete TU. Those changes will be stored straight on your TM.
 Bear in mind that this is a TM although it looks like a document.

After the TM edition, the temporary document must be deleted because it is a static copy of the TM.
 The tool can only edit and delete existing TUs and the TM size is limited to 100000 TUs.

=== Glossary operations ===
==== View/Edit a glossary ====
Select the glossary in the list then click on the '''''View/Edit''''' button.

[[File:ViewEditGlo.png]]

The dialog box displays the glossary information. Depending on the glossary type, you can edit some properties.

[[File:EditRemoteGlo.png]]

[[File:EditTildeGlo.png]]

==== Download a glossary ====
This is available only for standard WFA glossary.

[[File:DownloadGlo.png]]

Click on the '''Download''' button.

==== Removing a glossary ====
After clicking on the top '''Remove''' button on the glossary side, this red warning is displayed to confirm the deletion.
 For glossaries that are not standard only the link to the external glossary is cut.

[[File:DeleteGlo.png]]

==== Quick Glossary Share ====
By clicking on the small '''share''' button on top of the glossary side, you can share quickly a glossary to somebody else having an account in Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:CreateGloShare.png]]

Click on the '''''Add guest''''' button and enter his email address (which should be his account login), then click '''Add'''.

[[File:CreateGloShare2.png]]

You can change the privilege of your guest on your glossary. Finally to save the share, click on the '''''Save''''' button.

==== Glossaries tools ====
===== Reversing a glossary=====
[[File:ToolsGloReverse.png]]

Select a glossary to reverse and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a glossary already exists with the reversed glossary name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Assembling several glossaries in one glossary =====
[[File:ToolsGloAssembled.png]]

Select two or more glossaries to assemble and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a glossary already exists with the assembled glossary name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 if '''keep old assigned name''' is unchecked this information will be lost.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

=== TMs and glossaries shares ===

You can allow other users to share your TM as well as your glossary and you can see the TMs and the glossaries shared to you by others.
To manage all kind of share, click on the bottom '''''Share''''' button of the TMs and glossaries dialog. At that time you will receive the following:

[[File:Tmglo_share_1.png]]

* If you have already enabled the sharing of your TMs and your glossaries with other users, they will be displayed in the '''My shares to other users''' table. You can revoke sharing with any of these users. To do this, select the user in question and click '''Revoke'''. To add or update an existing share click on the '''Add''' or '''Edit''' buttons and see the chapter '''Add and edit shares to other users''' below.
* You can visualize all the TMs and glossaries that have been shared to you in the '''My shares from other users''' table. You can end any share by selecting it and clicking on the '''Remove''' button.
* You can also share your TMs and glossaries to applications like Wordfast Classic and Wordfast Pro by generating keys. they are displayed in the '''My shares to applications''' table. See below the chapter '''Sharing to applications'''.

==== Add and edit shares to other users ====

[[File:Tmglo_share_2.png]]

[[File:Tmglo_share_edit.png]]

[[File:Tmglo_share_3.png]]

==== Sharing to applications ====
Wordfast Anywhere will generate up to 5 keys to share one or more TMs and, optionally, glossaries.
The key is needed for the external application to connect to that specific share.

[[File:Tmglo_share_app_1.png]]

If you want to add the TMs and glossaries currently used, click on the '''Add active TMs and glossaries''', otherwise click on the '''Add''' button to choose a TM and the '''Add''' button to choose a glossary.
 Choose the right privilege and the number of keys needed, then click on the the '''Save''' button.
 The keys will be generated and listed in the '''My shares to application''' table. See below.

[[File:Tmglo_share_app_2.png]]

For instance this can be used on Wordfast Pro 3.4.9, where there is a tab for Wordfast Anywhere TM and glossaries.

[[File:Wpftab.png]]

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QVOMOYfR2ws&feature=em-subs_digest this video] about how to do it.

 Although the API key is for a combined TM and glossary, on Wordfast Pro 3.4.9 you need to add it twice: one for TM and one for glossary

[[Wordfast Pro]] users can check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=S7QCHNpRtKo&feature=em-subs_digest this video].

= Translation =
== Preparation of the translation environment ==
Before beginning the translation of a document using a CAT tool, you must first have an active Translation Memory.

'''Note''': an initial TM was automatically set up when you created your account.

The TM consists of a database, which will record each source language segment (i.e. sentence, phrase) that you translate, together with the corresponding target language segment. As it grows, this increasingly allows you to obtain translations of phrases made previously that are the same or similar to the one you are currently translating.

For more information check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Translation_Memory|Translation Memory basics]]'''.

== Translating ==
To start the translation, you must first open the initial segment.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:StartNext.png]] '''''Start/Next''''' button or use the ''Alt + Down'' shortcut . When you do this, the document area is transformed: the segment is displayed in light blue block (source), a grey block (target) is placed just below it and the rest of your document is shown on the rest of the page. The cursor is located in the grey block.

Translate the segment in the grey block

[[File:StartTrans.png|1200px]]

After translating this segment, you can continue with your translation. To move to the next segment, click on the [[File:StartNext.png]] '''''Start/Next''''' or use the ''Alt+Down'' shortcut. Remember this shortcut, as you will use it for each segment you translate. You can also move to previous segment by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Previous.png]] '''''Previous''''' or use the ''Alt + Up'' shortcut.

[[File:notice.png]] '''''When translating, the segments are saved automatically in the translation memory and on the database system as soon as you go to the next segment.'''''

Now translate the segment as before.

Now that you get the idea, you can continue to translate. Remember: to move from one segment to the next, use ''Alt+Down''. To return to the previous segment (to correct something that you subsequently realised was mistaken), use ''Alt+Up''.

Following are some '''other considerations''' regarding the translation of segments.

'''Note''': Most browser / OS combinations, including Firefox, Safari and Chrome, have their own spell checker – in some cases it may be necessary for you to activate it. You can also use '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Spellcheck|Spellcheck]]'''

There is color code for the target block:
* Grey is the no match from the TM (score=0)
* Green is the full match from the TM (score=100)
* Yellow is a fuzzy match from the TM (score between 50 to 99)
* Orange is a MT proposition
* Purple is the color when the segment has been modified by the editor

Score information can be found in different places depending on the view.
For '''Classic view''' it can be found on ''<}score{>'' tag between source and target segment.

[[File:ScoreC.png|1200px]]

For '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views''' there is a column for the score.

[[File:ScoreH.png|1200px]]

[[File:ScoreV.png|1200px]]

=== Tags ===

Before translating this new segment, pay attention to the tag <1>, which appears here at the end. WFA is not a word processor and thus does not concern itself with a specific representation of the document's formatting. You'll see no changes in size or typeface, no bold or italic characters. Instead, this information is encoded and represented by what we call "tags", e.g. <1>. By slowly passing your mouse over this tag you will see what it represents. This tag is not to be translated, but it should be placed on the appropriate position in the target segment. If you want to recopy a tag from the source segment please type < to trigger the tags proposal.

[[File:tagProposal.png]]

You can also copy it by using the comands on '''Translation''' tab: [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] '''Next Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Right'') and [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] '''Previous Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Left'') to navigate the source segment to the desired tag. A red frame indicates the selected item. Then position the cursor in the target segment and click on [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]] '''Copy Pl.'''(''Ctrl+Alt+Down'').

Differences on the formatting tags (<1>, <2>) between source and target segment can make the file filter aligner have difficulties to build up the translated document.

Check there is no ''segments with tag difference'' using one of this options:
# Click on [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button on '''File''' tab to get a report. Check if there are any ''segments with tag difference''. Use '''''Show Outline''''' [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button on '''View''' tab to go straight to one segment.
# Click on [[File:FindReplace.png]] '''''Find & Replace''''' button on '''Edit''' tab. Go to ''Miscellaneous'' tab and run a ''Tag difference'' search. Segments with tag differences will be listed.

On the listed segments you must pay attention to:
# There is no target tag missing that exists on source.
# The target tag order is different from source order. For example [<1>text text<2>] on source but [<2>text text<1>] on target.
# The target tag content is not identical with the source tag. You can see the content of the tag when the mouse is over it.

[[File:Warning.png]] We '''do not recommend to use copy/paste or drag and drop''' to copy the tags as it can copy more than the eye can see and be problematic. It is better to use the the auto-suggest feature with tags (whenever you want to add a tag just type < and the list of tags from source will be proposed for selection) or the [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]] '''Copy Placeable''' on '''Translation''' tab.

== Main commands ==

=== Provisional segment ===
You may be unsure whether your translation of a segment is correct. To avoid having to interrupt your translation process, you can mark the segment as provisional.

It will be identified by a yellow square at the beginning of the line for '''Classic view''' or at the end of the row for '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views'''.

To mark a segment as provisional, use the F10 key or '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mark.png]] '''''Provisional'''''.

When you have resolved any doubts, simply return to the marked segment and make your corrections. Use ''Alt+Down'' ( [[File:StartNext.png]] ) or ''Alt-Up'' ( [[File:Previous.png]] ) to validate the segment and erase the yellow square.

=== Auto propagate ===
Use this command to translate a segment and automatically propagate the current segment changes through all the document to other segments having the same source.

Find it in '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Autopropagate.png]] '''''Auto Propagate'''''.

=== Note ===
You can also write a note to be attached to the segment for the duration of the translation (in a similar manner to a Post-ItTM). You can use this to remind yourself of something important about this segment or to pass information on to people who will have access to your translation, such as reviewers.

To write a note, click on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Edit_Note16.png]] '''''Edit Note'''''.

The following text box will be displayed:

[[File:Editnote.png|1200px]]

Write your note in the text box and click Save. You can cancel the operation by clicking Cancel. In the case of an existing note, you can edit and validate it by clicking Save, or delete it by clicking Remove.

A green square will be placed at the beginning of the segment to indicate that a note is attached. By passing the mouse pointer over this square, you will see a rectangle containing the text of the note.

It will be identified by a grey square with an "i" in it at the beginning of the line for '''Classic view''' or at the end of the row for '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views'''.

[[File:Editnote2.png|1200px]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Notes can be downloaded by going to '''''File''''' tab => [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' and choosing the '''''Notes Report'''''

=== Copying the original segment ===
Sometimes a segment contains very little to translate: for example, when it consists almost entirely of proper names or is made up of a website address. In this case, it may be preferable to copy the entire source segment to the target segment and make any adjustments there.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CopySource.png]] '''''Copy Source'''''. or use the shortcut ''Alt-Ins'.

=== Erasing the target segment ===
Sometimes it is necessary to erase what you have just written in the target segment.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Cleanup_Project16.png]] '''''Del Target'''''. or use the shortcut ''Ctrl+Alt+X''.

This button has a toggle behaviour through: Empty target, Remove tags and Restore.

=== Insertion of a special character like the non-breaking space ===
When you write in French, some characters must be accompanied by a non-breaking space: e.g. before the colon, semicolon, exclamation mark, question mark, exclamation mark, before and after quotes, thousands separators, and so on. In WFA, a non-breaking space is represented by the symbol < >.

However, such spaces cannot be automatically handled in an Internet browser as they are when using a text editor such as Word. Therefore it will be necessary to add them manually. By default, a non-breaking space is inserted at the cursor location by clicking on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Insert_c1.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 1'''''.

Two other special characters can be inserted like the curly quotes. Use '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Insert_c2.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 2''''' and [[File:Insert_c3.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 3'''''.

You can configure these 3 special characters in WFA setup (see '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Pandora.27s_box_tab|Pandora’s box]]''').

=== Expanding a segment ===
As we have seen, WFA considers that the segment is terminated when it encounters a segment termination marker. However, in some cases this segmentation is in error. For example, when WFA’s segmentation engine meets the following sentence:
''On pense aux conseils de Prof. Jacques Lacan:''
it can interpret the segment as ending with ''Prof.'' because a full stop is used as an end of segment marker. In this case we can command WFA to expand the segment, that is to say, to append the subsequent segment to it.

[[File:exspand1.png]]

This is done with the ''Alt+Pg'' dn shortcut or '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Expand_Segment16.png]] '''''Expand'''''.

[[File:exspand2.png]]

It is important to expand segments when the segmentation has not been performed correctly because this will increase the chances of it corresponding with a translation memory segment. For example, the segment ''On pense aux conseils de Prof.'' will have little chance of having a similarity of over 75% with another. By contrast, if the sentence ''On pense aux conseils de Prof. Jacques Lacan:'' is in the TM, when WFA encounters the source sentence ''On pense aux conseils de Professeur Jacques Lacan'', it will offer the existing translation, as it has 90% similarity (it is only the word Professor that is not the same).

A segment cannot be expanded if it is terminated by an end of paragraph or end of cell marker, a page break or a tab.

You should not have to expand all segments containing abbreviations that end with a full stop. A comma-separated, modifiable list of common language-specific abbreviations is included in WFA . This can be accessed and modified via the segmentation tab in the configuration dialog box [case-sensitive, optional letters are enclosed in square brackets].

[[File:Abbrev.png]]

=== Shrinking a segment ===
If, on the other hand, two segments are erroneously displayed together due to an absence of an end of segment marker, you can also shrink the segment with the shortcut ''Alt-Pg'' up or ''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:ShrinkSeg.png]] '''''Shrink'''''.

=== Placeables ===

A placeable is any term or expression contained in the source segment that is defined as such. WFA provides shortcuts for inserting them into the target segment, thus both saving time and reducing the potential for typing errors.

WFA predefines as placeables:
*Numbers
*Tags
*Words beginning with, or otherwise containing, capital (upper case) letters
*Words or phrases appearing in the source text that have matching items stored in the '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Glossary|Glossary]]'''.

We have already seen how to copy tags. Given that a tag is a placeable, the procedure is the same: to copy any placeable, simply select it with the comands on '''Translation''' tab: [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] '''Next Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Right'') and [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] '''Previous Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Left'').

You also have the possibility of clicking on any term in the source text, thus placing it under focus and temporarily transforming it into a placeable. A red frame indicates the item selected.

Next, position the cursor in the target segment at the point where the placeable should be positioned or double-click (click and drag) to select the word (phrase) to be replaced and click on the on [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]] '''Copy Pl.'''(''Ctrl+Alt+Down''). The placeable is copied to the relevant position in the target segment.

In this sentence, the placeable elements, selected by ''Ctrl+Alt+Right'' or [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]], are:

[[File:place1.png]]
(starts with a capital letter)

[[File:place2.png]]
(number)

[[File:place3.png]]
(tag)

And, if necessary, any term may be designated as a placeable simply by clicking on it:

[[File:place4.png]]

As you translate the text, you only want to place those elements that should not be translated:

[[File:place5.png]]

At this point, you want to write ‘Chenjerai.’. However it may be faster and more efficient (as well as reducing the possibility of error) to select the item using ''Ctrl+Alt+Right'' or [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] (or even by simply clicking on it) and place it into the segment target with ''Ctrl+Alt+Down'' or [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]].

[[File:place6.png]]

The following proper noun ‘Hove’ is also a placeable, so you can repeat the procedure. Simply use the '''Tab key''' on your keyboard to advance from one placeable to the next (or '''Shift+Tab''' to move in the opposite direction).

[[File:place7.png]]

You can also use the ''Ctrl+Alt+Up'' shortcut or [[File:Dropdown.png]] '''Toggle Pl.'' on '''Translation''' tab to transform terms in the source segment into placeables.

For even greater efficiency, if you type a letter that begins a word or term in the source segment and then successively press Tab, all words or terms beginning with that letter are successively copied to the target segment. For example, in the above sentence, typing ''l'' followed by '''Tab''' will copy ''lyrique'' to the target. Each time you press the Tab key, the word or term that has been copied to the target segment will be replaced by the next
word or term appearing in the source segment that begins with the same letter, i.e. ''le'', ''laisse'' and so on.

=== Case changer ===
Use this feature to toggle through: lowercase, uppercase and proper name for a word. This feature can be used in one word (by putting the cursor inside the word), or with more than one word (by selecting several words with the mouse or Shift+Left/Right Arrow).
Beware that some times it gets crazy with the first and last word.

Use it bu clicking on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:CaseChanger.png]] '''''Case Changer'''''.

=== Increase target height ===
You can increase the target height by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Increase_target.png]] '''''Target Height'''''.

=== Web Speech Beta ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY available for Chrome. Currently disabled due to browser security.'''

This is a beta implementation that uses Google Web Speech API to insert your dictation into the target segment.

To use it, first open the segment and then click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mic.png]] '''''Web Speech Beta''''' button to start the dictation. The icon will change to indicate recording is on. To stop dictation click again on the button.

You can add a shortcut to this command.

You can jump to the next segment as always and keep on dictating. Or you can stop dictation, jump to the next segment and start dictation again.

A provisional transcription will be shown as an auto-suggest text and the final transcription will be inserted on the target segment. The provisional transcription might not be accurate while final transcription should be quite accurate and may be different from provisional transcription.

Please take into account that this is a beta implementation and that voice transcription is done online so there can be delays when dictating. We encourage you to use it and give us some feedback.

[[File:Warning.png]] It can be that Chrome keeps asking you to allow the use of the microphone every time. You need to check the Chrome settings: "Privacy>Content Settings>Microphone>Manage exceptions". There you should have an exception for https:freetm.com.

If you are connected to the site via HTTS the grant is permanent, if you use HTTP, you are asked each time.

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rR88md-xyik&feature=em-uploademail this video] about how to use this tool.

Check this links for more information:

[https://support.google.com/chrome/answer/3123708?p=settings_manage_exceptions&rd=1 Chrome Exceptions]

[https://support.google.com/chrome/answer/6148059?hl=en Chrome website permissions]

=== Edit Source ===
Using '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:EditSource16.png]] '''''Edit Source''''' will help you to correct the source text in order to have valid TU in memory.

This will not change the source file and obviously will not automatically change the target segment.

=== Ending the translation ===
If for any reason you want to stop translating, you have three choices:
* Close the translation and validate the current segment in the TM ('''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close & Commit''''' or ''Alt+End'')
* Close the translation without validating it ('''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:Close.png]] '''''Close''''' or ''Shift+Alt+End'')
* Clear the content of the target segment, together with any attached note, by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:Close_restore.png]] '''''Close & Delete''''' .

== After Translation ==

When your translation is finished, you use one of our '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Review|Review]]''' tools before '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Download|Download]]''' it.

= Tools =
=== Downloading TXML file ===
You can download your document in TXML format, the standard working file format used by WFA. This permits you, for example, to send the file to a colleague for review using Wordfast Anywhere or Pro. Once reviewed and corrected, you can upload it again.

To download your working file go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual TXML'''''.

[[File:DownloadTypesList.png]]

If your translation is incomplete or contains provisional segments or notes, you will receive this warning:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

At this point you have the choice to accept (OK) or cancel (Cancel) to return to your translation. If you accept, you will need to consider the following dialog:

[[File:DownloadOptions2a.png]]

You can optionally instruct WFA to copy the source segment to the target segment if it is blank (check Copy source to target if target is empty) and/or to ignore language variations, e.g. to not make a distinction between British and American English (check No language variants).

Choose the way to download the file and click '''''OK''''' to donwload the file.

=== Merging TXML files ===
If you already have a file in TXML format you can upload it to your workspace. To do this go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:Mergetms16.png]] '''Merge Txml''' button. At this point you must complete the following dialog box:

[[File:Mergetxml1.PNG]]

By checking Merge an existing document, all documents that exist in your workspace will be listed according to language pair, and you will have to choose which will be merged with the file you intend to upload.

You can also set WFA to update the TM corresponding to the file you upload (check Update or create a TM with a bilingual document). Check Merge an existing TM and choose which TM to update from the list displayed. You will also need to determine whether, in the case of identical source segments, new TUs should be added to existing ones (Keep existing TUs) or whether they should replace them (Overwrite existing TUs). If, on the other hand, you prefer to create a new TM, click on Create a new TM. At this point, you will have the opportunity to give this new TM a name, if you have more than one TM for the same language pair. Then click Upload to upload the file or Close to exit without doing anything.

Note that operations performed on the document are independent from memory-related operations, allowing you to update only the document, or only the memory, or both.
If you have clicked Upload, you will receive the following message:

[[File:Mergetxml2.png]]

Click Browse to navigate through your directories and select your file, then click Submit to perform the upload or Cancel to cancel the operation. After the merge operation has been successfully performed, a report will appear showing how many segments were merged.

[[File:Mergetxml3.png]]

=== Other downloads ===
You can also download the working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments, usable by Wordfast Classic (and Trados Workbench).

[[File:Bilingualwordfastclassic.png]]

This will allow your document to be proofread by a Wordfast Classic user. Caution, this download is only available for files formatted as .doc and .rtf. Unlike the TXML file, this format cannot be imported into WFA.

To download your working file in bilingual MS-Word format, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the '''''Download''''' button and choose '''Bilingual Doc original''' option. This option is only available if your source file is a MS Word file.

[[File:DownloadTypesList.png]]

If your translation is incomplete or contains provisional segments or notes, you will receive this warning:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

At this point you have the choice to accept (OK) or cancel (Cancel) to return to your translation. If you accept, you will need to respond to the following message:

[[File:Bilingualwordfastclassic2.png]]

Following the same steps you can download this other files:

* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments without placeholders Bilingual. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC no placeholders''''' option.
* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments with placeholders Bilingual. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC with placeholders''''' option.
* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments with tag-content as placeholder. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC tag content''''' option.
* Your translated file, in plain text format, without any formatting. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Unformatted Text''''' option.

=== Find & Replace ===
It is often necessary to locate a word or text string in a file that has been translated. For this we use the Doc Find and Replace function. Go to '''''Edit''''' tab and click on the [[File:FindReplace.png]] '''''Find & Replace''''' button.

As with other functions that require the current segment to be closed, you will receive a warning that the current segment will be closed without being saved. If you agree, click OK, otherwise click Cancel to cancel the transaction and save your work.

[[File:Warning.png]] By default search is only done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:SR1.png]]

'''''Find & Replace''''' dialog has 4 tabs performing different actions.

* Use '''Find''' tab to locate a word or text in your document.
* Use '''Find/Replace''' tab to locate and replace a word or text in your document.
* Use '''Go to Segment''' tab to search for single segments (1,5,68,499) or a range of segments (25-66).
* Use '''Miscellaneous''' tab to perform different types of searches such as look for '''provisional''' or '''untranslated''' segments, or segments with '''notes''' or '''tag differences'''.

[[File:Notice.png]] You can use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:Warning.png]] Not all the options are always available.
==== Find ====
Use '''Find''' tab.
Type the word or text you want to find and click '''Find''' button to start a search. When search is done hits are highlighted and the number of hits is shown on the dialog.

[[File:SR6.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] By default search is only done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:SR7.png]]

==== Replace ====
Use '''Find/Replace''' tab. Type the word/text you want to find and the word/text you want it replaced for and click '''Find''' button to start a search. When search is done hits are highlighted and the number of hits is shown on the dialog.

[[File:SR8.png]]

It may happen that '''Replace''', '''Replace/Find''' and '''Replace All''' buttons are not available. This happens because the first search does not move you to the first hit, you have to click again '''Find''' to move to the next hit and then replace buttons will be available. Use them to replace, replace and move to next hit or replace all hits.

Replace can only be done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Go to Segment ====
Use '''Go to Segment''' tab. Use it to find specific segments. This can be an alternative to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''.
You can type single segments separated by commas (1,5,68,499) or a range of segments (25-66).

[[File:SR4.png]]

Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Miscellaneous ====
Use '''Miscellaneous''' tab. This 6 types of search do not require to type a word/text but will help you locate segments with some particularities. This can be an alternative to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''.

[[File:SR5a.png]]

You can search for:

* '''Provisional''' segments.
* '''Untranslated''' segments.
* Segments with '''Tag difference'''.
* Segments with '''Notes'''.
* Segments with '''Double spaces'''.
* Segments with '''Revisions'''.

Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Advanced search options ====

Using the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button you can access some advanced search options:

[[File:SR2.png]]

* Search for '''Whole Word'''.
* Do a '''Case sensitive''' search.
* Search for words that start/end by the characters using * as a joker. For example searching for *able will find: movable, payable, breakable,...etc. And searching for hand* will find: handbag, handmade, handbook,...etc
* Search on Source, Target or both. This can only be used in '''Find''' tab.
* Mark each found target as provisional.
* Create a note for each replaced segment.
* Update the TM for each replaced segment.
* Do a wrap search
* Change search direction: Backward or Forward.

=== Analyze ===
Before providing a translation quotation, you may wish to analyze the source text to determine the extent of the work required. WFA provides an analytical tool for this purpose. To do this, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the '''''Analyze''''' button and choose '''Analyze'''. If your file is big and you do not want to wait, choose '''Analyze in Background'''.

A progress message is displayed on the status bar. Then the analysis results will be displayed:

[[File:Analysis.png]]

According to the number of repetitions (identical segments that appear more than once in the document) or the percentage of segments that correspond either completely (100%) or partially (<100%) to matches in the TM, you will be able to precisely estimate the volume of work actually requiring to be translated. After having examined the analysis report, click Close.

=== Statistics ===
WFA allows you to see what progress you have made with your translation at any time. To do this, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button.

A statistical report on your translation will be displayed:

[[File:Statistics.png]]

You will see the number of source and target segments (with the percentage already translated in brackets); the number of source and current target words; the number of source and target tags and if there is any segmental discrepancy in terms of differences between the number and content of the source and target tags (segments with tag difference); the number of segments not stored in the TM (segments flagged not saved in TM); the number of provisional segments (provisional segments) and notes (segments with notes). The report also displays which segments remain to be translated. After viewing the statistics, click Close.

Another important indicator is always present on the status bar: it tells you on which segment you currently are in relation to the total number of segments in the document. In this example, the document has 149 segments in total and you are currently on the 68:

[[File:Foot1.png]]

=== Alignment ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This tool is not managed by WFA in case there is any problem use the '''Help''' in the tool, the third tab, to report your problem. You can also sent an email to '''converterhelp@wordfast.com'''

When you begin to translate with a CAT tool you may not be able to derive the maximum benefit from it if you do not yet have a translation memory. Or, a client may have source and target documents from a previous translation but cannot supply you with a TM. In this case, you can quickly derive a TM by performing an "alignment" on the documents you have already translated prior to using WFA for your translation work by using the alignment tool.

To do this, go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab and click on the [[File:WF Update16.png]] '''''AutoAligner''''' button.

A new page will open, displaying the following dialog:

[[File:Align.png]]

Follow the instructions to upload the files and align them to get the TM from the alignment.

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HVXTQ5Wb_Eg&feature=em-uploademail this video] about how to use this tool.

You can then upload this TM to be used in WFA.

[[File:Warning.png]] This tool is not managed by WFA in case there is any problem use the '''Help''' in the tool, the third tab, to report your problem. You can also sent an email to '''converterhelp@wordfast.com'''

=== Preview ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Preview|Preview]]'''

=== Transcheck ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Transcheck|Transcheck]]'''

=== Spellcheck ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Spellcheck|Spellcheck]]'''

=== Pretranslation ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.

Go to [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]] '''''Pre-translation''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to open the dialog:

[[File:Pretrans1.png]]

Configure how you want the pre-translation to run:
* Activate '''Fuzzy matches'''
* Set what to do when there is no match from the TM. For setting a MT check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Machine_translation|this]]'''
* Leverage segment scores. Make sure the owner of the document (translation agency or company) has agreed to leverage empty segments.

If your file is big and has many segments run pre-translation in background by clicking on '''Pre Translate in background''' so you can keep working in other things. Otherwise use '''Pre-translate''' button run pre-translation.
Ad the end of the process you'll get a report with the result.

[[File:Pretrans2.png]]

=== Offline Review Tool ===
Use Offline review tool to review a file outside Wordfast Anywhere using a bilingual file and then update the changes.

To get the bilingual file go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Offline review DOC'''''.

[[File:Ofrt11a.png]]

This will download a bilingual file like this.

[[File:ofrt2.png]]

[[File:Notice.png]] Read the disclaimer on the download window and the instructions at the top of the file.

[[File:Warning.png]] Remember to add the tags on the target column as you would do on any translation. '''''Missing tags''''' can cause problems when merging back the file into WFA.

After editing '''only''' the target segments an saving the file you can import it to be merged with the file in Wordfast Anywhere. To do this go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:mergetms16_menu.png]] '''''Merge Offline Review''''' button.

[[File:ofrt3.png]]

A report will be shown with the result of the merge.

[[File:ofrt4.png]]

=== Extract Frequents ===
Use [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]] '''''Extract Frequents''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to create anew file that will contain only the repeated segments of the document.

A first report is created showing the percentage of segments that have an occurrence greater than 2.

[[File:ExtractFrequents1.png]]

Set the '''minumum occurrence''' that you want to extract and click on '''Extract and Open''' to create a new file with the occurrence segments.

=== Go to WFP4 ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.
You can open your document in '''Wordfast Pro 4 Online''' by using [[File:About wordfast16.png]] '''''WFP4''''' button on '''''File''''' tab.

WFP4o will use several settings on WFA along with the TMs and glossaries, so all settings must be done on inside WFA before. Also bear in mind to save your work on WFP4o before switching back to WFA.

[[File:Wf4disclaimer.png]]

Read carefully the disclaimer dialog before clikcing in '''Continue to WFP4o'''.

=== File information ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.

Go to [[File:Modify Project16.png]] '''''File Info''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to open the dialog with information about the file:

[[File:Fileinfo.png]]

=== Split file ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''''This option is only available when the document is closed.'''''

You can split a file in 4 parts by using [[File:Split.png]] '''''Split''''' button on '''''File''''' tab.

[[File:Split1.png]]

For each part a txml file will be created with the corresponding part of the file. The name of the txml files will contain information about which part is. For instance '''_[1of2]''' means the file was splitted into 2 parts and that this file correspond to the first part.

By default files are splited in equally parts, but you can change this and set the boundaries that better suit you.

[[File:Split3.png]]

'''Downloading one of the splited parts will download a TXML file''', but you can choose to download also the entire file in the original format.

[[File:Split2.png]]

Use
[[File:Join.png]] '''''Join''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to put the parts together again. [[File:Warning.png]] '''''This option is only available when the document is closed.'''''

=== Share file ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''This option is only available when the document is closed and is selected from the list.'''

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Share is only possible between Wordfast Anywhere users.'''

You can share your document with '''several Wordfast Anywhere users'''. To do so go to [[File:Share.png]] '''''Share''''' on '''''File''''' tab.

[[File:Share3.png]]

Additional files can be added using '''''Add''''' button on the Document section of the dialogue. If the file belong to a package, all package documents will be added otherwise it will be all documents with the same source and target languages.

To start sharing click on '''''Add''''' button after the Document section to add a new guest. Repeat it to ad more guest users.

[[File:Share_addGuest2.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Guest email must be a valid Wordfast Anywhere account.'''

For each guest two properties can be chosen:
* '''''Share as read-only'''''. This means guest will only access the document in a read-only mode, but no edition will be allowed.
* '''''Keep online (not downloadable)'''''. This means guest will access the file but would not be allowed to download it.

Additionally, you can share a TM and/or glossary with the file.

To do it, use the buttons on the '''''Translation Memories''''' and '''''Glossaries''''' tabs
* '''''Linked to document''''' will add the corresponding TM/glossary associated to the document.
* '''''Add''''' will let you choose which TM/glossary with the same language pair you want to share
* '''''Remove''''' will revoke the share on the selected TM/glossary from the list.

Once guests are added, they are presented on a list on the main dialogue. Any guest will be allowed edit rights unless '''''Share as read-only''''' is check. Owner will always have edit rights.

[[File:Share_mainList2.png]]

Repeat this process to add more guests.

You can use '''''Duplicate''''' button to add a new guest with the same settings than a existing one. Use '''''Revoke''''' button to finish a share with a guest

Check '''''History''''' on the document to force the use of revisions in the document.

As owner and several guests can have edit rights '''a reservation system is used to ensure only one user can edit a segment at a time'''. When a user opens the document the free segments loaded in Document Panel will automatically reserved for him adding a green share icon at the end of the segment. Segments reserved by other users are shown with the same share icon but in red color.
'''The reservation of segments will end when the user closes the document'''.

[[File:Share_reserved.png]]

When a user opens a shared document that is being used by an other user a pop-up message is show to warn about that.

[[File:Share_message.png]]

Also a notification is send to the other working users that a new user has opened the document.

[[File:Share_notification.png]]

Jumping to the next block will release the previous segments and will reserve the new segments being loaded.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''There is no live update of the segments reserved by other users. Which means segments need to be refreshed manually on Document Panel by loading them again, for instance by jumping to a different block and back.'''

To help to know when a user closes the document and releases his segments, a notification is send to the other working users.

[[File:Share_notificationEnd.png]]

'''''To finish a share''''' with a guest owner users need to use '''''Revoke''''', and to remove all the shares use '''''Revoke all'''''. This is a button on the Share dialog ([[File:Share.png]] '''''Share''''' on '''''File''''' tab).

Guest users will not see the share dialogue. They should use [[File:Revoke.png]] '''''Revoke''''' on '''''File''''' tab to finish the share.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Remember Share/Revoke are only available when the document is closed.'''

=== Offline Mode ===
On those situations when there is an internet connection cut or when WFA server is unavailable, WFA will turn on '''Offline Mode'''.

'''Offline Mode''' lets you work offline. It allows you to translate the segments that are currently loaded on the ''Document Panel''.

The translated segments are stored locally and automatically committed to WFA server as soon as the connection is recovered.

If the TM you are using is writeable, TUs will be automatically updated from the document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Be aware that there will be some messages telling you about going in/out of Offline Mode and segments being saved. Some features will not be available during Offline Mode.

[[File:Warning.png]] This feature has nothing to do with Offline Review Tool (OFRT). For information about OFRT, check the index at the top of this Manual.

[[File:Warning.png]] We recommend not to close the browser till synchronization back is done.

= WFA Configuration =
== Features and Shortcuts ==

{|class="wikitable"
|'''Menu tab'''
|'''Feature'''
|'''Shortcut'''
|'''Icon'''
|'''Information'''
|-
|Translation
|Start translation / Next segment
|Alt+Down
|[[File:StartNext.png]]
|Starts a translation session by opening the currently selected segment / Commits the current segment to TM and opens the next segment.
|-
|Translation
|Previous segment
|Alt+Up
|[[File:Previous.png]]
|Commits the current segment to TM and opens the previous segment.
|-
|Translation
|Close & Commit
|Alt+End
|[[File:CloseSave.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment and committing it to the TM.
|-
|Translation
|Close
|Shift+Alt+End
|[[File:Close.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment without committing it to the TM.
|-
|Translation
|Close & Delete
|Alt+Delete
|[[File:Close restore.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment and deleting the target with any note. Do not commit to TM.
|-
|Translation
|Provisional segment
|F10
|[[File:Mark.png]]
|Marks a segment as provisional with a yellow Post-It.
|-
|Translation
|Copy Source
|Alt+Insert
|[[File:CopySource.png]]
|Copies the source segment over the target segment.
|-
|Translation
|Expand
|Alt+PgDn
|[[File:ExpandSeg.png]]
|Expands a segment, if it actually extends beyond the punctuation mark (wrong segmentation). Note that a segment cannot be extended beyond a paragraph mark, page break, tabulator, or table cell.
|-
|Translation
|Shrink
|Alt+PageUp
|[[File:ShrinkSeg.png]]
|Reverses any use of the Expand segment command or reduce the size of a segment.
|-
|Translation
|To Fuzzy
|Shift+Ctrl+PgDn
|[[File:TranslateUntilFuzzy.png]]
|Translates until a non-exact match is found.
|-
|Translation
|Toggle empty
|Ctrl+Alt+X
|[[File:Cleanup Project16.png]]
|Empty the target - remove the tags from the target - restore the original target.
|-
|Translation
|Auto Propagate
|
|[[File:autopropagate.png]]
|Auto propagate segment change through all the document for same source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Toggle Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Up
|[[File:dropdown.png]]
|Transforms all the terms in the source segment into placeables. If repeated, returns to the previous mode.
|-
|Translation
|Next Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Right
|[[File:Next_Placeable16.png]]
|Selects the next placeable element in the source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Copy Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Down
|[[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]]
|Places the selected transposable element from the source segment into the target segment, where the cursor is located (or replaces highlighted text in target segment).
|-
|Translation
|Previous Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Left
|[[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]]
|Selects the previous placeable element in the source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Next word
|Tab
|
|Places the subsequent source word with letter + Tab
|-
|Translation
|Previous word
|Shift+Tab
|
|Places the preceding source word with letter+Shift+Tab.
|-
|Translation
|Target Height
|Ctrl+Alt+T
|[[File:increase_target.png]]
|Increases the height of the target segment for easier viewing.
|-
|Wordfast Anywhere
|Wordfast setup
|Ctrl+Alt+W
|[[File:Setup.png]]
|Opens the Wordfast Anywhere general setup dialog.
|-
|Edit
|Find & Replace
|Ctrl+Alt+R
|[[File:FindReplace.png]]
|Find and replace in the document.
|-
|Edit
|Edit Source
|Ctrl+Alt+K
|[[File:EditSource16.png]]
|Used to make minor corrections to the source segment.
|-
|Edit
|Edit Note
|Ctrl+Alt+J
|[[File:Edit_Note16.png]]
|Allows you to create or edit a note.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 1
|Shift+Ctrl+1
|[[File:insert_c1.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 2
|Shift+Ctrl+2
|[[File:insert_c2.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 3
|Shift+Ctrl+3
|[[File:insert_c3.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Case Changer
|Shift+F3
|[[File:caseChanger.png]]
|Toggle between lowercase, uppercase, and capitalization.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|TMs and glossaries setup
|
|[[File:Preferences16round.png]]
|Opens the TMs and glossaries setup dialog.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Concordance search
|Ctrl+Alt+C
|[[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]]
|Performs a search in the TM and displays all segments containing the search term.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Glossary Search
|Ctrl+Alt+G
|[[File:GlossarySearch.png]]
|Search in the glossary for the word or phrase selected in the source segment.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Add term to glossary
|Ctrl+Alt+T
|[[File:TermEdit.png]]
|Pops up a glossary term entry form.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Copy TU
|Alt+right
|[[File:CopyTU.png]]
|Copy a TU from the TM panel to the target segment. If many, press many times, it will start by copying the second one assuming the first one is already copied. The TU can be a MT proposal.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Delete TU
|Ctrl+Alt+Backspace
|[[File:DeleteTU.png]]
|Delete from TM the current or selected TU visible in the TM panel.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Update TU
|
|[[File:force_tm_addtu.png]]
|Commits to TM the source and target segment as a new TU or update an existing one.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Force TM search
|
|[[File:force_tm.png]]
|Perform a direct search (without cache) in the TM.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Force MT
|
|[[File:force_mt.png]]
|Forces the translation of the segment by the configured MT engines like Google Translate / Microsoft Translator.
|-
|View
|Outline pane
|Ctrl+Alt+D
|[[File:panelOutline.png]]
|Closes or opens the Outline. The outline is a view of all the segments showing which ones are translated but also which ones have notes or are provisional.
|-
|View
|TM pane
|Ctrl+Alt+M
|[[File:panelTm.png]]
|Closes or opens the TM pane.
|-
|View
|Glossary pane
|Ctrl+Alt+H
|[[File:panelGlo.png]]
|Closes or opens the Glossary (Terminology) pane.
|-
|View
|Move next block
|Page Down
|[[File:moveNextScreen.png]]
|Move to the next block of document's content.
|-
|View
|Move previous block
|Page Up
|[[File:movePrevScreen.png]]
|Move to the previous block of document's content.
|-
|View
|First of Block
|Home
|[[File:move_first_seg_screen.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the first segment of the block.
|-
|View
|Last of Block
|End
|[[File:move_last_seg_screen.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the last segment of the page.
|-
|View
|First of Doc
|Ctrl+Home
|[[File:move_first_seg_doc.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the first segment of the document.
|-
|View
|Last of Doc
|Ctrl+End
|[[File:move_last_seg_doc.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the last segment of the document.
|}

== WFA Setup ==
The WFA Setup menu is accessible by the shortcut Ctrl+Alt+W or the [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab.

Six tabs are visible: General, TM rules, Shortcuts, Segmentation, Pandora's box and QA.

=== General tab ===
Several general settings can be don in this tab.

[[File:wfasetup1.png]]

==== Machine translation ====
Click on '''MT''' tab to access the ''Machine Translation'' settings.

[[File:wfasetup2.png]]

WFA gives you the ability to translate each segment by online translation services like Google Translate and Microsoft Translator. The translations proposed are not ever likely to be fully acceptable. However, by making a few small adjustments, you will be able to use them extensively in your translations.

[[File:Warning.png]] When using this service, the source segments that will return a translation are transmitted to Google and Microsoft. It is up to you whether or not to accept these translations; these companies are not made aware of your choice. However, be aware that sending the segments to Google and Microsoft may raise privacy issues between you and your customers.

Each MT engine has a window were to set it's settings. Bear in mind that some MT may require a personal ID or password.
* Use '''Add''' button to add a new MT.
* Use '''Edit''' the settings for the selected MT on the list.
* Use '''Remove''' will delete the selected MT on the list.
* Use '''Test''' to run a test on all the MTs with the active checkbox marked.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''To use a MT engine, it must be added to the list and with the "Active" checkbox marked'''.

On each MT engine window you can set its settings (i.e. the key or url). You can also set a particular values for
* ''Engine timeout'' as in some cases (i.e. small segments) the MT requires more time to get back with a result.
* ''Engine score'' value for each MT.
* ''Details'' for extra information about the MT like the list of available languages.
[[File:Warning.png]] Each MT engine has a different set of available languages.

Finally, there are several general options such as
* When to use the MT (when no TM match, when no TM full match, always)
* Remove tags before sending to MT.
* Use all available providers on ''force MT''.
* Do not copy MT proposition to target.
* Enable MT for review (May slow down the revision process)

===== Custom Machine translation =====

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Note:''' this section is '''DIY (Do It Yourself)'''. Our hotline cannot assist in the customization of an MT engine, because that requires knowledge of the remote provider's specifications. However, public discussion groups may offer help.

If your remote Machine Translation provider is not listed (as a provider tab), you can use '''Custom tab''' to create a custom connector for it. This is only possible if your MT provider's API is using a REST standard, and returns results in a JSON, or similar, format. That is the case with major MT providers currently available with WFC (Google, Microsoft, WorldLingo, deepL, MyMemory, etc.).

In WFA's Machine Translation setup, go to the "Custom MT" tab.

[[File:CustomMT.JPG]]

Note the various elements:
* URL: Tells WFA which is the url of the MT provider with the needed parameters.
** {ss} will be replaced with the source segment to be translated. This parameter must be present.
** {sl} and {tl} will be replaced with your given source and target language codes.
** {key} will be replaced with the given API key
* API Key: Some MT providers need a personal key, this is the place to add it.
* Source language: Source language of the text, it corresponds to the {sl} parameter in the URL.
* Target Language: Target language which will be the text translated to, it corresponds to the {tl} parameter in the URL.
* POST: includes parameters that should be used with the POST method, concatenated like in the URL format. If the parameters needs to be in JSON format, choose the way how to write it (either URL encoded text to convert to JSON either a direct JSON string).
* HEADER: includes parameters that need to be in the header of the request. The format is param:value. Put one parameter per line.
* Json key: Some MT providers return the translated text in a parameter (translation, translatedTex...etc), this tells WFA how to spot the returned translated segment.

Once all the elements are set you can test the connection by using the '''Test''' button. Optionally you can change the text to be tested on the text box next to the button.

Let's assume your preferred MT provider is WorldLingo and we create a custom engine for it. You explore WorldLingo's API documentation. It essentially boils down to a query URL, with parameters. On Custom tab you can use:

* URL: https://www.worldlingo.com/S000.1/api?wl_data={ss}&wl_srclang={sl}&wl_trglang={tl}&wl_password=secret
* API Key: Empty, as no API Key is needed.
* Source language: en.
* Target Language: fr.
* Json key: Empty.

'''Practical example:'''

Opening a browser, you begin by testing the URL. In the following example, the raw URL was customized for an English-to-French language pair, to translate "Hello World". Your real URL will look different, the following is an example based on WorldLingo:

::: ''http://www.worldlingo.com/S000.1/api?wl_data=Hello%20world&wl_srclang=en&wl_trglang=fr&wl_password=secret''

You can try pasting the above URL into a browser's address bar. If things go well, the site will send a reply:

::: ''Bonjour le monde''

Other MT providers may use a more complex JSON reply, in which case you specify the JSON key so that WFA can identify the result. Here the key is "translation" so you would use Json key => translation

::: ''{"responseData":{"translation":"Bonjour le monde","match":1} }''

Your MT provider may require more parameters, such as a secret ID key (aka an API key), or other elements, in which case, you should hard-code those in the URL.

==== Fonts ====
Font Size: this setting only affects the font size on the screen, your document will keep all its original layout unchanged. The available sizes are selected from the drop-down list.

Font Family: this setting only affects the fonts displayed on the screen, your document will keep its entire original layout unchanged. You can specify a specific font or a font family, for example Arial, Helvetica, Sans Serif (sans serif font, default) or Times New Roman, Times, Serif (seriffed font).

==== Target segment selection ====
Positions the mouse pointer at the opening of the segment, with or without selection.

# Cursor at start – no text selected, cursor positioned at the beginning of the segment.
# Cursor at end – no text selected, cursor positioned at the end of the segment. This is the default setting.
# Segment selected – The target segment is entirely selected.

==== Fuzzy Threshold in % ====
Percentage of similarity required for a TU contained in the TM to be suggested as a translation of the source segment. If several TUs meet this criterion, the TU with the highest percentage will be offered. In this case you can select the subsequent TUs with [[File:CopyTU.png]] '''''Copy TU''''' button on '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' tab or using the corresponding shortcut (Alt + Right).

The default percentage (75%) is recommended for most translations, but in some cases it may be appropriate to change it. For example, if you are translating short segments containing only 3 words, a fuzzy threshold of 75% will only offer those TUs which are identical (100%) and those where two words are identical, i.e. 66%, will never be proposed.

==== Record Revisions ====
Check this option if you want to save a record of the changes on translated segments.

==== Enable Auto-Suggest ====
Check this option if you want to get suggestions while you type on a translated segment.

Auto-Suggest can be configured in '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.238_Configure_Auto-Suggest|Pandora's box #7]]''' to add or remove items.

==== Tab behavior ====
Check this option if you want to use click or hover for triggering events on Top Menu bar.

==== Enable auto-hide buttons ====
Check this option to make toop toolbar buttons hide automatically.

==== Enable Segment Tool Bar ====
Check this option to enable the Segment Tool Bar on Horizontal and Vertical views. You can customize it on Pandora's Box #15

=== TM rules tab ===

Here you have the opportunity to establish penalties to be taken into account when calculating the similarity between the TM and the segment to be translated. In other words, the percentage of similarity is reduced, where applicable, according to the figure indicated for each of the following rules. Some rules allow fractional reductions, but this only applies to the calculation: the final reduction will be the sum of all penalties rounded to the nearest whole number. If the percentage of similarity to the TU, reduced to the sum of the penalties, is less than the specified Fuzzy Threshold percentage, it will not be proposed.

[[File:wfasetup3.png]]

Penalties for the following rules are activated only if the box on their right is checked. They apply only to the TUs proposed by the TM or VLTM, not from machine translation, which has its own non-modifiable penalty.

* ''Case penalty'': if there is a difference in case (upper and lower case) between the TU and the segment to be translated, WFA can ignore this and show 100% similarity. But you can assign a penalty of between 1 and 5 points for the difference in case. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 1.

* ''Non literal penalty'': this penalty detects differences due to special characters such as dashes, quotation marks, apostrophes, punctuation and whitespace characters (non-breaking space, horizontal and vertical tabs, ...). There exist several codes for representing each of these special characters. WFA can ignore these and show 100% similarity; otherwise a penalty is calculated using the following method: every time a difference is encountered, it adds the value of the first parameter (0.25, 0.50 or 0.75), which by default is 0.50. The second parameter sets out what the minimum value of the penalty is (default is 1). Since the penalty is necessarily an integer, if the value of the penalty is 0.25 and there is only one in the segment to be translated, the minimum is not reached. Finally, the third parameter sets the maximum penalty to be assigned, even if the addition of all the differences of this rule exceeds that figure (10 by default). This rule is selected by default with a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 10.

* ''Tag penalty'': this rule works exactly the same way as the previous one, but applied to the tags (markers that represent the bits of code used to format the document <1>). This rule is selected by default with a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 10.

* ''Alignment user penalty'': the TUs found in a memory imported into WFA produced by an alignment tool and having the identifier "TALIGN!" may be assigned a penalty from 1 to 10. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 3. Please note, TUs from an alignment may not have the "TALIGN!" identifier.

* ''MT user penalty'': the TUs found in a memory imported into WFA produced by machine translation and having the identifier "MT!" may be penalised from 1 to 10. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 25. Please note, TUs from a machine translation may not have the "MT!" identifier.

* ''Multiple translation penalty'': In the case of a source segment with multiple 100% matches, i.e. several TUs having the same source segment but different translated segments, a penalty may be applied to warn of a possible choice between translations. This scenario is rare and no penalty is assigned by default.

* ''Attribute penalty'': attributes are identifiers that are associated with a particular TU at the time that it is recorded in the memory. There are five possible attributes: the first is fixed (it identifies the user who posted the TU), while the other four can be user defined. In general, translators use attribute no. 1 to define the subject of the text to be translated and the attribute no. 2 to define the client who owns the text. The other two attributes are free to be used for anything else. For example, if the proposed TU is from a text whose subject is "electronics", it will be penalised if the subject of the text to be translated is "medicine." In other words if the TU is 100% identical to the segment to be translated, it will be displayed with a percentage similarity of 98% if the penalty applied is 2 points.

The penalty can be a number from 1 to 5, valid for the four attributes. By default this rule is not active.

If you use a TM uploaded from Wordfast Classic or Pro, the existing attributes of the TU may be penalised.

=== Shortcuts tab ===

You can set the shortcuts you want to use.

[[File:wfasetup4.png]]

WFA shortcuts are not immutable. If some of them do not suit you, you can reassign them. To do this, click on the '''''upd''''' link of the shortcut you wish to change.

[[File:wfasetup5.png]]

In this example, corresponding to the first shortcut, you see the name of the command and a drop-down list. Choose '''None''' if you want to remove the shortcut or choose another from the list. Then click '''''Update''''' to confirm or '''''Cancel''''' to dismiss the dialog. Repeat for all the shortcuts that you want to change. The new keyboard shortcuts will be displayed.

The last four commands have no shortcuts; however, you can assign shortcuts to them if you wish.

If after modifying several shortcuts you want to return them to their original state, click '''''Restore default shortcuts'''''.

Finally, click '''''Save''''' settings to confirm any changes or '''''Cancel''''' to dismiss the dialog.

=== Segmentation tab ===
This tab defines the rules for segmentation.

[[File:Segmentation111.JPG]]

* ''Segmentation style'': this block determines how the segmentation will be performed. If you choose ''Wordfast /Trados segmentation'' (default) the standard end-of-segment markers are defined as follows: full stop, colon, question mark, exclamation mark and tab (Tab). You can add other characters as well as space (Space), non-breaking space (NBSP), carriage return (CR) and line feed (LF). You can add as markers: a number followed by an end of segment marker (A number Followed by ESM ends a segment – default), an end of segment marker not followed by a space (An ESM without a trailing space ends a segment) and an end of segment marker followed by a space followed by a lowercase letter (An ESM followed by a space followed by a lower-case letter ends a segment). Although you can change these markers, it is recommended to maintain them in such manner that if you share your translations and your memories with other translators, all will follow the same rule.

[[File:Warning.png]] Segmentation is performed at the time of uploading the document to WFA. You cannot therefore change the rules applying to that document during the course of its translation.

The other segmentation rules that you can choose are:
* ''Break segmentation'': segmentation is done according to the end of paragraph character (carriage return) or the tag for HTML files.
* ''Idiom segmentation'': segmentation follows the rules of the software program Idiom.
* ''SRX segmentation'': the segmentation is done by using a previously uploaded file. It follows the rules of the SRX standard, which has become a standard like TMX for formatting memories and TBX for formatting glossaries. In the case of SRX segmentation, abbreviations are also included.

* ''TM compatibility'': You must ensure the compatibility according to the memory you have uploaded or the subsequent use of your documents. By default, WFA's memory is compatible with that of Wordfast Classic and Pro (Assume Wordfast TM). If this is your choice, you can also specify if you have old projects made with Wordfast Classic or Pro (check Legacy TM created by old projects). You can also establish that the memory was created by Trados (Assume Trados TM), even adding that it was created by Trados and Word (TM created by Trados + Word); by Idiom (Assume Idiom TM) or by SDLX (Assume SDLX TM).

*''Abbreviations'': Abbreviations end with a full stop, which WFA then interprets as an end of segment marker. To avoid this, WFA allows you to create and manage a list of abbreviations. While WFA already has lists for some languages, others are empty – the user must provide the necessary information. The abbreviations are entered into the text box, one after another, without spaces and separated by a comma. Once updated, save your list by clicking on Save the language. Repeat for each language that you translate.

=== Pandora's box tab ===
This tab has many different settings. Some of this settings will open a new dialog.

[[File:wfasetup7.png]]

==== #1 PC, tablet and smartphone modes ====
Use this mode if you are using a mobile device. The segment toolbar is enlarged; local file access is disabled.

==== #2 Real time collaboration ====
Real time collaboration disables data caching. This forces the TM search before you open a segment, causing a response delay. Avoid using this mode unless sharing a TM and if the TU updates need to be shared immediately.

==== #3 Document file name convention ====
Customize your document name for download by adding a prefix and/or a suffix.

==== #4 Special characters insertion ====
Configure the 7 special characters insertion of the Edition tab.

==== #5 Configure online dictionaries ====
Configure URLs for 2 online search engines.

* Click "Add" to add a new dictionary.
* After filling the "Friendly name" and "Url" correctly you need to use "Test" to check it works fine.
* Use "Save" to add the dictionary to the list. Bear in mind that if the URL already exists it cannot be added.

If all worked fine, the list should have been updated and your dictionary available to be used.

The list does not use "Friendly name" to sort the dictionaries, so you need to check all the list to find the one you added.

In order to use one dictionary you need to select it from the list and save the settings.

==== #6 Multiple Ctrl+Alt+Down toggles placeable ====
Use this feature to toggle between copy the target term, copy the source term, or leave blank.

==== #7 Configure Auto-Suggest ====
Auto-suggest is activated at the '''General''' tab when clicking on [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab.

On this section of Pandora's Box is where you can '''configure which suggestions will Auto-suggest show'''.

[[File:AutoSuggest1.JPG]]

'''Auto-suggest can show different items''' such as: Glossary matches, tags, word from with a capital letter, numbers, file path, email addresses, URLs, chunks of Machine Translation, date and number conversion, text in parentheses (), text in braces {}, bracketed text [], word containing special character and unit conversion.

On the left there is a combo box to select the number of typed characters that will trigger auto-suggest to show up.

For '''date and number conversion''' there is a sub dialog, that can be opened by clicking on the [[File:Edit.png]] button on the left.

[[File:AutoSuggest2.JPG]]

Here you can set how dates and numbers will be converted and shown in the auto-suggested text.

For '''dates''' you can choose a different format and separator. For instance source ''2015.04.01'' could be converted to ''01/04/2015'' on target.

For '''numbers''' you can choose a different group and decimal separator. For instance source ''123.456,00'' could be converted to ''123 456.00'' on target.

==== #8 Configure Filters ====
Configure conversion of documents from their original format to the internal editor format.

For some files you can configure some parameters that will tell the filter what to do for some situations such as translate comments or sheet names.

You can make this configuration for: '''xls, xlsx, ppt, pptx, doc, docx, rtf, htm, html, mif, idml, xml (Text based files)'''.

[[File:Pandora9.JPG]]

On this section there are also 3 settings that will apply to any file.

* '''Editor format'''. To choose which type of '''bilingual file (TXML or TXLF)''' the filter should produce.[[File:Warning.png]] '''''The download bilingual file will be of the type used when the file was uploaded.''''' For example if the file was uploaded using TXML, the bilingual download will be TXML. A file cannot be uploaded using one type (TXML) and download the bilingual file of the other type (TXLF). The workaround is to change the type and upload the file again.

* '''Extract numbers'''. To define the filter action on source segments that contain only numbers.

** ''all'': Extracts all segments with only numbers for translation
** ''time_date_measure'': Extracts only segments with time and date
** ''none'': Does not extract any segments that contain only numbers

* '''Segmentation on break'''. To enable segmentation on line breaks.

==== #9 Configure double click to open/close a segment ====
Configure opening/closing actions on a segment by double clicking in the document panel. This is always active for mobile plain text mode.

[[File:Pandora101.png]]

==== #10 Configure TM Search ====
Set the timeout for searches. After the timeout, the search is cancelled and returns nothing. The default value is 4 seconds.

==== #11 Copy source when no TM match and no MT proposition ====
Copy source to target when no TM match and no MT proposition.

==== #12 Do not show empty paragraph line in Classic view ====
Do not copy MT proposition to target.

==== #13 Hide segment's IDs column on the Table view ====
Do not copy MT proposition to target.

==== #14 Custom Tab settings ====
Use this mode if you are using a mobile device. The segment toolbar is enlarged; local file access is disabled.

==== #15 Customize Segment Toolbar ====
Dialog to choose which buttons will be placed on Segment toolbar. Segment toolbar is enabled on General tab.

==== #16 Copy untranslatable to target automatically and open next segment ====
Define what will be considered an "Untranslatable segment" which will be copied to target automatically and open next segment

=== QA tab ===
Set here the criteria that will be used to conduct an audit of quality when doing a '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Transcheck|Transcheck]]'''

[[File:wfasetup8.png]]

There are several criteria that can be checked, some of which can also ''be checked while translating'' (by using the second checkbox column under '''While Translating''' title).

Here is a short description:

* '''Source & target lengths''': Compares the character count between the source and target segments. You can set the minimum and maximum % of allowed character count for the target segment.

* '''Empty target''': Checks for an empty target segment. This is always checked while translating.

* '''Numerical''': Checks that the numerical values between the source and target segments are correct.

* '''Placeable''': Checks if the tags are copied correctly to the target segments. This is always checked while translating.

* '''Forbidden chars''': Checks if the target segment includes forbidden characters. You can set the list of forbidden characters that should not be included in the target segment.

* '''Punctuations''': Checks for consistency in punctuation between source and target segments. You can set the punctuation marks that should not be included in the target segment. [[File:notice.png]] The transcheck punctuation only works on end of segmentation punctuation.

* '''Untranslatable''': Compares the source and target segments to check if the untranslatable content is consistent. You can set the untranslatable text that must be retained in the target segment.

* '''Copied source''': Checks for untranslated text when copied source option is used.

* '''Blacklists''': Checks if the target segment includes blacklisted terms. You can set blacklisted terms that should not be included in the target segment. [[File:notice.png]] The blacklisted term list must be a tab delimited file (bad term + tabulation + proposed term).

* '''Terminology''': Checks if all term translations from an active glossary are used in the target of a segment. You can enable or disable Ignore Case option.

* '''First word capitalization''': Checks if the first letter of the segment is capitalized.

* '''Edited exact match''': Checks if any exact match segments from the TM have been edited.

* '''Unedited fuzzy''': Checks if any fuzzy match segments from the TM have been left unedited.

* '''Source Consistency''': Checks consistency between source segments if the target is repeated.

* '''Target consistency''': Checks consistency between target segments if the source is repeated.

== Profile Configuration ==
Go to [[File:User profile.png]] '''''User Profile''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' menu to see information about your account and change some settings of your profile.

[[File:Profileconfig1.png]]

=== Change email ===
Use this option to change the email of your account.

[[File:Profileconfig2.png]]

=== Change password ===
Check the [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_change_my_password Wordfast Anywhere FAQ] for more information.

=== Delete account ===
Use this option to remove your account from Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:Profileconfig4.png]]

Wordfast Anywhere 6 Manual

2022-02-10T10:25:16Z

Remiandre: /* Alignment */

{{Languages}}
[[Category:Wordfast Anywhere]]

= Introduction =
Wordfast Anywhere (WFA) is the online version of the popular Wordfast computer assisted translation (CAT) program that provides much of the functionality of the Classic and Pro desktop versions. Instead of being installed as a program on the user’s computer, WFA is made accessible from Wordfast’s servers via a web browser, regardless of the operating system used (Windows, Mac, Linux, etc.). Every effort has been made to ensure that the user interface is as close as possible to the other Wordfast flavours: toolbars, icons, shortcuts and working methods. A Wordfast Classic or Pro user should be able to use WFA with almost zero assimilation time.

It is worth remarking that WFA is almost certainly the CAT program that integrates best with the popular Mac operating system. Unlike Java-based, cross-platform programs – including Wordfast Pro – that will run on the Mac but don’t integrate with system-wide tools such as the built in Dictionary, WFA will run in Mac-native browsers such as Safari, thus giving you access to the entire range of language and text handling tools that are built into the Mac OS environment.

[[File:WFA_pagina_5_new.jpg]]
[[File:WFA_pagina_6_new.jpg]]

With WFA you can translate a wide range of both editable (TXT, DOC, DOCX, RTF, XLS, PPT, ODT, HTML, TXML, MIF, INX, etc.) and non-editable (PDF, TIFF) documents. You can store up ten current documents in your workspace, deleting your finished translations to free up space and permit new documents to be uploaded.

You can also import the TMs (translation memories) of all the language pairs you work in. Your memories will progressively expand as and when you translate. They are stored securely and will not be shared or revealed without your authorisation. If you need a local copy, you can download your TM to your computer at any time.

As is the case with other Wordfast flavours, you can add terms to your glossary as you translate. You can also upload existing glossaries to your workspace, for all language pairs. Here again, your glossaries are secure and will not be shared or revealed unless you specifically invite a colleague. You can also download your glossary if you need a local copy.

The following instructions have been written for complete beginners. Having understood the above comments, a Wordfast Classic or Pro user should have no difficulty in using WFA intuitively.

Check the '''[[Wordfast Anywhere 6 Start Guide]]''' for a quick start.

Check our [https://www.freetm.com/jsp/terms.jsp Terms of use].

== How to use WFA ==
On Wordfast Anywhere every document belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a translation project.

So the first you need is a project. A project named "Project_1" is created by default, but you can create up to 3 projects.

A project needs a language pair. A default one is suggested but more can be added. Each language pair can have a TM and glossary assigned which will be used on several processes and also automatically assigned to the documents uploaded.

A project also needs a task. "Translate" is the one by default.

Once the project is created you can add the documents. Documents can be added to all language pairs or to specific ones. There is a maximum number of documents per project depending of the type of project.

Double-click a project to open it to see the content (documents grouped by language pairs).

Double-click a document to start/resume work.

[[File:notice.png]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rDhVYY02Cds Wordfast Anywhere 6 Basic Projects video]'''

= Login in to WFA account =
Check the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Login_in_to_WFA_account Login in to WFA account]''' section on the Start Guide.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you have not created an account yet, click on the '''''Create a new account''''' and follow the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#How_to_create_an_account instructions]'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you ever ''forget your password'', click on the '''''Forgot your password?''''' and follow the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Get_your_password_back instructions]'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you are having ''login problems'' check '''''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Cannot_log_in_to_Wordfast_Anywhere Cannot log in to Wordfast Anywhere]''''' and follow the instructions.

=User Interface =
The user interface is divided into several sections. A top menu with tabs and buttons, a main central panel that changes depending on where we are (project list, project content, document translation) and a bottom panel where information and messages are shown.

Once you are connected to WFA, the workspace appears.

This should look similar to the following screenshot (depending on the browser, operating system or device used to access WFA):

[[File:Newui6.PNG]]

The workspace can be modified at any point according to your requirements.
==Top Menu==
At the very top you can find the ''Top Menu'' which consists in '''two rows''': one for the different '''menus''' (tabs) and one for the '''buttons''' corresponding to the selected tab.

Use [[File:CollapseTop.png]] to hide the buttons. Use [[File:CollapseBottom.png]] to show the buttons.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a project or selecting/opening a document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a project is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when a project is selected from the project list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when more than one file is selected from the document list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus used for translation (Edit, view, translation, review and TM & Glossaries) are only visible when the document is opened. Those buttons keep working as always, just need to open the document.

===Wordfast Anywhere Menu===

This tab a miscellaneous of buttons concerning the Wordfast Anywhere project.

[[File:Wfatab6.PNG]]

* [[File:Logout16.png]]: Use it when you want to '''leave''' Wordfast Anywhere.
* [[File:User profile.png]]: Here you'll find your '''account information'''. You'll be able to change your ''Login'' email, the ''Security Question'', the ''Security Answer'' and delete your account.
* [[File:Preferences.png]]: Here is where you set the '''configuration''' of Wordfast Anywhere:''Font Size'', ''Machine translation'', ''TM rules'', ''Shortcuts'', ''Segmentation'', ''Transcheck'' rules...etc.
* [[File:Preferences16round.png]]: Global TM & glossary management (create, add, upload, merge, edit, download, delete... ), no more for assignment.
* [[File:WF Update16.png]]: This button will direct you to a site to '''align''' your files.
* [[File:help16.png]]: WFA Help:
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''start guide''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''PM start guide''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''FAQ''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''manual''' wiki page.
** If the previous wiki pages do not work, this is a pdf backup.
* [[File:Notice.png]]: There are 4 icons corresponding to different types of '''notifications''' ([[File:Warning.png]] ONLY displayed when there are notifications):
** Webmaster Info: notifications coming from Wordfast Anywhere administration (p.e stopping the server for a publication).
** Background Info: notifications about ''Background'' processes (p.e. Analyze, Spellcheck...etc).
** System Info: notifications from the system (p.e. an unsupported browser).
** TM Server Info: notifications realted to the TM Server (p.e. TM server is disconnected).

===Project Menu===
This tab has the tools concerning a project.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when a project is selected on the project list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a project is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available for standard projects.

No project selected on the project list.

[[File:ProjecttabAll.PNG]]

This are the basic buttons:

* [[File:Pm new project 16.png]]: '''New''' use it to create a project.
* [[File:Pm open project 16.png]]: '''Open''' the selected project from the project list.
* [[File:Analyze Project16.png]]: '''Analyze''' all the documents of the project. A report is generated.
* [[File:Pm delete project 16.png]]: '''Delete''' the selected project.
* [[File:Pm close project 16.png]]: '''Close''' an opened project.
* [[File:Pm import project 16.png]]: '''Import''' a .glp file.
* [[File:Pm export project 16.png]]: '''Export''' a project into a .glp file.
* [[File:Linguist16.png]]: Use it to '''Manage''' the team of '''linguists'''.

To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

===File Tab===
This tab has the tools concerning a file.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be available when more than one file is selected from the list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be also available when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a document is opened.

[[File:FiletabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:Translate File16.png]]: '''Open''' the selected file from the list.
* [[File:About wordfast16.png]]: Open the document with '''Wordfast Pro Online'''. [[File:Warning.png]] The use of Wordfast Pro Online will be discontinued on December 31, 2021.
* [[File:Close16.png]]: '''Close''' an opened file.
* [[File:Save16.png]]: Here you'll find all the '''Download''' options for a file (p.e. translated version, bilingual versions, TXML, unformatted text, Off-line Report Tool, TM from doc segments).
* [[File:Preferences16round.png]]: With this button you'll change the '''TM & Glossary''' configuration for the document.
* [[File:Analyze Project16.png]]: '''Analyze''' the selected document/s. A report is generated.
* [[File:Statistics16.png]]: Get the '''Statistics''' of the document.
* [[File:Modify Project16.png]]: Get information about the file.
* [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]]: '''Pre-translate''' the selected document/s.
* [[File:Mergetms16.png]]: Use this button to '''merge''' the document with a '''TXML''' file.
* [[File:mergetms16_menu.png]]: Use this button to '''merge''' the document with an imported '''OFRT''' file.
* [[File:Split.png]] [[File:Join.png]]: '''Split''' the document in parts. '''Join''' the parts together again.
* [[File:Share.png]] [[File:Revoke.png]]: '''Share''' the document with an other Wordfast Anywhere user. '''Revoke''' will finish the share.
* [[File:Translate File16.png]]: '''Fuzzy Open''' the file without full matches.
* [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]]: '''Extract''' the '''frequent''' segments.
* [[File:Edit16.png]]: '''Rename''' the file.

===Edit Tab===

This tab is a translation tool extension.

[[File:Warning.png]] This buttons will be available when the document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be available when a TM is being edited.

[[File:EdittabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:FindReplace.png]]: Use it to '''Find & Replace''' text but also to go to a particular segment or get a list of segments ''untranslated'', ''provisional'', with ''notes'' or with ''tag differences''.
* [[File:EditSource16.png]]: '''Edit''' the source segment.
* [[File:Edit_Note16.png]]: Create, edit or remove a '''Note''' on a segment.
* [[File:Insert_c.png]]: '''Insert special characters'''. 7 different characters can be defined on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => '''''Setup''''' button > '''''Pandora's box'''''
* [[File:Delete_alltargetseg.png]]: '''Delete''' '''tags''' in the document. This is only available when editing a TM and has 2 options: Delete all target tags or delete all document tags.
* [[File:delete_revisions.png]]: '''Delete''' the segment '''history'''.
* [[File:Delete_alltargetseg.png]]: '''Delete''' all '''target''' segments of the document.
* [[File:caseChanger.png]]: Toggle between lowercase, uppercase, and capitalization..

===View Tab===

In this tab you'll find the buttons to move through the document and show or hide the different panels.

[[File:ViewtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:PanelOutline.png]]: Show or hide '''Outline'''.
* [[File:panelTm.png]]: Show or hide '''TM''' panel.
* [[File:panelGlo.png]]: Show or hide '''Glossary''' panel.
* [[File:MovePrevScreen.png]]: Go to '''Previous Block'''.
* [[File:MoveNextScreen.png]]: Go to '''Next Block'''.
* [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]]: Toggle between the different document layout: Classic, Horizontal and Vertical.
* [[File:move_prev_seg.png]]: Go to '''Previous segment'''.
* [[File:move_next_seg.png]]: Go to '''Next segment'''.
* [[File:move_first_seg_screen.png]]: Go to '''First segment''' of '''Block'''.
* [[File:move_last_seg_screen.png]]: Go to '''Last segment''' of '''Block'''.
* [[File:move_first_seg_doc.png]]: Go to '''First segment''' of '''document'''.
* [[File:move_last_seg_doc.png]]: Go to '''Last segment''' of '''document'''.

===Translation Tab===

Find here all the tools to perform a translation

[[File:TranslationtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:StartNext.png]]: '''Start translation''' or open next segment.
* [[File:Previous.png]]: Open previous segment.
* [[File:CloseSave.png]]: '''Close and commit''' to the TM.
* [[File:Close retain.png]]: '''Close and retain''' the segment as provisional but not commit to the TM
* [[File:close.png]]: '''Close segment'''.
* [[File:close_restore.png]]: '''Close and delete''' target content.
* [[File:mark.png]]: Mark segment as '''provisional'''.
* [[File:CopySource.png]]: '''Copy source''' to target.
* [[File:Expand_Segment16.png]]: '''Expand''' segment.
* [[File:ShrinkSeg.png]]: '''Shrink''' segment.
* [[File:TranslateUntilFuzzy.png]]: '''Translate''' document '''until a fuzzy''' match.
* [[File:Cleanup_Project16.png]]: Toggle between Empty target, Remove tags and Restore.
* [[File:autopropagate.png]]: '''Auto propagate''' segment changes through all the document.
* [[File:dropdown.png]]: Toggle placeable.
* [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]]: Go to '''Next Placeable'''.
* [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]]: '''Copy Placeable'''.
* [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]]: Go to '''Previous Placeable'''.
* [[File:increase_target.png]]: Increase target segment height.
* [[File:Mic.png]]: Use '''Web Speech''' to dictate the target content. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY available for Chrome. Currently disabled due to browser security.'''

===Review Tab===

This tab has the tools to review the document.

[[File:ReviewtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:Preview16.png]]: '''Preview''' a PDF version of the document.
* [[File:Transcheck16.png]]: Do a '''quality control''' on the document
* [[File:Spellcheck16.png]]: '''Spellcheck''' the document

===TMs and Glossaries Tab===

Tab with the tools related to TM and glossaries actions.

[[File:TmglotabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]]: Concordance search
* [[File:GlossarySearch.png]]: Glossary Search
* [[File:TermEdit.png]]: Term edition.
* [[File:CopyTU.png]]: Copy TU.
* [[File:DeleteTU.png]]: Delete TU.
* [[File:Add File To Project16.png]]: Add TU.
* [[File:force_tm_addtu.png]]: Update TU.
* [[File:force_tm.png]]: Force TM search.
* [[File:force_mt.png]]: Force Machine Translation search.
* [[File:force_term.png]]: Force Glossary search.
* [[File:update_tm_doc.png]]: Update TM with document content.
* [[File:iSearch.png]]: Lookup in online dictionary.

===Help Tab===

Help section is on the '''Wordfast Anywhere Menu'''.

===Custom Tab===
In this tab you can add up to 15 buttons of your choice, so you can have together in one tab your most used buttons.
Selection any of the translation menus buttons (Edit, view, translation, review and TM & Glossaries) and the WFA setup and TM&Glossary set up.

[[File:custom_tab.png]]

To do so you must go to [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab. Then go to '''Pandora Box''' tab and go to ''Custom Tab settings'', where you will find all the buttons that can be added to the '''Custom''' tab

[[File:custom_tab2.png]]

==Panels==

===Project List Panel===
This panel shows the list of projects.

[[File:Projectlistpanel.png]]

Projects will be listed here. '''Double click on one project''' or select it and use [[File:Pm open project 16.png]]'''Open''' from the top menu bar to open the project.

===Project content Panel===
When opening a project, the ''Content Panel'' area will show the content of the project, the list of documents in the project.

[[File:ProjectContentpanel.png]]

Main areas are:

* '''Header row (1)''': In this row you'll fine the headers of the columns. The columns are: Languages/file (1), Vol. (1C) and the columns for the different jobs will follow (1D). This row will change the background color according to the project status: blue for ''In preparation'', orange for ''In progress'' and green for ''completed''. Use the '''Add files''' button (1A) to add files to all language pairs and use '''dashboard''' button (1B) to see an estimation of cost of the project.
* '''Project setup (2)'''Click on the ''project name'' or icon next to it to open the project setup dialog.
* '''Language Row (3)''': In this row several icons will be shown depending on the file selection to perform actions such as add files to the language pair (3A), delete selected files (3B) or assign linguist to jobs (3C). Use the '''remove language pair''' icon (3D) to delete the language pair ([[File:Warning.png]] all the documents inside will be permanently deleted).
* '''Note (4)''' this icon allows to add a note to the document.
* '''TM & glossaries (5)''' This are the TMs and glossaries assigned to the document, mouse-over to see extra information. This TM and glossary assignment will be used for the tasks.
* On the '''Status bar''' you'll find information about the project.
* Clicking on the file name will open the document. And clicking on each of the other cell text or icon will open the edit dialog for that cell.

===Translation Panels===
When a document is opened for translation, the screen is divided in 4 different panels.

[[File:Panels.png]]

====Outline====
Show/Hide Outline panel using '''''View''''' tab => '''''Show/hide Outline''''' [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button

The outline displays all the segments of the document.
The available status are:
* A white box indicates that the segment is not translated
* A green box indicates a translated segment
* A yellow box indicates a provisional segment
* An 'i' after segment id indicates a segment having a note
* The black thick border on the box indicates the current document selected on document panel
* The pink border on the box indicates the visible segments in the document panel

You can jump and open any segment of the document by clicking on its number.
If the segment is not visible on the document panel (blue border instead of pink), the document panel will be refreshed.

Once a segment is opened you can use
'''''Edit''''' tab => '''''Edit Note''''' [[File:Edit_Note16.png]] button to create/delete a note and also '''''Translation ''''' tab => '''''Provisional''''' [[File:mark.png]] button to mark/unmark a provisional segment.

====TM Panel====
This panel shows the matches from TM or MT for the current segment.

You can show or hide this panel using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:panelTm.png]] button.

====Glossary Panel====
This panel shows the matching terms for the current segment.

You can show or hide this panel using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:panelGlo.png]] button.

====Document Panel====

When a document is opened, it shows the segments content.

Wordfast Anywhere do not load the entire document in the editor if there are many segments.

While translating the segments are added one by one to the editor, but if you can move inside the document to see any part you want.

To do so, you can use:
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:MovePrevScreen.png]] button to go to '''Previous Block'''.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:MoveNextScreen.png]] button to go to '''Next Block'''.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button to show '''Outline''' and then jump and open any segment of the document by clicking on its number. More information [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline here]

This is how an opened document looks like:

[[File:document_panel_doc.png]]

=====Document Layout=====
Using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] button you can change the document layout, which is the way segments are shown on Document Panel. The three possible views are:

'''''Classical'''''

[[File:ClassicalLayout.png]]

'''''Horizontal'''''

[[File:HorizontalLayout.png]]

'''''Vertical'''''

[[File:VerticalLayout.png]]

===Status Panel===
Always present at the bottom. Here you can find several information about the project, file, TM, display, translation process. Also some messages will be showed here.

==Other features==

===Show/Hide Top Menu Buttons ===
Buttons on the top menu can be hidden.

Use [[File:CollapseTop.png]] to hide the buttons. Use [[File:CollapseBottom.png]] to show the buttons.

= Project Operations =
A new Project menu bar has been added after Wordfast Anywhere menu. Yes! Project Management (PM) has been introduced to WFA.

* * A project named "Project_1" is created by default. If you had an account before version 6, it will contain all the files from the previous version grouped by language pair.
* Every document now belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a project.
* Double-click a project to open it to see the content (documents grouped by language pairs).
* Double-click a document to start/resume work.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a project.

[[File:notice.png]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rDhVYY02Cds Wordfast Anywhere 6 Basic Projects video]'''

== Create a New Project ==
On the Project tab click on [[File:Pm new project 16.png]]'''New''' to create a new project. This will open the ''Project Seup'' window where the settings for the project are done.

To access the project setup once the project has been created, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

[[File:Createproject.PNG]]
[[File:Createproject1.PNG]]
[[File:Createproject2.PNG]]

The ''Project Setup'' window has two sections that need to be set in order to create the project. Setting one section opens the next one.

;1.General
: On this section general information of the project is set. This includes:
# Project name (Compulsory)
# Description (optional)
# Project type. Defines the type of the project:
#* Standard: For translators working alone.
#* Advanced: For Project Managers (PMs) managing large, multi-language projects.
# Project status (for advanced type). Defines the status of the project:
#* In preparation (blue): When project is being prepared (files, TMs and glossaries and linguist being added)
#* In progress (orange): This marks the start of the project. Files are shared with the linguist at this point.
#* Completed (green): The project is finished.
# Currency(optional). It will be used to calculate the project cost.
# Decimals(optional). When this checkbox is marked the project estimated cost will show numbers with decimals.
# Auto(optional). By default Project Manager will be responsible of pushing files to the next job when completion is done. Mark this checkbox to automatically sent files to the next job upon completion.
;2.Language Pairs and tasks
: On this section language pairs and tasks are added.
* Use the '''+''' next to the language pair header to add a new language pair. This will open the language selection dialog and then the TM and glossaries dialog to assign them to the language pair.
* Use the '''+''' at the end of the header row to add new tasks. Only 10 tasks can be added.
* A row is shown for each language pair where the default word rate (left box) and speed rate (right box) for each task can be set.
* Use the '''-''' next to the language pair to remove it. [[File:Warning.png]] Associated files and shares will be revoked.
* Use the '''-''' next to the task name to remove it. [[File:Warning.png]] Associated files and shares will be revoked.

Once all compulsory fields are set, click on '''Save project''' to save the project and go to the ''Project Content panel''.

[[File:Warning.png]] It is possible to move from standard to advanced but opposite is only possible if the advanced project has only one task.

== Modify Project Setup ==
To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

Use this to change any of the project settings defined on the project creation.

[[File:Warning.png]] It is possible to move from standard to advanced but opposite is only possible if the advanced project has only one task.

It is the same than for creating a project, so check the section above to know about the different parts and settings.

== Setting up language pair, Translation Memories and glossaries ==
Languages are added/removed from the ''Project Setup'' dialog.

To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

Check ''Create Project'' section above to know about it.

=== Language pair with its associated TMs and glossaries set in the project setup ===

To access the project setup dialog, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

[[File:Project_setup.png]]

Click on the language pair '''''+''''' button.

[[File:Langpair_dialog.png]]

Enter the languages and save, the TMs and glossaries dialog opens.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair.png]]

* If no TM and glossary exists for the language pair, a new dialog will propose you to create them. Save and wait they are listed.
* You can create and choose one or more TMs and glossaries. They are selected by checking the row in the '''''Active''''' column.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair_2.png]]

Finally save the TMs and glossaries selection by clicking on the '''''Save''''' button. The new language pair is now in the project setup and one icon is displayed for each TM and glossary.

[[File:Project_setup_2.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] The TMS and glossaries can be updated for a language pair by clicking on the icons. But if documents already exists for that language pair, they will not be affected by this change, only new documents added after the update.

=== TMs and glossaries set individually for a document ===
This selection for a document is overwriting the Language pair selection.
In the project content select a document by checking it and then click on the '''''TMs and glossaries''''' button [[File:Preferences16round.png]] of the '''''File''''' menu.

[[File:Project_content_3.png]]

The same TMs and glossaries dialog opens.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair_3.png]]

Saving will update only the TMs and glossaries for the selected document. A control can done hovering the TM icon.

[[File:Project_content_2.png]]

== Add/Remove Files ==
From the '''Project Content Panel''' there are two ways to add files to a project.

* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the header will add the files to all the languages in the project.
* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the language row. This will add the files only to that language.

[[File:Pmaddfiles.PNG]]

To remove a file, first use the checkbox to select it and then use the [[File:Remove16.png]] icon on the language row.

[[File:Pmdeletefile.PNG]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Associated shares will be revoked.

Several files can be selected to be removed at the same time.

== Project dashboard ==
Using the [[File:Pm_cost_16.png]] icon on the header will show the estimated cost of the project. Click on the icon again to hide costs.

[[File:Pmdashboard.PNG]]

== Advanced Features ==
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

Advanced projects have some extra features to manage the files.

=== Task TM ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

Click on the TM icon on the file column to set how the TM will be used on the tasks.

[[File:PmaddtmPNG.PNG]]

There are different options for the TM use:
*'''''Share TM'''''
**The selected TM will be shared with linguists.
**This is the best option to use.
**Translator will have exact and fuzzy matches.
**Translator can use concordance.
*'''''Create Project TM'''''
**The selected TM will NOT be shared.
**It will be used to create a temporary project TM with the matches from the file/s
**The temporary project TM will be shared.
*'''''Pretranslate'''''
**The selected TM will NOT be shared.
**It will be used to pretransalte the document/s.
**Only one TU match (the highest) per segment will be available to the translator.
**Concordance cannot be used.
**Concordance will only be used in this temporary TM

[[File:Warning.png]] Once a task has started it is not possible to change this assignment.

To change the TM assigned click on the same icon and change the TM selection by marking the ''active'' checkbox for the TMs you want to use.
To unassign the TMs clean all the ''active'' checkboxes.

=== Task Glossaries ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

To assign glossaries to tasks follow the instructions for TMs, but using the ''active'' checkboxes on the glossaries side of the dialog.

=== Manage Linguists ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

The Manage Linguist window can be opened by using the [[File:Linguist16.png]] icon on the '''Project''' tab or the '''Manage linguists''' buttons on the ''Assign Job'' window.

This allows the PM to create a team of linguists that will be used on the project jobs.

The same linguist can be used in several languages and roles.

[[File:Pmlinguist1.PNG]]

Main areas are:

* '''Add new linguist to a new language pair (1)''': Use [[File:Pm_linguist_add_16.png]] icon to add a new linguist to the team for a new language pair.
* '''Add or remove a linguist from a language pair (2)''': Use [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] icon to add a linguist to a language pair and use [[File:Pm_collapse_16.png]] icon to remove it.
* '''Linguist task grid (3)''': In this grid, each cell shows the RATE-SPEED-SCORE settings for a linguist. The grid has 4 columns, one for each role: Translator (TR), Proofreader (PR), Revise (RE) and QA. In addition '''dark values mean that linguist has been marked as "able" to do that role'''. Grey values indicate that linguist is not marked as "able" to do that role. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''

==== New Linguist ====
Use [[File:Pm_linguist_add_16.png]] or [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] to add a new linguist.

[[File:Pmlinguistnew.PNG]]

Introduce the following information to add a linguist.

* '''Email''': It must be the email of the linguist WFA account.
* '''Initials''': Short 4 character nickname for the linguist.
* '''Ctry''': Country of the linguist.
* '''Comment''': Some words about the linguist.
* '''Source language''' and '''target language''' that the linguist can work with.
* Role performance. There are 4 default roles a linguist can do on project tasks.
** Mark the '''checkbox''' if the linguist is able to do the role. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''
** '''Rate''': Linguist minim rate. Rate is measured in import per word. The project currency will be user with the import. For example 0.5 Eur per word.
** '''Speed''': Linguist speed rate (words/day). For example 3,000 words/day.
** '''Score''': Linguist 1 to 5 ''star'' score.

=== Assign Job ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''

Use the [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] icon in the language row under the '''job name''' column to assign a job to a linguist for the checkbox marked files.

[[File:Pmaddtask.PNG]]

On the assign job dialog:
* Choose a linguist from the list to whom the job will be assigned. [[File:Warning.png]] The file will be shared with the linguist when the project is set as 'In progress'. The rate and job amount from the linguist will be set for the task.
* To override the linguist rate or job amount, a particular rate or job amount for the job can be set using the input field under the column header. [[File:Warning.png]] Bear in mind that both are related so changing one will update the other.
* A '''''Deadline''''' can be set on the input field under '''''Duration'''''.
* Fill the '''''Note''''' text box to send extra information to the linguist.
* Use '''''Linguist cannot download the shared file''''' to not allow the linguist to download the file.
* Click on '''''Manage linguists''''' to open the Manage Linguist window to add/edit/remove linguists.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' linguists marked as ''able'' to do a role will be listed.

Use the [[File:Pm_collapse_16.png]] icon in the language row under the '''job name''' column to unassign a linguist from a job for the checkbox marked files. [[File:Warning.png]] Shares will be revoked.

[[File:Pmdeletetask.PNG]]

=== Move file to next Task ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

If '''Auto''' tasking is not set on the ''Project Properties'' window, when a task is finished (file has been revoked by the linguist), PM has to manually move it to the next task which will share the file with the linguist assigned to that task.

To do so, click on the double arrow on the finished task.

[[File:Pmmoveon.PNG]]

=== Workflow ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

The project workflow should be:
# PM creates a project, sets languages, sets jobs (Project setup).
# PM adds files to the project and prepares them (i.e splitting).
# PM sets how the TMs and glossaries assigned to the document will be use on the tasks as Share TM, Create project TM or to pre-translate.
# PM prepares the team of linguists.
# PM assign a linguist to each file task. Multiple file selection for batch assign is possible.
# When PM sets the project status to ''In progress'' files that has been assigned a TM and a task will be shared to the corresponding linguist.
# Linguist works on the file. When his work is finished, revokes the file. This finishes the share.
# Once the file is revoked, the PM has to manually move it to the next task. This is done automatically if Auto tasking is selected on Project Setup.
# When all tasks are finished project is finished. PM can change the status of the project to ''Completed''.

=== Purchase Order ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

You can define a Purchase Order template with project, document and task information that will be send to the linguists when the file is shared.

A copy of the email send to the linguist is BCC to the project owner.

==== Purchase Order template ====
Go to [[File:User profile.png]] '''''User Profile''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab to see information about your account. On the ''PM'' tab you can edit the default template.

[[File:Po1.PNG]]

On this template you put the information you want to appear on the Purchase Order.

You can use some '''dynamic parameters''' to add project, document and task information. Use this parameters to build the Purchase Order.
Parameters will be substituted by project, document and task corresponding values or a predefined text.

{| class="wikitable"
|+Here is the list which you can also check them using the [[File:Pm info 16.png]] icon.
|-
|{purchase_order_number}
|Include a number for the purchase order.
|-
|{project_name}
|Project name.
|-
|{task_name}
|Task name.
|-
|{document_name}
|Document name.
|-
|{document_download}
|If linguist can download the document the text '(The document cannot be downloaded.)' will be added to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{document_volume}
|Document number of words.
|-
|{job_note}
|Job note
|-
|{job_rate}
|Job rate
|-
|{job_total}
|Job total cost
|-
|{job_deadline}
|Job deadline in the format 29/12/2021 15:00 GMT+02:00 and the remaining time.
|-
|{document_tmglo}
|If there are TMs or glossaries in the share the text 'For the duration of this job # Translation Memories and # Glossaries have been temporarily shared with you.' will be added to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{document_use}
|Add the text 'To work on this document, log into your Wordfast Anywhere account. If you are already logged, refresh the project list by closing all the projects.' to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{my_full_name}
|Full name from 'User profile'.
|-
|{my_professional_info}
|Professional information from 'User profile'.
|}

==== Purchase Order preview ====
On the '''assign job dialog''' you will see a preview of the Purchase Order.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of the dynamic parameters will be updated when changing the selections on the dialog, others might require the job to be saved and others will be updated when the Purchase Order is send.

[[File:Po2.PNG]]

==== Purchase Order batch send ====
You can send the Purchase Orders for all the saved jobs at any moment using the '''Send POs''' button on the ''Project Setup'' dialog

[[File:Warning.png]] Purchase Order will also be send when the file is shared.

= File Operations =
[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a document.

=== Upload ===
To translate your document, you must first upload it to WFA.

[[File:warning.png]] There is a file size limit of 20 Mb.

From the '''Project Content Panel''' there are two ways to add files to a project.

* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the header will add the files to all the languages in the project.
* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the language row. This will add the files only to that language.

[[File:Pmaddfiles.PNG]]

The following window will be displayed:

[[File:Upload_doc.png]]

There are several ways to upload a document
* '''From local file''': Use '''''Browse...''''' to navigate through the directories on your computer and locate the document to be uploaded.
* '''From URL''': This option allows you to upload a file that is located on an Internet server by entering the address (URL) into the field. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Google Drive''': Choose a file from your Google Drive to be uploaded. You'll be asked to allow access rights to WFA before choosing the file. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Dropbox''': Choose a file from your Dropbox to be uploaded. You'll be asked to allow access rights to WFA before choosing the file. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Clipboard''': Paste the text to be uploaded into the text area. A text file will be created with the text.

At the bottom of the window click on '''''View allowed formats''''' to check the allowed formats:

Finally click on:
* '''''Upload''''': to only upload the file, which will be listed on the Document Management.
* '''''Upload and Open''''': to upload and open the document, which will be displayed in the document panel.

[[File:warning.png]] Depending on the size of the file, this may take some time. Please be patient.

Upload can also be done by using drag and drop area.

For some file formats you can configure some filter behaviors when uploading the file on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters|Configure Filters]]''' in ''Pandora's Box #8''. This is important for '''Text based files (xml, xsl)''' where a rules file (.properties) is needed.

=== Open ===
To open a document, first select it from the list of documents. There are 2 options on '''[[{{PAGENAME}}#File Tab|File tab]]''':

* '''''Open''''' button [[File:Translate_File16.png]]: will open a document and show all the segments
* '''''Fuzzy Open''''' button [[File:Translate_File16.png]]: will open a document, but only segments with a score lower than 100.

=== Segmentation ===
In order to be translated with a CAT tool, a document is divided into translation units (TUs), also known as segments. This process is called segmentation. A segment is a text string that ends with a terminator segment, usually the period (.), colon (:), question mark (?), or exclamation mark (!) and also a paragraph or end of cell mark, a page break or a tab.

The advantage of segmentation is that the translation units are presented to you one by one, without any danger of missing one. These segments form the basis for the TUs that are saved in the TM, consisting of the source segment (to translate) and the target segment (translated).

To configure segmentation go to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Segmentation_tab| Segmentation tab]]''' on the WFA settings.

=== Review ===
Once translated, the text should be revised. Here are some methods:
* Download the translated document immediately to view it in your favourite word processor.
* Download it in an offline review format. See '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Offline_Review_Tool|Offline Review Tool (OFRT)]]'''.
* Revise it in WFA using '''Trancheck''', '''Spellcheck''' and '''Preview''' tools. See below.
* If you are using the Classic mode for the document Layout (See the '''''Doc Layout''''' button [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] on '''''View''''' tab) , you can toggle the display between the bilingual document, the original document and the translated document, use the shortcut '''Ctrl+,''' (Ctrl+comma). A different display mode is presented with each iteration. To confirm what you see in front of you, check the indicator on the status bar: bilingual document (Bilingual), original document (Source) or translated document (Target). You can also click on the indicator to change it. Please note this action does not alter the document in any way. It only changes the way that it is displayed in a way that is more convenient for the task you are currently engaged in.

==== Transcheck ====
Click on the '''''Transchek''''' button [[File:Transcheck16.png]] of the '''''Review''''' tab. Transcheck provides the means to check translated content for missing tags, empty targets, numbers, untranslated segments, and terminology.

[[File:Transcheck.png]]

Click on the '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#QA_tab|Set the criteria]]''' link to go to the '''Setup''' and configure them.

Click on the '''''Check''''' button to get the result.

Click on the '''''Move next''''' button to move in the document panel to the first segment in the result list. Click again to move to next segment and so on.

==== Spellcheck ====

Click on the '''''Spellcheck'''' button [[File:Spellcheck16.png]] of the '''''View''''' tab and choose again '''Spellcheck''' in the list of choice. Spellcheck is a good practice to ensure high quality as it flags words in a document that may not be spelled correctly. The Spellcheck is done immediately then you'll get the following report with the results.

[[File:Spellcheck.png]]

Click on the '''''Move''''' button to move in the document panel to the first segment in the result list. Click again to move to next segment and so on.

==== Preview ====
Click on the '''''Preview''''' butonn [[File:Preview16.png]] of the '''''View''''' tab . It can be done at any stage of completion to get a PDF file displayed in a pop-up window with the translated document.

[[File:Preview_1.png]]
[[File:Preview_2.png]]

=== Download ===

[[File:Warning.png]] For '''download issues''', please check this [https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_fix_a_document_when_download_failed.3F link]

When the translation is finally complete, you must download the final document in order to be able to deliver it. To do this, click on [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab. A dialog with all the download options will be shown.

[[File:Donwload_all.jpg]]

Here is a short description of each option:

* '''Translated document/s''': Click to download the translated file. It will be the translated version of the source document in the same file type.

* '''Bilingual''': Click to download the TXLF (or TXML) file from the document. [[File:Warning.png]] '''''The download bilingual file will be of the type used when the file was uploaded.''''' For example if the file was uploaded using TXML, the bilingual download will be TXML. A file cannot be uploaded using one type (TXML) and download the bilingual file of the other type (TXLF). The workaround is to change the type and upload the file again. [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters More information]

* '''Offline review export''': Click to download an Offline Review file (.doc).

* '''Bilingual DOC without formatting''': Click to download bilingual for MS Word without placeholders (*.doc).

* '''Unformatted text''': Click to download unformatted Text (*.txt).

* '''Notes report''': Click to download a report with the document notes.

* '''TM from document/s''': Click to download a TM with document's content (.txml).

* '''Backup workspace''': Click to download a backup of current document + TM + glossary.

* '''Package''': Click to download a WFP package file (.glp) containing documents, memories, glossaries....etc. More information [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Package here]

* '''Filtered bilingual''': Open an advanced filtering dialog to choose segments to be downloaded.

Clicking '''OK''' will take the next dialog.

You may receive this message if you have not yet fully translated the document:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

This is purely an advisory message, warning you if you have forgotten to translate a segment or if there are provisional segments or notes. However it is quite possible that this is your intention: sometimes there are segments that should not be translated.

You can find out at any time if you have completed the translation, or how many segments remain to be translated, by using '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''

If your file is fully translated or you clicked '''OK''' on this warning dialog, a dialog where you can choose the way to download the file will open.

This can have different extra options depending the type of download you have chosen on the first dialog.

[[File:DownloadOptions2.png]]

For downloading the translated file, you have the option to add a second document in PDF format to the downloading of the document in its original format. To add the PDF-formatted document, tick the Add PDF file box. This may take some time, so please wait.

[[File:DownloadOptions2a.png]]

For downloading the TXML file, you have the options to copy the source content in case target segment is empty and not use language variants.

You can cancel the download by clicking Cancel or continue by clicking OK.
You can verify that this operation is taking place: a series of small blue rectangles will display the progress in the status bar.

There are some cases when you will get a compressed ZIP file instead of the original format. Check [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#Why_do_I_get_a_zip_file_when_downloading.3F here] the reasons.

If you have requested the PDF file, both files – the original and the PDF – will be downloaded together and compressed together in ZIP format (*. zip).

There are several ways to download a file:

* '''Download file''': After you click on the OK button, Wordfast Anywhere prepares the data transfer and then sends it to your browser. The browser will then inform you that it has received the data according to its specific mode of operation. In some cases, a dialog box will pop up allowing you specify where to save the file; however, this depends on the particular browser you use. If nothing happens, check your browser’s downloads settings and / or repeat the process.
* '''Send file to email''': Send the downloaded file by email.
* '''Create file URL''': Create a url to the downloaded file. To get the file copy-paste the url in your browser to start the download. The file will be available at that location for 3 days.
* '''Google Drive''': Send the downloaded file to your Google Drive account.
* '''Dropbox''': Send the downloaded file to your Dropbox account.

[[File:Warning.png]] For '''download issues''', please check this [https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_fix_a_document_when_download_failed.3F link]

=== Delete ===
[[File:Warning.png]] Remember this can '''NOT''' be undone, so it is recommended to download the file first.

To remove a file, first use the checkbox to select it and then use the [[File:Remove16.png]] icon on the language row.

[[File:Pmdeletefile.PNG]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Associated shares will be revoked.

Several files can be selected to be removed at the same time.

[[File:notice.png]] In case you accidentally delete a file, you can recover it by uploading again and using the same TM to pre-translate it.

=== Package ===
Project files (*.glp) are managed with the [[File:Pm import project 16.png]] '''Import''' and [[File:Pm export project 16.png]] '''Export''' buttons in the Project menu.

[[File:Warning.png]] The project file (*.glp) is limited to one source language while a Wordfast Anywhere project can have many, in consequence, package export is done by source language.

[[File:Warning.png]]There is an issue importing packages coming from PD. If you cannot import the .glp file, please ask to receive the bilingual files (txml/txlf) and the url for the TM/glossary.

==== Upload ====

Upload must be done using '''''Project''''' menu => '''''Import''''' [[File:Pm import project 16.png]] button.

Once you have selected you local file, click '''Upload'''. A new dialog with the package information and upload options will be shown.

[[File:UploadPkg.JPG]]

* '''Package Information''' section shows package name, who and when created the package and which language pairs contain.
* '''Package content''' section shows the bilingual files on the package. The files with the check box marked will be uploaded. '''On the right''' there are two drop-down lists to add a TM and glossary to the file which can came from the package if WFA can handle them or from your list on WFA (Information about them can be found on the Resources section).
* '''Resources''' section shows a list of TMs and glossaries and source files.

Finally there are two options for the upload.
* '''Create new folder''': by default files will be added to the root folder, you can use this option to upload the package files in a new folder.
* If the package contains source files a drop-down list will be shown to choose between '''Export back later''' to upload just the bilingual files and '''Generate final files on WFA''' to upload source files and merge them with the corresponding bilingual file in the package.

Once the package has been successfully uploaded, an HTML report is created.

[[File:Warning.png]] A new project is created with the content of the package.

==== Download ====

[[File:Warning.png]] The project file (*.glp) is limited to one source language while a Wordfast Anywhere project can have many, in consequence, package export is done by source language.

Download must be done using '''''Project''''' menu => '''''Export''''' [[File:Pm export project 16.png]] button.

[[File:DownloadPkg.JPG]]

* '''Package Information''': Here you can choose to download an existing package or create a new one, source and target languages. Multiple target language can be chosen if the package had them when it was uploaded.
* '''Package content''': After clicking '''Find Files''' a list of available files, TMs and glossaries is shown. The files with the check box marked will be downloaded.

Finally you can chose to '''Add Source files''' to the package.

= TM & Glossary Management =
== TM & Glossary Basics ==

Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''Setup TM&Glo''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' menu.

[[File:TmgloDialog.png]]

===Translation Memory ===
==== Creating a translation memory ====
There are several ways to create or add a TM:
* Create an empty standard WFA TM
* Upload an existing TM like from Wordast Classic or Pro
* Link to a remote TM hosted on a private Wordfast server
* Link to a Very Large TM hosted on a public Wordfast server

To create an empty TM, click on the '''''Create''''' button of the TM buttons area.

[[File:CreateTm.png]]

Choose source and target language codes. It is recommended that you have only one TM for each language pair. This way, you will benefit from everything you have already translated in each pair. However, there may be reasons for you to maintain different TMs in the same language pair. In this case, enter an ID using up to 10 characters in the Assigned Name field.
 Then click on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''Create TM''''' dialog box. Your TM has now been created and is selected in the list of TMs.

To Upload an existing TM, click on the '''''upload'''' button.

[[File:CreateTm_3.png]]

If you already have a TM that you use with Wordfast Classic or Pro, you can upload it to WFA. The codes for source and target languages are written in the header of the TM file. If you already have a TM in the same pair, make sure that you enter an identifier of up to 10 characters in the Assigned Name field.
 This procedure is exactly the same if you have a TM from another CAT tool. However, check first that this TM has been exported in the '''TMX''' format, the standard file format with extension '''.tmx''' supported by all major CAT tool developers.
 Click on the '''''Upload''''' button of the '''''Upload''''' dialog box, you will be prompted to browse a local file on your PC.

If the TM is in Excel format, before uploading it you need to save it as ''Unicode Text''.

[[File:warning.png]] Depending on its size, uploading a TM may take some time. In this case, it can be run in the background, allowing you to perform other tasks while you are waiting.

To add a remote TM or VLTM, click on the '''''add''''' button.

[[File:AddTm_1.png]]

Select the type TM in the list box.

[[File:AddTm_2.png]]

For adding a remote TM, copy paste the given URL in the URL field and the workgroup ID, if any, in the workgroup ID field.
 If you have already a remote TM with the same languages, you will need to enter a symbolic name.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test the remote TM. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:AddTm_3.png]]

WFA has access to the public TM server, which consists of segments offered by the community of translators and is available to all under the name VLTM (Very Large Translation Memory). The TM is unrestricted, free of charge and anonymous.
 For a VLTM, you need to enter source and target language codes.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test if the VLTM is available for your languages. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

==== Appending a TM to an existing TM ====
You can upload and append a TM to one of your existing TMs by clicking on the '''''merge''''' button.

[[File:MergeTm.png]]

 The process is slightly the same than uploading a TM but you should first select the existing TM in the list. The memory to import will already have predefined source and target languages codes in the header of the TM. There may therefore be a conflict of languages between it and the existing memory. If the languages are different, the merge operation will be rejected.
 You also have the choice, in case there are identical source segments, to add always the TM segments, or to not add duplicated segments from the TM. Select '''Add always''' or '''Do not add duplicate''' in the list box.
 By default, the merge process will not take language variants into account. If you want to make sure exactly the same variants are merged, tick the '''append TUs having the same variant''' option.
 Finally click on the '''''Merge''''' button of the '''''Append TUs''''' dialog box

==== Selecting an existing TM for translating a document ====
Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''TMs and Glossaries''' button on '''File''' menu to open the dialog and select an existing TM.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Caution''': If your TM is selected in the TM list, it does not mean selected for translating a document.
To select a TM for translation, you have to tick it in the '''active''' column and click on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' dialog box.
In this example above, 2 EN>FR TMs and 2 EN>FR glossaries are set active for translation.

[[File:notice.png]] A document can have as active '''several read-only''' TMs, but '''only one writeable'''. You might need to uncheck the active checkbox from the current writeable TM in order to set a new one.

=== Glossary ===
The use of incorrect terminology can ruin an otherwise good translation. Many clients have a well-defined terminology (the jargon of the trade), compiled in the form of a glossary. By supplying this glossary to their translators, clients can impose a particular terminology. In adopting this approach, very common in technical translation, the end result should harmoniously fuse the linguistic competence of the translator with the terminological requirements of the client.

Sometimes the client will ask the translator to provide a glossary of terms arising from research undertaken during the translation. In this case, the translator must create a glossary and add specific terminology to it. This glossary building can either be done prior to translation (in an initial terminology research phase), or during the translation itself.

In many cases, however, the client provides a bilingual glossary, which has already been created during the course of previous translations. It is then up to the translator to comply strictly with it and, where appropriate, to add his or her own contributions.

When the translation work is of a more general nature (and especially if a translator is still in the process of acquiring the general vocabulary of a source language), WFA’s glossary function can also be used to itemise terminology that is encountered during the course of the translation process.

Wordfast Anywhere is designed to assist the translator in all the cases mentioned above through the implementation of its glossary function. This glossary consists of a simple tab-delimited text document, which – like the TM – can be uploaded to and downloaded from WFA, shared with other CAT programs, etc. as required.

==== Creating a glossary ====
Like TM there are several ways to create or add a glossary:
* Create an empty standard WFA glossary
* Upload an existing glossary
* Link to remote glossaries
* Link to Tilde Terminology services
* Link to a IATE glossary

To create an empty glossary, click on the '''''Create''''' button of the glossary buttons area and follow the same TM pattern.

To Upload an existing glossary, click on the '''''upload''''' button of the glossary buttons area and follow the same TM pattern.
 Allowed file types are simple tabulated text file (*.txt) (source + tab + target), Wordfast glossary text file (*.txt), Excel file (*.xls, *.xlsx) and TBX file (*.tbx).
 Excel files must be simple:
* 1st Column: Source (compulsory)
* 2nd Column: Target (compulsory)
* 3rd Column: Comment (optional)
* 4th Column: F1 (optional)
* 5th Column: F2 (optional)
* 6th Column: F3 (optional)

 Unlike with a TM, WFA cannot derive the source and target language information from the header of the glossary file; therefore this must be specified here.
 Once the glossary has been uploaded, you will receive a report summarising the operation:
 You will see how many terms have been submitted for upload, how many were rejected as invalid or duplicates well as the total number of terms added.

To add a remote glossary or Tilde Terminology services, click on the '''''add''''' button.

[[File:AddGlossary_1.png]]

Select the type in th elist box.

[[File:AddGlossary_2.png]]

For adding a remote glossary, copy paste the given URL in the URL field.
 If you have already a remote glossary with the same languages, you will need to enter a symbolic name.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test the remote glossary. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:AddGlossary_3.png]]

For setting Tilde Terminology services, you need to select source and target languages and a domain.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test if you have collections. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:addIATE.png]]

To set an IATE glossary, just select the source and target languages. Only languages from the European community are supported.
Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button and if the glossary exists, click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:addIATE2.png]]

By default not all IATE terminology is showed, but you can enable it by checking '''''Show all common terminology'''''.

==== Appending terms from a local glossary to an existing glossary in Wordfast Anywhere ====
You can upload and append a glossary to one of your existing glossaries by clicking on the '''''merge''''' button.

[[File:MergeGlo.png]]

 The process is slightly the same than uploading but you should first select the existing glossary in the list.
 You have the choice, in case there are identical entries (source and target), to add always or to not add duplicated. Select '''Add always''' or '''Do not add duplicate''' in the list box.
 Finally click on the '''''Merge''''' button.

==== Selecting one or more glossaries for translation ====
Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''TMs and Glossaries''' button on '''File''' menu to open the dialog and select an existing TM.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Caution''': If your glossary is selected in the glossary list, it does not mean selected for translation.
To select a glossary for translation, you have to tick it in the '''active''' column and click after on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' dialog box.

[[File:notice.png]] A document can have as active '''several read-only''' glossaries, but '''only one writeable'''. You might need to uncheck the active checkbox from the current writeable glossary in order to set a new one.

==== Using a glossary ====

[[File:Use glossary.png]]

* Whenever WFA recognises a term from the glossary in the source segment it highlights it against a blue background

* The terms highlighted in blue are considered as placeables. They can thus be manipulated with the [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] and [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] icons or the Ctrl+Alt+Right and Ctrl+Alt+Left shortcuts and by clicking on them with the mouse or by typing their initial letter + Tab. The difference is that, when you use the [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]] icon or the Ctrl+Alt+Down shortcut, it is the corresponding translation that is copied to the target segment. The most easy way to copy a target is probably to use the Auto-suggest feature, enabled by default. Target terms are proposed by typing the first letter of the target term of the 3 first letters of the source term. [[File:Auto-suggest target term.png]] [[File:Auto-suggest target term 2.png]].

* You can see in advance what the translation of the highlighted items is by activating the glossary panel (keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+H or by selecting it from the '''''View''''' tab => '''''Show/Hide Glossary''''' [[File:panelGlo.png]] button )

* If you want to know more about a term, i.e. the information that you or someone else has entered in the comment or F1, F2 and F3 fields, place your mouse over the source term and this information will be displayed. See above the bubble of the last term on the glossary panel (translation).

==== Adding terms to the glossary ====

[[File:Add_term.png]]

It is quite likely that you will want to incorporate terms you come across in the source text into the glossary together with their translations that arise as part of your research process. This way, your linguist’s memory will be reinforced and you are less likely to have to research the same word or phrase again in the future. WFA allows you to do this dynamically, at any time and without exiting your translation process.

First, select the term in the source text. If it consists of one word, you can simply click on it or use the Tab key to move forwards (or Shift+Tab to move backwards) through the text until you reach its position.

The word you have selected will be highlighted against a red border.

Then click on the target term in the target segment.

The selected target term will have a blue background.

[[File:Select terms.png]]

Next, invoke the Glossary Dialog Box by typing Ctrl+Alt+T, or clicking the '''''Add Term''''' [[File:TermEdit.png]] button.

If a single word, the terms you highlighted in the source and target segments should automatically appear in the Source and Target fields.
If the terms consists of more than one word, it may be necessary to paste the text into the fields from your computer’s clipboard or type the information manually.

You can also add a comment – something that may prove useful in the future, e.g. if you want to remember the situation in which this translation was used. The F1, F2 and F3 fields may be used to store word role, context, grammatical form or any other relevant text-based information.

Then click Save to confirm.

==== Fuzzy terminology recognition ====
Each time you open a segment, Wordfast Anywhere checks for the presence in the glossary of all words and terms contained in the source segment. This operation is called terminology recognition. The recognised terms are highlighted in blue in the source segment, as discussed above.

In establishing a correspondence between the terms of the source segment and the terms found in the glossary, WFA will both recognise an exact match and attempt to recognise fuzzy matches.

WFA employs a stemming algorithm for some languages (e.g. German) in order to recognise different forms of the same word that may correspond to those listed in the glossary.

For example, WFA can recognised the infinitive verb ‘besuchen’ as being related to the adjective (or past participle) ‘besucht’ due to the fact that the two words share a common stem.

Fuzzy matching can also be established by using an asterisk in combination with the term. This method overrides the stemming algorithm, allowing you to find all terms that begin with, end with or contain a particular text string.

=== Concordance search ===
Segments stored in the TM are retrieved only if they have a minimum level of correspondence with the source segment (by default 75%). However, even if the level of correspondence is not sufficient to produce a fuzzy match, the TM may still contain terms that you have previously translated and wish to use in your current translation. To search in the memory you have two options:

1) Click on the '''''Concordance''''' button [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]] or use the '''Ctrl+Alt+C''' shortcut. The following window appears:

[[File:concordance.png]]

Enter the word or text string you want to research in the Search field. WFA will search for all words that are the same or begin with the same sequence of letters as the string entered.

You can also select the word or text string with the mouse and then click on the '''''Concordance''''' button [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]] or '''Ctrl+Alt+C''' shortcut. The result will be displayed immediately.

You can edit or delete a term in the concordance search window by clicking on the edit or delete links.

You can add to your search possibilities by choosing the Advanced option:
* Two words or text strings (search terms) separated by a space: one or the other must exist in the TU
* Two terms separated by the + sign: both terms must exist
* A term ending with an asterisk: a search is performed for all text strings containing the search term.

When you use this option, a help line is displayed to remind you how this command works.

=== Searching in a glossary===
You can also search in the glossary. To do this, click the '''''Glossary Search''''' button [[File:GlossarySearch.png]] or use the '''Ctrl+Alt+G''' shortcut:

[[File: Glossary search.png]]

Type the source language word you wish to search for in the Search field and click OK. The list of glossary entries that contain the search term will be displayed.
You can edit or delete a term in the glossary search window by clicking on the edit or delete icons.

By employing an asterisk in the search term, you can expand your search to find all glossary entries that include the text string that the search term is made up of.

== TM & Glossary Advanced features ==

=== TM operations ===
==== View/Edit a TM ====
Select the TM in the list then click on the '''''Edit''''' button.

[[File:ViewEditTm.png]]

The dialog box displays the TM information. Depending on the TM type, you can edit some properties.
* Standard WFA TM : you have the possibility to define attributes of your TM, which will allow you to subsequently identify its segments. Click on the '''Attributes''' tab.
[[File:EditTmAttributes.png]]

There are five attributes in a Wordfast TM: the first is fixed and immutable, consisting of the name of the user. The other four can be defined by each user at will, but it is recommended to use attribute 1 to describe the subject of the text to be translated and attribute 2 for the client, to maintain compatibility with Wordfast Classic and Wordfast Pro users. Attributes consist of codes, usually 3 letters, followed by a brief description. In the fields referred to as TM attribute 1 to 4, enter the name of the attribute (subject, client, etc.). In the field on their right, select one of the attributes that appear on the drop-down list or, if necessary, click '''add''' to add an attribute, '''upd''' to update it or '''del''' to delete it. Whatever option is chosen, a dialog will appear asking for the code of the attribute (ID) and a brief description (Name, ignored for the Del option).
[[file:EditTmAttributes_add.png]] [[file:EditTmAttributes_update.png]] [[file:EditTmAttributes_delete.png]]

Dynamic codes : Predefined attributes can be added by entering a code between accolades as explain in the help.
[[File:EditTmAttributes_help.png]]

* Remote private Wordfast server

[[File:EditRemoteTm.png]] You can edit the workgroup ID and/or the symbolic name.

==== Download a TM ====
This is available only for standard WFA TM.

[[File:DownloadTm.png]]

From the Downloaded file format drop-down list you can select either the Wordfast TM TXT format, the Standard TMX format, the MS Excel XLS format or the Bilingual document TXLF format.
 Click on the '''Download''' button.

===== Filters when downloading a TM =====
Select ''"Filtering (advanced options)"'' on the second drop-down list and click on the '''Download''' button.

[[File:Tm_download2.JPG]]

This will analyse the TM and let you apply some filters to select what you want to download from the TM.

[[File:Tm_download_filter.JPG]]

[[File:Tm_download_filter2.JPG]]

Once filters are selected click on the '''Download''' button to finish the download.

==== Removing a TM ====
After clicking on the top '''Remove''' button on the TM side, this red warning is displayed to confirm the deletion.
 For TMs that are not Wordfast Anywhere standard TMs only the link to the external TM is cut.

[[File:DeleteTm.png]]

==== Quick TM Share ====
By clicking on the small '''share''' button on top of the TM side, you can share quickly a TM to somebody else having an account in Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:CreateTMShare.png]]

Click on the '''''Add guest''''' button and enter his email address (which should be his account login), then click '''Add'''.

[[File:CreateTMShare2.png]]

You can change the privilege of your guest on your TM. Finally to save the share, click on the '''''Save''''' button.

==== TMs Tools ====
===== Reversing a TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmReverse.png]]

Select a TM to reverse and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a TM already exists with the same name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Assembling several TMs in one TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmAssembled.png]]

Select one or more TMs to assemble in one TM and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a TM already exists with the same name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 if '''keep old assigned name''' is unchecked this information will be lost.
 if '''keep variants''' is checked, the TU will not be changed, otherwise, it take the given language pair.
 if '''keep user ID''' is checked, the TU will not be changed, otherwise, it will take your user ID.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Edit a TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmEdit.png]]

Select a TM to edit and click on the '''Run''' button.
 The TM will be opened as a temporary associated document in the document panel.

[[File:ToolsTmEdit1.png]]

Here you can for example update target segments, edit source segments and delete TU. Those changes will be stored straight on your TM.
 Bear in mind that this is a TM although it looks like a document.

After the TM edition, the temporary document must be deleted because it is a static copy of the TM.
 The tool can only edit and delete existing TUs and the TM size is limited to 100000 TUs.

=== Glossary operations ===
==== View/Edit a glossary ====
Select the glossary in the list then click on the '''''View/Edit''''' button.

[[File:ViewEditGlo.png]]

The dialog box displays the glossary information. Depending on the glossary type, you can edit some properties.

[[File:EditRemoteGlo.png]]

[[File:EditTildeGlo.png]]

==== Download a glossary ====
This is available only for standard WFA glossary.

[[File:DownloadGlo.png]]

Click on the '''Download''' button.

==== Removing a glossary ====
After clicking on the top '''Remove''' button on the glossary side, this red warning is displayed to confirm the deletion.
 For glossaries that are not standard only the link to the external glossary is cut.

[[File:DeleteGlo.png]]

==== Quick Glossary Share ====
By clicking on the small '''share''' button on top of the glossary side, you can share quickly a glossary to somebody else having an account in Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:CreateGloShare.png]]

Click on the '''''Add guest''''' button and enter his email address (which should be his account login), then click '''Add'''.

[[File:CreateGloShare2.png]]

You can change the privilege of your guest on your glossary. Finally to save the share, click on the '''''Save''''' button.

==== Glossaries tools ====
===== Reversing a glossary=====
[[File:ToolsGloReverse.png]]

Select a glossary to reverse and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a glossary already exists with the reversed glossary name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Assembling several glossaries in one glossary =====
[[File:ToolsGloAssembled.png]]

Select two or more glossaries to assemble and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a glossary already exists with the assembled glossary name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 if '''keep old assigned name''' is unchecked this information will be lost.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

=== TMs and glossaries shares ===

You can allow other users to share your TM as well as your glossary and you can see the TMs and the glossaries shared to you by others.
To manage all kind of share, click on the bottom '''''Share''''' button of the TMs and glossaries dialog. At that time you will receive the following:

[[File:Tmglo_share_1.png]]

* If you have already enabled the sharing of your TMs and your glossaries with other users, they will be displayed in the '''My shares to other users''' table. You can revoke sharing with any of these users. To do this, select the user in question and click '''Revoke'''. To add or update an existing share click on the '''Add''' or '''Edit''' buttons and see the chapter '''Add and edit shares to other users''' below.
* You can visualize all the TMs and glossaries that have been shared to you in the '''My shares from other users''' table. You can end any share by selecting it and clicking on the '''Remove''' button.
* You can also share your TMs and glossaries to applications like Wordfast Classic and Wordfast Pro by generating keys. they are displayed in the '''My shares to applications''' table. See below the chapter '''Sharing to applications'''.

==== Add and edit shares to other users ====

[[File:Tmglo_share_2.png]]

[[File:Tmglo_share_edit.png]]

[[File:Tmglo_share_3.png]]

==== Sharing to applications ====
Wordfast Anywhere will generate up to 5 keys to share one or more TMs and, optionally, glossaries.
The key is needed for the external application to connect to that specific share.

[[File:Tmglo_share_app_1.png]]

If you want to add the TMs and glossaries currently used, click on the '''Add active TMs and glossaries''', otherwise click on the '''Add''' button to choose a TM and the '''Add''' button to choose a glossary.
 Choose the right privilege and the number of keys needed, then click on the the '''Save''' button.
 The keys will be generated and listed in the '''My shares to application''' table. See below.

[[File:Tmglo_share_app_2.png]]

For instance this can be used on Wordfast Pro 3.4.9, where there is a tab for Wordfast Anywhere TM and glossaries.

[[File:Wpftab.png]]

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QVOMOYfR2ws&feature=em-subs_digest this video] about how to do it.

 Although the API key is for a combined TM and glossary, on Wordfast Pro 3.4.9 you need to add it twice: one for TM and one for glossary

[[Wordfast Pro]] users can check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=S7QCHNpRtKo&feature=em-subs_digest this video].

= Translation =
== Preparation of the translation environment ==
Before beginning the translation of a document using a CAT tool, you must first have an active Translation Memory.

'''Note''': an initial TM was automatically set up when you created your account.

The TM consists of a database, which will record each source language segment (i.e. sentence, phrase) that you translate, together with the corresponding target language segment. As it grows, this increasingly allows you to obtain translations of phrases made previously that are the same or similar to the one you are currently translating.

For more information check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Translation_Memory|Translation Memory basics]]'''.

== Translating ==
To start the translation, you must first open the initial segment.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:StartNext.png]] '''''Start/Next''''' button or use the ''Alt + Down'' shortcut . When you do this, the document area is transformed: the segment is displayed in light blue block (source), a grey block (target) is placed just below it and the rest of your document is shown on the rest of the page. The cursor is located in the grey block.

Translate the segment in the grey block

[[File:StartTrans.png|1200px]]

After translating this segment, you can continue with your translation. To move to the next segment, click on the [[File:StartNext.png]] '''''Start/Next''''' or use the ''Alt+Down'' shortcut. Remember this shortcut, as you will use it for each segment you translate. You can also move to previous segment by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Previous.png]] '''''Previous''''' or use the ''Alt + Up'' shortcut.

[[File:notice.png]] '''''When translating, the segments are saved automatically in the translation memory and on the database system as soon as you go to the next segment.'''''

Now translate the segment as before.

Now that you get the idea, you can continue to translate. Remember: to move from one segment to the next, use ''Alt+Down''. To return to the previous segment (to correct something that you subsequently realised was mistaken), use ''Alt+Up''.

Following are some '''other considerations''' regarding the translation of segments.

'''Note''': Most browser / OS combinations, including Firefox, Safari and Chrome, have their own spell checker – in some cases it may be necessary for you to activate it. You can also use '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Spellcheck|Spellcheck]]'''

There is color code for the target block:
* Grey is the no match from the TM (score=0)
* Green is the full match from the TM (score=100)
* Yellow is a fuzzy match from the TM (score between 50 to 99)
* Orange is a MT proposition
* Purple is the color when the segment has been modified by the editor

Score information can be found in different places depending on the view.
For '''Classic view''' it can be found on ''<}score{>'' tag between source and target segment.

[[File:ScoreC.png|1200px]]

For '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views''' there is a column for the score.

[[File:ScoreH.png|1200px]]

[[File:ScoreV.png|1200px]]

=== Tags ===

Before translating this new segment, pay attention to the tag <1>, which appears here at the end. WFA is not a word processor and thus does not concern itself with a specific representation of the document's formatting. You'll see no changes in size or typeface, no bold or italic characters. Instead, this information is encoded and represented by what we call "tags", e.g. <1>. By slowly passing your mouse over this tag you will see what it represents. This tag is not to be translated, but it should be placed on the appropriate position in the target segment. If you want to recopy a tag from the source segment please type < to trigger the tags proposal.

[[File:tagProposal.png]]

You can also copy it by using the comands on '''Translation''' tab: [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] '''Next Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Right'') and [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] '''Previous Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Left'') to navigate the source segment to the desired tag. A red frame indicates the selected item. Then position the cursor in the target segment and click on [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]] '''Copy Pl.'''(''Ctrl+Alt+Down'').

Differences on the formatting tags (<1>, <2>) between source and target segment can make the file filter aligner have difficulties to build up the translated document.

Check there is no ''segments with tag difference'' using one of this options:
# Click on [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button on '''File''' tab to get a report. Check if there are any ''segments with tag difference''. Use '''''Show Outline''''' [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button on '''View''' tab to go straight to one segment.
# Click on [[File:FindReplace.png]] '''''Find & Replace''''' button on '''Edit''' tab. Go to ''Miscellaneous'' tab and run a ''Tag difference'' search. Segments with tag differences will be listed.

On the listed segments you must pay attention to:
# There is no target tag missing that exists on source.
# The target tag order is different from source order. For example [<1>text text<2>] on source but [<2>text text<1>] on target.
# The target tag content is not identical with the source tag. You can see the content of the tag when the mouse is over it.

[[File:Warning.png]] We '''do not recommend to use copy/paste or drag and drop''' to copy the tags as it can copy more than the eye can see and be problematic. It is better to use the the auto-suggest feature with tags (whenever you want to add a tag just type < and the list of tags from source will be proposed for selection) or the [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]] '''Copy Placeable''' on '''Translation''' tab.

== Main commands ==

=== Provisional segment ===
You may be unsure whether your translation of a segment is correct. To avoid having to interrupt your translation process, you can mark the segment as provisional.

It will be identified by a yellow square at the beginning of the line for '''Classic view''' or at the end of the row for '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views'''.

To mark a segment as provisional, use the F10 key or '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mark.png]] '''''Provisional'''''.

When you have resolved any doubts, simply return to the marked segment and make your corrections. Use ''Alt+Down'' ( [[File:StartNext.png]] ) or ''Alt-Up'' ( [[File:Previous.png]] ) to validate the segment and erase the yellow square.

=== Auto propagate ===
Use this command to translate a segment and automatically propagate the current segment changes through all the document to other segments having the same source.

Find it in '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Autopropagate.png]] '''''Auto Propagate'''''.

=== Note ===
You can also write a note to be attached to the segment for the duration of the translation (in a similar manner to a Post-ItTM). You can use this to remind yourself of something important about this segment or to pass information on to people who will have access to your translation, such as reviewers.

To write a note, click on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Edit_Note16.png]] '''''Edit Note'''''.

The following text box will be displayed:

[[File:Editnote.png|1200px]]

Write your note in the text box and click Save. You can cancel the operation by clicking Cancel. In the case of an existing note, you can edit and validate it by clicking Save, or delete it by clicking Remove.

A green square will be placed at the beginning of the segment to indicate that a note is attached. By passing the mouse pointer over this square, you will see a rectangle containing the text of the note.

It will be identified by a grey square with an "i" in it at the beginning of the line for '''Classic view''' or at the end of the row for '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views'''.

[[File:Editnote2.png|1200px]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Notes can be downloaded by going to '''''File''''' tab => [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' and choosing the '''''Notes Report'''''

=== Copying the original segment ===
Sometimes a segment contains very little to translate: for example, when it consists almost entirely of proper names or is made up of a website address. In this case, it may be preferable to copy the entire source segment to the target segment and make any adjustments there.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CopySource.png]] '''''Copy Source'''''. or use the shortcut ''Alt-Ins'.

=== Erasing the target segment ===
Sometimes it is necessary to erase what you have just written in the target segment.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Cleanup_Project16.png]] '''''Del Target'''''. or use the shortcut ''Ctrl+Alt+X''.

This button has a toggle behaviour through: Empty target, Remove tags and Restore.

=== Insertion of a special character like the non-breaking space ===
When you write in French, some characters must be accompanied by a non-breaking space: e.g. before the colon, semicolon, exclamation mark, question mark, exclamation mark, before and after quotes, thousands separators, and so on. In WFA, a non-breaking space is represented by the symbol < >.

However, such spaces cannot be automatically handled in an Internet browser as they are when using a text editor such as Word. Therefore it will be necessary to add them manually. By default, a non-breaking space is inserted at the cursor location by clicking on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Insert_c1.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 1'''''.

Two other special characters can be inserted like the curly quotes. Use '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Insert_c2.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 2''''' and [[File:Insert_c3.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 3'''''.

You can configure these 3 special characters in WFA setup (see '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Pandora.27s_box_tab|Pandora’s box]]''').

=== Expanding a segment ===
As we have seen, WFA considers that the segment is terminated when it encounters a segment termination marker. However, in some cases this segmentation is in error. For example, when WFA’s segmentation engine meets the following sentence:
''On pense aux conseils de Prof. Jacques Lacan:''
it can interpret the segment as ending with ''Prof.'' because a full stop is used as an end of segment marker. In this case we can command WFA to expand the segment, that is to say, to append the subsequent segment to it.

[[File:exspand1.png]]

This is done with the ''Alt+Pg'' dn shortcut or '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Expand_Segment16.png]] '''''Expand'''''.

[[File:exspand2.png]]

It is important to expand segments when the segmentation has not been performed correctly because this will increase the chances of it corresponding with a translation memory segment. For example, the segment ''On pense aux conseils de Prof.'' will have little chance of having a similarity of over 75% with another. By contrast, if the sentence ''On pense aux conseils de Prof. Jacques Lacan:'' is in the TM, when WFA encounters the source sentence ''On pense aux conseils de Professeur Jacques Lacan'', it will offer the existing translation, as it has 90% similarity (it is only the word Professor that is not the same).

A segment cannot be expanded if it is terminated by an end of paragraph or end of cell marker, a page break or a tab.

You should not have to expand all segments containing abbreviations that end with a full stop. A comma-separated, modifiable list of common language-specific abbreviations is included in WFA . This can be accessed and modified via the segmentation tab in the configuration dialog box [case-sensitive, optional letters are enclosed in square brackets].

[[File:Abbrev.png]]

=== Shrinking a segment ===
If, on the other hand, two segments are erroneously displayed together due to an absence of an end of segment marker, you can also shrink the segment with the shortcut ''Alt-Pg'' up or ''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:ShrinkSeg.png]] '''''Shrink'''''.

=== Placeables ===

A placeable is any term or expression contained in the source segment that is defined as such. WFA provides shortcuts for inserting them into the target segment, thus both saving time and reducing the potential for typing errors.

WFA predefines as placeables:
*Numbers
*Tags
*Words beginning with, or otherwise containing, capital (upper case) letters
*Words or phrases appearing in the source text that have matching items stored in the '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Glossary|Glossary]]'''.

We have already seen how to copy tags. Given that a tag is a placeable, the procedure is the same: to copy any placeable, simply select it with the comands on '''Translation''' tab: [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] '''Next Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Right'') and [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] '''Previous Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Left'').

You also have the possibility of clicking on any term in the source text, thus placing it under focus and temporarily transforming it into a placeable. A red frame indicates the item selected.

Next, position the cursor in the target segment at the point where the placeable should be positioned or double-click (click and drag) to select the word (phrase) to be replaced and click on the on [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]] '''Copy Pl.'''(''Ctrl+Alt+Down''). The placeable is copied to the relevant position in the target segment.

In this sentence, the placeable elements, selected by ''Ctrl+Alt+Right'' or [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]], are:

[[File:place1.png]]
(starts with a capital letter)

[[File:place2.png]]
(number)

[[File:place3.png]]
(tag)

And, if necessary, any term may be designated as a placeable simply by clicking on it:

[[File:place4.png]]

As you translate the text, you only want to place those elements that should not be translated:

[[File:place5.png]]

At this point, you want to write ‘Chenjerai.’. However it may be faster and more efficient (as well as reducing the possibility of error) to select the item using ''Ctrl+Alt+Right'' or [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] (or even by simply clicking on it) and place it into the segment target with ''Ctrl+Alt+Down'' or [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]].

[[File:place6.png]]

The following proper noun ‘Hove’ is also a placeable, so you can repeat the procedure. Simply use the '''Tab key''' on your keyboard to advance from one placeable to the next (or '''Shift+Tab''' to move in the opposite direction).

[[File:place7.png]]

You can also use the ''Ctrl+Alt+Up'' shortcut or [[File:Dropdown.png]] '''Toggle Pl.'' on '''Translation''' tab to transform terms in the source segment into placeables.

For even greater efficiency, if you type a letter that begins a word or term in the source segment and then successively press Tab, all words or terms beginning with that letter are successively copied to the target segment. For example, in the above sentence, typing ''l'' followed by '''Tab''' will copy ''lyrique'' to the target. Each time you press the Tab key, the word or term that has been copied to the target segment will be replaced by the next
word or term appearing in the source segment that begins with the same letter, i.e. ''le'', ''laisse'' and so on.

=== Case changer ===
Use this feature to toggle through: lowercase, uppercase and proper name for a word. This feature can be used in one word (by putting the cursor inside the word), or with more than one word (by selecting several words with the mouse or Shift+Left/Right Arrow).
Beware that some times it gets crazy with the first and last word.

Use it bu clicking on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:CaseChanger.png]] '''''Case Changer'''''.

=== Increase target height ===
You can increase the target height by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Increase_target.png]] '''''Target Height'''''.

=== Web Speech Beta ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY available for Chrome. Currently disabled due to browser security.'''

This is a beta implementation that uses Google Web Speech API to insert your dictation into the target segment.

To use it, first open the segment and then click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mic.png]] '''''Web Speech Beta''''' button to start the dictation. The icon will change to indicate recording is on. To stop dictation click again on the button.

You can add a shortcut to this command.

You can jump to the next segment as always and keep on dictating. Or you can stop dictation, jump to the next segment and start dictation again.

A provisional transcription will be shown as an auto-suggest text and the final transcription will be inserted on the target segment. The provisional transcription might not be accurate while final transcription should be quite accurate and may be different from provisional transcription.

Please take into account that this is a beta implementation and that voice transcription is done online so there can be delays when dictating. We encourage you to use it and give us some feedback.

[[File:Warning.png]] It can be that Chrome keeps asking you to allow the use of the microphone every time. You need to check the Chrome settings: "Privacy>Content Settings>Microphone>Manage exceptions". There you should have an exception for https:freetm.com.

If you are connected to the site via HTTS the grant is permanent, if you use HTTP, you are asked each time.

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rR88md-xyik&feature=em-uploademail this video] about how to use this tool.

Check this links for more information:

[https://support.google.com/chrome/answer/3123708?p=settings_manage_exceptions&rd=1 Chrome Exceptions]

[https://support.google.com/chrome/answer/6148059?hl=en Chrome website permissions]

=== Edit Source ===
Using '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:EditSource16.png]] '''''Edit Source''''' will help you to correct the source text in order to have valid TU in memory.

This will not change the source file and obviously will not automatically change the target segment.

=== Ending the translation ===
If for any reason you want to stop translating, you have three choices:
* Close the translation and validate the current segment in the TM ('''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close & Commit''''' or ''Alt+End'')
* Close the translation without validating it ('''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:Close.png]] '''''Close''''' or ''Shift+Alt+End'')
* Clear the content of the target segment, together with any attached note, by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:Close_restore.png]] '''''Close & Delete''''' .

== After Translation ==

When your translation is finished, you use one of our '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Review|Review]]''' tools before '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Download|Download]]''' it.

= Tools =
=== Downloading TXML file ===
You can download your document in TXML format, the standard working file format used by WFA. This permits you, for example, to send the file to a colleague for review using Wordfast Anywhere or Pro. Once reviewed and corrected, you can upload it again.

To download your working file go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual TXML'''''.

[[File:DownloadTypesList.png]]

If your translation is incomplete or contains provisional segments or notes, you will receive this warning:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

At this point you have the choice to accept (OK) or cancel (Cancel) to return to your translation. If you accept, you will need to consider the following dialog:

[[File:DownloadOptions2a.png]]

You can optionally instruct WFA to copy the source segment to the target segment if it is blank (check Copy source to target if target is empty) and/or to ignore language variations, e.g. to not make a distinction between British and American English (check No language variants).

Choose the way to download the file and click '''''OK''''' to donwload the file.

=== Merging TXML files ===
If you already have a file in TXML format you can upload it to your workspace. To do this go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:Mergetms16.png]] '''Merge Txml''' button. At this point you must complete the following dialog box:

[[File:Mergetxml1.PNG]]

By checking Merge an existing document, all documents that exist in your workspace will be listed according to language pair, and you will have to choose which will be merged with the file you intend to upload.

You can also set WFA to update the TM corresponding to the file you upload (check Update or create a TM with a bilingual document). Check Merge an existing TM and choose which TM to update from the list displayed. You will also need to determine whether, in the case of identical source segments, new TUs should be added to existing ones (Keep existing TUs) or whether they should replace them (Overwrite existing TUs). If, on the other hand, you prefer to create a new TM, click on Create a new TM. At this point, you will have the opportunity to give this new TM a name, if you have more than one TM for the same language pair. Then click Upload to upload the file or Close to exit without doing anything.

Note that operations performed on the document are independent from memory-related operations, allowing you to update only the document, or only the memory, or both.
If you have clicked Upload, you will receive the following message:

[[File:Mergetxml2.png]]

Click Browse to navigate through your directories and select your file, then click Submit to perform the upload or Cancel to cancel the operation. After the merge operation has been successfully performed, a report will appear showing how many segments were merged.

[[File:Mergetxml3.png]]

=== Other downloads ===
You can also download the working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments, usable by Wordfast Classic (and Trados Workbench).

[[File:Bilingualwordfastclassic.png]]

This will allow your document to be proofread by a Wordfast Classic user. Caution, this download is only available for files formatted as .doc and .rtf. Unlike the TXML file, this format cannot be imported into WFA.

To download your working file in bilingual MS-Word format, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the '''''Download''''' button and choose '''Bilingual Doc original''' option. This option is only available if your source file is a MS Word file.

[[File:DownloadTypesList.png]]

If your translation is incomplete or contains provisional segments or notes, you will receive this warning:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

At this point you have the choice to accept (OK) or cancel (Cancel) to return to your translation. If you accept, you will need to respond to the following message:

[[File:Bilingualwordfastclassic2.png]]

Following the same steps you can download this other files:

* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments without placeholders Bilingual. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC no placeholders''''' option.
* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments with placeholders Bilingual. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC with placeholders''''' option.
* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments with tag-content as placeholder. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC tag content''''' option.
* Your translated file, in plain text format, without any formatting. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Unformatted Text''''' option.

=== Find & Replace ===
It is often necessary to locate a word or text string in a file that has been translated. For this we use the Doc Find and Replace function. Go to '''''Edit''''' tab and click on the [[File:FindReplace.png]] '''''Find & Replace''''' button.

As with other functions that require the current segment to be closed, you will receive a warning that the current segment will be closed without being saved. If you agree, click OK, otherwise click Cancel to cancel the transaction and save your work.

[[File:Warning.png]] By default search is only done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:SR1.png]]

'''''Find & Replace''''' dialog has 4 tabs performing different actions.

* Use '''Find''' tab to locate a word or text in your document.
* Use '''Find/Replace''' tab to locate and replace a word or text in your document.
* Use '''Go to Segment''' tab to search for single segments (1,5,68,499) or a range of segments (25-66).
* Use '''Miscellaneous''' tab to perform different types of searches such as look for '''provisional''' or '''untranslated''' segments, or segments with '''notes''' or '''tag differences'''.

[[File:Notice.png]] You can use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:Warning.png]] Not all the options are always available.
==== Find ====
Use '''Find''' tab.
Type the word or text you want to find and click '''Find''' button to start a search. When search is done hits are highlighted and the number of hits is shown on the dialog.

[[File:SR6.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] By default search is only done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:SR7.png]]

==== Replace ====
Use '''Find/Replace''' tab. Type the word/text you want to find and the word/text you want it replaced for and click '''Find''' button to start a search. When search is done hits are highlighted and the number of hits is shown on the dialog.

[[File:SR8.png]]

It may happen that '''Replace''', '''Replace/Find''' and '''Replace All''' buttons are not available. This happens because the first search does not move you to the first hit, you have to click again '''Find''' to move to the next hit and then replace buttons will be available. Use them to replace, replace and move to next hit or replace all hits.

Replace can only be done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Go to Segment ====
Use '''Go to Segment''' tab. Use it to find specific segments. This can be an alternative to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''.
You can type single segments separated by commas (1,5,68,499) or a range of segments (25-66).

[[File:SR4.png]]

Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Miscellaneous ====
Use '''Miscellaneous''' tab. This 6 types of search do not require to type a word/text but will help you locate segments with some particularities. This can be an alternative to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''.

[[File:SR5a.png]]

You can search for:

* '''Provisional''' segments.
* '''Untranslated''' segments.
* Segments with '''Tag difference'''.
* Segments with '''Notes'''.
* Segments with '''Double spaces'''.
* Segments with '''Revisions'''.

Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Advanced search options ====

Using the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button you can access some advanced search options:

[[File:SR2.png]]

* Search for '''Whole Word'''.
* Do a '''Case sensitive''' search.
* Search for words that start/end by the characters using * as a joker. For example searching for *able will find: movable, payable, breakable,...etc. And searching for hand* will find: handbag, handmade, handbook,...etc
* Search on Source, Target or both. This can only be used in '''Find''' tab.
* Mark each found target as provisional.
* Create a note for each replaced segment.
* Update the TM for each replaced segment.
* Do a wrap search
* Change search direction: Backward or Forward.

=== Analyze ===
Before providing a translation quotation, you may wish to analyze the source text to determine the extent of the work required. WFA provides an analytical tool for this purpose. To do this, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the '''''Analyze''''' button and choose '''Analyze'''. If your file is big and you do not want to wait, choose '''Analyze in Background'''.

A progress message is displayed on the status bar. Then the analysis results will be displayed:

[[File:Analysis.png]]

According to the number of repetitions (identical segments that appear more than once in the document) or the percentage of segments that correspond either completely (100%) or partially (<100%) to matches in the TM, you will be able to precisely estimate the volume of work actually requiring to be translated. After having examined the analysis report, click Close.

=== Statistics ===
WFA allows you to see what progress you have made with your translation at any time. To do this, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button.

A statistical report on your translation will be displayed:

[[File:Statistics.png]]

You will see the number of source and target segments (with the percentage already translated in brackets); the number of source and current target words; the number of source and target tags and if there is any segmental discrepancy in terms of differences between the number and content of the source and target tags (segments with tag difference); the number of segments not stored in the TM (segments flagged not saved in TM); the number of provisional segments (provisional segments) and notes (segments with notes). The report also displays which segments remain to be translated. After viewing the statistics, click Close.

Another important indicator is always present on the status bar: it tells you on which segment you currently are in relation to the total number of segments in the document. In this example, the document has 149 segments in total and you are currently on the 68:

[[File:Foot1.png]]

=== Alignment ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This tool is not managed by WFA in case there is any problem use the '''Help''' in the tool, the third tab, to report your problem. You can also sent an email to '''converterhelp@wordfast.com'''

When you begin to translate with a CAT tool you may not be able to derive the maximum benefit from it if you do not yet have a translation memory. Or, a client may have source and target documents from a previous translation but cannot supply you with a TM. In this case, you can quickly derive a TM by performing an "alignment" on the documents you have already translated prior to using WFA for your translation work by using the alignment tool.

To do this, go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab and click on the [[File:WF Update16.png]] '''''AutoAligner''''' button.

A new page will open, displaying the following dialog:

[[File:Align.png]]

Follow the instructions to upload the files and align them to get the TM from the alignment.

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HVXTQ5Wb_Eg&feature=em-uploademail this video] about how to use this tool.

You can then upload this TM to be used in WFA.

[[File:Warning.png]] This tool is not managed by WFA in case there is any problem use the '''Help''' in the tool, the third tab, to report your problem. You can also sent an email to '''converterhelp@wordfast.com'''

=== Preview ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Preview|Preview]]'''

=== Transcheck ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Transcheck|Transcheck]]'''

=== Spellcheck ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Spellcheck|Spellcheck]]'''

=== Pretranslation ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.

Go to [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]] '''''Pre-translation''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to open the dialog:

[[File:Pretrans1.png]]

Configure how you want the pre-translation to run:
* Activate '''Fuzzy matches'''
* Set what to do when there is no match from the TM. For setting a MT check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Machine_translation|this]]'''
* Leverage segment scores. Make sure the owner of the document (translation agency or company) has agreed to leverage empty segments.

If your file is big and has many segments run pre-translation in background by clicking on '''Pre Translate in background''' so you can keep working in other things. Otherwise use '''Pre-translate''' button run pre-translation.
Ad the end of the process you'll get a report with the result.

[[File:Pretrans2.png]]

=== Offline Review Tool ===
Use Offline review tool to review a file outside Wordfast Anywhere using a bilingual file and then update the changes.

To get the bilingual file go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Offline review DOC'''''.

[[File:Ofrt11a.png]]

This will download a bilingual file like this.

[[File:ofrt2.png]]

[[File:Notice.png]] Read the disclaimer on the download window and the instructions at the top of the file.

[[File:Warning.png]] Remember to add the tags on the target column as you would do on any translation. '''''Missing tags''''' can cause problems when merging back the file into WFA.

After editing '''only''' the target segments an saving the file you can import it to be merged with the file in Wordfast Anywhere. To do this go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:mergetms16_menu.png]] '''''Merge Offline Review''''' button.

[[File:ofrt3.png]]

A report will be shown with the result of the merge.

[[File:ofrt4.png]]

=== Extract Frequents ===
Use [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]] '''''Extract Frequents''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to create anew file that will contain only the repeated segments of the document.

A first report is created showing the percentage of segments that have an occurrence greater than 2.

[[File:ExtractFrequents1.png]]

Set the '''minumum occurrence''' that you want to extract and click on '''Extract and Open''' to create a new file with the occurrence segments.

=== Go to WFP4 ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.
You can open your document in '''Wordfast Pro 4 Online''' by using [[File:About wordfast16.png]] '''''WFP4''''' button on '''''File''''' tab.

WFP4o will use several settings on WFA along with the TMs and glossaries, so all settings must be done on inside WFA before. Also bear in mind to save your work on WFP4o before switching back to WFA.

[[File:Wf4disclaimer.png]]

Read carefully the disclaimer dialog before clikcing in '''Continue to WFP4o'''.

=== File information ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.

Go to [[File:Modify Project16.png]] '''''File Info''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to open the dialog with information about the file:

[[File:Fileinfo.png]]

=== Split file ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''''This option is only available when the document is closed.'''''

You can split a file in 4 parts by using [[File:Split.png]] '''''Split''''' button on '''''File''''' tab.

[[File:Split1.png]]

For each part a txml file will be created with the corresponding part of the file. The name of the txml files will contain information about which part is. For instance '''_[1of2]''' means the file was splitted into 2 parts and that this file correspond to the first part.

By default files are splited in equally parts, but you can change this and set the boundaries that better suit you.

[[File:Split3.png]]

'''Downloading one of the splited parts will download a TXML file''', but you can choose to download also the entire file in the original format.

[[File:Split2.png]]

Use
[[File:Join.png]] '''''Join''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to put the parts together again. [[File:Warning.png]] '''''This option is only available when the document is closed.'''''

=== Share file ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''This option is only available when the document is closed and is selected from the list.'''

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Share is only possible between Wordfast Anywhere users.'''

You can share your document with '''several Wordfast Anywhere users'''. To do so go to [[File:Share.png]] '''''Share''''' on '''''File''''' tab.

[[File:Share3.png]]

Additional files can be added using '''''Add''''' button on the Document section of the dialogue. If the file belong to a package, all package documents will be added otherwise it will be all documents with the same source and target languages.

To start sharing click on '''''Add''''' button after the Document section to add a new guest. Repeat it to ad more guest users.

[[File:Share_addGuest2.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Guest email must be a valid Wordfast Anywhere account.'''

For each guest two properties can be chosen:
* '''''Share as read-only'''''. This means guest will only access the document in a read-only mode, but no edition will be allowed.
* '''''Keep online (not downloadable)'''''. This means guest will access the file but would not be allowed to download it.

Additionally, you can share a TM and/or glossary with the file.

To do it, use the buttons on the '''''Translation Memories''''' and '''''Glossaries''''' tabs
* '''''Linked to document''''' will add the corresponding TM/glossary associated to the document.
* '''''Add''''' will let you choose which TM/glossary with the same language pair you want to share
* '''''Remove''''' will revoke the share on the selected TM/glossary from the list.

Once guests are added, they are presented on a list on the main dialogue. Any guest will be allowed edit rights unless '''''Share as read-only''''' is check. Owner will always have edit rights.

[[File:Share_mainList2.png]]

Repeat this process to add more guests.

You can use '''''Duplicate''''' button to add a new guest with the same settings than a existing one. Use '''''Revoke''''' button to finish a share with a guest

Check '''''History''''' on the document to force the use of revisions in the document.

As owner and several guests can have edit rights '''a reservation system is used to ensure only one user can edit a segment at a time'''. When a user opens the document the free segments loaded in Document Panel will automatically reserved for him adding a green share icon at the end of the segment. Segments reserved by other users are shown with the same share icon but in red color.
'''The reservation of segments will end when the user closes the document'''.

[[File:Share_reserved.png]]

When a user opens a shared document that is being used by an other user a pop-up message is show to warn about that.

[[File:Share_message.png]]

Also a notification is send to the other working users that a new user has opened the document.

[[File:Share_notification.png]]

Jumping to the next block will release the previous segments and will reserve the new segments being loaded.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''There is no live update of the segments reserved by other users. Which means segments need to be refreshed manually on Document Panel by loading them again, for instance by jumping to a different block and back.'''

To help to know when a user closes the document and releases his segments, a notification is send to the other working users.

[[File:Share_notificationEnd.png]]

'''''To finish a share''''' with a guest owner users need to use '''''Revoke''''', and to remove all the shares use '''''Revoke all'''''. This is a button on the Share dialog ([[File:Share.png]] '''''Share''''' on '''''File''''' tab).

Guest users will not see the share dialogue. They should use [[File:Revoke.png]] '''''Revoke''''' on '''''File''''' tab to finish the share.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Remember Share/Revoke are only available when the document is closed.'''

=== Offline Mode ===
On those situations when there is an internet connection cut or when WFA server is unavailable, WFA will turn on '''Offline Mode'''.

'''Offline Mode''' lets you work offline. It allows you to translate the segments that are currently loaded on the ''Document Panel''.

The translated segments are stored locally and automatically committed to WFA server as soon as the connection is recovered.

If the TM you are using is writeable, TUs will be automatically updated from the document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Be aware that there will be some messages telling you about going in/out of Offline Mode and segments being saved. Some features will not be available during Offline Mode.

[[File:Warning.png]] This feature has nothing to do with Offline Review Tool (OFRT). For information about OFRT, check the index at the top of this Manual.

[[File:Warning.png]] We recommend not to close the browser till synchronization back is done.

= WFA Configuration =
== Features and Shortcuts ==

{|class="wikitable"
|'''Menu tab'''
|'''Feature'''
|'''Shortcut'''
|'''Icon'''
|'''Information'''
|-
|Translation
|Start translation / Next segment
|Alt+Down
|[[File:StartNext.png]]
|Starts a translation session by opening the currently selected segment / Commits the current segment to TM and opens the next segment.
|-
|Translation
|Previous segment
|Alt+Up
|[[File:Previous.png]]
|Commits the current segment to TM and opens the previous segment.
|-
|Translation
|Close & Commit
|Alt+End
|[[File:CloseSave.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment and committing it to the TM.
|-
|Translation
|Close
|Shift+Alt+End
|[[File:Close.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment without committing it to the TM.
|-
|Translation
|Close & Delete
|Alt+Delete
|[[File:Close restore.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment and deleting the target with any note. Do not commit to TM.
|-
|Translation
|Provisional segment
|F10
|[[File:Mark.png]]
|Marks a segment as provisional with a yellow Post-It.
|-
|Translation
|Copy Source
|Alt+Insert
|[[File:CopySource.png]]
|Copies the source segment over the target segment.
|-
|Translation
|Expand
|Alt+PgDn
|[[File:ExpandSeg.png]]
|Expands a segment, if it actually extends beyond the punctuation mark (wrong segmentation). Note that a segment cannot be extended beyond a paragraph mark, page break, tabulator, or table cell.
|-
|Translation
|Shrink
|Alt+PageUp
|[[File:ShrinkSeg.png]]
|Reverses any use of the Expand segment command or reduce the size of a segment.
|-
|Translation
|To Fuzzy
|Shift+Ctrl+PgDn
|[[File:TranslateUntilFuzzy.png]]
|Translates until a non-exact match is found.
|-
|Translation
|Toggle empty
|Ctrl+Alt+X
|[[File:Cleanup Project16.png]]
|Empty the target - remove the tags from the target - restore the original target.
|-
|Translation
|Auto Propagate
|
|[[File:autopropagate.png]]
|Auto propagate segment change through all the document for same source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Toggle Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Up
|[[File:dropdown.png]]
|Transforms all the terms in the source segment into placeables. If repeated, returns to the previous mode.
|-
|Translation
|Next Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Right
|[[File:Next_Placeable16.png]]
|Selects the next placeable element in the source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Copy Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Down
|[[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]]
|Places the selected transposable element from the source segment into the target segment, where the cursor is located (or replaces highlighted text in target segment).
|-
|Translation
|Previous Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Left
|[[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]]
|Selects the previous placeable element in the source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Next word
|Tab
|
|Places the subsequent source word with letter + Tab
|-
|Translation
|Previous word
|Shift+Tab
|
|Places the preceding source word with letter+Shift+Tab.
|-
|Translation
|Target Height
|Ctrl+Alt+T
|[[File:increase_target.png]]
|Increases the height of the target segment for easier viewing.
|-
|Wordfast Anywhere
|Wordfast setup
|Ctrl+Alt+W
|[[File:Setup.png]]
|Opens the Wordfast Anywhere general setup dialog.
|-
|Edit
|Find & Replace
|Ctrl+Alt+R
|[[File:FindReplace.png]]
|Find and replace in the document.
|-
|Edit
|Edit Source
|Ctrl+Alt+K
|[[File:EditSource16.png]]
|Used to make minor corrections to the source segment.
|-
|Edit
|Edit Note
|Ctrl+Alt+J
|[[File:Edit_Note16.png]]
|Allows you to create or edit a note.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 1
|Shift+Ctrl+1
|[[File:insert_c1.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 2
|Shift+Ctrl+2
|[[File:insert_c2.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 3
|Shift+Ctrl+3
|[[File:insert_c3.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Case Changer
|Shift+F3
|[[File:caseChanger.png]]
|Toggle between lowercase, uppercase, and capitalization.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|TMs and glossaries setup
|
|[[File:Preferences16round.png]]
|Opens the TMs and glossaries setup dialog.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Concordance search
|Ctrl+Alt+C
|[[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]]
|Performs a search in the TM and displays all segments containing the search term.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Glossary Search
|Ctrl+Alt+G
|[[File:GlossarySearch.png]]
|Search in the glossary for the word or phrase selected in the source segment.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Add term to glossary
|Ctrl+Alt+T
|[[File:TermEdit.png]]
|Pops up a glossary term entry form.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Copy TU
|Alt+right
|[[File:CopyTU.png]]
|Copy a TU from the TM panel to the target segment. If many, press many times, it will start by copying the second one assuming the first one is already copied. The TU can be a MT proposal.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Delete TU
|Ctrl+Alt+Backspace
|[[File:DeleteTU.png]]
|Delete from TM the current or selected TU visible in the TM panel.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Update TU
|
|[[File:force_tm_addtu.png]]
|Commits to TM the source and target segment as a new TU or update an existing one.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Force TM search
|
|[[File:force_tm.png]]
|Perform a direct search (without cache) in the TM.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Force MT
|
|[[File:force_mt.png]]
|Forces the translation of the segment by the configured MT engines like Google Translate / Microsoft Translator.
|-
|View
|Outline pane
|Ctrl+Alt+D
|[[File:panelOutline.png]]
|Closes or opens the Outline. The outline is a view of all the segments showing which ones are translated but also which ones have notes or are provisional.
|-
|View
|TM pane
|Ctrl+Alt+M
|[[File:panelTm.png]]
|Closes or opens the TM pane.
|-
|View
|Glossary pane
|Ctrl+Alt+H
|[[File:panelGlo.png]]
|Closes or opens the Glossary (Terminology) pane.
|-
|View
|Move next block
|Page Down
|[[File:moveNextScreen.png]]
|Move to the next block of document's content.
|-
|View
|Move previous block
|Page Up
|[[File:movePrevScreen.png]]
|Move to the previous block of document's content.
|-
|View
|First of Block
|Home
|[[File:move_first_seg_screen.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the first segment of the block.
|-
|View
|Last of Block
|End
|[[File:move_last_seg_screen.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the last segment of the page.
|-
|View
|First of Doc
|Ctrl+Home
|[[File:move_first_seg_doc.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the first segment of the document.
|-
|View
|Last of Doc
|Ctrl+End
|[[File:move_last_seg_doc.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the last segment of the document.
|}

== WFA Setup ==
The WFA Setup menu is accessible by the shortcut Ctrl+Alt+W or the [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab.

Six tabs are visible: General, TM rules, Shortcuts, Segmentation, Pandora's box and QA.

=== General tab ===
Several general settings can be don in this tab.

[[File:wfasetup1.png]]

==== Machine translation ====
Click on '''MT''' tab to access the ''Machine Translation'' settings.

[[File:wfasetup2.png]]

WFA gives you the ability to translate each segment by online translation services like Google Translate and Microsoft Translator. The translations proposed are not ever likely to be fully acceptable. However, by making a few small adjustments, you will be able to use them extensively in your translations.

[[File:Warning.png]] When using this service, the source segments that will return a translation are transmitted to Google and Microsoft. It is up to you whether or not to accept these translations; these companies are not made aware of your choice. However, be aware that sending the segments to Google and Microsoft may raise privacy issues between you and your customers.

Each MT engine has a window were to set it's settings. Bear in mind that some MT may require a personal ID or password.
* Use '''Add''' button to add a new MT.
* Use '''Edit''' the settings for the selected MT on the list.
* Use '''Remove''' will delete the selected MT on the list.
* Use '''Test''' to run a test on all the MTs with the active checkbox marked.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''To use a MT engine, it must be added to the list and with the "Active" checkbox marked'''.

On each MT engine window you can set its settings (i.e. the key or url). You can also set a particular values for
* ''Engine timeout'' as in some cases (i.e. small segments) the MT requires more time to get back with a result.
* ''Engine score'' value for each MT.
* ''Details'' for extra information about the MT like the list of available languages.
[[File:Warning.png]] Each MT engine has a different set of available languages.

Finally, there are several general options such as
* When to use the MT (when no TM match, when no TM full match, always)
* Remove tags before sending to MT.
* Use all available providers on ''force MT''.
* Do not copy MT proposition to target.
* Enable MT for review (May slow down the revision process)

===== Custom Machine translation =====

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Note:''' this section is '''DIY (Do It Yourself)'''. Our hotline cannot assist in the customization of an MT engine, because that requires knowledge of the remote provider's specifications. However, public discussion groups may offer help.

If your remote Machine Translation provider is not listed (as a provider tab), you can use '''Custom tab''' to create a custom connector for it. This is only possible if your MT provider's API is using a REST standard, and returns results in a JSON, or similar, format. That is the case with major MT providers currently available with WFC (Google, Microsoft, WorldLingo, deepL, MyMemory, etc.).

In WFA's Machine Translation setup, go to the "Custom MT" tab.

[[File:CustomMT.JPG]]

Note the various elements:
* URL: Tells WFA which is the url of the MT provider with the needed parameters.
** {ss} will be replaced with the source segment to be translated. This parameter must be present.
** {sl} and {tl} will be replaced with your given source and target language codes.
** {key} will be replaced with the given API key
* API Key: Some MT providers need a personal key, this is the place to add it.
* Source language: Source language of the text, it corresponds to the {sl} parameter in the URL.
* Target Language: Target language which will be the text translated to, it corresponds to the {tl} parameter in the URL.
* POST: includes parameters that should be used with the POST method, concatenated like in the URL format. If the parameters needs to be in JSON format, choose the way how to write it (either URL encoded text to convert to JSON either a direct JSON string).
* HEADER: includes parameters that need to be in the header of the request. The format is param:value. Put one parameter per line.
* Json key: Some MT providers return the translated text in a parameter (translation, translatedTex...etc), this tells WFA how to spot the returned translated segment.

Once all the elements are set you can test the connection by using the '''Test''' button. Optionally you can change the text to be tested on the text box next to the button.

Let's assume your preferred MT provider is WorldLingo and we create a custom engine for it. You explore WorldLingo's API documentation. It essentially boils down to a query URL, with parameters. On Custom tab you can use:

* URL: https://www.worldlingo.com/S000.1/api?wl_data={ss}&wl_srclang={sl}&wl_trglang={tl}&wl_password=secret
* API Key: Empty, as no API Key is needed.
* Source language: en.
* Target Language: fr.
* Json key: Empty.

'''Practical example:'''

Opening a browser, you begin by testing the URL. In the following example, the raw URL was customized for an English-to-French language pair, to translate "Hello World". Your real URL will look different, the following is an example based on WorldLingo:

::: ''http://www.worldlingo.com/S000.1/api?wl_data=Hello%20world&wl_srclang=en&wl_trglang=fr&wl_password=secret''

You can try pasting the above URL into a browser's address bar. If things go well, the site will send a reply:

::: ''Bonjour le monde''

Other MT providers may use a more complex JSON reply, in which case you specify the JSON key so that WFA can identify the result. Here the key is "translation" so you would use Json key => translation

::: ''{"responseData":{"translation":"Bonjour le monde","match":1} }''

Your MT provider may require more parameters, such as a secret ID key (aka an API key), or other elements, in which case, you should hard-code those in the URL.

==== Fonts ====
Font Size: this setting only affects the font size on the screen, your document will keep all its original layout unchanged. The available sizes are selected from the drop-down list.

Font Family: this setting only affects the fonts displayed on the screen, your document will keep its entire original layout unchanged. You can specify a specific font or a font family, for example Arial, Helvetica, Sans Serif (sans serif font, default) or Times New Roman, Times, Serif (seriffed font).

==== Target segment selection ====
Positions the mouse pointer at the opening of the segment, with or without selection.

# Cursor at start – no text selected, cursor positioned at the beginning of the segment.
# Cursor at end – no text selected, cursor positioned at the end of the segment. This is the default setting.
# Segment selected – The target segment is entirely selected.

==== Fuzzy Threshold in % ====
Percentage of similarity required for a TU contained in the TM to be suggested as a translation of the source segment. If several TUs meet this criterion, the TU with the highest percentage will be offered. In this case you can select the subsequent TUs with [[File:CopyTU.png]] '''''Copy TU''''' button on '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' tab or using the corresponding shortcut (Alt + Right).

The default percentage (75%) is recommended for most translations, but in some cases it may be appropriate to change it. For example, if you are translating short segments containing only 3 words, a fuzzy threshold of 75% will only offer those TUs which are identical (100%) and those where two words are identical, i.e. 66%, will never be proposed.

==== Record Revisions ====
Check this option if you want to save a record of the changes on translated segments.

==== Enable Auto-Suggest ====
Check this option if you want to get suggestions while you type on a translated segment.

Auto-Suggest can be configured in '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.238_Configure_Auto-Suggest|Pandora's box #7]]''' to add or remove items.

==== Tab behavior ====
Check this option if you want to use click or hover for triggering events on Top Menu bar.

==== Enable auto-hide buttons ====
Check this option to make toop toolbar buttons hide automatically.

==== Enable Segment Tool Bar ====
Check this option to enable the Segment Tool Bar on Horizontal and Vertical views. You can customize it on Pandora's Box #15

=== TM rules tab ===

Here you have the opportunity to establish penalties to be taken into account when calculating the similarity between the TM and the segment to be translated. In other words, the percentage of similarity is reduced, where applicable, according to the figure indicated for each of the following rules. Some rules allow fractional reductions, but this only applies to the calculation: the final reduction will be the sum of all penalties rounded to the nearest whole number. If the percentage of similarity to the TU, reduced to the sum of the penalties, is less than the specified Fuzzy Threshold percentage, it will not be proposed.

[[File:wfasetup3.png]]

Penalties for the following rules are activated only if the box on their right is checked. They apply only to the TUs proposed by the TM or VLTM, not from machine translation, which has its own non-modifiable penalty.

* ''Case penalty'': if there is a difference in case (upper and lower case) between the TU and the segment to be translated, WFA can ignore this and show 100% similarity. But you can assign a penalty of between 1 and 5 points for the difference in case. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 1.

* ''Non literal penalty'': this penalty detects differences due to special characters such as dashes, quotation marks, apostrophes, punctuation and whitespace characters (non-breaking space, horizontal and vertical tabs, ...). There exist several codes for representing each of these special characters. WFA can ignore these and show 100% similarity; otherwise a penalty is calculated using the following method: every time a difference is encountered, it adds the value of the first parameter (0.25, 0.50 or 0.75), which by default is 0.50. The second parameter sets out what the minimum value of the penalty is (default is 1). Since the penalty is necessarily an integer, if the value of the penalty is 0.25 and there is only one in the segment to be translated, the minimum is not reached. Finally, the third parameter sets the maximum penalty to be assigned, even if the addition of all the differences of this rule exceeds that figure (10 by default). This rule is selected by default with a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 10.

* ''Tag penalty'': this rule works exactly the same way as the previous one, but applied to the tags (markers that represent the bits of code used to format the document <1>). This rule is selected by default with a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 10.

* ''Alignment user penalty'': the TUs found in a memory imported into WFA produced by an alignment tool and having the identifier "TALIGN!" may be assigned a penalty from 1 to 10. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 3. Please note, TUs from an alignment may not have the "TALIGN!" identifier.

* ''MT user penalty'': the TUs found in a memory imported into WFA produced by machine translation and having the identifier "MT!" may be penalised from 1 to 10. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 25. Please note, TUs from a machine translation may not have the "MT!" identifier.

* ''Multiple translation penalty'': In the case of a source segment with multiple 100% matches, i.e. several TUs having the same source segment but different translated segments, a penalty may be applied to warn of a possible choice between translations. This scenario is rare and no penalty is assigned by default.

* ''Attribute penalty'': attributes are identifiers that are associated with a particular TU at the time that it is recorded in the memory. There are five possible attributes: the first is fixed (it identifies the user who posted the TU), while the other four can be user defined. In general, translators use attribute no. 1 to define the subject of the text to be translated and the attribute no. 2 to define the client who owns the text. The other two attributes are free to be used for anything else. For example, if the proposed TU is from a text whose subject is "electronics", it will be penalised if the subject of the text to be translated is "medicine." In other words if the TU is 100% identical to the segment to be translated, it will be displayed with a percentage similarity of 98% if the penalty applied is 2 points.

The penalty can be a number from 1 to 5, valid for the four attributes. By default this rule is not active.

If you use a TM uploaded from Wordfast Classic or Pro, the existing attributes of the TU may be penalised.

=== Shortcuts tab ===

You can set the shortcuts you want to use.

[[File:wfasetup4.png]]

WFA shortcuts are not immutable. If some of them do not suit you, you can reassign them. To do this, click on the '''''upd''''' link of the shortcut you wish to change.

[[File:wfasetup5.png]]

In this example, corresponding to the first shortcut, you see the name of the command and a drop-down list. Choose '''None''' if you want to remove the shortcut or choose another from the list. Then click '''''Update''''' to confirm or '''''Cancel''''' to dismiss the dialog. Repeat for all the shortcuts that you want to change. The new keyboard shortcuts will be displayed.

The last four commands have no shortcuts; however, you can assign shortcuts to them if you wish.

If after modifying several shortcuts you want to return them to their original state, click '''''Restore default shortcuts'''''.

Finally, click '''''Save''''' settings to confirm any changes or '''''Cancel''''' to dismiss the dialog.

=== Segmentation tab ===
This tab defines the rules for segmentation.

[[File:Segmentation111.JPG]]

* ''Segmentation style'': this block determines how the segmentation will be performed. If you choose ''Wordfast /Trados segmentation'' (default) the standard end-of-segment markers are defined as follows: full stop, colon, question mark, exclamation mark and tab (Tab). You can add other characters as well as space (Space), non-breaking space (NBSP), carriage return (CR) and line feed (LF). You can add as markers: a number followed by an end of segment marker (A number Followed by ESM ends a segment – default), an end of segment marker not followed by a space (An ESM without a trailing space ends a segment) and an end of segment marker followed by a space followed by a lowercase letter (An ESM followed by a space followed by a lower-case letter ends a segment). Although you can change these markers, it is recommended to maintain them in such manner that if you share your translations and your memories with other translators, all will follow the same rule.

[[File:Warning.png]] Segmentation is performed at the time of uploading the document to WFA. You cannot therefore change the rules applying to that document during the course of its translation.

The other segmentation rules that you can choose are:
* ''Break segmentation'': segmentation is done according to the end of paragraph character (carriage return) or the tag for HTML files.
* ''Idiom segmentation'': segmentation follows the rules of the software program Idiom.
* ''SRX segmentation'': the segmentation is done by using a previously uploaded file. It follows the rules of the SRX standard, which has become a standard like TMX for formatting memories and TBX for formatting glossaries. In the case of SRX segmentation, abbreviations are also included.

* ''TM compatibility'': You must ensure the compatibility according to the memory you have uploaded or the subsequent use of your documents. By default, WFA's memory is compatible with that of Wordfast Classic and Pro (Assume Wordfast TM). If this is your choice, you can also specify if you have old projects made with Wordfast Classic or Pro (check Legacy TM created by old projects). You can also establish that the memory was created by Trados (Assume Trados TM), even adding that it was created by Trados and Word (TM created by Trados + Word); by Idiom (Assume Idiom TM) or by SDLX (Assume SDLX TM).

*''Abbreviations'': Abbreviations end with a full stop, which WFA then interprets as an end of segment marker. To avoid this, WFA allows you to create and manage a list of abbreviations. While WFA already has lists for some languages, others are empty – the user must provide the necessary information. The abbreviations are entered into the text box, one after another, without spaces and separated by a comma. Once updated, save your list by clicking on Save the language. Repeat for each language that you translate.

=== Pandora's box tab ===
This tab has many different settings. Some of this settings will open a new dialog.

[[File:wfasetup7.png]]

==== #1 PC, tablet and smartphone modes ====
Use this mode if you are using a mobile device. The segment toolbar is enlarged; local file access is disabled.

==== #2 Real time collaboration ====
Real time collaboration disables data caching. This forces the TM search before you open a segment, causing a response delay. Avoid using this mode unless sharing a TM and if the TU updates need to be shared immediately.

==== #3 Document file name convention ====
Customize your document name for download by adding a prefix and/or a suffix.

==== #4 Special characters insertion ====
Configure the 7 special characters insertion of the Edition tab.

==== #5 Configure online dictionaries ====
Configure URLs for 2 online search engines.

* Click "Add" to add a new dictionary.
* After filling the "Friendly name" and "Url" correctly you need to use "Test" to check it works fine.
* Use "Save" to add the dictionary to the list. Bear in mind that if the URL already exists it cannot be added.

If all worked fine, the list should have been updated and your dictionary available to be used.

The list does not use "Friendly name" to sort the dictionaries, so you need to check all the list to find the one you added.

In order to use one dictionary you need to select it from the list and save the settings.

==== #6 Multiple Ctrl+Alt+Down toggles placeable ====
Use this feature to toggle between copy the target term, copy the source term, or leave blank.

==== #7 Configure Auto-Suggest ====
Auto-suggest is activated at the '''General''' tab when clicking on [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab.

On this section of Pandora's Box is where you can '''configure which suggestions will Auto-suggest show'''.

[[File:AutoSuggest1.JPG]]

'''Auto-suggest can show different items''' such as: Glossary matches, tags, word from with a capital letter, numbers, file path, email addresses, URLs, chunks of Machine Translation, date and number conversion, text in parentheses (), text in braces {}, bracketed text [], word containing special character and unit conversion.

On the left there is a combo box to select the number of typed characters that will trigger auto-suggest to show up.

For '''date and number conversion''' there is a sub dialog, that can be opened by clicking on the [[File:Edit.png]] button on the left.

[[File:AutoSuggest2.JPG]]

Here you can set how dates and numbers will be converted and shown in the auto-suggested text.

For '''dates''' you can choose a different format and separator. For instance source ''2015.04.01'' could be converted to ''01/04/2015'' on target.

For '''numbers''' you can choose a different group and decimal separator. For instance source ''123.456,00'' could be converted to ''123 456.00'' on target.

==== #8 Configure Filters ====
Configure conversion of documents from their original format to the internal editor format.

For some files you can configure some parameters that will tell the filter what to do for some situations such as translate comments or sheet names.

You can make this configuration for: '''xls, xlsx, ppt, pptx, doc, docx, rtf, htm, html, mif, idml, xml (Text based files)'''.

[[File:Pandora9.JPG]]

On this section there are also 3 settings that will apply to any file.

* '''Editor format'''. To choose which type of '''bilingual file (TXML or TXLF)''' the filter should produce.[[File:Warning.png]] '''''The download bilingual file will be of the type used when the file was uploaded.''''' For example if the file was uploaded using TXML, the bilingual download will be TXML. A file cannot be uploaded using one type (TXML) and download the bilingual file of the other type (TXLF). The workaround is to change the type and upload the file again.

* '''Extract numbers'''. To define the filter action on source segments that contain only numbers.

** ''all'': Extracts all segments with only numbers for translation
** ''time_date_measure'': Extracts only segments with time and date
** ''none'': Does not extract any segments that contain only numbers

* '''Segmentation on break'''. To enable segmentation on line breaks.

==== #9 Configure double click to open/close a segment ====
Configure opening/closing actions on a segment by double clicking in the document panel. This is always active for mobile plain text mode.

[[File:Pandora101.png]]

==== #10 Configure TM Search ====
Set the timeout for searches. After the timeout, the search is cancelled and returns nothing. The default value is 4 seconds.

==== #11 Copy source when no TM match and no MT proposition ====
Copy source to target when no TM match and no MT proposition.

==== #12 Do not show empty paragraph line in Classic view ====
Do not copy MT proposition to target.

==== #13 Hide segment's IDs column on the Table view ====
Do not copy MT proposition to target.

==== #14 Custom Tab settings ====
Use this mode if you are using a mobile device. The segment toolbar is enlarged; local file access is disabled.

==== #15 Customize Segment Toolbar ====
Dialog to choose which buttons will be placed on Segment toolbar. Segment toolbar is enabled on General tab.

==== #16 Copy untranslatable to target automatically and open next segment ====
Define what will be considered an "Untranslatable segment" which will be copied to target automatically and open next segment

=== QA tab ===
Set here the criteria that will be used to conduct an audit of quality when doing a '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Transcheck|Transcheck]]'''

[[File:wfasetup8.png]]

There are several criteria that can be checked, some of which can also ''be checked while translating'' (by using the second checkbox column under '''While Translating''' title).

Here is a short description:

* '''Source & target lengths''': Compares the character count between the source and target segments. You can set the minimum and maximum % of allowed character count for the target segment.

* '''Empty target''': Checks for an empty target segment. This is always checked while translating.

* '''Numerical''': Checks that the numerical values between the source and target segments are correct.

* '''Placeable''': Checks if the tags are copied correctly to the target segments. This is always checked while translating.

* '''Forbidden chars''': Checks if the target segment includes forbidden characters. You can set the list of forbidden characters that should not be included in the target segment.

* '''Punctuations''': Checks for consistency in punctuation between source and target segments. You can set the punctuation marks that should not be included in the target segment. [[File:notice.png]] The transcheck punctuation only works on end of segmentation punctuation.

* '''Untranslatable''': Compares the source and target segments to check if the untranslatable content is consistent. You can set the untranslatable text that must be retained in the target segment.

* '''Copied source''': Checks for untranslated text when copied source option is used.

* '''Blacklists''': Checks if the target segment includes blacklisted terms. You can set blacklisted terms that should not be included in the target segment. [[File:notice.png]] The blacklisted term list must be a tab delimited file (bad term + tabulation + proposed term).

* '''Terminology''': Checks if all term translations from an active glossary are used in the target of a segment. You can enable or disable Ignore Case option.

* '''First word capitalization''': Checks if the first letter of the segment is capitalized.

* '''Edited exact match''': Checks if any exact match segments from the TM have been edited.

* '''Unedited fuzzy''': Checks if any fuzzy match segments from the TM have been left unedited.

* '''Source Consistency''': Checks consistency between source segments if the target is repeated.

* '''Target consistency''': Checks consistency between target segments if the source is repeated.

== Profile Configuration ==
Go to [[File:User profile.png]] '''''User Profile''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' menu to see information about your account and change some settings of your profile.

[[File:Profileconfig1.png]]

=== Change email ===
Use this option to change the email of your account.

[[File:Profileconfig2.png]]

=== Change password ===
Check the [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_change_my_password Wordfast Anywhere FAQ] for more information.

=== Delete account ===
Use this option to remove your account from Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:Profileconfig4.png]]

Wordfast Anywhere FAQ

2022-02-03T07:51:53Z

Remiandre: /* How can I add a new Translation Memory? */

{{Languages}}
[[Category:Wordfast Anywhere]]

= GENERAL =

== Cannot log in to Wordfast Anywhere ==
Check the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Cannot_log_in_to_Wordfast_Anywhere Cannot log in to Wordfast Anywhere]''' section on the Start Guide.

== How can I change my password ==
The steps to change the password are the same ones than when you forget it.

You will find the instructions on the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Get_your_password_back Get your password back]''' section on the Start Guide.

== Wordfast Anywhere Manuals ==
Wordfast Anywhere have a couple of manuals
* '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide Wordfast Anywhere 6 Start Guide]'''. Some basic information on how to start to use WFA.
* '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual Wordfast Anywhere 6 Manual]'''. All the features detailed.

== Why I get email notifications about my document or account going to be deleted (Termination of Service) ==
There are some reasons why you might get a notification about documents or account going to be deleted:

'''Accounts''': If an account '''has not been accessed for six months''', the account's owner will receive a notification that her/his account will be deleted in 20 days. To cancel the upcoming account termination, simply log once into your Wordfast Anywhere account. If no access is made to the account within 10 days, a second notification will be emailed. If no access is made within 10 days of the second notification, the account will be deleted, together with its content (documents, TMs, glossaries).

'''Documents''': Documents that '''have not been accessed, edited, or used for more than 3 months''' will be deleted at the end of the 4th month, after two emailed warnings.

For more information check our '''[https://www.freetm.com/jsp/terms.jsp Terms of use]''' page.

== Can I get help and support? ==
Sure, this are the different ways:
* First look on this FAQ page, on the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide Wordfast Anywhere 6 Start Guide]''' or in the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual Wordfast Anywhere 6 Manual]'''.
* If you have NOT logged, in click in the [[File:Contacticon.png|border]] icon.
* If you have logged, please use the [[File:Feedback16.png|border]] '''''Support/Report''''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' menu.
* You can also post at wordfast-anywhere@groups.io for the community help. Check the discussion group at [https://wordfast-anywhere.groups.io wordfast-anywhere.groups.io]

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Technical support is only in English'''

= DOCUMENT =
== How can I fix a document when download failed? ==
There are many complex reasons that make a download to fail.

'''Check first the error message'''. If it indicates a segment or a segment range, check it first carefully. If the segment indicated in the error message looks fine, the problem may be on a different segment.

If nothing seem to work, you can restore the document following the steps on the section '''Restore the document'''.

Here are the most common causes of downloading problems:

=== '''Check Segmentation settings''' ===
Check there is a segmentation style set on Segmentation tab on Setup settings.( [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab).
If there is none, check one options for example "Wordfast".

=== '''Tag differences''' ===
'''How to detect it:''' The file does not download, the file downloads but some text is missing, the file downloads but styles are wrong.

Differences on the formatting tags (<1>, <2>) between source and target segment can make the file filter aligner have difficulties to build up the translated document.

Check there are no ''segments with tag difference'' using one of this options:
# Click on [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button on '''File''' tab to get a report. Check if there are any ''segments with tag difference''. Use '''''Show Outline''''' [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button on '''View''' tab to go straight to one segment.
# Click on [[File:FindReplace.png]] '''''Find & Replace''''' button on '''Edit''' tab. Go to ''Miscellaneous'' tab and run a ''Tag difference'' search. Segments with tag differences will be listed.

If you find segments with tag differences, make sure:
# There is no target tag missing that exists on source. For example [<1>text text<2>] on source but [text text<2>] on target.
# The target tag order is the same than source tag order. For example [<1>text text<2>] on source should also be [<1>text text<2>] on target, being [<2>text text<1>] is wrong.
# The target tag content should be identical with the source tag. You can see the content of the tag when the mouse is over it.

[[File:Warning.png]] We '''do not recommend to use copy/paste or drag and drop''' to copy the tags as it can copy more than the eye can see and be problematic. It is better to use the the auto-suggest feature with tags (whenever you want to add a tag just type < and the list of tags from source will be proposed for selection) or the [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]] '''Copy Placeable''' on '''Translation''' tab.

=== '''Re-segmentation''' ===
'''How to detect it:''' The file does not download, the file does not download and the error message contains ''error aligning segment #'' but segment # is fine. (Usually is ''error aligning segment 1'')

A too much use of re-segmentation with the [[File:ShrinkSeg.png]] '''Shrink''' or [[File:Expand_Segment16.png]] '''Expand''' tools can make the file filter aligner have difficulties to build up the translated document because the segments from the original source file are too different from the re-segmented file.

[[File:Warning.png]] A warning when the use of '''re-segmentation is over the 5%''' of the document is shown while translating to inform that it has been used in excess and might cause problems when downloading. Though depending on the number of segments of the document even '''a 1% can be problematic'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Mouse-over the file name''' to see the "number of segments" and the "Initial segments".

Segmentation problems when uploading a file can be improved by creating or completing the abbreviations list of your source language before starting translation. Click on '''''Setup''''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab and got to ''Segmentation'' tab.

'''Download can be solved''' by uploading again the source file (a copy) and '''without any re-segmentation use the same TM to pre-translate the file'''. Complete the untranslated segments before downloading. Before uploading the copy of the file, it is good to make sure the TM is updated with the problematic file TUs (Update TM from doc).

=== '''Segments on Segment History''' ===
'''How to detect it:''' The file does not download and the error message contains ''error aligning segment #'' but segment # is fine. (Usually is ''error aligning segment 1'')

When Segment history is used and there are too many segments saved in the history it might cause trouble when downloading the file due to the big amount of information to be processed.

'''Download can be solved''' by using [[File:delete_revisions.png]]: '''Delete history''' on '''Edit''' tab for one segment or
'''remove all segment history from document''' on '''''File''''' tab => [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button for all the document.

=== '''Excel File limitations''' ===
'''Excel files (XLS, XLSX)''' have some specific rules on the worksheet which the translated text must follow.

When working with '''Excel files (XLS, XLSX)''' check this restrictions when it comes to renaming a worksheet:
# A worksheet name '''cannot be blank'''.
# A worksheet name '''cannot be repeated'''. That means that each worksheet name must be different. The error message would be something like this: '''''Error on segment 1. Problem aligning document. Segment id: XXX The same worksheet name already exists''''', where XXX would be the problematic segment that needs to be fixed.
# A worksheet name '''cannot exceed 31 characters''' in length. That means worksheet name must be reduced to less than 31 characters. The error message would be something like this: '''''Error on segment 1...->The translation of the Excel Sheet name(s) in Segment/s [XXX] exceed 31 characters, which is not allowed in Excel. Please reduce the text's length and start again.''''', where XXX would be the problematic segment that needs to be fixed. You could found the number of characters of a segment at the bottom status bar next to the TM information.
# On a worksheet name the following '''characters cannot be used \ / ? : * [ ] '''.That means these characters must be removed from that segment. The error message would be something like this: '''''Error on segment 1...->The translation of the Excel Sheet name(s) in Segment/s [XXX] contains forbidden characters, which is not allowed in Excel. Check the name does not contain ?*:[]/\''''', where XXX would be the problematic segment that needs to be fixed.

=== '''Translate hyperlink (URL)''' ===
'''How to detect it:''' Only a part of the file is downloaded but no error is shown. The last segment on the downloaded file is the previous one to a segment that is just a URL (Usually on DOCX)

When uploading a file some settings are applied, one of this is to '''Translate hyperlink value'''. Some times this creates problems when aligning the file to be downloaded. The downloaded file seems ''cut'' just on the segment with the URL.

'''Download can be solved''' changing the settings and uploading the file again. Follow this steps:
#Go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab > [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button > '''''Pandora's box #8''''' [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters More information]
#Go to '''doc, docx, rtf''' tab.
#Uncheck '''Translate hyperlink value'''.
#Save the settings.
#Upload the file again.
#Pre-translate using the same TM.
#Download.

=== '''Corrupted File''' ===
'''How to detect it:''' The file does not download, or just downloads a part of the file but no error is shown. (Usually on DOCX, XLSX and PPTX files)

WFA checks the file when it is uploaded to detect if it is corrupted to prevent it is uploaded. If the file manage to skip detection it will not download because the problem comes from the source file.

When the problem is coming from a '''corrupted source''' file. Here is a way to recover your translation with a new file:
# Do not delete the file you are trying to download (corrupted-file) or you'll loose all the work.
# Download the bilingual file of the document having problem (corrupted-file), using '''''File > [[File:Save16.png]] Download > Bilingual''''' ([https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Download +info]).
# On your local PC, open your original file(corrupted-file) and use "Save as" to make a copy with a different name and format (copy-file). For example if corrupted-file is a DOCX use "Save as>Word 97-2003" to make a DOC copy-file.
# Upload this copy of the file (copy-file) to Wordfast Anywhere.
# Try to download the new file (copy-file) immediately by clicking in '''''Download''''' button on '''File''' tab and choose '''Translated document/s'''. If download do not work, you need to review the file because there is some problem in it, and do again steps 4 and 5 for this file.
# When the new file (copy-file) can be downloaded, you need to merge it with the previously saved bilingual file (step 2), using '''''File > [[File:Mergetms16.png]] Merge bilingual''''' ([https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Merging_TXML_files +info]).
## Check ''Merge an existing document'' and click on the new file(copy-file) from the list to select it.
## Click on the '''''Upload''''' button and browse your local disk to find the bilingual file (step 2).
## Click on the '''''Submit''''' button to start the upload and merge, then wait the report window.
## The file will load in the editor and a report will be shown. Close the Merge dialog window.

=== '''Restore a document''' ===
If your case does not seem to fit in any of the previous cases, there is a way to restore the document. Here are the steps to follow:

# Save the bilingual file ('''''File > [[File:Save16.png]] Download > Bilingual''''' [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Download +info] )
# Upload a copy of the original file and try to download it to be sure the file is fine.
# Merge the previously saved bilingual file with the newly uploaded copy of the original file ('''''File > [[File:Mergetms16.png]] Merge bilingual''''' [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Merging_TXML_files +info])
# Read the report and try to download.
# Complete the untranslated segments.

=== '''Help and support''' ===
For more information check the '''Wordfast Anywhere Manuals''' section.

To have our support check the '''Can I get help and support?''' section.

== Why do I get a zip file when downloading? ==
When downloading a file, there are some reasons why you can get a compressed to ZIP format (*.zip) file instead of the original source file extension:
* The size of the document is greater than 10 megabyte.
* The file name contains some special characters (for instance a space) that cannot be used as a web name for download.
* You chose "Send file to email" or "Create file URL".
* You requested to download a PDF version of the file.

All this situations may create some havoc on our server file system or when attaching the file to be send by email.
To prevent that, we use zip files as a container to be sure there will be no naming problem.
We also keep the original name of the file inside the zip, so file name is not changed.

'''To open a zip file''', '''[https://www.wikihow.com/Open-a-Zip-File here]''' are some ways to do it.
You can also use tools like '''WinRar''' or '''7-zip''' on Windows and '''The Unarchiver''' on Mac.

== Why do I get a txlf bilingual file instead of a txml bilingual file? ==
On September 2018 WFA updated the filters used to convert any document into a bilingual file. By default the bilingual file type used is TXLF.

In case you need to work with a TXML bilingual file type you can change this default setting. To do so, you need to go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab > [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button > '''''Pandora's box #8'''''

[[File:Warning.png]] '''''The download bilingual file will be of the type used when the file was uploaded.''''' For example if the file was uploaded using TXML, the bilingual download will be TXML. A file cannot be uploaded using one type (TXML) and download the bilingual file of the other type (TXLF). The workaround is to change the type ([https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters More information]) and upload the file again.

== Why do I get a bilingual file (txml, txlf, xlf, xliff, sdlxliff) when downloading a Translated document? ==
When using '''''File''''' tab > [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button > '''''Translated document/s''''' you'll get the translated version of the source document in the same file type.

That means if you uploaded a DOCX file, the translated file will be also a DOCX file.

If you uploaded a XLS file, the translated file will be also a XLS file.

If you uploaded a TXML file, the translated file will be also a TXML file.

If you uploaded a SDLXLIFF file, the translated file will be also a SDLXLIFF file.

And so on.

Txml, txlf, xlf, xliff and sdlxliff are bilingual files, so if you upload them the translated file will be of the same type because Wordfast Anywhere cannot convert them to the file type of the source document from where they where extracted.

Converting a bilingual file back to the original file type should be done with the tool which did the first conversion and with the original file as it will also be needed.

== If I cannot download the translated document, is it possible to have at least the translated segments to copy/paste them? ==
Yes, you can download the file in 'Text only' format.
* Go to '''File''' tab
* Click on '''''Download''''' button
* Choose '''Unformatted text''' from the list, and click '''''OK''''
* Choose one of the downloading options and click '''''OK'''''

The text will be downloaded in a text file without formatting.

== Can I download a Wordfast Classic-compatible bilingual document file? ==
This is possible for a MS-Word document (*.doc, *.docx).
* Go to '''File''' tab
* Click on '''''Download''''' button
* Choose '''Bilingual DOC original''' from the list, and click '''''OK''''
* Choose one of the downloading options and click '''''OK'''''

== When I am about to download the file, a dialog box says that some non translated segments remain - how can we go back to them? ==
There are two ways to go to the non translated segments.
# Use '''Outline'''.
#* Click on '''''Show/Hide Outline''''' button on '''View''' tab.
#* Translated segments are displayed with a green square and non translated ones with a grey square.
# Use '''Find & Replace'''.
#* Click on '''''Find & Replace''''' button on '''Edit''' tab.
#* Go to '''Miscellaneous''' tab
#* Choose '''Untranslated''' and click on '''''Find''''' button.
#* Untranslated segments will be search and result will be displayed on a list. To view the list use the [[File:MoveNextScreen.png]] button.

== What can I do when a document upload failed? ==
There are many complex reasons that make a upload to fail.

Usually the file has some problem that makes the filter unable to extract the bilingual file from it.

'''Check first the error message'''. You might get any clue of what is happening to the file.

Here are the most common causes of downloading problems:

'''Check Segmentation settings'''

Check there is a segmentation style set on Segmentation tab on Setup settings.( [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab).
If there is none, check one options for example "Wordfast".

'''Filter settings'''

Set the filter settings to default and try again.
You can find the filter settings on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab > [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button > '''''Pandora's box #8''''' [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters More information]

'''Hyperlinks'''

Sometimes there are hyperlinks on the file that make havoc on the filter. Uncheck them and try again. This is common with MS Office files.
#Go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab > [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button > '''''Pandora's box #8''''' [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters More information]
#Go to document type tab.
#Uncheck '''Translate hyperlink value'''.
#Save the settings.
#Upload the file again.

'''DOCX, XLSX, PPTX'''

Sometimes the latest version of the MS Office files (extension ends in X) have some style or property that is not of the liking of the filter.
Use "Save as" option on MS Office to save a 97-2003 version of the file and try to upload it again.

== How can I upload a PDF document? ==
PDF files can not be uploaded directly to WFA because they contains images of text, rather than actual text.
But they can be converted into Word, which can be uploaded into WFA.

Just upload the PDF document (as any other document) and follow the instructions on the disclaimer which basically are:
# Download a Word version of the file using the button at the bottom of the disclaimer.
# Review it to be sure the conversion is fine.
# Finally upload the word version to be translated.

Once the document has been translated you'll be able to download it as PDF using the download options.

[[File:Warning.png]] PDF to Word conversion process may take some time (up to 10 minutes) depending on the size and content of the PDF, be patient.

[[File:Warning.png]] The conversion process is complex and depends on the quality of the PDF and how the PDF was built.

[[File:Warning.png]] PDF that can be edited, PDF that have any password protection or PDF that have some security restrictions in them cannot be converted because permissions are needed.

== Wordfast Anywhere cannot upload my MS-Office file, why? ==
Sometimes the original file can be in a corrupted state.
* Open the file and save it under a new name.
* Try also to save it under a newer version like from *.doc to *.docx.

== Can I upload and translate a pre-segmented document file (pre-segmented or pre-translated with Wordfast Classic)? ==
At the moment, it is only possible for TXML files. For all other files, it is not possible, Wordfast Anywhere accepts only cleaned documents.
An alternative would be to clean up a copy of your segmented document in order to create a memory.
Then, you can upload the cleaned document and the memory.

== What shall I do with the red number inside a segment? ==
The red numbers are tags representing a formatting in the original document.
Avoid removing them and try to put them properly in the target segment.
This is a simple alternative to a fully WYSIWYG display of the document.

== How can I recover a document that has been accidentally deleted? ==
There is no direct way to recover a deleted document.
But there is a workaround:
* Upload again the source document
* Pre-translate it using the same TM that was used on the deleted cocument

== How do I use FireFox spellcheck for my language? ==
You need to install at least the dictionary of your language. See details in this [https://youtu.be/na19XZ8QQXg video]

== Why I don't see all the document? What <Beginning of block> and <End of block> mean? ==
If the file is long, it is loaded in blocks. To fasten the application, a document may be partially loaded.

In that case, the document chunk is marked with 2 of the following tags:
* <Beginning of file>
* <Beginning of block>
* <End of block>
* <End of file>
A block is a chunk of document, not corresponding with a page or any existing subdivision.

When translating, the next sentences are added bit by bit to the initially loaded block of sentences.
Each time a segment is modified, the document is saved on the server. So don't worry, if you cannot visualize all your document.

You can navigate through the document using buttons in '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#View_Tab View Tab]''' and shortcuts.

= TM =
== How can I change the TM language pair? ==
'''Wordfast Anywhere document now belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a project.'''

Each language pair has one or more associated TMs and/or glossaries, and each document added in a language pair is linked automatically to those TMs and glossaries.
You can choose to upload documents for one language pair, or for all language pairs in a project.

Selecting TMs and/or glossaries is done when setting up a language pair in the project setup. It can also be done, as before, when changing TMs and glossaries for a selected document using the ''TMs and glossaries'' button in the File menu.

A global TM and Glossaries setup dialog is now located on ''wordfast anywhere'' menu and used only for management (create, add, upload, merge, edit, download, delete... ), no more for assignment.

More information can be found on the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Setting_up_language_pair.2C_Translation_Memories_and_glossaries Start guide]'''

== How can I add a new Translation Memory? ==
Follow this link to the Manual: [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Creating_a_translation_memory Create a new TM]

== How can I get my Translation Memory? ==
Go to the TM and Glossary management dialog by clicking on '''''Setup TM&Glo''''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' Menu.

Once on the dialog, choose the TM you want to download and click on '''Download''' button.

== Can I share a Translation Memory with my colleagues? ==
Yes, you can share a TM and a glossary over the world to chosen guests.
* Go to the TM and Glossary management dialog by clicking on '''''Setup TM&Glo''''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' Menu.
* Create or select a TM and an optional glossary.
* Click on the '''Share''' button.
* Click '''Add''' to open the ''Create a share'' dialog.
* Add the TM and optionally the glossary that you want to share and set its privilege.
* Add the email of your guest.
* Click on '''Save''' button. Guests will get an email notification and will find the TM on their TM list.

== How can I join a Translation Memory shared by my colleague? ==
You will find the shared TMs on your list of TMs.

Go to the TM and Glossary management dialog by clicking on '''''Setup TM&Glo''''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' Menu.

A shared TM will have an icon indicating it is shared, and passing the mouse over it will provide more information.

Also clicking on the '''Share''' button will open the ''TMs and Glossaries Shares'' dialog where mor information could be found on ''My shares from other users'' section.

== Why do I have no match in my TM on repetitive phrases? ==
The repetitive phrase should represent at least 50% of the entire sentence. The TM is searching similarity on the entire sentence. The minimum fuzzy Threshold is 50% and the default value is 70%. You have 2 solutions to overcome that problem:
* Set the fuzzy Threshold to the minimum of 50% if you have big repetitive chunks of text.
* Use a glossary and add manually the terms and phrases in it when you encounter repetition.

== There is no match on a similar sentence just following the translated one ==
The problem occurs because the search for the following segment is done while you are translating the current one.
When you are in that case, just click on '''''Force TM Search''''' button on ''TMs & Glossaries'' tab.

== TM Maintenance ==

=== Edit TM - Concordance ===

[[File:Faqtm1.PNG]]

=== Edit TM - Download ===

[[File:Faqtm2.PNG]]

[[File:Faqtm3.PNG]]

[[File:Faqtm4.PNG]]

=== Edit TM – Download using filtering ===

[[File:Faqtm5.PNG]]

[[File:Faqtm6.PNG]]

=== Edit TM – As a document ===

[[File:Faqtm7.PNG]]

[[File:Faqtm8.PNG]]

[[File:Faqtm9.PNG]]

=== Reverse TM ===

[[File:Faqtm10.PNG]]

=== Assemble TMs ===

[[File:Faqtm11.PNG]]

[[File:Faqtm12.PNG]]

= GLOSSARY =
== How can I add a new Glossary? ==
Follow this link: [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Setting_up_a_Glossary Add a new Glossary]

== How can I add, edit or delete glossary entries? ==
* Associate a glossary to a document and open the document.

* The glossary panel on the right should be opened. When a sentence contains a term of the glossary, it will be displayed there.

* Use the glossary dialog box to add a term when translating.
# Click on '''''Term Edition''''' button on '''TM & Glosaries''' tab or Ctrl+Alt+T.
# Fill the dialog and validate with OK, the term should appear in the Glossary panel.

* Edit or delete a term displayed in the glossary panel.
# A sentence containing that term should be opened or you just create one.
# Click on the term in the glossary panel to open the glossary dialog box.

* Use the glossary search window.
# Click on '''''Glossary Search''''' button on '''TM & Glosaries''' tab or Ctrl+Alt+G.
# An independent browser window will be opened (care popup blocker)
# You can search and edit terms directly in that window.

== Glossary Maintenance ==

=== Edit glossary – Glossary Search ===

[[File:Faqglo1.PNG]]

=== Edit glossary - Download ===

[[File:Faqglo2.PNG]]

=== Edit glossary – Add Term ===

[[File:Faqglo3.PNG]]

=== Edit glossary – Glossary Panel ===

[[File:Faqglo4.PNG]]

=== Reverse Glossary ===

[[File:Faqglo5.PNG]]

=== Assemble Glossaries ===

[[File:Faqglo6.PNG]]

= Machine Translation and IATE Glossary =
Follow this link: [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Setting_Machine_Translation_and_IATE_Glossary Set Machine Translation]

== Why my Machine Translation doesn't respond or has been disabled ==
'''Machine Translations suggestions are external to Wordfast Anywhere.'''

Machine Translations are third-party providers (Google, Microsoft, MyMemory...etc) called Machine Translation Engines or Engines, so Wordfast Anywhere cannot improve/change anything on them.

Engines can suffer from '''problems of instability''' which can force Wordfast Anywhere to disable it temporarily.
If you are having problems with an Engine '''try to increase the "Engine Timeout" or try a different one'''.
We encourage you to register to other Machine Translation engines existing in Wordfast Anywhere.

Follow '''[https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Machine_translation this link]''' to know more about '''Machine Translation settings''' and how to change them.

= USER INTERFACE =
== What are the supported browsers? ==
Wordfast Anywhere support Edge, Firefox, Safari, Chrome for recent versions.
However, you can try any browser.

== Where are my documents? ==
Content is displayed this way:
* Every document now belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a project.
* Double-click a project to open it to see the content (documents grouped by language pairs).
* Double-click a document to start/resume work.

[[File:Warning.png]] A project named "Project_1" has been created with all your current files grouped by lang pair.

== I cannot click on a top menu bar button. Why are some buttons on the top menu bar not available? ==

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a project or selecting/opening a document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a project is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when a project is selected from the project list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when more than one file is selected from the document list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] The file Upload and Delete buttons of the File menu have been moved and integrated in the project content panel, open a project to see them.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus used for translation (Edit, view, translation, review and TM & Glossaries) are only visible when the document is opened. Those buttons keep working as always, just need to open the document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Project menu> '''Import button is just to import .glp files'''. There is an issue importing packages coming from PD. If you cannot import the .glp file, please ask to receive the bilingual files (txml/txlf) and the url for the TM/glossary.

== A shortcut does not work, can I change it? ==
Yes,you can change it.
# Click on '''''Setup''''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab and go to the ''Shortcuts'' tab.
# Select the shortcut line and click on the '''upd''' link.
# Set a new key combination and clikc on '''Update'''

However, you may have trouble with Opera (prevent many for its own usage).

== When I click on Concordance Search or Glossary search, nothing happens! ==
Yes, it may happen if your browser popup blocker is activated. Add an exception for http://www.freetm.com

== Why are there blinking colors in the status bar? ==
It means that there is a background process:
* The pink color indicates a communication with Anywhere server
* The yellow color indicates a communication with the Machine Translation server
You can work while the colors are displayed.
However, if you scroll while a color is displayed, the red message busy will appear, and you will have to wait.

== I have a missing button image or missing the Twitter "Follow @wordfast_freetm" button ==
This can come from the AdBlock or similar program extension in your browser.
Please add the freetm.com domain to program's exception list.

Wordfast Anywhere 6 Manual

2022-02-01T13:35:39Z

Remiandre: /* Wordfast Anywhere Menu */

{{Languages}}
[[Category:Wordfast Anywhere]]

= Introduction =
Wordfast Anywhere (WFA) is the online version of the popular Wordfast computer assisted translation (CAT) program that provides much of the functionality of the Classic and Pro desktop versions. Instead of being installed as a program on the user’s computer, WFA is made accessible from Wordfast’s servers via a web browser, regardless of the operating system used (Windows, Mac, Linux, etc.). Every effort has been made to ensure that the user interface is as close as possible to the other Wordfast flavours: toolbars, icons, shortcuts and working methods. A Wordfast Classic or Pro user should be able to use WFA with almost zero assimilation time.

It is worth remarking that WFA is almost certainly the CAT program that integrates best with the popular Mac operating system. Unlike Java-based, cross-platform programs – including Wordfast Pro – that will run on the Mac but don’t integrate with system-wide tools such as the built in Dictionary, WFA will run in Mac-native browsers such as Safari, thus giving you access to the entire range of language and text handling tools that are built into the Mac OS environment.

[[File:WFA_pagina_5_new.jpg]]
[[File:WFA_pagina_6_new.jpg]]

With WFA you can translate a wide range of both editable (TXT, DOC, DOCX, RTF, XLS, PPT, ODT, HTML, TXML, MIF, INX, etc.) and non-editable (PDF, TIFF) documents. You can store up ten current documents in your workspace, deleting your finished translations to free up space and permit new documents to be uploaded.

You can also import the TMs (translation memories) of all the language pairs you work in. Your memories will progressively expand as and when you translate. They are stored securely and will not be shared or revealed without your authorisation. If you need a local copy, you can download your TM to your computer at any time.

As is the case with other Wordfast flavours, you can add terms to your glossary as you translate. You can also upload existing glossaries to your workspace, for all language pairs. Here again, your glossaries are secure and will not be shared or revealed unless you specifically invite a colleague. You can also download your glossary if you need a local copy.

The following instructions have been written for complete beginners. Having understood the above comments, a Wordfast Classic or Pro user should have no difficulty in using WFA intuitively.

Check the '''[[Wordfast Anywhere 6 Start Guide]]''' for a quick start.

Check our [https://www.freetm.com/jsp/terms.jsp Terms of use].

== How to use WFA ==
On Wordfast Anywhere every document belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a translation project.

So the first you need is a project. A project named "Project_1" is created by default, but you can create up to 3 projects.

A project needs a language pair. A default one is suggested but more can be added. Each language pair can have a TM and glossary assigned which will be used on several processes and also automatically assigned to the documents uploaded.

A project also needs a task. "Translate" is the one by default.

Once the project is created you can add the documents. Documents can be added to all language pairs or to specific ones. There is a maximum number of documents per project depending of the type of project.

Double-click a project to open it to see the content (documents grouped by language pairs).

Double-click a document to start/resume work.

[[File:notice.png]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rDhVYY02Cds Wordfast Anywhere 6 Basic Projects video]'''

= Login in to WFA account =
Check the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Login_in_to_WFA_account Login in to WFA account]''' section on the Start Guide.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you have not created an account yet, click on the '''''Create a new account''''' and follow the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#How_to_create_an_account instructions]'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you ever ''forget your password'', click on the '''''Forgot your password?''''' and follow the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Get_your_password_back instructions]'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you are having ''login problems'' check '''''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Cannot_log_in_to_Wordfast_Anywhere Cannot log in to Wordfast Anywhere]''''' and follow the instructions.

=User Interface =
The user interface is divided into several sections. A top menu with tabs and buttons, a main central panel that changes depending on where we are (project list, project content, document translation) and a bottom panel where information and messages are shown.

Once you are connected to WFA, the workspace appears.

This should look similar to the following screenshot (depending on the browser, operating system or device used to access WFA):

[[File:Newui6.PNG]]

The workspace can be modified at any point according to your requirements.
==Top Menu==
At the very top you can find the ''Top Menu'' which consists in '''two rows''': one for the different '''menus''' (tabs) and one for the '''buttons''' corresponding to the selected tab.

Use [[File:CollapseTop.png]] to hide the buttons. Use [[File:CollapseBottom.png]] to show the buttons.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a project or selecting/opening a document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a project is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when a project is selected from the project list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when more than one file is selected from the document list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus used for translation (Edit, view, translation, review and TM & Glossaries) are only visible when the document is opened. Those buttons keep working as always, just need to open the document.

===Wordfast Anywhere Menu===

This tab a miscellaneous of buttons concerning the Wordfast Anywhere project.

[[File:Wfatab6.PNG]]

* [[File:Logout16.png]]: Use it when you want to '''leave''' Wordfast Anywhere.
* [[File:User profile.png]]: Here you'll find your '''account information'''. You'll be able to change your ''Login'' email, the ''Security Question'', the ''Security Answer'' and delete your account.
* [[File:Preferences.png]]: Here is where you set the '''configuration''' of Wordfast Anywhere:''Font Size'', ''Machine translation'', ''TM rules'', ''Shortcuts'', ''Segmentation'', ''Transcheck'' rules...etc.
* [[File:Preferences16round.png]]: Global TM & glossary management (create, add, upload, merge, edit, download, delete... ), no more for assignment.
* [[File:WF Update16.png]]: This button will direct you to a site to '''align''' your files.
* [[File:help16.png]]: WFA Help:
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''start guide''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''PM start guide''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''FAQ''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''manual''' wiki page.
** If the previous wiki pages do not work, this is a pdf backup.
* [[File:Notice.png]]: There are 4 icons corresponding to different types of '''notifications''' ([[File:Warning.png]] ONLY displayed when there are notifications):
** Webmaster Info: notifications coming from Wordfast Anywhere administration (p.e stopping the server for a publication).
** Background Info: notifications about ''Background'' processes (p.e. Analyze, Spellcheck...etc).
** System Info: notifications from the system (p.e. an unsupported browser).
** TM Server Info: notifications realted to the TM Server (p.e. TM server is disconnected).

===Project Menu===
This tab has the tools concerning a project.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when a project is selected on the project list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a project is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available for standard projects.

No project selected on the project list.

[[File:ProjecttabAll.PNG]]

This are the basic buttons:

* [[File:Pm new project 16.png]]: '''New''' use it to create a project.
* [[File:Pm open project 16.png]]: '''Open''' the selected project from the project list.
* [[File:Analyze Project16.png]]: '''Analyze''' all the documents of the project. A report is generated.
* [[File:Pm delete project 16.png]]: '''Delete''' the selected project.
* [[File:Pm close project 16.png]]: '''Close''' an opened project.
* [[File:Pm import project 16.png]]: '''Import''' a .glp file.
* [[File:Pm export project 16.png]]: '''Export''' a project into a .glp file.
* [[File:Linguist16.png]]: Use it to '''Manage''' the team of '''linguists'''.

To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

===File Tab===
This tab has the tools concerning a file.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be available when more than one file is selected from the list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be also available when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a document is opened.

[[File:FiletabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:Translate File16.png]]: '''Open''' the selected file from the list.
* [[File:About wordfast16.png]]: Open the document with '''Wordfast Pro Online'''. [[File:Warning.png]] The use of Wordfast Pro Online will be discontinued on December 31, 2021.
* [[File:Close16.png]]: '''Close''' an opened file.
* [[File:Save16.png]]: Here you'll find all the '''Download''' options for a file (p.e. translated version, bilingual versions, TXML, unformatted text, Off-line Report Tool, TM from doc segments).
* [[File:Preferences16round.png]]: With this button you'll change the '''TM & Glossary''' configuration for the document.
* [[File:Analyze Project16.png]]: '''Analyze''' the selected document/s. A report is generated.
* [[File:Statistics16.png]]: Get the '''Statistics''' of the document.
* [[File:Modify Project16.png]]: Get information about the file.
* [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]]: '''Pre-translate''' the selected document/s.
* [[File:Mergetms16.png]]: Use this button to '''merge''' the document with a '''TXML''' file.
* [[File:mergetms16_menu.png]]: Use this button to '''merge''' the document with an imported '''OFRT''' file.
* [[File:Split.png]] [[File:Join.png]]: '''Split''' the document in parts. '''Join''' the parts together again.
* [[File:Share.png]] [[File:Revoke.png]]: '''Share''' the document with an other Wordfast Anywhere user. '''Revoke''' will finish the share.
* [[File:Translate File16.png]]: '''Fuzzy Open''' the file without full matches.
* [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]]: '''Extract''' the '''frequent''' segments.
* [[File:Edit16.png]]: '''Rename''' the file.

===Edit Tab===

This tab is a translation tool extension.

[[File:Warning.png]] This buttons will be available when the document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be available when a TM is being edited.

[[File:EdittabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:FindReplace.png]]: Use it to '''Find & Replace''' text but also to go to a particular segment or get a list of segments ''untranslated'', ''provisional'', with ''notes'' or with ''tag differences''.
* [[File:EditSource16.png]]: '''Edit''' the source segment.
* [[File:Edit_Note16.png]]: Create, edit or remove a '''Note''' on a segment.
* [[File:Insert_c.png]]: '''Insert special characters'''. 7 different characters can be defined on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => '''''Setup''''' button > '''''Pandora's box'''''
* [[File:Delete_alltargetseg.png]]: '''Delete''' '''tags''' in the document. This is only available when editing a TM and has 2 options: Delete all target tags or delete all document tags.
* [[File:delete_revisions.png]]: '''Delete''' the segment '''history'''.
* [[File:Delete_alltargetseg.png]]: '''Delete''' all '''target''' segments of the document.
* [[File:caseChanger.png]]: Toggle between lowercase, uppercase, and capitalization..

===View Tab===

In this tab you'll find the buttons to move through the document and show or hide the different panels.

[[File:ViewtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:PanelOutline.png]]: Show or hide '''Outline'''.
* [[File:panelTm.png]]: Show or hide '''TM''' panel.
* [[File:panelGlo.png]]: Show or hide '''Glossary''' panel.
* [[File:MovePrevScreen.png]]: Go to '''Previous Block'''.
* [[File:MoveNextScreen.png]]: Go to '''Next Block'''.
* [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]]: Toggle between the different document layout: Classic, Horizontal and Vertical.
* [[File:move_prev_seg.png]]: Go to '''Previous segment'''.
* [[File:move_next_seg.png]]: Go to '''Next segment'''.
* [[File:move_first_seg_screen.png]]: Go to '''First segment''' of '''Block'''.
* [[File:move_last_seg_screen.png]]: Go to '''Last segment''' of '''Block'''.
* [[File:move_first_seg_doc.png]]: Go to '''First segment''' of '''document'''.
* [[File:move_last_seg_doc.png]]: Go to '''Last segment''' of '''document'''.

===Translation Tab===

Find here all the tools to perform a translation

[[File:TranslationtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:StartNext.png]]: '''Start translation''' or open next segment.
* [[File:Previous.png]]: Open previous segment.
* [[File:CloseSave.png]]: '''Close and commit''' to the TM.
* [[File:Close retain.png]]: '''Close and retain''' the segment as provisional but not commit to the TM
* [[File:close.png]]: '''Close segment'''.
* [[File:close_restore.png]]: '''Close and delete''' target content.
* [[File:mark.png]]: Mark segment as '''provisional'''.
* [[File:CopySource.png]]: '''Copy source''' to target.
* [[File:Expand_Segment16.png]]: '''Expand''' segment.
* [[File:ShrinkSeg.png]]: '''Shrink''' segment.
* [[File:TranslateUntilFuzzy.png]]: '''Translate''' document '''until a fuzzy''' match.
* [[File:Cleanup_Project16.png]]: Toggle between Empty target, Remove tags and Restore.
* [[File:autopropagate.png]]: '''Auto propagate''' segment changes through all the document.
* [[File:dropdown.png]]: Toggle placeable.
* [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]]: Go to '''Next Placeable'''.
* [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]]: '''Copy Placeable'''.
* [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]]: Go to '''Previous Placeable'''.
* [[File:increase_target.png]]: Increase target segment height.
* [[File:Mic.png]]: Use '''Web Speech''' to dictate the target content. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY available for Chrome. Currently disabled due to browser security.'''

===Review Tab===

This tab has the tools to review the document.

[[File:ReviewtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:Preview16.png]]: '''Preview''' a PDF version of the document.
* [[File:Transcheck16.png]]: Do a '''quality control''' on the document
* [[File:Spellcheck16.png]]: '''Spellcheck''' the document

===TMs and Glossaries Tab===

Tab with the tools related to TM and glossaries actions.

[[File:TmglotabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]]: Concordance search
* [[File:GlossarySearch.png]]: Glossary Search
* [[File:TermEdit.png]]: Term edition.
* [[File:CopyTU.png]]: Copy TU.
* [[File:DeleteTU.png]]: Delete TU.
* [[File:Add File To Project16.png]]: Add TU.
* [[File:force_tm_addtu.png]]: Update TU.
* [[File:force_tm.png]]: Force TM search.
* [[File:force_mt.png]]: Force Machine Translation search.
* [[File:force_term.png]]: Force Glossary search.
* [[File:update_tm_doc.png]]: Update TM with document content.
* [[File:iSearch.png]]: Lookup in online dictionary.

===Help Tab===

Help section is on the '''Wordfast Anywhere Menu'''.

===Custom Tab===
In this tab you can add up to 15 buttons of your choice, so you can have together in one tab your most used buttons.
Selection any of the translation menus buttons (Edit, view, translation, review and TM & Glossaries) and the WFA setup and TM&Glossary set up.

[[File:custom_tab.png]]

To do so you must go to [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab. Then go to '''Pandora Box''' tab and go to ''Custom Tab settings'', where you will find all the buttons that can be added to the '''Custom''' tab

[[File:custom_tab2.png]]

==Panels==

===Project List Panel===
This panel shows the list of projects.

[[File:Projectlistpanel.png]]

Projects will be listed here. '''Double click on one project''' or select it and use [[File:Pm open project 16.png]]'''Open''' from the top menu bar to open the project.

===Project content Panel===
When opening a project, the ''Content Panel'' area will show the content of the project, the list of documents in the project.

[[File:ProjectContentpanel.png]]

Main areas are:

* '''Header row (1)''': In this row you'll fine the headers of the columns. The columns are: Languages/file (1), Vol. (1C) and the columns for the different jobs will follow (1D). This row will change the background color according to the project status: blue for ''In preparation'', orange for ''In progress'' and green for ''completed''. Use the '''Add files''' button (1A) to add files to all language pairs and use '''dashboard''' button (1B) to see an estimation of cost of the project.
* '''Project setup (2)'''Click on the ''project name'' or icon next to it to open the project setup dialog.
* '''Language Row (3)''': In this row several icons will be shown depending on the file selection to perform actions such as add files to the language pair (3A), delete selected files (3B) or assign linguist to jobs (3C). Use the '''remove language pair''' icon (3D) to delete the language pair ([[File:Warning.png]] all the documents inside will be permanently deleted).
* '''Note (4)''' this icon allows to add a note to the document.
* '''TM & glossaries (5)''' This are the TMs and glossaries assigned to the document, mouse-over to see extra information. This TM and glossary assignment will be used for the tasks.
* On the '''Status bar''' you'll find information about the project.
* Clicking on the file name will open the document. And clicking on each of the other cell text or icon will open the edit dialog for that cell.

===Translation Panels===
When a document is opened for translation, the screen is divided in 4 different panels.

[[File:Panels.png]]

====Outline====
Show/Hide Outline panel using '''''View''''' tab => '''''Show/hide Outline''''' [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button

The outline displays all the segments of the document.
The available status are:
* A white box indicates that the segment is not translated
* A green box indicates a translated segment
* A yellow box indicates a provisional segment
* An 'i' after segment id indicates a segment having a note
* The black thick border on the box indicates the current document selected on document panel
* The pink border on the box indicates the visible segments in the document panel

You can jump and open any segment of the document by clicking on its number.
If the segment is not visible on the document panel (blue border instead of pink), the document panel will be refreshed.

Once a segment is opened you can use
'''''Edit''''' tab => '''''Edit Note''''' [[File:Edit_Note16.png]] button to create/delete a note and also '''''Translation ''''' tab => '''''Provisional''''' [[File:mark.png]] button to mark/unmark a provisional segment.

====TM Panel====
This panel shows the matches from TM or MT for the current segment.

You can show or hide this panel using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:panelTm.png]] button.

====Glossary Panel====
This panel shows the matching terms for the current segment.

You can show or hide this panel using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:panelGlo.png]] button.

====Document Panel====

When a document is opened, it shows the segments content.

Wordfast Anywhere do not load the entire document in the editor if there are many segments.

While translating the segments are added one by one to the editor, but if you can move inside the document to see any part you want.

To do so, you can use:
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:MovePrevScreen.png]] button to go to '''Previous Block'''.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:MoveNextScreen.png]] button to go to '''Next Block'''.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button to show '''Outline''' and then jump and open any segment of the document by clicking on its number. More information [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline here]

This is how an opened document looks like:

[[File:document_panel_doc.png]]

=====Document Layout=====
Using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] button you can change the document layout, which is the way segments are shown on Document Panel. The three possible views are:

'''''Classical'''''

[[File:ClassicalLayout.png]]

'''''Horizontal'''''

[[File:HorizontalLayout.png]]

'''''Vertical'''''

[[File:VerticalLayout.png]]

===Status Panel===
Always present at the bottom. Here you can find several information about the project, file, TM, display, translation process. Also some messages will be showed here.

==Other features==

===Show/Hide Top Menu Buttons ===
Buttons on the top menu can be hidden.

Use [[File:CollapseTop.png]] to hide the buttons. Use [[File:CollapseBottom.png]] to show the buttons.

= Project Operations =
A new Project menu bar has been added after Wordfast Anywhere menu. Yes! Project Management (PM) has been introduced to WFA.

* * A project named "Project_1" is created by default. If you had an account before version 6, it will contain all the files from the previous version grouped by language pair.
* Every document now belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a project.
* Double-click a project to open it to see the content (documents grouped by language pairs).
* Double-click a document to start/resume work.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a project.

[[File:notice.png]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rDhVYY02Cds Wordfast Anywhere 6 Basic Projects video]'''

== Create a New Project ==
On the Project tab click on [[File:Pm new project 16.png]]'''New''' to create a new project. This will open the ''Project Seup'' window where the settings for the project are done.

To access the project setup once the project has been created, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

[[File:Createproject.PNG]]
[[File:Createproject1.PNG]]
[[File:Createproject2.PNG]]

The ''Project Setup'' window has two sections that need to be set in order to create the project. Setting one section opens the next one.

;1.General
: On this section general information of the project is set. This includes:
# Project name (Compulsory)
# Description (optional)
# Project type. Defines the type of the project:
#* Standard: For translators working alone.
#* Advanced: For Project Managers (PMs) managing large, multi-language projects.
# Project status (for advanced type). Defines the status of the project:
#* In preparation (blue): When project is being prepared (files, TMs and glossaries and linguist being added)
#* In progress (orange): This marks the start of the project. Files are shared with the linguist at this point.
#* Completed (green): The project is finished.
# Currency(optional). It will be used to calculate the project cost.
# Decimals(optional). When this checkbox is marked the project estimated cost will show numbers with decimals.
# Auto(optional). By default Project Manager will be responsible of pushing files to the next job when completion is done. Mark this checkbox to automatically sent files to the next job upon completion.
;2.Language Pairs and tasks
: On this section language pairs and tasks are added.
* Use the '''+''' next to the language pair header to add a new language pair. This will open the language selection dialog and then the TM and glossaries dialog to assign them to the language pair.
* Use the '''+''' at the end of the header row to add new tasks. Only 10 tasks can be added.
* A row is shown for each language pair where the default word rate (left box) and speed rate (right box) for each task can be set.
* Use the '''-''' next to the language pair to remove it. [[File:Warning.png]] Associated files and shares will be revoked.
* Use the '''-''' next to the task name to remove it. [[File:Warning.png]] Associated files and shares will be revoked.

Once all compulsory fields are set, click on '''Save project''' to save the project and go to the ''Project Content panel''.

[[File:Warning.png]] It is possible to move from standard to advanced but opposite is only possible if the advanced project has only one task.

== Modify Project Setup ==
To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

Use this to change any of the project settings defined on the project creation.

[[File:Warning.png]] It is possible to move from standard to advanced but opposite is only possible if the advanced project has only one task.

It is the same than for creating a project, so check the section above to know about the different parts and settings.

== Setting up language pair, Translation Memories and glossaries ==
Languages are added/removed from the ''Project Setup'' dialog.

To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

Check ''Create Project'' section above to know about it.

=== Language pair with its associated TMs and glossaries set in the project setup ===

To access the project setup dialog, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

[[File:Project_setup.png]]

Click on the language pair '''''+''''' button.

[[File:Langpair_dialog.png]]

Enter the languages and save, the TMs and glossaries dialog opens.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair.png]]

* If no TM and glossary exists for the language pair, a new dialog will propose you to create them. Save and wait they are listed.
* You can create and choose one or more TMs and glossaries. They are selected by checking the row in the '''''Active''''' column.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair_2.png]]

Finally save the TMs and glossaries selection by clicking on the '''''Save''''' button. The new language pair is now in the project setup and one icon is displayed for each TM and glossary.

[[File:Project_setup_2.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] The TMS and glossaries can be updated for a language pair by clicking on the icons. But if documents already exists for that language pair, they will not be affected by this change, only new documents added after the update.

=== TMs and glossaries set individually for a document ===
This selection for a document is overwriting the Language pair selection.
In the project content select a document by checking it and then click on the '''''TMs and glossaries''''' button [[File:Preferences16round.png]] of the '''''File''''' menu.

[[File:Project_content_3.png]]

The same TMs and glossaries dialog opens.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair_3.png]]

Saving will update only the TMs and glossaries for the selected document. A control can done hovering the TM icon.

[[File:Project_content_2.png]]

== Add/Remove Files ==
From the '''Project Content Panel''' there are two ways to add files to a project.

* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the header will add the files to all the languages in the project.
* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the language row. This will add the files only to that language.

[[File:Pmaddfiles.PNG]]

To remove a file, first use the checkbox to select it and then use the [[File:Remove16.png]] icon on the language row.

[[File:Pmdeletefile.PNG]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Associated shares will be revoked.

Several files can be selected to be removed at the same time.

== Project dashboard ==
Using the [[File:Pm_cost_16.png]] icon on the header will show the estimated cost of the project. Click on the icon again to hide costs.

[[File:Pmdashboard.PNG]]

== Advanced Features ==
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

Advanced projects have some extra features to manage the files.

=== Task TM ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

Click on the TM icon on the file column to set how the TM will be used on the tasks.

[[File:PmaddtmPNG.PNG]]

There are different options for the TM use:
*'''''Share TM'''''
**The selected TM will be shared with linguists.
**This is the best option to use.
**Translator will have exact and fuzzy matches.
**Translator can use concordance.
*'''''Create Project TM'''''
**The selected TM will NOT be shared.
**It will be used to create a temporary project TM with the matches from the file/s
**The temporary project TM will be shared.
*'''''Pretranslate'''''
**The selected TM will NOT be shared.
**It will be used to pretransalte the document/s.
**Only one TU match (the highest) per segment will be available to the translator.
**Concordance cannot be used.
**Concordance will only be used in this temporary TM

[[File:Warning.png]] Once a task has started it is not possible to change this assignment.

To change the TM assigned click on the same icon and change the TM selection by marking the ''active'' checkbox for the TMs you want to use.
To unassign the TMs clean all the ''active'' checkboxes.

=== Task Glossaries ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

To assign glossaries to tasks follow the instructions for TMs, but using the ''active'' checkboxes on the glossaries side of the dialog.

=== Manage Linguists ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

The Manage Linguist window can be opened by using the [[File:Linguist16.png]] icon on the '''Project''' tab or the '''Manage linguists''' buttons on the ''Assign Job'' window.

This allows the PM to create a team of linguists that will be used on the project jobs.

The same linguist can be used in several languages and roles.

[[File:Pmlinguist1.PNG]]

Main areas are:

* '''Add new linguist to a new language pair (1)''': Use [[File:Pm_linguist_add_16.png]] icon to add a new linguist to the team for a new language pair.
* '''Add or remove a linguist from a language pair (2)''': Use [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] icon to add a linguist to a language pair and use [[File:Pm_collapse_16.png]] icon to remove it.
* '''Linguist task grid (3)''': In this grid, each cell shows the RATE-SPEED-SCORE settings for a linguist. The grid has 4 columns, one for each role: Translator (TR), Proofreader (PR), Revise (RE) and QA. In addition '''dark values mean that linguist has been marked as "able" to do that role'''. Grey values indicate that linguist is not marked as "able" to do that role. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''

==== New Linguist ====
Use [[File:Pm_linguist_add_16.png]] or [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] to add a new linguist.

[[File:Pmlinguistnew.PNG]]

Introduce the following information to add a linguist.

* '''Email''': It must be the email of the linguist WFA account.
* '''Initials''': Short 4 character nickname for the linguist.
* '''Ctry''': Country of the linguist.
* '''Comment''': Some words about the linguist.
* '''Source language''' and '''target language''' that the linguist can work with.
* Role performance. There are 4 default roles a linguist can do on project tasks.
** Mark the '''checkbox''' if the linguist is able to do the role. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''
** '''Rate''': Linguist minim rate. Rate is measured in import per word. The project currency will be user with the import. For example 0.5 Eur per word.
** '''Speed''': Linguist speed rate (words/day). For example 3,000 words/day.
** '''Score''': Linguist 1 to 5 ''star'' score.

=== Assign Job ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''

Use the [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] icon in the language row under the '''job name''' column to assign a job to a linguist for the checkbox marked files.

[[File:Pmaddtask.PNG]]

On the assign job dialog:
* Choose a linguist from the list to whom the job will be assigned. [[File:Warning.png]] The file will be shared with the linguist when the project is set as 'In progress'. The rate and job amount from the linguist will be set for the task.
* To override the linguist rate or job amount, a particular rate or job amount for the job can be set using the input field under the column header. [[File:Warning.png]] Bear in mind that both are related so changing one will update the other.
* A '''''Deadline''''' can be set on the input field under '''''Duration'''''.
* Fill the '''''Note''''' text box to send extra information to the linguist.
* Use '''''Linguist cannot download the shared file''''' to not allow the linguist to download the file.
* Click on '''''Manage linguists''''' to open the Manage Linguist window to add/edit/remove linguists.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' linguists marked as ''able'' to do a role will be listed.

Use the [[File:Pm_collapse_16.png]] icon in the language row under the '''job name''' column to unassign a linguist from a job for the checkbox marked files. [[File:Warning.png]] Shares will be revoked.

[[File:Pmdeletetask.PNG]]

=== Move file to next Task ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

If '''Auto''' tasking is not set on the ''Project Properties'' window, when a task is finished (file has been revoked by the linguist), PM has to manually move it to the next task which will share the file with the linguist assigned to that task.

To do so, click on the double arrow on the finished task.

[[File:Pmmoveon.PNG]]

=== Workflow ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

The project workflow should be:
# PM creates a project, sets languages, sets jobs (Project setup).
# PM adds files to the project and prepares them (i.e splitting).
# PM sets how the TMs and glossaries assigned to the document will be use on the tasks as Share TM, Create project TM or to pre-translate.
# PM prepares the team of linguists.
# PM assign a linguist to each file task. Multiple file selection for batch assign is possible.
# When PM sets the project status to ''In progress'' files that has been assigned a TM and a task will be shared to the corresponding linguist.
# Linguist works on the file. When his work is finished, revokes the file. This finishes the share.
# Once the file is revoked, the PM has to manually move it to the next task. This is done automatically if Auto tasking is selected on Project Setup.
# When all tasks are finished project is finished. PM can change the status of the project to ''Completed''.

=== Purchase Order ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

You can define a Purchase Order template with project, document and task information that will be send to the linguists when the file is shared.

A copy of the email send to the linguist is BCC to the project owner.

==== Purchase Order template ====
Go to [[File:User profile.png]] '''''User Profile''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab to see information about your account. On the ''PM'' tab you can edit the default template.

[[File:Po1.PNG]]

On this template you put the information you want to appear on the Purchase Order.

You can use some '''dynamic parameters''' to add project, document and task information. Use this parameters to build the Purchase Order.
Parameters will be substituted by project, document and task corresponding values or a predefined text.

{| class="wikitable"
|+Here is the list which you can also check them using the [[File:Pm info 16.png]] icon.
|-
|{purchase_order_number}
|Include a number for the purchase order.
|-
|{project_name}
|Project name.
|-
|{task_name}
|Task name.
|-
|{document_name}
|Document name.
|-
|{document_download}
|If linguist can download the document the text '(The document cannot be downloaded.)' will be added to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{document_volume}
|Document number of words.
|-
|{job_note}
|Job note
|-
|{job_rate}
|Job rate
|-
|{job_total}
|Job total cost
|-
|{job_deadline}
|Job deadline in the format 29/12/2021 15:00 GMT+02:00 and the remaining time.
|-
|{document_tmglo}
|If there are TMs or glossaries in the share the text 'For the duration of this job # Translation Memories and # Glossaries have been temporarily shared with you.' will be added to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{document_use}
|Add the text 'To work on this document, log into your Wordfast Anywhere account. If you are already logged, refresh the project list by closing all the projects.' to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{my_full_name}
|Full name from 'User profile'.
|-
|{my_professional_info}
|Professional information from 'User profile'.
|}

==== Purchase Order preview ====
On the '''assign job dialog''' you will see a preview of the Purchase Order.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of the dynamic parameters will be updated when changing the selections on the dialog, others might require the job to be saved and others will be updated when the Purchase Order is send.

[[File:Po2.PNG]]

==== Purchase Order batch send ====
You can send the Purchase Orders for all the saved jobs at any moment using the '''Send POs''' button on the ''Project Setup'' dialog

[[File:Warning.png]] Purchase Order will also be send when the file is shared.

= File Operations =
[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a document.

=== Upload ===
To translate your document, you must first upload it to WFA.

[[File:warning.png]] There is a file size limit of 20 Mb.

From the '''Project Content Panel''' there are two ways to add files to a project.

* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the header will add the files to all the languages in the project.
* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the language row. This will add the files only to that language.

[[File:Pmaddfiles.PNG]]

The following window will be displayed:

[[File:Upload_doc.png]]

There are several ways to upload a document
* '''From local file''': Use '''''Browse...''''' to navigate through the directories on your computer and locate the document to be uploaded.
* '''From URL''': This option allows you to upload a file that is located on an Internet server by entering the address (URL) into the field. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Google Drive''': Choose a file from your Google Drive to be uploaded. You'll be asked to allow access rights to WFA before choosing the file. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Dropbox''': Choose a file from your Dropbox to be uploaded. You'll be asked to allow access rights to WFA before choosing the file. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Clipboard''': Paste the text to be uploaded into the text area. A text file will be created with the text.

At the bottom of the window click on '''''View allowed formats''''' to check the allowed formats:

Finally click on:
* '''''Upload''''': to only upload the file, which will be listed on the Document Management.
* '''''Upload and Open''''': to upload and open the document, which will be displayed in the document panel.

[[File:warning.png]] Depending on the size of the file, this may take some time. Please be patient.

Upload can also be done by using drag and drop area.

For some file formats you can configure some filter behaviors when uploading the file on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters|Configure Filters]]''' in ''Pandora's Box #8''. This is important for '''Text based files (xml, xsl)''' where a rules file (.properties) is needed.

=== Open ===
To open a document, first select it from the list of documents. There are 2 options on '''[[{{PAGENAME}}#File Tab|File tab]]''':

* '''''Open''''' button [[File:Translate_File16.png]]: will open a document and show all the segments
* '''''Fuzzy Open''''' button [[File:Translate_File16.png]]: will open a document, but only segments with a score lower than 100.

=== Segmentation ===
In order to be translated with a CAT tool, a document is divided into translation units (TUs), also known as segments. This process is called segmentation. A segment is a text string that ends with a terminator segment, usually the period (.), colon (:), question mark (?), or exclamation mark (!) and also a paragraph or end of cell mark, a page break or a tab.

The advantage of segmentation is that the translation units are presented to you one by one, without any danger of missing one. These segments form the basis for the TUs that are saved in the TM, consisting of the source segment (to translate) and the target segment (translated).

To configure segmentation go to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Segmentation_tab| Segmentation tab]]''' on the WFA settings.

=== Review ===
Once translated, the text should be revised. Here are some methods:
* Download the translated document immediately to view it in your favourite word processor.
* Download it in an offline review format. See '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Offline_Review_Tool|Offline Review Tool (OFRT)]]'''.
* Revise it in WFA using '''Trancheck''', '''Spellcheck''' and '''Preview''' tools. See below.
* If you are using the Classic mode for the document Layout (See the '''''Doc Layout''''' button [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] on '''''View''''' tab) , you can toggle the display between the bilingual document, the original document and the translated document, use the shortcut '''Ctrl+,''' (Ctrl+comma). A different display mode is presented with each iteration. To confirm what you see in front of you, check the indicator on the status bar: bilingual document (Bilingual), original document (Source) or translated document (Target). You can also click on the indicator to change it. Please note this action does not alter the document in any way. It only changes the way that it is displayed in a way that is more convenient for the task you are currently engaged in.

==== Transcheck ====
Click on the '''''Transchek''''' button [[File:Transcheck16.png]] of the '''''Review''''' tab. Transcheck provides the means to check translated content for missing tags, empty targets, numbers, untranslated segments, and terminology.

[[File:Transcheck.png]]

Click on the '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#QA_tab|Set the criteria]]''' link to go to the '''Setup''' and configure them.

Click on the '''''Check''''' button to get the result.

Click on the '''''Move next''''' button to move in the document panel to the first segment in the result list. Click again to move to next segment and so on.

==== Spellcheck ====

Click on the '''''Spellcheck'''' button [[File:Spellcheck16.png]] of the '''''View''''' tab and choose again '''Spellcheck''' in the list of choice. Spellcheck is a good practice to ensure high quality as it flags words in a document that may not be spelled correctly. The Spellcheck is done immediately then you'll get the following report with the results.

[[File:Spellcheck.png]]

Click on the '''''Move''''' button to move in the document panel to the first segment in the result list. Click again to move to next segment and so on.

==== Preview ====
Click on the '''''Preview''''' butonn [[File:Preview16.png]] of the '''''View''''' tab . It can be done at any stage of completion to get a PDF file displayed in a pop-up window with the translated document.

[[File:Preview_1.png]]
[[File:Preview_2.png]]

=== Download ===

[[File:Warning.png]] For '''download issues''', please check this [https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_fix_a_document_when_download_failed.3F link]

When the translation is finally complete, you must download the final document in order to be able to deliver it. To do this, click on [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab. A dialog with all the download options will be shown.

[[File:Donwload_all.jpg]]

Here is a short description of each option:

* '''Translated document/s''': Click to download the translated file. It will be the translated version of the source document in the same file type.

* '''Bilingual''': Click to download the TXLF (or TXML) file from the document. [[File:Warning.png]] '''''The download bilingual file will be of the type used when the file was uploaded.''''' For example if the file was uploaded using TXML, the bilingual download will be TXML. A file cannot be uploaded using one type (TXML) and download the bilingual file of the other type (TXLF). The workaround is to change the type and upload the file again. [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters More information]

* '''Offline review export''': Click to download an Offline Review file (.doc).

* '''Bilingual DOC without formatting''': Click to download bilingual for MS Word without placeholders (*.doc).

* '''Unformatted text''': Click to download unformatted Text (*.txt).

* '''Notes report''': Click to download a report with the document notes.

* '''TM from document/s''': Click to download a TM with document's content (.txml).

* '''Backup workspace''': Click to download a backup of current document + TM + glossary.

* '''Package''': Click to download a WFP package file (.glp) containing documents, memories, glossaries....etc. More information [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Package here]

* '''Filtered bilingual''': Open an advanced filtering dialog to choose segments to be downloaded.

Clicking '''OK''' will take the next dialog.

You may receive this message if you have not yet fully translated the document:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

This is purely an advisory message, warning you if you have forgotten to translate a segment or if there are provisional segments or notes. However it is quite possible that this is your intention: sometimes there are segments that should not be translated.

You can find out at any time if you have completed the translation, or how many segments remain to be translated, by using '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''

If your file is fully translated or you clicked '''OK''' on this warning dialog, a dialog where you can choose the way to download the file will open.

This can have different extra options depending the type of download you have chosen on the first dialog.

[[File:DownloadOptions2.png]]

For downloading the translated file, you have the option to add a second document in PDF format to the downloading of the document in its original format. To add the PDF-formatted document, tick the Add PDF file box. This may take some time, so please wait.

[[File:DownloadOptions2a.png]]

For downloading the TXML file, you have the options to copy the source content in case target segment is empty and not use language variants.

You can cancel the download by clicking Cancel or continue by clicking OK.
You can verify that this operation is taking place: a series of small blue rectangles will display the progress in the status bar.

There are some cases when you will get a compressed ZIP file instead of the original format. Check [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#Why_do_I_get_a_zip_file_when_downloading.3F here] the reasons.

If you have requested the PDF file, both files – the original and the PDF – will be downloaded together and compressed together in ZIP format (*. zip).

There are several ways to download a file:

* '''Download file''': After you click on the OK button, Wordfast Anywhere prepares the data transfer and then sends it to your browser. The browser will then inform you that it has received the data according to its specific mode of operation. In some cases, a dialog box will pop up allowing you specify where to save the file; however, this depends on the particular browser you use. If nothing happens, check your browser’s downloads settings and / or repeat the process.
* '''Send file to email''': Send the downloaded file by email.
* '''Create file URL''': Create a url to the downloaded file. To get the file copy-paste the url in your browser to start the download. The file will be available at that location for 3 days.
* '''Google Drive''': Send the downloaded file to your Google Drive account.
* '''Dropbox''': Send the downloaded file to your Dropbox account.

[[File:Warning.png]] For '''download issues''', please check this [https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_fix_a_document_when_download_failed.3F link]

=== Delete ===
[[File:Warning.png]] Remember this can '''NOT''' be undone, so it is recommended to download the file first.

To remove a file, first use the checkbox to select it and then use the [[File:Remove16.png]] icon on the language row.

[[File:Pmdeletefile.PNG]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Associated shares will be revoked.

Several files can be selected to be removed at the same time.

[[File:notice.png]] In case you accidentally delete a file, you can recover it by uploading again and using the same TM to pre-translate it.

=== Package ===
Project files (*.glp) are managed with the [[File:Pm import project 16.png]] '''Import''' and [[File:Pm export project 16.png]] '''Export''' buttons in the Project menu.

[[File:Warning.png]] The project file (*.glp) is limited to one source language while a Wordfast Anywhere project can have many, in consequence, package export is done by source language.

[[File:Warning.png]]There is an issue importing packages coming from PD. If you cannot import the .glp file, please ask to receive the bilingual files (txml/txlf) and the url for the TM/glossary.

==== Upload ====

Upload must be done using '''''Project''''' menu => '''''Import''''' [[File:Pm import project 16.png]] button.

Once you have selected you local file, click '''Upload'''. A new dialog with the package information and upload options will be shown.

[[File:UploadPkg.JPG]]

* '''Package Information''' section shows package name, who and when created the package and which language pairs contain.
* '''Package content''' section shows the bilingual files on the package. The files with the check box marked will be uploaded. '''On the right''' there are two drop-down lists to add a TM and glossary to the file which can came from the package if WFA can handle them or from your list on WFA (Information about them can be found on the Resources section).
* '''Resources''' section shows a list of TMs and glossaries and source files.

Finally there are two options for the upload.
* '''Create new folder''': by default files will be added to the root folder, you can use this option to upload the package files in a new folder.
* If the package contains source files a drop-down list will be shown to choose between '''Export back later''' to upload just the bilingual files and '''Generate final files on WFA''' to upload source files and merge them with the corresponding bilingual file in the package.

Once the package has been successfully uploaded, an HTML report is created.

[[File:Warning.png]] A new project is created with the content of the package.

==== Download ====

[[File:Warning.png]] The project file (*.glp) is limited to one source language while a Wordfast Anywhere project can have many, in consequence, package export is done by source language.

Download must be done using '''''Project''''' menu => '''''Export''''' [[File:Pm export project 16.png]] button.

[[File:DownloadPkg.JPG]]

* '''Package Information''': Here you can choose to download an existing package or create a new one, source and target languages. Multiple target language can be chosen if the package had them when it was uploaded.
* '''Package content''': After clicking '''Find Files''' a list of available files, TMs and glossaries is shown. The files with the check box marked will be downloaded.

Finally you can chose to '''Add Source files''' to the package.

= TM & Glossary Management =
== TM & Glossary Basics ==

Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''Setup TM&Glo''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' menu.

[[File:TmgloDialog.png]]

===Translation Memory ===
==== Creating a translation memory ====
There are several ways to create or add a TM:
* Create an empty standard WFA TM
* Upload an existing TM like from Wordast Classic or Pro
* Link to a remote TM hosted on a private Wordfast server
* Link to a Very Large TM hosted on a public Wordfast server

To create an empty TM, click on the '''''Create''''' button of the TM buttons area.

[[File:CreateTm.png]]

Choose source and target language codes. It is recommended that you have only one TM for each language pair. This way, you will benefit from everything you have already translated in each pair. However, there may be reasons for you to maintain different TMs in the same language pair. In this case, enter an ID using up to 10 characters in the Assigned Name field.
 Then click on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''Create TM''''' dialog box. Your TM has now been created and is selected in the list of TMs.

To Upload an existing TM, click on the '''''upload'''' button.

[[File:CreateTm_3.png]]

If you already have a TM that you use with Wordfast Classic or Pro, you can upload it to WFA. The codes for source and target languages are written in the header of the TM file. If you already have a TM in the same pair, make sure that you enter an identifier of up to 10 characters in the Assigned Name field.
 This procedure is exactly the same if you have a TM from another CAT tool. However, check first that this TM has been exported in the '''TMX''' format, the standard file format with extension '''.tmx''' supported by all major CAT tool developers.
 Click on the '''''Upload''''' button of the '''''Upload''''' dialog box, you will be prompted to browse a local file on your PC.

If the TM is in Excel format, before uploading it you need to save it as ''Unicode Text''.

[[File:warning.png]] Depending on its size, uploading a TM may take some time. In this case, it can be run in the background, allowing you to perform other tasks while you are waiting.

To add a remote TM or VLTM, click on the '''''add''''' button.

[[File:AddTm_1.png]]

Select the type TM in the list box.

[[File:AddTm_2.png]]

For adding a remote TM, copy paste the given URL in the URL field and the workgroup ID, if any, in the workgroup ID field.
 If you have already a remote TM with the same languages, you will need to enter a symbolic name.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test the remote TM. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:AddTm_3.png]]

WFA has access to the public TM server, which consists of segments offered by the community of translators and is available to all under the name VLTM (Very Large Translation Memory). The TM is unrestricted, free of charge and anonymous.
 For a VLTM, you need to enter source and target language codes.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test if the VLTM is available for your languages. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

==== Appending a TM to an existing TM ====
You can upload and append a TM to one of your existing TMs by clicking on the '''''merge''''' button.

[[File:MergeTm.png]]

 The process is slightly the same than uploading a TM but you should first select the existing TM in the list. The memory to import will already have predefined source and target languages codes in the header of the TM. There may therefore be a conflict of languages between it and the existing memory. If the languages are different, the merge operation will be rejected.
 You also have the choice, in case there are identical source segments, to add always the TM segments, or to not add duplicated segments from the TM. Select '''Add always''' or '''Do not add duplicate''' in the list box.
 By default, the merge process will not take language variants into account. If you want to make sure exactly the same variants are merged, tick the '''append TUs having the same variant''' option.
 Finally click on the '''''Merge''''' button of the '''''Append TUs''''' dialog box

==== Selecting an existing TM for translating a document ====
Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''TMs and Glossaries''' button on '''File''' menu to open the dialog and select an existing TM.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Caution''': If your TM is selected in the TM list, it does not mean selected for translating a document.
To select a TM for translation, you have to tick it in the '''active''' column and click on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' dialog box.
In this example above, 2 EN>FR TMs and 2 EN>FR glossaries are set active for translation.

[[File:notice.png]] A document can have as active '''several read-only''' TMs, but '''only one writeable'''. You might need to uncheck the active checkbox from the current writeable TM in order to set a new one.

=== Glossary ===
The use of incorrect terminology can ruin an otherwise good translation. Many clients have a well-defined terminology (the jargon of the trade), compiled in the form of a glossary. By supplying this glossary to their translators, clients can impose a particular terminology. In adopting this approach, very common in technical translation, the end result should harmoniously fuse the linguistic competence of the translator with the terminological requirements of the client.

Sometimes the client will ask the translator to provide a glossary of terms arising from research undertaken during the translation. In this case, the translator must create a glossary and add specific terminology to it. This glossary building can either be done prior to translation (in an initial terminology research phase), or during the translation itself.

In many cases, however, the client provides a bilingual glossary, which has already been created during the course of previous translations. It is then up to the translator to comply strictly with it and, where appropriate, to add his or her own contributions.

When the translation work is of a more general nature (and especially if a translator is still in the process of acquiring the general vocabulary of a source language), WFA’s glossary function can also be used to itemise terminology that is encountered during the course of the translation process.

Wordfast Anywhere is designed to assist the translator in all the cases mentioned above through the implementation of its glossary function. This glossary consists of a simple tab-delimited text document, which – like the TM – can be uploaded to and downloaded from WFA, shared with other CAT programs, etc. as required.

==== Creating a glossary ====
Like TM there are several ways to create or add a glossary:
* Create an empty standard WFA glossary
* Upload an existing glossary
* Link to remote glossaries
* Link to Tilde Terminology services
* Link to a IATE glossary

To create an empty glossary, click on the '''''Create''''' button of the glossary buttons area and follow the same TM pattern.

To Upload an existing glossary, click on the '''''upload''''' button of the glossary buttons area and follow the same TM pattern.
 Allowed file types are simple tabulated text file (*.txt) (source + tab + target), Wordfast glossary text file (*.txt), Excel file (*.xls, *.xlsx) and TBX file (*.tbx).
 Excel files must be simple:
* 1st Column: Source (compulsory)
* 2nd Column: Target (compulsory)
* 3rd Column: Comment (optional)
* 4th Column: F1 (optional)
* 5th Column: F2 (optional)
* 6th Column: F3 (optional)

 Unlike with a TM, WFA cannot derive the source and target language information from the header of the glossary file; therefore this must be specified here.
 Once the glossary has been uploaded, you will receive a report summarising the operation:
 You will see how many terms have been submitted for upload, how many were rejected as invalid or duplicates well as the total number of terms added.

To add a remote glossary or Tilde Terminology services, click on the '''''add''''' button.

[[File:AddGlossary_1.png]]

Select the type in th elist box.

[[File:AddGlossary_2.png]]

For adding a remote glossary, copy paste the given URL in the URL field.
 If you have already a remote glossary with the same languages, you will need to enter a symbolic name.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test the remote glossary. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:AddGlossary_3.png]]

For setting Tilde Terminology services, you need to select source and target languages and a domain.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test if you have collections. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:addIATE.png]]

To set an IATE glossary, just select the source and target languages. Only languages from the European community are supported.
Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button and if the glossary exists, click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:addIATE2.png]]

By default not all IATE terminology is showed, but you can enable it by checking '''''Show all common terminology'''''.

==== Appending terms from a local glossary to an existing glossary in Wordfast Anywhere ====
You can upload and append a glossary to one of your existing glossaries by clicking on the '''''merge''''' button.

[[File:MergeGlo.png]]

 The process is slightly the same than uploading but you should first select the existing glossary in the list.
 You have the choice, in case there are identical entries (source and target), to add always or to not add duplicated. Select '''Add always''' or '''Do not add duplicate''' in the list box.
 Finally click on the '''''Merge''''' button.

==== Selecting one or more glossaries for translation ====
Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''TMs and Glossaries''' button on '''File''' menu to open the dialog and select an existing TM.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Caution''': If your glossary is selected in the glossary list, it does not mean selected for translation.
To select a glossary for translation, you have to tick it in the '''active''' column and click after on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' dialog box.

[[File:notice.png]] A document can have as active '''several read-only''' glossaries, but '''only one writeable'''. You might need to uncheck the active checkbox from the current writeable glossary in order to set a new one.

==== Using a glossary ====

[[File:Use glossary.png]]

* Whenever WFA recognises a term from the glossary in the source segment it highlights it against a blue background

* The terms highlighted in blue are considered as placeables. They can thus be manipulated with the [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] and [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] icons or the Ctrl+Alt+Right and Ctrl+Alt+Left shortcuts and by clicking on them with the mouse or by typing their initial letter + Tab. The difference is that, when you use the [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]] icon or the Ctrl+Alt+Down shortcut, it is the corresponding translation that is copied to the target segment. The most easy way to copy a target is probably to use the Auto-suggest feature, enabled by default. Target terms are proposed by typing the first letter of the target term of the 3 first letters of the source term. [[File:Auto-suggest target term.png]] [[File:Auto-suggest target term 2.png]].

* You can see in advance what the translation of the highlighted items is by activating the glossary panel (keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+H or by selecting it from the '''''View''''' tab => '''''Show/Hide Glossary''''' [[File:panelGlo.png]] button )

* If you want to know more about a term, i.e. the information that you or someone else has entered in the comment or F1, F2 and F3 fields, place your mouse over the source term and this information will be displayed. See above the bubble of the last term on the glossary panel (translation).

==== Adding terms to the glossary ====

[[File:Add_term.png]]

It is quite likely that you will want to incorporate terms you come across in the source text into the glossary together with their translations that arise as part of your research process. This way, your linguist’s memory will be reinforced and you are less likely to have to research the same word or phrase again in the future. WFA allows you to do this dynamically, at any time and without exiting your translation process.

First, select the term in the source text. If it consists of one word, you can simply click on it or use the Tab key to move forwards (or Shift+Tab to move backwards) through the text until you reach its position.

The word you have selected will be highlighted against a red border.

Then click on the target term in the target segment.

The selected target term will have a blue background.

[[File:Select terms.png]]

Next, invoke the Glossary Dialog Box by typing Ctrl+Alt+T, or clicking the '''''Add Term''''' [[File:TermEdit.png]] button.

If a single word, the terms you highlighted in the source and target segments should automatically appear in the Source and Target fields.
If the terms consists of more than one word, it may be necessary to paste the text into the fields from your computer’s clipboard or type the information manually.

You can also add a comment – something that may prove useful in the future, e.g. if you want to remember the situation in which this translation was used. The F1, F2 and F3 fields may be used to store word role, context, grammatical form or any other relevant text-based information.

Then click Save to confirm.

==== Fuzzy terminology recognition ====
Each time you open a segment, Wordfast Anywhere checks for the presence in the glossary of all words and terms contained in the source segment. This operation is called terminology recognition. The recognised terms are highlighted in blue in the source segment, as discussed above.

In establishing a correspondence between the terms of the source segment and the terms found in the glossary, WFA will both recognise an exact match and attempt to recognise fuzzy matches.

WFA employs a stemming algorithm for some languages (e.g. German) in order to recognise different forms of the same word that may correspond to those listed in the glossary.

For example, WFA can recognised the infinitive verb ‘besuchen’ as being related to the adjective (or past participle) ‘besucht’ due to the fact that the two words share a common stem.

Fuzzy matching can also be established by using an asterisk in combination with the term. This method overrides the stemming algorithm, allowing you to find all terms that begin with, end with or contain a particular text string.

=== Concordance search ===
Segments stored in the TM are retrieved only if they have a minimum level of correspondence with the source segment (by default 75%). However, even if the level of correspondence is not sufficient to produce a fuzzy match, the TM may still contain terms that you have previously translated and wish to use in your current translation. To search in the memory you have two options:

1) Click on the '''''Concordance''''' button [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]] or use the '''Ctrl+Alt+C''' shortcut. The following window appears:

[[File:concordance.png]]

Enter the word or text string you want to research in the Search field. WFA will search for all words that are the same or begin with the same sequence of letters as the string entered.

You can also select the word or text string with the mouse and then click on the '''''Concordance''''' button [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]] or '''Ctrl+Alt+C''' shortcut. The result will be displayed immediately.

You can edit or delete a term in the concordance search window by clicking on the edit or delete links.

You can add to your search possibilities by choosing the Advanced option:
* Two words or text strings (search terms) separated by a space: one or the other must exist in the TU
* Two terms separated by the + sign: both terms must exist
* A term ending with an asterisk: a search is performed for all text strings containing the search term.

When you use this option, a help line is displayed to remind you how this command works.

=== Searching in a glossary===
You can also search in the glossary. To do this, click the '''''Glossary Search''''' button [[File:GlossarySearch.png]] or use the '''Ctrl+Alt+G''' shortcut:

[[File: Glossary search.png]]

Type the source language word you wish to search for in the Search field and click OK. The list of glossary entries that contain the search term will be displayed.
You can edit or delete a term in the glossary search window by clicking on the edit or delete icons.

By employing an asterisk in the search term, you can expand your search to find all glossary entries that include the text string that the search term is made up of.

== TM & Glossary Advanced features ==

=== TM operations ===
==== View/Edit a TM ====
Select the TM in the list then click on the '''''Edit''''' button.

[[File:ViewEditTm.png]]

The dialog box displays the TM information. Depending on the TM type, you can edit some properties.
* Standard WFA TM : you have the possibility to define attributes of your TM, which will allow you to subsequently identify its segments. Click on the '''Attributes''' tab.
[[File:EditTmAttributes.png]]

There are five attributes in a Wordfast TM: the first is fixed and immutable, consisting of the name of the user. The other four can be defined by each user at will, but it is recommended to use attribute 1 to describe the subject of the text to be translated and attribute 2 for the client, to maintain compatibility with Wordfast Classic and Wordfast Pro users. Attributes consist of codes, usually 3 letters, followed by a brief description. In the fields referred to as TM attribute 1 to 4, enter the name of the attribute (subject, client, etc.). In the field on their right, select one of the attributes that appear on the drop-down list or, if necessary, click '''add''' to add an attribute, '''upd''' to update it or '''del''' to delete it. Whatever option is chosen, a dialog will appear asking for the code of the attribute (ID) and a brief description (Name, ignored for the Del option).
[[file:EditTmAttributes_add.png]] [[file:EditTmAttributes_update.png]] [[file:EditTmAttributes_delete.png]]

Dynamic codes : Predefined attributes can be added by entering a code between accolades as explain in the help.
[[File:EditTmAttributes_help.png]]

* Remote private Wordfast server

[[File:EditRemoteTm.png]] You can edit the workgroup ID and/or the symbolic name.

==== Download a TM ====
This is available only for standard WFA TM.

[[File:DownloadTm.png]]

From the Downloaded file format drop-down list you can select either the Wordfast TM TXT format, the Standard TMX format, the MS Excel XLS format or the Bilingual document TXLF format.
 Click on the '''Download''' button.

===== Filters when downloading a TM =====
Select ''"Filtering (advanced options)"'' on the second drop-down list and click on the '''Download''' button.

[[File:Tm_download2.JPG]]

This will analyse the TM and let you apply some filters to select what you want to download from the TM.

[[File:Tm_download_filter.JPG]]

[[File:Tm_download_filter2.JPG]]

Once filters are selected click on the '''Download''' button to finish the download.

==== Removing a TM ====
After clicking on the top '''Remove''' button on the TM side, this red warning is displayed to confirm the deletion.
 For TMs that are not Wordfast Anywhere standard TMs only the link to the external TM is cut.

[[File:DeleteTm.png]]

==== Quick TM Share ====
By clicking on the small '''share''' button on top of the TM side, you can share quickly a TM to somebody else having an account in Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:CreateTMShare.png]]

Click on the '''''Add guest''''' button and enter his email address (which should be his account login), then click '''Add'''.

[[File:CreateTMShare2.png]]

You can change the privilege of your guest on your TM. Finally to save the share, click on the '''''Save''''' button.

==== TMs Tools ====
===== Reversing a TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmReverse.png]]

Select a TM to reverse and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a TM already exists with the same name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Assembling several TMs in one TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmAssembled.png]]

Select one or more TMs to assemble in one TM and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a TM already exists with the same name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 if '''keep old assigned name''' is unchecked this information will be lost.
 if '''keep variants''' is checked, the TU will not be changed, otherwise, it take the given language pair.
 if '''keep user ID''' is checked, the TU will not be changed, otherwise, it will take your user ID.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Edit a TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmEdit.png]]

Select a TM to edit and click on the '''Run''' button.
 The TM will be opened as a temporary associated document in the document panel.

[[File:ToolsTmEdit1.png]]

Here you can for example update target segments, edit source segments and delete TU. Those changes will be stored straight on your TM.
 Bear in mind that this is a TM although it looks like a document.

After the TM edition, the temporary document must be deleted because it is a static copy of the TM.
 The tool can only edit and delete existing TUs and the TM size is limited to 100000 TUs.

=== Glossary operations ===
==== View/Edit a glossary ====
Select the glossary in the list then click on the '''''View/Edit''''' button.

[[File:ViewEditGlo.png]]

The dialog box displays the glossary information. Depending on the glossary type, you can edit some properties.

[[File:EditRemoteGlo.png]]

[[File:EditTildeGlo.png]]

==== Download a glossary ====
This is available only for standard WFA glossary.

[[File:DownloadGlo.png]]

Click on the '''Download''' button.

==== Removing a glossary ====
After clicking on the top '''Remove''' button on the glossary side, this red warning is displayed to confirm the deletion.
 For glossaries that are not standard only the link to the external glossary is cut.

[[File:DeleteGlo.png]]

==== Quick Glossary Share ====
By clicking on the small '''share''' button on top of the glossary side, you can share quickly a glossary to somebody else having an account in Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:CreateGloShare.png]]

Click on the '''''Add guest''''' button and enter his email address (which should be his account login), then click '''Add'''.

[[File:CreateGloShare2.png]]

You can change the privilege of your guest on your glossary. Finally to save the share, click on the '''''Save''''' button.

==== Glossaries tools ====
===== Reversing a glossary=====
[[File:ToolsGloReverse.png]]

Select a glossary to reverse and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a glossary already exists with the reversed glossary name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Assembling several glossaries in one glossary =====
[[File:ToolsGloAssembled.png]]

Select two or more glossaries to assemble and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a glossary already exists with the assembled glossary name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 if '''keep old assigned name''' is unchecked this information will be lost.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

=== TMs and glossaries shares ===

You can allow other users to share your TM as well as your glossary and you can see the TMs and the glossaries shared to you by others.
To manage all kind of share, click on the bottom '''''Share''''' button of the TMs and glossaries dialog. At that time you will receive the following:

[[File:Tmglo_share_1.png]]

* If you have already enabled the sharing of your TMs and your glossaries with other users, they will be displayed in the '''My shares to other users''' table. You can revoke sharing with any of these users. To do this, select the user in question and click '''Revoke'''. To add or update an existing share click on the '''Add''' or '''Edit''' buttons and see the chapter '''Add and edit shares to other users''' below.
* You can visualize all the TMs and glossaries that have been shared to you in the '''My shares from other users''' table. You can end any share by selecting it and clicking on the '''Remove''' button.
* You can also share your TMs and glossaries to applications like Wordfast Classic and Wordfast Pro by generating keys. they are displayed in the '''My shares to applications''' table. See below the chapter '''Sharing to applications'''.

==== Add and edit shares to other users ====

[[File:Tmglo_share_2.png]]

[[File:Tmglo_share_edit.png]]

[[File:Tmglo_share_3.png]]

==== Sharing to applications ====
Wordfast Anywhere will generate up to 5 keys to share one or more TMs and, optionally, glossaries.
The key is needed for the external application to connect to that specific share.

[[File:Tmglo_share_app_1.png]]

If you want to add the TMs and glossaries currently used, click on the '''Add active TMs and glossaries''', otherwise click on the '''Add''' button to choose a TM and the '''Add''' button to choose a glossary.
 Choose the right privilege and the number of keys needed, then click on the the '''Save''' button.
 The keys will be generated and listed in the '''My shares to application''' table. See below.

[[File:Tmglo_share_app_2.png]]

For instance this can be used on Wordfast Pro 3.4.9, where there is a tab for Wordfast Anywhere TM and glossaries.

[[File:Wpftab.png]]

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QVOMOYfR2ws&feature=em-subs_digest this video] about how to do it.

 Although the API key is for a combined TM and glossary, on Wordfast Pro 3.4.9 you need to add it twice: one for TM and one for glossary

[[Wordfast Pro]] users can check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=S7QCHNpRtKo&feature=em-subs_digest this video].

= Translation =
== Preparation of the translation environment ==
Before beginning the translation of a document using a CAT tool, you must first have an active Translation Memory.

'''Note''': an initial TM was automatically set up when you created your account.

The TM consists of a database, which will record each source language segment (i.e. sentence, phrase) that you translate, together with the corresponding target language segment. As it grows, this increasingly allows you to obtain translations of phrases made previously that are the same or similar to the one you are currently translating.

For more information check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Translation_Memory|Translation Memory basics]]'''.

== Translating ==
To start the translation, you must first open the initial segment.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:StartNext.png]] '''''Start/Next''''' button or use the ''Alt + Down'' shortcut . When you do this, the document area is transformed: the segment is displayed in light blue block (source), a grey block (target) is placed just below it and the rest of your document is shown on the rest of the page. The cursor is located in the grey block.

Translate the segment in the grey block

[[File:StartTrans.png|1200px]]

After translating this segment, you can continue with your translation. To move to the next segment, click on the [[File:StartNext.png]] '''''Start/Next''''' or use the ''Alt+Down'' shortcut. Remember this shortcut, as you will use it for each segment you translate. You can also move to previous segment by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Previous.png]] '''''Previous''''' or use the ''Alt + Up'' shortcut.

[[File:notice.png]] '''''When translating, the segments are saved automatically in the translation memory and on the database system as soon as you go to the next segment.'''''

Now translate the segment as before.

Now that you get the idea, you can continue to translate. Remember: to move from one segment to the next, use ''Alt+Down''. To return to the previous segment (to correct something that you subsequently realised was mistaken), use ''Alt+Up''.

Following are some '''other considerations''' regarding the translation of segments.

'''Note''': Most browser / OS combinations, including Firefox, Safari and Chrome, have their own spell checker – in some cases it may be necessary for you to activate it. You can also use '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Spellcheck|Spellcheck]]'''

There is color code for the target block:
* Grey is the no match from the TM (score=0)
* Green is the full match from the TM (score=100)
* Yellow is a fuzzy match from the TM (score between 50 to 99)
* Orange is a MT proposition
* Purple is the color when the segment has been modified by the editor

Score information can be found in different places depending on the view.
For '''Classic view''' it can be found on ''<}score{>'' tag between source and target segment.

[[File:ScoreC.png|1200px]]

For '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views''' there is a column for the score.

[[File:ScoreH.png|1200px]]

[[File:ScoreV.png|1200px]]

=== Tags ===

Before translating this new segment, pay attention to the tag <1>, which appears here at the end. WFA is not a word processor and thus does not concern itself with a specific representation of the document's formatting. You'll see no changes in size or typeface, no bold or italic characters. Instead, this information is encoded and represented by what we call "tags", e.g. <1>. By slowly passing your mouse over this tag you will see what it represents. This tag is not to be translated, but it should be placed on the appropriate position in the target segment. If you want to recopy a tag from the source segment please type < to trigger the tags proposal.

[[File:tagProposal.png]]

You can also copy it by using the comands on '''Translation''' tab: [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] '''Next Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Right'') and [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] '''Previous Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Left'') to navigate the source segment to the desired tag. A red frame indicates the selected item. Then position the cursor in the target segment and click on [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]] '''Copy Pl.'''(''Ctrl+Alt+Down'').

Differences on the formatting tags (<1>, <2>) between source and target segment can make the file filter aligner have difficulties to build up the translated document.

Check there is no ''segments with tag difference'' using one of this options:
# Click on [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button on '''File''' tab to get a report. Check if there are any ''segments with tag difference''. Use '''''Show Outline''''' [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button on '''View''' tab to go straight to one segment.
# Click on [[File:FindReplace.png]] '''''Find & Replace''''' button on '''Edit''' tab. Go to ''Miscellaneous'' tab and run a ''Tag difference'' search. Segments with tag differences will be listed.

On the listed segments you must pay attention to:
# There is no target tag missing that exists on source.
# The target tag order is different from source order. For example [<1>text text<2>] on source but [<2>text text<1>] on target.
# The target tag content is not identical with the source tag. You can see the content of the tag when the mouse is over it.

[[File:Warning.png]] We '''do not recommend to use copy/paste or drag and drop''' to copy the tags as it can copy more than the eye can see and be problematic. It is better to use the the auto-suggest feature with tags (whenever you want to add a tag just type < and the list of tags from source will be proposed for selection) or the [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]] '''Copy Placeable''' on '''Translation''' tab.

== Main commands ==

=== Provisional segment ===
You may be unsure whether your translation of a segment is correct. To avoid having to interrupt your translation process, you can mark the segment as provisional.

It will be identified by a yellow square at the beginning of the line for '''Classic view''' or at the end of the row for '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views'''.

To mark a segment as provisional, use the F10 key or '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mark.png]] '''''Provisional'''''.

When you have resolved any doubts, simply return to the marked segment and make your corrections. Use ''Alt+Down'' ( [[File:StartNext.png]] ) or ''Alt-Up'' ( [[File:Previous.png]] ) to validate the segment and erase the yellow square.

=== Auto propagate ===
Use this command to translate a segment and automatically propagate the current segment changes through all the document to other segments having the same source.

Find it in '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Autopropagate.png]] '''''Auto Propagate'''''.

=== Note ===
You can also write a note to be attached to the segment for the duration of the translation (in a similar manner to a Post-ItTM). You can use this to remind yourself of something important about this segment or to pass information on to people who will have access to your translation, such as reviewers.

To write a note, click on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Edit_Note16.png]] '''''Edit Note'''''.

The following text box will be displayed:

[[File:Editnote.png|1200px]]

Write your note in the text box and click Save. You can cancel the operation by clicking Cancel. In the case of an existing note, you can edit and validate it by clicking Save, or delete it by clicking Remove.

A green square will be placed at the beginning of the segment to indicate that a note is attached. By passing the mouse pointer over this square, you will see a rectangle containing the text of the note.

It will be identified by a grey square with an "i" in it at the beginning of the line for '''Classic view''' or at the end of the row for '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views'''.

[[File:Editnote2.png|1200px]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Notes can be downloaded by going to '''''File''''' tab => [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' and choosing the '''''Notes Report'''''

=== Copying the original segment ===
Sometimes a segment contains very little to translate: for example, when it consists almost entirely of proper names or is made up of a website address. In this case, it may be preferable to copy the entire source segment to the target segment and make any adjustments there.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CopySource.png]] '''''Copy Source'''''. or use the shortcut ''Alt-Ins'.

=== Erasing the target segment ===
Sometimes it is necessary to erase what you have just written in the target segment.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Cleanup_Project16.png]] '''''Del Target'''''. or use the shortcut ''Ctrl+Alt+X''.

This button has a toggle behaviour through: Empty target, Remove tags and Restore.

=== Insertion of a special character like the non-breaking space ===
When you write in French, some characters must be accompanied by a non-breaking space: e.g. before the colon, semicolon, exclamation mark, question mark, exclamation mark, before and after quotes, thousands separators, and so on. In WFA, a non-breaking space is represented by the symbol < >.

However, such spaces cannot be automatically handled in an Internet browser as they are when using a text editor such as Word. Therefore it will be necessary to add them manually. By default, a non-breaking space is inserted at the cursor location by clicking on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Insert_c1.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 1'''''.

Two other special characters can be inserted like the curly quotes. Use '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Insert_c2.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 2''''' and [[File:Insert_c3.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 3'''''.

You can configure these 3 special characters in WFA setup (see '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Pandora.27s_box_tab|Pandora’s box]]''').

=== Expanding a segment ===
As we have seen, WFA considers that the segment is terminated when it encounters a segment termination marker. However, in some cases this segmentation is in error. For example, when WFA’s segmentation engine meets the following sentence:
''On pense aux conseils de Prof. Jacques Lacan:''
it can interpret the segment as ending with ''Prof.'' because a full stop is used as an end of segment marker. In this case we can command WFA to expand the segment, that is to say, to append the subsequent segment to it.

[[File:exspand1.png]]

This is done with the ''Alt+Pg'' dn shortcut or '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Expand_Segment16.png]] '''''Expand'''''.

[[File:exspand2.png]]

It is important to expand segments when the segmentation has not been performed correctly because this will increase the chances of it corresponding with a translation memory segment. For example, the segment ''On pense aux conseils de Prof.'' will have little chance of having a similarity of over 75% with another. By contrast, if the sentence ''On pense aux conseils de Prof. Jacques Lacan:'' is in the TM, when WFA encounters the source sentence ''On pense aux conseils de Professeur Jacques Lacan'', it will offer the existing translation, as it has 90% similarity (it is only the word Professor that is not the same).

A segment cannot be expanded if it is terminated by an end of paragraph or end of cell marker, a page break or a tab.

You should not have to expand all segments containing abbreviations that end with a full stop. A comma-separated, modifiable list of common language-specific abbreviations is included in WFA . This can be accessed and modified via the segmentation tab in the configuration dialog box [case-sensitive, optional letters are enclosed in square brackets].

[[File:Abbrev.png]]

=== Shrinking a segment ===
If, on the other hand, two segments are erroneously displayed together due to an absence of an end of segment marker, you can also shrink the segment with the shortcut ''Alt-Pg'' up or ''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:ShrinkSeg.png]] '''''Shrink'''''.

=== Placeables ===

A placeable is any term or expression contained in the source segment that is defined as such. WFA provides shortcuts for inserting them into the target segment, thus both saving time and reducing the potential for typing errors.

WFA predefines as placeables:
*Numbers
*Tags
*Words beginning with, or otherwise containing, capital (upper case) letters
*Words or phrases appearing in the source text that have matching items stored in the '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Glossary|Glossary]]'''.

We have already seen how to copy tags. Given that a tag is a placeable, the procedure is the same: to copy any placeable, simply select it with the comands on '''Translation''' tab: [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] '''Next Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Right'') and [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] '''Previous Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Left'').

You also have the possibility of clicking on any term in the source text, thus placing it under focus and temporarily transforming it into a placeable. A red frame indicates the item selected.

Next, position the cursor in the target segment at the point where the placeable should be positioned or double-click (click and drag) to select the word (phrase) to be replaced and click on the on [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]] '''Copy Pl.'''(''Ctrl+Alt+Down''). The placeable is copied to the relevant position in the target segment.

In this sentence, the placeable elements, selected by ''Ctrl+Alt+Right'' or [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]], are:

[[File:place1.png]]
(starts with a capital letter)

[[File:place2.png]]
(number)

[[File:place3.png]]
(tag)

And, if necessary, any term may be designated as a placeable simply by clicking on it:

[[File:place4.png]]

As you translate the text, you only want to place those elements that should not be translated:

[[File:place5.png]]

At this point, you want to write ‘Chenjerai.’. However it may be faster and more efficient (as well as reducing the possibility of error) to select the item using ''Ctrl+Alt+Right'' or [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] (or even by simply clicking on it) and place it into the segment target with ''Ctrl+Alt+Down'' or [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]].

[[File:place6.png]]

The following proper noun ‘Hove’ is also a placeable, so you can repeat the procedure. Simply use the '''Tab key''' on your keyboard to advance from one placeable to the next (or '''Shift+Tab''' to move in the opposite direction).

[[File:place7.png]]

You can also use the ''Ctrl+Alt+Up'' shortcut or [[File:Dropdown.png]] '''Toggle Pl.'' on '''Translation''' tab to transform terms in the source segment into placeables.

For even greater efficiency, if you type a letter that begins a word or term in the source segment and then successively press Tab, all words or terms beginning with that letter are successively copied to the target segment. For example, in the above sentence, typing ''l'' followed by '''Tab''' will copy ''lyrique'' to the target. Each time you press the Tab key, the word or term that has been copied to the target segment will be replaced by the next
word or term appearing in the source segment that begins with the same letter, i.e. ''le'', ''laisse'' and so on.

=== Case changer ===
Use this feature to toggle through: lowercase, uppercase and proper name for a word. This feature can be used in one word (by putting the cursor inside the word), or with more than one word (by selecting several words with the mouse or Shift+Left/Right Arrow).
Beware that some times it gets crazy with the first and last word.

Use it bu clicking on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:CaseChanger.png]] '''''Case Changer'''''.

=== Increase target height ===
You can increase the target height by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Increase_target.png]] '''''Target Height'''''.

=== Web Speech Beta ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY available for Chrome. Currently disabled due to browser security.'''

This is a beta implementation that uses Google Web Speech API to insert your dictation into the target segment.

To use it, first open the segment and then click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mic.png]] '''''Web Speech Beta''''' button to start the dictation. The icon will change to indicate recording is on. To stop dictation click again on the button.

You can add a shortcut to this command.

You can jump to the next segment as always and keep on dictating. Or you can stop dictation, jump to the next segment and start dictation again.

A provisional transcription will be shown as an auto-suggest text and the final transcription will be inserted on the target segment. The provisional transcription might not be accurate while final transcription should be quite accurate and may be different from provisional transcription.

Please take into account that this is a beta implementation and that voice transcription is done online so there can be delays when dictating. We encourage you to use it and give us some feedback.

[[File:Warning.png]] It can be that Chrome keeps asking you to allow the use of the microphone every time. You need to check the Chrome settings: "Privacy>Content Settings>Microphone>Manage exceptions". There you should have an exception for https:freetm.com.

If you are connected to the site via HTTS the grant is permanent, if you use HTTP, you are asked each time.

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rR88md-xyik&feature=em-uploademail this video] about how to use this tool.

Check this links for more information:

[https://support.google.com/chrome/answer/3123708?p=settings_manage_exceptions&rd=1 Chrome Exceptions]

[https://support.google.com/chrome/answer/6148059?hl=en Chrome website permissions]

=== Edit Source ===
Using '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:EditSource16.png]] '''''Edit Source''''' will help you to correct the source text in order to have valid TU in memory.

This will not change the source file and obviously will not automatically change the target segment.

=== Ending the translation ===
If for any reason you want to stop translating, you have three choices:
* Close the translation and validate the current segment in the TM ('''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close & Commit''''' or ''Alt+End'')
* Close the translation without validating it ('''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:Close.png]] '''''Close''''' or ''Shift+Alt+End'')
* Clear the content of the target segment, together with any attached note, by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:Close_restore.png]] '''''Close & Delete''''' .

== After Translation ==

When your translation is finished, you use one of our '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Review|Review]]''' tools before '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Download|Download]]''' it.

= Tools =
=== Downloading TXML file ===
You can download your document in TXML format, the standard working file format used by WFA. This permits you, for example, to send the file to a colleague for review using Wordfast Anywhere or Pro. Once reviewed and corrected, you can upload it again.

To download your working file go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual TXML'''''.

[[File:DownloadTypesList.png]]

If your translation is incomplete or contains provisional segments or notes, you will receive this warning:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

At this point you have the choice to accept (OK) or cancel (Cancel) to return to your translation. If you accept, you will need to consider the following dialog:

[[File:DownloadOptions2a.png]]

You can optionally instruct WFA to copy the source segment to the target segment if it is blank (check Copy source to target if target is empty) and/or to ignore language variations, e.g. to not make a distinction between British and American English (check No language variants).

Choose the way to download the file and click '''''OK''''' to donwload the file.

=== Merging TXML files ===
If you already have a file in TXML format you can upload it to your workspace. To do this go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:Mergetms16.png]] '''Merge Txml''' button. At this point you must complete the following dialog box:

[[File:Mergetxml1.PNG]]

By checking Merge an existing document, all documents that exist in your workspace will be listed according to language pair, and you will have to choose which will be merged with the file you intend to upload.

You can also set WFA to update the TM corresponding to the file you upload (check Update or create a TM with a bilingual document). Check Merge an existing TM and choose which TM to update from the list displayed. You will also need to determine whether, in the case of identical source segments, new TUs should be added to existing ones (Keep existing TUs) or whether they should replace them (Overwrite existing TUs). If, on the other hand, you prefer to create a new TM, click on Create a new TM. At this point, you will have the opportunity to give this new TM a name, if you have more than one TM for the same language pair. Then click Upload to upload the file or Close to exit without doing anything.

Note that operations performed on the document are independent from memory-related operations, allowing you to update only the document, or only the memory, or both.
If you have clicked Upload, you will receive the following message:

[[File:Mergetxml2.png]]

Click Browse to navigate through your directories and select your file, then click Submit to perform the upload or Cancel to cancel the operation. After the merge operation has been successfully performed, a report will appear showing how many segments were merged.

[[File:Mergetxml3.png]]

=== Other downloads ===
You can also download the working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments, usable by Wordfast Classic (and Trados Workbench).

[[File:Bilingualwordfastclassic.png]]

This will allow your document to be proofread by a Wordfast Classic user. Caution, this download is only available for files formatted as .doc and .rtf. Unlike the TXML file, this format cannot be imported into WFA.

To download your working file in bilingual MS-Word format, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the '''''Download''''' button and choose '''Bilingual Doc original''' option. This option is only available if your source file is a MS Word file.

[[File:DownloadTypesList.png]]

If your translation is incomplete or contains provisional segments or notes, you will receive this warning:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

At this point you have the choice to accept (OK) or cancel (Cancel) to return to your translation. If you accept, you will need to respond to the following message:

[[File:Bilingualwordfastclassic2.png]]

Following the same steps you can download this other files:

* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments without placeholders Bilingual. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC no placeholders''''' option.
* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments with placeholders Bilingual. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC with placeholders''''' option.
* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments with tag-content as placeholder. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC tag content''''' option.
* Your translated file, in plain text format, without any formatting. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Unformatted Text''''' option.

=== Find & Replace ===
It is often necessary to locate a word or text string in a file that has been translated. For this we use the Doc Find and Replace function. Go to '''''Edit''''' tab and click on the [[File:FindReplace.png]] '''''Find & Replace''''' button.

As with other functions that require the current segment to be closed, you will receive a warning that the current segment will be closed without being saved. If you agree, click OK, otherwise click Cancel to cancel the transaction and save your work.

[[File:Warning.png]] By default search is only done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:SR1.png]]

'''''Find & Replace''''' dialog has 4 tabs performing different actions.

* Use '''Find''' tab to locate a word or text in your document.
* Use '''Find/Replace''' tab to locate and replace a word or text in your document.
* Use '''Go to Segment''' tab to search for single segments (1,5,68,499) or a range of segments (25-66).
* Use '''Miscellaneous''' tab to perform different types of searches such as look for '''provisional''' or '''untranslated''' segments, or segments with '''notes''' or '''tag differences'''.

[[File:Notice.png]] You can use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:Warning.png]] Not all the options are always available.
==== Find ====
Use '''Find''' tab.
Type the word or text you want to find and click '''Find''' button to start a search. When search is done hits are highlighted and the number of hits is shown on the dialog.

[[File:SR6.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] By default search is only done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:SR7.png]]

==== Replace ====
Use '''Find/Replace''' tab. Type the word/text you want to find and the word/text you want it replaced for and click '''Find''' button to start a search. When search is done hits are highlighted and the number of hits is shown on the dialog.

[[File:SR8.png]]

It may happen that '''Replace''', '''Replace/Find''' and '''Replace All''' buttons are not available. This happens because the first search does not move you to the first hit, you have to click again '''Find''' to move to the next hit and then replace buttons will be available. Use them to replace, replace and move to next hit or replace all hits.

Replace can only be done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Go to Segment ====
Use '''Go to Segment''' tab. Use it to find specific segments. This can be an alternative to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''.
You can type single segments separated by commas (1,5,68,499) or a range of segments (25-66).

[[File:SR4.png]]

Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Miscellaneous ====
Use '''Miscellaneous''' tab. This 6 types of search do not require to type a word/text but will help you locate segments with some particularities. This can be an alternative to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''.

[[File:SR5a.png]]

You can search for:

* '''Provisional''' segments.
* '''Untranslated''' segments.
* Segments with '''Tag difference'''.
* Segments with '''Notes'''.
* Segments with '''Double spaces'''.
* Segments with '''Revisions'''.

Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Advanced search options ====

Using the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button you can access some advanced search options:

[[File:SR2.png]]

* Search for '''Whole Word'''.
* Do a '''Case sensitive''' search.
* Search for words that start/end by the characters using * as a joker. For example searching for *able will find: movable, payable, breakable,...etc. And searching for hand* will find: handbag, handmade, handbook,...etc
* Search on Source, Target or both. This can only be used in '''Find''' tab.
* Mark each found target as provisional.
* Create a note for each replaced segment.
* Update the TM for each replaced segment.
* Do a wrap search
* Change search direction: Backward or Forward.

=== Analyze ===
Before providing a translation quotation, you may wish to analyze the source text to determine the extent of the work required. WFA provides an analytical tool for this purpose. To do this, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the '''''Analyze''''' button and choose '''Analyze'''. If your file is big and you do not want to wait, choose '''Analyze in Background'''.

A progress message is displayed on the status bar. Then the analysis results will be displayed:

[[File:Analysis.png]]

According to the number of repetitions (identical segments that appear more than once in the document) or the percentage of segments that correspond either completely (100%) or partially (<100%) to matches in the TM, you will be able to precisely estimate the volume of work actually requiring to be translated. After having examined the analysis report, click Close.

=== Statistics ===
WFA allows you to see what progress you have made with your translation at any time. To do this, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button.

A statistical report on your translation will be displayed:

[[File:Statistics.png]]

You will see the number of source and target segments (with the percentage already translated in brackets); the number of source and current target words; the number of source and target tags and if there is any segmental discrepancy in terms of differences between the number and content of the source and target tags (segments with tag difference); the number of segments not stored in the TM (segments flagged not saved in TM); the number of provisional segments (provisional segments) and notes (segments with notes). The report also displays which segments remain to be translated. After viewing the statistics, click Close.

Another important indicator is always present on the status bar: it tells you on which segment you currently are in relation to the total number of segments in the document. In this example, the document has 149 segments in total and you are currently on the 68:

[[File:Foot1.png]]

=== Alignment ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This tool is not managed by WFA in case there is any problem use the '''Help''' in the tool, the third tab, to report your problem. You can also sent an email to '''converterhelp@wordfast.com'''

When you begin to translate with a CAT tool you may not be able to derive the maximum benefit from it if you do not yet have a translation memory. Or, a client may have source and target documents from a previous translation but cannot supply you with a TM. In this case, you can quickly derive a TM by performing an "alignment" on the documents you have already translated prior to using WFA for your translation work by using the alignment tool.

To do this, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:WF Update16.png]] '''''Align''''' button.

A new page will open, displaying the following dialog:

[[File:Align.png]]

Follow the instructions to upload the files and align them to get the TM from the alignment.

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HVXTQ5Wb_Eg&feature=em-uploademail this video] about how to use this tool.

You can then upload this TM to be used in WFA.

[[File:Warning.png]] This tool is not managed by WFA in case there is any problem use the '''Help''' in the tool, the third tab, to report your problem. You can also sent an email to '''converterhelp@wordfast.com'''

=== Preview ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Preview|Preview]]'''

=== Transcheck ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Transcheck|Transcheck]]'''

=== Spellcheck ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Spellcheck|Spellcheck]]'''

=== Pretranslation ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.

Go to [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]] '''''Pre-translation''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to open the dialog:

[[File:Pretrans1.png]]

Configure how you want the pre-translation to run:
* Activate '''Fuzzy matches'''
* Set what to do when there is no match from the TM. For setting a MT check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Machine_translation|this]]'''
* Leverage segment scores. Make sure the owner of the document (translation agency or company) has agreed to leverage empty segments.

If your file is big and has many segments run pre-translation in background by clicking on '''Pre Translate in background''' so you can keep working in other things. Otherwise use '''Pre-translate''' button run pre-translation.
Ad the end of the process you'll get a report with the result.

[[File:Pretrans2.png]]

=== Offline Review Tool ===
Use Offline review tool to review a file outside Wordfast Anywhere using a bilingual file and then update the changes.

To get the bilingual file go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Offline review DOC'''''.

[[File:Ofrt11a.png]]

This will download a bilingual file like this.

[[File:ofrt2.png]]

[[File:Notice.png]] Read the disclaimer on the download window and the instructions at the top of the file.

[[File:Warning.png]] Remember to add the tags on the target column as you would do on any translation. '''''Missing tags''''' can cause problems when merging back the file into WFA.

After editing '''only''' the target segments an saving the file you can import it to be merged with the file in Wordfast Anywhere. To do this go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:mergetms16_menu.png]] '''''Merge Offline Review''''' button.

[[File:ofrt3.png]]

A report will be shown with the result of the merge.

[[File:ofrt4.png]]

=== Extract Frequents ===
Use [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]] '''''Extract Frequents''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to create anew file that will contain only the repeated segments of the document.

A first report is created showing the percentage of segments that have an occurrence greater than 2.

[[File:ExtractFrequents1.png]]

Set the '''minumum occurrence''' that you want to extract and click on '''Extract and Open''' to create a new file with the occurrence segments.

=== Go to WFP4 ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.
You can open your document in '''Wordfast Pro 4 Online''' by using [[File:About wordfast16.png]] '''''WFP4''''' button on '''''File''''' tab.

WFP4o will use several settings on WFA along with the TMs and glossaries, so all settings must be done on inside WFA before. Also bear in mind to save your work on WFP4o before switching back to WFA.

[[File:Wf4disclaimer.png]]

Read carefully the disclaimer dialog before clikcing in '''Continue to WFP4o'''.

=== File information ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.

Go to [[File:Modify Project16.png]] '''''File Info''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to open the dialog with information about the file:

[[File:Fileinfo.png]]

=== Split file ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''''This option is only available when the document is closed.'''''

You can split a file in 4 parts by using [[File:Split.png]] '''''Split''''' button on '''''File''''' tab.

[[File:Split1.png]]

For each part a txml file will be created with the corresponding part of the file. The name of the txml files will contain information about which part is. For instance '''_[1of2]''' means the file was splitted into 2 parts and that this file correspond to the first part.

By default files are splited in equally parts, but you can change this and set the boundaries that better suit you.

[[File:Split3.png]]

'''Downloading one of the splited parts will download a TXML file''', but you can choose to download also the entire file in the original format.

[[File:Split2.png]]

Use
[[File:Join.png]] '''''Join''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to put the parts together again. [[File:Warning.png]] '''''This option is only available when the document is closed.'''''

=== Share file ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''This option is only available when the document is closed and is selected from the list.'''

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Share is only possible between Wordfast Anywhere users.'''

You can share your document with '''several Wordfast Anywhere users'''. To do so go to [[File:Share.png]] '''''Share''''' on '''''File''''' tab.

[[File:Share3.png]]

Additional files can be added using '''''Add''''' button on the Document section of the dialogue. If the file belong to a package, all package documents will be added otherwise it will be all documents with the same source and target languages.

To start sharing click on '''''Add''''' button after the Document section to add a new guest. Repeat it to ad more guest users.

[[File:Share_addGuest2.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Guest email must be a valid Wordfast Anywhere account.'''

For each guest two properties can be chosen:
* '''''Share as read-only'''''. This means guest will only access the document in a read-only mode, but no edition will be allowed.
* '''''Keep online (not downloadable)'''''. This means guest will access the file but would not be allowed to download it.

Additionally, you can share a TM and/or glossary with the file.

To do it, use the buttons on the '''''Translation Memories''''' and '''''Glossaries''''' tabs
* '''''Linked to document''''' will add the corresponding TM/glossary associated to the document.
* '''''Add''''' will let you choose which TM/glossary with the same language pair you want to share
* '''''Remove''''' will revoke the share on the selected TM/glossary from the list.

Once guests are added, they are presented on a list on the main dialogue. Any guest will be allowed edit rights unless '''''Share as read-only''''' is check. Owner will always have edit rights.

[[File:Share_mainList2.png]]

Repeat this process to add more guests.

You can use '''''Duplicate''''' button to add a new guest with the same settings than a existing one. Use '''''Revoke''''' button to finish a share with a guest

Check '''''History''''' on the document to force the use of revisions in the document.

As owner and several guests can have edit rights '''a reservation system is used to ensure only one user can edit a segment at a time'''. When a user opens the document the free segments loaded in Document Panel will automatically reserved for him adding a green share icon at the end of the segment. Segments reserved by other users are shown with the same share icon but in red color.
'''The reservation of segments will end when the user closes the document'''.

[[File:Share_reserved.png]]

When a user opens a shared document that is being used by an other user a pop-up message is show to warn about that.

[[File:Share_message.png]]

Also a notification is send to the other working users that a new user has opened the document.

[[File:Share_notification.png]]

Jumping to the next block will release the previous segments and will reserve the new segments being loaded.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''There is no live update of the segments reserved by other users. Which means segments need to be refreshed manually on Document Panel by loading them again, for instance by jumping to a different block and back.'''

To help to know when a user closes the document and releases his segments, a notification is send to the other working users.

[[File:Share_notificationEnd.png]]

'''''To finish a share''''' with a guest owner users need to use '''''Revoke''''', and to remove all the shares use '''''Revoke all'''''. This is a button on the Share dialog ([[File:Share.png]] '''''Share''''' on '''''File''''' tab).

Guest users will not see the share dialogue. They should use [[File:Revoke.png]] '''''Revoke''''' on '''''File''''' tab to finish the share.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Remember Share/Revoke are only available when the document is closed.'''

=== Offline Mode ===
On those situations when there is an internet connection cut or when WFA server is unavailable, WFA will turn on '''Offline Mode'''.

'''Offline Mode''' lets you work offline. It allows you to translate the segments that are currently loaded on the ''Document Panel''.

The translated segments are stored locally and automatically committed to WFA server as soon as the connection is recovered.

If the TM you are using is writeable, TUs will be automatically updated from the document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Be aware that there will be some messages telling you about going in/out of Offline Mode and segments being saved. Some features will not be available during Offline Mode.

[[File:Warning.png]] This feature has nothing to do with Offline Review Tool (OFRT). For information about OFRT, check the index at the top of this Manual.

[[File:Warning.png]] We recommend not to close the browser till synchronization back is done.

= WFA Configuration =
== Features and Shortcuts ==

{|class="wikitable"
|'''Menu tab'''
|'''Feature'''
|'''Shortcut'''
|'''Icon'''
|'''Information'''
|-
|Translation
|Start translation / Next segment
|Alt+Down
|[[File:StartNext.png]]
|Starts a translation session by opening the currently selected segment / Commits the current segment to TM and opens the next segment.
|-
|Translation
|Previous segment
|Alt+Up
|[[File:Previous.png]]
|Commits the current segment to TM and opens the previous segment.
|-
|Translation
|Close & Commit
|Alt+End
|[[File:CloseSave.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment and committing it to the TM.
|-
|Translation
|Close
|Shift+Alt+End
|[[File:Close.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment without committing it to the TM.
|-
|Translation
|Close & Delete
|Alt+Delete
|[[File:Close restore.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment and deleting the target with any note. Do not commit to TM.
|-
|Translation
|Provisional segment
|F10
|[[File:Mark.png]]
|Marks a segment as provisional with a yellow Post-It.
|-
|Translation
|Copy Source
|Alt+Insert
|[[File:CopySource.png]]
|Copies the source segment over the target segment.
|-
|Translation
|Expand
|Alt+PgDn
|[[File:ExpandSeg.png]]
|Expands a segment, if it actually extends beyond the punctuation mark (wrong segmentation). Note that a segment cannot be extended beyond a paragraph mark, page break, tabulator, or table cell.
|-
|Translation
|Shrink
|Alt+PageUp
|[[File:ShrinkSeg.png]]
|Reverses any use of the Expand segment command or reduce the size of a segment.
|-
|Translation
|To Fuzzy
|Shift+Ctrl+PgDn
|[[File:TranslateUntilFuzzy.png]]
|Translates until a non-exact match is found.
|-
|Translation
|Toggle empty
|Ctrl+Alt+X
|[[File:Cleanup Project16.png]]
|Empty the target - remove the tags from the target - restore the original target.
|-
|Translation
|Auto Propagate
|
|[[File:autopropagate.png]]
|Auto propagate segment change through all the document for same source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Toggle Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Up
|[[File:dropdown.png]]
|Transforms all the terms in the source segment into placeables. If repeated, returns to the previous mode.
|-
|Translation
|Next Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Right
|[[File:Next_Placeable16.png]]
|Selects the next placeable element in the source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Copy Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Down
|[[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]]
|Places the selected transposable element from the source segment into the target segment, where the cursor is located (or replaces highlighted text in target segment).
|-
|Translation
|Previous Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Left
|[[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]]
|Selects the previous placeable element in the source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Next word
|Tab
|
|Places the subsequent source word with letter + Tab
|-
|Translation
|Previous word
|Shift+Tab
|
|Places the preceding source word with letter+Shift+Tab.
|-
|Translation
|Target Height
|Ctrl+Alt+T
|[[File:increase_target.png]]
|Increases the height of the target segment for easier viewing.
|-
|Wordfast Anywhere
|Wordfast setup
|Ctrl+Alt+W
|[[File:Setup.png]]
|Opens the Wordfast Anywhere general setup dialog.
|-
|Edit
|Find & Replace
|Ctrl+Alt+R
|[[File:FindReplace.png]]
|Find and replace in the document.
|-
|Edit
|Edit Source
|Ctrl+Alt+K
|[[File:EditSource16.png]]
|Used to make minor corrections to the source segment.
|-
|Edit
|Edit Note
|Ctrl+Alt+J
|[[File:Edit_Note16.png]]
|Allows you to create or edit a note.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 1
|Shift+Ctrl+1
|[[File:insert_c1.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 2
|Shift+Ctrl+2
|[[File:insert_c2.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 3
|Shift+Ctrl+3
|[[File:insert_c3.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Case Changer
|Shift+F3
|[[File:caseChanger.png]]
|Toggle between lowercase, uppercase, and capitalization.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|TMs and glossaries setup
|
|[[File:Preferences16round.png]]
|Opens the TMs and glossaries setup dialog.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Concordance search
|Ctrl+Alt+C
|[[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]]
|Performs a search in the TM and displays all segments containing the search term.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Glossary Search
|Ctrl+Alt+G
|[[File:GlossarySearch.png]]
|Search in the glossary for the word or phrase selected in the source segment.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Add term to glossary
|Ctrl+Alt+T
|[[File:TermEdit.png]]
|Pops up a glossary term entry form.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Copy TU
|Alt+right
|[[File:CopyTU.png]]
|Copy a TU from the TM panel to the target segment. If many, press many times, it will start by copying the second one assuming the first one is already copied. The TU can be a MT proposal.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Delete TU
|Ctrl+Alt+Backspace
|[[File:DeleteTU.png]]
|Delete from TM the current or selected TU visible in the TM panel.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Update TU
|
|[[File:force_tm_addtu.png]]
|Commits to TM the source and target segment as a new TU or update an existing one.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Force TM search
|
|[[File:force_tm.png]]
|Perform a direct search (without cache) in the TM.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Force MT
|
|[[File:force_mt.png]]
|Forces the translation of the segment by the configured MT engines like Google Translate / Microsoft Translator.
|-
|View
|Outline pane
|Ctrl+Alt+D
|[[File:panelOutline.png]]
|Closes or opens the Outline. The outline is a view of all the segments showing which ones are translated but also which ones have notes or are provisional.
|-
|View
|TM pane
|Ctrl+Alt+M
|[[File:panelTm.png]]
|Closes or opens the TM pane.
|-
|View
|Glossary pane
|Ctrl+Alt+H
|[[File:panelGlo.png]]
|Closes or opens the Glossary (Terminology) pane.
|-
|View
|Move next block
|Page Down
|[[File:moveNextScreen.png]]
|Move to the next block of document's content.
|-
|View
|Move previous block
|Page Up
|[[File:movePrevScreen.png]]
|Move to the previous block of document's content.
|-
|View
|First of Block
|Home
|[[File:move_first_seg_screen.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the first segment of the block.
|-
|View
|Last of Block
|End
|[[File:move_last_seg_screen.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the last segment of the page.
|-
|View
|First of Doc
|Ctrl+Home
|[[File:move_first_seg_doc.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the first segment of the document.
|-
|View
|Last of Doc
|Ctrl+End
|[[File:move_last_seg_doc.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the last segment of the document.
|}

== WFA Setup ==
The WFA Setup menu is accessible by the shortcut Ctrl+Alt+W or the [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab.

Six tabs are visible: General, TM rules, Shortcuts, Segmentation, Pandora's box and QA.

=== General tab ===
Several general settings can be don in this tab.

[[File:wfasetup1.png]]

==== Machine translation ====
Click on '''MT''' tab to access the ''Machine Translation'' settings.

[[File:wfasetup2.png]]

WFA gives you the ability to translate each segment by online translation services like Google Translate and Microsoft Translator. The translations proposed are not ever likely to be fully acceptable. However, by making a few small adjustments, you will be able to use them extensively in your translations.

[[File:Warning.png]] When using this service, the source segments that will return a translation are transmitted to Google and Microsoft. It is up to you whether or not to accept these translations; these companies are not made aware of your choice. However, be aware that sending the segments to Google and Microsoft may raise privacy issues between you and your customers.

Each MT engine has a window were to set it's settings. Bear in mind that some MT may require a personal ID or password.
* Use '''Add''' button to add a new MT.
* Use '''Edit''' the settings for the selected MT on the list.
* Use '''Remove''' will delete the selected MT on the list.
* Use '''Test''' to run a test on all the MTs with the active checkbox marked.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''To use a MT engine, it must be added to the list and with the "Active" checkbox marked'''.

On each MT engine window you can set its settings (i.e. the key or url). You can also set a particular values for
* ''Engine timeout'' as in some cases (i.e. small segments) the MT requires more time to get back with a result.
* ''Engine score'' value for each MT.
* ''Details'' for extra information about the MT like the list of available languages.
[[File:Warning.png]] Each MT engine has a different set of available languages.

Finally, there are several general options such as
* When to use the MT (when no TM match, when no TM full match, always)
* Remove tags before sending to MT.
* Use all available providers on ''force MT''.
* Do not copy MT proposition to target.
* Enable MT for review (May slow down the revision process)

===== Custom Machine translation =====

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Note:''' this section is '''DIY (Do It Yourself)'''. Our hotline cannot assist in the customization of an MT engine, because that requires knowledge of the remote provider's specifications. However, public discussion groups may offer help.

If your remote Machine Translation provider is not listed (as a provider tab), you can use '''Custom tab''' to create a custom connector for it. This is only possible if your MT provider's API is using a REST standard, and returns results in a JSON, or similar, format. That is the case with major MT providers currently available with WFC (Google, Microsoft, WorldLingo, deepL, MyMemory, etc.).

In WFA's Machine Translation setup, go to the "Custom MT" tab.

[[File:CustomMT.JPG]]

Note the various elements:
* URL: Tells WFA which is the url of the MT provider with the needed parameters.
** {ss} will be replaced with the source segment to be translated. This parameter must be present.
** {sl} and {tl} will be replaced with your given source and target language codes.
** {key} will be replaced with the given API key
* API Key: Some MT providers need a personal key, this is the place to add it.
* Source language: Source language of the text, it corresponds to the {sl} parameter in the URL.
* Target Language: Target language which will be the text translated to, it corresponds to the {tl} parameter in the URL.
* POST: includes parameters that should be used with the POST method, concatenated like in the URL format. If the parameters needs to be in JSON format, choose the way how to write it (either URL encoded text to convert to JSON either a direct JSON string).
* HEADER: includes parameters that need to be in the header of the request. The format is param:value. Put one parameter per line.
* Json key: Some MT providers return the translated text in a parameter (translation, translatedTex...etc), this tells WFA how to spot the returned translated segment.

Once all the elements are set you can test the connection by using the '''Test''' button. Optionally you can change the text to be tested on the text box next to the button.

Let's assume your preferred MT provider is WorldLingo and we create a custom engine for it. You explore WorldLingo's API documentation. It essentially boils down to a query URL, with parameters. On Custom tab you can use:

* URL: https://www.worldlingo.com/S000.1/api?wl_data={ss}&wl_srclang={sl}&wl_trglang={tl}&wl_password=secret
* API Key: Empty, as no API Key is needed.
* Source language: en.
* Target Language: fr.
* Json key: Empty.

'''Practical example:'''

Opening a browser, you begin by testing the URL. In the following example, the raw URL was customized for an English-to-French language pair, to translate "Hello World". Your real URL will look different, the following is an example based on WorldLingo:

::: ''http://www.worldlingo.com/S000.1/api?wl_data=Hello%20world&wl_srclang=en&wl_trglang=fr&wl_password=secret''

You can try pasting the above URL into a browser's address bar. If things go well, the site will send a reply:

::: ''Bonjour le monde''

Other MT providers may use a more complex JSON reply, in which case you specify the JSON key so that WFA can identify the result. Here the key is "translation" so you would use Json key => translation

::: ''{"responseData":{"translation":"Bonjour le monde","match":1} }''

Your MT provider may require more parameters, such as a secret ID key (aka an API key), or other elements, in which case, you should hard-code those in the URL.

==== Fonts ====
Font Size: this setting only affects the font size on the screen, your document will keep all its original layout unchanged. The available sizes are selected from the drop-down list.

Font Family: this setting only affects the fonts displayed on the screen, your document will keep its entire original layout unchanged. You can specify a specific font or a font family, for example Arial, Helvetica, Sans Serif (sans serif font, default) or Times New Roman, Times, Serif (seriffed font).

==== Target segment selection ====
Positions the mouse pointer at the opening of the segment, with or without selection.

# Cursor at start – no text selected, cursor positioned at the beginning of the segment.
# Cursor at end – no text selected, cursor positioned at the end of the segment. This is the default setting.
# Segment selected – The target segment is entirely selected.

==== Fuzzy Threshold in % ====
Percentage of similarity required for a TU contained in the TM to be suggested as a translation of the source segment. If several TUs meet this criterion, the TU with the highest percentage will be offered. In this case you can select the subsequent TUs with [[File:CopyTU.png]] '''''Copy TU''''' button on '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' tab or using the corresponding shortcut (Alt + Right).

The default percentage (75%) is recommended for most translations, but in some cases it may be appropriate to change it. For example, if you are translating short segments containing only 3 words, a fuzzy threshold of 75% will only offer those TUs which are identical (100%) and those where two words are identical, i.e. 66%, will never be proposed.

==== Record Revisions ====
Check this option if you want to save a record of the changes on translated segments.

==== Enable Auto-Suggest ====
Check this option if you want to get suggestions while you type on a translated segment.

Auto-Suggest can be configured in '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.238_Configure_Auto-Suggest|Pandora's box #7]]''' to add or remove items.

==== Tab behavior ====
Check this option if you want to use click or hover for triggering events on Top Menu bar.

==== Enable auto-hide buttons ====
Check this option to make toop toolbar buttons hide automatically.

==== Enable Segment Tool Bar ====
Check this option to enable the Segment Tool Bar on Horizontal and Vertical views. You can customize it on Pandora's Box #15

=== TM rules tab ===

Here you have the opportunity to establish penalties to be taken into account when calculating the similarity between the TM and the segment to be translated. In other words, the percentage of similarity is reduced, where applicable, according to the figure indicated for each of the following rules. Some rules allow fractional reductions, but this only applies to the calculation: the final reduction will be the sum of all penalties rounded to the nearest whole number. If the percentage of similarity to the TU, reduced to the sum of the penalties, is less than the specified Fuzzy Threshold percentage, it will not be proposed.

[[File:wfasetup3.png]]

Penalties for the following rules are activated only if the box on their right is checked. They apply only to the TUs proposed by the TM or VLTM, not from machine translation, which has its own non-modifiable penalty.

* ''Case penalty'': if there is a difference in case (upper and lower case) between the TU and the segment to be translated, WFA can ignore this and show 100% similarity. But you can assign a penalty of between 1 and 5 points for the difference in case. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 1.

* ''Non literal penalty'': this penalty detects differences due to special characters such as dashes, quotation marks, apostrophes, punctuation and whitespace characters (non-breaking space, horizontal and vertical tabs, ...). There exist several codes for representing each of these special characters. WFA can ignore these and show 100% similarity; otherwise a penalty is calculated using the following method: every time a difference is encountered, it adds the value of the first parameter (0.25, 0.50 or 0.75), which by default is 0.50. The second parameter sets out what the minimum value of the penalty is (default is 1). Since the penalty is necessarily an integer, if the value of the penalty is 0.25 and there is only one in the segment to be translated, the minimum is not reached. Finally, the third parameter sets the maximum penalty to be assigned, even if the addition of all the differences of this rule exceeds that figure (10 by default). This rule is selected by default with a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 10.

* ''Tag penalty'': this rule works exactly the same way as the previous one, but applied to the tags (markers that represent the bits of code used to format the document <1>). This rule is selected by default with a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 10.

* ''Alignment user penalty'': the TUs found in a memory imported into WFA produced by an alignment tool and having the identifier "TALIGN!" may be assigned a penalty from 1 to 10. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 3. Please note, TUs from an alignment may not have the "TALIGN!" identifier.

* ''MT user penalty'': the TUs found in a memory imported into WFA produced by machine translation and having the identifier "MT!" may be penalised from 1 to 10. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 25. Please note, TUs from a machine translation may not have the "MT!" identifier.

* ''Multiple translation penalty'': In the case of a source segment with multiple 100% matches, i.e. several TUs having the same source segment but different translated segments, a penalty may be applied to warn of a possible choice between translations. This scenario is rare and no penalty is assigned by default.

* ''Attribute penalty'': attributes are identifiers that are associated with a particular TU at the time that it is recorded in the memory. There are five possible attributes: the first is fixed (it identifies the user who posted the TU), while the other four can be user defined. In general, translators use attribute no. 1 to define the subject of the text to be translated and the attribute no. 2 to define the client who owns the text. The other two attributes are free to be used for anything else. For example, if the proposed TU is from a text whose subject is "electronics", it will be penalised if the subject of the text to be translated is "medicine." In other words if the TU is 100% identical to the segment to be translated, it will be displayed with a percentage similarity of 98% if the penalty applied is 2 points.

The penalty can be a number from 1 to 5, valid for the four attributes. By default this rule is not active.

If you use a TM uploaded from Wordfast Classic or Pro, the existing attributes of the TU may be penalised.

=== Shortcuts tab ===

You can set the shortcuts you want to use.

[[File:wfasetup4.png]]

WFA shortcuts are not immutable. If some of them do not suit you, you can reassign them. To do this, click on the '''''upd''''' link of the shortcut you wish to change.

[[File:wfasetup5.png]]

In this example, corresponding to the first shortcut, you see the name of the command and a drop-down list. Choose '''None''' if you want to remove the shortcut or choose another from the list. Then click '''''Update''''' to confirm or '''''Cancel''''' to dismiss the dialog. Repeat for all the shortcuts that you want to change. The new keyboard shortcuts will be displayed.

The last four commands have no shortcuts; however, you can assign shortcuts to them if you wish.

If after modifying several shortcuts you want to return them to their original state, click '''''Restore default shortcuts'''''.

Finally, click '''''Save''''' settings to confirm any changes or '''''Cancel''''' to dismiss the dialog.

=== Segmentation tab ===
This tab defines the rules for segmentation.

[[File:Segmentation111.JPG]]

* ''Segmentation style'': this block determines how the segmentation will be performed. If you choose ''Wordfast /Trados segmentation'' (default) the standard end-of-segment markers are defined as follows: full stop, colon, question mark, exclamation mark and tab (Tab). You can add other characters as well as space (Space), non-breaking space (NBSP), carriage return (CR) and line feed (LF). You can add as markers: a number followed by an end of segment marker (A number Followed by ESM ends a segment – default), an end of segment marker not followed by a space (An ESM without a trailing space ends a segment) and an end of segment marker followed by a space followed by a lowercase letter (An ESM followed by a space followed by a lower-case letter ends a segment). Although you can change these markers, it is recommended to maintain them in such manner that if you share your translations and your memories with other translators, all will follow the same rule.

[[File:Warning.png]] Segmentation is performed at the time of uploading the document to WFA. You cannot therefore change the rules applying to that document during the course of its translation.

The other segmentation rules that you can choose are:
* ''Break segmentation'': segmentation is done according to the end of paragraph character (carriage return) or the tag for HTML files.
* ''Idiom segmentation'': segmentation follows the rules of the software program Idiom.
* ''SRX segmentation'': the segmentation is done by using a previously uploaded file. It follows the rules of the SRX standard, which has become a standard like TMX for formatting memories and TBX for formatting glossaries. In the case of SRX segmentation, abbreviations are also included.

* ''TM compatibility'': You must ensure the compatibility according to the memory you have uploaded or the subsequent use of your documents. By default, WFA's memory is compatible with that of Wordfast Classic and Pro (Assume Wordfast TM). If this is your choice, you can also specify if you have old projects made with Wordfast Classic or Pro (check Legacy TM created by old projects). You can also establish that the memory was created by Trados (Assume Trados TM), even adding that it was created by Trados and Word (TM created by Trados + Word); by Idiom (Assume Idiom TM) or by SDLX (Assume SDLX TM).

*''Abbreviations'': Abbreviations end with a full stop, which WFA then interprets as an end of segment marker. To avoid this, WFA allows you to create and manage a list of abbreviations. While WFA already has lists for some languages, others are empty – the user must provide the necessary information. The abbreviations are entered into the text box, one after another, without spaces and separated by a comma. Once updated, save your list by clicking on Save the language. Repeat for each language that you translate.

=== Pandora's box tab ===
This tab has many different settings. Some of this settings will open a new dialog.

[[File:wfasetup7.png]]

==== #1 PC, tablet and smartphone modes ====
Use this mode if you are using a mobile device. The segment toolbar is enlarged; local file access is disabled.

==== #2 Real time collaboration ====
Real time collaboration disables data caching. This forces the TM search before you open a segment, causing a response delay. Avoid using this mode unless sharing a TM and if the TU updates need to be shared immediately.

==== #3 Document file name convention ====
Customize your document name for download by adding a prefix and/or a suffix.

==== #4 Special characters insertion ====
Configure the 7 special characters insertion of the Edition tab.

==== #5 Configure online dictionaries ====
Configure URLs for 2 online search engines.

* Click "Add" to add a new dictionary.
* After filling the "Friendly name" and "Url" correctly you need to use "Test" to check it works fine.
* Use "Save" to add the dictionary to the list. Bear in mind that if the URL already exists it cannot be added.

If all worked fine, the list should have been updated and your dictionary available to be used.

The list does not use "Friendly name" to sort the dictionaries, so you need to check all the list to find the one you added.

In order to use one dictionary you need to select it from the list and save the settings.

==== #6 Multiple Ctrl+Alt+Down toggles placeable ====
Use this feature to toggle between copy the target term, copy the source term, or leave blank.

==== #7 Configure Auto-Suggest ====
Auto-suggest is activated at the '''General''' tab when clicking on [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab.

On this section of Pandora's Box is where you can '''configure which suggestions will Auto-suggest show'''.

[[File:AutoSuggest1.JPG]]

'''Auto-suggest can show different items''' such as: Glossary matches, tags, word from with a capital letter, numbers, file path, email addresses, URLs, chunks of Machine Translation, date and number conversion, text in parentheses (), text in braces {}, bracketed text [], word containing special character and unit conversion.

On the left there is a combo box to select the number of typed characters that will trigger auto-suggest to show up.

For '''date and number conversion''' there is a sub dialog, that can be opened by clicking on the [[File:Edit.png]] button on the left.

[[File:AutoSuggest2.JPG]]

Here you can set how dates and numbers will be converted and shown in the auto-suggested text.

For '''dates''' you can choose a different format and separator. For instance source ''2015.04.01'' could be converted to ''01/04/2015'' on target.

For '''numbers''' you can choose a different group and decimal separator. For instance source ''123.456,00'' could be converted to ''123 456.00'' on target.

==== #8 Configure Filters ====
Configure conversion of documents from their original format to the internal editor format.

For some files you can configure some parameters that will tell the filter what to do for some situations such as translate comments or sheet names.

You can make this configuration for: '''xls, xlsx, ppt, pptx, doc, docx, rtf, htm, html, mif, idml, xml (Text based files)'''.

[[File:Pandora9.JPG]]

On this section there are also 3 settings that will apply to any file.

* '''Editor format'''. To choose which type of '''bilingual file (TXML or TXLF)''' the filter should produce.[[File:Warning.png]] '''''The download bilingual file will be of the type used when the file was uploaded.''''' For example if the file was uploaded using TXML, the bilingual download will be TXML. A file cannot be uploaded using one type (TXML) and download the bilingual file of the other type (TXLF). The workaround is to change the type and upload the file again.

* '''Extract numbers'''. To define the filter action on source segments that contain only numbers.

** ''all'': Extracts all segments with only numbers for translation
** ''time_date_measure'': Extracts only segments with time and date
** ''none'': Does not extract any segments that contain only numbers

* '''Segmentation on break'''. To enable segmentation on line breaks.

==== #9 Configure double click to open/close a segment ====
Configure opening/closing actions on a segment by double clicking in the document panel. This is always active for mobile plain text mode.

[[File:Pandora101.png]]

==== #10 Configure TM Search ====
Set the timeout for searches. After the timeout, the search is cancelled and returns nothing. The default value is 4 seconds.

==== #11 Copy source when no TM match and no MT proposition ====
Copy source to target when no TM match and no MT proposition.

==== #12 Do not show empty paragraph line in Classic view ====
Do not copy MT proposition to target.

==== #13 Hide segment's IDs column on the Table view ====
Do not copy MT proposition to target.

==== #14 Custom Tab settings ====
Use this mode if you are using a mobile device. The segment toolbar is enlarged; local file access is disabled.

==== #15 Customize Segment Toolbar ====
Dialog to choose which buttons will be placed on Segment toolbar. Segment toolbar is enabled on General tab.

==== #16 Copy untranslatable to target automatically and open next segment ====
Define what will be considered an "Untranslatable segment" which will be copied to target automatically and open next segment

=== QA tab ===
Set here the criteria that will be used to conduct an audit of quality when doing a '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Transcheck|Transcheck]]'''

[[File:wfasetup8.png]]

There are several criteria that can be checked, some of which can also ''be checked while translating'' (by using the second checkbox column under '''While Translating''' title).

Here is a short description:

* '''Source & target lengths''': Compares the character count between the source and target segments. You can set the minimum and maximum % of allowed character count for the target segment.

* '''Empty target''': Checks for an empty target segment. This is always checked while translating.

* '''Numerical''': Checks that the numerical values between the source and target segments are correct.

* '''Placeable''': Checks if the tags are copied correctly to the target segments. This is always checked while translating.

* '''Forbidden chars''': Checks if the target segment includes forbidden characters. You can set the list of forbidden characters that should not be included in the target segment.

* '''Punctuations''': Checks for consistency in punctuation between source and target segments. You can set the punctuation marks that should not be included in the target segment. [[File:notice.png]] The transcheck punctuation only works on end of segmentation punctuation.

* '''Untranslatable''': Compares the source and target segments to check if the untranslatable content is consistent. You can set the untranslatable text that must be retained in the target segment.

* '''Copied source''': Checks for untranslated text when copied source option is used.

* '''Blacklists''': Checks if the target segment includes blacklisted terms. You can set blacklisted terms that should not be included in the target segment. [[File:notice.png]] The blacklisted term list must be a tab delimited file (bad term + tabulation + proposed term).

* '''Terminology''': Checks if all term translations from an active glossary are used in the target of a segment. You can enable or disable Ignore Case option.

* '''First word capitalization''': Checks if the first letter of the segment is capitalized.

* '''Edited exact match''': Checks if any exact match segments from the TM have been edited.

* '''Unedited fuzzy''': Checks if any fuzzy match segments from the TM have been left unedited.

* '''Source Consistency''': Checks consistency between source segments if the target is repeated.

* '''Target consistency''': Checks consistency between target segments if the source is repeated.

== Profile Configuration ==
Go to [[File:User profile.png]] '''''User Profile''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' menu to see information about your account and change some settings of your profile.

[[File:Profileconfig1.png]]

=== Change email ===
Use this option to change the email of your account.

[[File:Profileconfig2.png]]

=== Change password ===
Check the [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_change_my_password Wordfast Anywhere FAQ] for more information.

=== Delete account ===
Use this option to remove your account from Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:Profileconfig4.png]]

Wordfast Anywhere FAQ

2022-01-27T07:56:55Z

Remiandre: /* How can I fix a document when download failed? */

{{Languages}}
[[Category:Wordfast Anywhere]]

= GENERAL =

== Cannot log in to Wordfast Anywhere ==
Check the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Cannot_log_in_to_Wordfast_Anywhere Cannot log in to Wordfast Anywhere]''' section on the Start Guide.

== How can I change my password ==
The steps to change the password are the same ones than when you forget it.

You will find the instructions on the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Get_your_password_back Get your password back]''' section on the Start Guide.

== Wordfast Anywhere Manuals ==
Wordfast Anywhere have a couple of manuals
* '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide Wordfast Anywhere 6 Start Guide]'''. Some basic information on how to start to use WFA.
* '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual Wordfast Anywhere 6 Manual]'''. All the features detailed.

== Why I get email notifications about my document or account going to be deleted (Termination of Service) ==
There are some reasons why you might get a notification about documents or account going to be deleted:

'''Accounts''': If an account '''has not been accessed for six months''', the account's owner will receive a notification that her/his account will be deleted in 20 days. To cancel the upcoming account termination, simply log once into your Wordfast Anywhere account. If no access is made to the account within 10 days, a second notification will be emailed. If no access is made within 10 days of the second notification, the account will be deleted, together with its content (documents, TMs, glossaries).

'''Documents''': Documents that '''have not been accessed, edited, or used for more than 3 months''' will be deleted at the end of the 4th month, after two emailed warnings.

For more information check our '''[https://www.freetm.com/jsp/terms.jsp Terms of use]''' page.

== Can I get help and support? ==
Sure, this are the different ways:
* First look on this FAQ page, on the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide Wordfast Anywhere 6 Start Guide]''' or in the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual Wordfast Anywhere 6 Manual]'''.
* If you have NOT logged, in click in the [[File:Contacticon.png|border]] icon.
* If you have logged, please use the [[File:Feedback16.png|border]] '''''Support/Report''''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' menu.
* You can also post at wordfast-anywhere@groups.io for the community help. Check the discussion group at [https://wordfast-anywhere.groups.io wordfast-anywhere.groups.io]

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Technical support is only in English'''

= DOCUMENT =
== How can I fix a document when download failed? ==
There are many complex reasons that make a download to fail.

'''Check first the error message'''. If it indicates a segment or a segment range, check it first carefully. If the segment indicated in the error message looks fine, the problem may be on a different segment.

If nothing seem to work, you can restore the document following the steps on the section '''Restore the document'''.

Here are the most common causes of downloading problems:

=== '''Check Segmentation settings''' ===
Check there is a segmentation style set on Segmentation tab on Setup settings.( [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab).
If there is none, check one options for example "Wordfast".

=== '''Tag differences''' ===
'''How to detect it:''' The file does not download, the file downloads but some text is missing, the file downloads but styles are wrong.

Differences on the formatting tags (<1>, <2>) between source and target segment can make the file filter aligner have difficulties to build up the translated document.

Check there are no ''segments with tag difference'' using one of this options:
# Click on [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button on '''File''' tab to get a report. Check if there are any ''segments with tag difference''. Use '''''Show Outline''''' [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button on '''View''' tab to go straight to one segment.
# Click on [[File:FindReplace.png]] '''''Find & Replace''''' button on '''Edit''' tab. Go to ''Miscellaneous'' tab and run a ''Tag difference'' search. Segments with tag differences will be listed.

If you find segments with tag differences, make sure:
# There is no target tag missing that exists on source. For example [<1>text text<2>] on source but [text text<2>] on target.
# The target tag order is the same than source tag order. For example [<1>text text<2>] on source should also be [<1>text text<2>] on target, being [<2>text text<1>] is wrong.
# The target tag content should be identical with the source tag. You can see the content of the tag when the mouse is over it.

[[File:Warning.png]] We '''do not recommend to use copy/paste or drag and drop''' to copy the tags as it can copy more than the eye can see and be problematic. It is better to use the the auto-suggest feature with tags (whenever you want to add a tag just type < and the list of tags from source will be proposed for selection) or the [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]] '''Copy Placeable''' on '''Translation''' tab.

=== '''Re-segmentation''' ===
'''How to detect it:''' The file does not download, the file does not download and the error message contains ''error aligning segment #'' but segment # is fine. (Usually is ''error aligning segment 1'')

A too much use of re-segmentation with the [[File:ShrinkSeg.png]] '''Shrink''' or [[File:Expand_Segment16.png]] '''Expand''' tools can make the file filter aligner have difficulties to build up the translated document because the segments from the original source file are too different from the re-segmented file.

[[File:Warning.png]] A warning when the use of '''re-segmentation is over the 5%''' of the document is shown while translating to inform that it has been used in excess and might cause problems when downloading. Though depending on the number of segments of the document even '''a 1% can be problematic'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Mouse-over the file name''' to see the "number of segments" and the "Initial segments".

Segmentation problems when uploading a file can be improved by creating or completing the abbreviations list of your source language before starting translation. Click on '''''Setup''''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab and got to ''Segmentation'' tab.

'''Download can be solved''' by uploading again the source file (a copy) and '''without any re-segmentation use the same TM to pre-translate the file'''. Complete the untranslated segments before downloading. Before uploading the copy of the file, it is good to make sure the TM is updated with the problematic file TUs (Update TM from doc).

=== '''Segments on Segment History''' ===
'''How to detect it:''' The file does not download and the error message contains ''error aligning segment #'' but segment # is fine. (Usually is ''error aligning segment 1'')

When Segment history is used and there are too many segments saved in the history it might cause trouble when downloading the file due to the big amount of information to be processed.

'''Download can be solved''' by using [[File:delete_revisions.png]]: '''Delete history''' on '''Edit''' tab for one segment or
'''remove all segment history from document''' on '''''File''''' tab => [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button for all the document.

=== '''Excel File limitations''' ===
'''Excel files (XLS, XLSX)''' have some specific rules on the worksheet which the translated text must follow.

When working with '''Excel files (XLS, XLSX)''' check this restrictions when it comes to renaming a worksheet:
# A worksheet name '''cannot be blank'''.
# A worksheet name '''cannot be repeated'''. That means that each worksheet name must be different. The error message would be something like this: '''''Error on segment 1. Problem aligning document. Segment id: XXX The same worksheet name already exists''''', where XXX would be the problematic segment that needs to be fixed.
# A worksheet name '''cannot exceed 31 characters''' in length. That means worksheet name must be reduced to less than 31 characters. The error message would be something like this: '''''Error on segment 1...->The translation of the Excel Sheet name(s) in Segment/s [XXX] exceed 31 characters, which is not allowed in Excel. Please reduce the text's length and start again.''''', where XXX would be the problematic segment that needs to be fixed. You could found the number of characters of a segment at the bottom status bar next to the TM information.
# On a worksheet name the following '''characters cannot be used \ / ? : * [ ] '''.That means these characters must be removed from that segment. The error message would be something like this: '''''Error on segment 1...->The translation of the Excel Sheet name(s) in Segment/s [XXX] contains forbidden characters, which is not allowed in Excel. Check the name does not contain ?*:[]/\''''', where XXX would be the problematic segment that needs to be fixed.

=== '''Translate hyperlink (URL)''' ===
'''How to detect it:''' Only a part of the file is downloaded but no error is shown. The last segment on the downloaded file is the previous one to a segment that is just a URL (Usually on DOCX)

When uploading a file some settings are applied, one of this is to '''Translate hyperlink value'''. Some times this creates problems when aligning the file to be downloaded. The downloaded file seems ''cut'' just on the segment with the URL.

'''Download can be solved''' changing the settings and uploading the file again. Follow this steps:
#Go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab > [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button > '''''Pandora's box #8''''' [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters More information]
#Go to '''doc, docx, rtf''' tab.
#Uncheck '''Translate hyperlink value'''.
#Save the settings.
#Upload the file again.
#Pre-translate using the same TM.
#Download.

=== '''Corrupted File''' ===
'''How to detect it:''' The file does not download, or just downloads a part of the file but no error is shown. (Usually on DOCX, XLSX and PPTX files)

WFA checks the file when it is uploaded to detect if it is corrupted to prevent it is uploaded. If the file manage to skip detection it will not download because the problem comes from the source file.

When the problem is coming from a '''corrupted source''' file. Here is a way to recover your translation with a new file:
# Do not delete the file you are trying to download (corrupted-file) or you'll loose all the work.
# Download the bilingual file of the document having problem (corrupted-file), using '''''File > [[File:Save16.png]] Download > Bilingual''''' ([https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Download +info]).
# On your local PC, open your original file(corrupted-file) and use "Save as" to make a copy with a different name and format (copy-file). For example if corrupted-file is a DOCX use "Save as>Word 97-2003" to make a DOC copy-file.
# Upload this copy of the file (copy-file) to Wordfast Anywhere.
# Try to download the new file (copy-file) immediately by clicking in '''''Download''''' button on '''File''' tab and choose '''Translated document/s'''. If download do not work, you need to review the file because there is some problem in it, and do again steps 4 and 5 for this file.
# When the new file (copy-file) can be downloaded, you need to merge it with the previously saved bilingual file (step 2), using '''''File > [[File:Mergetms16.png]] Merge bilingual''''' ([https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Merging_TXML_files +info]).
## Check ''Merge an existing document'' and click on the new file(copy-file) from the list to select it.
## Click on the '''''Upload''''' button and browse your local disk to find the bilingual file (step 2).
## Click on the '''''Submit''''' button to start the upload and merge, then wait the report window.
## The file will load in the editor and a report will be shown. Close the Merge dialog window.

=== '''Restore a document''' ===
If your case does not seem to fit in any of the previous cases, there is a way to restore the document. Here are the steps to follow:

# Save the bilingual file ('''''File > [[File:Save16.png]] Download > Bilingual''''' [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Download +info] )
# Upload a copy of the original file and try to download it to be sure the file is fine.
# Merge the previously saved bilingual file with the newly uploaded copy of the original file ('''''File > [[File:Mergetms16.png]] Merge bilingual''''' [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Merging_TXML_files +info])
# Read the report and try to download.
# Complete the untranslated segments.

=== '''Help and support''' ===
For more information check the '''Wordfast Anywhere Manuals''' section.

To have our support check the '''Can I get help and support?''' section.

== Why do I get a zip file when downloading? ==
When downloading a file, there are some reasons why you can get a compressed to ZIP format (*.zip) file instead of the original source file extension:
* The size of the document is greater than 10 megabyte.
* The file name contains some special characters (for instance a space) that cannot be used as a web name for download.
* You chose "Send file to email" or "Create file URL".
* You requested to download a PDF version of the file.

All this situations may create some havoc on our server file system or when attaching the file to be send by email.
To prevent that, we use zip files as a container to be sure there will be no naming problem.
We also keep the original name of the file inside the zip, so file name is not changed.

'''To open a zip file''', '''[https://www.wikihow.com/Open-a-Zip-File here]''' are some ways to do it.
You can also use tools like '''WinRar''' or '''7-zip''' on Windows and '''The Unarchiver''' on Mac.

== Why do I get a txlf bilingual file instead of a txml bilingual file? ==
On September 2018 WFA updated the filters used to convert any document into a bilingual file. By default the bilingual file type used is TXLF.

In case you need to work with a TXML bilingual file type you can change this default setting. To do so, you need to go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab > [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button > '''''Pandora's box #8'''''

[[File:Warning.png]] '''''The download bilingual file will be of the type used when the file was uploaded.''''' For example if the file was uploaded using TXML, the bilingual download will be TXML. A file cannot be uploaded using one type (TXML) and download the bilingual file of the other type (TXLF). The workaround is to change the type ([https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters More information]) and upload the file again.

== Why do I get a bilingual file (txml, txlf, xlf, xliff, sdlxliff) when downloading a Translated document? ==
When using '''''File''''' tab > [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button > '''''Translated document/s''''' you'll get the translated version of the source document in the same file type.

That means if you uploaded a DOCX file, the translated file will be also a DOCX file.

If you uploaded a XLS file, the translated file will be also a XLS file.

If you uploaded a TXML file, the translated file will be also a TXML file.

If you uploaded a SDLXLIFF file, the translated file will be also a SDLXLIFF file.

And so on.

Txml, txlf, xlf, xliff and sdlxliff are bilingual files, so if you upload them the translated file will be of the same type because Wordfast Anywhere cannot convert them to the file type of the source document from where they where extracted.

Converting a bilingual file back to the original file type should be done with the tool which did the first conversion and with the original file as it will also be needed.

== If I cannot download the translated document, is it possible to have at least the translated segments to copy/paste them? ==
Yes, you can download the file in 'Text only' format.
* Go to '''File''' tab
* Click on '''''Download''''' button
* Choose '''Unformatted text''' from the list, and click '''''OK''''
* Choose one of the downloading options and click '''''OK'''''

The text will be downloaded in a text file without formatting.

== Can I download a Wordfast Classic-compatible bilingual document file? ==
This is possible for a MS-Word document (*.doc, *.docx).
* Go to '''File''' tab
* Click on '''''Download''''' button
* Choose '''Bilingual DOC original''' from the list, and click '''''OK''''
* Choose one of the downloading options and click '''''OK'''''

== When I am about to download the file, a dialog box says that some non translated segments remain - how can we go back to them? ==
There are two ways to go to the non translated segments.
# Use '''Outline'''.
#* Click on '''''Show/Hide Outline''''' button on '''View''' tab.
#* Translated segments are displayed with a green square and non translated ones with a grey square.
# Use '''Find & Replace'''.
#* Click on '''''Find & Replace''''' button on '''Edit''' tab.
#* Go to '''Miscellaneous''' tab
#* Choose '''Untranslated''' and click on '''''Find''''' button.
#* Untranslated segments will be search and result will be displayed on a list. To view the list use the [[File:MoveNextScreen.png]] button.

== What can I do when a document upload failed? ==
There are many complex reasons that make a upload to fail.

Usually the file has some problem that makes the filter unable to extract the bilingual file from it.

'''Check first the error message'''. You might get any clue of what is happening to the file.

Here are the most common causes of downloading problems:

'''Check Segmentation settings'''

Check there is a segmentation style set on Segmentation tab on Setup settings.( [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab).
If there is none, check one options for example "Wordfast".

'''Filter settings'''

Set the filter settings to default and try again.
You can find the filter settings on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab > [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button > '''''Pandora's box #8''''' [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters More information]

'''Hyperlinks'''

Sometimes there are hyperlinks on the file that make havoc on the filter. Uncheck them and try again. This is common with MS Office files.
#Go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab > [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button > '''''Pandora's box #8''''' [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters More information]
#Go to document type tab.
#Uncheck '''Translate hyperlink value'''.
#Save the settings.
#Upload the file again.

'''DOCX, XLSX, PPTX'''

Sometimes the latest version of the MS Office files (extension ends in X) have some style or property that is not of the liking of the filter.
Use "Save as" option on MS Office to save a 97-2003 version of the file and try to upload it again.

== How can I upload a PDF document? ==
PDF files can not be uploaded directly to WFA because they contains images of text, rather than actual text.
But they can be converted into Word, which can be uploaded into WFA.

Just upload the PDF document (as any other document) and follow the instructions on the disclaimer which basically are:
# Download a Word version of the file using the button at the bottom of the disclaimer.
# Review it to be sure the conversion is fine.
# Finally upload the word version to be translated.

Once the document has been translated you'll be able to download it as PDF using the download options.

[[File:Warning.png]] PDF to Word conversion process may take some time (up to 10 minutes) depending on the size and content of the PDF, be patient.

[[File:Warning.png]] The conversion process is complex and depends on the quality of the PDF and how the PDF was built.

[[File:Warning.png]] PDF that can be edited, PDF that have any password protection or PDF that have some security restrictions in them cannot be converted because permissions are needed.

== Wordfast Anywhere cannot upload my MS-Office file, why? ==
Sometimes the original file can be in a corrupted state.
* Open the file and save it under a new name.
* Try also to save it under a newer version like from *.doc to *.docx.

== Can I upload and translate a pre-segmented document file (pre-segmented or pre-translated with Wordfast Classic)? ==
At the moment, it is only possible for TXML files. For all other files, it is not possible, Wordfast Anywhere accepts only cleaned documents.
An alternative would be to clean up a copy of your segmented document in order to create a memory.
Then, you can upload the cleaned document and the memory.

== What shall I do with the red number inside a segment? ==
The red numbers are tags representing a formatting in the original document.
Avoid removing them and try to put them properly in the target segment.
This is a simple alternative to a fully WYSIWYG display of the document.

== How can I recover a document that has been accidentally deleted? ==
There is no direct way to recover a deleted document.
But there is a workaround:
* Upload again the source document
* Pre-translate it using the same TM that was used on the deleted cocument

== How do I use FireFox spellcheck for my language? ==
You need to install at least the dictionary of your language. See details in this [https://youtu.be/na19XZ8QQXg video]

== Why I don't see all the document? What <Beginning of block> and <End of block> mean? ==
If the file is long, it is loaded in blocks. To fasten the application, a document may be partially loaded.

In that case, the document chunk is marked with 2 of the following tags:
* <Beginning of file>
* <Beginning of block>
* <End of block>
* <End of file>
A block is a chunk of document, not corresponding with a page or any existing subdivision.

When translating, the next sentences are added bit by bit to the initially loaded block of sentences.
Each time a segment is modified, the document is saved on the server. So don't worry, if you cannot visualize all your document.

You can navigate through the document using buttons in '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#View_Tab View Tab]''' and shortcuts.

= TM =
== How can I change the TM language pair? ==
'''Wordfast Anywhere document now belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a project.'''

Each language pair has one or more associated TMs and/or glossaries, and each document added in a language pair is linked automatically to those TMs and glossaries.
You can choose to upload documents for one language pair, or for all language pairs in a project.

Selecting TMs and/or glossaries is done when setting up a language pair in the project setup. It can also be done, as before, when changing TMs and glossaries for a selected document using the ''TMs and glossaries'' button in the File menu.

A global TM and Glossaries setup dialog is now located on ''wordfast anywhere'' menu and used only for management (create, add, upload, merge, edit, download, delete... ), no more for assignment.

More information can be found on the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Setting_up_language_pair.2C_Translation_Memories_and_glossaries Start guide]'''

== How can I add a new Translation Memory? ==
Follow this link: [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Setting_up_a_Translation_Memory Add a new TM]

== How can I get my Translation Memory? ==
Go to the TM and Glossary management dialog by clicking on '''''Setup TM&Glo''''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' Menu.

Once on the dialog, choose the TM you want to download and click on '''Download''' button.

== Can I share a Translation Memory with my colleagues? ==
Yes, you can share a TM and a glossary over the world to chosen guests.
* Go to the TM and Glossary management dialog by clicking on '''''Setup TM&Glo''''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' Menu.
* Create or select a TM and an optional glossary.
* Click on the '''Share''' button.
* Click '''Add''' to open the ''Create a share'' dialog.
* Add the TM and optionally the glossary that you want to share and set its privilege.
* Add the email of your guest.
* Click on '''Save''' button. Guests will get an email notification and will find the TM on their TM list.

== How can I join a Translation Memory shared by my colleague? ==
You will find the shared TMs on your list of TMs.

Go to the TM and Glossary management dialog by clicking on '''''Setup TM&Glo''''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' Menu.

A shared TM will have an icon indicating it is shared, and passing the mouse over it will provide more information.

Also clicking on the '''Share''' button will open the ''TMs and Glossaries Shares'' dialog where mor information could be found on ''My shares from other users'' section.

== Why do I have no match in my TM on repetitive phrases? ==
The repetitive phrase should represent at least 50% of the entire sentence. The TM is searching similarity on the entire sentence. The minimum fuzzy Threshold is 50% and the default value is 70%. You have 2 solutions to overcome that problem:
* Set the fuzzy Threshold to the minimum of 50% if you have big repetitive chunks of text.
* Use a glossary and add manually the terms and phrases in it when you encounter repetition.

== There is no match on a similar sentence just following the translated one ==
The problem occurs because the search for the following segment is done while you are translating the current one.
When you are in that case, just click on '''''Force TM Search''''' button on ''TMs & Glossaries'' tab.

== TM Maintenance ==

=== Edit TM - Concordance ===

[[File:Faqtm1.PNG]]

=== Edit TM - Download ===

[[File:Faqtm2.PNG]]

[[File:Faqtm3.PNG]]

[[File:Faqtm4.PNG]]

=== Edit TM – Download using filtering ===

[[File:Faqtm5.PNG]]

[[File:Faqtm6.PNG]]

=== Edit TM – As a document ===

[[File:Faqtm7.PNG]]

[[File:Faqtm8.PNG]]

[[File:Faqtm9.PNG]]

=== Reverse TM ===

[[File:Faqtm10.PNG]]

=== Assemble TMs ===

[[File:Faqtm11.PNG]]

[[File:Faqtm12.PNG]]

= GLOSSARY =
== How can I add a new Glossary? ==
Follow this link: [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Setting_up_a_Glossary Add a new Glossary]

== How can I add, edit or delete glossary entries? ==
* Associate a glossary to a document and open the document.

* The glossary panel on the right should be opened. When a sentence contains a term of the glossary, it will be displayed there.

* Use the glossary dialog box to add a term when translating.
# Click on '''''Term Edition''''' button on '''TM & Glosaries''' tab or Ctrl+Alt+T.
# Fill the dialog and validate with OK, the term should appear in the Glossary panel.

* Edit or delete a term displayed in the glossary panel.
# A sentence containing that term should be opened or you just create one.
# Click on the term in the glossary panel to open the glossary dialog box.

* Use the glossary search window.
# Click on '''''Glossary Search''''' button on '''TM & Glosaries''' tab or Ctrl+Alt+G.
# An independent browser window will be opened (care popup blocker)
# You can search and edit terms directly in that window.

== Glossary Maintenance ==

=== Edit glossary – Glossary Search ===

[[File:Faqglo1.PNG]]

=== Edit glossary - Download ===

[[File:Faqglo2.PNG]]

=== Edit glossary – Add Term ===

[[File:Faqglo3.PNG]]

=== Edit glossary – Glossary Panel ===

[[File:Faqglo4.PNG]]

=== Reverse Glossary ===

[[File:Faqglo5.PNG]]

=== Assemble Glossaries ===

[[File:Faqglo6.PNG]]

= Machine Translation and IATE Glossary =
Follow this link: [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Setting_Machine_Translation_and_IATE_Glossary Set Machine Translation]

== Why my Machine Translation doesn't respond or has been disabled ==
'''Machine Translations suggestions are external to Wordfast Anywhere.'''

Machine Translations are third-party providers (Google, Microsoft, MyMemory...etc) called Machine Translation Engines or Engines, so Wordfast Anywhere cannot improve/change anything on them.

Engines can suffer from '''problems of instability''' which can force Wordfast Anywhere to disable it temporarily.
If you are having problems with an Engine '''try to increase the "Engine Timeout" or try a different one'''.
We encourage you to register to other Machine Translation engines existing in Wordfast Anywhere.

Follow '''[https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Machine_translation this link]''' to know more about '''Machine Translation settings''' and how to change them.

= USER INTERFACE =
== What are the supported browsers? ==
Wordfast Anywhere support Edge, Firefox, Safari, Chrome for recent versions.
However, you can try any browser.

== Where are my documents? ==
Content is displayed this way:
* Every document now belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a project.
* Double-click a project to open it to see the content (documents grouped by language pairs).
* Double-click a document to start/resume work.

[[File:Warning.png]] A project named "Project_1" has been created with all your current files grouped by lang pair.

== I cannot click on a top menu bar button. Why are some buttons on the top menu bar not available? ==

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a project or selecting/opening a document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a project is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when a project is selected from the project list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when more than one file is selected from the document list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] The file Upload and Delete buttons of the File menu have been moved and integrated in the project content panel, open a project to see them.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus used for translation (Edit, view, translation, review and TM & Glossaries) are only visible when the document is opened. Those buttons keep working as always, just need to open the document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Project menu> '''Import button is just to import .glp files'''. There is an issue importing packages coming from PD. If you cannot import the .glp file, please ask to receive the bilingual files (txml/txlf) and the url for the TM/glossary.

== A shortcut does not work, can I change it? ==
Yes,you can change it.
# Click on '''''Setup''''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab and go to the ''Shortcuts'' tab.
# Select the shortcut line and click on the '''upd''' link.
# Set a new key combination and clikc on '''Update'''

However, you may have trouble with Opera (prevent many for its own usage).

== When I click on Concordance Search or Glossary search, nothing happens! ==
Yes, it may happen if your browser popup blocker is activated. Add an exception for http://www.freetm.com

== Why are there blinking colors in the status bar? ==
It means that there is a background process:
* The pink color indicates a communication with Anywhere server
* The yellow color indicates a communication with the Machine Translation server
You can work while the colors are displayed.
However, if you scroll while a color is displayed, the red message busy will appear, and you will have to wait.

== I have a missing button image or missing the Twitter "Follow @wordfast_freetm" button ==
This can come from the AdBlock or similar program extension in your browser.
Please add the freetm.com domain to program's exception list.

Wordfast Anywhere FAQ

2022-01-27T07:56:27Z

Remiandre: /* How can I fix a document when download failed? */

{{Languages}}
[[Category:Wordfast Anywhere]]

= GENERAL =

== Cannot log in to Wordfast Anywhere ==
Check the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Cannot_log_in_to_Wordfast_Anywhere Cannot log in to Wordfast Anywhere]''' section on the Start Guide.

== How can I change my password ==
The steps to change the password are the same ones than when you forget it.

You will find the instructions on the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Get_your_password_back Get your password back]''' section on the Start Guide.

== Wordfast Anywhere Manuals ==
Wordfast Anywhere have a couple of manuals
* '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide Wordfast Anywhere 6 Start Guide]'''. Some basic information on how to start to use WFA.
* '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual Wordfast Anywhere 6 Manual]'''. All the features detailed.

== Why I get email notifications about my document or account going to be deleted (Termination of Service) ==
There are some reasons why you might get a notification about documents or account going to be deleted:

'''Accounts''': If an account '''has not been accessed for six months''', the account's owner will receive a notification that her/his account will be deleted in 20 days. To cancel the upcoming account termination, simply log once into your Wordfast Anywhere account. If no access is made to the account within 10 days, a second notification will be emailed. If no access is made within 10 days of the second notification, the account will be deleted, together with its content (documents, TMs, glossaries).

'''Documents''': Documents that '''have not been accessed, edited, or used for more than 3 months''' will be deleted at the end of the 4th month, after two emailed warnings.

For more information check our '''[https://www.freetm.com/jsp/terms.jsp Terms of use]''' page.

== Can I get help and support? ==
Sure, this are the different ways:
* First look on this FAQ page, on the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide Wordfast Anywhere 6 Start Guide]''' or in the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual Wordfast Anywhere 6 Manual]'''.
* If you have NOT logged, in click in the [[File:Contacticon.png|border]] icon.
* If you have logged, please use the [[File:Feedback16.png|border]] '''''Support/Report''''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' menu.
* You can also post at wordfast-anywhere@groups.io for the community help. Check the discussion group at [https://wordfast-anywhere.groups.io wordfast-anywhere.groups.io]

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Technical support is only in English'''

= DOCUMENT =
== How can I fix a document when download failed? ==
There are many complex reasons that make a download to fail.

'''Check first the error message'''. If it indicates a segment or a segment range, check it first carefully. If the segment indicated in the error message looks fine, the problem may be on a different segment.

If nothing seem to work, you can restore the document following the steps on the section '''Restore the document'''.

Here are the most common causes of downloading problems:

=== '''Check Segmentation settings''' ===
Check there is a segmentation style set on Segmentation tab on Setup settings.( [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab).
If there is none, check one options for example "Wordfast".

=== '''Tag differences''' ===
'''How to detect it:''' The file does not download, the file downloads but some text is missing, the file downloads but styles are wrong.

Differences on the formatting tags (<1>, <2>) between source and target segment can make the file filter aligner have difficulties to build up the translated document.

Check there are no ''segments with tag difference'' using one of this options:
# Click on [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button on '''File''' tab to get a report. Check if there are any ''segments with tag difference''. Use '''''Show Outline''''' [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button on '''View''' tab to go straight to one segment.
# Click on [[File:FindReplace.png]] '''''Find & Replace''''' button on '''Edit''' tab. Go to ''Miscellaneous'' tab and run a ''Tag difference'' search. Segments with tag differences will be listed.

If you find segments with tag differences, make sure:
# There is no target tag missing that exists on source. For example [<1>text text<2>] on source but [text text<2>] on target.
# The target tag order is the same than source tag order. For example [<1>text text<2>] on source should also be [<1>text text<2>] on target, being [<2>text text<1>] is wrong.
# The target tag content should be identical with the source tag. You can see the content of the tag when the mouse is over it.

[[File:Warning.png]] We '''do not recommend to use copy/paste or drag and drop''' to copy the tags as it can copy more than the eye can see and be problematic. It is better to use the the auto-suggest feature with tags (whenever you want to add a tag just type < and the list of tags from source will be proposed for selection) or the [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]] '''Copy Placeable''' on '''Translation''' tab.

=== '''Re-segmentation''' ===
'''How to detect it:''' The file does not download, the file does not download and the error message contains ''error aligning segment #'' but segment # is fine. (Usually is ''error aligning segment 1'')

A too much use of re-segmentation with the [[File:ShrinkSeg.png]] '''Shrink''' or [[File:Expand_Segment16.png]] '''Expand''' tools can make the file filter aligner have difficulties to build up the translated document because the segments from the original source file are too different from the re-segmented file.

[[File:Warning.png]] A warning when the use of '''re-segmentation is over the 5%''' of the document is shown while translating to inform that it has been used in excess and might cause problems when downloading. Though depending on the number of segments of the document even '''a 1% can be problematic'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Mouse-over the file name''' to see the "number of segments" and the "Initial segments".

Segmentation problems when uploading a file can be improved by creating or completing the abbreviations list of your source language before starting translation. Click on '''''Setup''''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab and got to ''Segmentation'' tab.

'''Download can be solved''' by uploading again the source file (a copy) and '''without any re-segmentation use the same TM to pre-translate the file'''. Complete the untranslated segments before downloading. Before uploading the copy of the file, it is good to make sure the TM is updated with the problematic file TUs (Update TM from doc).

=== '''Segments on Segment History''' ===
'''How to detect it:''' The file does not download and the error message contains ''error aligning segment #'' but segment # is fine. (Usually is ''error aligning segment 1'')

When Segment history is used and there are too many segments saved in the history it might cause trouble when downloading the file due to the big amount of information to be processed.

'''Download can be solved''' by using [[File:delete_revisions.png]]: '''Delete history''' on '''Edit''' tab for one segment or
'''remove all segment history from document''' on '''''File''''' tab => [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button for all the document.

=== '''Excel File limitations''' ===
'''Excel files (XLS, XLSX)''' have some specific rules on the worksheet which the translated text must follow.

When working with '''Excel files (XLS, XLSX)''' check this restrictions when it comes to renaming a worksheet:
# A worksheet name '''cannot be blank'''.
# A worksheet name '''cannot be repeated'''. That means that each worksheet name must be different. The error message would be something like this: '''''Error on segment 1. Problem aligning document. Segment id: XXX The same worksheet name already exists''''', where XXX would be the problematic segment that needs to be fixed.
# A worksheet name '''cannot exceed 31 characters''' in length. That means worksheet name must be reduced to less than 31 characters. The error message would be something like this: '''''Error on segment 1...->The translation of the Excel Sheet name(s) in Segment/s [XXX] exceed 31 characters, which is not allowed in Excel. Please reduce the text's length and start again.''''', where XXX would be the problematic segment that needs to be fixed. You could found the number of characters of a segment at the bottom status bar next to the TM information.
# On a worksheet name the following '''characters cannot be used \ / ? : * [ ] '''.That means these characters must be removed from that segment. The error message would be something like this: '''''Error on segment 1...->The translation of the Excel Sheet name(s) in Segment/s [XXX] contains forbidden characters, which is not allowed in Excel. Check the name does not contain ?*:[]/\''''', where XXX would be the problematic segment that needs to be fixed.

=== '''Translate hyperlink (URL)''' ===
'''How to detect it:''' Only a part of the file is downloaded but no error is shown. The last segment on the downloaded file is the previous one to a segment that is just a URL (Usually on DOCX)

When uploading a file some settings are applied, one of this is to '''Translate hyperlink value'''. Some times this creates problems when aligning the file to be downloaded. The downloaded file seems ''cut'' just on the segment with the URL.

'''Download can be solved''' changing the settings and uploading the file again. Follow this steps:
#Go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab > [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button > '''''Pandora's box #8''''' [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters More information]
#Go to '''doc, docx, rtf''' tab.
#Uncheck '''Translate hyperlink value'''.
#Save the settings.
#Upload the file again.
#Pre-translate using the same TM.
#Download.

=== '''Corrupted File''' ===
'''How to detect it:''' The file does not download, or just downloads a part of the file but no error is shown. (Usually on DOCX, XLSX and PPTX files)

WFA checks the file when it is uploaded to detect if it is corrupted to prevent it is uploaded. If the file manage to skip detection it will not download because the problem comes from the source file.

When the problem is coming from a '''corrupted source''' file. Here is a way to recover your translation with a new file:
# Do not delete the file you are trying to download (corrupted-file) or you'll loose all the work.
# Download the bilingual file of the document having problem (corrupted-file), using '''''File > [[File:Save16.png]] Download > Bilingual''''' ([https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Download +info]).
# On your local PC, open your original file(corrupted-file) and use "Save as" to make a copy with a different name and format (copy-file). For example if corrupted-file is a DOCX use "Save as>Word 97-2003" to make a DOC copy-file.
# Upload this copy of the file (copy-file) to Wordfast Anywhere.
# Try to download the new file (copy-file) immediately by clicking in '''''Download''''' button on '''File''' tab and choose '''Translated document/s'''. If download do not work, you need to review the file because there is some problem in it, and do again steps 4 and 5 for this file.
# When the new file (copy-file) can be downloaded, you need to merge it with the previously saved bilingual file (step 2), using '''''File > [[File:Mergetms16.png]] Merge bilingual''''' ([https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Merging_TXML_files +info]).
## Check ''Merge an existing document'' and click on the new file(copy-file) from the list to select it.
## Click on the '''''Upload''''' button and browse your local disk to find the bilingual file (step 2).
## Click on the '''''Submit''''' button to start the upload and merge, then wait the report window.
## The file will load in the editor and a report will be shown. Close the Merge dialog window.

=== '''Restore a document''' ===
If your case does not seem to fit in any of the previous cases, there is a way to restore the document. Here are the steps to follow:

# Save the bilingual file ('''''File > [[File:Save16.png]] Download > Bilingual''''' [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Download +info] )
# Upload a copy of the original file and try to download it to be sure the file is fine.
# Merge the previously saved bilingual file with the newly uploaded copy of the original file ('''''File > [[File:Mergetms16.png]] Merge bilingual''''' [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Merging_TXML_files +info])
# Read the report and try to download.
# Complete the untranslated segments.

=== '''Help and support''' ===
For more information check the '''Wordfast Anywhere Manuals''' section.

To have our support check the '''Can I get help and support?''' section.

== Why do I get a zip file when downloading? ==
When downloading a file, there are some reasons why you can get a compressed to ZIP format (*.zip) file instead of the original source file extension:
* The size of the document is greater than 10 megabyte.
* The file name contains some special characters (for instance a space) that cannot be used as a web name for download.
* You chose "Send file to email" or "Create file URL".
* You requested to download a PDF version of the file.

All this situations may create some havoc on our server file system or when attaching the file to be send by email.
To prevent that, we use zip files as a container to be sure there will be no naming problem.
We also keep the original name of the file inside the zip, so file name is not changed.

'''To open a zip file''', '''[https://www.wikihow.com/Open-a-Zip-File here]''' are some ways to do it.
You can also use tools like '''WinRar''' or '''7-zip''' on Windows and '''The Unarchiver''' on Mac.

== Why do I get a txlf bilingual file instead of a txml bilingual file? ==
On September 2018 WFA updated the filters used to convert any document into a bilingual file. By default the bilingual file type used is TXLF.

In case you need to work with a TXML bilingual file type you can change this default setting. To do so, you need to go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab > [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button > '''''Pandora's box #8'''''

[[File:Warning.png]] '''''The download bilingual file will be of the type used when the file was uploaded.''''' For example if the file was uploaded using TXML, the bilingual download will be TXML. A file cannot be uploaded using one type (TXML) and download the bilingual file of the other type (TXLF). The workaround is to change the type ([https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters More information]) and upload the file again.

== Why do I get a bilingual file (txml, txlf, xlf, xliff, sdlxliff) when downloading a Translated document? ==
When using '''''File''''' tab > [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button > '''''Translated document/s''''' you'll get the translated version of the source document in the same file type.

That means if you uploaded a DOCX file, the translated file will be also a DOCX file.

If you uploaded a XLS file, the translated file will be also a XLS file.

If you uploaded a TXML file, the translated file will be also a TXML file.

If you uploaded a SDLXLIFF file, the translated file will be also a SDLXLIFF file.

And so on.

Txml, txlf, xlf, xliff and sdlxliff are bilingual files, so if you upload them the translated file will be of the same type because Wordfast Anywhere cannot convert them to the file type of the source document from where they where extracted.

Converting a bilingual file back to the original file type should be done with the tool which did the first conversion and with the original file as it will also be needed.

== If I cannot download the translated document, is it possible to have at least the translated segments to copy/paste them? ==
Yes, you can download the file in 'Text only' format.
* Go to '''File''' tab
* Click on '''''Download''''' button
* Choose '''Unformatted text''' from the list, and click '''''OK''''
* Choose one of the downloading options and click '''''OK'''''

The text will be downloaded in a text file without formatting.

== Can I download a Wordfast Classic-compatible bilingual document file? ==
This is possible for a MS-Word document (*.doc, *.docx).
* Go to '''File''' tab
* Click on '''''Download''''' button
* Choose '''Bilingual DOC original''' from the list, and click '''''OK''''
* Choose one of the downloading options and click '''''OK'''''

== When I am about to download the file, a dialog box says that some non translated segments remain - how can we go back to them? ==
There are two ways to go to the non translated segments.
# Use '''Outline'''.
#* Click on '''''Show/Hide Outline''''' button on '''View''' tab.
#* Translated segments are displayed with a green square and non translated ones with a grey square.
# Use '''Find & Replace'''.
#* Click on '''''Find & Replace''''' button on '''Edit''' tab.
#* Go to '''Miscellaneous''' tab
#* Choose '''Untranslated''' and click on '''''Find''''' button.
#* Untranslated segments will be search and result will be displayed on a list. To view the list use the [[File:MoveNextScreen.png]] button.

== What can I do when a document upload failed? ==
There are many complex reasons that make a upload to fail.

Usually the file has some problem that makes the filter unable to extract the bilingual file from it.

'''Check first the error message'''. You might get any clue of what is happening to the file.

Here are the most common causes of downloading problems:

'''Check Segmentation settings'''

Check there is a segmentation style set on Segmentation tab on Setup settings.( [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab).
If there is none, check one options for example "Wordfast".

'''Filter settings'''

Set the filter settings to default and try again.
You can find the filter settings on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab > [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button > '''''Pandora's box #8''''' [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters More information]

'''Hyperlinks'''

Sometimes there are hyperlinks on the file that make havoc on the filter. Uncheck them and try again. This is common with MS Office files.
#Go to '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab > [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button > '''''Pandora's box #8''''' [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters More information]
#Go to document type tab.
#Uncheck '''Translate hyperlink value'''.
#Save the settings.
#Upload the file again.

'''DOCX, XLSX, PPTX'''

Sometimes the latest version of the MS Office files (extension ends in X) have some style or property that is not of the liking of the filter.
Use "Save as" option on MS Office to save a 97-2003 version of the file and try to upload it again.

== How can I upload a PDF document? ==
PDF files can not be uploaded directly to WFA because they contains images of text, rather than actual text.
But they can be converted into Word, which can be uploaded into WFA.

Just upload the PDF document (as any other document) and follow the instructions on the disclaimer which basically are:
# Download a Word version of the file using the button at the bottom of the disclaimer.
# Review it to be sure the conversion is fine.
# Finally upload the word version to be translated.

Once the document has been translated you'll be able to download it as PDF using the download options.

[[File:Warning.png]] PDF to Word conversion process may take some time (up to 10 minutes) depending on the size and content of the PDF, be patient.

[[File:Warning.png]] The conversion process is complex and depends on the quality of the PDF and how the PDF was built.

[[File:Warning.png]] PDF that can be edited, PDF that have any password protection or PDF that have some security restrictions in them cannot be converted because permissions are needed.

== Wordfast Anywhere cannot upload my MS-Office file, why? ==
Sometimes the original file can be in a corrupted state.
* Open the file and save it under a new name.
* Try also to save it under a newer version like from *.doc to *.docx.

== Can I upload and translate a pre-segmented document file (pre-segmented or pre-translated with Wordfast Classic)? ==
At the moment, it is only possible for TXML files. For all other files, it is not possible, Wordfast Anywhere accepts only cleaned documents.
An alternative would be to clean up a copy of your segmented document in order to create a memory.
Then, you can upload the cleaned document and the memory.

== What shall I do with the red number inside a segment? ==
The red numbers are tags representing a formatting in the original document.
Avoid removing them and try to put them properly in the target segment.
This is a simple alternative to a fully WYSIWYG display of the document.

== How can I recover a document that has been accidentally deleted? ==
There is no direct way to recover a deleted document.
But there is a workaround:
* Upload again the source document
* Pre-translate it using the same TM that was used on the deleted cocument

== How do I use FireFox spellcheck for my language? ==
You need to install at least the dictionary of your language. See details in this [https://youtu.be/na19XZ8QQXg video]

== Why I don't see all the document? What <Beginning of block> and <End of block> mean? ==
If the file is long, it is loaded in blocks. To fasten the application, a document may be partially loaded.

In that case, the document chunk is marked with 2 of the following tags:
* <Beginning of file>
* <Beginning of block>
* <End of block>
* <End of file>
A block is a chunk of document, not corresponding with a page or any existing subdivision.

When translating, the next sentences are added bit by bit to the initially loaded block of sentences.
Each time a segment is modified, the document is saved on the server. So don't worry, if you cannot visualize all your document.

You can navigate through the document using buttons in '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#View_Tab View Tab]''' and shortcuts.

= TM =
== How can I change the TM language pair? ==
'''Wordfast Anywhere document now belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a project.'''

Each language pair has one or more associated TMs and/or glossaries, and each document added in a language pair is linked automatically to those TMs and glossaries.
You can choose to upload documents for one language pair, or for all language pairs in a project.

Selecting TMs and/or glossaries is done when setting up a language pair in the project setup. It can also be done, as before, when changing TMs and glossaries for a selected document using the ''TMs and glossaries'' button in the File menu.

A global TM and Glossaries setup dialog is now located on ''wordfast anywhere'' menu and used only for management (create, add, upload, merge, edit, download, delete... ), no more for assignment.

More information can be found on the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Setting_up_language_pair.2C_Translation_Memories_and_glossaries Start guide]'''

== How can I add a new Translation Memory? ==
Follow this link: [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Setting_up_a_Translation_Memory Add a new TM]

== How can I get my Translation Memory? ==
Go to the TM and Glossary management dialog by clicking on '''''Setup TM&Glo''''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' Menu.

Once on the dialog, choose the TM you want to download and click on '''Download''' button.

== Can I share a Translation Memory with my colleagues? ==
Yes, you can share a TM and a glossary over the world to chosen guests.
* Go to the TM and Glossary management dialog by clicking on '''''Setup TM&Glo''''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' Menu.
* Create or select a TM and an optional glossary.
* Click on the '''Share''' button.
* Click '''Add''' to open the ''Create a share'' dialog.
* Add the TM and optionally the glossary that you want to share and set its privilege.
* Add the email of your guest.
* Click on '''Save''' button. Guests will get an email notification and will find the TM on their TM list.

== How can I join a Translation Memory shared by my colleague? ==
You will find the shared TMs on your list of TMs.

Go to the TM and Glossary management dialog by clicking on '''''Setup TM&Glo''''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' Menu.

A shared TM will have an icon indicating it is shared, and passing the mouse over it will provide more information.

Also clicking on the '''Share''' button will open the ''TMs and Glossaries Shares'' dialog where mor information could be found on ''My shares from other users'' section.

== Why do I have no match in my TM on repetitive phrases? ==
The repetitive phrase should represent at least 50% of the entire sentence. The TM is searching similarity on the entire sentence. The minimum fuzzy Threshold is 50% and the default value is 70%. You have 2 solutions to overcome that problem:
* Set the fuzzy Threshold to the minimum of 50% if you have big repetitive chunks of text.
* Use a glossary and add manually the terms and phrases in it when you encounter repetition.

== There is no match on a similar sentence just following the translated one ==
The problem occurs because the search for the following segment is done while you are translating the current one.
When you are in that case, just click on '''''Force TM Search''''' button on ''TMs & Glossaries'' tab.

== TM Maintenance ==

=== Edit TM - Concordance ===

[[File:Faqtm1.PNG]]

=== Edit TM - Download ===

[[File:Faqtm2.PNG]]

[[File:Faqtm3.PNG]]

[[File:Faqtm4.PNG]]

=== Edit TM – Download using filtering ===

[[File:Faqtm5.PNG]]

[[File:Faqtm6.PNG]]

=== Edit TM – As a document ===

[[File:Faqtm7.PNG]]

[[File:Faqtm8.PNG]]

[[File:Faqtm9.PNG]]

=== Reverse TM ===

[[File:Faqtm10.PNG]]

=== Assemble TMs ===

[[File:Faqtm11.PNG]]

[[File:Faqtm12.PNG]]

= GLOSSARY =
== How can I add a new Glossary? ==
Follow this link: [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Setting_up_a_Glossary Add a new Glossary]

== How can I add, edit or delete glossary entries? ==
* Associate a glossary to a document and open the document.

* The glossary panel on the right should be opened. When a sentence contains a term of the glossary, it will be displayed there.

* Use the glossary dialog box to add a term when translating.
# Click on '''''Term Edition''''' button on '''TM & Glosaries''' tab or Ctrl+Alt+T.
# Fill the dialog and validate with OK, the term should appear in the Glossary panel.

* Edit or delete a term displayed in the glossary panel.
# A sentence containing that term should be opened or you just create one.
# Click on the term in the glossary panel to open the glossary dialog box.

* Use the glossary search window.
# Click on '''''Glossary Search''''' button on '''TM & Glosaries''' tab or Ctrl+Alt+G.
# An independent browser window will be opened (care popup blocker)
# You can search and edit terms directly in that window.

== Glossary Maintenance ==

=== Edit glossary – Glossary Search ===

[[File:Faqglo1.PNG]]

=== Edit glossary - Download ===

[[File:Faqglo2.PNG]]

=== Edit glossary – Add Term ===

[[File:Faqglo3.PNG]]

=== Edit glossary – Glossary Panel ===

[[File:Faqglo4.PNG]]

=== Reverse Glossary ===

[[File:Faqglo5.PNG]]

=== Assemble Glossaries ===

[[File:Faqglo6.PNG]]

= Machine Translation and IATE Glossary =
Follow this link: [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Setting_Machine_Translation_and_IATE_Glossary Set Machine Translation]

== Why my Machine Translation doesn't respond or has been disabled ==
'''Machine Translations suggestions are external to Wordfast Anywhere.'''

Machine Translations are third-party providers (Google, Microsoft, MyMemory...etc) called Machine Translation Engines or Engines, so Wordfast Anywhere cannot improve/change anything on them.

Engines can suffer from '''problems of instability''' which can force Wordfast Anywhere to disable it temporarily.
If you are having problems with an Engine '''try to increase the "Engine Timeout" or try a different one'''.
We encourage you to register to other Machine Translation engines existing in Wordfast Anywhere.

Follow '''[https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Machine_translation this link]''' to know more about '''Machine Translation settings''' and how to change them.

= USER INTERFACE =
== What are the supported browsers? ==
Wordfast Anywhere support Edge, Firefox, Safari, Chrome for recent versions.
However, you can try any browser.

== Where are my documents? ==
Content is displayed this way:
* Every document now belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a project.
* Double-click a project to open it to see the content (documents grouped by language pairs).
* Double-click a document to start/resume work.

[[File:Warning.png]] A project named "Project_1" has been created with all your current files grouped by lang pair.

== I cannot click on a top menu bar button. Why are some buttons on the top menu bar not available? ==

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a project or selecting/opening a document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a project is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when a project is selected from the project list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when more than one file is selected from the document list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] The file Upload and Delete buttons of the File menu have been moved and integrated in the project content panel, open a project to see them.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus used for translation (Edit, view, translation, review and TM & Glossaries) are only visible when the document is opened. Those buttons keep working as always, just need to open the document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Project menu> '''Import button is just to import .glp files'''. There is an issue importing packages coming from PD. If you cannot import the .glp file, please ask to receive the bilingual files (txml/txlf) and the url for the TM/glossary.

== A shortcut does not work, can I change it? ==
Yes,you can change it.
# Click on '''''Setup''''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab and go to the ''Shortcuts'' tab.
# Select the shortcut line and click on the '''upd''' link.
# Set a new key combination and clikc on '''Update'''

However, you may have trouble with Opera (prevent many for its own usage).

== When I click on Concordance Search or Glossary search, nothing happens! ==
Yes, it may happen if your browser popup blocker is activated. Add an exception for http://www.freetm.com

== Why are there blinking colors in the status bar? ==
It means that there is a background process:
* The pink color indicates a communication with Anywhere server
* The yellow color indicates a communication with the Machine Translation server
You can work while the colors are displayed.
However, if you scroll while a color is displayed, the red message busy will appear, and you will have to wait.

== I have a missing button image or missing the Twitter "Follow @wordfast_freetm" button ==
This can come from the AdBlock or similar program extension in your browser.
Please add the freetm.com domain to program's exception list.

Wordfast Anywhere 6 Manual

2022-01-26T07:42:10Z

Remiandre: /* Split file */

{{Languages}}
[[Category:Wordfast Anywhere]]

= Introduction =
Wordfast Anywhere (WFA) is the online version of the popular Wordfast computer assisted translation (CAT) program that provides much of the functionality of the Classic and Pro desktop versions. Instead of being installed as a program on the user’s computer, WFA is made accessible from Wordfast’s servers via a web browser, regardless of the operating system used (Windows, Mac, Linux, etc.). Every effort has been made to ensure that the user interface is as close as possible to the other Wordfast flavours: toolbars, icons, shortcuts and working methods. A Wordfast Classic or Pro user should be able to use WFA with almost zero assimilation time.

It is worth remarking that WFA is almost certainly the CAT program that integrates best with the popular Mac operating system. Unlike Java-based, cross-platform programs – including Wordfast Pro – that will run on the Mac but don’t integrate with system-wide tools such as the built in Dictionary, WFA will run in Mac-native browsers such as Safari, thus giving you access to the entire range of language and text handling tools that are built into the Mac OS environment.

[[File:WFA_pagina_5_new.jpg]]
[[File:WFA_pagina_6_new.jpg]]

With WFA you can translate a wide range of both editable (TXT, DOC, DOCX, RTF, XLS, PPT, ODT, HTML, TXML, MIF, INX, etc.) and non-editable (PDF, TIFF) documents. You can store up ten current documents in your workspace, deleting your finished translations to free up space and permit new documents to be uploaded.

You can also import the TMs (translation memories) of all the language pairs you work in. Your memories will progressively expand as and when you translate. They are stored securely and will not be shared or revealed without your authorisation. If you need a local copy, you can download your TM to your computer at any time.

As is the case with other Wordfast flavours, you can add terms to your glossary as you translate. You can also upload existing glossaries to your workspace, for all language pairs. Here again, your glossaries are secure and will not be shared or revealed unless you specifically invite a colleague. You can also download your glossary if you need a local copy.

The following instructions have been written for complete beginners. Having understood the above comments, a Wordfast Classic or Pro user should have no difficulty in using WFA intuitively.

Check the '''[[Wordfast Anywhere 6 Start Guide]]''' for a quick start.

Check our [https://www.freetm.com/jsp/terms.jsp Terms of use].

== How to use WFA ==
On Wordfast Anywhere every document belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a translation project.

So the first you need is a project. A project named "Project_1" is created by default, but you can create up to 3 projects.

A project needs a language pair. A default one is suggested but more can be added. Each language pair can have a TM and glossary assigned which will be used on several processes and also automatically assigned to the documents uploaded.

A project also needs a task. "Translate" is the one by default.

Once the project is created you can add the documents. Documents can be added to all language pairs or to specific ones. There is a maximum number of documents per project depending of the type of project.

Double-click a project to open it to see the content (documents grouped by language pairs).

Double-click a document to start/resume work.

[[File:notice.png]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rDhVYY02Cds Wordfast Anywhere 6 Basic Projects video]'''

= Login in to WFA account =
Check the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Login_in_to_WFA_account Login in to WFA account]''' section on the Start Guide.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you have not created an account yet, click on the '''''Create a new account''''' and follow the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#How_to_create_an_account instructions]'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you ever ''forget your password'', click on the '''''Forgot your password?''''' and follow the '''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Get_your_password_back instructions]'''.

[[File:Warning.png]] If you are having ''login problems'' check '''''[https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Start_Guide#Cannot_log_in_to_Wordfast_Anywhere Cannot log in to Wordfast Anywhere]''''' and follow the instructions.

=User Interface =
The user interface is divided into several sections. A top menu with tabs and buttons, a main central panel that changes depending on where we are (project list, project content, document translation) and a bottom panel where information and messages are shown.

Once you are connected to WFA, the workspace appears.

This should look similar to the following screenshot (depending on the browser, operating system or device used to access WFA):

[[File:Newui6.PNG]]

The workspace can be modified at any point according to your requirements.
==Top Menu==
At the very top you can find the ''Top Menu'' which consists in '''two rows''': one for the different '''menus''' (tabs) and one for the '''buttons''' corresponding to the selected tab.

Use [[File:CollapseTop.png]] to hide the buttons. Use [[File:CollapseBottom.png]] to show the buttons.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a project or selecting/opening a document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a project is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when a project is selected from the project list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when more than one file is selected from the document list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available '''only''' when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus used for translation (Edit, view, translation, review and TM & Glossaries) are only visible when the document is opened. Those buttons keep working as always, just need to open the document.

===Wordfast Anywhere Menu===

This tab a miscellaneous of buttons concerning the Wordfast Anywhere project.

[[File:Wfatab6.PNG]]

* [[File:Logout16.png]]: Use it when you want to '''leave''' Wordfast Anywhere.
* [[File:User profile.png]]: Here you'll find your '''account information'''. You'll be able to change your ''Login'' email, the ''Security Question'', the ''Security Answer'' and delete your account.
* [[File:Preferences.png]]: Here is where you set the '''configuration''' of Wordfast Anywhere:''Font Size'', ''Machine translation'', ''TM rules'', ''Shortcuts'', ''Segmentation'', ''Transcheck'' rules...etc.
* [[File:Preferences16round.png]]: Global management (create, add, upload, merge, edit, download, delete... ), no more for assignment.
* [[File:WF Update16.png]]: This button will direct you to a site to '''align''' your files.
* [[File:help16.png]]: WFA Help:
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''start guide''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''PM start guide''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''FAQ''' wiki page.
** Go to Wordfast Anywhere '''manual''' wiki page.
** If the previous wiki pages do not work, this is a pdf backup.
* [[File:Notice.png]]: There are 4 icons corresponding to different types of '''notifications''' ([[File:Warning.png]] ONLY displayed when there are notifications):
** Webmaster Info: notifications coming from Wordfast Anywhere administration (p.e stopping the server for a publication).
** Background Info: notifications about ''Background'' processes (p.e. Analyze, Spellcheck...etc).
** System Info: notifications from the system (p.e. an unsupported browser).
** TM Server Info: notifications realted to the TM Server (p.e. TM server is disconnected).

===Project Menu===
This tab has the tools concerning a project.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some buttons will be available when a project is selected on the project list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a project is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available for standard projects.

No project selected on the project list.

[[File:ProjecttabAll.PNG]]

This are the basic buttons:

* [[File:Pm new project 16.png]]: '''New''' use it to create a project.
* [[File:Pm open project 16.png]]: '''Open''' the selected project from the project list.
* [[File:Analyze Project16.png]]: '''Analyze''' all the documents of the project. A report is generated.
* [[File:Pm delete project 16.png]]: '''Delete''' the selected project.
* [[File:Pm close project 16.png]]: '''Close''' an opened project.
* [[File:Pm import project 16.png]]: '''Import''' a .glp file.
* [[File:Pm export project 16.png]]: '''Export''' a project into a .glp file.
* [[File:Linguist16.png]]: Use it to '''Manage''' the team of '''linguists'''.

To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

===File Tab===
This tab has the tools concerning a file.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be available when more than one file is selected from the list.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be also available when a document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will '''NOT''' be available when a document is opened.

[[File:FiletabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:Translate File16.png]]: '''Open''' the selected file from the list.
* [[File:About wordfast16.png]]: Open the document with '''Wordfast Pro Online'''. [[File:Warning.png]] The use of Wordfast Pro Online will be discontinued on December 31, 2021.
* [[File:Close16.png]]: '''Close''' an opened file.
* [[File:Save16.png]]: Here you'll find all the '''Download''' options for a file (p.e. translated version, bilingual versions, TXML, unformatted text, Off-line Report Tool, TM from doc segments).
* [[File:Preferences16round.png]]: With this button you'll change the '''TM & Glossary''' configuration for the document.
* [[File:Analyze Project16.png]]: '''Analyze''' the selected document/s. A report is generated.
* [[File:Statistics16.png]]: Get the '''Statistics''' of the document.
* [[File:Modify Project16.png]]: Get information about the file.
* [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]]: '''Pre-translate''' the selected document/s.
* [[File:Mergetms16.png]]: Use this button to '''merge''' the document with a '''TXML''' file.
* [[File:mergetms16_menu.png]]: Use this button to '''merge''' the document with an imported '''OFRT''' file.
* [[File:Split.png]] [[File:Join.png]]: '''Split''' the document in parts. '''Join''' the parts together again.
* [[File:Share.png]] [[File:Revoke.png]]: '''Share''' the document with an other Wordfast Anywhere user. '''Revoke''' will finish the share.
* [[File:Translate File16.png]]: '''Fuzzy Open''' the file without full matches.
* [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]]: '''Extract''' the '''frequent''' segments.
* [[File:Edit16.png]]: '''Rename''' the file.

===Edit Tab===

This tab is a translation tool extension.

[[File:Warning.png]] This buttons will be available when the document is opened.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of this buttons will be available when a TM is being edited.

[[File:EdittabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:FindReplace.png]]: Use it to '''Find & Replace''' text but also to go to a particular segment or get a list of segments ''untranslated'', ''provisional'', with ''notes'' or with ''tag differences''.
* [[File:EditSource16.png]]: '''Edit''' the source segment.
* [[File:Edit_Note16.png]]: Create, edit or remove a '''Note''' on a segment.
* [[File:Insert_c.png]]: '''Insert special characters'''. 7 different characters can be defined on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab => '''''Setup''''' button > '''''Pandora's box'''''
* [[File:Delete_alltargetseg.png]]: '''Delete''' '''tags''' in the document. This is only available when editing a TM and has 2 options: Delete all target tags or delete all document tags.
* [[File:delete_revisions.png]]: '''Delete''' the segment '''history'''.
* [[File:Delete_alltargetseg.png]]: '''Delete''' all '''target''' segments of the document.
* [[File:caseChanger.png]]: Toggle between lowercase, uppercase, and capitalization..

===View Tab===

In this tab you'll find the buttons to move through the document and show or hide the different panels.

[[File:ViewtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:PanelOutline.png]]: Show or hide '''Outline'''.
* [[File:panelTm.png]]: Show or hide '''TM''' panel.
* [[File:panelGlo.png]]: Show or hide '''Glossary''' panel.
* [[File:MovePrevScreen.png]]: Go to '''Previous Block'''.
* [[File:MoveNextScreen.png]]: Go to '''Next Block'''.
* [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]]: Toggle between the different document layout: Classic, Horizontal and Vertical.
* [[File:move_prev_seg.png]]: Go to '''Previous segment'''.
* [[File:move_next_seg.png]]: Go to '''Next segment'''.
* [[File:move_first_seg_screen.png]]: Go to '''First segment''' of '''Block'''.
* [[File:move_last_seg_screen.png]]: Go to '''Last segment''' of '''Block'''.
* [[File:move_first_seg_doc.png]]: Go to '''First segment''' of '''document'''.
* [[File:move_last_seg_doc.png]]: Go to '''Last segment''' of '''document'''.

===Translation Tab===

Find here all the tools to perform a translation

[[File:TranslationtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:StartNext.png]]: '''Start translation''' or open next segment.
* [[File:Previous.png]]: Open previous segment.
* [[File:CloseSave.png]]: '''Close and commit''' to the TM.
* [[File:Close retain.png]]: '''Close and retain''' the segment as provisional but not commit to the TM
* [[File:close.png]]: '''Close segment'''.
* [[File:close_restore.png]]: '''Close and delete''' target content.
* [[File:mark.png]]: Mark segment as '''provisional'''.
* [[File:CopySource.png]]: '''Copy source''' to target.
* [[File:Expand_Segment16.png]]: '''Expand''' segment.
* [[File:ShrinkSeg.png]]: '''Shrink''' segment.
* [[File:TranslateUntilFuzzy.png]]: '''Translate''' document '''until a fuzzy''' match.
* [[File:Cleanup_Project16.png]]: Toggle between Empty target, Remove tags and Restore.
* [[File:autopropagate.png]]: '''Auto propagate''' segment changes through all the document.
* [[File:dropdown.png]]: Toggle placeable.
* [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]]: Go to '''Next Placeable'''.
* [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]]: '''Copy Placeable'''.
* [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]]: Go to '''Previous Placeable'''.
* [[File:increase_target.png]]: Increase target segment height.
* [[File:Mic.png]]: Use '''Web Speech''' to dictate the target content. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY available for Chrome. Currently disabled due to browser security.'''

===Review Tab===

This tab has the tools to review the document.

[[File:ReviewtabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:Preview16.png]]: '''Preview''' a PDF version of the document.
* [[File:Transcheck16.png]]: Do a '''quality control''' on the document
* [[File:Spellcheck16.png]]: '''Spellcheck''' the document

===TMs and Glossaries Tab===

Tab with the tools related to TM and glossaries actions.

[[File:TmglotabAll.PNG]]

* [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]]: Concordance search
* [[File:GlossarySearch.png]]: Glossary Search
* [[File:TermEdit.png]]: Term edition.
* [[File:CopyTU.png]]: Copy TU.
* [[File:DeleteTU.png]]: Delete TU.
* [[File:Add File To Project16.png]]: Add TU.
* [[File:force_tm_addtu.png]]: Update TU.
* [[File:force_tm.png]]: Force TM search.
* [[File:force_mt.png]]: Force Machine Translation search.
* [[File:force_term.png]]: Force Glossary search.
* [[File:update_tm_doc.png]]: Update TM with document content.
* [[File:iSearch.png]]: Lookup in online dictionary.

===Help Tab===

Help section is on the '''Wordfast Anywhere Menu'''.

===Custom Tab===
In this tab you can add up to 15 buttons of your choice, so you can have together in one tab your most used buttons.
Selection any of the translation menus buttons (Edit, view, translation, review and TM & Glossaries) and the WFA setup and TM&Glossary set up.

[[File:custom_tab.png]]

To do so you must go to [[File:Preferences.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab. Then go to '''Pandora Box''' tab and go to ''Custom Tab settings'', where you will find all the buttons that can be added to the '''Custom''' tab

[[File:custom_tab2.png]]

==Panels==

===Project List Panel===
This panel shows the list of projects.

[[File:Projectlistpanel.png]]

Projects will be listed here. '''Double click on one project''' or select it and use [[File:Pm open project 16.png]]'''Open''' from the top menu bar to open the project.

===Project content Panel===
When opening a project, the ''Content Panel'' area will show the content of the project, the list of documents in the project.

[[File:ProjectContentpanel.png]]

Main areas are:

* '''Header row (1)''': In this row you'll fine the headers of the columns. The columns are: Languages/file (1), Vol. (1C) and the columns for the different jobs will follow (1D). This row will change the background color according to the project status: blue for ''In preparation'', orange for ''In progress'' and green for ''completed''. Use the '''Add files''' button (1A) to add files to all language pairs and use '''dashboard''' button (1B) to see an estimation of cost of the project.
* '''Project setup (2)'''Click on the ''project name'' or icon next to it to open the project setup dialog.
* '''Language Row (3)''': In this row several icons will be shown depending on the file selection to perform actions such as add files to the language pair (3A), delete selected files (3B) or assign linguist to jobs (3C). Use the '''remove language pair''' icon (3D) to delete the language pair ([[File:Warning.png]] all the documents inside will be permanently deleted).
* '''Note (4)''' this icon allows to add a note to the document.
* '''TM & glossaries (5)''' This are the TMs and glossaries assigned to the document, mouse-over to see extra information. This TM and glossary assignment will be used for the tasks.
* On the '''Status bar''' you'll find information about the project.
* Clicking on the file name will open the document. And clicking on each of the other cell text or icon will open the edit dialog for that cell.

===Translation Panels===
When a document is opened for translation, the screen is divided in 4 different panels.

[[File:Panels.png]]

====Outline====
Show/Hide Outline panel using '''''View''''' tab => '''''Show/hide Outline''''' [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button

The outline displays all the segments of the document.
The available status are:
* A white box indicates that the segment is not translated
* A green box indicates a translated segment
* A yellow box indicates a provisional segment
* An 'i' after segment id indicates a segment having a note
* The black thick border on the box indicates the current document selected on document panel
* The pink border on the box indicates the visible segments in the document panel

You can jump and open any segment of the document by clicking on its number.
If the segment is not visible on the document panel (blue border instead of pink), the document panel will be refreshed.

Once a segment is opened you can use
'''''Edit''''' tab => '''''Edit Note''''' [[File:Edit_Note16.png]] button to create/delete a note and also '''''Translation ''''' tab => '''''Provisional''''' [[File:mark.png]] button to mark/unmark a provisional segment.

====TM Panel====
This panel shows the matches from TM or MT for the current segment.

You can show or hide this panel using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:panelTm.png]] button.

====Glossary Panel====
This panel shows the matching terms for the current segment.

You can show or hide this panel using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:panelGlo.png]] button.

====Document Panel====

When a document is opened, it shows the segments content.

Wordfast Anywhere do not load the entire document in the editor if there are many segments.

While translating the segments are added one by one to the editor, but if you can move inside the document to see any part you want.

To do so, you can use:
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:MovePrevScreen.png]] button to go to '''Previous Block'''.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:MoveNextScreen.png]] button to go to '''Next Block'''.
* '''''View''''' tab => [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button to show '''Outline''' and then jump and open any segment of the document by clicking on its number. More information [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline here]

This is how an opened document looks like:

[[File:document_panel_doc.png]]

=====Document Layout=====
Using '''''View''''' tab => [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] button you can change the document layout, which is the way segments are shown on Document Panel. The three possible views are:

'''''Classical'''''

[[File:ClassicalLayout.png]]

'''''Horizontal'''''

[[File:HorizontalLayout.png]]

'''''Vertical'''''

[[File:VerticalLayout.png]]

===Status Panel===
Always present at the bottom. Here you can find several information about the project, file, TM, display, translation process. Also some messages will be showed here.

==Other features==

===Show/Hide Top Menu Buttons ===
Buttons on the top menu can be hidden.

Use [[File:CollapseTop.png]] to hide the buttons. Use [[File:CollapseBottom.png]] to show the buttons.

= Project Operations =
A new Project menu bar has been added after Wordfast Anywhere menu. Yes! Project Management (PM) has been introduced to WFA.

* * A project named "Project_1" is created by default. If you had an account before version 6, it will contain all the files from the previous version grouped by language pair.
* Every document now belongs to a language pair, which in turn belongs to a project.
* Double-click a project to open it to see the content (documents grouped by language pairs).
* Double-click a document to start/resume work.

[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a project.

[[File:notice.png]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rDhVYY02Cds Wordfast Anywhere 6 Basic Projects video]'''

== Create a New Project ==
On the Project tab click on [[File:Pm new project 16.png]]'''New''' to create a new project. This will open the ''Project Seup'' window where the settings for the project are done.

To access the project setup once the project has been created, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

[[File:Createproject.PNG]]
[[File:Createproject1.PNG]]
[[File:Createproject2.PNG]]

The ''Project Setup'' window has two sections that need to be set in order to create the project. Setting one section opens the next one.

;1.General
: On this section general information of the project is set. This includes:
# Project name (Compulsory)
# Description (optional)
# Project type. Defines the type of the project:
#* Standard: For translators working alone.
#* Advanced: For Project Managers (PMs) managing large, multi-language projects.
# Project status (for advanced type). Defines the status of the project:
#* In preparation (blue): When project is being prepared (files, TMs and glossaries and linguist being added)
#* In progress (orange): This marks the start of the project. Files are shared with the linguist at this point.
#* Completed (green): The project is finished.
# Currency(optional). It will be used to calculate the project cost.
# Decimals(optional). When this checkbox is marked the project estimated cost will show numbers with decimals.
# Auto(optional). By default Project Manager will be responsible of pushing files to the next job when completion is done. Mark this checkbox to automatically sent files to the next job upon completion.
;2.Language Pairs and tasks
: On this section language pairs and tasks are added.
* Use the '''+''' next to the language pair header to add a new language pair. This will open the language selection dialog and then the TM and glossaries dialog to assign them to the language pair.
* Use the '''+''' at the end of the header row to add new tasks. Only 10 tasks can be added.
* A row is shown for each language pair where the default word rate (left box) and speed rate (right box) for each task can be set.
* Use the '''-''' next to the language pair to remove it. [[File:Warning.png]] Associated files and shares will be revoked.
* Use the '''-''' next to the task name to remove it. [[File:Warning.png]] Associated files and shares will be revoked.

Once all compulsory fields are set, click on '''Save project''' to save the project and go to the ''Project Content panel''.

[[File:Warning.png]] It is possible to move from standard to advanced but opposite is only possible if the advanced project has only one task.

== Modify Project Setup ==
To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

Use this to change any of the project settings defined on the project creation.

[[File:Warning.png]] It is possible to move from standard to advanced but opposite is only possible if the advanced project has only one task.

It is the same than for creating a project, so check the section above to know about the different parts and settings.

== Setting up language pair, Translation Memories and glossaries ==
Languages are added/removed from the ''Project Setup'' dialog.

To access the project setup, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

Check ''Create Project'' section above to know about it.

=== Language pair with its associated TMs and glossaries set in the project setup ===

To access the project setup dialog, when the project is opened click on the project name or on the [[File:Setup.png]] icon next to the project name.

[[File:Project_setup.png]]

Click on the language pair '''''+''''' button.

[[File:Langpair_dialog.png]]

Enter the languages and save, the TMs and glossaries dialog opens.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair.png]]

* If no TM and glossary exists for the language pair, a new dialog will propose you to create them. Save and wait they are listed.
* You can create and choose one or more TMs and glossaries. They are selected by checking the row in the '''''Active''''' column.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair_2.png]]

Finally save the TMs and glossaries selection by clicking on the '''''Save''''' button. The new language pair is now in the project setup and one icon is displayed for each TM and glossary.

[[File:Project_setup_2.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] The TMS and glossaries can be updated for a language pair by clicking on the icons. But if documents already exists for that language pair, they will not be affected by this change, only new documents added after the update.

=== TMs and glossaries set individually for a document ===
This selection for a document is overwriting the Language pair selection.
In the project content select a document by checking it and then click on the '''''TMs and glossaries''''' button [[File:Preferences16round.png]] of the '''''File''''' menu.

[[File:Project_content_3.png]]

The same TMs and glossaries dialog opens.

[[File:Tmglo_langpair_3.png]]

Saving will update only the TMs and glossaries for the selected document. A control can done hovering the TM icon.

[[File:Project_content_2.png]]

== Add/Remove Files ==
From the '''Project Content Panel''' there are two ways to add files to a project.

* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the header will add the files to all the languages in the project.
* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the language row. This will add the files only to that language.

[[File:Pmaddfiles.PNG]]

To remove a file, first use the checkbox to select it and then use the [[File:Remove16.png]] icon on the language row.

[[File:Pmdeletefile.PNG]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Associated shares will be revoked.

Several files can be selected to be removed at the same time.

== Project dashboard ==
Using the [[File:Pm_cost_16.png]] icon on the header will show the estimated cost of the project. Click on the icon again to hide costs.

[[File:Pmdashboard.PNG]]

== Advanced Features ==
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

Advanced projects have some extra features to manage the files.

=== Task TM ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

Click on the TM icon on the file column to set how the TM will be used on the tasks.

[[File:PmaddtmPNG.PNG]]

There are different options for the TM use:
*'''''Share TM'''''
**The selected TM will be shared with linguists.
**This is the best option to use.
**Translator will have exact and fuzzy matches.
**Translator can use concordance.
*'''''Create Project TM'''''
**The selected TM will NOT be shared.
**It will be used to create a temporary project TM with the matches from the file/s
**The temporary project TM will be shared.
*'''''Pretranslate'''''
**The selected TM will NOT be shared.
**It will be used to pretransalte the document/s.
**Only one TU match (the highest) per segment will be available to the translator.
**Concordance cannot be used.
**Concordance will only be used in this temporary TM

[[File:Warning.png]] Once a task has started it is not possible to change this assignment.

To change the TM assigned click on the same icon and change the TM selection by marking the ''active'' checkbox for the TMs you want to use.
To unassign the TMs clean all the ''active'' checkboxes.

=== Task Glossaries ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

To assign glossaries to tasks follow the instructions for TMs, but using the ''active'' checkboxes on the glossaries side of the dialog.

=== Manage Linguists ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

The Manage Linguist window can be opened by using the [[File:Linguist16.png]] icon on the '''Project''' tab or the '''Manage linguists''' buttons on the ''Assign Job'' window.

This allows the PM to create a team of linguists that will be used on the project jobs.

The same linguist can be used in several languages and roles.

[[File:Pmlinguist1.PNG]]

Main areas are:

* '''Add new linguist to a new language pair (1)''': Use [[File:Pm_linguist_add_16.png]] icon to add a new linguist to the team for a new language pair.
* '''Add or remove a linguist from a language pair (2)''': Use [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] icon to add a linguist to a language pair and use [[File:Pm_collapse_16.png]] icon to remove it.
* '''Linguist task grid (3)''': In this grid, each cell shows the RATE-SPEED-SCORE settings for a linguist. The grid has 4 columns, one for each role: Translator (TR), Proofreader (PR), Revise (RE) and QA. In addition '''dark values mean that linguist has been marked as "able" to do that role'''. Grey values indicate that linguist is not marked as "able" to do that role. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''

==== New Linguist ====
Use [[File:Pm_linguist_add_16.png]] or [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] to add a new linguist.

[[File:Pmlinguistnew.PNG]]

Introduce the following information to add a linguist.

* '''Email''': It must be the email of the linguist WFA account.
* '''Initials''': Short 4 character nickname for the linguist.
* '''Ctry''': Country of the linguist.
* '''Comment''': Some words about the linguist.
* '''Source language''' and '''target language''' that the linguist can work with.
* Role performance. There are 4 default roles a linguist can do on project tasks.
** Mark the '''checkbox''' if the linguist is able to do the role. [[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''
** '''Rate''': Linguist minim rate. Rate is measured in import per word. The project currency will be user with the import. For example 0.5 Eur per word.
** '''Speed''': Linguist speed rate (words/day). For example 3,000 words/day.
** '''Score''': Linguist 1 to 5 ''star'' score.

=== Assign Job ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY linguist that are marked as able to do a role can be selected to do project tasks.'''

Use the [[File:Pm_expland_16.png]] icon in the language row under the '''job name''' column to assign a job to a linguist for the checkbox marked files.

[[File:Pmaddtask.PNG]]

On the assign job dialog:
* Choose a linguist from the list to whom the job will be assigned. [[File:Warning.png]] The file will be shared with the linguist when the project is set as 'In progress'. The rate and job amount from the linguist will be set for the task.
* To override the linguist rate or job amount, a particular rate or job amount for the job can be set using the input field under the column header. [[File:Warning.png]] Bear in mind that both are related so changing one will update the other.
* A '''''Deadline''''' can be set on the input field under '''''Duration'''''.
* Fill the '''''Note''''' text box to send extra information to the linguist.
* Use '''''Linguist cannot download the shared file''''' to not allow the linguist to download the file.
* Click on '''''Manage linguists''''' to open the Manage Linguist window to add/edit/remove linguists.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' linguists marked as ''able'' to do a role will be listed.

Use the [[File:Pm_collapse_16.png]] icon in the language row under the '''job name''' column to unassign a linguist from a job for the checkbox marked files. [[File:Warning.png]] Shares will be revoked.

[[File:Pmdeletetask.PNG]]

=== Move file to next Task ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

If '''Auto''' tasking is not set on the ''Project Properties'' window, when a task is finished (file has been revoked by the linguist), PM has to manually move it to the next task which will share the file with the linguist assigned to that task.

To do so, click on the double arrow on the finished task.

[[File:Pmmoveon.PNG]]

=== Workflow ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

The project workflow should be:
# PM creates a project, sets languages, sets jobs (Project setup).
# PM adds files to the project and prepares them (i.e splitting).
# PM sets how the TMs and glossaries assigned to the document will be use on the tasks as Share TM, Create project TM or to pre-translate.
# PM prepares the team of linguists.
# PM assign a linguist to each file task. Multiple file selection for batch assign is possible.
# When PM sets the project status to ''In progress'' files that has been assigned a TM and a task will be shared to the corresponding linguist.
# Linguist works on the file. When his work is finished, revokes the file. This finishes the share.
# Once the file is revoked, the PM has to manually move it to the next task. This is done automatically if Auto tasking is selected on Project Setup.
# When all tasks are finished project is finished. PM can change the status of the project to ''Completed''.

=== Purchase Order ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY''' for Advanced Projects

You can define a Purchase Order template with project, document and task information that will be send to the linguists when the file is shared.

A copy of the email send to the linguist is BCC to the project owner.

==== Purchase Order template ====
Go to [[File:User profile.png]] '''''User Profile''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab to see information about your account. On the ''PM'' tab you can edit the default template.

[[File:Po1.PNG]]

On this template you put the information you want to appear on the Purchase Order.

You can use some '''dynamic parameters''' to add project, document and task information. Use this parameters to build the Purchase Order.
Parameters will be substituted by project, document and task corresponding values or a predefined text.

{| class="wikitable"
|+Here is the list which you can also check them using the [[File:Pm info 16.png]] icon.
|-
|{purchase_order_number}
|Include a number for the purchase order.
|-
|{project_name}
|Project name.
|-
|{task_name}
|Task name.
|-
|{document_name}
|Document name.
|-
|{document_download}
|If linguist can download the document the text '(The document cannot be downloaded.)' will be added to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{document_volume}
|Document number of words.
|-
|{job_note}
|Job note
|-
|{job_rate}
|Job rate
|-
|{job_total}
|Job total cost
|-
|{job_deadline}
|Job deadline in the format 29/12/2021 15:00 GMT+02:00 and the remaining time.
|-
|{document_tmglo}
|If there are TMs or glossaries in the share the text 'For the duration of this job # Translation Memories and # Glossaries have been temporarily shared with you.' will be added to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{document_use}
|Add the text 'To work on this document, log into your Wordfast Anywhere account. If you are already logged, refresh the project list by closing all the projects.' to the Purchase Order.
|-
|{my_full_name}
|Full name from 'User profile'.
|-
|{my_professional_info}
|Professional information from 'User profile'.
|}

==== Purchase Order preview ====
On the '''assign job dialog''' you will see a preview of the Purchase Order.

[[File:Warning.png]] Some of the dynamic parameters will be updated when changing the selections on the dialog, others might require the job to be saved and others will be updated when the Purchase Order is send.

[[File:Po2.PNG]]

==== Purchase Order batch send ====
You can send the Purchase Orders for all the saved jobs at any moment using the '''Send POs''' button on the ''Project Setup'' dialog

[[File:Warning.png]] Purchase Order will also be send when the file is shared.

= File Operations =
[[File:Warning.png]] Menus and buttons now will be visible when they can be used. Can be activated when selecting/opening a document.

=== Upload ===
To translate your document, you must first upload it to WFA.

[[File:warning.png]] There is a file size limit of 20 Mb.

From the '''Project Content Panel''' there are two ways to add files to a project.

* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the header will add the files to all the languages in the project.
* Using the [[File:Add File To Project16.png]] icon on the language row. This will add the files only to that language.

[[File:Pmaddfiles.PNG]]

The following window will be displayed:

[[File:Upload_doc.png]]

There are several ways to upload a document
* '''From local file''': Use '''''Browse...''''' to navigate through the directories on your computer and locate the document to be uploaded.
* '''From URL''': This option allows you to upload a file that is located on an Internet server by entering the address (URL) into the field. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Google Drive''': Choose a file from your Google Drive to be uploaded. You'll be asked to allow access rights to WFA before choosing the file. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Dropbox''': Choose a file from your Dropbox to be uploaded. You'll be asked to allow access rights to WFA before choosing the file. This feature is useful for tablet computers and other mobile devices that do not possess a hard drive.
* '''From Clipboard''': Paste the text to be uploaded into the text area. A text file will be created with the text.

At the bottom of the window click on '''''View allowed formats''''' to check the allowed formats:

Finally click on:
* '''''Upload''''': to only upload the file, which will be listed on the Document Management.
* '''''Upload and Open''''': to upload and open the document, which will be displayed in the document panel.

[[File:warning.png]] Depending on the size of the file, this may take some time. Please be patient.

Upload can also be done by using drag and drop area.

For some file formats you can configure some filter behaviors when uploading the file on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters|Configure Filters]]''' in ''Pandora's Box #8''. This is important for '''Text based files (xml, xsl)''' where a rules file (.properties) is needed.

=== Open ===
To open a document, first select it from the list of documents. There are 2 options on '''[[{{PAGENAME}}#File Tab|File tab]]''':

* '''''Open''''' button [[File:Translate_File16.png]]: will open a document and show all the segments
* '''''Fuzzy Open''''' button [[File:Translate_File16.png]]: will open a document, but only segments with a score lower than 100.

=== Segmentation ===
In order to be translated with a CAT tool, a document is divided into translation units (TUs), also known as segments. This process is called segmentation. A segment is a text string that ends with a terminator segment, usually the period (.), colon (:), question mark (?), or exclamation mark (!) and also a paragraph or end of cell mark, a page break or a tab.

The advantage of segmentation is that the translation units are presented to you one by one, without any danger of missing one. These segments form the basis for the TUs that are saved in the TM, consisting of the source segment (to translate) and the target segment (translated).

To configure segmentation go to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Segmentation_tab| Segmentation tab]]''' on the WFA settings.

=== Review ===
Once translated, the text should be revised. Here are some methods:
* Download the translated document immediately to view it in your favourite word processor.
* Download it in an offline review format. See '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Offline_Review_Tool|Offline Review Tool (OFRT)]]'''.
* Revise it in WFA using '''Trancheck''', '''Spellcheck''' and '''Preview''' tools. See below.
* If you are using the Classic mode for the document Layout (See the '''''Doc Layout''''' button [[File:batchmonitor16_views.png]] on '''''View''''' tab) , you can toggle the display between the bilingual document, the original document and the translated document, use the shortcut '''Ctrl+,''' (Ctrl+comma). A different display mode is presented with each iteration. To confirm what you see in front of you, check the indicator on the status bar: bilingual document (Bilingual), original document (Source) or translated document (Target). You can also click on the indicator to change it. Please note this action does not alter the document in any way. It only changes the way that it is displayed in a way that is more convenient for the task you are currently engaged in.

==== Transcheck ====
Click on the '''''Transchek''''' button [[File:Transcheck16.png]] of the '''''Review''''' tab. Transcheck provides the means to check translated content for missing tags, empty targets, numbers, untranslated segments, and terminology.

[[File:Transcheck.png]]

Click on the '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#QA_tab|Set the criteria]]''' link to go to the '''Setup''' and configure them.

Click on the '''''Check''''' button to get the result.

Click on the '''''Move next''''' button to move in the document panel to the first segment in the result list. Click again to move to next segment and so on.

==== Spellcheck ====

Click on the '''''Spellcheck'''' button [[File:Spellcheck16.png]] of the '''''View''''' tab and choose again '''Spellcheck''' in the list of choice. Spellcheck is a good practice to ensure high quality as it flags words in a document that may not be spelled correctly. The Spellcheck is done immediately then you'll get the following report with the results.

[[File:Spellcheck.png]]

Click on the '''''Move''''' button to move in the document panel to the first segment in the result list. Click again to move to next segment and so on.

==== Preview ====
Click on the '''''Preview''''' butonn [[File:Preview16.png]] of the '''''View''''' tab . It can be done at any stage of completion to get a PDF file displayed in a pop-up window with the translated document.

[[File:Preview_1.png]]
[[File:Preview_2.png]]

=== Download ===

[[File:Warning.png]] For '''download issues''', please check this [https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_fix_a_document_when_download_failed.3F link]

When the translation is finally complete, you must download the final document in order to be able to deliver it. To do this, click on [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab. A dialog with all the download options will be shown.

[[File:Donwload_all.jpg]]

Here is a short description of each option:

* '''Translated document/s''': Click to download the translated file. It will be the translated version of the source document in the same file type.

* '''Bilingual''': Click to download the TXLF (or TXML) file from the document. [[File:Warning.png]] '''''The download bilingual file will be of the type used when the file was uploaded.''''' For example if the file was uploaded using TXML, the bilingual download will be TXML. A file cannot be uploaded using one type (TXML) and download the bilingual file of the other type (TXLF). The workaround is to change the type and upload the file again. [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.239_Configure_Filters More information]

* '''Offline review export''': Click to download an Offline Review file (.doc).

* '''Bilingual DOC without formatting''': Click to download bilingual for MS Word without placeholders (*.doc).

* '''Unformatted text''': Click to download unformatted Text (*.txt).

* '''Notes report''': Click to download a report with the document notes.

* '''TM from document/s''': Click to download a TM with document's content (.txml).

* '''Backup workspace''': Click to download a backup of current document + TM + glossary.

* '''Package''': Click to download a WFP package file (.glp) containing documents, memories, glossaries....etc. More information [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Package here]

* '''Filtered bilingual''': Open an advanced filtering dialog to choose segments to be downloaded.

Clicking '''OK''' will take the next dialog.

You may receive this message if you have not yet fully translated the document:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

This is purely an advisory message, warning you if you have forgotten to translate a segment or if there are provisional segments or notes. However it is quite possible that this is your intention: sometimes there are segments that should not be translated.

You can find out at any time if you have completed the translation, or how many segments remain to be translated, by using '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''

If your file is fully translated or you clicked '''OK''' on this warning dialog, a dialog where you can choose the way to download the file will open.

This can have different extra options depending the type of download you have chosen on the first dialog.

[[File:DownloadOptions2.png]]

For downloading the translated file, you have the option to add a second document in PDF format to the downloading of the document in its original format. To add the PDF-formatted document, tick the Add PDF file box. This may take some time, so please wait.

[[File:DownloadOptions2a.png]]

For downloading the TXML file, you have the options to copy the source content in case target segment is empty and not use language variants.

You can cancel the download by clicking Cancel or continue by clicking OK.
You can verify that this operation is taking place: a series of small blue rectangles will display the progress in the status bar.

There are some cases when you will get a compressed ZIP file instead of the original format. Check [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#Why_do_I_get_a_zip_file_when_downloading.3F here] the reasons.

If you have requested the PDF file, both files – the original and the PDF – will be downloaded together and compressed together in ZIP format (*. zip).

There are several ways to download a file:

* '''Download file''': After you click on the OK button, Wordfast Anywhere prepares the data transfer and then sends it to your browser. The browser will then inform you that it has received the data according to its specific mode of operation. In some cases, a dialog box will pop up allowing you specify where to save the file; however, this depends on the particular browser you use. If nothing happens, check your browser’s downloads settings and / or repeat the process.
* '''Send file to email''': Send the downloaded file by email.
* '''Create file URL''': Create a url to the downloaded file. To get the file copy-paste the url in your browser to start the download. The file will be available at that location for 3 days.
* '''Google Drive''': Send the downloaded file to your Google Drive account.
* '''Dropbox''': Send the downloaded file to your Dropbox account.

[[File:Warning.png]] For '''download issues''', please check this [https://www.wordfast.net/w/index.php/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_fix_a_document_when_download_failed.3F link]

=== Delete ===
[[File:Warning.png]] Remember this can '''NOT''' be undone, so it is recommended to download the file first.

To remove a file, first use the checkbox to select it and then use the [[File:Remove16.png]] icon on the language row.

[[File:Pmdeletefile.PNG]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Associated shares will be revoked.

Several files can be selected to be removed at the same time.

[[File:notice.png]] In case you accidentally delete a file, you can recover it by uploading again and using the same TM to pre-translate it.

=== Package ===
Project files (*.glp) are managed with the [[File:Pm import project 16.png]] '''Import''' and [[File:Pm export project 16.png]] '''Export''' buttons in the Project menu.

[[File:Warning.png]] The project file (*.glp) is limited to one source language while a Wordfast Anywhere project can have many, in consequence, package export is done by source language.

[[File:Warning.png]]There is an issue importing packages coming from PD. If you cannot import the .glp file, please ask to receive the bilingual files (txml/txlf) and the url for the TM/glossary.

==== Upload ====

Upload must be done using '''''Project''''' menu => '''''Import''''' [[File:Pm import project 16.png]] button.

Once you have selected you local file, click '''Upload'''. A new dialog with the package information and upload options will be shown.

[[File:UploadPkg.JPG]]

* '''Package Information''' section shows package name, who and when created the package and which language pairs contain.
* '''Package content''' section shows the bilingual files on the package. The files with the check box marked will be uploaded. '''On the right''' there are two drop-down lists to add a TM and glossary to the file which can came from the package if WFA can handle them or from your list on WFA (Information about them can be found on the Resources section).
* '''Resources''' section shows a list of TMs and glossaries and source files.

Finally there are two options for the upload.
* '''Create new folder''': by default files will be added to the root folder, you can use this option to upload the package files in a new folder.
* If the package contains source files a drop-down list will be shown to choose between '''Export back later''' to upload just the bilingual files and '''Generate final files on WFA''' to upload source files and merge them with the corresponding bilingual file in the package.

Once the package has been successfully uploaded, an HTML report is created.

[[File:Warning.png]] A new project is created with the content of the package.

==== Download ====

[[File:Warning.png]] The project file (*.glp) is limited to one source language while a Wordfast Anywhere project can have many, in consequence, package export is done by source language.

Download must be done using '''''Project''''' menu => '''''Export''''' [[File:Pm export project 16.png]] button.

[[File:DownloadPkg.JPG]]

* '''Package Information''': Here you can choose to download an existing package or create a new one, source and target languages. Multiple target language can be chosen if the package had them when it was uploaded.
* '''Package content''': After clicking '''Find Files''' a list of available files, TMs and glossaries is shown. The files with the check box marked will be downloaded.

Finally you can chose to '''Add Source files''' to the package.

= TM & Glossary Management =
== TM & Glossary Basics ==

Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''Setup TM&Glo''' button on '''Wordfast Anywhere''' menu.

[[File:TmgloDialog.png]]

===Translation Memory ===
==== Creating a translation memory ====
There are several ways to create or add a TM:
* Create an empty standard WFA TM
* Upload an existing TM like from Wordast Classic or Pro
* Link to a remote TM hosted on a private Wordfast server
* Link to a Very Large TM hosted on a public Wordfast server

To create an empty TM, click on the '''''Create''''' button of the TM buttons area.

[[File:CreateTm.png]]

Choose source and target language codes. It is recommended that you have only one TM for each language pair. This way, you will benefit from everything you have already translated in each pair. However, there may be reasons for you to maintain different TMs in the same language pair. In this case, enter an ID using up to 10 characters in the Assigned Name field.
 Then click on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''Create TM''''' dialog box. Your TM has now been created and is selected in the list of TMs.

To Upload an existing TM, click on the '''''upload'''' button.

[[File:CreateTm_3.png]]

If you already have a TM that you use with Wordfast Classic or Pro, you can upload it to WFA. The codes for source and target languages are written in the header of the TM file. If you already have a TM in the same pair, make sure that you enter an identifier of up to 10 characters in the Assigned Name field.
 This procedure is exactly the same if you have a TM from another CAT tool. However, check first that this TM has been exported in the '''TMX''' format, the standard file format with extension '''.tmx''' supported by all major CAT tool developers.
 Click on the '''''Upload''''' button of the '''''Upload''''' dialog box, you will be prompted to browse a local file on your PC.

If the TM is in Excel format, before uploading it you need to save it as ''Unicode Text''.

[[File:warning.png]] Depending on its size, uploading a TM may take some time. In this case, it can be run in the background, allowing you to perform other tasks while you are waiting.

To add a remote TM or VLTM, click on the '''''add''''' button.

[[File:AddTm_1.png]]

Select the type TM in the list box.

[[File:AddTm_2.png]]

For adding a remote TM, copy paste the given URL in the URL field and the workgroup ID, if any, in the workgroup ID field.
 If you have already a remote TM with the same languages, you will need to enter a symbolic name.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test the remote TM. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:AddTm_3.png]]

WFA has access to the public TM server, which consists of segments offered by the community of translators and is available to all under the name VLTM (Very Large Translation Memory). The TM is unrestricted, free of charge and anonymous.
 For a VLTM, you need to enter source and target language codes.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test if the VLTM is available for your languages. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

==== Appending a TM to an existing TM ====
You can upload and append a TM to one of your existing TMs by clicking on the '''''merge''''' button.

[[File:MergeTm.png]]

 The process is slightly the same than uploading a TM but you should first select the existing TM in the list. The memory to import will already have predefined source and target languages codes in the header of the TM. There may therefore be a conflict of languages between it and the existing memory. If the languages are different, the merge operation will be rejected.
 You also have the choice, in case there are identical source segments, to add always the TM segments, or to not add duplicated segments from the TM. Select '''Add always''' or '''Do not add duplicate''' in the list box.
 By default, the merge process will not take language variants into account. If you want to make sure exactly the same variants are merged, tick the '''append TUs having the same variant''' option.
 Finally click on the '''''Merge''''' button of the '''''Append TUs''''' dialog box

==== Selecting an existing TM for translating a document ====
Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''TMs and Glossaries''' button on '''File''' menu to open the dialog and select an existing TM.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Caution''': If your TM is selected in the TM list, it does not mean selected for translating a document.
To select a TM for translation, you have to tick it in the '''active''' column and click on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' dialog box.
In this example above, 2 EN>FR TMs and 2 EN>FR glossaries are set active for translation.

[[File:notice.png]] A document can have as active '''several read-only''' TMs, but '''only one writeable'''. You might need to uncheck the active checkbox from the current writeable TM in order to set a new one.

=== Glossary ===
The use of incorrect terminology can ruin an otherwise good translation. Many clients have a well-defined terminology (the jargon of the trade), compiled in the form of a glossary. By supplying this glossary to their translators, clients can impose a particular terminology. In adopting this approach, very common in technical translation, the end result should harmoniously fuse the linguistic competence of the translator with the terminological requirements of the client.

Sometimes the client will ask the translator to provide a glossary of terms arising from research undertaken during the translation. In this case, the translator must create a glossary and add specific terminology to it. This glossary building can either be done prior to translation (in an initial terminology research phase), or during the translation itself.

In many cases, however, the client provides a bilingual glossary, which has already been created during the course of previous translations. It is then up to the translator to comply strictly with it and, where appropriate, to add his or her own contributions.

When the translation work is of a more general nature (and especially if a translator is still in the process of acquiring the general vocabulary of a source language), WFA’s glossary function can also be used to itemise terminology that is encountered during the course of the translation process.

Wordfast Anywhere is designed to assist the translator in all the cases mentioned above through the implementation of its glossary function. This glossary consists of a simple tab-delimited text document, which – like the TM – can be uploaded to and downloaded from WFA, shared with other CAT programs, etc. as required.

==== Creating a glossary ====
Like TM there are several ways to create or add a glossary:
* Create an empty standard WFA glossary
* Upload an existing glossary
* Link to remote glossaries
* Link to Tilde Terminology services
* Link to a IATE glossary

To create an empty glossary, click on the '''''Create''''' button of the glossary buttons area and follow the same TM pattern.

To Upload an existing glossary, click on the '''''upload''''' button of the glossary buttons area and follow the same TM pattern.
 Allowed file types are simple tabulated text file (*.txt) (source + tab + target), Wordfast glossary text file (*.txt), Excel file (*.xls, *.xlsx) and TBX file (*.tbx).
 Excel files must be simple:
* 1st Column: Source (compulsory)
* 2nd Column: Target (compulsory)
* 3rd Column: Comment (optional)
* 4th Column: F1 (optional)
* 5th Column: F2 (optional)
* 6th Column: F3 (optional)

 Unlike with a TM, WFA cannot derive the source and target language information from the header of the glossary file; therefore this must be specified here.
 Once the glossary has been uploaded, you will receive a report summarising the operation:
 You will see how many terms have been submitted for upload, how many were rejected as invalid or duplicates well as the total number of terms added.

To add a remote glossary or Tilde Terminology services, click on the '''''add''''' button.

[[File:AddGlossary_1.png]]

Select the type in th elist box.

[[File:AddGlossary_2.png]]

For adding a remote glossary, copy paste the given URL in the URL field.
 If you have already a remote glossary with the same languages, you will need to enter a symbolic name.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test the remote glossary. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:AddGlossary_3.png]]

For setting Tilde Terminology services, you need to select source and target languages and a domain.
 Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button to test if you have collections. If the test is OK, then click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:addIATE.png]]

To set an IATE glossary, just select the source and target languages. Only languages from the European community are supported.
Click on the '''''Test connection''''' button and if the glossary exists, click on the '''''Add''''' button.

[[File:addIATE2.png]]

By default not all IATE terminology is showed, but you can enable it by checking '''''Show all common terminology'''''.

==== Appending terms from a local glossary to an existing glossary in Wordfast Anywhere ====
You can upload and append a glossary to one of your existing glossaries by clicking on the '''''merge''''' button.

[[File:MergeGlo.png]]

 The process is slightly the same than uploading but you should first select the existing glossary in the list.
 You have the choice, in case there are identical entries (source and target), to add always or to not add duplicated. Select '''Add always''' or '''Do not add duplicate''' in the list box.
 Finally click on the '''''Merge''''' button.

==== Selecting one or more glossaries for translation ====
Click on the [[File:Preferences16round.png]] '''TMs and Glossaries''' button on '''File''' menu to open the dialog and select an existing TM.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Caution''': If your glossary is selected in the glossary list, it does not mean selected for translation.
To select a glossary for translation, you have to tick it in the '''active''' column and click after on the '''''Save''''' button of the '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' dialog box.

[[File:notice.png]] A document can have as active '''several read-only''' glossaries, but '''only one writeable'''. You might need to uncheck the active checkbox from the current writeable glossary in order to set a new one.

==== Using a glossary ====

[[File:Use glossary.png]]

* Whenever WFA recognises a term from the glossary in the source segment it highlights it against a blue background

* The terms highlighted in blue are considered as placeables. They can thus be manipulated with the [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] and [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] icons or the Ctrl+Alt+Right and Ctrl+Alt+Left shortcuts and by clicking on them with the mouse or by typing their initial letter + Tab. The difference is that, when you use the [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]] icon or the Ctrl+Alt+Down shortcut, it is the corresponding translation that is copied to the target segment. The most easy way to copy a target is probably to use the Auto-suggest feature, enabled by default. Target terms are proposed by typing the first letter of the target term of the 3 first letters of the source term. [[File:Auto-suggest target term.png]] [[File:Auto-suggest target term 2.png]].

* You can see in advance what the translation of the highlighted items is by activating the glossary panel (keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+H or by selecting it from the '''''View''''' tab => '''''Show/Hide Glossary''''' [[File:panelGlo.png]] button )

* If you want to know more about a term, i.e. the information that you or someone else has entered in the comment or F1, F2 and F3 fields, place your mouse over the source term and this information will be displayed. See above the bubble of the last term on the glossary panel (translation).

==== Adding terms to the glossary ====

[[File:Add_term.png]]

It is quite likely that you will want to incorporate terms you come across in the source text into the glossary together with their translations that arise as part of your research process. This way, your linguist’s memory will be reinforced and you are less likely to have to research the same word or phrase again in the future. WFA allows you to do this dynamically, at any time and without exiting your translation process.

First, select the term in the source text. If it consists of one word, you can simply click on it or use the Tab key to move forwards (or Shift+Tab to move backwards) through the text until you reach its position.

The word you have selected will be highlighted against a red border.

Then click on the target term in the target segment.

The selected target term will have a blue background.

[[File:Select terms.png]]

Next, invoke the Glossary Dialog Box by typing Ctrl+Alt+T, or clicking the '''''Add Term''''' [[File:TermEdit.png]] button.

If a single word, the terms you highlighted in the source and target segments should automatically appear in the Source and Target fields.
If the terms consists of more than one word, it may be necessary to paste the text into the fields from your computer’s clipboard or type the information manually.

You can also add a comment – something that may prove useful in the future, e.g. if you want to remember the situation in which this translation was used. The F1, F2 and F3 fields may be used to store word role, context, grammatical form or any other relevant text-based information.

Then click Save to confirm.

==== Fuzzy terminology recognition ====
Each time you open a segment, Wordfast Anywhere checks for the presence in the glossary of all words and terms contained in the source segment. This operation is called terminology recognition. The recognised terms are highlighted in blue in the source segment, as discussed above.

In establishing a correspondence between the terms of the source segment and the terms found in the glossary, WFA will both recognise an exact match and attempt to recognise fuzzy matches.

WFA employs a stemming algorithm for some languages (e.g. German) in order to recognise different forms of the same word that may correspond to those listed in the glossary.

For example, WFA can recognised the infinitive verb ‘besuchen’ as being related to the adjective (or past participle) ‘besucht’ due to the fact that the two words share a common stem.

Fuzzy matching can also be established by using an asterisk in combination with the term. This method overrides the stemming algorithm, allowing you to find all terms that begin with, end with or contain a particular text string.

=== Concordance search ===
Segments stored in the TM are retrieved only if they have a minimum level of correspondence with the source segment (by default 75%). However, even if the level of correspondence is not sufficient to produce a fuzzy match, the TM may still contain terms that you have previously translated and wish to use in your current translation. To search in the memory you have two options:

1) Click on the '''''Concordance''''' button [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]] or use the '''Ctrl+Alt+C''' shortcut. The following window appears:

[[File:concordance.png]]

Enter the word or text string you want to research in the Search field. WFA will search for all words that are the same or begin with the same sequence of letters as the string entered.

You can also select the word or text string with the mouse and then click on the '''''Concordance''''' button [[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]] or '''Ctrl+Alt+C''' shortcut. The result will be displayed immediately.

You can edit or delete a term in the concordance search window by clicking on the edit or delete links.

You can add to your search possibilities by choosing the Advanced option:
* Two words or text strings (search terms) separated by a space: one or the other must exist in the TU
* Two terms separated by the + sign: both terms must exist
* A term ending with an asterisk: a search is performed for all text strings containing the search term.

When you use this option, a help line is displayed to remind you how this command works.

=== Searching in a glossary===
You can also search in the glossary. To do this, click the '''''Glossary Search''''' button [[File:GlossarySearch.png]] or use the '''Ctrl+Alt+G''' shortcut:

[[File: Glossary search.png]]

Type the source language word you wish to search for in the Search field and click OK. The list of glossary entries that contain the search term will be displayed.
You can edit or delete a term in the glossary search window by clicking on the edit or delete icons.

By employing an asterisk in the search term, you can expand your search to find all glossary entries that include the text string that the search term is made up of.

== TM & Glossary Advanced features ==

=== TM operations ===
==== View/Edit a TM ====
Select the TM in the list then click on the '''''Edit''''' button.

[[File:ViewEditTm.png]]

The dialog box displays the TM information. Depending on the TM type, you can edit some properties.
* Standard WFA TM : you have the possibility to define attributes of your TM, which will allow you to subsequently identify its segments. Click on the '''Attributes''' tab.
[[File:EditTmAttributes.png]]

There are five attributes in a Wordfast TM: the first is fixed and immutable, consisting of the name of the user. The other four can be defined by each user at will, but it is recommended to use attribute 1 to describe the subject of the text to be translated and attribute 2 for the client, to maintain compatibility with Wordfast Classic and Wordfast Pro users. Attributes consist of codes, usually 3 letters, followed by a brief description. In the fields referred to as TM attribute 1 to 4, enter the name of the attribute (subject, client, etc.). In the field on their right, select one of the attributes that appear on the drop-down list or, if necessary, click '''add''' to add an attribute, '''upd''' to update it or '''del''' to delete it. Whatever option is chosen, a dialog will appear asking for the code of the attribute (ID) and a brief description (Name, ignored for the Del option).
[[file:EditTmAttributes_add.png]] [[file:EditTmAttributes_update.png]] [[file:EditTmAttributes_delete.png]]

Dynamic codes : Predefined attributes can be added by entering a code between accolades as explain in the help.
[[File:EditTmAttributes_help.png]]

* Remote private Wordfast server

[[File:EditRemoteTm.png]] You can edit the workgroup ID and/or the symbolic name.

==== Download a TM ====
This is available only for standard WFA TM.

[[File:DownloadTm.png]]

From the Downloaded file format drop-down list you can select either the Wordfast TM TXT format, the Standard TMX format, the MS Excel XLS format or the Bilingual document TXLF format.
 Click on the '''Download''' button.

===== Filters when downloading a TM =====
Select ''"Filtering (advanced options)"'' on the second drop-down list and click on the '''Download''' button.

[[File:Tm_download2.JPG]]

This will analyse the TM and let you apply some filters to select what you want to download from the TM.

[[File:Tm_download_filter.JPG]]

[[File:Tm_download_filter2.JPG]]

Once filters are selected click on the '''Download''' button to finish the download.

==== Removing a TM ====
After clicking on the top '''Remove''' button on the TM side, this red warning is displayed to confirm the deletion.
 For TMs that are not Wordfast Anywhere standard TMs only the link to the external TM is cut.

[[File:DeleteTm.png]]

==== Quick TM Share ====
By clicking on the small '''share''' button on top of the TM side, you can share quickly a TM to somebody else having an account in Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:CreateTMShare.png]]

Click on the '''''Add guest''''' button and enter his email address (which should be his account login), then click '''Add'''.

[[File:CreateTMShare2.png]]

You can change the privilege of your guest on your TM. Finally to save the share, click on the '''''Save''''' button.

==== TMs Tools ====
===== Reversing a TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmReverse.png]]

Select a TM to reverse and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a TM already exists with the same name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Assembling several TMs in one TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmAssembled.png]]

Select one or more TMs to assemble in one TM and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a TM already exists with the same name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 if '''keep old assigned name''' is unchecked this information will be lost.
 if '''keep variants''' is checked, the TU will not be changed, otherwise, it take the given language pair.
 if '''keep user ID''' is checked, the TU will not be changed, otherwise, it will take your user ID.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Edit a TM =====
[[File:ToolsTmEdit.png]]

Select a TM to edit and click on the '''Run''' button.
 The TM will be opened as a temporary associated document in the document panel.

[[File:ToolsTmEdit1.png]]

Here you can for example update target segments, edit source segments and delete TU. Those changes will be stored straight on your TM.
 Bear in mind that this is a TM although it looks like a document.

After the TM edition, the temporary document must be deleted because it is a static copy of the TM.
 The tool can only edit and delete existing TUs and the TM size is limited to 100000 TUs.

=== Glossary operations ===
==== View/Edit a glossary ====
Select the glossary in the list then click on the '''''View/Edit''''' button.

[[File:ViewEditGlo.png]]

The dialog box displays the glossary information. Depending on the glossary type, you can edit some properties.

[[File:EditRemoteGlo.png]]

[[File:EditTildeGlo.png]]

==== Download a glossary ====
This is available only for standard WFA glossary.

[[File:DownloadGlo.png]]

Click on the '''Download''' button.

==== Removing a glossary ====
After clicking on the top '''Remove''' button on the glossary side, this red warning is displayed to confirm the deletion.
 For glossaries that are not standard only the link to the external glossary is cut.

[[File:DeleteGlo.png]]

==== Quick Glossary Share ====
By clicking on the small '''share''' button on top of the glossary side, you can share quickly a glossary to somebody else having an account in Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:CreateGloShare.png]]

Click on the '''''Add guest''''' button and enter his email address (which should be his account login), then click '''Add'''.

[[File:CreateGloShare2.png]]

You can change the privilege of your guest on your glossary. Finally to save the share, click on the '''''Save''''' button.

==== Glossaries tools ====
===== Reversing a glossary=====
[[File:ToolsGloReverse.png]]

Select a glossary to reverse and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a glossary already exists with the reversed glossary name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

===== Assembling several glossaries in one glossary =====
[[File:ToolsGloAssembled.png]]

Select two or more glossaries to assemble and click on the '''Run''' button.
 If a glossary already exists with the assembled glossary name, you will have to add or change the assigned name.
 if '''keep old assigned name''' is unchecked this information will be lost.
 You need to close the TMs and glossary setup dialog before to see any change. Go to the '''Wordfast Anywhere''' tab => '''Background info''' button to see the report.

=== TMs and glossaries shares ===

You can allow other users to share your TM as well as your glossary and you can see the TMs and the glossaries shared to you by others.
To manage all kind of share, click on the bottom '''''Share''''' button of the TMs and glossaries dialog. At that time you will receive the following:

[[File:Tmglo_share_1.png]]

* If you have already enabled the sharing of your TMs and your glossaries with other users, they will be displayed in the '''My shares to other users''' table. You can revoke sharing with any of these users. To do this, select the user in question and click '''Revoke'''. To add or update an existing share click on the '''Add''' or '''Edit''' buttons and see the chapter '''Add and edit shares to other users''' below.
* You can visualize all the TMs and glossaries that have been shared to you in the '''My shares from other users''' table. You can end any share by selecting it and clicking on the '''Remove''' button.
* You can also share your TMs and glossaries to applications like Wordfast Classic and Wordfast Pro by generating keys. they are displayed in the '''My shares to applications''' table. See below the chapter '''Sharing to applications'''.

==== Add and edit shares to other users ====

[[File:Tmglo_share_2.png]]

[[File:Tmglo_share_edit.png]]

[[File:Tmglo_share_3.png]]

==== Sharing to applications ====
Wordfast Anywhere will generate up to 5 keys to share one or more TMs and, optionally, glossaries.
The key is needed for the external application to connect to that specific share.

[[File:Tmglo_share_app_1.png]]

If you want to add the TMs and glossaries currently used, click on the '''Add active TMs and glossaries''', otherwise click on the '''Add''' button to choose a TM and the '''Add''' button to choose a glossary.
 Choose the right privilege and the number of keys needed, then click on the the '''Save''' button.
 The keys will be generated and listed in the '''My shares to application''' table. See below.

[[File:Tmglo_share_app_2.png]]

For instance this can be used on Wordfast Pro 3.4.9, where there is a tab for Wordfast Anywhere TM and glossaries.

[[File:Wpftab.png]]

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QVOMOYfR2ws&feature=em-subs_digest this video] about how to do it.

 Although the API key is for a combined TM and glossary, on Wordfast Pro 3.4.9 you need to add it twice: one for TM and one for glossary

[[Wordfast Pro]] users can check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=S7QCHNpRtKo&feature=em-subs_digest this video].

= Translation =
== Preparation of the translation environment ==
Before beginning the translation of a document using a CAT tool, you must first have an active Translation Memory.

'''Note''': an initial TM was automatically set up when you created your account.

The TM consists of a database, which will record each source language segment (i.e. sentence, phrase) that you translate, together with the corresponding target language segment. As it grows, this increasingly allows you to obtain translations of phrases made previously that are the same or similar to the one you are currently translating.

For more information check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Translation_Memory|Translation Memory basics]]'''.

== Translating ==
To start the translation, you must first open the initial segment.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:StartNext.png]] '''''Start/Next''''' button or use the ''Alt + Down'' shortcut . When you do this, the document area is transformed: the segment is displayed in light blue block (source), a grey block (target) is placed just below it and the rest of your document is shown on the rest of the page. The cursor is located in the grey block.

Translate the segment in the grey block

[[File:StartTrans.png|1200px]]

After translating this segment, you can continue with your translation. To move to the next segment, click on the [[File:StartNext.png]] '''''Start/Next''''' or use the ''Alt+Down'' shortcut. Remember this shortcut, as you will use it for each segment you translate. You can also move to previous segment by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Previous.png]] '''''Previous''''' or use the ''Alt + Up'' shortcut.

[[File:notice.png]] '''''When translating, the segments are saved automatically in the translation memory and on the database system as soon as you go to the next segment.'''''

Now translate the segment as before.

Now that you get the idea, you can continue to translate. Remember: to move from one segment to the next, use ''Alt+Down''. To return to the previous segment (to correct something that you subsequently realised was mistaken), use ''Alt+Up''.

Following are some '''other considerations''' regarding the translation of segments.

'''Note''': Most browser / OS combinations, including Firefox, Safari and Chrome, have their own spell checker – in some cases it may be necessary for you to activate it. You can also use '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Spellcheck|Spellcheck]]'''

There is color code for the target block:
* Grey is the no match from the TM (score=0)
* Green is the full match from the TM (score=100)
* Yellow is a fuzzy match from the TM (score between 50 to 99)
* Orange is a MT proposition
* Purple is the color when the segment has been modified by the editor

Score information can be found in different places depending on the view.
For '''Classic view''' it can be found on ''<}score{>'' tag between source and target segment.

[[File:ScoreC.png|1200px]]

For '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views''' there is a column for the score.

[[File:ScoreH.png|1200px]]

[[File:ScoreV.png|1200px]]

=== Tags ===

Before translating this new segment, pay attention to the tag <1>, which appears here at the end. WFA is not a word processor and thus does not concern itself with a specific representation of the document's formatting. You'll see no changes in size or typeface, no bold or italic characters. Instead, this information is encoded and represented by what we call "tags", e.g. <1>. By slowly passing your mouse over this tag you will see what it represents. This tag is not to be translated, but it should be placed on the appropriate position in the target segment. If you want to recopy a tag from the source segment please type < to trigger the tags proposal.

[[File:tagProposal.png]]

You can also copy it by using the comands on '''Translation''' tab: [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] '''Next Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Right'') and [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] '''Previous Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Left'') to navigate the source segment to the desired tag. A red frame indicates the selected item. Then position the cursor in the target segment and click on [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]] '''Copy Pl.'''(''Ctrl+Alt+Down'').

Differences on the formatting tags (<1>, <2>) between source and target segment can make the file filter aligner have difficulties to build up the translated document.

Check there is no ''segments with tag difference'' using one of this options:
# Click on [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button on '''File''' tab to get a report. Check if there are any ''segments with tag difference''. Use '''''Show Outline''''' [[File:PanelOutline.png]] button on '''View''' tab to go straight to one segment.
# Click on [[File:FindReplace.png]] '''''Find & Replace''''' button on '''Edit''' tab. Go to ''Miscellaneous'' tab and run a ''Tag difference'' search. Segments with tag differences will be listed.

On the listed segments you must pay attention to:
# There is no target tag missing that exists on source.
# The target tag order is different from source order. For example [<1>text text<2>] on source but [<2>text text<1>] on target.
# The target tag content is not identical with the source tag. You can see the content of the tag when the mouse is over it.

[[File:Warning.png]] We '''do not recommend to use copy/paste or drag and drop''' to copy the tags as it can copy more than the eye can see and be problematic. It is better to use the the auto-suggest feature with tags (whenever you want to add a tag just type < and the list of tags from source will be proposed for selection) or the [[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]] '''Copy Placeable''' on '''Translation''' tab.

== Main commands ==

=== Provisional segment ===
You may be unsure whether your translation of a segment is correct. To avoid having to interrupt your translation process, you can mark the segment as provisional.

It will be identified by a yellow square at the beginning of the line for '''Classic view''' or at the end of the row for '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views'''.

To mark a segment as provisional, use the F10 key or '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mark.png]] '''''Provisional'''''.

When you have resolved any doubts, simply return to the marked segment and make your corrections. Use ''Alt+Down'' ( [[File:StartNext.png]] ) or ''Alt-Up'' ( [[File:Previous.png]] ) to validate the segment and erase the yellow square.

=== Auto propagate ===
Use this command to translate a segment and automatically propagate the current segment changes through all the document to other segments having the same source.

Find it in '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Autopropagate.png]] '''''Auto Propagate'''''.

=== Note ===
You can also write a note to be attached to the segment for the duration of the translation (in a similar manner to a Post-ItTM). You can use this to remind yourself of something important about this segment or to pass information on to people who will have access to your translation, such as reviewers.

To write a note, click on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Edit_Note16.png]] '''''Edit Note'''''.

The following text box will be displayed:

[[File:Editnote.png|1200px]]

Write your note in the text box and click Save. You can cancel the operation by clicking Cancel. In the case of an existing note, you can edit and validate it by clicking Save, or delete it by clicking Remove.

A green square will be placed at the beginning of the segment to indicate that a note is attached. By passing the mouse pointer over this square, you will see a rectangle containing the text of the note.

It will be identified by a grey square with an "i" in it at the beginning of the line for '''Classic view''' or at the end of the row for '''Horizontal''' and '''Vertical views'''.

[[File:Editnote2.png|1200px]]

[[File:Warning.png]] Notes can be downloaded by going to '''''File''''' tab => [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' and choosing the '''''Notes Report'''''

=== Copying the original segment ===
Sometimes a segment contains very little to translate: for example, when it consists almost entirely of proper names or is made up of a website address. In this case, it may be preferable to copy the entire source segment to the target segment and make any adjustments there.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CopySource.png]] '''''Copy Source'''''. or use the shortcut ''Alt-Ins'.

=== Erasing the target segment ===
Sometimes it is necessary to erase what you have just written in the target segment.

To do this, click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Cleanup_Project16.png]] '''''Del Target'''''. or use the shortcut ''Ctrl+Alt+X''.

This button has a toggle behaviour through: Empty target, Remove tags and Restore.

=== Insertion of a special character like the non-breaking space ===
When you write in French, some characters must be accompanied by a non-breaking space: e.g. before the colon, semicolon, exclamation mark, question mark, exclamation mark, before and after quotes, thousands separators, and so on. In WFA, a non-breaking space is represented by the symbol < >.

However, such spaces cannot be automatically handled in an Internet browser as they are when using a text editor such as Word. Therefore it will be necessary to add them manually. By default, a non-breaking space is inserted at the cursor location by clicking on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Insert_c1.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 1'''''.

Two other special characters can be inserted like the curly quotes. Use '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:Insert_c2.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 2''''' and [[File:Insert_c3.png]] '''''Insert Special Character 3'''''.

You can configure these 3 special characters in WFA setup (see '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Pandora.27s_box_tab|Pandora’s box]]''').

=== Expanding a segment ===
As we have seen, WFA considers that the segment is terminated when it encounters a segment termination marker. However, in some cases this segmentation is in error. For example, when WFA’s segmentation engine meets the following sentence:
''On pense aux conseils de Prof. Jacques Lacan:''
it can interpret the segment as ending with ''Prof.'' because a full stop is used as an end of segment marker. In this case we can command WFA to expand the segment, that is to say, to append the subsequent segment to it.

[[File:exspand1.png]]

This is done with the ''Alt+Pg'' dn shortcut or '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Expand_Segment16.png]] '''''Expand'''''.

[[File:exspand2.png]]

It is important to expand segments when the segmentation has not been performed correctly because this will increase the chances of it corresponding with a translation memory segment. For example, the segment ''On pense aux conseils de Prof.'' will have little chance of having a similarity of over 75% with another. By contrast, if the sentence ''On pense aux conseils de Prof. Jacques Lacan:'' is in the TM, when WFA encounters the source sentence ''On pense aux conseils de Professeur Jacques Lacan'', it will offer the existing translation, as it has 90% similarity (it is only the word Professor that is not the same).

A segment cannot be expanded if it is terminated by an end of paragraph or end of cell marker, a page break or a tab.

You should not have to expand all segments containing abbreviations that end with a full stop. A comma-separated, modifiable list of common language-specific abbreviations is included in WFA . This can be accessed and modified via the segmentation tab in the configuration dialog box [case-sensitive, optional letters are enclosed in square brackets].

[[File:Abbrev.png]]

=== Shrinking a segment ===
If, on the other hand, two segments are erroneously displayed together due to an absence of an end of segment marker, you can also shrink the segment with the shortcut ''Alt-Pg'' up or ''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:ShrinkSeg.png]] '''''Shrink'''''.

=== Placeables ===

A placeable is any term or expression contained in the source segment that is defined as such. WFA provides shortcuts for inserting them into the target segment, thus both saving time and reducing the potential for typing errors.

WFA predefines as placeables:
*Numbers
*Tags
*Words beginning with, or otherwise containing, capital (upper case) letters
*Words or phrases appearing in the source text that have matching items stored in the '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Glossary|Glossary]]'''.

We have already seen how to copy tags. Given that a tag is a placeable, the procedure is the same: to copy any placeable, simply select it with the comands on '''Translation''' tab: [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] '''Next Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Right'') and [[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]] '''Previous Pl.''' (''Ctrl+Alt+Left'').

You also have the possibility of clicking on any term in the source text, thus placing it under focus and temporarily transforming it into a placeable. A red frame indicates the item selected.

Next, position the cursor in the target segment at the point where the placeable should be positioned or double-click (click and drag) to select the word (phrase) to be replaced and click on the on [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]] '''Copy Pl.'''(''Ctrl+Alt+Down''). The placeable is copied to the relevant position in the target segment.

In this sentence, the placeable elements, selected by ''Ctrl+Alt+Right'' or [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]], are:

[[File:place1.png]]
(starts with a capital letter)

[[File:place2.png]]
(number)

[[File:place3.png]]
(tag)

And, if necessary, any term may be designated as a placeable simply by clicking on it:

[[File:place4.png]]

As you translate the text, you only want to place those elements that should not be translated:

[[File:place5.png]]

At this point, you want to write ‘Chenjerai.’. However it may be faster and more efficient (as well as reducing the possibility of error) to select the item using ''Ctrl+Alt+Right'' or [[File:Next_Placeable16.png]] (or even by simply clicking on it) and place it into the segment target with ''Ctrl+Alt+Down'' or [[File:Toggleplaceable16.png]].

[[File:place6.png]]

The following proper noun ‘Hove’ is also a placeable, so you can repeat the procedure. Simply use the '''Tab key''' on your keyboard to advance from one placeable to the next (or '''Shift+Tab''' to move in the opposite direction).

[[File:place7.png]]

You can also use the ''Ctrl+Alt+Up'' shortcut or [[File:Dropdown.png]] '''Toggle Pl.'' on '''Translation''' tab to transform terms in the source segment into placeables.

For even greater efficiency, if you type a letter that begins a word or term in the source segment and then successively press Tab, all words or terms beginning with that letter are successively copied to the target segment. For example, in the above sentence, typing ''l'' followed by '''Tab''' will copy ''lyrique'' to the target. Each time you press the Tab key, the word or term that has been copied to the target segment will be replaced by the next
word or term appearing in the source segment that begins with the same letter, i.e. ''le'', ''laisse'' and so on.

=== Case changer ===
Use this feature to toggle through: lowercase, uppercase and proper name for a word. This feature can be used in one word (by putting the cursor inside the word), or with more than one word (by selecting several words with the mouse or Shift+Left/Right Arrow).
Beware that some times it gets crazy with the first and last word.

Use it bu clicking on '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:CaseChanger.png]] '''''Case Changer'''''.

=== Increase target height ===
You can increase the target height by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Increase_target.png]] '''''Target Height'''''.

=== Web Speech Beta ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''ONLY available for Chrome. Currently disabled due to browser security.'''

This is a beta implementation that uses Google Web Speech API to insert your dictation into the target segment.

To use it, first open the segment and then click on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:Mic.png]] '''''Web Speech Beta''''' button to start the dictation. The icon will change to indicate recording is on. To stop dictation click again on the button.

You can add a shortcut to this command.

You can jump to the next segment as always and keep on dictating. Or you can stop dictation, jump to the next segment and start dictation again.

A provisional transcription will be shown as an auto-suggest text and the final transcription will be inserted on the target segment. The provisional transcription might not be accurate while final transcription should be quite accurate and may be different from provisional transcription.

Please take into account that this is a beta implementation and that voice transcription is done online so there can be delays when dictating. We encourage you to use it and give us some feedback.

[[File:Warning.png]] It can be that Chrome keeps asking you to allow the use of the microphone every time. You need to check the Chrome settings: "Privacy>Content Settings>Microphone>Manage exceptions". There you should have an exception for https:freetm.com.

If you are connected to the site via HTTS the grant is permanent, if you use HTTP, you are asked each time.

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rR88md-xyik&feature=em-uploademail this video] about how to use this tool.

Check this links for more information:

[https://support.google.com/chrome/answer/3123708?p=settings_manage_exceptions&rd=1 Chrome Exceptions]

[https://support.google.com/chrome/answer/6148059?hl=en Chrome website permissions]

=== Edit Source ===
Using '''''Edit''''' tab => [[File:EditSource16.png]] '''''Edit Source''''' will help you to correct the source text in order to have valid TU in memory.

This will not change the source file and obviously will not automatically change the target segment.

=== Ending the translation ===
If for any reason you want to stop translating, you have three choices:
* Close the translation and validate the current segment in the TM ('''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close & Commit''''' or ''Alt+End'')
* Close the translation without validating it ('''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:Close.png]] '''''Close''''' or ''Shift+Alt+End'')
* Clear the content of the target segment, together with any attached note, by clicking on '''''Translation''''' tab => [[File:CloseSave.png]] '''''Close''''' => or [[File:Close_restore.png]] '''''Close & Delete''''' .

== After Translation ==

When your translation is finished, you use one of our '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Review|Review]]''' tools before '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Download|Download]]''' it.

= Tools =
=== Downloading TXML file ===
You can download your document in TXML format, the standard working file format used by WFA. This permits you, for example, to send the file to a colleague for review using Wordfast Anywhere or Pro. Once reviewed and corrected, you can upload it again.

To download your working file go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual TXML'''''.

[[File:DownloadTypesList.png]]

If your translation is incomplete or contains provisional segments or notes, you will receive this warning:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

At this point you have the choice to accept (OK) or cancel (Cancel) to return to your translation. If you accept, you will need to consider the following dialog:

[[File:DownloadOptions2a.png]]

You can optionally instruct WFA to copy the source segment to the target segment if it is blank (check Copy source to target if target is empty) and/or to ignore language variations, e.g. to not make a distinction between British and American English (check No language variants).

Choose the way to download the file and click '''''OK''''' to donwload the file.

=== Merging TXML files ===
If you already have a file in TXML format you can upload it to your workspace. To do this go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:Mergetms16.png]] '''Merge Txml''' button. At this point you must complete the following dialog box:

[[File:Mergetxml1.PNG]]

By checking Merge an existing document, all documents that exist in your workspace will be listed according to language pair, and you will have to choose which will be merged with the file you intend to upload.

You can also set WFA to update the TM corresponding to the file you upload (check Update or create a TM with a bilingual document). Check Merge an existing TM and choose which TM to update from the list displayed. You will also need to determine whether, in the case of identical source segments, new TUs should be added to existing ones (Keep existing TUs) or whether they should replace them (Overwrite existing TUs). If, on the other hand, you prefer to create a new TM, click on Create a new TM. At this point, you will have the opportunity to give this new TM a name, if you have more than one TM for the same language pair. Then click Upload to upload the file or Close to exit without doing anything.

Note that operations performed on the document are independent from memory-related operations, allowing you to update only the document, or only the memory, or both.
If you have clicked Upload, you will receive the following message:

[[File:Mergetxml2.png]]

Click Browse to navigate through your directories and select your file, then click Submit to perform the upload or Cancel to cancel the operation. After the merge operation has been successfully performed, a report will appear showing how many segments were merged.

[[File:Mergetxml3.png]]

=== Other downloads ===
You can also download the working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments, usable by Wordfast Classic (and Trados Workbench).

[[File:Bilingualwordfastclassic.png]]

This will allow your document to be proofread by a Wordfast Classic user. Caution, this download is only available for files formatted as .doc and .rtf. Unlike the TXML file, this format cannot be imported into WFA.

To download your working file in bilingual MS-Word format, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the '''''Download''''' button and choose '''Bilingual Doc original''' option. This option is only available if your source file is a MS Word file.

[[File:DownloadTypesList.png]]

If your translation is incomplete or contains provisional segments or notes, you will receive this warning:

[[File:DownloadConfirmation.png]]

At this point you have the choice to accept (OK) or cancel (Cancel) to return to your translation. If you accept, you will need to respond to the following message:

[[File:Bilingualwordfastclassic2.png]]

Following the same steps you can download this other files:

* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments without placeholders Bilingual. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC no placeholders''''' option.
* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments with placeholders Bilingual. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC with placeholders''''' option.
* Your working file as an MS-Word (*. doc) file containing bilingual segments with tag-content as placeholder. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Bilingual DOC tag content''''' option.
* Your translated file, in plain text format, without any formatting. To do this, go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Unformatted Text''''' option.

=== Find & Replace ===
It is often necessary to locate a word or text string in a file that has been translated. For this we use the Doc Find and Replace function. Go to '''''Edit''''' tab and click on the [[File:FindReplace.png]] '''''Find & Replace''''' button.

As with other functions that require the current segment to be closed, you will receive a warning that the current segment will be closed without being saved. If you agree, click OK, otherwise click Cancel to cancel the transaction and save your work.

[[File:Warning.png]] By default search is only done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:SR1.png]]

'''''Find & Replace''''' dialog has 4 tabs performing different actions.

* Use '''Find''' tab to locate a word or text in your document.
* Use '''Find/Replace''' tab to locate and replace a word or text in your document.
* Use '''Go to Segment''' tab to search for single segments (1,5,68,499) or a range of segments (25-66).
* Use '''Miscellaneous''' tab to perform different types of searches such as look for '''provisional''' or '''untranslated''' segments, or segments with '''notes''' or '''tag differences'''.

[[File:Notice.png]] You can use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:Warning.png]] Not all the options are always available.
==== Find ====
Use '''Find''' tab.
Type the word or text you want to find and click '''Find''' button to start a search. When search is done hits are highlighted and the number of hits is shown on the dialog.

[[File:SR6.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] By default search is only done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

[[File:SR7.png]]

==== Replace ====
Use '''Find/Replace''' tab. Type the word/text you want to find and the word/text you want it replaced for and click '''Find''' button to start a search. When search is done hits are highlighted and the number of hits is shown on the dialog.

[[File:SR8.png]]

It may happen that '''Replace''', '''Replace/Find''' and '''Replace All''' buttons are not available. This happens because the first search does not move you to the first hit, you have to click again '''Find''' to move to the next hit and then replace buttons will be available. Use them to replace, replace and move to next hit or replace all hits.

Replace can only be done on '''Target''' segments. Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Go to Segment ====
Use '''Go to Segment''' tab. Use it to find specific segments. This can be an alternative to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''.
You can type single segments separated by commas (1,5,68,499) or a range of segments (25-66).

[[File:SR4.png]]

Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Miscellaneous ====
Use '''Miscellaneous''' tab. This 6 types of search do not require to type a word/text but will help you locate segments with some particularities. This can be an alternative to '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Outline|Outline]]'''.

[[File:SR5a.png]]

You can search for:

* '''Provisional''' segments.
* '''Untranslated''' segments.
* Segments with '''Tag difference'''.
* Segments with '''Notes'''.
* Segments with '''Double spaces'''.
* Segments with '''Revisions'''.

Use the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button to show '''advanced''' search options and the result from the search.

==== Advanced search options ====

Using the [[File:CollapseBottom.gif]] button you can access some advanced search options:

[[File:SR2.png]]

* Search for '''Whole Word'''.
* Do a '''Case sensitive''' search.
* Search for words that start/end by the characters using * as a joker. For example searching for *able will find: movable, payable, breakable,...etc. And searching for hand* will find: handbag, handmade, handbook,...etc
* Search on Source, Target or both. This can only be used in '''Find''' tab.
* Mark each found target as provisional.
* Create a note for each replaced segment.
* Update the TM for each replaced segment.
* Do a wrap search
* Change search direction: Backward or Forward.

=== Analyze ===
Before providing a translation quotation, you may wish to analyze the source text to determine the extent of the work required. WFA provides an analytical tool for this purpose. To do this, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the '''''Analyze''''' button and choose '''Analyze'''. If your file is big and you do not want to wait, choose '''Analyze in Background'''.

A progress message is displayed on the status bar. Then the analysis results will be displayed:

[[File:Analysis.png]]

According to the number of repetitions (identical segments that appear more than once in the document) or the percentage of segments that correspond either completely (100%) or partially (<100%) to matches in the TM, you will be able to precisely estimate the volume of work actually requiring to be translated. After having examined the analysis report, click Close.

=== Statistics ===
WFA allows you to see what progress you have made with your translation at any time. To do this, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:Statistics16.png]] '''''Statistics''''' button.

A statistical report on your translation will be displayed:

[[File:Statistics.png]]

You will see the number of source and target segments (with the percentage already translated in brackets); the number of source and current target words; the number of source and target tags and if there is any segmental discrepancy in terms of differences between the number and content of the source and target tags (segments with tag difference); the number of segments not stored in the TM (segments flagged not saved in TM); the number of provisional segments (provisional segments) and notes (segments with notes). The report also displays which segments remain to be translated. After viewing the statistics, click Close.

Another important indicator is always present on the status bar: it tells you on which segment you currently are in relation to the total number of segments in the document. In this example, the document has 149 segments in total and you are currently on the 68:

[[File:Foot1.png]]

=== Alignment ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This tool is not managed by WFA in case there is any problem use the '''Help''' in the tool, the third tab, to report your problem. You can also sent an email to '''converterhelp@wordfast.com'''

When you begin to translate with a CAT tool you may not be able to derive the maximum benefit from it if you do not yet have a translation memory. Or, a client may have source and target documents from a previous translation but cannot supply you with a TM. In this case, you can quickly derive a TM by performing an "alignment" on the documents you have already translated prior to using WFA for your translation work by using the alignment tool.

To do this, go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:WF Update16.png]] '''''Align''''' button.

A new page will open, displaying the following dialog:

[[File:Align.png]]

Follow the instructions to upload the files and align them to get the TM from the alignment.

Check [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HVXTQ5Wb_Eg&feature=em-uploademail this video] about how to use this tool.

You can then upload this TM to be used in WFA.

[[File:Warning.png]] This tool is not managed by WFA in case there is any problem use the '''Help''' in the tool, the third tab, to report your problem. You can also sent an email to '''converterhelp@wordfast.com'''

=== Preview ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Preview|Preview]]'''

=== Transcheck ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Transcheck|Transcheck]]'''

=== Spellcheck ===

Check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Spellcheck|Spellcheck]]'''

=== Pretranslation ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.

Go to [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]] '''''Pre-translation''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to open the dialog:

[[File:Pretrans1.png]]

Configure how you want the pre-translation to run:
* Activate '''Fuzzy matches'''
* Set what to do when there is no match from the TM. For setting a MT check '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Machine_translation|this]]'''
* Leverage segment scores. Make sure the owner of the document (translation agency or company) has agreed to leverage empty segments.

If your file is big and has many segments run pre-translation in background by clicking on '''Pre Translate in background''' so you can keep working in other things. Otherwise use '''Pre-translate''' button run pre-translation.
Ad the end of the process you'll get a report with the result.

[[File:Pretrans2.png]]

=== Offline Review Tool ===
Use Offline review tool to review a file outside Wordfast Anywhere using a bilingual file and then update the changes.

To get the bilingual file go to [[File:Save16.png]] '''''Download''''' button on '''''File''''' tab and choose '''''Offline review DOC'''''.

[[File:Ofrt11a.png]]

This will download a bilingual file like this.

[[File:ofrt2.png]]

[[File:Notice.png]] Read the disclaimer on the download window and the instructions at the top of the file.

[[File:Warning.png]] Remember to add the tags on the target column as you would do on any translation. '''''Missing tags''''' can cause problems when merging back the file into WFA.

After editing '''only''' the target segments an saving the file you can import it to be merged with the file in Wordfast Anywhere. To do this go to '''''File''''' tab and click on the [[File:mergetms16_menu.png]] '''''Merge Offline Review''''' button.

[[File:ofrt3.png]]

A report will be shown with the result of the merge.

[[File:ofrt4.png]]

=== Extract Frequents ===
Use [[File:Translate All NO Editor16.png]] '''''Extract Frequents''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to create anew file that will contain only the repeated segments of the document.

A first report is created showing the percentage of segments that have an occurrence greater than 2.

[[File:ExtractFrequents1.png]]

Set the '''minumum occurrence''' that you want to extract and click on '''Extract and Open''' to create a new file with the occurrence segments.

=== Go to WFP4 ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.
You can open your document in '''Wordfast Pro 4 Online''' by using [[File:About wordfast16.png]] '''''WFP4''''' button on '''''File''''' tab.

WFP4o will use several settings on WFA along with the TMs and glossaries, so all settings must be done on inside WFA before. Also bear in mind to save your work on WFP4o before switching back to WFA.

[[File:Wf4disclaimer.png]]

Read carefully the disclaimer dialog before clikcing in '''Continue to WFP4o'''.

=== File information ===
[[File:Warning.png]] This option is only available when the document is closed.

Go to [[File:Modify Project16.png]] '''''File Info''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to open the dialog with information about the file:

[[File:Fileinfo.png]]

=== Split file ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''''This option is only available when the document is closed.'''''

You can split a file in 4 parts by using [[File:Split.png]] '''''Split''''' button on '''''File''''' tab.

[[File:Split1.png]]

For each part a txml file will be created with the corresponding part of the file. The name of the txml files will contain information about which part is. For instance '''_[1of2]''' means the file was splitted into 2 parts and that this file correspond to the first part.

By default files are splited in equally parts, but you can change this and set the boundaries that better suit you.

[[File:Split3.png]]

'''Downloading one of the splited parts will download a TXML file''', but you can choose to download also the entire file in the original format.

[[File:Split2.png]]

Use
[[File:Join.png]] '''''Join''''' button on '''''File''''' tab to put the parts together again. [[File:Warning.png]] '''''This option is only available when the document is closed.'''''

=== Share file ===
[[File:Warning.png]] '''This option is only available when the document is closed and is selected from the list.'''

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Share is only possible between Wordfast Anywhere users.'''

You can share your document with '''several Wordfast Anywhere users'''. To do so go to [[File:Share.png]] '''''Share''''' on '''''File''''' tab.

[[File:Share3.png]]

Additional files can be added using '''''Add''''' button on the Document section of the dialogue. If the file belong to a package, all package documents will be added otherwise it will be all documents with the same source and target languages.

To start sharing click on '''''Add''''' button after the Document section to add a new guest. Repeat it to ad more guest users.

[[File:Share_addGuest2.png]]

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Guest email must be a valid Wordfast Anywhere account.'''

For each guest two properties can be chosen:
* '''''Share as read-only'''''. This means guest will only access the document in a read-only mode, but no edition will be allowed.
* '''''Keep online (not downloadable)'''''. This means guest will access the file but would not be allowed to download it.

Additionally, you can share a TM and/or glossary with the file.

To do it, use the buttons on the '''''Translation Memories''''' and '''''Glossaries''''' tabs
* '''''Linked to document''''' will add the corresponding TM/glossary associated to the document.
* '''''Add''''' will let you choose which TM/glossary with the same language pair you want to share
* '''''Remove''''' will revoke the share on the selected TM/glossary from the list.

Once guests are added, they are presented on a list on the main dialogue. Any guest will be allowed edit rights unless '''''Share as read-only''''' is check. Owner will always have edit rights.

[[File:Share_mainList2.png]]

Repeat this process to add more guests.

You can use '''''Duplicate''''' button to add a new guest with the same settings than a existing one. Use '''''Revoke''''' button to finish a share with a guest

Check '''''History''''' on the document to force the use of revisions in the document.

As owner and several guests can have edit rights '''a reservation system is used to ensure only one user can edit a segment at a time'''. When a user opens the document the free segments loaded in Document Panel will automatically reserved for him adding a green share icon at the end of the segment. Segments reserved by other users are shown with the same share icon but in red color.
'''The reservation of segments will end when the user closes the document'''.

[[File:Share_reserved.png]]

When a user opens a shared document that is being used by an other user a pop-up message is show to warn about that.

[[File:Share_message.png]]

Also a notification is send to the other working users that a new user has opened the document.

[[File:Share_notification.png]]

Jumping to the next block will release the previous segments and will reserve the new segments being loaded.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''There is no live update of the segments reserved by other users. Which means segments need to be refreshed manually on Document Panel by loading them again, for instance by jumping to a different block and back.'''

To help to know when a user closes the document and releases his segments, a notification is send to the other working users.

[[File:Share_notificationEnd.png]]

'''''To finish a share''''' with a guest owner users need to use '''''Revoke''''', and to remove all the shares use '''''Revoke all'''''. This is a button on the Share dialog ([[File:Share.png]] '''''Share''''' on '''''File''''' tab).

Guest users will not see the share dialogue. They should use [[File:Revoke.png]] '''''Revoke''''' on '''''File''''' tab to finish the share.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Remember Share/Revoke are only available when the document is closed.'''

=== Offline Mode ===
On those situations when there is an internet connection cut or when WFA server is unavailable, WFA will turn on '''Offline Mode'''.

'''Offline Mode''' lets you work offline. It allows you to translate the segments that are currently loaded on the ''Document Panel''.

The translated segments are stored locally and automatically committed to WFA server as soon as the connection is recovered.

If the TM you are using is writeable, TUs will be automatically updated from the document.

[[File:Warning.png]] Be aware that there will be some messages telling you about going in/out of Offline Mode and segments being saved. Some features will not be available during Offline Mode.

[[File:Warning.png]] This feature has nothing to do with Offline Review Tool (OFRT). For information about OFRT, check the index at the top of this Manual.

[[File:Warning.png]] We recommend not to close the browser till synchronization back is done.

= WFA Configuration =
== Features and Shortcuts ==

{|class="wikitable"
|'''Menu tab'''
|'''Feature'''
|'''Shortcut'''
|'''Icon'''
|'''Information'''
|-
|Translation
|Start translation / Next segment
|Alt+Down
|[[File:StartNext.png]]
|Starts a translation session by opening the currently selected segment / Commits the current segment to TM and opens the next segment.
|-
|Translation
|Previous segment
|Alt+Up
|[[File:Previous.png]]
|Commits the current segment to TM and opens the previous segment.
|-
|Translation
|Close & Commit
|Alt+End
|[[File:CloseSave.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment and committing it to the TM.
|-
|Translation
|Close
|Shift+Alt+End
|[[File:Close.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment without committing it to the TM.
|-
|Translation
|Close & Delete
|Alt+Delete
|[[File:Close restore.png]]
|Ends translation by closing the current segment and deleting the target with any note. Do not commit to TM.
|-
|Translation
|Provisional segment
|F10
|[[File:Mark.png]]
|Marks a segment as provisional with a yellow Post-It.
|-
|Translation
|Copy Source
|Alt+Insert
|[[File:CopySource.png]]
|Copies the source segment over the target segment.
|-
|Translation
|Expand
|Alt+PgDn
|[[File:ExpandSeg.png]]
|Expands a segment, if it actually extends beyond the punctuation mark (wrong segmentation). Note that a segment cannot be extended beyond a paragraph mark, page break, tabulator, or table cell.
|-
|Translation
|Shrink
|Alt+PageUp
|[[File:ShrinkSeg.png]]
|Reverses any use of the Expand segment command or reduce the size of a segment.
|-
|Translation
|To Fuzzy
|Shift+Ctrl+PgDn
|[[File:TranslateUntilFuzzy.png]]
|Translates until a non-exact match is found.
|-
|Translation
|Toggle empty
|Ctrl+Alt+X
|[[File:Cleanup Project16.png]]
|Empty the target - remove the tags from the target - restore the original target.
|-
|Translation
|Auto Propagate
|
|[[File:autopropagate.png]]
|Auto propagate segment change through all the document for same source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Toggle Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Up
|[[File:dropdown.png]]
|Transforms all the terms in the source segment into placeables. If repeated, returns to the previous mode.
|-
|Translation
|Next Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Right
|[[File:Next_Placeable16.png]]
|Selects the next placeable element in the source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Copy Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Down
|[[File:Copy_Placeable16.png]]
|Places the selected transposable element from the source segment into the target segment, where the cursor is located (or replaces highlighted text in target segment).
|-
|Translation
|Previous Placeable
|Ctrl+Alt+Left
|[[File:Previous_Placeable16.png]]
|Selects the previous placeable element in the source segment.
|-
|Translation
|Next word
|Tab
|
|Places the subsequent source word with letter + Tab
|-
|Translation
|Previous word
|Shift+Tab
|
|Places the preceding source word with letter+Shift+Tab.
|-
|Translation
|Target Height
|Ctrl+Alt+T
|[[File:increase_target.png]]
|Increases the height of the target segment for easier viewing.
|-
|Wordfast Anywhere
|Wordfast setup
|Ctrl+Alt+W
|[[File:Setup.png]]
|Opens the Wordfast Anywhere general setup dialog.
|-
|Edit
|Find & Replace
|Ctrl+Alt+R
|[[File:FindReplace.png]]
|Find and replace in the document.
|-
|Edit
|Edit Source
|Ctrl+Alt+K
|[[File:EditSource16.png]]
|Used to make minor corrections to the source segment.
|-
|Edit
|Edit Note
|Ctrl+Alt+J
|[[File:Edit_Note16.png]]
|Allows you to create or edit a note.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 1
|Shift+Ctrl+1
|[[File:insert_c1.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 2
|Shift+Ctrl+2
|[[File:insert_c2.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Insert Special Char 3
|Shift+Ctrl+3
|[[File:insert_c3.png]]
|Insert a special character. This is defined on '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.235_Configure_insertion|Pandora's box #4]]'''.
|-
|Edit
|Case Changer
|Shift+F3
|[[File:caseChanger.png]]
|Toggle between lowercase, uppercase, and capitalization.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|TMs and glossaries setup
|
|[[File:Preferences16round.png]]
|Opens the TMs and glossaries setup dialog.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Concordance search
|Ctrl+Alt+C
|[[File:ConcordanceSearch.png]]
|Performs a search in the TM and displays all segments containing the search term.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Glossary Search
|Ctrl+Alt+G
|[[File:GlossarySearch.png]]
|Search in the glossary for the word or phrase selected in the source segment.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Add term to glossary
|Ctrl+Alt+T
|[[File:TermEdit.png]]
|Pops up a glossary term entry form.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Copy TU
|Alt+right
|[[File:CopyTU.png]]
|Copy a TU from the TM panel to the target segment. If many, press many times, it will start by copying the second one assuming the first one is already copied. The TU can be a MT proposal.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Delete TU
|Ctrl+Alt+Backspace
|[[File:DeleteTU.png]]
|Delete from TM the current or selected TU visible in the TM panel.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Update TU
|
|[[File:force_tm_addtu.png]]
|Commits to TM the source and target segment as a new TU or update an existing one.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Force TM search
|
|[[File:force_tm.png]]
|Perform a direct search (without cache) in the TM.
|-
|TMs and glossaries
|Force MT
|
|[[File:force_mt.png]]
|Forces the translation of the segment by the configured MT engines like Google Translate / Microsoft Translator.
|-
|View
|Outline pane
|Ctrl+Alt+D
|[[File:panelOutline.png]]
|Closes or opens the Outline. The outline is a view of all the segments showing which ones are translated but also which ones have notes or are provisional.
|-
|View
|TM pane
|Ctrl+Alt+M
|[[File:panelTm.png]]
|Closes or opens the TM pane.
|-
|View
|Glossary pane
|Ctrl+Alt+H
|[[File:panelGlo.png]]
|Closes or opens the Glossary (Terminology) pane.
|-
|View
|Move next block
|Page Down
|[[File:moveNextScreen.png]]
|Move to the next block of document's content.
|-
|View
|Move previous block
|Page Up
|[[File:movePrevScreen.png]]
|Move to the previous block of document's content.
|-
|View
|First of Block
|Home
|[[File:move_first_seg_screen.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the first segment of the block.
|-
|View
|Last of Block
|End
|[[File:move_last_seg_screen.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the last segment of the page.
|-
|View
|First of Doc
|Ctrl+Home
|[[File:move_first_seg_doc.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the first segment of the document.
|-
|View
|Last of Doc
|Ctrl+End
|[[File:move_last_seg_doc.png]]
|Positions the cursor on the last segment of the document.
|}

== WFA Setup ==
The WFA Setup menu is accessible by the shortcut Ctrl+Alt+W or the [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab.

Six tabs are visible: General, TM rules, Shortcuts, Segmentation, Pandora's box and QA.

=== General tab ===
Several general settings can be don in this tab.

[[File:wfasetup1.png]]

==== Machine translation ====
Click on '''MT''' tab to access the ''Machine Translation'' settings.

[[File:wfasetup2.png]]

WFA gives you the ability to translate each segment by online translation services like Google Translate and Microsoft Translator. The translations proposed are not ever likely to be fully acceptable. However, by making a few small adjustments, you will be able to use them extensively in your translations.

[[File:Warning.png]] When using this service, the source segments that will return a translation are transmitted to Google and Microsoft. It is up to you whether or not to accept these translations; these companies are not made aware of your choice. However, be aware that sending the segments to Google and Microsoft may raise privacy issues between you and your customers.

Each MT engine has a window were to set it's settings. Bear in mind that some MT may require a personal ID or password.
* Use '''Add''' button to add a new MT.
* Use '''Edit''' the settings for the selected MT on the list.
* Use '''Remove''' will delete the selected MT on the list.
* Use '''Test''' to run a test on all the MTs with the active checkbox marked.

[[File:Warning.png]] '''To use a MT engine, it must be added to the list and with the "Active" checkbox marked'''.

On each MT engine window you can set its settings (i.e. the key or url). You can also set a particular values for
* ''Engine timeout'' as in some cases (i.e. small segments) the MT requires more time to get back with a result.
* ''Engine score'' value for each MT.
* ''Details'' for extra information about the MT like the list of available languages.
[[File:Warning.png]] Each MT engine has a different set of available languages.

Finally, there are several general options such as
* When to use the MT (when no TM match, when no TM full match, always)
* Remove tags before sending to MT.
* Use all available providers on ''force MT''.
* Do not copy MT proposition to target.
* Enable MT for review (May slow down the revision process)

===== Custom Machine translation =====

[[File:Warning.png]] '''Note:''' this section is '''DIY (Do It Yourself)'''. Our hotline cannot assist in the customization of an MT engine, because that requires knowledge of the remote provider's specifications. However, public discussion groups may offer help.

If your remote Machine Translation provider is not listed (as a provider tab), you can use '''Custom tab''' to create a custom connector for it. This is only possible if your MT provider's API is using a REST standard, and returns results in a JSON, or similar, format. That is the case with major MT providers currently available with WFC (Google, Microsoft, WorldLingo, deepL, MyMemory, etc.).

In WFA's Machine Translation setup, go to the "Custom MT" tab.

[[File:CustomMT.JPG]]

Note the various elements:
* URL: Tells WFA which is the url of the MT provider with the needed parameters.
** {ss} will be replaced with the source segment to be translated. This parameter must be present.
** {sl} and {tl} will be replaced with your given source and target language codes.
** {key} will be replaced with the given API key
* API Key: Some MT providers need a personal key, this is the place to add it.
* Source language: Source language of the text, it corresponds to the {sl} parameter in the URL.
* Target Language: Target language which will be the text translated to, it corresponds to the {tl} parameter in the URL.
* POST: includes parameters that should be used with the POST method, concatenated like in the URL format. If the parameters needs to be in JSON format, choose the way how to write it (either URL encoded text to convert to JSON either a direct JSON string).
* HEADER: includes parameters that need to be in the header of the request. The format is param:value. Put one parameter per line.
* Json key: Some MT providers return the translated text in a parameter (translation, translatedTex...etc), this tells WFA how to spot the returned translated segment.

Once all the elements are set you can test the connection by using the '''Test''' button. Optionally you can change the text to be tested on the text box next to the button.

Let's assume your preferred MT provider is WorldLingo and we create a custom engine for it. You explore WorldLingo's API documentation. It essentially boils down to a query URL, with parameters. On Custom tab you can use:

* URL: https://www.worldlingo.com/S000.1/api?wl_data={ss}&wl_srclang={sl}&wl_trglang={tl}&wl_password=secret
* API Key: Empty, as no API Key is needed.
* Source language: en.
* Target Language: fr.
* Json key: Empty.

'''Practical example:'''

Opening a browser, you begin by testing the URL. In the following example, the raw URL was customized for an English-to-French language pair, to translate "Hello World". Your real URL will look different, the following is an example based on WorldLingo:

::: ''http://www.worldlingo.com/S000.1/api?wl_data=Hello%20world&wl_srclang=en&wl_trglang=fr&wl_password=secret''

You can try pasting the above URL into a browser's address bar. If things go well, the site will send a reply:

::: ''Bonjour le monde''

Other MT providers may use a more complex JSON reply, in which case you specify the JSON key so that WFA can identify the result. Here the key is "translation" so you would use Json key => translation

::: ''{"responseData":{"translation":"Bonjour le monde","match":1} }''

Your MT provider may require more parameters, such as a secret ID key (aka an API key), or other elements, in which case, you should hard-code those in the URL.

==== Fonts ====
Font Size: this setting only affects the font size on the screen, your document will keep all its original layout unchanged. The available sizes are selected from the drop-down list.

Font Family: this setting only affects the fonts displayed on the screen, your document will keep its entire original layout unchanged. You can specify a specific font or a font family, for example Arial, Helvetica, Sans Serif (sans serif font, default) or Times New Roman, Times, Serif (seriffed font).

==== Target segment selection ====
Positions the mouse pointer at the opening of the segment, with or without selection.

# Cursor at start – no text selected, cursor positioned at the beginning of the segment.
# Cursor at end – no text selected, cursor positioned at the end of the segment. This is the default setting.
# Segment selected – The target segment is entirely selected.

==== Fuzzy Threshold in % ====
Percentage of similarity required for a TU contained in the TM to be suggested as a translation of the source segment. If several TUs meet this criterion, the TU with the highest percentage will be offered. In this case you can select the subsequent TUs with [[File:CopyTU.png]] '''''Copy TU''''' button on '''''TMs & Glossaries''''' tab or using the corresponding shortcut (Alt + Right).

The default percentage (75%) is recommended for most translations, but in some cases it may be appropriate to change it. For example, if you are translating short segments containing only 3 words, a fuzzy threshold of 75% will only offer those TUs which are identical (100%) and those where two words are identical, i.e. 66%, will never be proposed.

==== Record Revisions ====
Check this option if you want to save a record of the changes on translated segments.

==== Enable Auto-Suggest ====
Check this option if you want to get suggestions while you type on a translated segment.

Auto-Suggest can be configured in '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#.238_Configure_Auto-Suggest|Pandora's box #7]]''' to add or remove items.

==== Tab behavior ====
Check this option if you want to use click or hover for triggering events on Top Menu bar.

==== Enable auto-hide buttons ====
Check this option to make toop toolbar buttons hide automatically.

==== Enable Segment Tool Bar ====
Check this option to enable the Segment Tool Bar on Horizontal and Vertical views. You can customize it on Pandora's Box #15

=== TM rules tab ===

Here you have the opportunity to establish penalties to be taken into account when calculating the similarity between the TM and the segment to be translated. In other words, the percentage of similarity is reduced, where applicable, according to the figure indicated for each of the following rules. Some rules allow fractional reductions, but this only applies to the calculation: the final reduction will be the sum of all penalties rounded to the nearest whole number. If the percentage of similarity to the TU, reduced to the sum of the penalties, is less than the specified Fuzzy Threshold percentage, it will not be proposed.

[[File:wfasetup3.png]]

Penalties for the following rules are activated only if the box on their right is checked. They apply only to the TUs proposed by the TM or VLTM, not from machine translation, which has its own non-modifiable penalty.

* ''Case penalty'': if there is a difference in case (upper and lower case) between the TU and the segment to be translated, WFA can ignore this and show 100% similarity. But you can assign a penalty of between 1 and 5 points for the difference in case. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 1.

* ''Non literal penalty'': this penalty detects differences due to special characters such as dashes, quotation marks, apostrophes, punctuation and whitespace characters (non-breaking space, horizontal and vertical tabs, ...). There exist several codes for representing each of these special characters. WFA can ignore these and show 100% similarity; otherwise a penalty is calculated using the following method: every time a difference is encountered, it adds the value of the first parameter (0.25, 0.50 or 0.75), which by default is 0.50. The second parameter sets out what the minimum value of the penalty is (default is 1). Since the penalty is necessarily an integer, if the value of the penalty is 0.25 and there is only one in the segment to be translated, the minimum is not reached. Finally, the third parameter sets the maximum penalty to be assigned, even if the addition of all the differences of this rule exceeds that figure (10 by default). This rule is selected by default with a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 10.

* ''Tag penalty'': this rule works exactly the same way as the previous one, but applied to the tags (markers that represent the bits of code used to format the document <1>). This rule is selected by default with a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 10.

* ''Alignment user penalty'': the TUs found in a memory imported into WFA produced by an alignment tool and having the identifier "TALIGN!" may be assigned a penalty from 1 to 10. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 3. Please note, TUs from an alignment may not have the "TALIGN!" identifier.

* ''MT user penalty'': the TUs found in a memory imported into WFA produced by machine translation and having the identifier "MT!" may be penalised from 1 to 10. This rule is selected by default with a penalty of 25. Please note, TUs from a machine translation may not have the "MT!" identifier.

* ''Multiple translation penalty'': In the case of a source segment with multiple 100% matches, i.e. several TUs having the same source segment but different translated segments, a penalty may be applied to warn of a possible choice between translations. This scenario is rare and no penalty is assigned by default.

* ''Attribute penalty'': attributes are identifiers that are associated with a particular TU at the time that it is recorded in the memory. There are five possible attributes: the first is fixed (it identifies the user who posted the TU), while the other four can be user defined. In general, translators use attribute no. 1 to define the subject of the text to be translated and the attribute no. 2 to define the client who owns the text. The other two attributes are free to be used for anything else. For example, if the proposed TU is from a text whose subject is "electronics", it will be penalised if the subject of the text to be translated is "medicine." In other words if the TU is 100% identical to the segment to be translated, it will be displayed with a percentage similarity of 98% if the penalty applied is 2 points.

The penalty can be a number from 1 to 5, valid for the four attributes. By default this rule is not active.

If you use a TM uploaded from Wordfast Classic or Pro, the existing attributes of the TU may be penalised.

=== Shortcuts tab ===

You can set the shortcuts you want to use.

[[File:wfasetup4.png]]

WFA shortcuts are not immutable. If some of them do not suit you, you can reassign them. To do this, click on the '''''upd''''' link of the shortcut you wish to change.

[[File:wfasetup5.png]]

In this example, corresponding to the first shortcut, you see the name of the command and a drop-down list. Choose '''None''' if you want to remove the shortcut or choose another from the list. Then click '''''Update''''' to confirm or '''''Cancel''''' to dismiss the dialog. Repeat for all the shortcuts that you want to change. The new keyboard shortcuts will be displayed.

The last four commands have no shortcuts; however, you can assign shortcuts to them if you wish.

If after modifying several shortcuts you want to return them to their original state, click '''''Restore default shortcuts'''''.

Finally, click '''''Save''''' settings to confirm any changes or '''''Cancel''''' to dismiss the dialog.

=== Segmentation tab ===
This tab defines the rules for segmentation.

[[File:Segmentation111.JPG]]

* ''Segmentation style'': this block determines how the segmentation will be performed. If you choose ''Wordfast /Trados segmentation'' (default) the standard end-of-segment markers are defined as follows: full stop, colon, question mark, exclamation mark and tab (Tab). You can add other characters as well as space (Space), non-breaking space (NBSP), carriage return (CR) and line feed (LF). You can add as markers: a number followed by an end of segment marker (A number Followed by ESM ends a segment – default), an end of segment marker not followed by a space (An ESM without a trailing space ends a segment) and an end of segment marker followed by a space followed by a lowercase letter (An ESM followed by a space followed by a lower-case letter ends a segment). Although you can change these markers, it is recommended to maintain them in such manner that if you share your translations and your memories with other translators, all will follow the same rule.

[[File:Warning.png]] Segmentation is performed at the time of uploading the document to WFA. You cannot therefore change the rules applying to that document during the course of its translation.

The other segmentation rules that you can choose are:
* ''Break segmentation'': segmentation is done according to the end of paragraph character (carriage return) or the tag for HTML files.
* ''Idiom segmentation'': segmentation follows the rules of the software program Idiom.
* ''SRX segmentation'': the segmentation is done by using a previously uploaded file. It follows the rules of the SRX standard, which has become a standard like TMX for formatting memories and TBX for formatting glossaries. In the case of SRX segmentation, abbreviations are also included.

* ''TM compatibility'': You must ensure the compatibility according to the memory you have uploaded or the subsequent use of your documents. By default, WFA's memory is compatible with that of Wordfast Classic and Pro (Assume Wordfast TM). If this is your choice, you can also specify if you have old projects made with Wordfast Classic or Pro (check Legacy TM created by old projects). You can also establish that the memory was created by Trados (Assume Trados TM), even adding that it was created by Trados and Word (TM created by Trados + Word); by Idiom (Assume Idiom TM) or by SDLX (Assume SDLX TM).

*''Abbreviations'': Abbreviations end with a full stop, which WFA then interprets as an end of segment marker. To avoid this, WFA allows you to create and manage a list of abbreviations. While WFA already has lists for some languages, others are empty – the user must provide the necessary information. The abbreviations are entered into the text box, one after another, without spaces and separated by a comma. Once updated, save your list by clicking on Save the language. Repeat for each language that you translate.

=== Pandora's box tab ===
This tab has many different settings. Some of this settings will open a new dialog.

[[File:wfasetup7.png]]

==== #1 PC, tablet and smartphone modes ====
Use this mode if you are using a mobile device. The segment toolbar is enlarged; local file access is disabled.

==== #2 Real time collaboration ====
Real time collaboration disables data caching. This forces the TM search before you open a segment, causing a response delay. Avoid using this mode unless sharing a TM and if the TU updates need to be shared immediately.

==== #3 Document file name convention ====
Customize your document name for download by adding a prefix and/or a suffix.

==== #4 Special characters insertion ====
Configure the 7 special characters insertion of the Edition tab.

==== #5 Configure online dictionaries ====
Configure URLs for 2 online search engines.

* Click "Add" to add a new dictionary.
* After filling the "Friendly name" and "Url" correctly you need to use "Test" to check it works fine.
* Use "Save" to add the dictionary to the list. Bear in mind that if the URL already exists it cannot be added.

If all worked fine, the list should have been updated and your dictionary available to be used.

The list does not use "Friendly name" to sort the dictionaries, so you need to check all the list to find the one you added.

In order to use one dictionary you need to select it from the list and save the settings.

==== #6 Multiple Ctrl+Alt+Down toggles placeable ====
Use this feature to toggle between copy the target term, copy the source term, or leave blank.

==== #7 Configure Auto-Suggest ====
Auto-suggest is activated at the '''General''' tab when clicking on [[File:Setup.png]] '''''Setup''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' tab.

On this section of Pandora's Box is where you can '''configure which suggestions will Auto-suggest show'''.

[[File:AutoSuggest1.JPG]]

'''Auto-suggest can show different items''' such as: Glossary matches, tags, word from with a capital letter, numbers, file path, email addresses, URLs, chunks of Machine Translation, date and number conversion, text in parentheses (), text in braces {}, bracketed text [], word containing special character and unit conversion.

On the left there is a combo box to select the number of typed characters that will trigger auto-suggest to show up.

For '''date and number conversion''' there is a sub dialog, that can be opened by clicking on the [[File:Edit.png]] button on the left.

[[File:AutoSuggest2.JPG]]

Here you can set how dates and numbers will be converted and shown in the auto-suggested text.

For '''dates''' you can choose a different format and separator. For instance source ''2015.04.01'' could be converted to ''01/04/2015'' on target.

For '''numbers''' you can choose a different group and decimal separator. For instance source ''123.456,00'' could be converted to ''123 456.00'' on target.

==== #8 Configure Filters ====
Configure conversion of documents from their original format to the internal editor format.

For some files you can configure some parameters that will tell the filter what to do for some situations such as translate comments or sheet names.

You can make this configuration for: '''xls, xlsx, ppt, pptx, doc, docx, rtf, htm, html, mif, idml, xml (Text based files)'''.

[[File:Pandora9.JPG]]

On this section there are also 3 settings that will apply to any file.

* '''Editor format'''. To choose which type of '''bilingual file (TXML or TXLF)''' the filter should produce.[[File:Warning.png]] '''''The download bilingual file will be of the type used when the file was uploaded.''''' For example if the file was uploaded using TXML, the bilingual download will be TXML. A file cannot be uploaded using one type (TXML) and download the bilingual file of the other type (TXLF). The workaround is to change the type and upload the file again.

* '''Extract numbers'''. To define the filter action on source segments that contain only numbers.

** ''all'': Extracts all segments with only numbers for translation
** ''time_date_measure'': Extracts only segments with time and date
** ''none'': Does not extract any segments that contain only numbers

* '''Segmentation on break'''. To enable segmentation on line breaks.

==== #9 Configure double click to open/close a segment ====
Configure opening/closing actions on a segment by double clicking in the document panel. This is always active for mobile plain text mode.

[[File:Pandora101.png]]

==== #10 Configure TM Search ====
Set the timeout for searches. After the timeout, the search is cancelled and returns nothing. The default value is 4 seconds.

==== #11 Copy source when no TM match and no MT proposition ====
Copy source to target when no TM match and no MT proposition.

==== #12 Do not show empty paragraph line in Classic view ====
Do not copy MT proposition to target.

==== #13 Hide segment's IDs column on the Table view ====
Do not copy MT proposition to target.

==== #14 Custom Tab settings ====
Use this mode if you are using a mobile device. The segment toolbar is enlarged; local file access is disabled.

==== #15 Customize Segment Toolbar ====
Dialog to choose which buttons will be placed on Segment toolbar. Segment toolbar is enabled on General tab.

==== #16 Copy untranslatable to target automatically and open next segment ====
Define what will be considered an "Untranslatable segment" which will be copied to target automatically and open next segment

=== QA tab ===
Set here the criteria that will be used to conduct an audit of quality when doing a '''[[Wordfast_Anywhere_6_Manual#Transcheck|Transcheck]]'''

[[File:wfasetup8.png]]

There are several criteria that can be checked, some of which can also ''be checked while translating'' (by using the second checkbox column under '''While Translating''' title).

Here is a short description:

* '''Source & target lengths''': Compares the character count between the source and target segments. You can set the minimum and maximum % of allowed character count for the target segment.

* '''Empty target''': Checks for an empty target segment. This is always checked while translating.

* '''Numerical''': Checks that the numerical values between the source and target segments are correct.

* '''Placeable''': Checks if the tags are copied correctly to the target segments. This is always checked while translating.

* '''Forbidden chars''': Checks if the target segment includes forbidden characters. You can set the list of forbidden characters that should not be included in the target segment.

* '''Punctuations''': Checks for consistency in punctuation between source and target segments. You can set the punctuation marks that should not be included in the target segment. [[File:notice.png]] The transcheck punctuation only works on end of segmentation punctuation.

* '''Untranslatable''': Compares the source and target segments to check if the untranslatable content is consistent. You can set the untranslatable text that must be retained in the target segment.

* '''Copied source''': Checks for untranslated text when copied source option is used.

* '''Blacklists''': Checks if the target segment includes blacklisted terms. You can set blacklisted terms that should not be included in the target segment. [[File:notice.png]] The blacklisted term list must be a tab delimited file (bad term + tabulation + proposed term).

* '''Terminology''': Checks if all term translations from an active glossary are used in the target of a segment. You can enable or disable Ignore Case option.

* '''First word capitalization''': Checks if the first letter of the segment is capitalized.

* '''Edited exact match''': Checks if any exact match segments from the TM have been edited.

* '''Unedited fuzzy''': Checks if any fuzzy match segments from the TM have been left unedited.

* '''Source Consistency''': Checks consistency between source segments if the target is repeated.

* '''Target consistency''': Checks consistency between target segments if the source is repeated.

== Profile Configuration ==
Go to [[File:User profile.png]] '''''User Profile''''' button on '''''Wordfast Anywhere''''' menu to see information about your account and change some settings of your profile.

[[File:Profileconfig1.png]]

=== Change email ===
Use this option to change the email of your account.

[[File:Profileconfig2.png]]

=== Change password ===
Check the [https://www.wordfast.net/wiki/Wordfast_Anywhere_FAQ#How_can_I_change_my_password Wordfast Anywhere FAQ] for more information.

=== Delete account ===
Use this option to remove your account from Wordfast Anywhere.

[[File:Profileconfig4.png]]